Samsung PS50B430P2W (PS50B430P2WXXC ) - Manuel de l'utilisateur 27.81 MB, pdf, Anglais, NÉERLANDAIS, Français, ALLEMAND, Italien, Portugais (européen), SLOVÈNE, Espagnol, TURQUE
Samsung PS50B430P2W (PS50B430P2WXXC ) - Manuel de l'utilisateur 27.81 MB, pdf, Anglais, NÉERLANDAIS, Français, ALLEMAND, Italien, Portugais (européen), SLOVÈNE, Espagnol, TURQUE
Samsung PS50B430P2W (PS50B430P2WXXC ) - Manuel de l'utilisateur 27.81 MB, pdf, Anglais, NÉERLANDAIS, Français, ALLEMAND, Italien, Portugais (européen), SLOVÈNE, Espagnol, TURQUE
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE<br />
If you have any questions or comm<strong>en</strong>ts relating to <strong>Samsung</strong> products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care c<strong>en</strong>tre.<br />
Country Customer Care C<strong>en</strong>tre Web Site<br />
AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG(7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at<br />
BELGIUM 02 201 2418<br />
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)<br />
www.samsung.com/be_fr (Fr<strong>en</strong>ch)<br />
CZECH REPUBLIC<br />
800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Flor<strong>en</strong>c, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8<br />
DENMARK 8 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/dk<br />
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie<br />
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee<br />
FINLAND 30 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi<br />
FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www.samsung.com/fr<br />
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.<strong>de</strong><br />
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu<br />
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/it<br />
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru<br />
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500<br />
LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv<br />
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt<br />
LUXE<strong>MB</strong>URG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu<br />
<strong>NE</strong>THERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl<br />
NORWAY 3 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/no<br />
POLAND<br />
0 801 1SAMSUNG(172678)<br />
022-607-93-33<br />
www.samsung.com/pl<br />
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt<br />
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru<br />
SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk<br />
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es<br />
SWEDEN 075 - SAMSUNG(726 78 64) www.samsung.com/se<br />
Switzerland 0848 - SAMSUNG(7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch<br />
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500<br />
Turkey 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr<br />
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk<br />
Plasma TV<br />
user manual<br />
UKRAI<strong>NE</strong> 8-800-502-0000 www.samsung.ua<br />
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru imagine the possibilities<br />
Thank you for purchasing this <strong>Samsung</strong> product.<br />
To receive more complete service, please register<br />
your product at<br />
www.samsung.com/register<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>l<br />
Serial No.<br />
BN68-02353A-01
User Instructions<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Image ret<strong>en</strong>tion<br />
Do not display a still image (such as on a vi<strong>de</strong>o game or wh<strong>en</strong> hooking up a PC to this PDP) on the plasma monitor panel for more<br />
than 2 hours as it can cause scre<strong>en</strong> image ret<strong>en</strong>tion. This image ret<strong>en</strong>tion is also known as “scre<strong>en</strong> burn”. To avoid such image<br />
ret<strong>en</strong>tion, reduce the <strong>de</strong>gree of brightness and contrast of the scre<strong>en</strong> wh<strong>en</strong> displaying a still image.<br />
• Height<br />
The PDP can normally operate only un<strong>de</strong>r 2000m in height. It might abnormally function at a place over 2000m in height so do not<br />
install and operate there.<br />
• Heat on the top of the PDP TV<br />
The top si<strong>de</strong> of the product may be hot after long period of use as heat dissipates from the panel through the v<strong>en</strong>t hole in the upper<br />
part of the product. This is normal and does not indicate any <strong>de</strong>fect or operation failure of the product. However, childr<strong>en</strong> should be<br />
prev<strong>en</strong>ted from touching the upper part of the product.<br />
• The product is making a ‘cracking’ noise.<br />
A ‘cracking’ noise may occur wh<strong>en</strong> the product contracts or expands due to a change of surrounding <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>t such as<br />
temperature or humidity. This is normal and not a <strong>de</strong>fect of the unit.<br />
• Cell Defects<br />
The PDP uses a panel consisting of 2,360,000(HD-level) to 6,221,000(FHD-level) pixels which require sophisticated technology to<br />
produce. However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the scre<strong>en</strong>. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of<br />
the product.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Avoid operating the TV at temperatures below 5°C(41°F)<br />
A still image displayed too long may cause perman<strong>en</strong>t damage to the PDP Panel.<br />
Watching the PDP TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of bor<strong>de</strong>rs displayed on the left,<br />
right and c<strong>en</strong>tre of the scre<strong>en</strong> caused by the differ<strong>en</strong>ce of light emission on the scre<strong>en</strong>. Playing a DVD or a<br />
game console may cause similar effect to the scre<strong>en</strong>. Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by<br />
the Warranty.<br />
• Afterimage on the Scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Displaying still images from Vi<strong>de</strong>o games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial afterimages.<br />
To prev<strong>en</strong>t this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ wh<strong>en</strong> displaying still images.<br />
•<br />
Warranty<br />
-- Warranty does not cover any damage caused by image ret<strong>en</strong>tion.<br />
-- Burn-in is not covered by the warranty.<br />
• Installation<br />
Be sure to contact an authorized service c<strong>en</strong>tre, wh<strong>en</strong> installing your set in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures,<br />
high humidity, chemical substance and where it operates continually such as the airport, the train station etc. Failure to do so may<br />
cause a serious damage to your set.<br />
Digital TV Notice<br />
1. Functionalities related to Digital TV(DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC)<br />
digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you have access to a compatible DVB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC)<br />
cable-TV service. Please check with your local <strong>de</strong>aler the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal.<br />
2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C<br />
is that for the broadcast transmission of digital TV over cable.<br />
However, some differ<strong>en</strong>tiated features like EPG (Electric Program Gui<strong>de</strong>), VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o on Demand) and so on, are not<br />
inclu<strong>de</strong>d in this specification. So, they cannot be supported at this mom<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards[August,2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital<br />
terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.<br />
4. Some cable-TV provi<strong>de</strong>rs may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and<br />
conditions of their business.<br />
5. Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with all<br />
provi<strong>de</strong>rs.<br />
6. For more information, please contact your local <strong>Samsung</strong> customer care c<strong>en</strong>tre.<br />
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE<br />
If you have any questions or comm<strong>en</strong>ts relating to <strong>Samsung</strong> products, please contact the SAMSUNG<br />
customer care c<strong>en</strong>tre. (See back cover for more informations.)<br />
NN Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provi<strong>de</strong>d for refer<strong>en</strong>ce only and may differ from actual product appearance.<br />
Product <strong>de</strong>sign and specifications may be changed without notice in or<strong>de</strong>r to <strong>en</strong>hance product performance.<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
English - 2
Cont<strong>en</strong>ts<br />
English<br />
Connecting and Preparing Your TV<br />
■ ■ Checking Parts...........................................................................4<br />
■ ■ Using the Stand-Base................................................................4<br />
■ ■ How to assemble the Stand-Base (<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l) .... 4<br />
■ ■ Viewing the Control Panel..........................................................5<br />
■ ■ Viewing the Connection Panel...................................................6<br />
■ ■ Remote Control..........................................................................8<br />
■ ■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.................................. 9<br />
■ ■ Switching On and Off.................................................................9<br />
■ ■ Placing Your Television in Standby Mo<strong>de</strong>.................................. 9<br />
■ ■ Viewing the M<strong>en</strong>us...................................................................10<br />
■ ■ Using the TOOLS Button.........................................................10<br />
■ ■ Viewing the Display..................................................................10<br />
■ ■ Plug & Play Feature................................................................. 11<br />
Channel Control<br />
■ ■ Storing Channels ...................................................................12<br />
■ ■ Managing Channels.................................................................15<br />
Function Description<br />
■ ■ Configuring the Setup M<strong>en</strong>u....................................................22<br />
■ ■ Setting the Time.......................................................................24<br />
■ ■ Source List / Edit Name...........................................................25<br />
■ ■ PC Display ..............................................................................26<br />
■ ■ Supported Program..................................................................27<br />
Recomm<strong>en</strong>dations for Use<br />
■ ■ Teletext Feature.......................................................................28<br />
■ ■ Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)...................................... 29<br />
■ ■ Preparing before installing Wall- Mount on the wall................. 30<br />
■ ■ Securing the TV to the Wall.....................................................30<br />
■ ■ Troubleshooting.......................................................................31<br />
■ ■ Securing the Installation Space...............................................31<br />
■ ■ Specifications...........................................................................32<br />
Picture Control<br />
■ ■ Changing the Picture Settings.................................................17<br />
Sound Control<br />
■ ■ Changing the Sound Setting....................................................20<br />
■ ■ Selecting the Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>.......................................................21<br />
N O T<br />
Symbol Press Note One-Touch Button TOOLS<br />
English - 3
Connecting and Preparing Your TV<br />
Checking Parts<br />
Owner’s Instructions<br />
Remote Control/<br />
AAA Batteries (2ea)<br />
Power Cord<br />
Cloth-Clean<br />
Warranty Card/<br />
Safety Gui<strong>de</strong> Manual<br />
(Not available in all locations)<br />
Screws (4ea) Cover-Bottom Hol<strong>de</strong>r-Ring (4ea)<br />
(Refer to page 30)<br />
Ferrite Core for Power<br />
Cord (1ea)<br />
NN<br />
The ferrite core is used to shield the cable from interfer<strong>en</strong>ce. Wh<strong>en</strong> connecting a cable, op<strong>en</strong> the ferrite<br />
core and clip it around the cable near the plug.<br />
Using the Stand-Base<br />
NN Two or more people should carry the PDP. Never lay the PDP on the floor<br />
because of possible damage to the scre<strong>en</strong>. Always keep the PDP upright.<br />
NN The PDP can rotate 20 <strong>de</strong>grees in right and left directions.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
How to assemble the Stand-Base (<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l)<br />
Using the 4 screws for securing the stand base and the monitor, firmly attach the<br />
monitor to the stand base.<br />
(The exterior of the set may be differ<strong>en</strong>t than the picture.)<br />
In case of installing your TV on the wall, close the<br />
cover (1) on the stand-base connection part using<br />
two screws for hiding.<br />
Warning<br />
Firmly secure the stand to the TV before moving<br />
it, as the stand may fall and could cause serious<br />
injury.<br />
NN Two or more people should carry the TV.<br />
Never lay the TV on the floor because of<br />
possible damage to the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Always store the TV upright.<br />
English - 4
Viewing the Control Panel<br />
NN<br />
The product colour and shape may vary <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l.<br />
Front Panel buttons<br />
Touch each button to<br />
operate.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Toggles betwe<strong>en</strong> all the available input sources<br />
(TV, Ext., AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
NN In the on-scre<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u, use this button as you would use<br />
the ENTER button on the remote control.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Press to see an on-scre<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u of your TV’s features.<br />
3 + –<br />
Press to increase or <strong>de</strong>crease the volume. In the on-scre<strong>en</strong><br />
m<strong>en</strong>u, use the + – buttons as you would use the<br />
◄ and ► buttons on the remote control.<br />
4 CH<br />
Press to change channels. In the on-scre<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u, use the<br />
CH buttons as you would use the ▲ and ▼ buttons on<br />
the remote control.<br />
5 POWER INDICATOR<br />
Lights up wh<strong>en</strong> the power is on.<br />
6 (POWER)<br />
Press to turn the TV on and off.<br />
7 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR<br />
Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.<br />
8 SPEAKERS<br />
English - 5
Viewing the Connection Panel<br />
TV Rear Panel<br />
1<br />
2<br />
8<br />
or<br />
Cable Television<br />
Network<br />
or<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
NN<br />
The product colour and shape may vary <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l.<br />
NN<br />
NN<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong>ever you connect an audio or vi<strong>de</strong>o system to your set, <strong>en</strong>sure that all elem<strong>en</strong>ts are switched off.<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> connecting an external <strong>de</strong>vice, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable.<br />
1 POWER IN<br />
Connect the supplied power cord.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Connector for service.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Audio (AUDIO L/R) and vi<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR) inputs for<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Inputs or outputs for external <strong>de</strong>vices, such as VCR, DVD,<br />
vi<strong>de</strong>o game <strong>de</strong>vice or vi<strong>de</strong>o disc players.<br />
Input/Output Specification<br />
Input<br />
Output<br />
Connector<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Audio(L/R) RGB Vi<strong>de</strong>o + Audio(L/R)<br />
EXT ✔ ✔ ✔<br />
Only TV or DTV output<br />
is available.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Connect to a Digital Audio Compon<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
Connect RCA audio signals from the TV to an external source,<br />
such as Audio equipm<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1, 2 (DVI)<br />
No additional Audio connection is nee<strong>de</strong>d for an HDMI to<br />
HDMI connection.<br />
-- Wh<strong>en</strong> using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use<br />
the HDMI IN 2 (DVI) jack.<br />
NN What is HDMI?<br />
--High Definition Multimedia interface allows the<br />
transmission of high <strong>de</strong>finition digital vi<strong>de</strong>o data and<br />
multiple channels of digital audio.<br />
--The HDMI/DVI terminal supports DVI connection to<br />
an ext<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>d <strong>de</strong>vice with the appropriate cable (not<br />
supplied). The differ<strong>en</strong>ce betwe<strong>en</strong> HDMI and DVI is<br />
that the HDMI <strong>de</strong>vice is smaller in size, has the HDCP<br />
(High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) coding feature<br />
installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
DVI audio outputs for external <strong>de</strong>vices.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
75Ω Coaxial connector for Air/Cable Network.<br />
Input/Output Specification<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t O O O O O O O<br />
English - 6
TV Si<strong>de</strong> Panel<br />
1<br />
2<br />
NN<br />
The product colour and shape may vary <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l.<br />
1 COMMON INTERFACE Slot<br />
Insert CI (Common Interface) card into the slot.<br />
(refer to page 23)<br />
--<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> not inserting CI CARD in some channels,<br />
Scramble Signal is displayed on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
--<br />
The pairing information containing a telephone number,<br />
CI CARD ID, Host ID, and other information will be<br />
displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is<br />
displayed, please contact your service provi<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
--<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> the channel information configuration has finished,<br />
the message Updating Completed is displayed,<br />
indicating that the channel list is now updated.<br />
NN Insert the CI-Card in the direction marked on it.<br />
NN CAM is not supported in some countries and<br />
regions,check with your authorized <strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o and audio inputs for external <strong>de</strong>vices, such as a<br />
camcor<strong>de</strong>r or VCR.<br />
English - 7
Remote Control<br />
You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV.<br />
NN<br />
The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light.<br />
1 POWER button<br />
(turns the TV on and off)<br />
2 Selects the TV mo<strong>de</strong> directly.<br />
3 Number buttons for direct channel<br />
access<br />
4 Press to switch to your Favourite<br />
channels.<br />
5 Temporary sound switch-off<br />
6 Volume increase<br />
Volume <strong>de</strong>crease<br />
7 Available source selection<br />
8 Use to see information on the curr<strong>en</strong>t<br />
broadcast<br />
9 Use to quickly select frequ<strong>en</strong>tly used<br />
functions.<br />
0 Control the cursor in the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
! Used to display Channel Lists on the<br />
scre<strong>en</strong><br />
@ Use these buttons in the Channel list,<br />
etc.<br />
$ Previous channel<br />
% Next channel<br />
Previous channel<br />
^ Displays the main on-scre<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
& Electronic Program Gui<strong>de</strong> (EPG)<br />
display<br />
* Returns to the previous m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
( Exit the on-scre<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
) Turn the audio <strong>de</strong>scription function on<br />
or off.<br />
a Digital subtitle display<br />
Teletext Functions<br />
2 Exit from the teletext display<br />
(<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l)<br />
7 Teletext mo<strong>de</strong> selection (LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Teletext reveal<br />
9 Teletext size<br />
! Teletext store<br />
@ Fastext topic selection<br />
# Teletext display/mix both<br />
teletext information and the normal<br />
broadcast<br />
$ Teletext sub page<br />
% P :Teletext next page<br />
P :Teletext previous page<br />
^ Teletext in<strong>de</strong>x<br />
* Teletext hold<br />
( Teletext cancel<br />
<br />
English - 8
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control<br />
1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure.<br />
2. Install two AAA size batteries.<br />
NN Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ <strong>en</strong>ds of the batteries with the diagram insi<strong>de</strong><br />
the compartm<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
3. Close the cover.<br />
NN Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the<br />
remote control for a long time.<br />
NN<br />
If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following<br />
1. Is the TV power on?<br />
2. Are the plus and minus <strong>en</strong>ds of the batteries reversed?<br />
3. Are the batteries drained?<br />
4. Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?<br />
5. Is there a special fluoresc<strong>en</strong>t light or neon sign nearby?<br />
Switching On and Off<br />
The mains lead is attached to the rear of your set.<br />
1. Plug the mains lead into an appropriate socket.<br />
NN The standby indicator lights up on your set.<br />
2. Press the POWERP button on your set.<br />
NN<br />
You also can press the POWERP button or the TV button on the remote control to turn the TV on.<br />
The programme that you were watching last is reselected automatically.<br />
3. Press the numeric button (0~9) or channel up / down (< / >) button on the remote control or < CH > button on your set.<br />
N N Wh<strong>en</strong> you switch the set on for the very first time, you will be asked to choose language in which the m<strong>en</strong>us are to be displayed.<br />
4. To switch your set off, press the POWERP button again.<br />
Placing Your Television in Standby Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Your set can be placed in standby mo<strong>de</strong> in or<strong>de</strong>r to reduce the power consumption. The standby mo<strong>de</strong> can be useful wh<strong>en</strong> you wish to<br />
interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example).<br />
1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control.<br />
NN<br />
The scre<strong>en</strong> is turned off and a red standby indicator appears on your set.<br />
2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP, numeric buttons (0~9), TV button or channel up / down (< / >) button<br />
again.<br />
NN<br />
Do not leave your set in standby mo<strong>de</strong> for long periods of time (wh<strong>en</strong> you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to unplug<br />
the set from the mains and aerial.<br />
English - 9
Viewing the M<strong>en</strong>us<br />
1. With the power on, press the MENU button. The main m<strong>en</strong>u appears on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
The m<strong>en</strong>u’s left si<strong>de</strong> has icons: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, Support.<br />
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons. Th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button<br />
to access the icon’s sub-m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
3. Press the EXIT button to exit.<br />
NN The on-scre<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>us disappear from the scre<strong>en</strong> after about one minute.<br />
Picture<br />
<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
: Standard<br />
Cell Light : 4<br />
Contrast : 95<br />
Brightness : 45<br />
Sharpness : 50<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
Using the TOOLS Button<br />
You can use the TOOLS button to select your frequ<strong>en</strong>tly used functions quickly and easily. The Tools m<strong>en</strong>u changes <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on<br />
which external input mo<strong>de</strong> you are viewing.<br />
<br />
1. Press the TOOLS button. The Tools m<strong>en</strong>u will appear.<br />
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a m<strong>en</strong>u, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
3. Press the ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE buttons to display, change, or use the selected<br />
items. For a more <strong>de</strong>tailed <strong>de</strong>scription of each function, refer to the corresponding page.<br />
•• Picture Mo<strong>de</strong>, see page 17<br />
•• Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>, see page 20<br />
•• Sleep Timer, see page 24<br />
•• Energy Saving, see page 23<br />
•• Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), see page 15<br />
Tools<br />
Picture Mo<strong>de</strong> ◄ Standard ►<br />
Sound Mo<strong>de</strong> : Custom<br />
Sleep Timer : Off<br />
Energy Saving : Off<br />
Add to Favourite<br />
U Move E Enter e Exit<br />
Viewing the Display<br />
The display i<strong>de</strong>ntifies the curr<strong>en</strong>t channel and the status of certain audio-vi<strong>de</strong>o settings.<br />
OO<br />
Press the INFO button to viewing the information.<br />
Press the INFO button on the remote control. The TV will display the channel, the type of<br />
sound, and the status of certain picture and sound settings.<br />
•• ▲, ▼: You can view other channel’s information. If you want to move to the curr<strong>en</strong>tly<br />
selected channel, press ENTERE button.<br />
•• ◄, ►: You can view the <strong>de</strong>sired program’s information at the curr<strong>en</strong>t channel.<br />
NN<br />
Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the display<br />
disappears automatically.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
English - 10
Plug & Play Feature<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequ<strong>en</strong>tly.<br />
NN The Scre<strong>en</strong> Saver is activated if there is no remote control key input for longer than 1 minute while Plug & Play is running.<br />
NN The Scre<strong>en</strong> Saver is activated if there is no operating signal for longer than 15 minutes.<br />
1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
Plug & Play<br />
m<strong>en</strong>u is automatically displayed. Select the appropriate language by pressing the<br />
▲<br />
▲ or ▼ button.<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language. Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice.<br />
English<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, th<strong>en</strong> the ENTERE<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
button.<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
NN<br />
We recomm<strong>en</strong>d setting the TV to Home Use mo<strong>de</strong> for the best picture in your<br />
home <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
N N Store Demo mo<strong>de</strong> is only int<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>d for use in retail <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>ts.<br />
NN<br />
If the unit is acci<strong>de</strong>ntally set to Store Demo mo<strong>de</strong> and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the Volume button on<br />
the TV. Wh<strong>en</strong> the volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds.<br />
3. Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm<br />
your choice.<br />
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to memorize the channels of the selected connection, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
••<br />
Air: Air ant<strong>en</strong>na signal.<br />
••<br />
Cable: Cable ant<strong>en</strong>na signal.<br />
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the channel source to memorize. Press the ENTERE button to select Start.<br />
••<br />
Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.<br />
••<br />
Digital: Digital channels.<br />
••<br />
Analogue: Analogue channels.<br />
NN For more <strong>de</strong>tailed <strong>de</strong>scription of selecting Cable mo<strong>de</strong>,, refer to page 12.<br />
NN<br />
The channel search will start and <strong>en</strong>d automatically.<br />
NN<br />
Press the ENTERE button at any time to interrupt the memorization process.<br />
NN<br />
After all the available channels are stored, the message Set the Clock Mo<strong>de</strong>. is displayed.<br />
6. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, th<strong>en</strong> Press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
If you select Manual, Set curr<strong>en</strong>t date and time is displayed. (refer to page 24)<br />
N N If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. If not, see page 24 to set the clock.<br />
7. The brief instruction on How to get the best performance from your new HDTV. is displayed. Press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
This m<strong>en</strong>u is available HD Connection Gui<strong>de</strong> in the Support m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
8. The message Enjoy your TV. is displayed. Wh<strong>en</strong> you have finished, press the ENTERE button.<br />
If you want to reset this feature...<br />
1. Press the MENU button to display the m<strong>en</strong>u. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup,<br />
th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play.<br />
3. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The <strong>de</strong>fault PIN number of a new TV set is<br />
‘0-0-0-0’.<br />
NN<br />
If you want to change PIN number, refer to 22 page.<br />
NN<br />
The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language<br />
Time<br />
Broadcast<br />
Security<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
: English<br />
►<br />
English - 11
Channel Control<br />
Storing Channels<br />
❑❑<br />
Country<br />
• Digital Channel: You can change the country for digital channels.<br />
• Analogue Channel: You can change the country for analogue channels.<br />
NN<br />
The PIN number input scre<strong>en</strong> appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.<br />
Channel<br />
Country<br />
Auto Store<br />
Manual Store<br />
►<br />
❑❑ Auto Store<br />
Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations (and availability <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ds on your<br />
country) and stores them in the TV's memory.<br />
Cable Search Options<br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong> : Now/Next<br />
You can memorize the channels of the selected connection.<br />
••<br />
Air: Air ant<strong>en</strong>na signal.<br />
••<br />
Cable: Cable ant<strong>en</strong>na signal.<br />
NN Wh<strong>en</strong> selecting Cable,<br />
••<br />
Search Mo<strong>de</strong>: Displays the search mo<strong>de</strong>. (Quick)<br />
--Network ID: Displays the network i<strong>de</strong>ntification co<strong>de</strong>.<br />
--Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy: Displays the frequ<strong>en</strong>cy for the channel.<br />
--Modulation: Displays available modulation values.<br />
--Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.<br />
••<br />
Search Mo<strong>de</strong>: Displays the search mo<strong>de</strong>. (Full, Network)<br />
--Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy<br />
(Start ~ Stop) : Displays the frequ<strong>en</strong>cy for the channel.<br />
--Modulation: Displays available modulation values.<br />
--Symbol Rate : Displays available symbol rates.<br />
You can memorize the Channel source<br />
••<br />
Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.<br />
••<br />
Digital: Digital channels.<br />
••<br />
Analogue: Analogue channels.<br />
NN<br />
If you want to stop Auto Store, press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
The Stop Auto Store? message will be displayed.<br />
NN<br />
Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.<br />
Continued...<br />
English - 12
❑❑<br />
Manual Store<br />
Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s memory.<br />
• Digital Channel (DTV)<br />
Manual store for digital channels.<br />
NN Digital Channel is only available in DTV mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.<br />
••<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy: Set the frequ<strong>en</strong>cy using the number buttons.<br />
••<br />
Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.<br />
NN Wh<strong>en</strong> it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list.<br />
•<br />
Analogue Channel<br />
Manual store for analogue channel.<br />
••<br />
Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9)<br />
buttons.<br />
••<br />
Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.<br />
••<br />
Sound System → BG / L / I / DK: Sets the sound system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.<br />
••<br />
Channel (Wh<strong>en</strong> you know the number of the channel to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or<br />
S (Cable channel). Press the ► button, th<strong>en</strong> press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the required number.<br />
NN<br />
You can also select the channel number directly by pressing the number ( 0~9) buttons.<br />
NN If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required.<br />
••<br />
Search (Wh<strong>en</strong> you do not know the channel numbers): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner scans the<br />
frequ<strong>en</strong>cy range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Store (Wh<strong>en</strong> you store the channel and associated programme number): Set to OK by pressing the ENTERE button.<br />
NN Channel mo<strong>de</strong><br />
--C<br />
(Air channel mo<strong>de</strong>): You can select a channel by <strong>en</strong>tering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this<br />
mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
--S<br />
(Cable channel mo<strong>de</strong>): You can select a channel by <strong>en</strong>tering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
❑❑ Cable Search Options (Cable)<br />
You can add directly the channel search range in the network search mo<strong>de</strong>.(Dep<strong>en</strong>ding<br />
on the each country)<br />
••<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Start ~ Stop): Displays the frequ<strong>en</strong>cy for the channel.<br />
••<br />
Modulation: Displays available modulation values.<br />
••<br />
Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.<br />
NN<br />
Set the Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Start~Stop) and Symbol Rate using the number (0~9) buttons.<br />
❑❑<br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong> / Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
The EPG (Electronic Programme Gui<strong>de</strong>) information is provi<strong>de</strong>d by the broadcasters. Programme <strong>en</strong>tries may appear blank or out<br />
of date as a result of the information broadcast on a giv<strong>en</strong> channel. The display will dynamically update as soon as new information<br />
becomes available.<br />
• Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong>: For the six channels indicated in the left-hand column, displays the Curr<strong>en</strong>t programme and the Next<br />
programme information.<br />
• Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: Displays the programme information as time or<strong>de</strong>red One hour segm<strong>en</strong>ts. One hours of programme information<br />
is displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time.<br />
English - 13<br />
Continued...
❑❑ Default Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
• Now/Next / Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: You can <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong> whether to display either the Now/Next or<br />
the Full Gui<strong>de</strong> wh<strong>en</strong> the GUIDE button on the remote control is pressed.<br />
Channel<br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong> : Now/Next ►<br />
Channel List<br />
Channel Mo<strong>de</strong> : Ad<strong>de</strong>d Ch.<br />
Fine Tune<br />
OO<br />
You can also display the gui<strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u simply by pressing the GUIDE button.<br />
Using the Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong> / Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Now<br />
Next<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Watch Information Page Full Gui<strong>de</strong> Exit<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
f tn<br />
900 Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits!<br />
Watch Information Page Now/Next Exit<br />
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►<br />
(ENTER)<br />
RED<br />
GREEN<br />
YELLOW<br />
BLUE<br />
INFO<br />
Select a programme by pressing the ▲/▼/◄/► button.<br />
If the next progrmme is selected, it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed. If the ENTERE button is<br />
pressed again, press the ▲/▼/◄/► button to select Cancel Schedules, the scheduling is canceled with the<br />
clock icon gone.<br />
For <strong>de</strong>tails about scheduling programmes, refer to the section.<br />
Toggle betwe<strong>en</strong> the Now/Next or Full Gui<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: Scroll backwards quickly (-24 hours).<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: Scroll forwards quickly (+24 hours).<br />
Exit the gui<strong>de</strong>.<br />
INFO button for the <strong>de</strong>tailed information. Channel Number, Running Time, Status Bar, Par<strong>en</strong>tal Level, Vi<strong>de</strong>o<br />
Quality Information (HD/SD), Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>s, Subtitle or Teletext, languages of Subtitle or Teletext and brief<br />
summary of the highlighted programme are inclu<strong>de</strong>d on the <strong>de</strong>tailed information. “…” will be appeared if the<br />
summary is long.<br />
❑❑<br />
❑❑<br />
Channel List<br />
For the <strong>de</strong>tailed procedures on using the Channel List, refer to the <strong>de</strong>scriptions on pages 15~16.<br />
Channel Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> the P button is pressed, Channels will be switched within the selected channel list.<br />
• Ad<strong>de</strong>d Ch. : Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list.<br />
• Favourite Ch. : Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list.<br />
❑ ❑ Fine Tune (only analogue channels)<br />
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store<br />
operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may have to fine tune the channel manually.<br />
N N Fine tuned channels that have be<strong>en</strong> saved are marked with an asterisk * on the right-hand si<strong>de</strong> of the channel number in the<br />
channel banner.<br />
NN If you do not store the fine-tuned channel in memory, adjustm<strong>en</strong>ts are not saved.<br />
NN<br />
To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the ▼ button and th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
English - 14
Managing Channels<br />
<br />
Using this m<strong>en</strong>u, you can Add / Delete or set Favourite channels and use the programme<br />
gui<strong>de</strong> for digital broadcasts.<br />
NN<br />
Select a channel in the All Channels, Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels, Favourites, or Programmed<br />
scre<strong>en</strong> by pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons, and pressing the ENTERE button. Th<strong>en</strong> you<br />
can watch the selected channel.<br />
••<br />
All Channels: Shows all curr<strong>en</strong>tly available channels.<br />
••<br />
Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels: Shows all ad<strong>de</strong>d channels.<br />
••<br />
Favourites: Shows all favourite channels.<br />
••<br />
Programmed: Shows all curr<strong>en</strong>t reserved programmes.<br />
NN Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List<br />
--<br />
Red ( Channel Type): Toggle betwe<strong>en</strong> your TV, Radio, Data/Other and All.<br />
--<br />
Gre<strong>en</strong> (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.<br />
--<br />
Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists.<br />
--<br />
T TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Delete (or Add), Add to Favourite (or Delete from<br />
Favourite), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel Number, Sort,<br />
Lock (or Unlock), Select All (or Deselect All), or Auto Store m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
(The Options m<strong>en</strong>us may differ <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the situation.)<br />
NN<br />
Channel Status Display Icons<br />
A An Analogue channel. c A channel selected by pressing the yellow button.<br />
♥ A channel set as a Favourite. ( A programme curr<strong>en</strong>tly being broadcast.<br />
\ A locked channel. ) A reserved programme<br />
Channel<br />
Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Channel List<br />
Channel Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Fine Tune<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
: Now/Next<br />
: Ad<strong>de</strong>d Ch.<br />
All Channel Type Zoom Select Tools<br />
OO<br />
Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel lists.<br />
❑ ❑<br />
NN<br />
NN<br />
Channel List Tools M<strong>en</strong>u (in All Channels / Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels / Favourites)<br />
Press the TOOLS button to use the tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Option m<strong>en</strong>u items may differ <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the channel status.<br />
• Add / Delete<br />
You can <strong>de</strong>lete or add a channel to display the channels you want.<br />
NN<br />
All <strong>de</strong>leted channels will be shown on All Channels m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
NN A gray-coloured channel indicates the channel has be<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>leted.<br />
NN<br />
The Add m<strong>en</strong>u only appears for <strong>de</strong>leted channels.<br />
NN<br />
You can also <strong>de</strong>lete a channel to the Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels or Favourite m<strong>en</strong>u in the<br />
same manner.<br />
• Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite<br />
You can set channels you watch frequ<strong>en</strong>tly as favourites.<br />
All Channels<br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Delete<br />
Add to Favourite<br />
Timer Viewing<br />
Edit Channel Name<br />
Sort<br />
Lock<br />
▼<br />
All Channel Type Zoom Select Tools<br />
TT<br />
Press the TOOLS button to display Tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
You can also add the favourite channel by selecting Tools → Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite).<br />
NN The “♥” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favourite.<br />
NN<br />
All favourite channels will be shown on Favourite m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
OO<br />
To select the Favourite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the<br />
remote control.<br />
Continued...<br />
English - 15
• Timer Viewing<br />
If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List;<br />
ev<strong>en</strong> wh<strong>en</strong> you are watching another channel. To reserve a programme set the curr<strong>en</strong>t time first. (See page 24)<br />
NN Only memorized channels can be reserved.<br />
NN You can set the channel, date, or start time directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.<br />
NN<br />
Reserving a programme will be shown on Programmed m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
N N Digital Programme Gui<strong>de</strong> and Viewing Reservation<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Programme Gui<strong>de</strong> for the channel appears.<br />
You can reserve a programme according to the procedures <strong>de</strong>scribed above.<br />
• Edit Channel Name (only analogue channel)<br />
Channels can labeled so that their call letters appear wh<strong>en</strong>ever the channel is selected.<br />
NN The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labeled.<br />
• Edit Channel Number (only digital channel)<br />
You can also edit the channel number by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.<br />
• Sort (only analogue channel)<br />
This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using<br />
the auto store.<br />
• Lock / Unlock<br />
You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. This function is available only wh<strong>en</strong> the Child Lock is<br />
set to on. (see page 22)<br />
NN The PIN number input scre<strong>en</strong> appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.<br />
NN<br />
The <strong>de</strong>fault PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
N N The “\” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked.<br />
• Select All / Deselect All<br />
••<br />
Select All: You can select all the channels in the channel list.<br />
••<br />
Deselect All: You can <strong>de</strong>select all the selected channels in the channel list.<br />
NN You can perform the add / <strong>de</strong>lete, add to Favourites / <strong>de</strong>lete from Favourites, or lock / unlock function for multiple channels at<br />
the same time. Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time.<br />
NN<br />
The “ c” mark appears to the left of the selected channels.<br />
NN<br />
You can only select Deselect All wh<strong>en</strong> there is a selected channel.<br />
• Auto Store<br />
NN For further <strong>de</strong>tails on setting up options, refer to page 12.<br />
NN<br />
If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.<br />
❑ ❑ Channel List Tools M<strong>en</strong>u (in Programmed)<br />
You can view, modify or <strong>de</strong>lete a reservation.<br />
NN<br />
Press the TOOLS button to use the tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
••<br />
Change Info: Select to change a viewing reservation.<br />
••<br />
Cancel Schedules: Select to cancel a viewing reservation.<br />
••<br />
Information: Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the<br />
reservation information.)<br />
••<br />
Select All / Deselect All : You can select (or <strong>de</strong>select) all channels in the channel list.<br />
Programmed<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 TV1 Change Quincy, Info M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Cancel Schedules<br />
TV3 The Equalizer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Information<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Select All<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
All Zoom Select Tools Information<br />
English - 16
Picture Control<br />
Changing the Picture Settings<br />
❑❑ Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirem<strong>en</strong>ts.<br />
••<br />
Dynamic: Selects a high-<strong>de</strong>finition picture for bright <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>ts.<br />
••<br />
Standard: Selects the optimal picture display for normal <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>ts.<br />
••<br />
Movie: Selects a comfortable picture display for dark <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>ts.<br />
TT<br />
Press the TOOLS button to display Tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
You can also set the picture mo<strong>de</strong> by selecting Tools → Picture Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
❑ ❑ Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)<br />
Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality.<br />
••<br />
Cell Light: Adjusts the pixel brightness.<br />
••<br />
Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level.<br />
••<br />
Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level.<br />
••<br />
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness.<br />
••<br />
Colour: Adjusts the colour saturation of the picture using the bar on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Tint (G/R): The closer to Red 100, the more saturated the red colour becomes.<br />
NN Select a picture mo<strong>de</strong> to be adjusted first. The adjusted values are saved for each picture mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
NN<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> you make changes to Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R), the OSD will be adjusted<br />
accordingly.<br />
NN In Analogue TV, Ext., AV mo<strong>de</strong>s of the PAL system, you cannot use the Tint Function.<br />
NN Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external <strong>de</strong>vice you have connected to an input of the TV.<br />
NN The <strong>en</strong>ergy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced, and th<strong>en</strong> this<br />
will reduce the overall running cost.<br />
Picture<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Standard ►<br />
Cell Light : 4<br />
Contrast : 95<br />
Brightness : 45<br />
Sharpness : 50<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
❑❑ Advanced Settings<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>’s new TVs allow you to make ev<strong>en</strong> more precise picture settings than<br />
previous mo<strong>de</strong>ls. See below to adjust <strong>de</strong>tailed picture settings.<br />
N N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest<br />
You can select the black level on the scre<strong>en</strong> to adjust the scre<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>pth.<br />
Picture<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Picture Options<br />
Picture Reset<br />
►<br />
• Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High<br />
You can adjust the scre<strong>en</strong> contrast so that the optimal contrast is provi<strong>de</strong>d.<br />
•<br />
Gamma<br />
You can adjust the primary colour (Red, Gre<strong>en</strong>, Blue) Int<strong>en</strong>sity.<br />
• Colour Space<br />
Colour Space is a colour matrix composed of red, gre<strong>en</strong> and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour Space to experi<strong>en</strong>ce the<br />
most natural colour.<br />
••<br />
Auto: Automatically sets the colour range <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the input vi<strong>de</strong>o source.<br />
••<br />
Native: Sets a colour range wi<strong>de</strong>r than that of the input vi<strong>de</strong>o source.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
White Balance<br />
You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours.<br />
••<br />
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Changing the adjustm<strong>en</strong>t value will refresh the adjusted scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Reset: Resets the <strong>de</strong>fault white balance.<br />
Flesh Tone<br />
You can emphasize the pink flesh tone in the picture.<br />
NN Changing the adjustm<strong>en</strong>t value will refresh the adjusted scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Edge Enhancem<strong>en</strong>t → Off / On<br />
You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture.<br />
Continued...<br />
English - 17
❑❑<br />
Picture Options<br />
• Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2<br />
You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes.<br />
NN<br />
The adjusted values are stored according to the selected Picture mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N N Warm1 or Warm2 is only activated wh<strong>en</strong> the picture mo<strong>de</strong> is Movie.<br />
Picture<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Picture Options<br />
Picture Reset<br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
• Size<br />
You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirem<strong>en</strong>ts.<br />
• <br />
••<br />
Auto Wi<strong>de</strong>: Sets the picture in Auto Wi<strong>de</strong> format.<br />
••<br />
16:9: Sets the picture to the 16:9 aspect ratio.<br />
••<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Select this m<strong>en</strong>u to view 4:3 aspect ratio pictures over a 16:9 aspect ratio TV by stretching the 4:3 picture<br />
vertically.<br />
••<br />
Zoom: Stretches the 16:9 aspect ratio picture vertical<br />
••<br />
4:3: Sets the picture to the 4:3 aspect ratio.<br />
••<br />
Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit: Displays the full native HD signal that cannot be viewed using a normal TV.<br />
NN The picture size options may vary <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the input source.<br />
NN The items available may differ <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the selected mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
NN Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external <strong>de</strong>vice you have connected to an input of the TV.<br />
NN Temporary image ret<strong>en</strong>tion may occur wh<strong>en</strong> viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours.<br />
N N Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Press the ► button to select Position, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the scre<strong>en</strong> up / down. Th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
N N Zoom: Press the ► button to select Position, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture<br />
up and down. Th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to select Size, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
After selecting Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Compon<strong>en</strong>t (1080i / 1080p) mo<strong>de</strong>: Select Position by pressing<br />
the ◄ or ►button. Use the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture.<br />
N N Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button. You can initialize the setting.<br />
NN<br />
If you use the Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan<br />
function.<br />
Scre<strong>en</strong> Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> setting the picture size to Auto Wi<strong>de</strong> in a 16:9 wi<strong>de</strong> TV, you can <strong>de</strong>termine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS<br />
(Wi<strong>de</strong> Scre<strong>en</strong> Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires differ<strong>en</strong>t picture size so this function is<br />
int<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>d for users to select it.<br />
••<br />
16:9: Sets the picture to the 16:9 aspect ratio.<br />
••<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Select this m<strong>en</strong>u to view 4:3 aspect ratio pictures over a 16:9 aspect ratio TV by stretching the 4:3 picture<br />
vertically.<br />
••<br />
Zoom: Stretches the 16:9 aspect ratio picture vertically.<br />
••<br />
4:3: Selects the scre<strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> as 4:3<br />
NN<br />
This function is available in Auto Wi<strong>de</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
NN<br />
This function is not available in, Compon<strong>en</strong>t or HDMI mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto<br />
If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static<br />
and ghosting that may appear on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
NN Wh<strong>en</strong> the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed.<br />
• HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low<br />
You can directly select the black level on the scre<strong>en</strong> to adjust the scre<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>pth.<br />
NN This function is active only wh<strong>en</strong> the external input connects to HDMI (RGB signals).<br />
English - 18<br />
Continued...
•<br />
Film Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
You can optimize the picture mo<strong>de</strong> for watching movies.<br />
••<br />
Off : Basic vi<strong>de</strong>o image processing applied and No auto-<strong>de</strong>tection for film-based programs.<br />
••<br />
Auto: Automatically adjusts for the best image quality betwe<strong>en</strong> film and vi<strong>de</strong>o programs.<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection<br />
Configures the Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection Options to prev<strong>en</strong>t and reduce pixel burn.<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> an image remains in one position too long, it may cause a perman<strong>en</strong>t burn on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Pixel Shift: To reduce the possibility of scre<strong>en</strong> burn, this unit is equipped with scre<strong>en</strong> burn prev<strong>en</strong>tion technology. This<br />
technology <strong>en</strong>ables you to set picture movem<strong>en</strong>t up/down (Vertical) and si<strong>de</strong> to si<strong>de</strong> (Horizontal). The Time setting allows you to<br />
program the time betwe<strong>en</strong> movem<strong>en</strong>t of the picture in minutes.<br />
NN<br />
Set Pixel Shift to On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button.<br />
NN<br />
Available options: Horizontal, Vertical, Time.<br />
NN Optimum condition for pixel shift<br />
Item<br />
TV / Ext / AV/ / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Horizontal 0~4 2<br />
Vertical 0~4 2<br />
Time (minute) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
NN The Pixel Shift value may differ <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the monitor size (inches) and mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
NN<br />
This function is not available in the Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Scrolling: This function helps remove after images on the scre<strong>en</strong> by moving all the pixels on the PDP according to a pattern<br />
Use this function wh<strong>en</strong> there are remaining after images or symbols on the scre<strong>en</strong> especially wh<strong>en</strong> you displayed a still image<br />
on the scre<strong>en</strong> for a long time.<br />
••<br />
Si<strong>de</strong> Grey: Wh<strong>en</strong> you watch TV with the scre<strong>en</strong> ratio of 4:3, the scre<strong>en</strong> is prev<strong>en</strong>ted from any damage by adjusting the white<br />
balance on both extreme left and right si<strong>de</strong>s.<br />
--Dark: Wh<strong>en</strong> you set the scre<strong>en</strong> ratio to 4:3, it dark<strong>en</strong>s the left and right si<strong>de</strong>s.<br />
--Light: Wh<strong>en</strong> you set the scre<strong>en</strong> ratio to 4:3, it bright<strong>en</strong>s the left and right si<strong>de</strong>s.<br />
❑ ❑<br />
Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mo<strong>de</strong> / Cancel<br />
Resets all picture settings to the <strong>de</strong>fault values.<br />
NN Select a picture mo<strong>de</strong> to be reset. The reset is performed for each picture mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Picture<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Picture Options<br />
Picture Reset<br />
►<br />
English - 19
Sound Control<br />
Changing the Sound Setting<br />
❑ ❑<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom<br />
You can select the type of special sound effect to be used wh<strong>en</strong> watching a giv<strong>en</strong><br />
broadcast.<br />
TT<br />
Press the TOOLS button to display Tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
You can also configure the sound mo<strong>de</strong> by selecting Tools → Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
❑❑ Equalizer<br />
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal prefer<strong>en</strong>ces.<br />
••<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>: You can select a sound mo<strong>de</strong> to suit your personal prefer<strong>en</strong>ces.<br />
••<br />
Balance: Controls the balance betwe<strong>en</strong> the right and left speakers.<br />
••<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustm<strong>en</strong>t): To adjust the level of differ<strong>en</strong>t bandwidth frequ<strong>en</strong>cies<br />
••<br />
Reset: Resets the equalizer settings to the <strong>de</strong>fault values.<br />
❑ ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On<br />
SRS TruSurround HD is the combined technology of TruSurround and FOCUS, TruBass.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD is down mixing technology that makes the Surround Sound effect of virtual 5.1 channel via two speakers.<br />
This function provi<strong>de</strong> not only rich <strong>de</strong>ep bass at a low-pitched sound but also improve the resolution at a high-pitched sound.<br />
NN<br />
If the sound is abnormal while TV is playing music, please adjust the equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On).<br />
Sound<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Custom ►<br />
Equalizer<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Off<br />
Audio Language : ----<br />
Audio Format : ----<br />
Audio Description<br />
Auto Volume : Off<br />
<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS and the symbol are tra<strong>de</strong>marks of SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
TruSurround HD technology is incorporated un<strong>de</strong>r lic<strong>en</strong>se from SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑ ❑ Audio Language (only digital channel)<br />
You can change the <strong>de</strong>fault value for audio languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream.<br />
NN You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast.<br />
❑ ❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (only digital channel)<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the <strong>de</strong>coding speed<br />
differ<strong>en</strong>ce betwe<strong>en</strong> the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function.<br />
NN You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast.<br />
Manufactured un<strong>de</strong>r lic<strong>en</strong>se from Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby and the double-D symbol are tra<strong>de</strong>marks of Dolby Laboratories.<br />
❑ ❑ Audio Description (only digital channel)<br />
This is an auxiliary audio function that provi<strong>de</strong>s an additional audio track for visually chall<strong>en</strong>ged persons. This function handles the<br />
Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), wh<strong>en</strong> it is s<strong>en</strong>t along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the<br />
Audio Description On or Off and control the volume.<br />
OO<br />
You can select these options simply by pressing the AD button on the remote<br />
control.<br />
• Audio Description → Off / On<br />
Turn the audio <strong>de</strong>scription function on or off.<br />
•<br />
Volume<br />
You can adjust the audio <strong>de</strong>scription volume.<br />
N N Volume is active wh<strong>en</strong> Audio Description is set to On.<br />
Continued...<br />
English - 20
❑ ❑<br />
Auto Volume → Off / On<br />
Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is<br />
changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the <strong>de</strong>sired channel by lowering the sound output wh<strong>en</strong> the<br />
modulation signal is high or by r<strong>ais</strong>ing the sound output wh<strong>en</strong> the modulation signal is low.<br />
❑ ❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker<br />
If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier.<br />
N N The – +, M MUTE buttons do not operate wh<strong>en</strong> the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.<br />
NN<br />
If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select m<strong>en</strong>u, the sound settings will be limited.<br />
TV's Internal Speakers<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Audio Out (Optical, L / R Out) to Sound System<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
TV Speaker Speaker Output Sound Output<br />
External Speaker Mute Sound Output<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o No Signal Mute Mute<br />
❑❑<br />
Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mo<strong>de</strong> / Cancel<br />
You can restore the Sound settings to the factory <strong>de</strong>faults.<br />
Sound<br />
Auto Volume<br />
Speaker Select<br />
Sound Reset<br />
: Off<br />
: TV Speaker<br />
►<br />
Selecting the Sound Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> you set to Dual l ll, the curr<strong>en</strong>t sound mo<strong>de</strong> is displayed on the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Type of broadcast<br />
Regular broadcast<br />
(Standard audio)<br />
On-scre<strong>en</strong> indication<br />
Mono (Normal use)<br />
Regular + NICAM Mono NICAM<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM-Stereo<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM Dual-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
A2<br />
Stereo<br />
Regular broadcast<br />
(Standard audio)<br />
Mono (Normal use)<br />
Bilingual or DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Forced mono)<br />
NN<br />
NN<br />
NN<br />
If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, th<strong>en</strong> switch to the mono.<br />
This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is <strong>de</strong>activated in mono sound signal.<br />
This function is only available in TV mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
English - 21
Function Description<br />
Configuring the Setup M<strong>en</strong>u<br />
❑❑ M<strong>en</strong>u Language<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
❑❑<br />
Broadcast<br />
• Subtitle<br />
You can activate and <strong>de</strong>activate the subtitles. Use this m<strong>en</strong>u to set the Subtitle Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Normal un<strong>de</strong>r the m<strong>en</strong>u is the basic subtitle and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a<br />
hearing-impaired person.<br />
••<br />
Subtitle → Off / On: Switches subtitles off or on.<br />
••<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> → Normal / Hard of hearing: Sets the subtitle mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
••<br />
Subtitle Language: Set the subtitle language.<br />
NN<br />
If the programme you are watching does not support the Hard of hearing function,<br />
Normal automatically activates ev<strong>en</strong> though Hard of hearing mo<strong>de</strong> is selected.<br />
NN English is the <strong>de</strong>fault in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the<br />
broadcast.<br />
OO<br />
You can select these options simply by pressing the SUBT. button on the remote<br />
control.<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language : English ►<br />
Time<br />
Broadcast<br />
Security<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
• Digital Text → Disable / Enable<br />
If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is <strong>en</strong>abled.<br />
N N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
An International standard for data <strong>en</strong>coding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the<br />
MPEG system which inclu<strong>de</strong>s<br />
data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and vi<strong>de</strong>o files as well as multimedia data.<br />
MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o-On-Demand), ITV<br />
(Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education,<br />
tele-confer<strong>en</strong>cing, digital libraries and network games.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Teletext Language<br />
You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language type.<br />
NN English is the <strong>de</strong>fault in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.<br />
Prefer<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
•• Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /<br />
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language<br />
Using this feature, users can select one of the languages. The language selected here is the <strong>de</strong>fault wh<strong>en</strong> the user selects<br />
a channel. If you change the language setting, the Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the<br />
Language m<strong>en</strong>u are automatically changed to the selected language. The Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext<br />
Language of the Language m<strong>en</strong>u show a list of languages supported by the curr<strong>en</strong>t channel and the selection is highlighted. If<br />
you change this language setting, the new selection is only valid for the curr<strong>en</strong>t channel. The changed setting does not change<br />
the setting of the Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language, or the Primary Teletext Language of the Prefer<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
• Common Interface<br />
•• Installing the CI Card<br />
1. Purchase the CI CAM module by visiting your nearest <strong>de</strong>aler or by phone.<br />
2. Insert the CI CARD into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits.<br />
3. Insert the CAM with the CI CARD installed into the common interface slot.<br />
NN Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the <strong>en</strong>d so that it is parallel<br />
with the slot.<br />
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel.<br />
•• CI M<strong>en</strong>u<br />
This <strong>en</strong>ables the user to select from the CAM-provi<strong>de</strong>d m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Select the CI M<strong>en</strong>u based on the m<strong>en</strong>u PC Card.<br />
•• Application Info.<br />
This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI slot and displays it.<br />
The Application Info inserting is about the CI CARD. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is ON or OFF.<br />
NN CAM is not supported in some countries and regions,check with your authorized <strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
English - 22<br />
Continued...
❑❑<br />
Security<br />
• Child Lock → Off / On<br />
This feature allows you to prev<strong>en</strong>t unauthorized users, such as childr<strong>en</strong>, from watching unsuitable programmes by muting out vi<strong>de</strong>o<br />
and audio.<br />
NN Before the setup scre<strong>en</strong> appears, the PIN number input scre<strong>en</strong> appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.<br />
N N The <strong>de</strong>fault PIN number of a new TV set is '0-0-0-0'. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
N N You can lock some channels in Channel List. (refer to page 15)<br />
N N Child Lock is available only in TV mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Par<strong>en</strong>tal Lock<br />
This feature allows you to prev<strong>en</strong>t unauthorized users, such as childr<strong>en</strong>, from watching unsuitable programmes by a 4-digit PIN<br />
(Personal I<strong>de</strong>ntification Number) co<strong>de</strong> that is <strong>de</strong>fined by the user.<br />
NN Before the setup scre<strong>en</strong> appears, the PIN number input scre<strong>en</strong> appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.<br />
NN<br />
The <strong>de</strong>fault PIN number of a new TV set is '0-0-0-0'. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
N N Wh<strong>en</strong> the par<strong>en</strong>tal ratings are set, the \ symbol is displayed.<br />
N N Allow All: Press to unlock all TV ratings.<br />
Block All: Press to lock all TV ratings<br />
• Change PIN<br />
You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV.<br />
NN Before the setup scre<strong>en</strong> appears, the PIN number input scre<strong>en</strong> appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.<br />
N N The <strong>de</strong>fault PIN number of a new TV set is '0-0-0-0'.<br />
N N If you forget the PIN co<strong>de</strong>, press the remote control buttons in the following sequ<strong>en</strong>ce, which resets the PIN to '0-0-0-0':<br />
POWER (Off), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (On).<br />
❑❑ G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
• Game Mo<strong>de</strong> → Off / On<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> connecting to a game console such as PlayStationTM or XboxTM, you can <strong>en</strong>joy a more realistic gaming experi<strong>en</strong>ce by<br />
selecting the game m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
•• Wh<strong>en</strong> the Game Mo<strong>de</strong> is On<br />
--<br />
Picture Mo<strong>de</strong> is automatically changed to Standard and users cannot change the mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
--<br />
Sound Mo<strong>de</strong> is automatically changed to Custom and users cannot change the mo<strong>de</strong>. Adjust the sound using the equalizer.<br />
--<br />
The Reset in the Sound m<strong>en</strong>u is activated. Reset function initializes the Equalizer settings to the factory <strong>de</strong>fault setting.<br />
N N Game Mo<strong>de</strong> is not available in regular TV mo<strong>de</strong> or Game Mo<strong>de</strong> set to Off.<br />
NN<br />
If the picture is poor wh<strong>en</strong> external <strong>de</strong>vice is connected to TV, check if Game Mo<strong>de</strong> is On.<br />
NN<br />
If you display the TV m<strong>en</strong>u in Game mo<strong>de</strong>, the scre<strong>en</strong> shakes slightly.<br />
N N The mark ( ) appears on the scre<strong>en</strong> which means that Game Mo<strong>de</strong> is on with the selected source.<br />
NN This function supports only game function.<br />
N N Game mo<strong>de</strong> is not available in PC mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off<br />
This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in or<strong>de</strong>r to reduce power consumption. Wh<strong>en</strong> watching TV at night, set the<br />
Energy Saving mo<strong>de</strong> option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption.<br />
If you select Picture Off, the scre<strong>en</strong> is turned off and you can only hear the sound. Press any button to get out of Picture Off.<br />
NN<br />
In the Tools m<strong>en</strong>u, Picture Off function is not supported.<br />
TT<br />
Press the TOOLS button to display Tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
You can also set the Energy Saving option by selecting Tools → Energy Saving.<br />
• Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High<br />
The TV power on / off melody sound can be adjusted.<br />
N N The Melody does not play<br />
--Wh<strong>en</strong> no sound is output from the TV because the MUTE button has be<strong>en</strong> pressed.<br />
--Wh<strong>en</strong> no sound is output from the TV because the – (Volume) button has be<strong>en</strong> pressed.<br />
--Wh<strong>en</strong> the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function.<br />
English - 23
Setting the Time<br />
❑❑ Clock<br />
Setting the clock is necessary in or<strong>de</strong>r to use the various timer features of the TV.<br />
NN<br />
The curr<strong>en</strong>t time will appear every time you press the INFO button.<br />
NN If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again.<br />
• Clock Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
You can set up the curr<strong>en</strong>t time manually or automatically.<br />
••<br />
Auto: Set the curr<strong>en</strong>t time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast.<br />
••<br />
Manual: Set the curr<strong>en</strong>t time to a manually specified time.<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language<br />
Time<br />
Broadcast<br />
Security<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
: English<br />
►<br />
• Clock Set<br />
You can set the curr<strong>en</strong>t time manually.<br />
NN<br />
NN<br />
Set up this item wh<strong>en</strong> you have set Clock Mo<strong>de</strong> to Manual.<br />
You can set the Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute directly by pressing the number<br />
buttons on the remote control.<br />
❑ ❑ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min /<br />
180 min<br />
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time.<br />
NN The TV automatically switches to standby mo<strong>de</strong> wh<strong>en</strong> the timer reaches 0.<br />
NN<br />
To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off.<br />
Time<br />
Clock : -- : -- ►<br />
Sleep Timer<br />
: Off<br />
Timer 1<br />
: Inactivated<br />
Timer 2<br />
: Inactivated<br />
Timer 3<br />
: Inactivated<br />
U Move E Enter R Return<br />
TT<br />
Press the TOOLS button to display Tools m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer.<br />
❑ ❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3<br />
Three differ<strong>en</strong>t on / off timer settings can be ma<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• On Time: Set the hour, minute, and Activate / Inactivate.<br />
(To activate timer with the setting you’ve chos<strong>en</strong>, set to Activate.)<br />
• Off Time: Set the hour, minute, and Activate / Inactivate.<br />
(To activate timer with the setting you’ve chos<strong>en</strong>, set to Activate.)<br />
• Volume: Set the required volume level.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>na: Select ATV or DTV.<br />
• Channel: Select the <strong>de</strong>sired channel.<br />
• Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun, or Manual.<br />
NN<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the <strong>de</strong>sired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the<br />
<strong>de</strong>sired day and the “c” mark will appear.<br />
NN You must set the clock first.<br />
NN You can set the hour, minute, or channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.<br />
NN Auto Power Off<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> you set the timer On, the television will ev<strong>en</strong>tually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on<br />
by the timer. This function is only available in timer On mo<strong>de</strong> and prev<strong>en</strong>ts overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for too long<br />
time.<br />
English - 24
Source List / Edit Name<br />
❑❑ Source List<br />
Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD players or Cable Box /<br />
Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of<br />
your choice.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI.<br />
NN You can choose only those external <strong>de</strong>vices that are connected to the TV. In the<br />
Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that<br />
are not connected will be sorted to the bottom.<br />
NN Using the Colour buttons on the remote with the Source list<br />
--T<br />
TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Edit Name and Information m<strong>en</strong>us.<br />
OO<br />
Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal source.<br />
TV mo<strong>de</strong> can be selected by pressing the TV button, number buttons (0~9), and the<br />
P < / > button on the remote control.<br />
❑❑ Edit Name<br />
You can name the <strong>de</strong>vice connected to the input jacks to make your input source<br />
selection easier.<br />
Source List<br />
Edit Name<br />
• VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC / DVI PC / DVI / TV / IPTV /<br />
Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
NN<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> a PC with a resolution of PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60 is connected to the HDMI IN 2(DVI)<br />
port, you should set the HDMI2/DVI mo<strong>de</strong> to PC in the Edit Name of the Input mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Input<br />
English - 25
PC Display<br />
❑❑ Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)<br />
The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual scre<strong>en</strong>s on<br />
your PC will probably be differ<strong>en</strong>t, <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding upon your particular version of Windows and your<br />
particular vi<strong>de</strong>o card. However, ev<strong>en</strong> if your actual scre<strong>en</strong>s look differ<strong>en</strong>t, the same basic set-up<br />
information will apply in almost all cases.<br />
(If not, contact your computer manufacturer or <strong>Samsung</strong> Dealer.)<br />
1. First, click on Control Panel on the Windows start m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
2. Wh<strong>en</strong> the control panel window appears, click on Appearance and Themes and a display<br />
dialog-box will appear.<br />
3. Wh<strong>en</strong> the control panel window appears, click on Display and a display dialog-box will appear.<br />
4. Navigate to the Settings tab on the display dialog-box.<br />
The correct size setting (resolution)<br />
Optimum<br />
-- PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixels<br />
-- PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixels<br />
If a verticalfrequ<strong>en</strong>cy option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct<br />
value is 60 or 60 Hz. Otherwise, just click OK and exit the dialog box.<br />
❑❑ Display Mo<strong>de</strong>s<br />
Both scre<strong>en</strong> position and size will vary <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the type of PC monitor and its resolution.<br />
The resolutions in the table are recomm<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>d<br />
• HDMI/DVI Input<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
Resolution<br />
Horizontal<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (kHz)<br />
Vertical<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Hz)<br />
Pixel Clock<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (MHz)<br />
Sync Polarity<br />
(H/V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
PS50B430<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
VESA DMT<br />
800 x 600<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
VESA CVT<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
1280 x 720<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
NN Wh<strong>en</strong> using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2(DVI) terminal.<br />
NN The interlace mo<strong>de</strong> is not supported.<br />
NN The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard vi<strong>de</strong>o format is selected.<br />
English - 26
Supported Program<br />
❑❑<br />
•<br />
Self Diagnosis<br />
Picture Test, Sound Test, Signal Information<br />
If you think you have the Picture, Sound, Signal problem, perform the test. You can check the problem state.<br />
NN<br />
If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker<br />
in the Sound m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
NN<br />
The melody will be heard during the test ev<strong>en</strong> if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing<br />
the MMUTE button.<br />
NN If the signal str<strong>en</strong>gth meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your ant<strong>en</strong>na to increase the signal str<strong>en</strong>gth.<br />
Continue to adjust the ant<strong>en</strong>na until you find the best position with the strongest signal.<br />
❑❑ Software Upgra<strong>de</strong><br />
To keep your product up-to-date with new Digital Television features th<strong>en</strong> software upgra<strong>de</strong>s are periodically broadcast as part of<br />
the normal Television signal. It will automatically <strong>de</strong>tect these signals and display the software upgra<strong>de</strong> banner. You are giv<strong>en</strong> the<br />
option to install the upgra<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• By USB<br />
Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgra<strong>de</strong> into TV. Please be careful to not disconnect<br />
the power or remove the USB drive while upgra<strong>de</strong>s are being applied. The TV will turn off and<br />
turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgra<strong>de</strong>. Please check the firmware version<br />
after the upgra<strong>de</strong>s are complete. Wh<strong>en</strong> software is upgra<strong>de</strong>d, vi<strong>de</strong>o and audio settings you<br />
have ma<strong>de</strong> will return to their <strong>de</strong>fault (factory) settings. We recomm<strong>en</strong>d you write down your<br />
settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgra<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• By Channel<br />
Upgra<strong>de</strong>s the software using the broadcasting signal.<br />
USB Drive<br />
TV Panel<br />
• Standby Mo<strong>de</strong> Upgra<strong>de</strong><br />
To continue software upgra<strong>de</strong> with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after <strong>en</strong>tering standby<br />
mo<strong>de</strong>, a manual upgra<strong>de</strong> is automatically conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the scre<strong>en</strong> may be on<br />
slightly for the product. This ph<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>on may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgra<strong>de</strong> is completed.<br />
•<br />
Alternative Software<br />
Replace the curr<strong>en</strong>t software with the alternative.<br />
❑❑ HD Connection Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
The brief instruction on How to get the best performance from your new HDTV is displayed. We offer the connection method for<br />
HD <strong>de</strong>vices.<br />
❑❑ Contact <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
You can know the <strong>Samsung</strong> Call c<strong>en</strong>ter, website and information for product.<br />
NN You can move the previous or next page by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button.<br />
English - 27
Recomm<strong>en</strong>dations for Use<br />
Teletext Feature<br />
Most television stations provi<strong>de</strong> writt<strong>en</strong> information services via Teletext. The in<strong>de</strong>x page of the teletext service gives you information on<br />
how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirem<strong>en</strong>ts by using the remote control buttons.<br />
NN For teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some<br />
pages may not be displayed.<br />
1 : (exit)<br />
Exit from the teletext display.<br />
<br />
2 6 (in<strong>de</strong>x)<br />
Used to display the in<strong>de</strong>x (cont<strong>en</strong>ts) page at any time while you are viewing teletext.<br />
3 5 (reveal)<br />
Used to display the hid<strong>de</strong>n text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display normal<br />
scre<strong>en</strong>, press it again.<br />
1<br />
4 4 (size)<br />
Press to display the double-size letters in the upper half of the scre<strong>en</strong>. For lower half of<br />
the scre<strong>en</strong>, press it again. To display normal scre<strong>en</strong>, press it once again.<br />
5 8 (store)<br />
Used to store the teletext pages.<br />
6 / (teletext on/mix)<br />
Press to activate teletext mo<strong>de</strong> after selecting the channel providing the teletext service.<br />
Press it twice to overlap the teletext with the curr<strong>en</strong>t broadcasting scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
7 1 (sub-page)<br />
Used to display the available sub-page.<br />
8 2 (page up)<br />
Used to display the next teletext page.<br />
9 3 (page down)<br />
Used to display the previous teletext page.<br />
0 0 (mo<strong>de</strong>)<br />
Press to select the teletext mo<strong>de</strong> (LIST/FLOF). If you press it in the LIST mo<strong>de</strong>, it<br />
switches into the List save mo<strong>de</strong>. In the List save mo<strong>de</strong>, you can save teletext page into<br />
list using the 8(store) button.<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
! 9 (hold)<br />
Used to hold the display on a giv<strong>en</strong> page if the selected page is linked with several<br />
secondary pages which follow on automatically. To resume, press it again.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (cancel)<br />
Used to display the broadcast wh<strong>en</strong> searching for a page.<br />
# Colour buttons (red/gre<strong>en</strong>/yellow/blue)<br />
If the FASTEXT system is used by a broadcasting company, the differ<strong>en</strong>t topics covered<br />
on a teletext page are colour-co<strong>de</strong>d and can be selected by pressing the coloured<br />
buttons. Press one of them corresponding to the required. The page is displayed<br />
with other coloured information that can be selected in the same way. To display the<br />
previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button.<br />
NN You can change teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.<br />
English - 28
The teletext pages are organized according to six categories:<br />
Part<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
Cont<strong>en</strong>ts<br />
Selected page number.<br />
Broadcasting channel i<strong>de</strong>ntity.<br />
Curr<strong>en</strong>t page number or search indications.<br />
Date and time.<br />
Text.<br />
Status information.<br />
FASTEXT information.<br />
NN<br />
Teletext information is oft<strong>en</strong> divi<strong>de</strong>d betwe<strong>en</strong> several pages displayed in sequ<strong>en</strong>ce,<br />
which can be accessed by<br />
-- Entering the page number<br />
-- Selecting a title in a list<br />
-- Selecting a coloured heading (FASTEXT system)<br />
<br />
OO<br />
Press the TV button to exit from the teletext display.<br />
Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)<br />
Install your wall mount on a solid wall perp<strong>en</strong>dicular to the floor.<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest <strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.<br />
Product Family inch VESA Spec. (A * B)<br />
LCD-TV<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
Standard<br />
Screw<br />
M4<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
M8<br />
Quantity<br />
4<br />
PDP-TV<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8 4<br />
NN We provi<strong>de</strong>d the standard dim<strong>en</strong>sions for wall mount kits as shown in the table above.<br />
NN<br />
Wh<strong>en</strong> purchasing our wall mount kit, a <strong>de</strong>tailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provi<strong>de</strong>d.<br />
NN Do not use screws longer than the standard dim<strong>en</strong>sion, as they may cause damage to the insi<strong>de</strong> of the TV set.<br />
NN For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the l<strong>en</strong>gth of the screws may differ <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on<br />
their specifications.<br />
NN Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications.<br />
Do not use fast<strong>en</strong> the screws too strongly, this may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> is not liable for these kinds of acci<strong>de</strong>nts.<br />
NN <strong>Samsung</strong> is not liable for product damage or personal injury wh<strong>en</strong> a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer<br />
fails to follow the product installation instructions.<br />
NN Our 57” and 63” mo<strong>de</strong>ls do not comply with VESA Specifications. Therefore, you should use our <strong>de</strong>dicated wall mount kit for this<br />
mo<strong>de</strong>l.<br />
NN Do not exceed 15 <strong>de</strong>grees tilt wh<strong>en</strong> mounting this TV.<br />
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on.<br />
It may result in personal injury due to electric shock.<br />
English - 29
Preparing before installing Wall- Mount on the wall<br />
Case A. Installing SAMSUNG Wall-Mount<br />
Case B. Installing other company’s Wall-Mount<br />
고<br />
1. Install Wall Mount with the torque range of 15kgf·cm or less. Make sure that parts can be damaged if the torque is out of the<br />
specified range.<br />
2. Accessory Kit contains Hol<strong>de</strong>r–Ring [1] for installing other company’s Wall-Mount on <strong>Samsung</strong> TV. (Case B)<br />
NN<br />
Screw down the hole [ 1] wh<strong>en</strong> installing wall-mount on the wall.<br />
주의<br />
Securing the TV to the Wall<br />
고<br />
Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, <strong>en</strong>sure your childr<strong>en</strong> do not hang<br />
over or <strong>de</strong>stabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or <strong>de</strong>ath. Follow all<br />
safety precautions provi<strong>de</strong>d on the inclu<strong>de</strong>d Safety Flyer. For ad<strong>de</strong>d stability, install the anti-fall <strong>de</strong>vice for safety<br />
purposes, as follows.<br />
주의<br />
Wall<br />
Wall<br />
❑❑ To avoid the TV from falling<br />
1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fast<strong>en</strong> them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have be<strong>en</strong> firmly installed onto the wall.<br />
NN You may need additional material such as an anchor <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the type of wall.<br />
NN Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase these additionally.<br />
2. Remove the screws from the c<strong>en</strong>ter back of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and th<strong>en</strong> fast<strong>en</strong> the screws onto the TV again.<br />
NN Screws may not be supplied with the product.<br />
3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong string and th<strong>en</strong> tie the string tightly.<br />
N N Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.<br />
NN It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV.<br />
NN Untie the string before moving the TV.<br />
4. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt<br />
about the security of your connections,contact a professional installer.<br />
English - 30
Troubleshooting<br />
Before contacting the <strong>Samsung</strong> after-sales service, perform the following simple checks.<br />
If you cannot solve the problem using the instructions below, note the mo<strong>de</strong>l and serial number of the television and contact your local<br />
<strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
No sound or picture<br />
Normal picture but no sound<br />
No picture or black and white<br />
picture<br />
Sound and picture<br />
interfer<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
Blurred or snowy picture,<br />
distorted sound<br />
Remote control malfunctions<br />
Scre<strong>en</strong> is black and power<br />
indicator light blinks steadily<br />
The damaged picture appears<br />
in the corner of the scre<strong>en</strong>.<br />
The "Resets all settings to<br />
the <strong>de</strong>fault values" message<br />
appears.<br />
•• Check that the mains lead has be<strong>en</strong> connected to a wall socket.<br />
•• Check that you have pressed the button on your set.<br />
•• Check the picture contrast and brightness settings.<br />
•• Check the volume.<br />
••<br />
Check if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.<br />
•• Check the volume.<br />
••<br />
Check whether the M MUTE button has be<strong>en</strong> pressed on the remote control.<br />
•• Adjust the colour settings.<br />
•• Check that the broadcast system selected is correct.<br />
•• Try to i<strong>de</strong>ntify the electrical appliance that is affecting the television, th<strong>en</strong> move it further away.<br />
•• Plug the television into a differ<strong>en</strong>t main socket.<br />
•• Check the direction, location and connections of your aerial.<br />
•• This interfer<strong>en</strong>ce oft<strong>en</strong> occurs due to the use of an indoor aerial.<br />
•• Replace the remote control batteries.<br />
•• Clean the upper edge of the remote control (transmission window).<br />
••<br />
Check that the + and – <strong>en</strong>ds of the batteries are inserted correctly.<br />
•• Check that the batteries are drained.<br />
•• On your computer check; Power, Signal Cable.<br />
•• Move the computer’s mouse or press any key on the keyboard.<br />
•• On your equipm<strong>en</strong>t check (STB, DVD, etc) ; Power, Signal Cable.<br />
•• The TV is using its power managem<strong>en</strong>t system.<br />
•• Press the Source button on the panel or remote control.<br />
•• Turn the TV off and on.<br />
••<br />
If Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit is selected in some external <strong>de</strong>vices, the damaged picture may appear in the<br />
corner of the scre<strong>en</strong>. This symptom is caused by external <strong>de</strong>vices, not TV.<br />
••<br />
This appears wh<strong>en</strong> you press and hold the EXIT button for a while. The product settings are<br />
reset to the factory <strong>de</strong>faults.<br />
Securing the Installation Space<br />
Keep the required distances betwe<strong>en</strong> the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to <strong>en</strong>sure proper v<strong>en</strong>tilation.<br />
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.<br />
Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept.<br />
NN Wh<strong>en</strong> using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provi<strong>de</strong>d by <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics only.<br />
-- If you use parts provi<strong>de</strong>d by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product<br />
falling.<br />
-- If you use parts provi<strong>de</strong>d by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the<br />
internal temperature of the product due to poor v<strong>en</strong>tilation.<br />
NN The appearance may differ <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the product.<br />
• Wh<strong>en</strong> installing the product with a stand<br />
• Wh<strong>en</strong> installing the product with a wall-mount<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
English - 31
Specifications<br />
The <strong>de</strong>scriptions and characteristics in this booklet are giv<strong>en</strong> for information purposes only and are subject to modification without<br />
notice.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>l Name PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Scre<strong>en</strong> Size (Diagonal) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
PC Resolution (Optimum) 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360x768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Sound (Output) 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>sion (WxHxD)<br />
Body<br />
With stand<br />
Weight<br />
Body<br />
With stand<br />
Environm<strong>en</strong>tal Consi<strong>de</strong>rations<br />
Operating Temperature<br />
Operating Humidity<br />
Storage Temperature<br />
Storage Humidity<br />
1055 x 667 x 73 mm<br />
1230 x 756 x 73 mm<br />
1055 x 729 x 316 mm<br />
1230 x 817 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
32 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
36 kg<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
NN This <strong>de</strong>vice is a Class B digital apparatus.<br />
NN Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.<br />
NN For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.<br />
NN Wh<strong>en</strong> using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2(DVI) terminal.<br />
English - 32
Instructions d’utilisation<br />
• Réman<strong>en</strong>ce à l’écran<br />
Ne figez pas d’images (telle qu’une image <strong>de</strong> jeu vidéo ou <strong>de</strong> PC branché à l’écran à plasma) sur l’écran du moniteur à<br />
plasma p<strong>en</strong>dant plus <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>ux heures car cela peut <strong>en</strong>traîner une réman<strong>en</strong>ce à l’écran. Cette réman<strong>en</strong>ce est égalem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
appelée “brûlure d’écran”. Pour éviter la réman<strong>en</strong>ce, réduisez le niveau <strong>de</strong> contraste ou <strong>de</strong> luminosité <strong>de</strong> l’écran lorsque vous<br />
affichez une image figée.<br />
• Hauteur<br />
L’écran à plasma est normalem<strong>en</strong>t conçu pour être utilisé à une altitu<strong>de</strong> inférieure à 2000 m. Il peut fonctionner <strong>de</strong> façon<br />
anormale au-<strong>de</strong>ssus <strong>de</strong> 2000 m d’altitu<strong>de</strong>. Ne l’installez pas et ne le faites donc pas fonctionner dans ces conditions.<br />
• Chaleur diffusée sur la partie supérieure du téléviseur à plasma<br />
Le <strong>de</strong>ssus <strong>de</strong> l’appareil peut chauffer <strong>en</strong> cas d’utilisation prolongée, car la chaleur s’échappe du panneau par le trou d’<br />
aération situé dans la partie supérieure du produit. Ce phénomène est normal et n’indique aucunem<strong>en</strong>t la prés<strong>en</strong>ce d’un<br />
défaut ou d’un dysfonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t. Il convi<strong>en</strong>t cep<strong>en</strong>dant d’empêcher les <strong>en</strong>fants <strong>de</strong> toucher à la partie supérieure <strong>de</strong> l’écran.<br />
• Le produit fait un bruit <strong>de</strong> “claquem<strong>en</strong>t”.<br />
Ce bruit <strong>de</strong> “claquem<strong>en</strong>t” risque d’être perceptible lorsque le produit se contracte ou s’ét<strong>en</strong>d suite à un changem<strong>en</strong>t du milieu<br />
ambiant, tel que la température ou l’humidité. Ce phénomène est normal et ne constitue pas un défaut.<br />
• Défauts <strong>de</strong> cellule<br />
L’écran à plasma utilise un panneau constitué <strong>de</strong> 2,360,000 (niveau HD) à 6,221,000 (niveau FHD) pixels dont la fabrication<br />
fait appel à une technologie avancée. Il se peut toutefois que <strong>de</strong>s points clairs ou sombres appar<strong>ais</strong>s<strong>en</strong>t à l’écran. Ils n’ont<br />
aucune inci<strong>de</strong>nce sur la performance du produit.<br />
• Evitez d’utiliser le téléviseur à plasma à <strong>de</strong>s températures inférieures à 5°C (41°F).<br />
• Une image figée affichée p<strong>en</strong>dant une pério<strong>de</strong> prolongée peut <strong>en</strong>dommager définitivem<strong>en</strong>t l’écran PDP.Visionner<br />
p<strong>en</strong>dant longtemps le téléviseur à plasma <strong>en</strong> format 4/3 risque <strong>de</strong> l<strong>ais</strong>ser apparaître <strong>de</strong>s traces <strong>de</strong><br />
bordures sur la gauche, sur la droite et au c<strong>en</strong>tre <strong>de</strong> l’écran. Ces traces sont dues à la différ<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong><br />
luminosité sur l’écran. Lire un DVD ou un jeu vidéo sur console risque <strong>de</strong> provoquer un effet similaire sur<br />
l’écran. Les dommages provoqués par l’effet susm<strong>en</strong>tionné ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.<br />
• Réman<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong> l’image à l’écran.<br />
Une réman<strong>en</strong>ce partielle <strong>de</strong> l’image peut év<strong>en</strong>tuellem<strong>en</strong>t se produire si <strong>de</strong>s images figées <strong>de</strong> jeux vidéo et d’un PC rest<strong>en</strong>t<br />
affichées p<strong>en</strong>dant un certain temps. Pour empêcher ce phénomène, réduisez la luminosité et le contraste <strong>en</strong> cas d’affichage<br />
d’images figées.<br />
• Garantie<br />
- La garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés par la réman<strong>en</strong>ce.<br />
- Les brûlures ne sont pas couvertes par la garantie.<br />
• Installation<br />
Contacter un c<strong>en</strong>tre <strong>de</strong> service agréé si le téléviseur est <strong>de</strong>stiné à une installation dans <strong>de</strong>s <strong>en</strong>droits exposés à la poussière,<br />
à <strong>de</strong>s températures faibles ou élevées, à une forte humidité, à <strong>de</strong>s substances chimiques et s’il a été prévu pour fonctionner<br />
<strong>en</strong> perman<strong>en</strong>ce, comme dans <strong>de</strong>s aéroports, <strong>de</strong>s gares ferroviaires, etc. Le non-respect <strong>de</strong> ce qui précè<strong>de</strong> peut gravem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
<strong>en</strong>dommager le téléviseur.<br />
Notifications pour le téléviseur numérique<br />
1. Les fonctions relatives à la télévision numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où <strong>de</strong>s<br />
signaux terrestres numériques <strong>de</strong> type DVB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AVC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez<br />
accès à un service <strong>de</strong> télévision par câble compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur<br />
local pour connaître les possibilités <strong>de</strong> réception <strong>de</strong>s signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C.<br />
2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium europé<strong>en</strong> pour la diffusion <strong>de</strong> signaux terrestres <strong>de</strong> télévision numérique. La norme<br />
DVB-C est quant à elle prévue pour la diffusion <strong>de</strong>s signaux <strong>de</strong> télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions<br />
particulières, telles que le gui<strong>de</strong> électronique <strong>de</strong>s programmes (Electric Program Gui<strong>de</strong> - EPG), la vidéo à la <strong>de</strong>man<strong>de</strong><br />
(Vi<strong>de</strong>o on Demand - VOD), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Elles ne sont, par conséqu<strong>en</strong>t,<br />
pas prises <strong>en</strong> charge pour l'instant.<br />
3. Bi<strong>en</strong> que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux <strong>de</strong>rnières normes DVB-T et DVB-C (août 2008), il n'est pas garanti qu'il soit<br />
compatible avec les futures diffusions <strong>de</strong> signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C.<br />
4. Certains opérateurs <strong>de</strong> télévision par câble peuv<strong>en</strong>t facturer <strong>de</strong>s fr<strong>ais</strong> supplém<strong>en</strong>taires pour un tel service. Vous aurez<br />
aussi év<strong>en</strong>tuellem<strong>en</strong>t à accepter les termes et conditions <strong>de</strong> ces sociétés.<br />
5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions <strong>de</strong> TV numérique ne soi<strong>en</strong>t pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions<br />
et que la réception <strong>de</strong>s signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs.<br />
6. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre service cli<strong>en</strong>t <strong>Samsung</strong>.<br />
Comm<strong>en</strong>t contacter <strong>Samsung</strong> dans le mon<strong>de</strong><br />
Si vous avez <strong>de</strong>s suggestions ou <strong>de</strong>s questions concernant les produits <strong>Samsung</strong>, veuillez contacter le Service<br />
Consommateurs <strong>Samsung</strong>.(Voir la quatrième <strong>de</strong> couverture pour plus d’informations.)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Sommaire<br />
Branchem<strong>en</strong>t et installation <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur<br />
■ Vérification <strong>de</strong>s pièces.........................................................4<br />
■ Utilisation <strong>de</strong> la base-support...............................................4<br />
■ Assemblage <strong>de</strong> la base-support (<strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle)....4<br />
■ Prés<strong>en</strong>tation du panneau <strong>de</strong> comman<strong>de</strong>.............................5<br />
■ Prés<strong>en</strong>tation du panneau <strong>de</strong> branchem<strong>en</strong>t..........................6<br />
■ Télécomman<strong>de</strong> ...................................................................8<br />
■ Insertion <strong>de</strong>s piles dans la télécomman<strong>de</strong>...........................9<br />
■ Mise <strong>en</strong> marche et arrêt.......................................................9<br />
■ Mise <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> veille <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur...............................9<br />
■ Affichage <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us.........................................................10<br />
■ Utilisation du bouton TOOLS.............................................10<br />
■ Visualisation <strong>de</strong> laffichage.................................................10<br />
■ Fonction Plug & Play..........................................................11<br />
Gestion <strong>de</strong>s canaux<br />
■ Mémorisation <strong>de</strong>s chaînes.................................................12<br />
■ Gestion <strong>de</strong>s chaînes..........................................................15<br />
Description <strong>de</strong>s fonctions<br />
■ Utilisation du m<strong>en</strong>u Setup..................................................22<br />
■ Réglage <strong>de</strong> l’heure.............................................................24<br />
■ Liste Source / Modif. Nom..................................................25<br />
■ Ecran du PC.......................................................................26<br />
■ Mo<strong>de</strong>s d’affichage..............................................................26<br />
■ Programme pris <strong>en</strong> charge................................................27<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
Conseils d’utilisation<br />
Fonction Télétexte.............................................................28<br />
Caractéristiques du kit <strong>de</strong> fixation murale (VESA).............29<br />
Préparation avant l’installation d’un dispositif<br />
<strong>de</strong> fixation murale...............................................................30<br />
Montage mural du téléviseur..............................................30<br />
Dépannage........................................................................31<br />
Sécurisation <strong>de</strong> l’emplacem<strong>en</strong>t d’installation.....................31<br />
Caractéristiques.................................................................32<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong><br />
Réglage <strong>de</strong> l’image<br />
■ Modification et rétablissem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong>s paramètres d’image....17<br />
Réglage du son<br />
■ Changem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> la norme Son...........................................20<br />
■ Sélection du mo<strong>de</strong> Son......................................................21<br />
N O T<br />
Symbole Appuyez sur Remarque Bouton tactile Bouton TOOL<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Branchem<strong>en</strong>t et installation <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur<br />
Vérification <strong>de</strong>s pièces<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong> d'utilisation<br />
Télécomman<strong>de</strong>/<br />
Piles AAA (2ea)<br />
Cordon d'alim<strong>en</strong>tation Chiffon <strong>de</strong> nettoyage Carte <strong>de</strong> garantie/ <strong>Manuel</strong><br />
<strong>de</strong> sécurité (Non disponible<br />
dans tous les pays)<br />
Vis (4ea) Capot inférieur Anneau <strong>de</strong> support (4ea)<br />
(reportez-vous à la page 30)<br />
Tore magnétique pour<br />
cordon d’alim<strong>en</strong>tation<br />
(1ea)<br />
N<br />
Le blindage magnétique sert à protéger les câbles <strong>de</strong>s interfér<strong>en</strong>ces. Lors <strong>de</strong> la connexion<br />
d’un câble, ouvrez le blindage magnétique et rabattez-le autour du câble près <strong>de</strong> la prise.<br />
Utilisation <strong>de</strong> la base-support<br />
N<br />
N<br />
L’écran à plasma doit être soulevé par plusieurs personnes. Ne posez<br />
jam<strong>ais</strong> l’écran à plasma sur le sol, car cela pourrait l’<strong>en</strong>dommager.<br />
Conservez toujours l’écran <strong>en</strong> position verticale.<br />
Le PDP peut pivoter <strong>de</strong> 20 <strong>de</strong>grés vers la droite et la gauche.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Assemblage <strong>de</strong> la base-support (<strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle)<br />
Au moy<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s 4 vis permettant <strong>de</strong> solidariser la base-support et le TV,<br />
fixez fermem<strong>en</strong>t le TV à la base-support.<br />
(L’aspect extérieur <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur peut différer <strong>de</strong> celui prés<strong>en</strong>té à l’<br />
image.)<br />
Avertissem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
Fixez fermem<strong>en</strong>t le socle au téléviseur<br />
avant <strong>de</strong> déplacer ce <strong>de</strong>rnier. Il pourrait<br />
tomber et provoquer <strong>de</strong> graves dommages.<br />
Si vous fixez le téléviseur au mur, Refermez le<br />
couvercle (1) <strong>de</strong> la pièce <strong>de</strong> connexion <strong>de</strong> la basesupport<br />
à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>ux vis.<br />
N<br />
Le téléviseur doit être soulevé par<br />
plusieurs personnes. Ne posez jam<strong>ais</strong><br />
le téléviseur sur le sol car cela pourrait<br />
l’<strong>en</strong>dommager.<br />
Conservez toujours le téléviseur <strong>en</strong><br />
position verticale.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Prés<strong>en</strong>tation du panneau <strong>de</strong> comman<strong>de</strong><br />
N<br />
La couleur et la forme du produit peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle.<br />
Boutons <strong>en</strong> faça<strong>de</strong><br />
Touchez les boutons<br />
pour les actionner.<br />
1 SOURCE E<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> basculer <strong>en</strong>tre les sources d'<strong>en</strong>trée disponibles<br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N Dans le m<strong>en</strong>u à l'écran, ce bouton a la même fonction<br />
que le bouton ENTER E <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Permet d’afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong>s fonctions <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur<br />
sur l’écran.<br />
3 + = –<br />
Appuyez pour augm<strong>en</strong>ter ou réduire le volume. Dans le m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
affiché à l’écran, utilisez les boutons + = – <strong>de</strong> la même<br />
façon que les boutons ◄ et ► <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
4 < CH ><br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> changer <strong>de</strong> canal. Dans le m<strong>en</strong>u affiché à l’écran,<br />
utilisez les boutons < CH > <strong>de</strong> la même façon que les<br />
boutons ▲ et ▼ <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
5 TÉMOIN D’ALIMENTATION<br />
Clignote et s’éteint lorsqu’il est sous t<strong>en</strong>sion et s’allume <strong>en</strong><br />
mo<strong>de</strong> Veille.<br />
6 P (POWER)<br />
Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le téléviseur.<br />
7 CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE<br />
Dirigez la télécomman<strong>de</strong> vers ce point du téléviseur.<br />
8 HAUT-PARLEUR<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Prés<strong>en</strong>tation du panneau <strong>de</strong> branchem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
Panneau arrière<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
8<br />
ou<br />
Télévision câblée<br />
Réseau<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
ou<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
La couleur et la forme du produit peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
En cas <strong>de</strong> branchem<strong>en</strong>t d’un système audio ou vidéo sur le téléviseur, vérifiez que tous les appareils sont éteints.<br />
Lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe, faites correspondre les couleurs <strong>de</strong> la borne <strong>de</strong> connexion et du câble.<br />
1 ENTREE ALIMENTATION<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> raccor<strong>de</strong>r le cordon d’alim<strong>en</strong>tation fourni.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Prise pour tests.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Entrées audio (AUDIO G/D) et vidéo (Y/PB/PR) pour<br />
Composant.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Entrées ou sorties pour périphériques tels que <strong>de</strong>s<br />
magnétoscopes, <strong>de</strong>s lecteurs DVD, <strong>de</strong>s consoles <strong>de</strong> jeux<br />
vidéo ou <strong>de</strong>s lecteurs <strong>de</strong> vidéodisques.<br />
Spécifications <strong>en</strong>trée/sortie<br />
Connecteur<br />
Entrée<br />
Vidéo Audio (G/D) RGB<br />
EXT ✔ ✔ ✔<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
A connecter à un composant audio numérique.<br />
Sortie<br />
Vidéo + Audio (G/D)<br />
Seule la sortie TV ou<br />
DTV est disponible.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
Connectez les signales audio RCA <strong>de</strong> la TV à une<br />
source externe, telle qu’un équipem<strong>en</strong>t audio.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1,2 (DVI)<br />
Aucune connexion audio supplém<strong>en</strong>taire n’est nécessaire<br />
pour une connexion HDMI - HDMI.<br />
− Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/<br />
DVI, vous <strong>de</strong>vez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
N Qu’est-ce que HDMI?<br />
− High Definition Multimedia interface permet la<br />
transmission <strong>de</strong> données vidéo numériques haute<br />
définition et plusieurs canaux <strong>de</strong> son numérique.<br />
− Le terminal HDMI/DVI pr<strong>en</strong>d <strong>en</strong> charge la connexion<br />
DVI vers un périphérique raccordé avec le câble<br />
adéquat (non fourni). La différ<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>en</strong>tre HDMI et<br />
DVI est que le périphérique HDMI est plus petit,<br />
est équipé <strong>de</strong> la fonction <strong>de</strong> codage HDCP (High<br />
Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection), et gère le son<br />
numérique multicanal.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
Sorties audio DVI pour périphériques externes.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
Connecteur coaxial 75Ω pour réseau câblé/hertzi<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>s pris <strong>en</strong> charge pour HDMI/DVI et Compon<strong>en</strong>t<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t O O O O O O O<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Panneau latéral<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
La couleur et la forme du produit peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle.<br />
1 Logem<strong>en</strong>t pour COMMON INTERFACE<br />
Insérez la carte d’interface commune dans ce logem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
(reportez-vous à la page 23)<br />
− Si vous n’insérez pas la carte d’int erface commune<br />
dans certaines chaînes, Signal brouillé s’affiche sur l’<br />
écran.<br />
− Les informations <strong>de</strong> pairage cont<strong>en</strong>ant un numéro <strong>de</strong><br />
téléphone, l’ID <strong>de</strong> la carte d’interface commune, l’ID <strong>de</strong> l’hôte<br />
et d’autres informations s’afficheront dans les 2 ou 3 minutes.<br />
Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, contactez votre prestataire<br />
<strong>de</strong> service.<br />
− Lorsque la configuration <strong>de</strong>s informations sur les canaux<br />
est terminée, le message Mise à jour terminée s’affiche,<br />
indiquant que la liste <strong>de</strong>s canaux est dorénavant mise à<br />
jour.<br />
N Insérez la carte d’interface commune dans le s<strong>en</strong>s indiqué<br />
sur celle-ci.<br />
N Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris <strong>en</strong> charge<br />
dans certains pays ou régions. Vérifiez auprès <strong>de</strong> votre<br />
rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ur agréé.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Entrées audio et vidéo pour périphériques externes, tels<br />
qu’un caméscope ou un magnétoscope.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Télécomman<strong>de</strong><br />
Vous pouvez utiliser la télécomman<strong>de</strong> à une distance maximale du téléviseur d’<strong>en</strong>viron 7 m.<br />
N<br />
Une lumière int<strong>en</strong>se peut affecter le bon fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
1 Bouton POWER<br />
(permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le<br />
téléviseur)<br />
2 Permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner directem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
le mo<strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
3 Pavé numérique pour l'accès direct<br />
aux chaînes<br />
4 Affiche la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes favorites.<br />
5 Suppression temporaire du son<br />
6 Augm<strong>en</strong>tation du volume<br />
Réduction du volume<br />
7 Sélection <strong>de</strong> la source disponible<br />
8 Permet d'afficher les informations<br />
relatives au programme <strong>en</strong> cours<br />
9 Permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner rapi<strong>de</strong>m<strong>en</strong>t<br />
les fonctions fréquemm<strong>en</strong>t utilisées.<br />
0 Permet <strong>de</strong> comman<strong>de</strong>r le curseur<br />
dans le m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
! Permet d’afficher les listes <strong>de</strong><br />
chaînes à l’écran.<br />
@ Utilisez ces boutons dans la Liste<br />
<strong>de</strong>s chaînes, etc.<br />
$ Chaîne précé<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
% Chaîne suivante<br />
Chaîne précé<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
^ Permet d'afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u principal à<br />
l'écran<br />
& Affichage EPG (Gui<strong>de</strong> électronique<br />
<strong>de</strong>s programmes)<br />
* Permet <strong>de</strong> rev<strong>en</strong>ir au m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
précé<strong>de</strong>nt<br />
( Permet <strong>de</strong> quitter le m<strong>en</strong>u affiché à<br />
l'écran<br />
) Sélection <strong>de</strong> Audio Description.<br />
a Affichage numérique <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres<br />
Fonctions télétexte<br />
2 Permet <strong>de</strong> quitter l'affichage télétexte<br />
(<strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle)<br />
7 Sélection du mo<strong>de</strong> Télétexte (LIST/<br />
FLOF)<br />
8 Activation du télétexte<br />
9 Taille du télétexte<br />
! émorisation du télétexte<br />
@ Sélection <strong>de</strong>s rubriques Fastext<br />
# Affichage télétexte/informations<br />
relatives au télétexte et programme<br />
normal<br />
$ Page secondaire télétexte<br />
% P : page télétexte uivante<br />
P : page télétexte précé<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
^ In<strong>de</strong>x du télétexte<br />
* Pause télétexte<br />
( Annulation du télétexte<br />
<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Insertion <strong>de</strong>s piles dans la télécomman<strong>de</strong><br />
1. Soulevez le couvercle situé à l’arrière <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> comme indiqué sur<br />
la figure.<br />
2. Placez <strong>de</strong>ux piles AAA.<br />
N Assurez-vous <strong>de</strong> faire correspondre les bornes “+” et “-” <strong>de</strong>s piles avec le<br />
schéma situé à l’intérieur du compartim<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
3. Refermez le couvercle comme indiqué sur la figure.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Retirez les piles et stockez-les dans un <strong>en</strong>droit fr<strong>ais</strong> et sec si vous n’utilisez<br />
pas la télécomman<strong>de</strong> p<strong>en</strong>dant longtemps.<br />
Si la télécomman<strong>de</strong> ne fonctionne pas Vérifiez les élém<strong>en</strong>ts suivants :<br />
1. Le téléviseur est-il sous t<strong>en</strong>sion?<br />
2. Les bornes + et - <strong>de</strong>s piles ne sont-elles pas inversées?<br />
3. Les piles sont-elles déchargées ?<br />
4. Le cordon d’alim<strong>en</strong>tation est-il débranché ou y a-t-il une panne <strong>de</strong> courant?<br />
5. Une lampe fluoresc<strong>en</strong>te ou néon est-elle allumée à proximité?<br />
Mise <strong>en</strong> marche et arrêt<br />
Le câble relié au secteur est fixé à l'arrière du téléviseur/moniteur.<br />
1. Branchez le cordon d'alim<strong>en</strong>tation sur une prise secteur appropriée.<br />
N Le voyant <strong>de</strong> veille s'allume sur le téléviseur.<br />
2. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER P <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur.<br />
N Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t appuyer sur le bouton POWER P ou sur le bouton TV <strong>de</strong> votre télécomman<strong>de</strong> pour allumer le<br />
téléviseur.<br />
3. Appuyez sur le bouton numérique (<strong>de</strong> 0 à 9) ou le bouton canal suivant/précé<strong>de</strong>nt (< / >) <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> ou sur le<br />
bouton <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur.<br />
N<br />
Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, vous <strong>de</strong>vrez choisir la langue dans laquelle vous souhaitez que<br />
les m<strong>en</strong>us s'affich<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
4. Pour éteindre votre téléviseur, appuyez <strong>de</strong> nouveau sur le bouton POWER P.<br />
Mise <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> veille <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur<br />
Vous pouvez mettre votre téléviseur <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> Veille afin <strong>de</strong> réduire la consommation électrique. Le mo<strong>de</strong> veille peut être utile si<br />
vous souhaitez éteindre votre téléviseur temporairem<strong>en</strong>t (p<strong>en</strong>dant un repas par exemple).<br />
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER P <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N<br />
L'écran s'éteint et un voyant <strong>de</strong> veille rouge apparaît sur votre téléviseur.<br />
2. Pour rallumer le téléviseur, appuyez <strong>de</strong> nouveau sur le bouton POWER P, les boutons numériques (<strong>de</strong> 0 à 9), le bouton TV<br />
ou les boutons canal suivant/précé<strong>de</strong>nt (< / >).<br />
N Ne l<strong>ais</strong>sez pas le téléviseur <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> Veille p<strong>en</strong>dant <strong>de</strong> longues pério<strong>de</strong>s (lorsque vous êtes <strong>en</strong> vacances par exemple). Il<br />
est conseillé <strong>de</strong> débrancher le téléviseur du secteur et <strong>de</strong> l'ant<strong>en</strong>ne.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> -
Affichage <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us<br />
1. Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Le m<strong>en</strong>u principal<br />
apparaît à l'écran. Plusieurs icônes s’affich<strong>en</strong>t sur le côté gauche du m<strong>en</strong>u :<br />
Image, Son, Canal, Configuration, Entrée, Assistance.<br />
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l'une <strong>de</strong>s icônes. Appuyez<br />
<strong>en</strong>suite sur ENTER E pour accé<strong>de</strong>r au sous-m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> l'icône.<br />
3. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
N<br />
Les m<strong>en</strong>us dispar<strong>ais</strong>s<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> l'écran après <strong>en</strong>viron une minute.<br />
Image<br />
<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
: Standard<br />
Lum. Cellules : 4<br />
Contraste : 95<br />
Luminosité : 45<br />
Netteté : 50<br />
Couleur : 50<br />
Teinte (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
Utilisation du bouton TOOLS<br />
Vous pouvez utiliser le bouton TOOLS pour sélectionner simplem<strong>en</strong>t et rapi<strong>de</strong>m<strong>en</strong>t les fonctions que vous utilisez le plus souv<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
Le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils change <strong>en</strong> fonction du mo<strong>de</strong> d'<strong>en</strong>trée externe affiché.<br />
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils s'affiche.<br />
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un m<strong>en</strong>u, puis appuyez sur le<br />
bouton ENTERE.<br />
3. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲/▼/◄/►/ ENTERE pour afficher,changer ou utiliser<br />
les élém<strong>en</strong>ts sélectionnés. Pour une <strong>de</strong>scription plus détaillée <strong>de</strong> chaque fonction,<br />
reportez-vous à la page correspondante.<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> Image: voir page 17<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> Son: voir page 20<br />
• Veille: voir page 24<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> éco.: voir page 23<br />
• Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer <strong>de</strong>s favoris), voir page 15<br />
<br />
Outils<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> Image ◄ Standard ►<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> Son : Personnel<br />
Veille : Arrêt<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> éco. : Arrêt<br />
Ajouter aux favoris<br />
Visualisation <strong>de</strong> laffichage<br />
L’affichage i<strong>de</strong>ntifie la chaîne <strong>en</strong> cours et l’état <strong>de</strong> certains paramètres audio et<br />
vidéo.<br />
O<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations.<br />
U Déplacer E Entrer e Quitter<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton INFO <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>. La télévision affiche la chaîne,<br />
le type <strong>de</strong> son et l’état <strong>de</strong> certains paramètres <strong>de</strong> son et d’image.<br />
• ▲, ▼: Vous pouvez afficher <strong>de</strong>s informations relatives à une autre chaîne.<br />
Pour accé<strong>de</strong>r à la chaîne actuellem<strong>en</strong>t sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton<br />
ENTERE.<br />
• ◄, ►: Vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives au programme souhaité<br />
<strong>de</strong> la chaîne actuelle.<br />
N Appuyez <strong>de</strong> nouveau sur le bouton INFO ou att<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>z <strong>en</strong>viron 10 secon<strong>de</strong>s<br />
pour que l'affichage dispar<strong>ais</strong>se automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 10
Fonction Plug & Play<br />
Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, <strong>de</strong>s réglages <strong>de</strong> base s’effectu<strong>en</strong>t l’un après l’autre <strong>de</strong> manière<br />
automatique.<br />
N L'écran <strong>de</strong> veille est activé si aucune touche <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> n'est actionnée p<strong>en</strong>dant plus d'une minute lorsque le mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Plug & Play est <strong>en</strong> cours d'exécution.<br />
N L'écran <strong>de</strong> veille est activé si aucun signal <strong>de</strong> fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t n'est reçu p<strong>en</strong>dant plus <strong>de</strong> 15 minutes.<br />
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>. You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
language. s’affiche automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t. Sélectionnez la langue appropriée <strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼.<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Enr. démo ou Util. domicile,<br />
puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Nous recommandons <strong>de</strong> régler la télévision sur le mo<strong>de</strong> Util. domicile pour<br />
une meilleure qualité d’image dans votre <strong>en</strong>vironnem<strong>en</strong>t personnel. Le mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Enr. démo n’est prévu que pour un usage <strong>en</strong> magasin.<br />
Si l’unité est acci<strong>de</strong>ntellem<strong>en</strong>t réglée sur le mo<strong>de</strong> Enr. démo et que vous souhaitez rev<strong>en</strong>ir au mo<strong>de</strong> Util. domicile<br />
(Standard): Appuyez sur le bouton Volume du téléviseur. Lorsque l’OSD du volume s’affiche, appuyez p<strong>en</strong>dant<br />
5 secon<strong>de</strong>s sur le bouton MENU du téléviseur.<br />
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays approprié <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton<br />
ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.<br />
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour mémoriser les chaînes <strong>de</strong> la connexion sélectionnée, puis appuyez sur le bouton<br />
ENTERE.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Hertzi<strong>en</strong>: signal d’ant<strong>en</strong>ne hertzi<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Câble: signal d’ant<strong>en</strong>ne câblé.<br />
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner la source <strong>de</strong> chaîne à mémoriser. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour<br />
sélectionner Démarrer.<br />
• Numérique et Analogique: Chaînes numériques et analogiques.<br />
• Numérique: Chaînes numériques.<br />
• Analogique: Chaînes analogiques.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Pour une <strong>de</strong>scription plus détaillée <strong>de</strong> la sélection du mo<strong>de</strong> Câble, reportez-vous à la page 12.<br />
La recherche <strong>de</strong> canaux démarrera et se terminera automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à tout mom<strong>en</strong>t pour interrompre la mémorisation.<br />
Une fois que tous les canaux disponibles sont mémorisés, le message Définit le mo<strong>de</strong> Horloge. s’affiche.<br />
N<br />
6. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Auto., puis appuyez sur le bouton<br />
ENTERE.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
Si vous sélectionnez <strong>Manuel</strong>, le message Définit la date et I'heure s’affiche. (reportez-vous à la page 24)<br />
Si vous avez reçu un signal numérique, l’heure sera automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t réglée. Sinon, reportez-vous à la page 24 pour<br />
régler l’horloge.<br />
7. Une brève instruction concernant la manière d’Comm<strong>en</strong>t obt<strong>en</strong>ir les meilleures performances <strong>de</strong> votre nouveau téléviseur<br />
HDTV s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.<br />
N Ce m<strong>en</strong>u est disponible dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Assistance du Gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> connexion HD.<br />
8. Le message Profitez <strong>de</strong> votre visionnage. s’affiche. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction...<br />
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou<br />
▼ pour sélectionner Configuration, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.<br />
2. Appuyez <strong>de</strong> nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Plug & Play.<br />
3. Entrez votre co<strong>de</strong> PIN à quatre chiffres. Le co<strong>de</strong> PIN par défaut d’un nouveau<br />
téléviseur est “0-0-0-0”.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si vous souhaitez changer ce co<strong>de</strong> PIN, reportez-vous à la page 22.<br />
La fonction Plug & Play est uniquem<strong>en</strong>t disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
Configuration<br />
Plug & Play<br />
langue <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us<br />
Horloge<br />
Diffuser<br />
Sécurité<br />
Général<br />
: Franç<strong>ais</strong><br />
►<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 11
Gestion <strong>de</strong>s canaux<br />
Mémorisation <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
❑<br />
•<br />
Pays<br />
Canal numérique: Permet <strong>de</strong> changer <strong>de</strong> pays pour les chaînes numériques.<br />
• Canal analogique: Permet <strong>de</strong> changer <strong>de</strong> pays pour les chaînes<br />
analogiques.<br />
N L’écran <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN apparaît. Entrez votre co<strong>de</strong> PIN à quatre chiffres.<br />
❑<br />
Mémorisation Auto<br />
Cherche toutes les chaînes avec <strong>de</strong>s stations <strong>de</strong> diffusion actives (et leur<br />
disponibilité <strong>en</strong> fonction du pays) et les <strong>en</strong>registre dans la mémoire du téléviseur.<br />
Vous pouvez mémoriser les chaînes <strong>de</strong> la connexion sélectionnée.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Hertzi<strong>en</strong> : signal d’ant<strong>en</strong>ne hertzi<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Câble : signal d’ant<strong>en</strong>ne câblé.<br />
N Lors <strong>de</strong> la sélection <strong>de</strong> l’option Câble,<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> rech : affiche le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> recherche (Rapi<strong>de</strong>)<br />
- Network ID : affiche le co<strong>de</strong> d’i<strong>de</strong>ntification du réseau.<br />
- Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce : affiche la fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce correspondant au canal<br />
- Modulation : affiche les valeurs <strong>de</strong> modulation disponibles.<br />
- Symbol Rate : affiche les taux <strong>de</strong> symboles disponibles.<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> rech : affiche le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> recherche (Complet, Réseau)<br />
- Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce (Début ~ Fin): affiche la fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce correspondant au canal.<br />
- Modulation : affiche les valeurs <strong>de</strong> modulation disponibles.<br />
- Symbol Rate : affiche les taux <strong>de</strong> symboles disponibles.<br />
Vous pouvez mémoriser la source <strong>de</strong> chaîne<br />
• Numérique et Analogique: Chaînes numériques et analogiques.<br />
• Numérique: Chaînes numériques.<br />
• Analogique: Chaînes analogiques.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si vous voulez arrêter la Mémorisation Auto, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Le message Arrêter le programme automatique ? s’affiche.<br />
Sélectionnez Oui <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la f<strong>en</strong>être <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN s’affiche.<br />
Canal<br />
Pays<br />
Mémorisation Auto<br />
Mémorisation <strong>Manuel</strong>le<br />
Option <strong>de</strong> recherche <strong>de</strong> câble<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Maint<strong>en</strong>ant et Après<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet<br />
Par défaut<br />
: Prés./Suiv.<br />
►<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 12<br />
Suite…
❑<br />
Mémorisation <strong>Manuel</strong>le<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> chercher manuellem<strong>en</strong>t une chaîne et <strong>de</strong> l’<strong>en</strong>registrer dans la mémoire du téléviseur.<br />
• Canal numérique (Numérique)<br />
Enregistrem<strong>en</strong>t manuel <strong>de</strong> chaînes numériques.<br />
N La fonction Canal numérique est uniquem<strong>en</strong>t disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> DTV.<br />
• Canal: Sélectionnez le numéro <strong>de</strong> chaîne à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s boutons ▲, ▼ ou <strong>de</strong>s chiffres (0-9).<br />
• Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce: Sélectionnez la fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s chiffres.<br />
• Ban<strong>de</strong> passante: Sélectionnez la ban<strong>de</strong> passante à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s boutons ▲, ▼ ou <strong>de</strong>s chiffres (0-9).<br />
N Au terme <strong>de</strong> la recherche, les chaînes <strong>de</strong> la liste sont mises à jour.<br />
• Canal analogique<br />
Enregistrem<strong>en</strong>t manuel <strong>de</strong> chaînes analogiques.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
• Programme (numéro <strong>de</strong> programme à attribuer à une chaîne): Sélectionnez le numéro <strong>de</strong> chaîne à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s boutons<br />
▲, ▼ ou <strong>de</strong>s chiffres (0-9).<br />
• Système <strong>de</strong> Couleur → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Sélectionnez le système <strong>de</strong> couleurs à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s boutons<br />
▲ ou ▼.<br />
• Système Sonore → BG / L / I / DK: Sélectionnez le système audio à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s boutons ▲ ou ▼.<br />
• Canal (si vous conn<strong>ais</strong>sez le numéro <strong>de</strong> la chaîne à mémoriser): Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner C (canal<br />
hertzi<strong>en</strong>) ou S (canal câblé). Appuyez sur le bouton ►, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ ou un chiffre (0-9) pour sélectionner le<br />
numéro <strong>de</strong> votre choix.<br />
N Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t sélectionner le numéro <strong>de</strong> chaîne directem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le pavé numérique (0-9).<br />
N<br />
Si aucun son ne sort ou si celui-ci est anormal, sélectionnez à nouveau la norme son requise.<br />
• Recherche (lorsque vous ne conn<strong>ais</strong>sez pas les numéros <strong>de</strong> chaîne): Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour lancer la<br />
recherche. Le syntoniseur balaie la plage <strong>de</strong> fréqu<strong>en</strong>ces jusqu’à ce que vous receviez la première chaîne ou la chaîne que<br />
vous avez sélectionnée à l’écran.<br />
• Mémoriser (Permet <strong>de</strong> mémoriser la chaîne et le numéro <strong>de</strong> programme correspondant): Sélectionnez OK <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur<br />
le bouton ENTERE .<br />
N Mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
- C (Mo<strong>de</strong> chaîne hertzi<strong>en</strong>ne): dans ce mo<strong>de</strong>, vous pouvez sélectionner un canal <strong>en</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>issant le numéro attribué à<br />
chacune <strong>de</strong>s stations <strong>de</strong> télédiffusion.<br />
- S (Mo<strong>de</strong> chaîne câblée): dans ce mo<strong>de</strong>, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne <strong>en</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>issant le numéro attribué à<br />
chacune <strong>de</strong>s chaînes câblées.<br />
Mod. Param. <strong>de</strong> rech. complète (Câble)<br />
Vous pouvez configurer <strong>de</strong>s options <strong>de</strong> recherche supplém<strong>en</strong>taires telles que la fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce et le taux <strong>de</strong> symbole pour la<br />
recherche <strong>de</strong> réseaux câblés (<strong>en</strong> fonction du pays).<br />
• Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce (Début ~ Fin): affiche la fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce correspondant au canal.<br />
• Modulation: affiche les valeurs <strong>de</strong> modulation disponibles.<br />
• Symbol Rate: affiche les taux <strong>de</strong> symboles disponibles.<br />
N Définissez la Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce (Début ~ Fin) et le Taux <strong>de</strong> symbole à l'ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s boutons (0~9).<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Maint<strong>en</strong>ant et Après / Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet<br />
Les informations relatives au Gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> programme électronique (EPG) sont fournies par les émetteurs. Les <strong>en</strong>trées <strong>de</strong><br />
programmes peuv<strong>en</strong>t apparaître <strong>en</strong> blanc ou ne pas être à jour <strong>en</strong> r<strong>ais</strong>on <strong>de</strong> l’information diffusée sur un canal donné. L’<br />
affichage fera une mise à jour automatique dès qu’une nouvelle information sera disponible.<br />
• Gui<strong>de</strong> Maint<strong>en</strong>ant et Après : Pour les six canaux indiqués dans la colonne <strong>de</strong> gauche, les informations relatives au<br />
programme actuel et au programme suivant sont affichées.<br />
• Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet : Affiche le programme heure par heure. Deux heures <strong>de</strong> programme sont affichées et vous pouvez faire<br />
défiler le programme <strong>en</strong> avançant ou <strong>en</strong> remontant dans le temps.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 13
❑<br />
Par défaut<br />
• Prés./Suiv. / Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet: Vous pouvez choisir d’afficher soit le Prés./Suiv. soit le<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton GUIDE <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Canal<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Maint<strong>en</strong>ant et Après<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet<br />
Par défaut : Prés./Suiv. ►<br />
Liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> Canal<br />
: Chaînes ajoutées<br />
Réglage fin<br />
O<br />
Vous pouvez aussi afficher le gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong> appuyant tout simplem<strong>en</strong>t sur le<br />
bouton GUIDE.<br />
Utilisation du Gui<strong>de</strong> Maint<strong>en</strong>ant et Après / gui<strong>de</strong> complet<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Maint<strong>en</strong>ant et Après<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Prés.<br />
Suiv.<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Voir Information Page • Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet • Quitter<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
f tn<br />
900 Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Voir Information Page • Prés./Suiv. • Quitter<br />
▲/▼/◄/►,<br />
(ENTER)<br />
ROUGE<br />
VERT<br />
JAU<strong>NE</strong><br />
BLEU<br />
INFO<br />
Sélectionnez un programme <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton ▲/▼/◄/►.<br />
Si le programme suivant est sélectionné, il est réglé avec l'icône <strong>de</strong> l'horloge affiché. Si vous appuyez<br />
à nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE, puis sur ▲/▼/◄/► pour sélectionner Annuler progr., la<br />
programmation est annulée et l'icône <strong>de</strong> l'horloge disparaît.<br />
Pour plus d'informations sur la programmation <strong>de</strong>s programmes, reportez-vous à la section.<br />
Basculer <strong>en</strong>tre Prés./Suiv. et Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet.<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet: Reculer rapi<strong>de</strong>m<strong>en</strong>t (-24 heures).<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> Complet: Avancer rapi<strong>de</strong>m<strong>en</strong>t (+24 heures).<br />
Quitter le gui<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Le bouton INFO permet d'obt<strong>en</strong>ir <strong>de</strong>s informations détaillées. Numéro <strong>de</strong> canal, temps <strong>de</strong><br />
fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t du programme, barre d'état, niveau <strong>de</strong> contrôle par<strong>en</strong>tal, informations sur la qualité<br />
vidéo (HD/SD), mo<strong>de</strong>s sonores, sous-titres ou Teletext, Langue <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres ou du Teletext et bref<br />
résumé du programme surligné font partie <strong>de</strong>s informations supplém<strong>en</strong>taires. “…” apparaîtra si le<br />
résumé est long.<br />
❑<br />
Liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
Pour obt<strong>en</strong>ir plus <strong>de</strong> détails sur les procédures d’utilisation <strong>de</strong> la Liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes, reportez-vous aux <strong>de</strong>scriptions <strong>de</strong>s<br />
pages 15~16.<br />
❑<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> Canal<br />
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton P < / >, l'ordre <strong>de</strong>s chaînes affichées change dans la liste <strong>de</strong> chaînes sélectionnée.<br />
• Chaînes ajoutées : L'ordre <strong>de</strong>s chaînes change dans la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes mémorisées.<br />
• Favoris : L'ordre <strong>de</strong>s chaînes change dans la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes favorites.<br />
❑<br />
Réglage fin (chaîne analogique uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Si la réception est nette, vous n’avez pas besoin d’effectuer un réglage fin du canal, car cette opération s’effectue<br />
automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t p<strong>en</strong>dant la recherche et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou déformé, vous pouvez être am<strong>en</strong>é à<br />
effectuer manuellem<strong>en</strong>t un réglage fin du canal.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Les canaux réglés et mémorisés sont repérés par un astérisque * placé à droite <strong>de</strong> leur numéro dans la bannière <strong>de</strong>s<br />
canaux.<br />
Si vous n’<strong>en</strong>registrez pas les chaînes à synchronisation fine dans la mémoire, les réglages ne seront pas <strong>en</strong>registrés.<br />
Pour réinitialiser le réglage, sélectionnez Réinit. à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du bouton ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 14
Gestion <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
<br />
Ce m<strong>en</strong>u permet d’ajouter/supprimer ou définir <strong>de</strong>s chaînes favorites et d’utiliser le<br />
gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s programmes pour les émissions numériques.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l'écran Tous Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées,<br />
Favoris ou Programmé <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur les boutons<br />
▲ ou ▼, puis sur le bouton ENTER E.<br />
Tous les canaux: Affiche toutes les chaînes actuellem<strong>en</strong>t disponibles.<br />
Canaux ajoutés: Affiche toutes les chaînes ajoutées.<br />
Favoris: Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites.<br />
Programmé: Affiche tous les programmes actuellem<strong>en</strong>t réservés.<br />
N Utilisation <strong>de</strong>s boutons <strong>de</strong> couleur dans la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
- Rouge (Type <strong>de</strong> chaîne): Permet <strong>de</strong> basculer <strong>en</strong>tre TV, Radio, Donn/Outre et<br />
Tous.<br />
N<br />
O<br />
- Vert (Zoom): Agrandit ou réduit une chaîne.<br />
- Jaune (Sélectionner): Sélectionne <strong>de</strong>s listes <strong>de</strong> chaînes.<br />
-<br />
TTOOLS (Outils) : Affiche le m<strong>en</strong>u Supprimer (ou Ajouter), Ajouter aux<br />
favoris (ou Supprimer <strong>de</strong>s favoris), Rappel <strong>de</strong> programme, Edit Channel<br />
Name, Modif. numéro chaîne, Tri <strong>de</strong>s canaux, Verrouil. (ou Déverr.),<br />
Sélectionner tout (ou Désélectionner tout) ou Mémorisation Auto.<br />
(Les m<strong>en</strong>us Options peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction <strong>de</strong> la situation.)<br />
Icônes d’état <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
A Chaîne analogique. c Chaîne sélectionnée <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton jaune.<br />
♥ Chaîne définie comme Favorite. ( Programme <strong>en</strong> cours <strong>de</strong> diffusion.<br />
\ Chaîne verrouillée. ) Programme réservé<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton CH LIST <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> pour afficher les listes <strong>de</strong><br />
chaînes.<br />
Canal<br />
Chaînes ajoutées<br />
Mini Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Par défaut<br />
Liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> Canal<br />
Réglage fin<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
: Prés./Suiv.<br />
: Chaînes ajoutées<br />
Tous • Type <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Sélection Outils<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u d’options <strong>de</strong> la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes (dans Tous les canaux / Canaux ajoutés / Favoris)<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
Les élém<strong>en</strong>ts du m<strong>en</strong>u Options peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier selon la chaîne.<br />
• Ajouter / Supprimé<br />
Vous pouvez supprimer ou ajouter une chaîne afin d’afficher les chaînes <strong>de</strong> votre choix.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Tous les canaux.<br />
Une chaîne grisée est une chaîne qui a été supprimée.<br />
Le m<strong>en</strong>u Ajouter apparaît uniquem<strong>en</strong>t pour les chaînes supprimées.<br />
De la même manière, vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t ajouter une chaîne au m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Canaux ajoutés ou Favoris.<br />
• Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer <strong>de</strong>s favoris<br />
Vous pouvez définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regar<strong>de</strong>z souv<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
Tous les canaux<br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C -- Supprimer<br />
A 2 C -- Ajouter aux favoris<br />
A 3 C -- Rappel <strong>de</strong> programme<br />
A 4 C -- Modifi. nom <strong>de</strong> chaîne<br />
A 5 C -- Tri <strong>de</strong>s canaux<br />
A 6 C -- Verrouil.<br />
A 7 C --<br />
▼<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Tous • Type <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Sélection Outils<br />
T<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t définir une chaîne favorite <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant Outils → Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer <strong>de</strong>s favoris<br />
Le symbole “♥” s’affiche et la chaîne est définie comme favorite.<br />
Toutes les chaînes favorites apparaîtront dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Favoris.<br />
Pour sélectionner les chaînes favorites que vous avez configurées, appuyez<br />
sur le bouton FAV.CH <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Suite…<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 15
• Ecoute programmée<br />
Si vous réservez un programme que vous souhaitez regar<strong>de</strong>r, la chaîne bascule automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t vers la chaîne réservée<br />
dans la liste <strong>de</strong> chaînes, même lorsque vous êtes <strong>en</strong> train <strong>de</strong> regar<strong>de</strong>r une autre chaîne. Pour réserver un programme réglez d’<br />
abord l’heure actuelle. (reportez-vous à la page 24)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Seules les chaînes mémorisées peuv<strong>en</strong>t être sélectionnées.<br />
Vous pouvez régler directem<strong>en</strong>t la chaîne, le mois, le jour, l’heure et les minutes à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du pavé numérique <strong>de</strong> la<br />
télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Programmé.<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s programmes numérique et affichage <strong>de</strong>s réservations<br />
Lorsqu’une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée et que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, le Gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s programmes <strong>de</strong> la<br />
chaîne apparaît.<br />
Vous pouvez réserver un programme <strong>en</strong> suivant les procédures décrites ci-<strong>de</strong>ssus.<br />
• Modifi. nom <strong>de</strong> chaîne (chaîne analogique uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Les chaînes peuv<strong>en</strong>t recevoir un libellé qui s’affichera chaque fois que la chaîne est sélectionnée.<br />
N<br />
Les chaînes numériques ont <strong>de</strong>s noms qui leur sont automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t attribués et ne peuv<strong>en</strong>t pas être modifiés.<br />
• Modif. numéro chaîne (chaînes numériques uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t modifier le numéro <strong>de</strong> chaîne à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du pavé numérique <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Tri <strong>de</strong>s canaux (chaîne analogique uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Cette opération vous permet <strong>de</strong> changer les numéros <strong>de</strong> programme <strong>de</strong>s canaux mémorisés. Cette opération peut s’avérer<br />
nécessaire après l’utilisation <strong>de</strong> la mémorisation automatique.<br />
• Verrouil. / Déverr.<br />
Vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu’elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni visualisée. Cette fonction n’est disponible<br />
que lorsque la fonction Verrouillage Canal est à Marche. (Voir page 22)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
L’écran <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN apparaît. Entrez votre co<strong>de</strong> PIN à quatre chiffres.<br />
Le co<strong>de</strong> PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est “0-0-0-0”. Vous pouvez modifier le co<strong>de</strong> PIN <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant<br />
Modifier PIN dans le m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Le symbole “\” s’affiche et la chaîne est verrouillée.<br />
• Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout<br />
• Sélectionner tout: Vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les chaînes <strong>de</strong> la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes.<br />
• Désélectionner tout: Vous pouvez désélectionner toutes les chaînes sélectionnées dans la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes.<br />
N Vous pouvez appliquer les fonctions Ajouter/Supprimer, Ajouter aux favoris/Supprimer <strong>de</strong>s favoris, ou Verrouil./<br />
Déverrouiller à plusieurs chaînes à la fois. Sélectionnez les chaînes voulues et appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter<br />
toutes les chaînes sélectionnées à la fois.<br />
N La marque c s’affiche à gauche <strong>de</strong>s chaînes sélectionnées.<br />
N La fonction Désélectionner tout n’est disponible que si au moins une chaîne est sélectionnée.<br />
• Mémorisation Auto<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Pour plus d’informations concernant le réglage <strong>de</strong>s options, reportez-vous à la page 12.<br />
Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la f<strong>en</strong>être <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN s’affiche.<br />
❑<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u d’options <strong>de</strong> la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes (dans Programmé)<br />
Vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une réservation.<br />
N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le m<strong>en</strong>u Tools (Outils).<br />
• Infos modif.: Permet <strong>de</strong> modifier une réservation.<br />
• Annuler progr.: Permet d’annuler une réservation.<br />
• Information: Permet <strong>de</strong> visualiser une réservation (et d’<strong>en</strong> changer les<br />
données).<br />
• Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout : Permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner ou <strong>de</strong><br />
désélectionner tous les programmes réservés.<br />
Programmé<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 TV1 Infos modif. Quincy, M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Annuler progr.<br />
TV3 The Equalizer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Information<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Sélectionner tout<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Tous • Zoom • Sélection Outils Information<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 16
Réglage <strong>de</strong> l’image<br />
Modification et rétablissem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong>s paramètres d’image<br />
❑<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d’image qui correspond le mieux à vos exig<strong>en</strong>ces<br />
d’affichage.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Dynamique: Sélectionne une image haute-définition pour les <strong>en</strong>vironnem<strong>en</strong>ts<br />
lumineux.<br />
Standard: Sélectionne l'affichage optimal pour les <strong>en</strong>vironnem<strong>en</strong>ts normaux.<br />
Cinéma: Sélectionne un affichage adapté aux <strong>en</strong>vironnem<strong>en</strong>ts sombres.<br />
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t définir le mo<strong>de</strong> d’image <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant Outils →<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> Image.<br />
Image<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Standard ►<br />
Lum. Cellules : 4<br />
Contraste : 95<br />
Luminosité : 45<br />
Netteté : 50<br />
Couleur : 50<br />
Teinte (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
❑<br />
Lum. Cellules / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R)<br />
Votre téléviseur dispose <strong>de</strong> plusieurs options qui vous permett<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> régler la qualité <strong>de</strong> l’image.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Lum. Cellules: Règle la luminosité <strong>de</strong>s pixels.<br />
Contraste: Règle le niveau <strong>de</strong> contraste.<br />
Luminosité: Règle le niveau <strong>de</strong> luminosité.<br />
Netteté: Règle la définition.<br />
Couleur: Règle la saturation <strong>de</strong>s couleurs via la barre à l'écran.<br />
Teinte (V/R): Plus on s'approche <strong>de</strong> Rouge 100, plus la couleur rouge est saturée.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sélectionnez un mo<strong>de</strong> d’image à ajuster. Les valeurs ajustées sont <strong>en</strong>registrées pour tous les mo<strong>de</strong>s d’image.<br />
Lorsque vous modifiez les paramètres Lum. Cellules, Contraste, Luminosité, Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R), l’écran<br />
se modifie <strong>en</strong> conséqu<strong>en</strong>ce.<br />
En mo<strong>de</strong> Analog TV, Ext., AV, S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o du système PAL, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte.<br />
Vous pouvez effectuer <strong>de</strong>s réglages pour chaque appareil externe connecté à une <strong>en</strong>trée du téléviseur et les <strong>en</strong>registrer.<br />
L’énergie consommée p<strong>en</strong>dant le fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t peut être s<strong>en</strong>siblem<strong>en</strong>t réduite <strong>en</strong> b<strong>ais</strong>sant le niveau <strong>de</strong> luminosité <strong>de</strong> l’<br />
image. Cela réduira le coût <strong>de</strong> fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t général.<br />
❑<br />
Paramètres avancés<br />
Les nouveaux téléviseurs <strong>Samsung</strong> permett<strong>en</strong>t d’effectuer <strong>de</strong>s réglages d’image<br />
<strong>en</strong>core plus précis que les modèles précé<strong>de</strong>nts. Ce qui suit explique comm<strong>en</strong>t<br />
régler les paramètres détaillés <strong>de</strong> l’image.<br />
N Paramètres avancés est disponible dans les mo<strong>de</strong>s Standard et Cinéma.<br />
• Nuance <strong>de</strong> noir → Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre<br />
Vous pouvez choisir le niveau <strong>de</strong> noir sur l’écran pour régler la profon<strong>de</strong>ur <strong>de</strong> l’<br />
écran.<br />
• Contraste Dynam.→ Arrêt / Bas / Moy<strong>en</strong> / Elevé<br />
Vous pouvez régler le contraste <strong>de</strong> l’écran pour obt<strong>en</strong>ir un contraste optimal.<br />
• Gamma<br />
Vous pouvez régler l’int<strong>en</strong>sité <strong>de</strong>s couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu).<br />
• Espace couleur<br />
Un espace <strong>de</strong> couleur est une matrice <strong>de</strong> couleurs composée <strong>de</strong> rouge, <strong>de</strong> vert et <strong>de</strong> bleu. Sélectionnez votre espace <strong>de</strong><br />
couleur préféré et appréciez la couleur la plus naturelle.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Auto. : définit automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t la gamme <strong>de</strong> couleurs <strong>en</strong> fonction <strong>de</strong> la source vidéo d’<strong>en</strong>trée.<br />
Natif: définit une gamme <strong>de</strong> couleurs plus large <strong>en</strong> fonction <strong>de</strong> la source vidéo d’<strong>en</strong>trée.<br />
Couleur : 50<br />
Teinte (R/G)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
Paramètres avancés<br />
• Balance blancs<br />
Vous pouvez régler la température <strong>de</strong>s couleurs pour que celles-ci soi<strong>en</strong>t plus naturelles.<br />
• Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu / Regl. Rouge / Regl. vert / Regl. bleu: La modification <strong>de</strong>s valeurs <strong>de</strong> réglage permet d’<br />
actualiser l’écran que vous v<strong>en</strong>ez <strong>de</strong> retoucher.<br />
• Réinit. : rétablit les valeurs par défaut <strong>de</strong> l’espace <strong>de</strong> couleur.<br />
• Carnation<br />
Vous pouvez acc<strong>en</strong>tuer le ton chair <strong>de</strong> l’image.<br />
N La modification <strong>de</strong>s valeurs <strong>de</strong> réglage permet d’actualiser l’écran que vous v<strong>en</strong>ez <strong>de</strong> retoucher.<br />
• Netteté <strong>de</strong>s contours → Arrêt / Marche<br />
Vous pouvez faire ressortir la bordure <strong>de</strong>s objets sur l’image.<br />
Image<br />
Options d'image<br />
Réinitialisation <strong>de</strong> l’image<br />
►<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 17
❑<br />
Options d'image<br />
• Nuance Coul. → Froi<strong>de</strong> / Normal / Chau<strong>de</strong>1 / Chau<strong>de</strong>2<br />
Vous pouvez sélectionner la nuance <strong>de</strong> couleur la plus agréable au regard.<br />
N Les valeurs réglées sont mémorisées <strong>en</strong> fonction du mo<strong>de</strong> Image<br />
sélectionné.<br />
N<br />
Chau<strong>de</strong>1 ou Chau<strong>de</strong>2 ne sont activées que lorsque le mo<strong>de</strong> d’image est<br />
Cinéma.<br />
Image<br />
Teinte (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
Paramètres avancés<br />
Options d'image<br />
Réinitialisation <strong>de</strong> l’image<br />
►<br />
• Format<br />
Vous pouvez sélectionner la taille d’image qui correspond le mieux à vos<br />
besoins d’affichage.<br />
• 16/9 auto: Sélectionne 16 :9 Auto comme format d'image..<br />
• 16:9: Met l'image au format 16:9.<br />
• Zoom large: Ce m<strong>en</strong>u permet d'afficher les images au format 4:3 à un format TV 16:9 <strong>en</strong> étirant l'image 4:3 verticalem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• Zoom: Etire l'image au format 16:9 verticalem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• 4:3: Met l'image au format 4:3.<br />
• Adapter à l'écran: Affiche le signal HD natif complet qui ne peut pas être visualisé à l'ai<strong>de</strong> d'un téléviseur classique.<br />
N Les options <strong>de</strong> taille <strong>de</strong> l'image peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction <strong>de</strong> la source d'<strong>en</strong>trée<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Les élém<strong>en</strong>ts disponibles peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction du mo<strong>de</strong> sélectionné.<br />
Vous pouvez effectuer <strong>de</strong>s réglages pour chaque appareil externe connecté à une <strong>en</strong>trée du téléviseur et les <strong>en</strong>registrer.<br />
Une réman<strong>en</strong>ce temporaire peut se produire lorsque vous affichez une image statique p<strong>en</strong>dant une ou <strong>de</strong>ux heures sur<br />
l’écran du téléviseur.<br />
Zoom large: Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Utilisez le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Appuyez <strong>en</strong>suite sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Zoom: Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE . Appuyez le bouton<br />
▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l’image vers le haut et vers le bas. Appuyez <strong>en</strong>suite sur le bouton ENTERE . Appuyez sur le<br />
bouton ► pour sélectionner Taille, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE . Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour agrandir<br />
ou réduire la hauteur <strong>de</strong> l’image. Appuyez <strong>en</strong>suite sur le bouton ENTERE .<br />
Après avoir sélectionné l’option Adapter à l'écran <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> HDMI (1080i/1080p) ou Composant (1080i/1080p):<br />
Sélectionnez Position à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du bouton ◄ ou ►. Utilisez le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l’image.<br />
Réinit.: Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Réinit., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE . Vous pouvez<br />
initialiser le réglage.<br />
Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter à l'écran avec l’<strong>en</strong>trée HDMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée <strong>en</strong> haut, <strong>en</strong> bas, à gauche<br />
et à droite, comme avec la fonction overscan.<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> écran<br />
Lorsque vous fixez la taille <strong>de</strong> l’image à 16/9 auto sur un téléviseur 16:9, vous pouvez déterminer la taille selon laquelle vous<br />
voulez afficher une image 4:3 WSS (Wi<strong>de</strong> Scre<strong>en</strong> Service, service d’écran large) ou ri<strong>en</strong>. Chaque pays europé<strong>en</strong> emploie une<br />
taille d’image ; cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs <strong>de</strong> sélectionner la leur.<br />
• 16:9: Met l'image au format 16:9.<br />
• Zoom large: Ce m<strong>en</strong>u permet d'afficher les images au format 4:3 à un format TV 16:9 <strong>en</strong> étirant l'image 4:3 verticalem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• Zoom: Etire l'image au format 16:9 verticalem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• 4:3: Sélectionne 4:3 comme mo<strong>de</strong> écran.<br />
N Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’<strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> 16/9 auto.<br />
N<br />
Cette fonction n’est pas disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>, Composant ou HDMI.<br />
• NR numérique → Arrêt / Bas / Moy<strong>en</strong> / Elevé / Auto.<br />
Si le signal <strong>de</strong> radiodiffusion reçu est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction Digital Noise Reduction pour favoriser la réduction<br />
d’images fantômes ou statiques qui peuv<strong>en</strong>t apparaître à l’écran.<br />
N<br />
Lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu’à obt<strong>en</strong>tion <strong>de</strong> la meilleure image possible.<br />
• Niv. noir HDMI → Normal / Bas<br />
Vous pouvez directem<strong>en</strong>t choisir le niveau <strong>de</strong> noir sur l’écran pour régler la profon<strong>de</strong>ur <strong>de</strong> l’écran.<br />
N<br />
Cette fonction n’est active que lorsque l’<strong>en</strong>trée externe se connecte à HDMI (signaux RVB).<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 18<br />
Suite…
• Mo<strong>de</strong> Film<br />
Vous pouvez optimiser le mo<strong>de</strong> d’image lorsque vous regar<strong>de</strong>z <strong>de</strong>s films.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Arrêt : Traitem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong>s images vidéo <strong>de</strong> base appliqué et aucune auto-détection <strong>de</strong>s programmes film.<br />
Auto: Effectue automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t le règlage sur la meilleure qualité d'image <strong>en</strong>tre les films et les programmes vidéo.<br />
• Protection brûlure écran<br />
Configure les options <strong>de</strong> protection contre la brûlure d'écran afin d'empêcher et <strong>de</strong> réduire la brûlure <strong>de</strong>s pixels.<br />
Lorsqu'une image reste trop longtemps dans la même position, cela peut <strong>en</strong>traîner une brûlure définitive sur l'écran.<br />
• Modif. pixel: Pour réduire le risque <strong>de</strong> brûlure d'écran, cet écran est équipé d'une technologie <strong>de</strong> prév<strong>en</strong>tion <strong>de</strong>s brûlures.<br />
Cette fonction permet <strong>de</strong> régler le mouvem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> l'image <strong>de</strong> bas <strong>en</strong> haut (verticale) et <strong>de</strong> gauche à droite (horizontal). Le<br />
réglage <strong>de</strong> l'horloge permet <strong>de</strong> programmer <strong>en</strong> quelques minutes la durée séparant les mouvem<strong>en</strong>ts <strong>de</strong> l'image.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ or ▼ pour activer (Marche) la fonction Modif. pixel, puis sur ENTERE.<br />
Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton ▲ or ▼, puis sur ENTERE.<br />
Options disponibles: Nbre horizont., Nbre vertic.,Horloge.<br />
Conditions optimales pour la modification <strong>de</strong>s pixels<br />
Option<br />
TV/Ext/AV/Composant/HDMI<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Nbre horizont. 0~4 2<br />
Nbre vertic. 0~4 2<br />
Horloge (minutes) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
La valeur <strong>de</strong> Pixel Shift peut changer selon le mo<strong>de</strong> et la taille du moniteur (pouces).<br />
Cette fonction n'est pas disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> Adapter à l'écran.<br />
• Défilem<strong>en</strong>t: cette fonction contribue à supprimer les images résiduelles à l'écran <strong>en</strong> déplaçant tous les pixels sur l'écran<br />
à plasma, selon un motif prédéfini. Utilisez cette fonction lorsque <strong>de</strong>s images résiduelles ou <strong>de</strong>s symboles appar<strong>ais</strong>s<strong>en</strong>t à<br />
l'écran, <strong>en</strong> particulier lorsque vous affichez une image fixe à l'écran p<strong>en</strong>dant une longue pério<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Gris <strong>de</strong> bord: si vous regar<strong>de</strong>z la télévision dans un rapport d'écran 4:3, l'écran est protégé contre tout dommage grâce à<br />
l'ajustem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> la balance <strong>de</strong>s blancs sur les côtés gauche et droit.<br />
- Sombre: si le rapport d'écran est défini sur 4:3, les bords gauche et droit sont assombris.<br />
- Clair: si le rapport d'écran est défini sur 4:3, les bords gauche et droit sont éclaircis.<br />
❑<br />
Réinitialisation <strong>de</strong> l’image → Réinitial. mo<strong>de</strong> image /<br />
Annuler<br />
Rétablit toutes les valeurs par défaut <strong>de</strong> l’image.<br />
N<br />
Sélectionnez un mo<strong>de</strong> d’image à rétablir. La fonction <strong>de</strong><br />
réinitialisation est exécutée pour chaque mo<strong>de</strong> d’image.<br />
Image<br />
Paramètres avancés<br />
Options d'image<br />
Réinitialisation <strong>de</strong> l'image<br />
►<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 19
Réglage du son<br />
Changem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> la norme Son<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> → Standard / Musique / Cinéma / Voix claire / Personnel<br />
Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d’effet sonore souhaité lorsque vous regar<strong>de</strong>z un<br />
programme donné.<br />
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t définir le mo<strong>de</strong> audio <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant<br />
Outils → Mo<strong>de</strong> Son.<br />
Egaliseur<br />
Les paramètres du son peuv<strong>en</strong>t être réglés selon vos préfér<strong>en</strong>ces personnelles.<br />
Volume auto<br />
: Arrêt<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>: Vous pouvez sélectionner un mo<strong>de</strong> sonore à votre conv<strong>en</strong>ance.<br />
Balance: Définit la balance <strong>en</strong>tre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Réglage <strong>de</strong> la ban<strong>de</strong> passante): Permet <strong>de</strong> régler le niveau <strong>de</strong> fréqu<strong>en</strong>ces <strong>de</strong> la<br />
ban<strong>de</strong> passante.<br />
• Réinit.: rétablit les valeurs par défaut <strong>de</strong> l’égaliseur.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Arrêt / Marche<br />
SRS TruSurround HD correspond à la technologie TruBass qui associe les fonctionnalités TruSurround et FOCUS.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD permet <strong>de</strong> bénéficier du son Surround 5.1 virtuel au niveau <strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>ux haut-parleurs du téléviseur.<br />
Cette fonction offre <strong>de</strong>s basses riches et améliore la résolution <strong>de</strong>s hautes fréqu<strong>en</strong>ces.<br />
Cette fonction offre non seulem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong>s basses profon<strong>de</strong>s et riches avec un son grave m<strong>ais</strong> améliore égalem<strong>en</strong>t la résolution<br />
avec les sons aigus.<br />
N<br />
Si le son est anormal lors <strong>de</strong> l’écoute <strong>de</strong> musique sur le téléviseur, réglez l’égaliseur et la fonction SRS TruSurround HD<br />
(Arrêt/Marche).<br />
align<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Personnel ►<br />
Egaliseur<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Arrêt<br />
Langue audio : ----<br />
Format Audio : ----<br />
Description audio<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS et le symbole sont <strong>de</strong>s marques <strong>de</strong> SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
La technologie TruSurround HD est protégée par la lic<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong> SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Langue audio (chaînes numériques uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Vous pouvez modifier la langue par défaut <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres et <strong>de</strong> l’audio. Affiche les informations relatives à la langue pour le<br />
flot d’<strong>en</strong>trée.<br />
N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquem<strong>en</strong>t parmi les langues <strong>en</strong> cours <strong>de</strong> diffusion.<br />
Format Audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (chaînes numériques uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d’écho peut se produire <strong>en</strong> r<strong>ais</strong>on<br />
<strong>de</strong> la différ<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong> vitesse <strong>de</strong> décodage <strong>en</strong>tre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction<br />
Haut-parleur TV.<br />
N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquem<strong>en</strong>t parmi les langues <strong>en</strong> cours <strong>de</strong> diffusion.<br />
Fabriqué sous lic<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong> Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby et le symbole du double D sont <strong>de</strong>s marques déposées <strong>de</strong>s laboratoires Dolby.<br />
❑<br />
Description audio (chaînes numériques uniquem<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
Il s’agit d’une fonction audio auxiliaire qui fournit une piste audio supplém<strong>en</strong>taire à l’int<strong>en</strong>tion <strong>de</strong>s personnes malvoyantes.<br />
Cette fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la Description audio (AD) lorsqu’il est <strong>en</strong>voyé avec le son principal par le<br />
radiodiffuseur. Les utilisateurs peuv<strong>en</strong>t activer ou désactiver la <strong>de</strong>scription audio et régler le volume.<br />
O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton AD <strong>de</strong> la<br />
télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Description audio → Arrêt / Marche<br />
Active ou désactive la fonction <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>scription audio.<br />
• Volume<br />
Permet d’ajuster le volume <strong>de</strong> la <strong>de</strong>scription audio.<br />
N Volume est actif lorsque Description audio est défini à Marche.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 20
❑<br />
❑<br />
Volume auto → Arrêt / Marche<br />
Chaque station <strong>de</strong> télédiffusion possè<strong>de</strong> ses propres conditions <strong>de</strong> signal et il n’est donc pas facile <strong>de</strong> régler le volume<br />
chaque fois que vous changez <strong>de</strong> chaîne. Cette fonction vous permet <strong>de</strong> régler automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t le volume du canal désiré<br />
<strong>en</strong> réduisant la puissance sonore lorsque le signal <strong>de</strong> modulation est élevé ou <strong>en</strong> augm<strong>en</strong>tant la puissance sonore lorsque le<br />
signal <strong>de</strong> modulation est faible.<br />
Sélection Haut-parleur → Haut-parleur externe/Haut-parleur TV<br />
Pour <strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>dre le son par l’intermédiaire d’<strong>en</strong>ceintes séparées, désactivez l’amplificateur interne.<br />
N Les boutons – +, M MUTE ne fonctionn<strong>en</strong>t pas lorsque la fonction Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur<br />
Haut-parleur externe.<br />
N Si vous sélectionnez Haut-parleur externe dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Sélection Haut-parleur, les paramètres <strong>de</strong> son sont limités.<br />
Haut-parleurs internes du téléviseur Sortie audio (Optique, Sortie G/D) vers système audio<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Haut-parleur TV Sortie <strong>en</strong>ceinte Sortie son<br />
Haut-parleur externe Sil<strong>en</strong>ce Sortie son<br />
Abs<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong> signal vidéo Sil<strong>en</strong>ce Sil<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
❑<br />
Volume auto : Arrêt<br />
Réinitialisation du son → Réinitial. tout / Réinitial. mo<strong>de</strong> son /<br />
Annuler<br />
Vous pouvez ram<strong>en</strong>er tous les réglages mémorisés à leur valeur par défaut.<br />
Son<br />
Sélection Haut-parleur : Haut-parleur TV<br />
Réinitialisation du son<br />
►<br />
Sélection du mo<strong>de</strong> Son<br />
Lorsque vous réglez cette option sur Dual l ll, le mo<strong>de</strong> sonore actuel est affiché à l’écran.<br />
NICAM<br />
stéréo<br />
Type <strong>de</strong> programme Indication à<br />
l'écran<br />
Programme normal<br />
(Audio standard)<br />
Normal + Mono NICAM<br />
NICAM Stéréo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
stéréo<br />
Indication à l’écran<br />
Mono (Usage normal)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM DUAL-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
dual 1<br />
NICAM<br />
dual 2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
A2<br />
stéréo<br />
Programme normal<br />
(Audio standard)<br />
Mono (Usage normal)<br />
Bilingue ou DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stéréo<br />
Stéréo<br />
Mono<br />
(Mono forcé)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu’une permutation automatique se produit, passez alors <strong>en</strong> Mono.<br />
Cette fonction n’est activée qu’<strong>en</strong> son stéréo. Elle est désactivée <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> mono.<br />
Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’<strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 21
Description <strong>de</strong>s fonctions<br />
Utilisation du m<strong>en</strong>u Setup<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
langue <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us<br />
Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us.<br />
Diffuser<br />
• Sous-titres<br />
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction sous-titres. Utilisez ce m<strong>en</strong>u pour<br />
configurer le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres. Normal sélectionne les sous-titres <strong>de</strong> base ;<br />
Mal<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>dants sélectionne les sous-titres pour personnes mal<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>dantes.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Sous-titres → Arrêt / Marche: Active ou désactive les sous-titres.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> → Normal / Mal<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>dants: Configure le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres.<br />
Langue <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres: Configure la langue <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres.<br />
Si le programme visionné n’offre pas <strong>de</strong> fonction Mal<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>dants, le mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Normal est automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t activé même si le mo<strong>de</strong> Mal<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>dants est<br />
sélectionné.<br />
L’angl<strong>ais</strong> est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas disponible.<br />
Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton SUBT. <strong>de</strong> la<br />
télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Texte numérique → Désactiver / Activer<br />
Si le programme est diffusé avec du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée.<br />
N<br />
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
Norme internationale pour les systèmes <strong>de</strong> codage <strong>de</strong>s données utilisés avec le multimédia et l’hypermédia. Niveau<br />
supérieur à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut <strong>de</strong> l’hypermédia à li<strong>ais</strong>on <strong>de</strong> données tel que <strong>de</strong>s images fixes, le service <strong>de</strong><br />
caractères, l’animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie utilisateur d’<br />
interaction <strong>de</strong> durée d’utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la <strong>de</strong>man<strong>de</strong> (VOD), la télévision interactive (ITV),<br />
le commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconfér<strong>en</strong>ce, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux <strong>en</strong> réseau.<br />
• Langue du télétexte<br />
Vous pouvez définir la langue du télétexte <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant le type <strong>de</strong> langue.<br />
N L’angl<strong>ais</strong> est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas disponible.<br />
• Préfér<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
• Première Langue Audio/Deuxième Langue Audio/Langue princ. sous-titres/Langue sec. sous-titres/Première<br />
Langue Télétexte/Deuxième Langue Télétexte<br />
Cette fonction permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner une <strong>de</strong>s langues disponibles. La langue sélectionnée ici est la Langue par défaut<br />
lorsque l’utilisateur sélectionne un canal.<br />
Si vous changez la langue, les options Langue <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres, Langue audio et Langue du télétexte du m<strong>en</strong>u Langue sont<br />
automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t modifiées <strong>en</strong> conséqu<strong>en</strong>ce.<br />
Les options Langue <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres, Langue audio et Langue du télétexte du m<strong>en</strong>u Langue prés<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>t une liste <strong>de</strong>s<br />
languaes prises <strong>en</strong> charge par la chaîne actuelle et la langue sélectionnée est mise <strong>en</strong> surbrillance. Si vous modifiez le<br />
réglage <strong>de</strong>s langues, la nouvelle sélection n’est valable que pour le canal actuel. Le nouveau réglage n’affecte pas la<br />
langue <strong>de</strong>s sous-titres principale, la langue audio principale ni la langue télétexte principale sélectionnées dans le m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong><br />
préfér<strong>en</strong>ces.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Interface commune<br />
Installation <strong>de</strong> la carte d’interface commune (CI)<br />
1. Achetez le module CI CAM <strong>en</strong> vous r<strong>en</strong>dant chez le rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ur le plus proche<br />
ou par téléphone.<br />
2. Insérez la CI CARD dans la CAM dans la direction indiquée par la flèche<br />
jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit emboîtée.<br />
3. érez la CAM avec la CI CARD installée dans la f<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> l'interface commune.<br />
N<br />
Insérez la CAM dans la direction indiquée par la flèche, juste au-<strong>de</strong>ssus <strong>de</strong><br />
l'extrémité, pour qu'elle soit parallèle à la f<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
4. Vérifiez si une image est visible sur un canal à signal brouillé<br />
• CI M<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Cela ai<strong>de</strong> l’utilisateur à sélectionner un élém<strong>en</strong>t du m<strong>en</strong>u pris <strong>en</strong> charge par CAM.<br />
Sélectionnez le m<strong>en</strong>u CI dans le m<strong>en</strong>u PC Card.<br />
• Infos sur l’application<br />
Conti<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong>s informations relatives à la CAM insérée dans la f<strong>en</strong>te CI et les affiche.<br />
Les Application Info concern<strong>en</strong>t la CI CARD. Vous pouvez installer la CAM que le téléviseur soit allumé ou éteint.<br />
N<br />
Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris <strong>en</strong> charge dans certains pays ou régions. Vérifiez auprès <strong>de</strong> votre<br />
rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ur agréé.<br />
Configuration<br />
Plug & Play<br />
langue <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us : Franç<strong>ais</strong><br />
Horloge<br />
Diffuser<br />
Sécurité<br />
Général<br />
►<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 22<br />
Suite…
❑<br />
Sécurité<br />
• Verrouillage Canal → Arrêt / Marche<br />
Cette fonction permet d’empêcher que <strong>de</strong>s utilisateurs non autorisés, tels que <strong>de</strong>s <strong>en</strong>fants, regar<strong>de</strong>nt <strong>de</strong>s programmes<br />
inappropriés, <strong>en</strong> désactivant la vidéo et l’audio.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Avant que l’écran <strong>de</strong> configuration s’affiche, l’écran <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN apparaît. Entrez votre co<strong>de</strong> PIN à quatre<br />
chiffres.<br />
Le co<strong>de</strong> PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est '0-0-0-0'. Vous pouvez modifier le co<strong>de</strong> PIN <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant Modifier<br />
PIN dans le m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Vous pouvez verrouiller certaines chaînes dans la liste <strong>de</strong>s chaînes. (reportez-vous à la page 15)<br />
Verrouillage Canal est uniquem<strong>en</strong>t disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
• Verrouillage par<strong>en</strong>tal<br />
Cette fonction permet d’empêcher certains utilisateurs, par exemple <strong>de</strong>s <strong>en</strong>fants, <strong>de</strong> regar<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>s émissions inappropriées, <strong>en</strong><br />
les protégeant à l’ai<strong>de</strong> d’un co<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> 4 chiffres défini par l’utilisateur.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Avant que l’écran <strong>de</strong> configuration s’affiche, l’écran <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN apparaît. Entrez votre co<strong>de</strong> PIN à quatre<br />
chiffres.<br />
Le co<strong>de</strong> PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est '0-0-0-0'. Vous pouvez modifier le co<strong>de</strong> PIN <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant Modifier<br />
PIN dans le m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Une fois la signalétique définie, le symbole “\” s’affiche.<br />
Autor.tout: est uniquem<strong>en</strong>t disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
Bloq. tout: n’est pas disponible lorsque le mo<strong>de</strong> PIP est activé.<br />
• Modifier PIN<br />
Vous pouvez changer le co<strong>de</strong> personnel <strong>de</strong>mandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Avant que l’écran <strong>de</strong> configuration s’affiche, l’écran <strong>de</strong> s<strong>ais</strong>ie du co<strong>de</strong> PIN apparaît. Entrez votre co<strong>de</strong> PIN à quatre<br />
chiffres.<br />
Le co<strong>de</strong> PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est '0-0-0-0'.<br />
Si vous avez oublié le co<strong>de</strong>, appuyez sur les boutons <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui remet le co<strong>de</strong> à<br />
'0-0-0-0': POWER (Arrêt), M MUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Marche).<br />
Général<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> Jeu → Arrêt / Marche<br />
En reliant le téléviseur à une console <strong>de</strong> jeu telle que PlayStation TM ou Xbox TM , vous pouvez profiter d’une expéri<strong>en</strong>ce <strong>de</strong> jeu<br />
plus réaliste <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant le m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> jeu.<br />
• Lorsque le mo<strong>de</strong> jeu est défini sur Marche<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Le mo<strong>de</strong> Image est automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t défini sur Standard et ne peut pas être changé.<br />
Le mo<strong>de</strong> son est automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t défini sur Personnel et ne peut pas être changé. Réglez le son à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> l’égaliseur.<br />
La fonction Réinit. du m<strong>en</strong>u Son est activée. Réinit. rétablit les valeurs par défaut <strong>de</strong> l’égaliseur.<br />
Le mo<strong>de</strong> jeu n’est pas disponible <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> TV classique ou lorsqu’il est défini sur Arrêt.<br />
Si l’image est <strong>de</strong> mauv<strong>ais</strong>e qualité alors qu’un périphérique externe est connecté au téléviseur, vérifiez l’état du mo<strong>de</strong> jeu.<br />
Si vous affichez le m<strong>en</strong>u TV <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> jeu, l’écran tremble légèrem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
N<br />
N La marque ( ) s’affiche à l’écran. Elle signifie que le mo<strong>de</strong> jeu est défini sur Marche avec la source sélectionnée.<br />
N Cette fonction ne pr<strong>en</strong>d <strong>en</strong> charge que la fonction Jeu.<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> éco.<br />
Cette fonction règle la luminosité du téléviseur afin <strong>de</strong> réduire la consommation d’énergie. Lorsque vous regar<strong>de</strong>z la télévision<br />
le soir, réglez l’option du mo<strong>de</strong> Mo<strong>de</strong> éco. sur Elevé pour reposer vos yeux et réduire la consommation d’énergie.<br />
Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran s’éteint. Seul le son est émis. Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour<br />
désactiver la fonction Image désactivée.<br />
N La function Image désactivée n’est pas prise <strong>en</strong> charge dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t définir l’option d’économie d’énergie <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant Outils → Mo<strong>de</strong> éco.<br />
• Mélodie → Arrêt / Bas / Moy<strong>en</strong> / Elevé<br />
La mélodie <strong>de</strong> mise sous/hors t<strong>en</strong>sion du téléviseur peut être ajustée.<br />
N Aucune mélodie n’est lue dans les cas suivants<br />
- Aucun son n’est émis par le téléviseur car le bouton MMUTE a été <strong>en</strong>foncé.<br />
- Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur car le bouton – (Volume) a été <strong>en</strong>foncé.<br />
- Lorsque le téléviseur est éteint par la fonction Veille.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 23
Réglage <strong>de</strong> l’heure<br />
❑<br />
Horloge<br />
Le réglage <strong>de</strong> l’horloge est nécessaire pour utiliser les différ<strong>en</strong>tes fonctions <strong>de</strong> la<br />
minuterie <strong>de</strong> la télévision.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
L’heure actuelle s’affiche à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO.<br />
Si vous débranchez le cordon d’alim<strong>en</strong>tation, vous <strong>de</strong>vrez régler à nouveau<br />
l’horloge.<br />
• Mo<strong>de</strong> Horloge<br />
Vous pouvez définir l’heure actuelle manuellem<strong>en</strong>t ou automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Auto.: Règle automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t l’heure <strong>en</strong> fonction <strong>de</strong> signaux diffusés.<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong>: Permet <strong>de</strong> régler l’heure manuellem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• Réglage. Horloge<br />
Vous pouvez définir l’heure actuelle.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sélectionnez cette option lorsque Mo<strong>de</strong> Horloge est à <strong>Manuel</strong>.<br />
Vous pouvez régler directem<strong>en</strong>t le Jour, le Mois, le Année, les Heure et les<br />
Minute <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur les boutons numériques <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Veille → Arrêt / 30 min. / 60 min. / 90 min. / 120 min. / 150 min. /<br />
180 min.<br />
La minuterie <strong>de</strong> mise <strong>en</strong> veille coupe automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t la télévision après une durée<br />
préréglée.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Le téléviseur passe automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> veille lorsque le minuteur atteint 0.<br />
Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt.<br />
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le m<strong>en</strong>u Outils.<br />
Vous pouvez égalem<strong>en</strong>t définir la minuterie <strong>de</strong> veille d’image <strong>en</strong> sélectionnant Outils → Veille.<br />
Configuration<br />
Plug & Play<br />
langue <strong>de</strong>s m<strong>en</strong>us<br />
Horloge<br />
Diffuser<br />
Sécurité<br />
Général<br />
: Franç<strong>ais</strong><br />
Horloge<br />
Horloge : -- : -- ►<br />
Veille<br />
: Arrêt<br />
Minuteur 1<br />
: Désactivé<br />
Minuteur 2<br />
: Désactivé<br />
Minuteur 3<br />
: Désactivé<br />
►<br />
U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour<br />
❑<br />
Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3<br />
Trois réglages différ<strong>en</strong>ts <strong>de</strong> mise <strong>en</strong> marche/arrêt peuv<strong>en</strong>t être définis.<br />
• Pério<strong>de</strong> d'activation: Sélectionnez les heures et les minutes et l’action activer/désactiver.<br />
(Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages définis, choisissez Activer.)<br />
• Pério<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> désactivation: Sélectionnez les heures et les minutes et l’action activer/désactiver.<br />
(Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages définis, choisissez Activer.)<br />
• Volume: Sélectionnez le niveau <strong>de</strong> volume désiré.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>ne: Vous pouvez sélectionner DTV ou ATV lorsque le téléviseur s'allume automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• Canal : permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner la chaîne <strong>de</strong> votre choix.<br />
• Répétition: Sélectionnez Une fois, Ts jours, Lun - V<strong>en</strong>, Lun - Sam, Sam - Dim ou <strong>Manuel</strong>.<br />
N Lorsque <strong>Manuel</strong> est sélectionné, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner le jour <strong>de</strong> la semaine. Appuyez sur le bouton<br />
ENTERE sur le jour <strong>de</strong> votre choix. Le symbole c apparaît alors.<br />
N Vous <strong>de</strong>vez préalablem<strong>en</strong>t régler l’horloge.<br />
N Vous pouvez régler les heures, les minutes et les chaînes directem<strong>en</strong>t à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du pavé numérique <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N Mise hors t<strong>en</strong>sion automatique<br />
Lorsque vous définissez la minuterie sur On, le téléviseur s’éteint si aucune comman<strong>de</strong> n’est activée dans les 3 heures qui<br />
suiv<strong>en</strong>t la mise sous t<strong>en</strong>sion. Cette fonction est disponible uniquem<strong>en</strong>t lorsque la minuterie est définie sur On ; elle permet<br />
d’éviter toute surchauffe occasionnée par une utilisation prolongée du téléviseur.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 24
Liste Source / Modif. Nom<br />
❑<br />
Liste Source<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner le téléviseur ou d’autres sources d’<strong>en</strong>trée externes comme<br />
les lecteurs DVD ou les déco<strong>de</strong>urs câble/récepteurs satellite (boîtiers déco<strong>de</strong>urs)<br />
connectés au téléviseur. Permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner la source d’<strong>en</strong>trée <strong>de</strong> votre choix.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI.<br />
N Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que les appareils externes connectés au<br />
téléviseur. Dans Liste Source, les <strong>en</strong>trées connectées sont mises <strong>en</strong><br />
surbrillance et affichés <strong>en</strong> début <strong>de</strong> liste. Les <strong>en</strong>trées non connectées<br />
appar<strong>ais</strong>s<strong>en</strong>t dans le bas <strong>de</strong> la liste.<br />
N Utilisation <strong>de</strong>s boutons <strong>de</strong> couleur <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> dans la liste <strong>de</strong>s<br />
sources<br />
- TTOOLS (Outils): Affiche les m<strong>en</strong>us Modif. Nom et Information.<br />
O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> pour afficher une source<br />
<strong>de</strong> signal externe. Le Mo<strong>de</strong> TV peut être sélectionné <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton<br />
TV, les boutons numériques (0-9) et le bouton P < / > <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
❑ Modif. Nom<br />
Vous pouvez nommer le périphérique connecté aux prises d’<strong>en</strong>trée pour faciliter la<br />
sélection <strong>de</strong> la source d’<strong>en</strong>trée.<br />
Liste Source<br />
Modif. Nom<br />
• Magnétoscope / DVD / Déco<strong>de</strong>ur Câble / Déco<strong>de</strong>ur satellite / Déco<strong>de</strong>ur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeu / Caméscope /<br />
PC / DVI PC / DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N Lorsqu’un PC d’une résolution <strong>de</strong> PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz est branché sur le port<br />
HDMI IN 2 (DVI), vous <strong>de</strong>vez régler le mo<strong>de</strong> HDMI2/DVI sur PC dans Modif. Nom du mo<strong>de</strong> Entrée.<br />
Entrée<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 25
Ecran du PC<br />
• Configuration <strong>de</strong> votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP)<br />
Les paramètres d’affichage Windows indiqués ci-<strong>de</strong>ssous sont ceux d’un<br />
ordinateur type. L’écran <strong>de</strong> votre PC sera probablem<strong>en</strong>t différ<strong>en</strong>t, selon votre<br />
version <strong>de</strong> Windows et votre carte vidéo. Cep<strong>en</strong>dant, même si les affichages<br />
diffèr<strong>en</strong>t, les informations <strong>de</strong> configuration <strong>de</strong> base s’appliqu<strong>en</strong>t dans la plupart<br />
<strong>de</strong>s cas. Dans le cas contraire, contactez le fabricant <strong>de</strong> votre ordinateur ou<br />
votre rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ur <strong>Samsung</strong>.<br />
1. Cliquez sur ‘Panneau <strong>de</strong> configuration” dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Démarrer <strong>de</strong> Windows.<br />
2. Lorsque vous êtes sur l’écran du panneau <strong>de</strong> configuration, cliquez sur<br />
“Appar<strong>en</strong>ce et thèmes” et une boîte <strong>de</strong> dialogue apparaît.<br />
3. Cliquez sur “Affichage”. Une boîte <strong>de</strong> dialogue vous propose <strong>de</strong>s options d’<br />
affichage.<br />
4. Sélectionnez l’onglet ‘Paramètres’ dans la boîte <strong>de</strong> dialogue Propriétés <strong>de</strong> l’<br />
Affichage.<br />
Réglage correct <strong>de</strong> la taille (résolution)<br />
Optimal : PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixels, PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixels<br />
S’il existe une option <strong>de</strong> fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce verticale sur votre boîte <strong>de</strong> dialogue <strong>de</strong>s<br />
paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est “60” ou “60Hz”. Sinon, cliquez<br />
simplem<strong>en</strong>t sur “OK” pour quitter la boîte <strong>de</strong> dialogue.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>s d’affichage<br />
La taille et la position <strong>de</strong> l’écran vari<strong>en</strong>t <strong>en</strong> fonction du type d’écran du PC et <strong>de</strong> sa résolution.<br />
Les résolutions indiquées dans le tableau sont recommandées.<br />
• Entrée HDMI/DVI<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Résolution<br />
Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
horizontale (kHz)<br />
Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce verticale<br />
(Hz)<br />
Fréqu<strong>en</strong>ce d’horloge<br />
pixels (MHz)<br />
Polarité<br />
synchronisée (H/V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
PS50B430<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
VESA DMT<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
VESA CVT<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous <strong>de</strong>vez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
Le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trelacé n’est pas pris <strong>en</strong> charge.<br />
Le téléviseur peut fonctionner <strong>de</strong> façon anormale si un format vidéo non standard est sélectionné.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 26
Programme pris <strong>en</strong> charge<br />
❑<br />
Diagnostic automatique<br />
• Test <strong>de</strong> l’image, Test du son, Informations <strong>de</strong> signal<br />
En cas <strong>de</strong> problème <strong>en</strong> relation avec l’image, le son ou le signal, effectuez le test. Vous pouvez vérifier l’état du problème.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur rest<strong>en</strong>t muets, avant d’effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l’option Sélection du<br />
haut-parleur est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le m<strong>en</strong>u Son.<br />
La mélodie est diffusée p<strong>en</strong>dant le test, même si l’option Sélection du haut-parleur est réglée sur Haut-parleur externe<br />
ou si le son a été désactivé <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le bouton M MUTE.<br />
Si l’indicateur d’int<strong>en</strong>sité du signal indique que celui-ci est faible, réglez physiquem<strong>en</strong>t votre ant<strong>en</strong>ne afin d’<strong>en</strong> augm<strong>en</strong>ter l’<br />
int<strong>en</strong>sité. Continuez à régler l’ant<strong>en</strong>ne jusqu’à trouver la position offrant le signal le plus puissant.<br />
Mise à niveau du logiciel<br />
Pour gar<strong>de</strong>r le produit à jour avec les nouvelles fonctions <strong>de</strong> télévision numérique, <strong>de</strong>s mises à jour logicielles sont<br />
régulièrem<strong>en</strong>t diffusées via le signal <strong>de</strong> télévision normal. Le téléviseur détecte automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t ces signaux et affiche la<br />
bannière <strong>de</strong> mise à jour logicielle. Vous avez le choix d’installer ou non la mise à jour.<br />
• USB<br />
Insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB cont<strong>en</strong>ant la mise à niveau du microprogramme.<br />
Veillez à ne pas couper l’alim<strong>en</strong>tation ni retirer le lecteur USB p<strong>en</strong>dant l’application <strong>de</strong>s<br />
mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du micrologiciel terminée, le téléviseur se met<br />
automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t hors puis sous t<strong>en</strong>sion. Vérifiez la version du micrologiciel une fois les<br />
mises à niveau terminées. Lorsque le logiciel est mis à niveau, les paramètres vidéo et<br />
audio définis repr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>t leur valeur par défaut (d’usine).<br />
• Canal<br />
Met à niveau le logiciel à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du signal diffusé.<br />
• Mise à niveau <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> veille<br />
Pour poursuivre la mise à jour du logiciel <strong>en</strong> gardant le téléviseur sous t<strong>en</strong>sion, sélectionnez Marche <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur le<br />
bouton ▲ ou ▼. Une mise à jour manuelle a lieu automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t 45 minutes après l’<strong>en</strong>trée <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> veille. Etant donné que<br />
le courant est activé <strong>de</strong> façon interne, l’écran peut s’allumer brièvem<strong>en</strong>t pour le produit. Le phénomène peut se poursuivre<br />
durant une heure jusqu’à ce que la mise à jour logicielle soit terminée.<br />
• Autre logiciel<br />
Remplace le logiciel actuel.<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
Lecteur USB<br />
Panneau<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> connexion HD<br />
Une brève instruction concernant la manière d’obt<strong>en</strong>ir le meilleur <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur HDTV s’affiche. Nous offrons le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />
connexion <strong>de</strong>s périphériques HD.<br />
Contacter <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Vous pouvez accé<strong>de</strong>r au c<strong>en</strong>tre d’appel et au site Web <strong>de</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong>, ainsi qu’à <strong>de</strong>s informations sur le produit.<br />
N Pour passer à la page précé<strong>de</strong>nte ou suivante, appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 27
Conseils d’utilisation<br />
Fonction Télétexte<br />
La plupart <strong>de</strong>s chaînes <strong>de</strong> télévision propos<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong>s services d’informations via le télétexte. La page d’in<strong>de</strong>x du télétexte conti<strong>en</strong>t<br />
<strong>de</strong>s instructions sur l’utilisation <strong>de</strong> ce service. Vous pouvez, <strong>en</strong> outre, sélectionner différ<strong>en</strong>tes options à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s touches <strong>de</strong> la<br />
télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N Pour que l’affichage <strong>de</strong>s informations <strong>de</strong> télétexte soit correct, la réception <strong>de</strong>s chaînes doit être stable. Dans le cas contraire,<br />
<strong>de</strong>s informations pourrai<strong>en</strong>t manquer ou certaines pages pourrai<strong>en</strong>t ne pas s’afficher.<br />
1 : (quitter)<br />
Quitte l’affichage télétexte.<br />
2 6 (in<strong>de</strong>x)<br />
Permet d’afficher la page d’in<strong>de</strong>x du télétexte (sommaire).<br />
3 5 (afficher)<br />
Permet d’afficher le texte masqué (les réponses à un questionnaire, par exemple).<br />
Appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche pour rétablir le mo<strong>de</strong> d’affichage normal.<br />
1<br />
<br />
4 4 (taille)<br />
Permet d’afficher la moitié supérieure <strong>de</strong> l’écran <strong>en</strong> caractères <strong>de</strong>ux fois plus<br />
grands. Appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche pour afficher la moitié inférieure <strong>de</strong><br />
l’écran. Appuyez à nouveau pour rétablir le mo<strong>de</strong> d’affichage normal.<br />
5 8 (mémoriser)<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> mémoriser les pages <strong>de</strong> télétexte.<br />
6 / (télétexte actif/mixte)<br />
Permet d’activer le mo<strong>de</strong> Télétexte après avoir choisi la chaîne diffusant le<br />
service télétexte. Appuyez <strong>de</strong>ux fois sur ce bouton pour superposer le<br />
télétexte à l’émission diffusée.<br />
7 1 (page secondaire)<br />
Permet d’afficher une page secondaire.<br />
8 2 (page suivante)<br />
Permet d’afficher la page télétexte suivante.<br />
9 3 (page précé<strong>de</strong>nte)<br />
Permet d’afficher la page télétexte précé<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
0 0 (mo<strong>de</strong>)<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> sélectionner le mo<strong>de</strong> Télétexte (LIST/FLOF). Si vous appuyez sur cette<br />
touche <strong>en</strong> mo<strong>de</strong> LISTE, vous accé<strong>de</strong>z au mo<strong>de</strong> d’<strong>en</strong>registrem<strong>en</strong>t <strong>de</strong> liste. Dans ce<br />
mo<strong>de</strong>, vous pouvez <strong>en</strong>registrer une page télétexte dans une liste à l’ai<strong>de</strong> du bouton<br />
8 (mémoriser).<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
! 9 (maint<strong>en</strong>ir)<br />
Permet <strong>de</strong> bloquer l’affichage sur une page précise, si celle-ci est reliée à plusieurs<br />
pages secondaires qui s’affich<strong>en</strong>t automatiquem<strong>en</strong>t les unes après les autres. Pour<br />
repr<strong>en</strong>dre l’affichage <strong>de</strong>s autres pages, appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (annuler)<br />
Permet d’afficher le programme lors <strong>de</strong> la recherche d’une page.<br />
# Boutons <strong>de</strong> couleur (rouge/vert/jaune/bleu)<br />
N<br />
Si la société émettrice utilise le système FASTEXT, les différ<strong>en</strong>ts sujets traités<br />
dans la page télétexte dispos<strong>en</strong>t d’un co<strong>de</strong> couleur et peuv<strong>en</strong>t être sélectionnés<br />
à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s touches <strong>de</strong> couleur <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>. Appuyez sur la touche<br />
correspondant à la fonctionnalité requise. La page s’affiche, ainsi que d’autres<br />
informations <strong>en</strong> couleur pouvant être sélectionnées <strong>de</strong> la même manière. Pour<br />
afficher la page précé<strong>de</strong>nte ou la page suivante, appuyez sur la touche <strong>de</strong> couleur<br />
correspondante.<br />
Vous pouvez changer <strong>de</strong> page <strong>de</strong> télétexte <strong>en</strong> appuyant sur les boutons<br />
numériques <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 28
Les pages télétexte sont organisées <strong>en</strong> six catégories :<br />
Catégorie<br />
Sommaire<br />
N<br />
A Numéro <strong>de</strong> la page sélectionnée<br />
B I<strong>de</strong>ntité du canal émetteur<br />
C Numéro <strong>de</strong> la page actuelle ou indications <strong>de</strong> recherche<br />
D Date et heure<br />
E Texte<br />
F Informations sur l’état<br />
Informations FASTEXT<br />
Les informations du télétexte sont souv<strong>en</strong>t réparties sur plusieurs pages qui<br />
s’affich<strong>en</strong>t l’une après l’autre. Ces pages sont accessibles <strong>en</strong> :<br />
- <strong>en</strong>trant le numéro <strong>de</strong> page ;<br />
- sélectionnant un titre dans une liste ;<br />
- sélectionnant un <strong>en</strong>-tête <strong>de</strong> couleur (système FASTEXT).<br />
<br />
O<br />
Appuyez sur le bouton TV pour quitter l’affichage télétexte.<br />
Caractéristiques du kit <strong>de</strong> fixation murale (VESA)<br />
Installez votre fixation murale sur un mur soli<strong>de</strong> perp<strong>en</strong>diculaire au sol.<br />
Si vous souhaitez la fixer sur d’autres matériaux <strong>de</strong> construction, veuillez pr<strong>en</strong>dre contact avec votre rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ur le plus proche. Si<br />
vous l’installez au plafond ou sur un mur non droit, elle peut tomber et provoquer <strong>de</strong>s blessures corporelles graves.<br />
Famille <strong>de</strong> produit pouce Caract. VESA (A * B) Vis standard Quantité<br />
LCD-TV<br />
PDP-TV<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
M4<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
4<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
M8<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
M8 4<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Nous avons fourni les dim<strong>en</strong>sions standard pour tous les kits <strong>de</strong> fixation murale, comme indiqué dans le tableau ci-<strong>de</strong>ssus.<br />
Un manuel d’installation détaillé et toutes les pièces nécessaires au montage sont fournis avec le kit <strong>de</strong> fixation mural.<br />
N’utilisez pas <strong>de</strong> vis plus longues que la dim<strong>en</strong>sion standard car elles pourrai<strong>en</strong>t <strong>en</strong>dommager l’intérieur du téléviseur.<br />
Pour les fixations murales non conformes aux caractéristiques <strong>de</strong>s vis VESA standard, la longueur <strong>de</strong>s vis peut varier, selon<br />
leurs caractéristiques.<br />
N’utilisez pas <strong>de</strong> vis non conformes aux caractéristiques <strong>de</strong>s vis VESA standard. Ne serrez pas trop les vis : cela pourrait<br />
<strong>en</strong>dommager le produit ou provoquer sa chute, <strong>en</strong>traînant <strong>de</strong>s blessures corporelles. <strong>Samsung</strong> ne peut être t<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
responsable <strong>de</strong> ce type d’acci<strong>de</strong>nt.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> ne peut être t<strong>en</strong>ue responsable <strong>de</strong> tout dommage au produit ou toute blessure corporelle dans le cas <strong>de</strong> l’utilisation<br />
d’une fixation murale non-VESA ou non spécifié, ni si l’utilisateur ne suit pas les instructions d’installation du produit.<br />
Nos modèles 57” et 63” ne sont pas conformes aux caractéristiques VESA. Vous <strong>de</strong>vez par conséqu<strong>en</strong>t utiliser notre kit <strong>de</strong><br />
fixation mural approprié pour ce modèle.<br />
Lors du montage, l’inclin<strong>ais</strong>on du téléviseur ne doit pas dépasser 15 <strong>de</strong>grés.<br />
N’installez pas votre kit <strong>de</strong> montage mural lorsque votre téléviseur est <strong>en</strong><br />
fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t. Une blessure par choc électrique pourrait <strong>en</strong> résulter.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 29
Préparation avant l’installation d’un dispositif <strong>de</strong> fixation murale<br />
Cas A. Installation d’un dispositif <strong>de</strong> fixation<br />
murale SAMSUNG<br />
Cas B. Installation d’un dispositif <strong>de</strong> fixation<br />
murale d’un autre fabricant<br />
경고<br />
1. Installez le dispositif <strong>de</strong> fixation murale avec un couple <strong>de</strong> serrage <strong>de</strong> 15 kg/cm ou moins. Certaines pièces peuv<strong>en</strong>t être<br />
<strong>en</strong>dommagées si le couple est supérieur.<br />
2. Le kit d’accessoires conti<strong>en</strong>t un Support – un Anneau [2] <strong>en</strong> vue d’installer un dispositif d’une marque autre que <strong>Samsung</strong> TV. (Cas B)<br />
N Insérez la vis dans le trou [1] lors <strong>de</strong> l’installation <strong>de</strong> la fixation murale.<br />
주의<br />
Montage mural du téléviseur<br />
경고<br />
Si vous tirez, poussez ou grimpez sur le téléviseur, celui-ci peut tomber. Veillez, <strong>en</strong> particulier, à ce que vos <strong>en</strong>fants<br />
ne se p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>nt pas, ni ne déséquilibre le téléviseur. Ils pourrai<strong>en</strong>t le faire basculer et <strong>en</strong>traîner <strong>de</strong>s blessures graves,<br />
voire la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions <strong>de</strong> sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une<br />
stabilité accrue, installez le dispositif anti-chute comme indiqué.<br />
주의<br />
Mur<br />
Mur<br />
❑ Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur<br />
1. Placez les vis dans les colliers et fixez-les fermem<strong>en</strong>t au mur. Assurez-vous que les vis ont été fermem<strong>en</strong>t fixées au mur.<br />
N En fonction du type <strong>de</strong> mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin <strong>de</strong> matériel supplém<strong>en</strong>taire, tel que <strong>de</strong>s chevilles.<br />
N Les colliers, vis et chaînettes n’étant pas fournis, veuillez les acheter séparém<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie c<strong>en</strong>trale arrière du téléviseur, placez les vis dans les bagues, puis fixez-les à nouveau sur<br />
le téléviseur.<br />
N Il se peut que les vis ne soi<strong>en</strong>t pas fournies avec le produit.<br />
3. Reliez les bagues fixées au téléviseur et celles fixées sur le mur à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> chaînettes, puis attachez-les fermem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Installez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu’il ne bascule pas vers l’arrière.<br />
Il est préférable <strong>de</strong> relier la chaînette afin que les bagues fixées au mur soi<strong>en</strong>t placées à même hauteur ou plus bas que<br />
celles fixées au téléviseur.<br />
Détachez la chaînette avant <strong>de</strong> déplacer le téléviseur.<br />
N<br />
4. Vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctem<strong>en</strong>t. Vérifiez régulièrem<strong>en</strong>t que les connexions ne prés<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>t aucun<br />
signe d’usure. Si vous avez un doute quand à la sécurité <strong>de</strong> vos connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel.<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 30
Dépannage<br />
Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème <strong>en</strong> suivant les instructions ci-<strong>de</strong>ssous, notez le modèle et le numéro <strong>de</strong> série <strong>de</strong> votre<br />
téléviseur et contactez votre rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ur local.<br />
Aucune image ou aucun son<br />
Image normale, m<strong>ais</strong> aucun son<br />
Aucune image ou image <strong>en</strong> noir<br />
et blanc<br />
Interfér<strong>en</strong>ce du son et <strong>de</strong> l’image<br />
Image neigeuse ou floue, son<br />
altéré<br />
Dysfonctionnem<strong>en</strong>ts <strong>de</strong> la<br />
télécomman<strong>de</strong><br />
L’écran est noir et le témoin d’<br />
alim<strong>en</strong>tation clignote à intervalles<br />
réguliers.<br />
L’image <strong>en</strong>dommagée apparaît<br />
dans le coin <strong>de</strong> l’écran.<br />
Le message “Resets all settings<br />
to the <strong>de</strong>fault values” s’affiche.<br />
• Vérifiez que le cordon d’alim<strong>en</strong>tation est branché à une prise secteur.<br />
• Vérifiez que vous avez appuyé sur le bouton <strong>de</strong> votre téléviseur.<br />
• Vérifiez les paramètres <strong>de</strong> contraste et <strong>de</strong> luminosité.<br />
• Vérifiez le volume.<br />
• Vérifiez que Sélection Haut-parleur est réglé sur Haut-parleur externe<br />
• Vérifiez le volume.<br />
• Vérifiez si le bouton M MUTE <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> a été actionné.<br />
• Réglez les paramètres <strong>de</strong> couleur.<br />
• Vérifiez que le système d’émission sélectionné est correct.<br />
• Essayez d’i<strong>de</strong>ntifier l’appareil électrique qui perturbe le téléviseur et éloignez-le.<br />
• Branchez le téléviseur sur une autre prise secteur.<br />
• Vérifiez l’ori<strong>en</strong>tation, l’emplacem<strong>en</strong>t et les branchem<strong>en</strong>ts <strong>de</strong> votre ant<strong>en</strong>ne.<br />
• Cette interfér<strong>en</strong>ce est souv<strong>en</strong>t due à l'utilisation d'une ant<strong>en</strong>ne intérieure.<br />
• Remplacez les piles <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Nettoyez la partie supérieure <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong> (f<strong>en</strong>être <strong>de</strong> transmission).<br />
• Vérifiez que les pôles + et - <strong>de</strong>s piles sont ori<strong>en</strong>tés correctem<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
• Vérifiez si les piles ne sont pas déchargées.<br />
• Sur votre ordinateur, allez sur : Alim<strong>en</strong>tation, Câble <strong>de</strong> signal.<br />
• Déplacez la souris <strong>de</strong> l'ordinateur ou appuyez sur une touche du clavier.<br />
• Sur votre appareil, allez sur (STB, DVD, etc.): Alim<strong>en</strong>tation, Câble <strong>de</strong> signal.<br />
• Le mo<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> gestion d'alim<strong>en</strong>tation est activé.<br />
• Appuyez sur le bouton Source du panneau ou <strong>de</strong> la télécomman<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Allumez et éteignez le téléviseur.<br />
Sécurisation <strong>de</strong> l’emplacem<strong>en</strong>t d’installation<br />
• Si l’option Adapter à l'écran est sélectionnée dans certains périphériques externes, l’<br />
image <strong>en</strong>dommagée peut apparaitre dans le coin <strong>de</strong> l’écran. Ce problème est provoqué<br />
par les périphériques externes et non par le téléviseur.<br />
• Il s’affiche lorsque vous appuyez longuem<strong>en</strong>t sur le bouton EXIT. Les paramètres du<br />
produit sont rétablis sur leur valeur par défaut.<br />
Respectez les distances requises <strong>en</strong>tre le produit et d’autres objets (p. ex. murs) pour assurer une v<strong>en</strong>tilation adéquate.<br />
Le non-respect <strong>de</strong> cette consigne pourrait provoquer un inc<strong>en</strong>die ou un problème avec le produit <strong>en</strong> r<strong>ais</strong>on <strong>de</strong> l’augm<strong>en</strong>tation <strong>de</strong> la<br />
température interne <strong>de</strong> ce <strong>de</strong>rnier. Installez le produit <strong>de</strong> manière à respecter les distances requises indiquées sur la figure.<br />
N En cas d’utilisation d’un support ou <strong>de</strong> montage mural, n’utilisez que <strong>de</strong>s pièces <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics.<br />
N<br />
- L’emploi <strong>de</strong> pièces d’un autre fabricant risque d’<strong>en</strong>traîner <strong>de</strong>s problèmes avec le produit ou d’occasionner <strong>de</strong>s blessures<br />
dues à la chute du produit.<br />
- L’emploi <strong>de</strong> pièces d’un autre fabricant risque d’<strong>en</strong>traîner un problème avec le produit ou <strong>de</strong> provoquer un inc<strong>en</strong>die <strong>en</strong><br />
r<strong>ais</strong>on <strong>de</strong> l’augm<strong>en</strong>tation <strong>de</strong> la température interne du produit due à une v<strong>en</strong>tilation insuffisante.<br />
L’aspect peut varier <strong>en</strong> fonction du produit.<br />
• Installation du produit sur un support<br />
• Montage mural du produit<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 31
Caractéristiques<br />
Les <strong>de</strong>scriptions et caractéristiques fournies dans ce manuel sont données à titre indicatif seulem<strong>en</strong>t et sont susceptibles d'être<br />
modifiées sans préavis.<br />
Nom du modèle PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Taille <strong>de</strong> l’écran<br />
(diagonale)<br />
42 inches 50 inches<br />
Résolution PC 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360x768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Son (Sortie) 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>sions (WxHxD)<br />
Corps<br />
Avec pied<br />
Poids<br />
Corps<br />
Avec pied<br />
Considérations <strong>en</strong>vironnem<strong>en</strong>tales<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
Température <strong>de</strong> fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
Humidité au cours du fonctionnem<strong>en</strong>t<br />
Température <strong>de</strong> stockage<br />
Humidité sur le lieu <strong>de</strong> stockage<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
La conception et les spécifications sont susceptibles <strong>de</strong> changer sans préavis.<br />
Ce périphérique est un appareil numérique <strong>de</strong> classe B.<br />
Pour les caractéristiques d’alim<strong>en</strong>tation et <strong>de</strong> consommation électrique, voir l’étiquette fixée au produit.<br />
Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous <strong>de</strong>vez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
Franç<strong>ais</strong> - 32
B<strong>en</strong>utzerhinweise<br />
• Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> von Standbil<strong>de</strong>rn<br />
Zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie Standbil<strong>de</strong>r (z. B. bei einem Vi<strong>de</strong>ospiel o<strong>de</strong>r bei Anschluss eines PC an dies<strong>en</strong> Plasmamonitor) niemals länger als<br />
2 Stun<strong>de</strong>n auf <strong>de</strong>m Plasmabildschirm an, da das Bild auf diese Weise einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> kann. Das Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> von Standbil<strong>de</strong>rn wird auch<br />
als „Bildkonservierung“ bezeichnet. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> das Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> vermei<strong>de</strong>n, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie die Helligkeit und <strong>de</strong>n Kontrast <strong>de</strong>s Monitors<br />
beim Anzeig<strong>en</strong> von Standbil<strong>de</strong>rn verringern.<br />
• Höhe<br />
Um normal<strong>en</strong> Betrieb zu gewährleist<strong>en</strong>, muss <strong>de</strong>r Plasmabildschirm in einer Höhe unter 2000 m aufgestellt wer<strong>de</strong>n. Der Betrieb <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Monitors wird möglicherweise gestört, w<strong>en</strong>n er in mehr als 2000 m Höhe betrieb<strong>en</strong> wird. Sie dürf<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Plasmabildschirm <strong>de</strong>shalb nicht in<br />
einer Höhe von über 2000 m aufstell<strong>en</strong> und betreib<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Wärme<strong>en</strong>twicklung auf <strong>de</strong>r Oberseite <strong>de</strong>s Plasmabildschirms<br />
Die Oberseite <strong>de</strong>s Produkts kann nach längerem Betrieb warm wer<strong>de</strong>n, da die Wärme aus <strong>de</strong>m Monitor über die Entlüftungsöffnung im<br />
ober<strong>en</strong> Teil <strong>de</strong>s Geräts abgeführt wird. Dies ist normal und weist nicht auf ein<strong>en</strong> Defekt o<strong>de</strong>r eine Fehlfunktion <strong>de</strong>s Geräts hin. Allerdings<br />
sollt<strong>en</strong> Kin<strong>de</strong>r von <strong>de</strong>m ober<strong>en</strong> Teil <strong>de</strong>s Geräts ferngehalt<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• Das Gerät verursacht ein „knack<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>s“ Geräusch.<br />
Ein „knack<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>s“ Geräusch <strong>en</strong>tsteht, w<strong>en</strong>n das Gerätematerial sich aufgrund einer Än<strong>de</strong>rung <strong>de</strong>r Umgebung, wie z. B.<br />
Temperaturschwankung<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r Än<strong>de</strong>rung <strong>de</strong>r Luftfeuchtigkeit, zusamm<strong>en</strong>zieht o<strong>de</strong>r aus<strong>de</strong>hnt. Das ist normal und stellt kein<strong>en</strong> Defekt <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Geräts dar.<br />
• Pixelfehler<br />
Der Plasmabildschirm besitzt eine Bildfläche mit 2,360,000(HD-Auflösung) bis 6,221,000(FHD-Auflösung) Pixeln, für <strong>de</strong>ss<strong>en</strong> Herstellung<br />
hoch <strong>en</strong>twickelte Technologie eingesetzt wird. Allerdings könn<strong>en</strong> ein paar zu helle o<strong>de</strong>r zu dunkle Pixel auf <strong>de</strong>r Bildfläche zu seh<strong>en</strong> sein.<br />
Diese Pixelfehler hab<strong>en</strong> kein<strong>en</strong> Einfluss auf die Geräteleistung.<br />
• Vermei<strong>de</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Betrieb <strong>de</strong>s Plasmabildschirms bei Temperatur<strong>en</strong> unter 5°C.<br />
• Ein Standbild, dass zu lange angezeigt wird, kann zu einer bleib<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Beschädigung <strong>de</strong>s Plasmabildschirms führ<strong>en</strong><br />
Der Betrieb <strong>de</strong>s Plasmafernsehers im Format 4:3 über ein<strong>en</strong> länger<strong>en</strong> Zeitraum kann links, rechts und in <strong>de</strong>r Mitte<br />
<strong>de</strong>s Monitors Spur<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Bildrän<strong>de</strong>r hinterlass<strong>en</strong>, die durch die unterschiedliche Lichtemission auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm<br />
verursacht wer<strong>de</strong>n. Das Wie<strong>de</strong>rgeb<strong>en</strong> einer DVD o<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>r Betrieb einer Spielkonsole kann auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm zu<br />
ähnlich<strong>en</strong> Effekt<strong>en</strong> führ<strong>en</strong>. Schä<strong>de</strong>n, die durch die o. g. Effekte verursacht wur<strong>de</strong>n, unterlieg<strong>en</strong> nicht <strong>de</strong>r Garantie.<br />
• Nachbil<strong>de</strong>r auf <strong>de</strong>m Monitor<br />
Das Anzeig<strong>en</strong> von Standbil<strong>de</strong>rn von Vi<strong>de</strong>ospiel<strong>en</strong> und PC-Anw<strong>en</strong>dung<strong>en</strong> über ein<strong>en</strong> bestimmt<strong>en</strong> Zeitraum kann zu partiell<strong>en</strong> Nachbil<strong>de</strong>rn<br />
führ<strong>en</strong>. Um dies<strong>en</strong> Effekt zu verhin<strong>de</strong>rn, verringern Sie Helligkeit und Kontrast, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie Standbil<strong>de</strong>r anzeig<strong>en</strong> möcht<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Garantie<br />
– Durch diese Garantie nicht abge<strong>de</strong>ckt sind Schä<strong>de</strong>n, die durch Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> von Bil<strong>de</strong>rn <strong>en</strong>tsteh<strong>en</strong>.<br />
– Das Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> von Bil<strong>de</strong>rn wird von <strong>de</strong>r Garantie nicht abge<strong>de</strong>ckt.<br />
• Installier<strong>en</strong><br />
W<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich an <strong>de</strong>n autorisiert<strong>en</strong> Kun<strong>de</strong>ndi<strong>en</strong>st, w<strong>en</strong>n das Gerät an einem Ort mit hoher Konz<strong>en</strong>tration an Staubpartikeln,<br />
außergewöhnlich hoher o<strong>de</strong>r geringer Raumtemperatur, extrem hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit, in unmittelbarer Nähe zu chemisch<strong>en</strong> Lösungsmitteln<br />
o<strong>de</strong>r für <strong>de</strong>n Dauerbetrieb, z.B. auf Bahn- o<strong>de</strong>r Flughäf<strong>en</strong>, aufgestellt wer<strong>de</strong>n soll. Eine nicht fachgerechte Aufstellung kann zu schwer<strong>en</strong><br />
Schä<strong>de</strong>n am Gerät führ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Hinweis zu Digitalfernseh<strong>en</strong><br />
1. Die Funktionalität<strong>en</strong> für Digital TV (DVB) steh<strong>en</strong> nur in Län<strong>de</strong>rn/Region<strong>en</strong> zur Verfügung, in <strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong> digitale terrestrische DVB-T-<br />
Signale (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AVC) ges<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t wer<strong>de</strong>n o<strong>de</strong>r in <strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong> Sie Zugang zu einem kompatibl<strong>en</strong> Kabelfernsehdi<strong>en</strong>st mit<br />
DVB-C (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AAC) hab<strong>en</strong>. Frag<strong>en</strong> Sie Ihr<strong>en</strong> örtlich<strong>en</strong> Händler, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie Information<strong>en</strong> über die Verfügbarkeit von<br />
DVB-T o<strong>de</strong>r DVB-C in Ihrer Geg<strong>en</strong>d b<strong>en</strong>ötig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. DVB-T ist <strong>de</strong>r Standard <strong>de</strong>s europäisch<strong>en</strong> DVB-Konsortiums für die terrestrische Versorgung mit digitalem terrestrischem<br />
Fernseh<strong>en</strong>, und DVB-C ist das Konsortium für die Versorgung mit digitalem Kabelfernseh<strong>en</strong>. Allerdings wer<strong>de</strong>n manche<br />
Unterscheidungsmerkmale wie EPG (elektrische Programmzeitschrift), VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o on Demand) usw. in dieser Spezifikation nicht<br />
berücksichtigt. Deshalb könn<strong>en</strong> sie zum jetzig<strong>en</strong> Zeitpunkt noch nicht unterstützt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
3. Zwar hält dieses Fernsehgerät die aktuell<strong>en</strong> Standards <strong>de</strong>r DVB-T- und DVB-C-Spezifikation<strong>en</strong> [August 2008] ein, aber es kann<br />
nicht garantiert wer<strong>de</strong>n, dass die Kompatibilität mit zukünftig<strong>en</strong> digital<strong>en</strong> terrestrisch<strong>en</strong> DVB-T- und DBV-C-Signal<strong>en</strong> gewahrt bleibt.<br />
4. Manche Kabelfernsehanbieter verlang<strong>en</strong> zusätzliche Gebühr<strong>en</strong> für solch ein<strong>en</strong> Di<strong>en</strong>st, und möglicherweise wird verlangt, dass Sie<br />
<strong>de</strong>n Vertragsbedingung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Unternehm<strong>en</strong>s zustimm<strong>en</strong>.<br />
5. Manche Digitalfernsehfunktion<strong>en</strong> sind in einig<strong>en</strong> Län<strong>de</strong>rn o<strong>de</strong>r Region<strong>en</strong> möglicherweise nicht verfügbar, und bei DVB-C kann das<br />
Gerät möglicherweise nicht mit all<strong>en</strong> Anbietern störungsfrei zusamm<strong>en</strong>arbeit<strong>en</strong>.<br />
6. Für weitere Information<strong>en</strong> setz<strong>en</strong> Sie sich bitte mit <strong>de</strong>m <strong>Samsung</strong>-Kun<strong>de</strong>ndi<strong>en</strong>stz<strong>en</strong>trum in Verbindung.<br />
Kontakt zu <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Falls Sie Frag<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r Anregung<strong>en</strong> zu <strong>Samsung</strong>-Produkt<strong>en</strong> hab<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich bitte an <strong>de</strong>n <strong>Samsung</strong>-Kun<strong>de</strong>ndi<strong>en</strong>st. (Weitere<br />
Information<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Rückseite)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Deutsch - 2
Inhalt<br />
Anschließ<strong>en</strong> und Vorbereit<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts<br />
Toneinstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
■ Lieferumfang........................................................................4<br />
■ Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>s Standfußes.................................................4<br />
■ Montier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Standfußes (mo<strong>de</strong>llabhängig)......................4<br />
■ Bedi<strong>en</strong>feld............................................................................5<br />
■ Anschlussfeld.......................................................................6<br />
■ Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung.....................................................................8<br />
■ Batteri<strong>en</strong> in die Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung einsetz<strong>en</strong>...........................9<br />
■ Ein- und Ausschalt<strong>en</strong>...........................................................9<br />
■ Fernsehgerät in <strong>de</strong>n Standby-Modus schalt<strong>en</strong>....................9<br />
■ M<strong>en</strong>üs anzeig<strong>en</strong>.................................................................10<br />
■ Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Taste TOOLS............................................10<br />
■ Anzeig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>üs.........................................10<br />
■ Plug & Play-Funktion.........................................................11<br />
Kanalsteuerung<br />
■ Speichern von Kanäl<strong>en</strong>......................................................12<br />
■ Verwalt<strong>en</strong> von Kanäl<strong>en</strong>......................................................15<br />
Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong><br />
■ Än<strong>de</strong>rn und Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong>...............17<br />
■ Tonstandard wähl<strong>en</strong>...........................................................20<br />
■ Tonmodus wähl<strong>en</strong>..............................................................21<br />
Funktionsbeschreibung<br />
■ Konfi gurier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r M<strong>en</strong>üeinstellung<strong>en</strong>...............................22<br />
■ Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Uhrzeit.........................................................24<br />
■ Quell<strong>en</strong> / Name bearb........................................................25<br />
■ PC-Anzeige........................................................................26<br />
■ Anzeigemodi......................................................................26<br />
■ Hilfsprogramm....................................................................27<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
Empfehlung<strong>en</strong> für <strong>de</strong>n Betrieb<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>otextfunktion...............................................................28<br />
Spezifi kation (VESA) <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung.........................29<br />
Vorbereitung für die Befestigung <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung<br />
an <strong>de</strong>r Wand.......................................................................30<br />
Befestig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts an <strong>de</strong>r Wand......................30<br />
Fehlerbehebung.................................................................31<br />
Absichern <strong>de</strong>s Einbaubereichs..........................................31<br />
Technische Dat<strong>en</strong>..............................................................32<br />
Deutsch<br />
N O T<br />
Symbol Drück<strong>en</strong> Hinweis Zielwahltaste TOOL-Taste<br />
Deutsch - 3
Anschließ<strong>en</strong> und Vorbereit<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts<br />
Lieferumfang<br />
Bedi<strong>en</strong>ungsanleitung<br />
Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung/<br />
AAA-Batteri<strong>en</strong> (2 Stück)<br />
Netzkabel Reinigungstuch Garantiekarte/<br />
Sicherheitshinweise<br />
(Nicht überall verfügbar)<br />
Schraub<strong>en</strong> (4 Stück) Untere Ab<strong>de</strong>ckung Haltering (4 Stück)<br />
(Information<strong>en</strong> hierzu<br />
fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf Seite 30)<br />
Ferritkern für Netzkabel<br />
(1 Stück)<br />
N<br />
Ferritkerne wer<strong>de</strong>n zum Abschirm<strong>en</strong> von Kabeln geg<strong>en</strong> Störung<strong>en</strong> verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t.<br />
Öffn<strong>en</strong> Sie beim Anschließ<strong>en</strong> eines Kabels <strong>de</strong>n Ferritkern, und befestig<strong>en</strong> Sie ihn in <strong>de</strong>r Nähe <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Steckers am Kabel.<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>s Standfußes<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Der Plasmafernseher sollte von min<strong>de</strong>st<strong>en</strong>s zwei Person<strong>en</strong><br />
getrag<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n. Um Beschädigung<strong>en</strong> zu vermei<strong>de</strong>n, leg<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n<br />
Plasmafernseher nie auf <strong>de</strong>n Fußbo<strong>de</strong>n. Der Plasmabildschirm muss sich<br />
immer in aufrechter Position befin<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Der Plasmabildschirm kann um 20 Grad nach recht und links gedreht<br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Montier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Standfußes (mo<strong>de</strong>llabhängig)<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie die 4 mitgeliefert<strong>en</strong> Schraub<strong>en</strong>, um <strong>de</strong>n TV fest mit <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Bo<strong>de</strong>nplatte zu verschraub<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(Das Gehäuse Ihres Fernsehers <strong>en</strong>tspricht möglicherweise nicht g<strong>en</strong>au<br />
<strong>de</strong>r Abbildung.)<br />
Achtung<br />
Befestig<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Standfuß sicher am<br />
Fernsehgerät, ehe Sie ihn beweg<strong>en</strong>,<br />
da <strong>de</strong>r Standfuß umfall<strong>en</strong> und schwere<br />
Verletzung<strong>en</strong> verursach<strong>en</strong> kann.<br />
N Der PDP-Fernseher sollte von<br />
min<strong>de</strong>st<strong>en</strong>s zwei Person<strong>en</strong> getrag<strong>en</strong><br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n. Um Beschädigung<strong>en</strong> zu<br />
vermei<strong>de</strong>n, leg<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Fernseher nie<br />
auf <strong>de</strong>n Fußbo<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Bewahr<strong>en</strong> Sie ihn stets aufrecht steh<strong>en</strong>d<br />
auf.<br />
Bei Wandinstallation Ihres Fernsehgeräts<br />
Schließ<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Deckel (1) am<br />
Verbindungsteil <strong>de</strong>s Standfußes mithilfe <strong>de</strong>r zwei<br />
Verbl<strong>en</strong>dschraub<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Deutsch -
Bedi<strong>en</strong>feld<br />
N Die Produktfarbe und -form könn<strong>en</strong> sich je nach Mo<strong>de</strong>ll unterschei<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Tast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Vor<strong>de</strong>rseite<br />
Berühr<strong>en</strong> Sie die verschie<strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong><br />
Tast<strong>en</strong>, um die gewünscht<strong>en</strong><br />
Funktion<strong>en</strong> zu nutz<strong>en</strong>.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Schaltet zwisch<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Signalquell<strong>en</strong> um.<br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N Im Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>ü könn<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste wie die<br />
ENTERE auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um die Funktion<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Fernsehgeräts in einem Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>ü anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3 + −<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong>, um die Lautstärke zu erhöh<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r zu verringern.<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie im Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>ü die + − Schaltfläch<strong>en</strong>,<br />
so wie Sie die ◄ und ► Tast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung<br />
verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
4 CH<br />
Kanal wechseln. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie im Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>ü die<br />
CH Schaltfläch<strong>en</strong>, so wie Sie die ▲ und ▼<br />
Tast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
5 STROMVERSORGUNGSANZEIGE<br />
Beim Einschalt<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts blinkt die<br />
Betriebsanzeige kurz und erlischt anschließ<strong>en</strong>d. Im<br />
Standbymodus leuchtet die Anzeige perman<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
6<br />
(POWER)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um das Fernsehgerät ein- und<br />
auszuschalt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
7 FERNBEDIENUNGSSENSOR<br />
Richt<strong>en</strong> Sie die Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung auf dies<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong>sor am<br />
Fernsehgerät.<br />
8 LAUTSPRECHER<br />
Deutsch -
Anschlussfeld<br />
Rückseite<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
8<br />
o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
Kabelfernseh<strong>en</strong><br />
Netzwerk<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
Die Produktfarbe und -form könn<strong>en</strong> sich je nach Mo<strong>de</strong>ll unterschei<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie sicher, dass <strong>de</strong>r Fernseher und alle angeschloss<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Geräte ausgeschaltet sind, ehe Sie weitere Geräte<br />
anschließ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Acht<strong>en</strong> Sie beim Anschließ<strong>en</strong> eines extern<strong>en</strong> Geräts auf die Farbcodierung: Stecker und Buchse müss<strong>en</strong> die gleiche Farbe<br />
aufweis<strong>en</strong>.<br />
1 Netzanschluss<br />
Zum Anschließ<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s mitgeliefert<strong>en</strong> Netzkabels.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Anschluss für Servicezwecke.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Audio (AUDIO L/R) und Vi<strong>de</strong>oeingänge (Y/PB/PR) (/P für<br />
Kompon<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>anschluss.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Ein- und Ausgänge für externe Geräte wie z. B.<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>orecor<strong>de</strong>r, DVD-Player, Spielekonsol<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r Vi<strong>de</strong>o-<br />
Disc-Player.<br />
Anschlussmöglichkeit<strong>en</strong><br />
Eingang<br />
Ausgang<br />
Anschluss<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Audio(L/R) RGB Vi<strong>de</strong>o + Audio(L/R)<br />
EXT<br />
Nur TV- o<strong>de</strong>r DTV-<br />
✔ ✔ ✔<br />
Ausgang verfügbar.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Ausgang an ein digitales Audiogerät anschließ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
Schließ<strong>en</strong> Sie die Cinch-Audiosignale <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts<br />
an eine externe Quelle an, z. B. an ein Audiogerät.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1, 2 (DVI)<br />
– Beim Anschluss von Gerät<strong>en</strong> über eine HDMI-Schnittstelle<br />
ist keine zusätzliche Audioverbindung erfor<strong>de</strong>rlich.<br />
− Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI<br />
IN 2 (DVI) erfolg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N What is HDMI?<br />
− HDMI, die hochauflös<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> Multimediaschnittstelle,<br />
ermöglicht die Übertragung von hochauflös<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
digital<strong>en</strong> Vi<strong>de</strong>odat<strong>en</strong> und mehrer<strong>en</strong> Kanäl<strong>en</strong> mit<br />
Digitalaudio.<br />
− Mit <strong>de</strong>m <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Kabel ermöglicht <strong>de</strong>r HDMI/DVI-<br />
Anschluss DVI-Verbindung<strong>en</strong> zu einem erweitert<strong>en</strong> Gerät<br />
(nicht mitgeliefert). Der Unterschied zwisch<strong>en</strong> HDMI und<br />
DVI besteht darin, dass ein Gerät mit HDMI kleiner ist, mit<br />
<strong>de</strong>m Kopierschutz HDCP (Hoch Bandwidth Digital Copy<br />
Protection/ digitaler Kopierschutz) ausgestattet ist und<br />
digital<strong>en</strong> Mehrkanalton unterstützt.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
DVI-Audioausgänge für externe Geräte.<br />
8 Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>eingang<br />
75 Ω-Koaxialanschluss für Ant<strong>en</strong>ne/Kabelanschluss.<br />
Unterstützte Modi für HDMI/DVI und<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Komp O O O O O O O<br />
Deutsch -
Seit<strong>en</strong>verkleidung<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
Die Produktfarbe und -form könn<strong>en</strong> sich je nach Mo<strong>de</strong>ll unterschei<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
1 Steckplatz für gemeinsame Schnittstelle<br />
IAnschließ<strong>en</strong> einer CI-Karte (Gemeinsame Schnittstelle)<br />
(Information<strong>en</strong> hierzu fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf Seite 23.)<br />
− Ohne eingelegte CI-Karte zeigt das Fernsehgerät auf<br />
einig<strong>en</strong> Kanäl<strong>en</strong> ein gestörtes Signal an.<br />
− Die Verbindungsinformation<strong>en</strong> mit Telefonnummer,<br />
K<strong>en</strong>nung <strong>de</strong>r CI-Karte, Hostk<strong>en</strong>nung und an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong><br />
Angab<strong>en</strong> wird nach ungefähr 2 bis 3 Minut<strong>en</strong> angezeigt.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt wird, w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie<br />
sich bitte an Ihr<strong>en</strong> Di<strong>en</strong>stanbieter.<br />
− W<strong>en</strong>n die Kanalinformationskonfiguration abgeschloss<strong>en</strong><br />
ist, wird die Meldung Aktualisierung abgeschloss<strong>en</strong><br />
angezeigt. Dies be<strong>de</strong>utet, dass die Kanalliste jetzt<br />
aktualisiert ist.<br />
N Die Richtung, in <strong>de</strong>r Sie die Karte einleg<strong>en</strong> müss<strong>en</strong>, ist<br />
darauf mit einem Pfeil markiert.<br />
N Zugangsmodule wer<strong>de</strong>n in einig<strong>en</strong> Län<strong>de</strong>rn und Region<strong>en</strong><br />
nicht unterstützt. Frag<strong>en</strong> Sie diesbezüglich Ihr<strong>en</strong> offiziell<strong>en</strong><br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>-Händler.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o und Audioeingänge für externe Geräte wie z. B.<br />
Camcor<strong>de</strong>r o<strong>de</strong>r Vi<strong>de</strong>orecor<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
Deutsch -
Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung<br />
Die Reichweite <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung beträgt ca. 7 m.<br />
N<br />
Die Leistungsfähigkeit <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung kann durch starke Lichteinstrahlung beeinträchtigt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
1 Netztaste<br />
(Zum An- und Ausschalt<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Fernsehgeräts)<br />
2 TV-Modus direkt aufruf<strong>en</strong><br />
3 Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> für direkte<br />
Programmplatzeingabe<br />
4 Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Favorit<strong>en</strong>liste<br />
an.<br />
5 Ton vorübergeh<strong>en</strong>d ausschalt<strong>en</strong><br />
6 Lauter<br />
Lautstärke verringern<br />
7 Verfügbare Signalquelle auswähl<strong>en</strong><br />
8 Anzeig<strong>en</strong> von Information<strong>en</strong> zur<br />
aktuell<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong>dung<br />
9 Hiermit könn<strong>en</strong> Sie häufig<br />
verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>te Funktion<strong>en</strong> mithilfe von<br />
Symbol<strong>en</strong> schnell ausführ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
0 Steuern <strong>de</strong>s Cursors im M<strong>en</strong>ü<br />
! Anzeig<strong>en</strong> von S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rlist<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>m<br />
Bildschirm.<br />
@ Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie diese Tast<strong>en</strong> bei <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Arbeit mit <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste Pro usw.<br />
$ Vorheriger Kanal<br />
% Nächster Kanal<br />
Vorheriger Kanal<br />
^ Bildschirm-Hauptm<strong>en</strong>ü anzeig<strong>en</strong><br />
& EPG-Anzeige (Elektronischer<br />
Programmführer)<br />
* Zurück zum vorherig<strong>en</strong> M<strong>en</strong>ü<br />
( OSD-M<strong>en</strong>ü ausbl<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
) Auswahl <strong>de</strong>r Audio-Beschreibung.<br />
a Untertitel anzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Teletext-Funktion<strong>en</strong><br />
2 Vi<strong>de</strong>otextanzeige be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
(mo<strong>de</strong>llabhängig)<br />
7 Vi<strong>de</strong>otext-Modus auswähl<strong>en</strong><br />
(LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Verborg<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Inhalt einbl<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
9 Vi<strong>de</strong>otextgrösse<br />
! Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseite speichern<br />
@ Fastext-Thema auswähl<strong>en</strong><br />
# Vi<strong>de</strong>otext anzeig<strong>en</strong>/Vi<strong>de</strong>otext und<br />
Fernsehs<strong>en</strong>dung zugleich anzeig<strong>en</strong><br />
$ Untergeordnete Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseite<br />
% P : Nächste Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseite<br />
P :Vorige Vi<strong>de</strong>oteite<br />
^ Vi<strong>de</strong>otext-In<strong>de</strong>x<br />
* Seite weiter anzeig<strong>en</strong><br />
(nicht umblättern)<br />
( Vi<strong>de</strong>otext abbrech<strong>en</strong><br />
<br />
Deutsch -
Batteri<strong>en</strong> in die Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung einsetz<strong>en</strong><br />
1. Heb<strong>en</strong> Sie die Ab<strong>de</strong>ckung auf <strong>de</strong>r Rückseite <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung an, wie in <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Abbildung dargestellt.<br />
2. Leg<strong>en</strong> Sie zwei AAA-Batteri<strong>en</strong> ein.<br />
N Acht<strong>en</strong> Sie darauf, dass die Pole <strong>de</strong>r Batteri<strong>en</strong> (‘+’ und ‘–’) wie im<br />
Batteriefach angezeigt ausgerichtet sind.<br />
3. Schließ<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Deckel.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n die Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung für ein<strong>en</strong> länger<strong>en</strong> Zeitraum nicht verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t<br />
wird, nehm<strong>en</strong> Sie die Batteri<strong>en</strong> heraus, und lagern Sie sie an einem kühl<strong>en</strong>,<br />
trock<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Ort.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n die Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung nicht funktioniert: Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie Folg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>s:<br />
1. Ist das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet?<br />
2. Wur<strong>de</strong>n Plus- und Minuspol <strong>de</strong>r Batteri<strong>en</strong> vertauscht?<br />
3. Sind die Batteri<strong>en</strong> leer?<br />
4. Gibt es ein<strong>en</strong> Stromausfall o<strong>de</strong>r ist das Netzkabel nicht angeschloss<strong>en</strong>?<br />
5. Befin<strong>de</strong>t sich eine Leuchtstoffröhre o<strong>de</strong>r ein Neonschild in <strong>de</strong>r Nähe?<br />
N<br />
Batteri<strong>en</strong> und Akkus gehör<strong>en</strong> nicht in <strong>de</strong>n Hausmüll.<br />
Als Verbraucher sind Sie verpflichtet, alte Batteri<strong>en</strong> und Akkus zur umweltschon<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Entsorgung zurückzugeb<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> alte Batteri<strong>en</strong> und Akkus bei <strong>de</strong>n öff<strong>en</strong>tlich<strong>en</strong> Sammelstell<strong>en</strong> in Ihrer Gemein<strong>de</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r überall dort abgeb<strong>en</strong>, wo<br />
Batteri<strong>en</strong> und Akkus <strong>de</strong>r betreff<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Art verkauft wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Ein- und Ausschalt<strong>en</strong><br />
Das Netzkabel wird auf <strong>de</strong>r Rückseite <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts angeschloss<strong>en</strong>.<br />
1. Schließ<strong>en</strong> Sie das Netzkabel an eine geeignete Netzsteckdose an.<br />
N Am Gerät leuchtet die Standby-Anzeige auf.<br />
2. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie am Gerät die Taste POWERP.<br />
N Zum Einschalt<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts könn<strong>en</strong> Sie auch die Taste POWERP o<strong>de</strong>r die Taste TV auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung<br />
drück<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung die Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> (0-9) bzw. eine <strong>de</strong>r Programmwahltast<strong>en</strong> (< / >), o<strong>de</strong>r drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die<br />
Taste am Gerät.<br />
N W<strong>en</strong>n Sie das Gerät zum erst<strong>en</strong> Mal einschalt<strong>en</strong>, könn<strong>en</strong> Sie die Sprache auswähl<strong>en</strong>, in <strong>de</strong>r die M<strong>en</strong>üs angezeigt<br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
4. Zum Ausschalt<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts drück<strong>en</strong> Sie erneut die Taste POWERP.<br />
Fernsehgerät in <strong>de</strong>n Standby-Modus schalt<strong>en</strong><br />
Um <strong>de</strong>n Stromverbrauchs zu s<strong>en</strong>k<strong>en</strong>, kann das Gerät in <strong>de</strong>n Standby-Modus geschaltet wer<strong>de</strong>n. Der Standby-Modus ist nützlich,<br />
w<strong>en</strong>n Sie das Gerät vorübergeh<strong>en</strong>d ausschalt<strong>en</strong> möcht<strong>en</strong> (z. B. währ<strong>en</strong>d einer Mahlzeit).<br />
1. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste POWERP auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung.<br />
N Der Bildschirm wird ausgeschaltet, und auf <strong>de</strong>r Vor<strong>de</strong>rseite <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts leuchtet die rote Standby-Anzeige auf.<br />
2. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie einfach erneut die Taste POWERP, eine Zifferntaste (0-9) bzw. die Taste TV o<strong>de</strong>r die Programmwahltaste<br />
(< / >), um das Gerät wie<strong>de</strong>r einzuschalt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Der Standby-Modus ist nicht für längere Phas<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Abwes<strong>en</strong>heit gedacht (z. B. w<strong>en</strong>n Sie verreist sind). Zieh<strong>en</strong> Sie dann<br />
sicherheitshalber <strong>de</strong>n Netzstecker und das Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>kabel.<br />
Deutsch -
M<strong>en</strong>üs anzeig<strong>en</strong><br />
1. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste MENU bei angeschaltetem Gerät. Das Hauptm<strong>en</strong>ü wird<br />
auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm angezeigt. Links im M<strong>en</strong>ü sind Symbole zu seh<strong>en</strong>: Bild,<br />
Ton, Kanal, Einstellung<strong>en</strong>, Eingang, Unterstützte.<br />
2. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ und ▼ eines <strong>de</strong>r Symbole aus. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann<br />
die Taste ENTERE, um in das Unterm<strong>en</strong>ü <strong>de</strong>s Symbols zu wechseln.<br />
3. Zum Be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste EXIT.<br />
N<br />
Das Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>ü wird nach etwa einer Minute vom Bildschirm gelöscht.<br />
Bild<br />
<br />
Modus<br />
: Standard<br />
Zellhelligkeit : 4<br />
Kontrast : 95<br />
Helligkeit : 45<br />
Schärfe : 50<br />
Farbe : 50<br />
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Taste TOOLS<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Taste TOOLS verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, um häufig verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>te Funktion<strong>en</strong> schnell und einfach auszuwähl<strong>en</strong>. Der Inhalt <strong>de</strong>s<br />
M<strong>en</strong>üs Extras hängt davon ab, welche externe Signalquelle Sie für die Anzeige verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
1. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS. Das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras wird geöffnet.<br />
2. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ eine M<strong>en</strong>üoption, und drück<strong>en</strong><br />
Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.<br />
3. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE, um die markiert<strong>en</strong> Elem<strong>en</strong>te<br />
anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>, zu än<strong>de</strong>rn o<strong>de</strong>r zu verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n. Ausführliche Beschreibung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r<br />
einzeln<strong>en</strong> Funktion<strong>en</strong> fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf <strong>de</strong>r jeweilig<strong>en</strong> Seite.<br />
• Bildmodus: siehe Seite 17<br />
• Tonmodus: siehe Seite 20<br />
• Sleep-Timer: siehe Seite 24<br />
• Energiesparmod.: siehe Seite 23<br />
• Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> (und Aus Favorit<strong>en</strong> lösch<strong>en</strong>), siehe Seite 15<br />
<br />
Extras<br />
Bildmodus ◄ Standard ►<br />
Tonmodus : B<strong>en</strong>utzerd.<br />
Sleep-Timer : Aus<br />
Energiesparmod. : Aus<br />
Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong><br />
U Navig. E Eingabe e Be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
Anzeig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>üs<br />
Auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm wer<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r aktuelle Kanal und bestimmte Audio/Vi<strong>de</strong>o<br />
-Einstellung<strong>en</strong> angezeigt.<br />
O<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste INFO, um Information<strong>en</strong> anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste INFO auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung. Auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm wer<strong>de</strong>n<br />
<strong>de</strong>r Kanal, <strong>de</strong>r Tonmodus sowie die Werte bestimmter Bild- und Toneinstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
angezeigt.<br />
• ▲, ▼: Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Information<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>rer Kanäle anzeig<strong>en</strong>. W<strong>en</strong>n Sie zum<br />
ausgewählt<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r wechseln möcht<strong>en</strong>, drück<strong>en</strong> Sie auf die ENTERE-<br />
Taste.<br />
• ◄, ►: Du kan se informasjon om ønsket program på gjel<strong>de</strong>n<strong>de</strong> kanal.<br />
N<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie noch einmal auf die INFO-Taste und wart<strong>en</strong> Sie ca.<br />
10 Sekun<strong>de</strong>n lang, bis die Information<strong>en</strong> automatisch angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Deutsch - 10
Plug & Play-Funktion<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n das Fernsehgerät zum erst<strong>en</strong> Mal eingeschaltet wird, wer<strong>de</strong>n automatisch die Grun<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong> vorg<strong>en</strong>omm<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Der Bildschirmschoner wird aktiviert, w<strong>en</strong>n im Plug&Play-Betrieb länger als 1 Minute keine Eingabe mit <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung erfolgt.<br />
Der Bildschirmschoner wird aktiviert, w<strong>en</strong>n länger als 15 Minut<strong>en</strong> kein Betriebssignal anliegt.<br />
N<br />
1. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste POWER auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung. wird das M<strong>en</strong>ü You can<br />
set the m<strong>en</strong>u language. angezeigt. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie die gewünschte Sprache mit <strong>de</strong>n<br />
Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ aus.<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ENTERE , um Ihre Auswahl zu bestätig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ◄ o<strong>de</strong>r ► die Option Shop Demo o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
Privatgebrauch, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann auf ENTERE .<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Wir empfehl<strong>en</strong> Ihn<strong>en</strong>, das Fernsehgerät im Modus Privatgebrauch zu<br />
verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, um das optimale Bild für <strong>de</strong>n Privatgebrauch zu erziel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Der Modus Shop Demo ist nur geeignet, w<strong>en</strong>n das Gerät in einem Verkaufsbereich verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t wird.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n das Gerät verseh<strong>en</strong>tlich auf <strong>de</strong>n Modus Shop Demo eingestellt ist, und Sie möcht<strong>en</strong> wie<strong>de</strong>r zurück zu<br />
Privatgebrauch (Standard) wechseln, geh<strong>en</strong> Sie so vor: Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Lautstärketaste am Fernsehgerät. W<strong>en</strong>n das<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü Volume angezeigt wird, halt<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste MENU am Fernsehgerät 5 Sekun<strong>de</strong>n lang gedrückt.<br />
3. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ENTERE . Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie das gewünschte Land mit <strong>de</strong>r Taste ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ aus. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste<br />
ENTERE, um Ihre Auswahl zu bestätig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
4. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼, um die S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>r gewählt<strong>en</strong> Verbindung zu speichern, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste<br />
ENTERE.<br />
• Terrestrisch: Terrestrisches Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>signal.<br />
• Kabel: Kabelgebun<strong>de</strong>nes Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>signal.<br />
5. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ die Signalquelle aus, die gespeichert wer<strong>de</strong>n soll. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste<br />
ENTERE, um Terrestrisch auszuwähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Digital und Analog: Digitale und analoge Kanäle.<br />
Digital: Digitale Kanäle.<br />
Analog: Analoge Kanäle.<br />
Eine g<strong>en</strong>auere Beschreibung zur Auswahl <strong>de</strong>s Kabelmodus, fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf Seite 12.<br />
Die Kanalsuche wird automatisch gestartet und be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t.<br />
Zum Unterbrech<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Speichervorgangs zu einem beliebig<strong>en</strong> Zeitpunkt drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ENTERE.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie alle verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Kanäle gespeichert hab<strong>en</strong>, wird die Meldung Uhrmodus einstell<strong>en</strong>. angezeigt.<br />
N<br />
6. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ENTERE. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ die Option Auto, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann<br />
die Taste ENTERE.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>Manuel</strong>l wähl<strong>en</strong>, wird Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Datum und die Uhrzeit ein.angezeigt. (fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf Seite 24)<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie ein digitales Signal empfang<strong>en</strong>, wird die Zeit automatisch eingestellt. An<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>falls siehe Seite 24, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie<br />
Information<strong>en</strong> zum Stell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Uhr wünsch<strong>en</strong>.<br />
7. Die kurze Einführung So erziel<strong>en</strong> Sie mit Ihrem HD-Fernsehgerät optimale Leistung wird angezeigt. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste<br />
ENTERE.<br />
N Dieses M<strong>en</strong>ü ist im HD-Anschlussplanim M<strong>en</strong>ü Unterstützung verfügbar.<br />
8. Die Meldung Wir wünsch<strong>en</strong> gute TV.! wird angezeigt. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie abschließ<strong>en</strong>d die Taste ENTERE.<br />
Plug & Play<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
So setz<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Funktion zurück...<br />
1. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste MENU, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ die Option Einstellung<strong>en</strong>, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann<br />
die Taste ENTERE.<br />
2. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ENTERE erneut, um Plug & Play auszuwähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3. Geb<strong>en</strong> Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. Der Standard-PIN-Co<strong>de</strong> eines neu<strong>en</strong><br />
Fernsehgeräts lautet 0000.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Information<strong>en</strong> zum Än<strong>de</strong>rn <strong>de</strong>r PIN erhalt<strong>en</strong> Sie auf Seite 22.<br />
Die Plug & Play-Funktion gibt es nur im TV-Modus<br />
Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>üsprache<br />
Zeit<br />
S<strong>en</strong>dungsoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Sicherheit<br />
Allgemein<br />
: Deutsch<br />
►<br />
Deutsch - 11
Kanalsteuerung<br />
Speichern von Kanäl<strong>en</strong><br />
❑ Land<br />
• Digitaler S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r: Sie könn<strong>en</strong> das Land für Digitalkanäle än<strong>de</strong>rn.<br />
• Analog S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r: Sie könn<strong>en</strong> das Land für Analogkanäle än<strong>de</strong>rn.<br />
N<br />
❑<br />
Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geb<strong>en</strong> Sie nun Ihre vierstellige<br />
PIN ein.<br />
Autom. speichern<br />
Das Fernsehgerät durchsucht automatisch alle Kanäle mit aktiv<strong>en</strong><br />
S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn (Anzahl ist län<strong>de</strong>rabhängig) und speichert sie im Speicher <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Fernsehgeräts.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r für die gewählte Verbindung speichern.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
•<br />
Terrestrisch: Terrestrisches Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>signal.<br />
Kabel: Kabelgebun<strong>de</strong>nes Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>signal.<br />
Bei Auswahl von Kabel,<br />
Suchmodus: Anzeig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Suchmodus. (Schnell)<br />
- Network ID: Anzeig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Netzwerkk<strong>en</strong>nung.<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>z: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Frequ<strong>en</strong>z <strong>de</strong>s S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rs an.<br />
- Modulation: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Modulationswerte an.<br />
- Symbolrate: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Symbolrat<strong>en</strong> an.<br />
• Suchmodus: Anzeig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Suchmodus. (Voll, Netzwerk)<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>z (Terrestrisch~Stopp): Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Frequ<strong>en</strong>z <strong>de</strong>s S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rs an.<br />
- Modulation: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Modulationswerte an.<br />
- Symbolrate: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Symbolrat<strong>en</strong> an.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Signalquelle <strong>de</strong>s Kanals speichern.<br />
• Digital und Analog: Digitale und analoge Kanäle.<br />
• Digital: Digitale Kanäle.<br />
• Analog: Analoge Kanäle.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie Autom. speichern anhalt<strong>en</strong> möcht<strong>en</strong>, drück<strong>en</strong> Sie auf ENTERE .<br />
Die Meldung Automatische S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rspeicherung be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n? wird angezeigt.<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ◄ o<strong>de</strong>r ►, um Yes auszuwähl<strong>en</strong>, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE .<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n ein Kanal mit <strong>de</strong>r Funktion Kin<strong>de</strong>rsicherung gesperrt wur<strong>de</strong>, wird das Eingabef<strong>en</strong>ster für die PIN geöffnet.<br />
Kanal<br />
Land<br />
Autom. speichern<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong>l speichem<br />
Suchoption<strong>en</strong> für Kabel<br />
Jetzt&Danach-Führer<br />
Ausführlich<br />
Standard<br />
: Akt./Näch.<br />
►<br />
Deutsch - 12
❑<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong>l speichem<br />
Hiermit wird manuell ein Kanal gesucht und dieser im Fernsehspeicher abgelegt.<br />
• Digitaler S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r (Digitaler)<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong>les Speichern von digital<strong>en</strong> Kanäl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Digitals<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r sind nur im DTV-Modus verfügbar.<br />
• Kanal: Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Kanalnummer mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ o<strong>de</strong>r einer Zifferntaste (0 – 9) ein.<br />
• Frequ<strong>en</strong>z: Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Frequ<strong>en</strong>z mithilfe <strong>de</strong>r Zifferntast<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Bandbreite: Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Bandbreite mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ o<strong>de</strong>r einer Zifferntaste (0 – 9).<br />
N Nach Abschluss <strong>de</strong>s Suchlaufs wer<strong>de</strong>n die Kanäle in <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste aktualisiert.<br />
• Analog S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong>les Speichern von analog<strong>en</strong> Kanäl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
• Programm (<strong>de</strong>r Programmplatz, <strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>m Kanal zugewies<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n soll): Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Programmplatz mit <strong>de</strong>n<br />
Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ o<strong>de</strong>r einer Zifferntaste (0 – 9) ein.<br />
• Fernsehnorm → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Fernsehnorm mithilfe <strong>de</strong>r Taste ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼.<br />
• Tonsystem → BG / L / I / DK: Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Tonsystems mithilfe <strong>de</strong>r Taste ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼.<br />
• Kanal (W<strong>en</strong>n Ihn<strong>en</strong> die Nummer <strong>de</strong>s zu speichern<strong>de</strong>n S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rs bekannt ist) Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong><br />
▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ die Option C (terrestrischer Kanal) o<strong>de</strong>r S (Kabelkanal). Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ►, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die<br />
Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ o<strong>de</strong>r eine Zifferntaste (0 - 9) , um die gewünschte Nummer auszuwähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Die Kanalnummer könn<strong>en</strong> Sie auch direkt durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> (0 - 9) auswähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Falls kein o<strong>de</strong>r nur schlechter Ton zu hör<strong>en</strong> sein sollte, wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie ein<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Audiostandard aus.<br />
• Suchlauf (W<strong>en</strong>n Ihn<strong>en</strong> die Kanalnummern nicht bekannt sind): Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie zum Start<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Suchlaufs die Taste<br />
▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼. Der Tuner durchsucht <strong>de</strong>n Frequ<strong>en</strong>zbereich, bis <strong>de</strong>r erste S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r bzw. <strong>de</strong>r ausgewählte S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r empfang<strong>en</strong> wird.<br />
• Speichern (zum Speichern <strong>de</strong>s Kanals und <strong>de</strong>s zugehörig<strong>en</strong> Programmplatzes) Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ENTERE , um OK zu<br />
wähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Kanalmodus<br />
- C (Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>empfangsmodus): In diesem Modus könn<strong>en</strong> Sie Kanäle durch Eingabe <strong>de</strong>r Nummer anwähl<strong>en</strong>, die je<strong>de</strong>m<br />
Ant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>s<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r zugeordnet ist.<br />
- S (Kabelkanalmodus): In diesem Modus könn<strong>en</strong> Sie S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r durch Eingabe <strong>de</strong>r Nummer anwähl<strong>en</strong>, die je<strong>de</strong>m<br />
Kabels<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r zugeordnet ist.<br />
Suchoption<strong>en</strong> für Kabel (Kabel)<br />
Hiermit könn<strong>en</strong> Sie (je nach Land) weitere Suchoption<strong>en</strong> für die S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rsuche im Kabelnetz einstell<strong>en</strong><br />
(z. B. Frequ<strong>en</strong>z o<strong>de</strong>r Symbolrate).<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>z (Terrestrisch~Stopp): Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Frequ<strong>en</strong>z <strong>de</strong>s S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rs an.<br />
Modulation: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Modulationswerte an.<br />
Symbolrate: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Symbolrat<strong>en</strong> an.<br />
N Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Frequ<strong>en</strong>z (Terrestrisch~Stopp) und die Symbolrate mit Hilfe <strong>de</strong>r Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> (0–9) ein.<br />
Jetzt&Danach-Führer / Ausführlich<br />
Die Information<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s elektronisch<strong>en</strong> Programmführers wer<strong>de</strong>n von <strong>de</strong>n S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn zur Verfügung gestellt. Es kann sein,<br />
dass Programmeinträge leer o<strong>de</strong>r veraltet sind. Dies ist auf die für ein<strong>en</strong> bestimmt<strong>en</strong> Kanal übertrag<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Information<strong>en</strong><br />
zurückzuführ<strong>en</strong>. Die Anzeige wird dynamisch aktualisiert, sobald neue Information<strong>en</strong> verfügbar sind.<br />
• Jetzt&Danach-Führer: Für die sechs in <strong>de</strong>r link<strong>en</strong> Spalte angezeigt<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r wer<strong>de</strong>n Information<strong>en</strong> zur aktuell<strong>en</strong> und<br />
nächst<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong>dung angezeigt.<br />
• Ausführlich: Hier wer<strong>de</strong>n die Programminformation<strong>en</strong> in einem Zeitplan mit einer Unterteilung von jeweils 1 Stun<strong>de</strong><br />
angezeigt. Es wird ein Zeitf<strong>en</strong>ster von 1 Stun<strong>de</strong>n mit Programminformation<strong>en</strong> angezeigt. Dieses F<strong>en</strong>ster kann jedoch<br />
in <strong>de</strong>r Zeit nach vorne o<strong>de</strong>r nach hint<strong>en</strong> verschob<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Deutsch - 13
❑ Standard<br />
• Akt./Näch. / Ausführlich : Mit <strong>de</strong>r Taste GUIDE auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung<br />
könn<strong>en</strong> Sie einstell<strong>en</strong>, ob <strong>de</strong>r Akt./Näch. o<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>r Ausführlich angezeigt<br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n soll.<br />
S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r<br />
Jetzt&Danach-Führer<br />
Ausführlich<br />
Standard : Akt./Näch. ►<br />
S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rliste<br />
Kanalmodus : Hinzugef. S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r<br />
Feinabstimmung<br />
O<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> diese Option<strong>en</strong> auswähl<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie einfach die Taste GUIDE auf<br />
<strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung drück<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>s Jetzt&Danach-Führer / Ausführlich<br />
Jetzt&Danach-Führer<br />
Ausführlich<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Akt.<br />
Näch.<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Anseh<strong>en</strong> Information Seite • Ausführlich • En<strong>de</strong><br />
Anseh<strong>en</strong> Information Seite • Akt./Näch. • En<strong>de</strong><br />
▲/▼/◄/►,<br />
(ENTER)<br />
ROT<br />
GRÜN<br />
GELB<br />
BLAU<br />
INFO<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲/ ▼/ ◄/ ► das Programm aus.<br />
Sobald Sie ein Programm gewählt hab<strong>en</strong>, wird es zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit einem Uhr-Symbol angezeigt. W<strong>en</strong>n<br />
Sie erneut ENTERE gedrückt hab<strong>en</strong>, drück<strong>en</strong> Sie auf ▲/▼/◄/►, um die Option Programmierung<br />
abbrech<strong>en</strong> zu wähl<strong>en</strong>. Danach wird die Programmwahl aufgehob<strong>en</strong> und das Uhr-Symbol wird <strong>en</strong>tfernt.<br />
Weitere Information<strong>en</strong> über das Vormerk<strong>en</strong> von Programm<strong>en</strong> fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie im Abschnitt.<br />
Schalt<strong>en</strong> Sie zwisch<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Akt./Näch. und <strong>de</strong>m Ausführlich<strong>en</strong> Programmführer um.<br />
Ausführlich: Schnell zurückblättern (-24 Stun<strong>de</strong>n).<br />
Ausführlich: Schnell weiterblättern (+24 Stun<strong>de</strong>n).<br />
Programmführer be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
INFO-Taste, um <strong>de</strong>tailliertere Information<strong>en</strong> zu erhalt<strong>en</strong>. Zu dies<strong>en</strong> Information<strong>en</strong> gehör<strong>en</strong>:<br />
Kanalnummer, Programmdauer, Statusleiste, Kin<strong>de</strong>rsicherungsstufe, Bildqualität (HD/SD), Tonmodus,<br />
Untertitel o<strong>de</strong>r Teletext, Sprache für Untertitel o<strong>de</strong>r Teletext sowie Kurzzusamm<strong>en</strong>fassung <strong>de</strong>s<br />
markiert<strong>en</strong> Programms. W<strong>en</strong>n die Zusamm<strong>en</strong>fassung zu lang ist, wird ... angezeigt.<br />
❑<br />
Kanalliste<br />
Detaillierte Verfahr<strong>en</strong>sbeschreibung<strong>en</strong> zur Verw<strong>en</strong>dung <strong>de</strong>r S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rliste <strong>en</strong>tnehm<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Beschreibung<strong>en</strong> auf Seite 15~16.<br />
❑<br />
Kanalmodus<br />
Durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Taste P < / > wechseln Sie innerhalb <strong>de</strong>r gewählt<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rliste zwisch<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn.<br />
• Hinzugef. S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r: Es wird nur zwisch<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn <strong>de</strong>r gespeichert<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rliste gewechselt.<br />
• Favorit<strong>en</strong>: Es wird nur zwisch<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn <strong>de</strong>r Favorit<strong>en</strong>liste gewechselt.<br />
❑<br />
Feinabstimmung (nur Analogkanal)<br />
Bei klarem Empfang ist keine Feinabstimmung nötig, da diese automatisch währ<strong>en</strong>d <strong>de</strong>r S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rsuche erfolgt. Falls das Signal<br />
jedoch schwach o<strong>de</strong>r das Bild verzerrt ist, müss<strong>en</strong> Sie unter Umstän<strong>de</strong>n eine manuelle Feinabstimmung durchführ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Gespeicherte feinabgestimmte Kanäle wer<strong>de</strong>n mit einem Sternch<strong>en</strong> * auf <strong>de</strong>r recht<strong>en</strong> Seite <strong>de</strong>r Kanalnummer im Kanal-<br />
Banner markiert.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n feinabgestimmt<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r nicht speichern, wer<strong>de</strong>n Ihre Einstellung<strong>en</strong> nicht gesichert.<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie zum Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Feinabstimmung die Option Reset aus, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie die Taste ▼ drück<strong>en</strong> und dann die<br />
Taste ENTERE drück<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Deutsch - 14
Verwalt<strong>en</strong> von Kanäl<strong>en</strong><br />
Mit diesem M<strong>en</strong>ü könn<strong>en</strong> Sie Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong>, lösch<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r einstell<strong>en</strong> und <strong>de</strong>n<br />
digital<strong>en</strong> Programmführer für Digitals<strong>en</strong>dung<strong>en</strong> verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie im F<strong>en</strong>ster Alle S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r, Hinzugefügte S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r, Favorit o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
Programmiert ein<strong>en</strong> Kanal. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie hierzu die Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ und die<br />
Taste ENTERE.<br />
Alle S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie alle verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Kanäle an.<br />
Hinzugefügte S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie alle hinzugefügt<strong>en</strong> Kanäle an.<br />
Favorit: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie alle Favorit<strong>en</strong>kanäle an.<br />
Programmiert: Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie alle vorgemerkt<strong>en</strong> Programme an.<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Farbtast<strong>en</strong> in Verbindung mit <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste.<br />
- Rot (Kanaltyp): Schalt<strong>en</strong> Sie zwisch<strong>en</strong> TV, Radio,Dat<strong>en</strong>/And. und Alle um.<br />
- Grün (Zoom): Hiermit vergrößern o<strong>de</strong>r verkleinern Sie die Kanalnummer.<br />
- Gelb (Select): Hiermit wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie mehrere Kanallist<strong>en</strong> aus.<br />
-<br />
TTOOLS (Option): Hiermit zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie die M<strong>en</strong>üs Lösch<strong>en</strong> (o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
Hinzufüg<strong>en</strong>), Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> (o<strong>de</strong>r Aus Favorit<strong>en</strong> lösch<strong>en</strong>),<br />
Timer-Wie<strong>de</strong>rgabe, S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rnam<strong>en</strong> bearbeit<strong>en</strong>, Programmplatz bearbeit<strong>en</strong>,<br />
Sortier<strong>en</strong>, Sperr<strong>en</strong> (o<strong>de</strong>r Freigabe), Alle wähl<strong>en</strong> (und Alle abwähl<strong>en</strong>) o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
Autom. speichern an.<br />
(Der Inhalt <strong>de</strong>s M<strong>en</strong>üs Option<strong>en</strong> hängt von <strong>de</strong>r jeweilig<strong>en</strong> Situation ab.)<br />
Kanal<br />
Hinzugefügte S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r<br />
<br />
Übersicht<br />
Standard<br />
: Akt./Näch.<br />
Kanalliste<br />
Kanalmodus : Hinzugef. S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r<br />
Feinabstimmung<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Alle • Kanaltyp • Zoom • Wähl<strong>en</strong> Extras<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Symbole zur Anzeige <strong>de</strong>s Kanalstatus<br />
A Ein analoger Kanal. c Ein Kanal, <strong>de</strong>r durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r gelb<strong>en</strong> Taste gewählt wur<strong>de</strong>.<br />
♥ Ein Kanal, <strong>de</strong>r als Favorit eingestellt ist. ( Ein Programm, das gera<strong>de</strong> ges<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t wird.<br />
\ Ein gesperrter Kanal. ) Ein vorgemerktes Programm<br />
Sie öffn<strong>en</strong> die S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rlist<strong>en</strong> durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Taste CH LIST auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras für S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rlist<strong>en</strong> (in Alle S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r / Hinzugefügte S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r / Favourites)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Der Inhalt <strong>de</strong>s Optionsm<strong>en</strong>üs hängt vom jeweilig<strong>en</strong> Kanalstatus ab.<br />
• Hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> / Lösch<strong>en</strong><br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Kanäle lösch<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r hinzufüg<strong>en</strong>, damit nur die gewünscht<strong>en</strong> Kanäle<br />
angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Alle gelöscht<strong>en</strong> Kanäle wer<strong>de</strong>n im M<strong>en</strong>ü Alle S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r angezeigt.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Kanal in grauer Farbe dargestellt wird, wur<strong>de</strong> er gelöscht.<br />
Das M<strong>en</strong>ü Hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> wird nur für gelöschte Kanäle angezeigt.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> ein<strong>en</strong> Kanal aus <strong>de</strong>m M<strong>en</strong>ü Hinzugefügte S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
Favourite in gleicher Weise lösch<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> / Aus Favorit<strong>en</strong> lösch<strong>en</strong><br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Kanäle, die Sie häufig seh<strong>en</strong>, als Favorit festleg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
T Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> zu<strong>de</strong>m ein<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r zu <strong>de</strong>n Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie Extras → Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong><br />
hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> wähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Das Symbol “♥” wird angezeigt, und <strong>de</strong>r Kanal wird als Favorit festgelegt.<br />
Alle Favorit<strong>en</strong>kanäle wer<strong>de</strong>n im M<strong>en</strong>ü Favourite angezeigt.<br />
Durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Taste FAV.CH auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung könn<strong>en</strong> Sie die<br />
eingerichtet<strong>en</strong> Favorit<strong>en</strong>kanäle auswähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Alle S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Lösch<strong>en</strong><br />
Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong><br />
Sperr<strong>en</strong><br />
Timer-Wie<strong>de</strong>rgabe<br />
S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rnam<strong>en</strong> bearbeit<strong>en</strong><br />
Sortier<strong>en</strong><br />
▼<br />
Alle • Kanaltyp • Zoom • Wähl<strong>en</strong> Extras<br />
Fortsetzung...<br />
Deutsch - 15
• Timerwie<strong>de</strong>rgabe<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie ein Programm zum Anschau<strong>en</strong> vorgemerkt hab<strong>en</strong>, wechselt das Fernsehgerät automatisch zum vorgemerkt<strong>en</strong><br />
Kanal in <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste, auch w<strong>en</strong>n Sie gera<strong>de</strong> ein<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Kanal anschau<strong>en</strong>. Um ein Programm vorzumerk<strong>en</strong> müss<strong>en</strong> Sie<br />
zuerst die Uhrzeit einstell<strong>en</strong>. (Siehe Seite 24.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
• S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rnam<strong>en</strong> bearbeit<strong>en</strong> (nur Analogkanal)<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Kanäle mit Beschriftung<strong>en</strong> verseh<strong>en</strong>, sodass die erst<strong>en</strong> Buchstab<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Nam<strong>en</strong>s immer dann angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n,<br />
w<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Kanal wähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Die Nam<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r digital<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r wer<strong>de</strong>n automatisch zugewies<strong>en</strong> und könn<strong>en</strong> nicht geän<strong>de</strong>rt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• Programmplatz bearbeit<strong>en</strong> (nur Digitalkanal)<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Kanalnummer auch mit <strong>de</strong>n Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Sortier<strong>en</strong>. (nur Analogkanal)<br />
Mit diesem Vorgang könn<strong>en</strong> Sie die Programmnummern gespeicherter S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r än<strong>de</strong>rn. Das ist möglicherweise nach <strong>de</strong>m<br />
automatisch<strong>en</strong> Speichern von S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn erfor<strong>de</strong>rlich.<br />
• Sperr<strong>en</strong> / Freigabe<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> ein<strong>en</strong> Kanal sperr<strong>en</strong>, sodass er nicht ausgewählt und angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n kann. Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar,<br />
w<strong>en</strong>n die Kin<strong>de</strong>rsicherung aktiviert ist Ein. (siehe Seite 22)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geb<strong>en</strong> Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.<br />
Der Standard-PIN-Co<strong>de</strong> eines neu<strong>en</strong> Fernsehgeräts lautet 0000. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die PIN än<strong>de</strong>rn, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie im M<strong>en</strong>ü <strong>de</strong>n<br />
Befehl PIN än<strong>de</strong>rn wähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Das Symbol “\” wird angezeigt, und <strong>de</strong>r Kanal wird gesperrt.<br />
• Alle wähl<strong>en</strong> / Alle abwähl<strong>en</strong><br />
• Alle wähl<strong>en</strong>: Sie könn<strong>en</strong> alle Kanäle in <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste auswähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Alle abwähl<strong>en</strong>: Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Auswahl aller Kanäle in <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste aufheb<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Funktion<strong>en</strong> zum Hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> / Lösch<strong>en</strong>, Zu Favorit<strong>en</strong> hinzufüg<strong>en</strong> / Aus Favorit<strong>en</strong> lösch<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r Sperr<strong>en</strong> /<br />
Freigeb<strong>en</strong> gleichzeitig verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n. Markier<strong>en</strong> Sie die gewünscht<strong>en</strong> Kanäle und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die gelbe Taste, um alle<br />
markiert<strong>en</strong> Kanäle zugleich einzustell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Links neb<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>m Nam<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s gewählt<strong>en</strong> Kanals wird das Symbol c angezeigt.<br />
N Alle abwähl<strong>en</strong> könn<strong>en</strong> Sie nur wähl<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong>n min<strong>de</strong>st<strong>en</strong>s ein Kanal gewählt ist.<br />
• Autom. speichern<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> nur gespeicherte Kanäle vormerk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Kanal, Monat, Tag, Jahr, Stun<strong>de</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r Minute auch direkt über die Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Das Vormerk<strong>en</strong> eines Programms wird im M<strong>en</strong>ü Programme med angezeigt.<br />
Digitaler Programmführer und Vormerk<strong>en</strong> von S<strong>en</strong>dung<strong>en</strong><br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie ein<strong>en</strong> digital<strong>en</strong> Kanal gewählt hab<strong>en</strong> und die Taste ► drück<strong>en</strong>, wird <strong>de</strong>r Programmführer für dies<strong>en</strong> Kanal angezeigt.<br />
Geh<strong>en</strong> Sie in <strong>de</strong>r ob<strong>en</strong> beschrieb<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Weise vor, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie ein Programm vormerk<strong>en</strong> möcht<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Weitere Information<strong>en</strong> zum Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Option<strong>en</strong> fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf Seite 12.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n ein Kanal mit <strong>de</strong>r Funktion Kin<strong>de</strong>rsicherung gesperrt wur<strong>de</strong>, wird das Eingabef<strong>en</strong>ster für die PIN geöffnet.<br />
❑<br />
Optionsm<strong>en</strong>ü für Kanallist<strong>en</strong> (in Programmiert)<br />
Mit dieser M<strong>en</strong>üoption könn<strong>en</strong> Sie eine Vormerkung anzeig<strong>en</strong>, än<strong>de</strong>rn o<strong>de</strong>r lösch<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Mit dieser M<strong>en</strong>üoption könn<strong>en</strong> Sie eine Vormerkung anzeig<strong>en</strong>, än<strong>de</strong>rn o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
lösch<strong>en</strong>.Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Info än<strong>de</strong>rn: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu än<strong>de</strong>rn.<br />
Programmierung abbrech<strong>en</strong>: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Option, um eine<br />
Vormerkung zu stornier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Information: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(Sie könn<strong>en</strong> auch die Vormerkinformation<strong>en</strong> auswähl<strong>en</strong>).<br />
Alle wähl<strong>en</strong> / Alle abwähl<strong>en</strong> : Wähl<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r abwähl<strong>en</strong> aller vorgemerkt<strong>en</strong><br />
Programme.<br />
Programmiert<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 Info TV1 än<strong>de</strong>rn Quincy, M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Programmierung abbrech<strong>en</strong><br />
TV3 The Equalizer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Information<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Alle wähl<strong>en</strong><br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Alle • Zoom • Wähl<strong>en</strong> Extras Information<br />
Deutsch - 16
Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Än<strong>de</strong>rn und Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Modus<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Bildstandard auswähl<strong>en</strong>, <strong>de</strong>r für Ihre Sehgewohnheit<strong>en</strong> am<br />
best<strong>en</strong> geeignet ist.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Dynamisch: Hiermit wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie ein hoch auflös<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>s Bild für helle Umgebung<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Standard: Hiermit wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie eine für normale Umgebung<strong>en</strong> optimale Bilddarstellung.<br />
Film: Hiermit wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie eine für dunkle Umgebung<strong>en</strong> ang<strong>en</strong>ehme Bilddarstellung.<br />
T Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Bildmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Bildmodus<br />
einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Bild<br />
Modus : Standard ►<br />
Zellhelligkeit : 4<br />
Kontrast : 95<br />
Helligkeit : 45<br />
Schärfe : 50<br />
Farbe : 50<br />
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Zellhelligkeit / Kontrast / Helligkeit / Schärfe / Farbe / Farbton (G/R)<br />
Das Gerät verfügt über mehrere Einstellmöglichkeit<strong>en</strong> für die Bildqualität:<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Zellhelligkeit: Zum Anpass<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Pixelhelligkeit.<br />
Kontrast : Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Kontrast ein.<br />
Helligkeit : Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Helligkeit ein.<br />
Schärfe: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Schärfe ein.<br />
Farbe: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Farbsättigung <strong>de</strong>s Bilds mithilfe <strong>de</strong>r Leiste auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm ein.<br />
Farbton (G/R): Je näher bei Rot 100, <strong>de</strong>sto stärker gesättigt ist die rote Farbe.<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie zuerst ein<strong>en</strong> Bildmodus zum Anpass<strong>en</strong>. Die eingestellt<strong>en</strong> Werte wer<strong>de</strong>n auf je<strong>de</strong>n Bildmodus angew<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie Än<strong>de</strong>rung<strong>en</strong> an Zellhelligkeit, Kontrast, Helligkeit, Schärfe, Farbe o<strong>de</strong>r Farbton (G/R) vornehm<strong>en</strong>, wird das<br />
Bildschirmm<strong>en</strong>ü <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong>d eingestellt.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Funktion Farbton im Analog-TV-, Ext.-, AV- o<strong>de</strong>r S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o-Modus <strong>de</strong>s PAL-Systems nicht verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Einstellung<strong>en</strong> für je<strong>de</strong>s externe Gerät festleg<strong>en</strong> und speichern, das Sie an ein<strong>en</strong> Eingang <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts<br />
angeschloss<strong>en</strong> hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Die im Betrieb verbrauchte Energiem<strong>en</strong>ge geht <strong>de</strong>utlich zurück, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Helligkeit <strong>de</strong>s Bil<strong>de</strong>s reduzier<strong>en</strong>. Damit s<strong>en</strong>k<strong>en</strong> Sie<br />
die Betriebskost<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Erweiterte Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Bei <strong>de</strong>n neu<strong>en</strong> Fernsehgerät<strong>en</strong> von <strong>Samsung</strong> könn<strong>en</strong> Sie die Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong> noch<br />
g<strong>en</strong>auer anpass<strong>en</strong> als mit <strong>de</strong>n früher<strong>en</strong> Mo<strong>de</strong>ll<strong>en</strong>. Information<strong>en</strong> Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong> im<br />
Einzeln<strong>en</strong> fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie nachfolg<strong>en</strong>d.<br />
N Erweiterte Einstellung<strong>en</strong> steh<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong>n Modi Standard o<strong>de</strong>r Film zur Verfügung.<br />
• Schwarzton → Aus / Dunkel / Dunkler / Dunkelst<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Schwarzwert direkt auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm auswähl<strong>en</strong>, um die Bildschirmtiefe<br />
anzupass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Optimalkontrast → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Bildschirmkontrast so anpass<strong>en</strong>, dass ein optimaler Kontrast gewährleistet<br />
ist.<br />
• Gamma<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die int<strong>en</strong>sität <strong>de</strong>r primärfarbe (Rot, Grün und Blau) einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Farbraum<br />
Der Farbraum ist eine Farbmatrix besteh<strong>en</strong>d aus <strong>de</strong>n Farb<strong>en</strong> Rot, Grün und Blau. Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie Ihr<strong>en</strong> bevorzugt<strong>en</strong> Farbraum, um die Welt in<br />
<strong>de</strong>n natürlichst<strong>en</strong> Farb<strong>en</strong> zu erfahr<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Auto: Hiermit wird <strong>de</strong>r Farbbereich automatisch an die Bildsignalquelle angepasst.<br />
Nativ: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie ein<strong>en</strong> Farbbereich ein, <strong>de</strong>r breiter als <strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>s Eingangssignals ist.<br />
• Weißabgleich<br />
Um natürlichere Bildfarb<strong>en</strong> zu erhalt<strong>en</strong>, könn<strong>en</strong> Sie die Farbtemperatur anpass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
R-Offset/G-Offset/B-Offset/R-Gain/G-Gain/B-Gain: W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Anpassungswert än<strong>de</strong>rn, wird <strong>de</strong>r angepasste Bildschirm aktualisiert.<br />
Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong>: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Standard-Weißabgleich wie<strong>de</strong>r ein.<br />
• Hautton<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> im Bild <strong>de</strong>n Farbton Rosa (Fleischfarbe) beton<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Anpassungswert än<strong>de</strong>rn, wird <strong>de</strong>r angepasste Bildschirm aktualisiert.<br />
• Kant<strong>en</strong>glättung → Aus / Ein<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Objektbegr<strong>en</strong>zung<strong>en</strong> im Bild beton<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Bild<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Farbton (G/R)<br />
Erweiterte Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Bildoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong><br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
Deutsch - 17
❑<br />
Bildoption<strong>en</strong><br />
• Farbtemp. → Kalt / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n für Ihre Aug<strong>en</strong> ang<strong>en</strong>ehmst<strong>en</strong> Farbton auswähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Die eingestellt<strong>en</strong> Werte wer<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong>d <strong>de</strong>m jeweils ausgewählt<strong>en</strong><br />
Bild-Modus gespeichert.<br />
Warm1 o<strong>de</strong>r Warm2 wer<strong>de</strong>n nur aktiviert, w<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Bildmodus auf Film<br />
eingestellt ist.<br />
• Format<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> ein Bildformat auswähl<strong>en</strong>, das Ihr<strong>en</strong> Sehgewohnheit<strong>en</strong> am best<strong>en</strong><br />
<strong>en</strong>tspricht.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Autom. Breite: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bildformat auf "Automatisch Breit" ein.<br />
16:9: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bildformat auf das Seit<strong>en</strong>verhältnis "16:9" ein.<br />
Breit<strong>en</strong>zoom: Hiermit könn<strong>en</strong> Sie 4:3-Bil<strong>de</strong>r auf einem 16:9-Bildschirm darstell<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m das 4:3-Bild vertikal gestreckt<br />
wird.<br />
Zoom: Hiermit streck<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bild im Seit<strong>en</strong>verhältnis "16:9" vertikal.<br />
4:3: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bildformat auf das Seit<strong>en</strong>verhältnis "4:3" ein.<br />
Bildschirmanpassung: Hiermit wird ein volles HD-Signal angezeigt, das mit einem normal<strong>en</strong> Fernsehgerät nicht<br />
wie<strong>de</strong>rgegeb<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n kann.<br />
Je nach Signalquelle könn<strong>en</strong> die Bildgröß<strong>en</strong>option<strong>en</strong> variier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Die verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Elem<strong>en</strong>te könn<strong>en</strong> in Abhängigkeit vom ausgewählt<strong>en</strong> Modus variier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Einstellung<strong>en</strong> für je<strong>de</strong>s externe Gerät festleg<strong>en</strong> und speichern, das Sie an ein<strong>en</strong> Eingang <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Fernsehgeräts angeschloss<strong>en</strong> hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Es kann zu vorübergeh<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r Bildkonservierung komm<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie auf <strong>de</strong>m Gerät mehr als zwei Stun<strong>de</strong>n lang ein<br />
unbewegt<strong>en</strong> Bild angezeigt hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Breit<strong>en</strong>zoom: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Taste ► die Option Position, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE .<br />
Mit <strong>de</strong>r Taste ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ könn<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bild nach ob<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r nach unt<strong>en</strong> verschieb<strong>en</strong>. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE .<br />
Zoom: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Taste ► die Option Position, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE . Mit <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Taste ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ könn<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bild nach ob<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r nach unt<strong>en</strong> verschieb<strong>en</strong>. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE .<br />
Press the ► button to Select Format, th<strong>en</strong> press the ENTERE button. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼, um das Bild in<br />
vertikaler Richtung zu vergrößern o<strong>de</strong>r zu verkleinern. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE .<br />
Nach Auswahl von Bildschirmanpassung im HDMI (1080i/1080p) o<strong>de</strong>r Kompon<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong>modus (1080i/1080p): Wähl<strong>en</strong><br />
Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ◄ o<strong>de</strong>r ► die Option Position. Mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼, ◄ o<strong>de</strong>r ► könn<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bild<br />
verschieb<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong>: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Tast<strong>en</strong> ◄ o<strong>de</strong>r ► die Option Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong>, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die<br />
Taste ENTERE . Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Einstellung initialisier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Funktion Bildschirmanpassung zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit einem HDMI 720p-Signal verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, wird eine Zeile wie<br />
bei Overscan ob<strong>en</strong>, unt<strong>en</strong>, links und rechts abgeschnitt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Bildschirmmodus<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Bildgröße bei einem Fernsehgerät im 16:9-Format auf Autom. Breit einstell<strong>en</strong>, könn<strong>en</strong> Sie bestimm<strong>en</strong>, dass<br />
das Bild als 4:3 WSS (Breitbilddi<strong>en</strong>st) o<strong>de</strong>r gar nicht angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n soll. Da je<strong>de</strong>s europäische Land eine an<strong>de</strong>re Bildgröße<br />
verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t, könn<strong>en</strong> die B<strong>en</strong>utzer sie damit einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• 16:9: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bildformat auf das Seit<strong>en</strong>verhältnis "16:9" ein.<br />
• Breit<strong>en</strong>zoom: Hiermit könn<strong>en</strong> Sie 4:3-Bil<strong>de</strong>r auf einem 16:9-Bildschirm darstell<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m das 4:3-Bild vertikal gestreckt wird.<br />
• Zoom: Hiermit streck<strong>en</strong> Sie das Bild im Seit<strong>en</strong>verhältnis "16:9" vertikal.<br />
• 4:3: Hiermit wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Bildschirmmodus für 4:3.<br />
N Diese Funktion ist im Modus Autom. Breit verfügbar.<br />
Diese Funktion ist im Modus, Komp. o<strong>de</strong>r HDMI nicht verfügbar.<br />
• Digitale RM → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Auto<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n das vom Fernsehgerät empfang<strong>en</strong>e S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>signal schwach ist, könn<strong>en</strong> Sie die digitale Rauschunterdrückung aktivier<strong>en</strong>,<br />
um ggf. statische Bil<strong>de</strong>r o<strong>de</strong>r Doppelbil<strong>de</strong>r auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm zu verringern.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Bei schwachem Signal wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie diej<strong>en</strong>ige <strong>de</strong>r an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Option<strong>en</strong>, bei <strong>de</strong>r das beste Bild angezeigt wird.<br />
• HDMI-Schwarzwert → Normal / Gering<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> direkt auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm <strong>de</strong>n Schwarzwert auswähl<strong>en</strong>, um die Bildschirmtiefe anzupass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Diese Funktion ist nur bei einer Verbindung <strong>de</strong>s extern<strong>en</strong> Eingangs mit HDMI (RGB-Signal) aktiv.<br />
Bild<br />
Farbton (G/R)<br />
Erweiterte Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Bildoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong><br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
Deutsch - 18<br />
Fortsetzung...
• Filmmodus<br />
Hiermit optimier<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Bildmodus für die Wie<strong>de</strong>rgabe von Film<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Aus : Einfache Vi<strong>de</strong>obildverarbeitung wird angew<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t, und keine AutoErk<strong>en</strong>nung von Programm<strong>en</strong> mit Filminhalt.<br />
• Auto: Automatische Einstellung für beste Bildqualität zwisch<strong>en</strong> Programm<strong>en</strong> mit Film o<strong>de</strong>r Vi<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
• Einbr<strong>en</strong>nschutz<br />
Hiermit konfigurier<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Einbr<strong>en</strong>nschutz, um das Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> von Pixeln zu verhin<strong>de</strong>rn bzw. reduzier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n ein Bild zu lange unverän<strong>de</strong>rt in einer Position bleibt, kann es auf Dauer in <strong>de</strong>n Bildschirm eingebrannt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• Pixel-Shift: Dieses Gerät ist mit Einbr<strong>en</strong>nschutz-Technologie ausgestattet, um die Möglichkeit <strong>de</strong>s Einbr<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong>s <strong>de</strong>s Monitorbil<strong>de</strong>s<br />
zu verringern. Diese Technologie ermöglicht das Einstell<strong>en</strong> von vertikal<strong>en</strong> (Vertikal) und horizontal<strong>en</strong> (Horizontal) Bildbewegung<strong>en</strong>. Die<br />
Zeiteinstellung ermöglicht das Programmier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Dauer zwisch<strong>en</strong> Bildbewegung<strong>en</strong> in Minut<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Schalt<strong>en</strong> Sie über die Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ die Pixel-Shift-Funktion Ein, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ die gewünschte Option aus, und drück<strong>en</strong> Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.<br />
Verfügbare Option<strong>en</strong>: Horizontal, Vertikal, Zeit<br />
Optimale Einstellung für Pixel Shift<br />
Kompon<strong>en</strong>te<br />
TV/Ext/AV/Komp./HDMI<br />
Horizontal 0~4 2<br />
Vertikal 0~4 2<br />
Zeit (Minut<strong>en</strong>) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
Der Pixel Shift-Wert kann in Abhängigkeit von <strong>de</strong>r Monitorgröße (Zoll) und <strong>de</strong>m ausgewählt<strong>en</strong> Modus variier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Diese Funktion ist im Modus Bildschirmanpassung nicht verfügbar.<br />
• Blättern: Diese Funktion di<strong>en</strong>t zum Entfern<strong>en</strong> von Nachbil<strong>de</strong>rn auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm, in<strong>de</strong>m alle Pixel <strong>de</strong>s Plasmabildschirms<br />
nach einem bestimmt<strong>en</strong> Muster verschob<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n. Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie diese Funktion, w<strong>en</strong>n Nachbil<strong>de</strong>r o<strong>de</strong>r -symbole auf<br />
<strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n. Diese könn<strong>en</strong> insbeson<strong>de</strong>re dann auftret<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong>n auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm über längere Zeit<br />
ein Standbild angezeigt wur<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Seit<strong>en</strong>balk<strong>en</strong>: Sie verhin<strong>de</strong>rn bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 Beschädigung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirms, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie ein<strong>en</strong> Weißabgleich<br />
an <strong>de</strong>n bei<strong>de</strong>n link<strong>en</strong> Bildschirmrän<strong>de</strong>rn vornehm<strong>en</strong>.<br />
- Dunkel: Bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 wer<strong>de</strong>n die bei<strong>de</strong>n seitlich<strong>en</strong> Bildschirmrän<strong>de</strong>r abgedunkelt.<br />
- Hell: Bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 wer<strong>de</strong>n die bei<strong>de</strong>n seitlich<strong>en</strong> Bildschirmrän<strong>de</strong>r aufgehellt.<br />
❑<br />
Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong> → Reset Bildmodus / Abbrech<strong>en</strong><br />
Setzt alle Bil<strong>de</strong>instellung<strong>en</strong> auf die Standardwerte zurück.<br />
N<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie zuerst ein<strong>en</strong> Bildmodus zum Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong>. Die Reset-Funktion<br />
wird für je<strong>de</strong>n Bildmodus durchgeführt.<br />
Bild<br />
Erweiterte Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Bildoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Bild zurücksetz<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
Deutsch - 19
Toneinstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Tonstandard wähl<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Modus → Standard / Musik / Film / Klare Stimme / B<strong>en</strong>utzerd.<br />
Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Audiomodus ein, <strong>de</strong>r am best<strong>en</strong> zur jeweilig<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong>dung passt.<br />
T Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Tonmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Tonmodus<br />
konfigurier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Equalizer<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Ton Ihrem persönlich<strong>en</strong> Geschmack anpass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Modus: Sie könn<strong>en</strong> ein<strong>en</strong> Audiomodus gemäß Ihrem persönlich<strong>en</strong><br />
Geschmack einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Balance: Steuert die Balance zwisch<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>m link<strong>en</strong> und <strong>de</strong>m recht<strong>en</strong> Lautsprecher.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Bandbreite): Zum Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r unterschiedlich<strong>en</strong><br />
Bandbreit<strong>en</strong>frequ<strong>en</strong>z<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Zurücksetz<strong>en</strong>: Setzt die Equalizereinstellung<strong>en</strong> auf die Standardwerte zurück.<br />
Sound<br />
Modus : B<strong>en</strong>utzerd. ►<br />
Equalizer<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Aus<br />
Audiosprache : ----<br />
Audio für Sehgeschädigte : ----<br />
Audio-Beschreibung<br />
Auto. Lautst.<br />
: Aus<br />
❑<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Ein / Aus<br />
SRS TruSurround HD ist eine Kombination <strong>de</strong>r Technologi<strong>en</strong> von TruSurround und FOCUS TruBass. <br />
Mit SRS TruSurround HD könn<strong>en</strong> Sie virtuelle 5.1 Surroun<strong>de</strong>ffekte mit zwei Lautsprechern g<strong>en</strong>ieß<strong>en</strong>. Diese Funktion sorgt<br />
nicht nur für kräftige Bässe son<strong>de</strong>rn sie verbessert auch die Wi<strong>de</strong>rgabe hoher Frequ<strong>en</strong>z<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Ton beim Fernseh<strong>en</strong> gestört ist stell<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Equalizer und SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On) ein.<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS und das symbol sind Mark<strong>en</strong> von SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
Das TruSurround HD -Verfahr<strong>en</strong> wird in Liz<strong>en</strong>z von SRS Labs, Inc. verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Audiosprache (nur Digitalkanal)<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Standardsprache für Audio än<strong>de</strong>rn. Zeigt die Sprachinformation<strong>en</strong> für <strong>de</strong>n eingeh<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Audiostream an.<br />
N<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> nur Sprach<strong>en</strong> auswähl<strong>en</strong>, die auch tatsächlich übertrag<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Audio für Sehgeschädigte → MPEG / Dolby Digital (nur Digitalkanal)<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie für die Tonausgabe sowohl <strong>de</strong>n Hauptlautsprecher als auch <strong>de</strong>n Audioreceiver verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, kann es aufgrund <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Geschwindigkeitsunterschie<strong>de</strong> beim Dekodier<strong>en</strong> durch die bei<strong>de</strong>n Systeme zu einem Echoeffekt komm<strong>en</strong>. Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie in<br />
dies<strong>en</strong> Fall die TV-Lautsprecher.<br />
N<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> nur Sprach<strong>en</strong> auswähl<strong>en</strong>, die auch tatsächlich übertrag<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Hergestellt unter Liz<strong>en</strong>z von Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby sowie das Doppel-D-Symbol sind War<strong>en</strong>zeich<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Dolby® Laboratories.<br />
❑<br />
Audio-Beschreibung (nur Digitalkanal)<br />
Dies ist eine zusätzliche Audiofunktion, mit <strong>de</strong>r für sehbehin<strong>de</strong>rte Person<strong>en</strong> eine zusätzliche Tonspur wie<strong>de</strong>rgegeb<strong>en</strong> wird.<br />
Diese Funktion verarbeitet <strong>de</strong>n Audiostream für die AB (Audio-Beschreibung), sofern diese vom S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m<br />
Vor<strong>de</strong>rgrundton übertrag<strong>en</strong> wird. Der B<strong>en</strong>utzer kann die Audio-Beschreibung aktivier<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>aktivier<strong>en</strong> und die Lautstärke<br />
einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
O<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> diese Option<strong>en</strong> auswähl<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie einfach die Taste AD auf<br />
<strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung drück<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Audio für Sehgeschädigte → Aus / Ein<br />
Hiermit schalt<strong>en</strong> Sie die Funktion für Audiobeschreibung<strong>en</strong> ein und aus.<br />
• Lautstärke<br />
Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Lautstärke <strong>de</strong>r Audiobeschreibung<strong>en</strong> ein.<br />
N<br />
Lautstärke ist aktiv, w<strong>en</strong>n Audio für Sehgeschädigte aktiviert Ein ist.<br />
Fortsetzung...<br />
Deutsch - 20
❑<br />
❑<br />
Auto. Lautst. → Aus / Ein<br />
Aufgrund unterschiedlicher Signalbedingung<strong>en</strong> unterschei<strong>de</strong>n sich Fernsehs<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r in <strong>de</strong>r Lautstärke, so dass es erfor<strong>de</strong>rlich<br />
sein kann, die Lautstärke beim Umschalt<strong>en</strong> zwisch<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rn je<strong>de</strong>s Mal nachzuregeln. Mit <strong>de</strong>r Funktion für automatische<br />
Lautstärkeeinstellung wird die Lautstärke automatisch bei starkem Modulationssignal verringert und bei schwachem<br />
Modulationssignal erhöht.<br />
Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> → Ext. Lautsprecher / TV-Lautsprecher<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Ton über separate Lautsprecher hör<strong>en</strong> möcht<strong>en</strong>, <strong>de</strong>aktivier<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n intern<strong>en</strong> Verstärker.<br />
N Die Tast<strong>en</strong> – +, M MUTE funktionier<strong>en</strong> nicht, w<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Geräts ausgeschaltet<br />
Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> ist.<br />
N W<strong>en</strong>n Sie im M<strong>en</strong>ü Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> die Option Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> wähl<strong>en</strong>, wer<strong>de</strong>n die<br />
Audioeinstellung<strong>en</strong> eingeschränkt.<br />
Eingebauter Lautsprecher <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts Audioausgang (Optisch, L/R-Out) zum Soundsystem<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Komp. / HDMI<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Komp. / HDMI<br />
TV-Lautsprecher Lautsprecherausgang Audioausgang<br />
Ext. Lautsprecher Mute Audioausgang<br />
Kein Vi<strong>de</strong>osignal Mute Mute<br />
❑<br />
Ton zurücksetz<strong>en</strong> → Alle zurücksetz<strong>en</strong> / Ton-Modus reset /<br />
Abbrech<strong>en</strong><br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> alle Audioeinstellung<strong>en</strong> wie<strong>de</strong>r auf die Werkseinstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
zurücksetz<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Ton<br />
Auto. Lautst.<br />
: Aus<br />
Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> : TV-Lautsprecher<br />
Ton zurücksetz<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
Tonmodus wähl<strong>en</strong><br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie Dual l ll einstell<strong>en</strong>, wird <strong>de</strong>r aktuelle Tonwie<strong>de</strong>rgabemodus auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm abgebil<strong>de</strong>t.<br />
Art <strong>de</strong>r S<strong>en</strong>dung<br />
Bildschirmanzeige<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Standards<strong>en</strong>dung<br />
(Standardtonwie<strong>de</strong>rgabe)<br />
Mono (normale Verw<strong>en</strong>dung)<br />
Standard und NICAM-Mono NICAM<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM-Stereo<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM Dual-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
A2<br />
Stereo<br />
Standards<strong>en</strong>dung<br />
(Standardtonwie<strong>de</strong>rgabe)<br />
Mono (normale Verw<strong>en</strong>dung)<br />
Zweisprachig o<strong>de</strong>r Dual-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Mono erzwung<strong>en</strong>)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Falls das Stereosignal schwach ist und automatisch umgeschaltet wird, sollt<strong>en</strong> Sie zu mono wechseln.<br />
Diese Funktion ist nur bei einem Stereosignal aktiviert. Bei Monosignal<strong>en</strong> ist es <strong>de</strong>aktiviert.<br />
Diese Funktion ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar.<br />
Deutsch - 21
Funktionsbeschreibung<br />
Konfigurier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r M<strong>en</strong>üeinstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
•<br />
M<strong>en</strong>üsprache<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die M<strong>en</strong>üsprache festleg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
S<strong>en</strong>dungsoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Untertitel<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Untertitel aktivier<strong>en</strong> und <strong>de</strong>aktivier<strong>en</strong>. Mit diesem M<strong>en</strong>ü leg<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n<br />
Untertitelmodus fest. Die M<strong>en</strong>üoption Normal ist die Basisoption für Untertitel, und<br />
die Option Schwerhörig ist für hörgeschädigte Person<strong>en</strong> bestimmt.<br />
• Untertitel → Ein / Aus Aus: Aus Untertitel aktivier<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>aktivier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Modus → Normal / Schwerhörig: Festleg<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Untertitelmodus<br />
• Untertitel Sprache: Festleg<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Untertitelsprache<br />
N W<strong>en</strong>n das Programm, das Sie gera<strong>de</strong> seh<strong>en</strong>, die Funktion Schwerhörig nicht unterstützt, wird selbst bei ausgewählter Funktion<br />
Schwerhörig automatisch die Funktion Normal aktiviert.<br />
N Englisch ist <strong>de</strong>r Standardwert in Fäll<strong>en</strong>, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die<br />
S<strong>en</strong>dung nicht verfügbar ist.<br />
O Sie könn<strong>en</strong> diese Option<strong>en</strong> auswähl<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie einfach die Taste SUBT. auf <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung drück<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Digitaltext → Deaktivier<strong>en</strong> / Aktivier<strong>en</strong><br />
W<strong>en</strong>n das Programm mit Digitaltext ges<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t wird, ist diese Funktion aktiviert.<br />
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
Ein internationaler Standard für Dat<strong>en</strong>kompressionssysteme für MulZeitdia- und Hypermedia-Anw<strong>en</strong>dung<strong>en</strong>. Dies ist ein höheres<br />
Niveau als das MPEG-System, das solche dat<strong>en</strong>verknüpf<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Hypertextmedi<strong>en</strong> wie Standbil<strong>de</strong>r, Zeich<strong>en</strong>di<strong>en</strong>st, Animations-,<br />
Grafik- und Vi<strong>de</strong>odatei<strong>en</strong> sowie Multimediadatei<strong>en</strong> umfasst. MHEG ist eine Technologie für Laufzeitinteraktion mit <strong>de</strong>m B<strong>en</strong>utzer,<br />
und sie wird auf verschie<strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong> Gebiet<strong>en</strong> verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t, z. B. VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic<br />
Commerce), Teleweiterbildung, Telekonfer<strong>en</strong>z<strong>en</strong>, digitale Bibliothek<strong>en</strong> und Netzwerkspiele.<br />
• Teletext-Sprache<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Vi<strong>de</strong>otextsprache durch Auswähl<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Sprachtyps einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Englisch ist <strong>de</strong>r Standardwert in Fäll<strong>en</strong>, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die S<strong>en</strong>dung nicht verfügbar ist.<br />
• Voreinstellung<br />
• Primäre Audiosprache / Sekundäre Audiosprache / Primäre Untertitelsprache / Sekundäre Untertitelsprache /<br />
Primäre Vi<strong>de</strong>otextsprache / Sekundäre Vi<strong>de</strong>otextsprache<br />
Mit dieser Funktion könn<strong>en</strong> Sie eine <strong>de</strong>r verfügbar<strong>en</strong> Sprach<strong>en</strong> wähl<strong>en</strong>. Die hier gewählte Sprache ist die Standardsprache, w<strong>en</strong>n<br />
<strong>de</strong>r B<strong>en</strong>utzer ein<strong>en</strong> Kanal auswählt.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Spracheinstellung än<strong>de</strong>rn, wer<strong>de</strong>n die Untertitelsprache, die Audiosprache und die Vi<strong>de</strong>otextsprache im M<strong>en</strong>ü<br />
Sprache automatisch in die gewünschte Sprache geän<strong>de</strong>rt.<br />
Mit <strong>de</strong>n Unterm<strong>en</strong>üs für die Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Vi<strong>de</strong>otextsprache im M<strong>en</strong>ü Sprache zeig<strong>en</strong> Sie eine Liste <strong>de</strong>r<br />
vom aktuell<strong>en</strong> Kanal unterstützt<strong>en</strong> Sprach<strong>en</strong> an, und die aktuelle Auswahl wird hervorgehob<strong>en</strong>. W<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Spracheinstellung<br />
än<strong>de</strong>rn, gilt die neue Auswahl nur für <strong>de</strong>n aktuell<strong>en</strong> Kanal. Die geän<strong>de</strong>rte Einstellung hat kein<strong>en</strong> Einfluss auf die Einstellung <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Teletext-Sprache im M<strong>en</strong>ü Voreinstellung.<br />
• Common Interface<br />
• Installier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r CI-Karte<br />
1. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> das CI-CAM-Modul bei Ihrem nächst<strong>en</strong> Händler o<strong>de</strong>r durch telefonische<br />
Bestellung erwerb<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. Schieb<strong>en</strong> Sie die CI-Karte in Richtung <strong>de</strong>s Pfeils in das CAM-Modul hinein, bis sie fest sitzt.<br />
3. Schieb<strong>en</strong> Sie das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI-Karte in <strong>de</strong>n Schlitz für die gemeinsame<br />
Schnittstelle hinein.<br />
N<br />
Schieb<strong>en</strong> Sie das CAM-Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis zum Anschlag, sodass es parallel mit<br />
<strong>de</strong>m Schlitz ist.<br />
4. Kontrollier<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob Sie ein Bild seh<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r ein gestörtes Signal.<br />
• CI-M<strong>en</strong>ü<br />
Hiermit kann <strong>de</strong>r B<strong>en</strong>utzer seine Auswahl in <strong>de</strong>m vom CAM-Modul bereitgestellt<strong>en</strong> M<strong>en</strong>ü<br />
treff<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie das CI-M<strong>en</strong>ü ausgeh<strong>en</strong>d vom M<strong>en</strong>ü PC Card.<br />
• Anw<strong>en</strong>dungsinformation<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Die folg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Erklärung<strong>en</strong> gelt<strong>en</strong> für <strong>de</strong>n Fall, dass ein CAM-Modul in <strong>de</strong>n CI-Schlitz gesteckt ist und angezeigt wird.<br />
In <strong>de</strong>n Anw<strong>en</strong>dungsinformation<strong>en</strong> wird die CI-Karte beschrieb<strong>en</strong>. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> das CAM-Modul unabhängig davon anschließ<strong>en</strong>, ob das<br />
Fernsehgerät angeschaltet ist o<strong>de</strong>r nicht.<br />
N Zugangsmodule wer<strong>de</strong>n in einig<strong>en</strong> Län<strong>de</strong>rn und Region<strong>en</strong> nicht unterstützt. Frag<strong>en</strong> Sie diesbezüglich Ihr<strong>en</strong> offiziell<strong>en</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong>-<br />
Händler.<br />
Fortsetzung...<br />
Deutsch - 22<br />
Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>üsprache :Deutsch ►<br />
Zeit<br />
S<strong>en</strong>dungsoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Sicherheit<br />
Allgemein
❑<br />
Sicherheit<br />
• Kin<strong>de</strong>rsicherung → Aus / Ein<br />
Mit dieser Funktion könn<strong>en</strong> Sie nicht autorisierte B<strong>en</strong>utzer, z. B. Kin<strong>de</strong>r, daran hin<strong>de</strong>rn ungeeignete Programme anzuschau<strong>en</strong>, in<strong>de</strong>m<br />
das Bild blockiert und <strong>de</strong>r Ton stummgeschaltet wird.<br />
Ehe das Einstellungsf<strong>en</strong>ster angezeigt wird, wird das F<strong>en</strong>ster zur Eingabe <strong>de</strong>r PIN geöffnet. Geb<strong>en</strong> Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.<br />
Der Standard-PIN-Co<strong>de</strong> eines neu<strong>en</strong> Fernsehgeräts lautet '0-0-0-0'. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die PIN än<strong>de</strong>rn, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie im M<strong>en</strong>ü <strong>de</strong>n Befehl<br />
PIN än<strong>de</strong>rn wähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> einige <strong>de</strong>r Kanäle in <strong>de</strong>r Kanalliste sperr<strong>en</strong>. (Information<strong>en</strong> hierzu fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf Seite 15)<br />
Kin<strong>de</strong>rsicherung Diese Funktion ist nur im PC-Modus verfügbar.<br />
• Sicherungsstufe<br />
Mit dieser Funktion könn<strong>en</strong> Sie nicht autorisierte B<strong>en</strong>utzer, z. B. Kin<strong>de</strong>r, daran hin<strong>de</strong>rn, ungeeignete Programme anzuschau<strong>en</strong>. Hierzu<br />
verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie eine b<strong>en</strong>utzer<strong>de</strong>finierte vierstellige PIN.<br />
Ehe das Einstellungsf<strong>en</strong>ster angezeigt wird, wird das F<strong>en</strong>ster zur Eingabe <strong>de</strong>r PIN geöffnet. Geb<strong>en</strong> Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.<br />
Der Standard-PIN-Co<strong>de</strong> eines neu<strong>en</strong> Fernsehgeräts lautet '0-0-0-0'. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die PIN än<strong>de</strong>rn, in<strong>de</strong>m Sie im M<strong>en</strong>ü <strong>de</strong>n Befehl PIN<br />
än<strong>de</strong>rn wähl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Nach<strong>de</strong>m die Altersbeschränkung<strong>en</strong> eingestellt sind, wird das Symbol “\” angezeigt.<br />
Alle zul.: Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um alle Altersbeschränkung<strong>en</strong> aufzuheb<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Keine zul.: Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um alle Altersbeschränkung<strong>en</strong> zu aktivier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• PIN än<strong>de</strong>rn<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Ihre zum Einricht<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts b<strong>en</strong>ötigte persönliche K<strong>en</strong>nnummer än<strong>de</strong>rn.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ehe das Einstellungsf<strong>en</strong>ster angezeigt wird, wird das F<strong>en</strong>ster zur Eingabe <strong>de</strong>r PIN geöffnet. Geb<strong>en</strong> Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.<br />
Der Standard-PIN-Co<strong>de</strong> eines neu<strong>en</strong> Fernsehgeräts lautet '0-0-0-0'.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n PIN-Co<strong>de</strong> vergess<strong>en</strong> hab<strong>en</strong>, drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ungstast<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong>r angegeb<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Reih<strong>en</strong>folge, um die PIN auf<br />
'0-0-0-0' zurückzusetz<strong>en</strong>: POWER (Aus), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Ein).<br />
Allgemein<br />
• Spielemodus → Aus / Ein<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie eine Spielekonsole wie PlayStation TM o<strong>de</strong>r Xbox TM anschließ<strong>en</strong>, könn<strong>en</strong> Sie durch Auswähl<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Spielemodus ein<br />
realistischeres Spielerlebnis g<strong>en</strong>ieß<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Bei aktiviertem Spielemodus<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Der Bildmodus wird automatisch auf Standard eingestellt und kann nicht geän<strong>de</strong>rt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Der Tonmodus wird automatisch als b<strong>en</strong>utzer<strong>de</strong>finiert eingestellt und kann nicht geän<strong>de</strong>rt wer<strong>de</strong>n. Pass<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Ton<br />
unter Verw<strong>en</strong>dung <strong>de</strong>s Equalizers an.<br />
Die Reset-Funktion im Audiom<strong>en</strong>ü ist aktiviert. Mit Hilfe <strong>de</strong>r Reset-Funktion könn<strong>en</strong> die Einstellung<strong>en</strong> für <strong>de</strong>n Equalizer<br />
auf die Werkseinstellung<strong>en</strong> zurückgesetzt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Spielemodus ist im normal<strong>en</strong> TV-Modus nicht verfügbar, o<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Spielemodus ist <strong>de</strong>aktiviert.<br />
Kontrollier<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob <strong>de</strong>r Spielemodus noch aktiviert ist, w<strong>en</strong>n die Bildqualität bei angeschloss<strong>en</strong>em externem Gerät schlecht ist.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie im Spielemodus das Fernsehm<strong>en</strong>ü anzeig<strong>en</strong>, zittert das Bild leicht.<br />
Das Zeich<strong>en</strong> (<br />
angeschaltet ist.<br />
Diese Funktion unterstützt nur <strong>de</strong>n Spielemodus.<br />
) wird auf <strong>de</strong>m Bildschirm angezeigt. Dies be<strong>de</strong>utet, dass <strong>de</strong>r Spielemodus für die gewählte Signalquelle<br />
• Energiesparmodus<br />
Mit dieser Funktion stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Helligkeit <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts ein, um <strong>de</strong>n Stromverbrauch zu s<strong>en</strong>k<strong>en</strong>. W<strong>en</strong>n Sie nachts fernseh<strong>en</strong>,<br />
stell<strong>en</strong> Sie Energiesparmod. auf Hoch ein, um sowohl die Aug<strong>en</strong>ermüdung als auch <strong>de</strong>n Stromverbrauch zu s<strong>en</strong>k<strong>en</strong>.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie Bild aus wähl<strong>en</strong>, wird <strong>de</strong>r Bildschirm abgeschaltet und Sie könn<strong>en</strong> nur noch <strong>de</strong>n Ton hör<strong>en</strong>. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie eine beliebige Taste, um Bild<br />
aus zu be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
N Im M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras wird die Funktion Bild aus nicht unterstützt.<br />
T Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> zu<strong>de</strong>m die <strong>en</strong>ergiesparoption durch auswahl von Extras →<br />
Energiesparmod. anpass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Melodie → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Melodie auswähl<strong>en</strong>, die beim Ein- und Ausschalt<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehers abgespielt wird.<br />
N<br />
Die Melodie wird nicht abgespielt.<br />
- Das Fernsehgerät gibt kein<strong>en</strong> Ton aus, weil die MMUTE-Taste gedrückt wur<strong>de</strong>.<br />
- Das Fernsehgerät gibt kein<strong>en</strong> Ton aus, weil die Taste – (Lautstärke) gedrückt wur<strong>de</strong>.<br />
- Das Fernsehgerät wur<strong>de</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m Seep-Timer ausgeschaltet.<br />
Deutsch - 23
Einstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Uhrzeit<br />
❑<br />
Uhr<br />
Die Uhr muss eingestellt wer<strong>de</strong>n, damit Sie die verschie<strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong> Timerfunktion<strong>en</strong><br />
<strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n könn<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Je<strong>de</strong>s Mal, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Taste INFO drück<strong>en</strong>, wird die aktuelle Zeit angezeigt.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie das Netzkabel zieh<strong>en</strong>, müss<strong>en</strong> Sie die Uhr erneut einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Uhr-Modus<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die aktuelle Zeit manuell o<strong>de</strong>r automatisch einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Auto: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die Uhrzeit automatisch anhand <strong>de</strong>r Zeit aus <strong>de</strong>n<br />
digital<strong>en</strong> Übertragung<strong>en</strong> ein.<br />
• <strong>Manuel</strong>l: Hiermit stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die aktuelle Zeit auf ein<strong>en</strong> manuell eingestellt<strong>en</strong><br />
Wert ein.<br />
• Zeit einstell<strong>en</strong><br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die aktuelle Zeit manuell einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Konfigurier<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Option, nach<strong>de</strong>m Sie Uhr-Modus auf <strong>Manuel</strong>l<br />
eingestellt hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> Monat, Tag, Jahr, Stun<strong>de</strong>, Minute auch direkt über die<br />
Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Einstellung<strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>üsprache : Deutsch<br />
Zeit<br />
►<br />
S<strong>en</strong>dungsoption<strong>en</strong><br />
Sicherheit<br />
Allgemein<br />
Zeit<br />
Uhr : -- : -- ►<br />
Sleep-Timer<br />
: Aus<br />
Timer 1<br />
: Deaktiviert<br />
Timer 2<br />
: Deaktiviert<br />
Timer 3<br />
: Deaktiviert<br />
❑<br />
Sleep-Timer →Aus / 30Min. / 60Min. / 90Min. / 120Min. / 150Min. /<br />
180Min.<br />
Der Sleep-Timer schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch nach einer eingestellt<strong>en</strong> Zeit aus.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n die eingestellte Zeit abgelauf<strong>en</strong> ist, schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch in <strong>de</strong>n Standby-Modus.<br />
Um die Sleep-Timer-Funktion abzubrech<strong>en</strong>, wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie Aus.<br />
U Navig. E Eingabe R Zurück<br />
❑<br />
T Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>n Sleep-Timer durch Auswahl von Extras → Sleep-Timer<br />
einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> drei verschie<strong>de</strong>ne Einstellung<strong>en</strong> für <strong>de</strong>n Ein-/Ausschalttimer vornehm<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Anschaltzeit: Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie Stun<strong>de</strong>, Minute und aktiviert/<strong>de</strong>aktiviert ein.<br />
(Zum Aktivier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Timers, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie mit <strong>de</strong>n Einstellung<strong>en</strong> fertig sind, wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie Aktivier<strong>en</strong>.)<br />
• Ausschaltzeit: Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie Stun<strong>de</strong>, Minute und aktiviert/<strong>de</strong>aktiviert ein.<br />
(Zum Aktivier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Timers, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie mit <strong>de</strong>n Einstellung<strong>en</strong> fertig sind, wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie Aktivier<strong>en</strong>.)<br />
• Lautstärke: Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die gewünschte Lautstärke ein.<br />
• TV-Empfang: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie ATV o<strong>de</strong>r DTV.<br />
• Kanal: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n gewünscht<strong>en</strong> Kanal.<br />
• Wie<strong>de</strong>rhol<strong>en</strong>: Wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie Einmal, Everyday, Mo - Fr, Mo - Sa, Sa - So o<strong>de</strong>r <strong>Manuel</strong>l.<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n <strong>Manuel</strong>l gewählt ist, drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste ►, um <strong>de</strong>n gewünscht<strong>en</strong> Woch<strong>en</strong>tag einzustell<strong>en</strong>. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die<br />
ENTERE -Taste, währ<strong>en</strong>d <strong>de</strong>r gewünschte Tage markiert ist, und das Symbol c wird angezeigt.<br />
N Voraussetzung dafür ist, dass Sie die Uhr gestellt hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Stun<strong>de</strong>n, Minut<strong>en</strong> und <strong>de</strong>n Kanal auch über die Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Automatisch Ausschalt<strong>en</strong><br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Timer aktivier<strong>en</strong>, schaltet sich das Fernsehgerät drei Stun<strong>de</strong>n nach <strong>de</strong>m Einschalt<strong>en</strong> durch <strong>de</strong>n Timer ab,<br />
w<strong>en</strong>n in dieser Zeit keine Funktion<strong>en</strong> verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t wur<strong>de</strong>n Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, w<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Timer aktiviert ist, und sie<br />
verhin<strong>de</strong>rt Schä<strong>de</strong>n durch Überhitzung, w<strong>en</strong>n das Fernsehgerät zu lange eingeschaltet ist.<br />
Deutsch - 24
Quell<strong>en</strong> / Name bearb.<br />
❑<br />
Quell<strong>en</strong><br />
Hiermit wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie das Fernsehgerät o<strong>de</strong>r an<strong>de</strong>re externe Signaleingänge wie<br />
z. B. DVD-Player o<strong>de</strong>r Kabelbox/Satellit<strong>en</strong>receiver (Set-Top-Box), die mit <strong>de</strong>m<br />
Fernsehgerät verbun<strong>de</strong>n sind. Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie die gewünschte Signalquelle ein.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,<br />
N Sie könn<strong>en</strong> nur solche extern<strong>en</strong> Geräte wähl<strong>en</strong>, die an das Fernsehgerät<br />
angeschloss<strong>en</strong> sind. Bei Quell<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n die angeschloss<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Signalquell<strong>en</strong><br />
hervorgehob<strong>en</strong> und am Anfang dargestellt. Nicht angeschloss<strong>en</strong>e Signalquell<strong>en</strong><br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n am En<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Liste dargestellt.<br />
N Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Farbtast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung in Verbindung mit <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Kanalliste.<br />
- TTOOLS (Option): Anzeig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r M<strong>en</strong>üs Name bearb. und Information.<br />
❑<br />
O<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste SOURCE auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung, um eine externe<br />
Signalquelle anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>. Der TV-Modus kann durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Taste TV,<br />
<strong>de</strong>r Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> (0~9) und <strong>de</strong>r Taste P < / > auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung<br />
ausgewählt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Name bearb. (Name bearbeit<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Vergeb<strong>en</strong> Sie Nam<strong>en</strong> für die an die Eingangsbuchs<strong>en</strong> angeschloss<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Geräte, um die Auswahl <strong>de</strong>r Signalquelle zu<br />
vereinfach<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• VCR / DVD / VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC / DVI PC / DVI /<br />
TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N W<strong>en</strong>n ein PC mit einer Auflösung von PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz an <strong>de</strong>n Anschluss HDMI IN 2 (DVI)<br />
angeschloss<strong>en</strong> wird, stell<strong>en</strong> Sie unter Name bearb. im Modus Eingang <strong>de</strong>n HDMI2 / DVI-Modus auf PC ein.<br />
Eingang<br />
Quell<strong>en</strong><br />
Name bear<br />
Deutsch - 25
PC-Anzeige<br />
• Installier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r PC-Software (unter Windows XP)<br />
Im Folg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n sind die Windows-Anzeigeeinstellung<strong>en</strong> für die meist<strong>en</strong><br />
Computer aufgeführt. Die Bildschirmseit<strong>en</strong>, die von Ihrem PC angezeigt<br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n, <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong> je nach installierter Windows-Version und verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ter<br />
Grafikkarte möglicherweise nicht g<strong>en</strong>au <strong>de</strong>r Abbildung. Trotz<strong>de</strong>m sind die hier<br />
beschrieb<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Information<strong>en</strong> zur Einrichtung für fast alle Betriebssysteme<br />
anw<strong>en</strong>dbar. (W<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich an<strong>de</strong>rnfalls an <strong>de</strong>n Computerhersteller o<strong>de</strong>r<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>-Händler.)<br />
1. Klick<strong>en</strong> Sie im Startm<strong>en</strong>ü von Windows auf „Systemsteuerung“.<br />
2. W<strong>en</strong>n das F<strong>en</strong>ster „Systemsteuerung“ angezeigt wird, klick<strong>en</strong> Sie auf<br />
„Darstellung und Designs“. Ein Dialogfeld wird geöffnet.<br />
3. W<strong>en</strong>n das F<strong>en</strong>ster <strong>de</strong>r Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klick<strong>en</strong> Sie auf<br />
„Anzeige“. Anschließ<strong>en</strong>d wird ein Dialogfeld angezeigt.<br />
4. Klick<strong>en</strong> Sie nun im Dialogfeld Anzeige auf die Registerkarte „Einstellung<strong>en</strong>.“<br />
Die korrekt<strong>en</strong> Einstellung<strong>en</strong> für die Bildschirmauflösung:<br />
Optima : PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixels , PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixels<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n das Dialogfeld eine Option für die Bildschirmfrequ<strong>en</strong>z <strong>en</strong>thält, muss als Einstellung 60 o<strong>de</strong>r 60 Hz ausgewählt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
An<strong>de</strong>rnfalls klick<strong>en</strong> Sie einfach auf OK, um das Dialogfeld zu schließ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Anzeigemodi<br />
Bildschirmposition und -größe häng<strong>en</strong> vom Typ <strong>de</strong>s PC-Monitors und seiner Auflösung ab.<br />
Bei <strong>de</strong>n in <strong>de</strong>r Tabelle angegeb<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Auflösung<strong>en</strong> han<strong>de</strong>lt es sich um die empfohl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Auflösung<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• HDMI/DVI-Eingang<br />
Modus<br />
Auflösung<br />
Horizontalfrequ<strong>en</strong>z<br />
(kHz)<br />
Vertikalfrequ<strong>en</strong>z<br />
(Hz)<br />
Pixeltakt<br />
(MHz)<br />
Synchronisa<br />
tionspolarität<br />
(H/V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
PS50B430<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
VESA<br />
DMT<br />
VESA CVT<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI IN 2 (DVI) erfolg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Das Zeil<strong>en</strong>sprungverfahr<strong>en</strong> wird nicht unterstützt.<br />
Das Fernsehgerät funktioniert möglicherweise nicht ordnungsgemäß, w<strong>en</strong>n kein Standardmodus ausgewählt wird.<br />
Deutsch - 26
Hilfsprogramm<br />
❑<br />
•<br />
❑<br />
Eig<strong>en</strong>diagnose<br />
Bildtest, Audiotest, Signalinformation<br />
Bei schlechter Bild- o<strong>de</strong>r Tonqualität sowie bei Signalstörung<strong>en</strong> führ<strong>en</strong> Sie <strong>de</strong>n Test durch. Sie könn<strong>en</strong> das Problem analysier<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n die Fernsehlautsprecher kein<strong>en</strong> Ton ausgeb<strong>en</strong>, müss<strong>en</strong> Sie vor <strong>de</strong>m Audiotest sicherstell<strong>en</strong>, dass Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong><br />
im Audiom<strong>en</strong>ü auf TV-Lautsprecher eingestellt ist.<br />
Die Melodie ist im Test auch dann zu hör<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong>n Lautsprecher auswähl<strong>en</strong> auf Ext. Lautsprecher eingestellt ist, o<strong>de</strong>r w<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Ton mit <strong>de</strong>r Taste MMUTE stumm geschaltet wur<strong>de</strong>.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Kopfhörer angeschloss<strong>en</strong> sind, wird die Testmelodie auf <strong>de</strong>m Kopfhörer abgespielt.W<strong>en</strong>n die Signalstärkeanzeige ein<br />
schwaches Signal anzeigt, verän<strong>de</strong>rn Sie die Position Ihre Ant<strong>en</strong>ne so, dass die Signalstärke zunimmt. Mach<strong>en</strong> Sie dies solange,<br />
bis Sie die optimale Ausrichtung mit <strong>de</strong>m stärkst<strong>en</strong> Signal gefun<strong>de</strong>n hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Software-Update<br />
Damit Ihr Produkt stets mit <strong>de</strong>n neuest<strong>en</strong> Funktion<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Digitalfernseh<strong>en</strong>s ausgerüstet ist, wer<strong>de</strong>n zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m normal<strong>en</strong> TV-<br />
Signal regelmäßig Softwareaktualisierung<strong>en</strong> übertrag<strong>en</strong>. Das Gerät erk<strong>en</strong>nt diese Signale automatisch und zeigt ein<strong>en</strong> Hinweis auf die<br />
Softwareaktualisierung an. Sie hab<strong>en</strong> die Wahl, ob die Aktualisierung installiert wer<strong>de</strong>n soll.<br />
• PER USB<br />
Leg<strong>en</strong> Sie ein USB-Laufwerk mit <strong>de</strong>m gespeichert<strong>en</strong> Firmwareupgra<strong>de</strong> in das Fernsehgerät ein.<br />
Acht<strong>en</strong> Sie beim Einspiel<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Upgra<strong>de</strong>s darauf, die Stromversorgung nicht zu unterbrech<strong>en</strong><br />
und das USB-Laufwerk nicht zu <strong>en</strong>tfern<strong>en</strong>. Das Fernsehgerät wird automatisch ab- und<br />
wie<strong>de</strong>r angeschaltet, sobald das Firmwareupgra<strong>de</strong> abgeschloss<strong>en</strong> ist. Kontrollier<strong>en</strong> Sie die<br />
Firmwareversion, w<strong>en</strong>n das Upgra<strong>de</strong> abgeschloss<strong>en</strong> ist. Nach<strong>de</strong>m die Software aktualisiert<br />
wur<strong>de</strong>, sind die Vi<strong>de</strong>o- und Audioeinstellung<strong>en</strong> wie<strong>de</strong>r auf die werkseitig<strong>en</strong> Standardwerte<br />
zurückgesetzt.<br />
• PER Channel<br />
Aktualisierung <strong>de</strong>r Software über das S<strong>en</strong><br />
<strong>de</strong>signal.<br />
• Update im Standby<br />
Um die Softwareaktualisierung mit eingeschalteter Stromversorgung fortzusetz<strong>en</strong>, wähl<strong>en</strong> Sie mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ “Ein” aus. 45<br />
Minut<strong>en</strong> nach Beginn <strong>de</strong>s Standbymodus wird die manuelle Aktualisierung automatisch ausgeführt. Da intern die Stromversorgung für<br />
das Gerät eingeschaltet ist, kann <strong>de</strong>r Bildschirm leicht beleuchtet sein. Dieser Zustand kann etwas mehr als eine Stun<strong>de</strong> andauern, bis<br />
die Softwareaktualisierung abgeschloss<strong>en</strong> ist.<br />
• Alternative Software<br />
Ersetzt<strong>en</strong> Sie die aktuelle Software durch eine Alternative.<br />
❑<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
USB-Laufwerk<br />
HD-AnschlussplanDie kurze Einführung<br />
So erziel<strong>en</strong> Sie mit Ihrem HD-Fernsehgerät optimale Leistung wird angezeigt. Wir biet<strong>en</strong> Anschlüsse für HD-Geräte an.<br />
❑ <strong>Samsung</strong> kontaktier<strong>en</strong><br />
W<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich an das Callc<strong>en</strong>ter von <strong>Samsung</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r such<strong>en</strong> Sie auf <strong>de</strong>r Website nach Information<strong>en</strong> für das Gerät<br />
N Mit <strong>de</strong>n Tast<strong>en</strong> ▲ o<strong>de</strong>r ▼ könn<strong>en</strong> Sie zur vorig<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r zur nächst<strong>en</strong> Seite wechseln.<br />
Rückseite<br />
Deutsch - 27
Empfehlung<strong>en</strong> für <strong>de</strong>n Betrieb<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>otextfunktion<br />
Die meist<strong>en</strong> Fernsehs<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r biet<strong>en</strong> über Vi<strong>de</strong>otext Information<strong>en</strong> an. Auf <strong>de</strong>r Vi<strong>de</strong>otext-In<strong>de</strong>xseite fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie Verw<strong>en</strong>dungshinweise<br />
zum Vi<strong>de</strong>otext. Darüber hinaus könn<strong>en</strong> Sie über die Tast<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung nach Bedarf verschie<strong>de</strong>ne Option<strong>en</strong> einstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Für die korrekte Anzeige von Vi<strong>de</strong>otextinformation<strong>en</strong> muss <strong>de</strong>r S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rempfang einwandfrei sein. An<strong>de</strong>rnfalls könn<strong>en</strong><br />
Information<strong>en</strong> unvollständig sein o<strong>de</strong>r einige Seit<strong>en</strong> nicht angezeigt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
1 : (Be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n)<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>otextanzeige be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
2 6 (In<strong>de</strong>x)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um die Vi<strong>de</strong>otext-In<strong>de</strong>xseite (Inhaltsverzeichnis)<br />
anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3 5 (Verborg<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Inhalt einbl<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um verborg<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Text anzuzeig<strong>en</strong> (z. B. Antwort<strong>en</strong> bei<br />
Quizs<strong>en</strong>dung<strong>en</strong>). Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste erneut, um <strong>de</strong>n Vi<strong>de</strong>otext auszubl<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
1<br />
<br />
4 4 (Größe)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um Vi<strong>de</strong>otext in doppelt so groß<strong>en</strong> Buchstab<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong>r<br />
ober<strong>en</strong> Hälfte <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirms anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste erneut, um<br />
<strong>de</strong>n Text in <strong>de</strong>r unter<strong>en</strong> Hälfte <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirms anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>. Zum Ausbl<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>otextes drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste erneut.<br />
5 8 (Speichern)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseit<strong>en</strong> zu speichern.<br />
6 / (Vi<strong>de</strong>otext anzeig<strong>en</strong>/Vi<strong>de</strong>otext und Fernsehs<strong>en</strong>dung zugleich anzeig<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um <strong>de</strong>n Vi<strong>de</strong>otextmodus zu aktivier<strong>en</strong>, nach<strong>de</strong>m Sie ein<strong>en</strong><br />
S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r ausgewählt hab<strong>en</strong>, <strong>de</strong>r Vi<strong>de</strong>otext anbietet. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste zweimal,<br />
um die Vi<strong>de</strong>otextinformation<strong>en</strong> gleichzeitig mit <strong>de</strong>r aktuell<strong>en</strong> S<strong>en</strong>dung auf <strong>de</strong>m<br />
Bildschirm einzubl<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
7 1 (Untergeordnete Seite)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um eine verfügbare untergeordnete Seite anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
8 2 (Nächste Seite anzeig<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um die nächste Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseite anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
9 3 (Vorherige Seite anzeig<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um die vorherige Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseite anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
0 0 (Modus)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um <strong>de</strong>n Vi<strong>de</strong>otextmodus auszuwähl<strong>en</strong> (LISTE/<br />
FLOF) W<strong>en</strong>n Sie diese Taste im Modus LIST (Liste) drück<strong>en</strong>, wird in <strong>de</strong>n<br />
List<strong>en</strong>speichermodus umgeschaltet. Im List<strong>en</strong>speichermodus könn<strong>en</strong> Sie mit <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Taste 8(store) Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseit<strong>en</strong> in einer Liste speichern.<br />
! 9 (halt<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um bei einer angezeigt<strong>en</strong> Seite, die mit weiter<strong>en</strong>,<br />
untergeordnete Seit<strong>en</strong> verknüpft ist, das automatische Umblättern zu verhin<strong>de</strong>rn.<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie zum Fortfahr<strong>en</strong> die Taste erneut.<br />
@ 7 (Abbrech<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Taste, um beim Such<strong>en</strong> nach einer Seite die S<strong>en</strong>dung anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
# Farbtast<strong>en</strong> (rot/grün/gelb/blau)<br />
N<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r das FASTEXT-System verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t, sind die verschie<strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong><br />
Them<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>n Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseit<strong>en</strong> farbig gek<strong>en</strong>nzeichnet und könn<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>n<br />
Farbtast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung angewählt wer<strong>de</strong>n. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Farbtaste,<br />
die <strong>de</strong>m Thema <strong>en</strong>tspricht, das Sie anzeig<strong>en</strong> möcht<strong>en</strong>. Die Seite wird mit an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong><br />
farbig markiert<strong>en</strong> Information<strong>en</strong> angezeigt, die auf dieselbe Art ausgewählt wer<strong>de</strong>n<br />
könn<strong>en</strong>. Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> Farbtaste, um die vorherige o<strong>de</strong>r nächste<br />
Seite anzuzeig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Sie könn<strong>en</strong> die Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseit<strong>en</strong> durch Drück<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Zifferntast<strong>en</strong> auf <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung wechseln.<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
Deutsch - 28
Die Vi<strong>de</strong>otextseit<strong>en</strong> sind in sechs Kategori<strong>en</strong> unterteilt:<br />
Sportergebnisse Inhalt<br />
A Gewählte Seit<strong>en</strong>nummer<br />
B S<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rk<strong>en</strong>nung<br />
C Aktuelle Seit<strong>en</strong>zahl o<strong>de</strong>r Suchhinweise<br />
D Datum und Uhrzeit<br />
E Text<br />
F Statusinformation<br />
FASTEXT-Information<strong>en</strong><br />
N Vi<strong>de</strong>otextinformation<strong>en</strong> sind oft auf mehrere, aufeinan<strong>de</strong>r folg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> Seit<strong>en</strong> verteilt,<br />
die wie folgt aufgeruf<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n könn<strong>en</strong>:<br />
- Eingabe <strong>de</strong>r Seit<strong>en</strong>nummer<br />
- Auswahl eines Titels in einer Liste<br />
- Auswahl einer farbig<strong>en</strong> Überschrift (FASTEXT-System)<br />
<br />
O<br />
Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie die Taste TV, um Vi<strong>de</strong>otext zu be<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Spezifikation (VESA) <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung<br />
Montier<strong>en</strong> Sie die Wandhalterung an einer soli<strong>de</strong>n Wand, die s<strong>en</strong>krecht zum Bo<strong>de</strong>n steht.<br />
Bei Installation auf an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Trägermateriali<strong>en</strong> w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich bitte an Ihr<strong>en</strong> Fachhändler.<br />
Bei Montage an einer Decke o<strong>de</strong>r schräg<strong>en</strong> Wand kann es herunterfall<strong>en</strong> und zu Verletzung<strong>en</strong> komm<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Produktfamilie Zoll VESA-Spezifikation (A * B)<br />
LCD-TV<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
Standardschraube<br />
M4<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
M8<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ge<br />
4<br />
PDP-TV<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8 4<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Die von uns empfohl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Standardabmessung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie in <strong>de</strong>r obig<strong>en</strong> Tabelle.<br />
Beim Kauf unserer Wandhalterung erhalt<strong>en</strong> Sie ein <strong>de</strong>tailliertes Installationshandbuch sowie alle für die Montage<br />
erfor<strong>de</strong>rlich<strong>en</strong> Teile.<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie keine Schraub<strong>en</strong>, die länger sind als hier angegeb<strong>en</strong>, da damit inn<strong>en</strong> lieg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> Bauteile <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehers<br />
beschädigt wer<strong>de</strong>n könn<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Bei Wandhalterung<strong>en</strong>, die nicht <strong>de</strong>r VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schraub<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong>, kann die Länge <strong>de</strong>r Schraub<strong>en</strong><br />
je nach Spezifikation unterschiedlich sein.<br />
Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie keine Schraub<strong>en</strong>, die nicht <strong>de</strong>r VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schraub<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong>. Zieh<strong>en</strong> Sie die<br />
Schraub<strong>en</strong> nicht zu fest an, weil Sie so das Produkt beschädig<strong>en</strong> könnt<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r das Produkt dadurch herunterfall<strong>en</strong> könnte,<br />
was zu Verletzung<strong>en</strong> führ<strong>en</strong> kann. <strong>Samsung</strong> haftet nicht bei <strong>de</strong>rartig<strong>en</strong> Unfäll<strong>en</strong>.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> haftet nicht für Geräteschä<strong>de</strong>n o<strong>de</strong>r Verletzung<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong>n eine Wandhalterung verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>t wird, die nicht <strong>de</strong>m VESA-<br />
Standard <strong>en</strong>tspricht o<strong>de</strong>r nicht spezifiziert ist, o<strong>de</strong>r w<strong>en</strong>n <strong>de</strong>r Verbraucher die Installationsanleitung für das Produkt nicht<br />
befolgt.<br />
Unsere 57- und 63-Zoll-Mo<strong>de</strong>lle <strong>en</strong>tsprech<strong>en</strong> nicht <strong>de</strong>r VESA-Spezifikation. Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie für dieses Mo<strong>de</strong>ll <strong>de</strong>shalb unser<strong>en</strong><br />
speziell<strong>en</strong> Wandmontagesatz.<br />
Bei <strong>de</strong>r Montage dieses Fernsehgeräts dürf<strong>en</strong> Sie eine Neigung von 15 Grad nicht überschreit<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Installier<strong>en</strong> Sie die Wandhalterung nicht bei angeschaltetem Fernsehgerät.<br />
Sie könnt<strong>en</strong> dabei ein<strong>en</strong> Stromschlag erhalt<strong>en</strong> und sich verletz<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Deutsch - 29
Vorbereitung für die Befestigung <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung an <strong>de</strong>r Wand<br />
Fall A. Installier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r SAMSUNG-<br />
Wandhalterung<br />
Fall B. Installier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung eines<br />
an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Anbieters<br />
경고<br />
경고<br />
1. Befestig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Wandhalterung mit einem Anzugsmom<strong>en</strong>t von maximal 15kgf•cm. D<strong>en</strong>k<strong>en</strong> Sie daran, dass Bauteile bei<br />
einem höher<strong>en</strong> Anzugsmom<strong>en</strong>t beschädigt wer<strong>de</strong>n könn<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. Zum Zubehörsatz gehört ein Haltering [2] zum Befestig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Wandhalterung<strong>en</strong> von Drittanbietern am <strong>Samsung</strong>-Fernseher.<br />
(Fall B)<br />
N Dreh<strong>en</strong> Sie die Schraub<strong>en</strong> bis zum Anschlag in die Bohrung [1], w<strong>en</strong>n Sie die Wandhalterung an <strong>de</strong>r Wand Anbring<strong>en</strong>.<br />
주의<br />
Befestig<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts an <strong>de</strong>r Wand<br />
Das Fernsehgerät kann hinfall<strong>en</strong>, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie daran zieh<strong>en</strong>, es schieb<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r darauf klettern. Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie insbeson<strong>de</strong>re<br />
sicher, dass sich keine Kin<strong>de</strong>r an das Gerät häng<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r es aus <strong>de</strong>m Gleichgewicht bring<strong>en</strong>. An<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>falls könnte<br />
주의 das Gerät umkipp<strong>en</strong> und schwere Verletzung<strong>en</strong> o<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>n Tod verursach<strong>en</strong>. Beacht<strong>en</strong> Sie alle Anweisung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r<br />
beigefügt<strong>en</strong> Sicherheitshinweise. Noch mehr Stabilität erreich<strong>en</strong> Sie, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie <strong>de</strong>n Kippschutz installier<strong>en</strong>. Geh<strong>en</strong> Sie<br />
hierzu folg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rmaß<strong>en</strong> vor.<br />
Wand<br />
Wand<br />
❑<br />
So verhin<strong>de</strong>rn Sie, dass das Fernsehgerät umkippt<br />
1. Steck<strong>en</strong> Sie die Schraub<strong>en</strong> durch die Halterung<strong>en</strong> und befestig<strong>en</strong> Sie sie fest an <strong>de</strong>r Wand. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die<br />
Schraub<strong>en</strong> gut halt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Je nach Ausführung <strong>de</strong>r Wand b<strong>en</strong>ötig<strong>en</strong> Sie zum Befestig<strong>en</strong> weiteres Material, wie z. B. ein<strong>en</strong> Dübel.<br />
N Da die b<strong>en</strong>ötigt<strong>en</strong> Halterung<strong>en</strong>, Schraub<strong>en</strong> und das Band nicht zum Lieferumfang gehör<strong>en</strong>, müss<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Teile<br />
geson<strong>de</strong>rt erwerb<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. Entfern<strong>en</strong> Sie die Schraub<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong>r Mitte auf <strong>de</strong>r Rückseite <strong>de</strong>s Fernsehgeräts. Setz<strong>en</strong> Sie diese Schraub<strong>en</strong> in die<br />
Halterung<strong>en</strong> ein und befestig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Schraub<strong>en</strong> dann wie<strong>de</strong>r am Fernsehgerät.<br />
N Die Schraub<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n möglicherweise nicht zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m Gerät geliefert.<br />
3. Verbin<strong>de</strong>n Sie die Halterung<strong>en</strong> an <strong>de</strong>r Wand und die Halterung am Fernsehgerät mit einem fest<strong>en</strong> Band miteinan<strong>de</strong>r und<br />
zieh<strong>en</strong> Sie das Band dann fest.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Fernsehgerät in <strong>de</strong>r Nähe <strong>de</strong>r Wand auf, damit es nicht nach hint<strong>en</strong> kipp<strong>en</strong> kann.<br />
Es ist noch sicherer, w<strong>en</strong>n die Halterung<strong>en</strong> an <strong>de</strong>r Wand niedriger als die Halterung<strong>en</strong> am Fernsehgerät sind.<br />
Lös<strong>en</strong> Sie das Band, ehe Sie <strong>de</strong>n Fernsehapparat beweg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
4. Kontrollier<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob alle Anschlüsse weiterhin fest verbun<strong>de</strong>n sind. Prüf<strong>en</strong> Sie regelmäßig die Verbindung<strong>en</strong> auf Zeich<strong>en</strong> von<br />
Ermüdung o<strong>de</strong>r Versag<strong>en</strong>. Bei Zweifeln hinsichtlich <strong>de</strong>r Sicherheit Ihrer Halterung w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich an ein<strong>en</strong> professionell<strong>en</strong><br />
Installationsbetrieb.<br />
Deutsch - 30
Fehlerbehebung<br />
Bevor Sie sich über Ihr<strong>en</strong> Fachhändler an <strong>de</strong>n Kun<strong>de</strong>ndi<strong>en</strong>st von <strong>Samsung</strong> w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, führ<strong>en</strong> Sie bitte die nachsteh<strong>en</strong>d<br />
beschrieb<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> einfach<strong>en</strong> Maßnahm<strong>en</strong> durch.<br />
W<strong>en</strong>n Sie das Problem nicht anhand <strong>de</strong>r angegeb<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Hinweise lös<strong>en</strong> könn<strong>en</strong>, notier<strong>en</strong> Sie Mo<strong>de</strong>ll- und Seri<strong>en</strong>nummer <strong>de</strong>s<br />
Fernsehgeräts, und w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie sich an Ihr<strong>en</strong> Fachhändler.<br />
Kein Ton o<strong>de</strong>r Bild<br />
Normales Bild, aber kein Ton<br />
Kein Bild o<strong>de</strong>r nur schwarzweißes<br />
Bild<br />
Ton- und Bildstörung<strong>en</strong><br />
Verzerrtes o<strong>de</strong>r verschneites Bild,<br />
verzerrter Ton<br />
Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung funktioniert nicht<br />
richtig<br />
Der Bildschirm ist schwarz<br />
und die Betriebsanzeige blinkt<br />
kontinuierlich.<br />
Das beschädigte Bild wird in <strong>de</strong>r<br />
Ecke <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirms angezeigt.<br />
Es wird eine Meldung angezeigt,<br />
dass alle Einstellung<strong>en</strong> auf die<br />
Standardwerte zurückgesetzt<br />
wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Absichern <strong>de</strong>s Einbaubereichs<br />
• Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie sicher, dass das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose angeschloss<strong>en</strong> ist.<br />
• Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie sicher, dass Sie auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung die Taste gedrückt hab<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie die Einstellung<strong>en</strong> für Kontrast und Helligkeit.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie die Lautstärke.<br />
• Prüf<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob Lautsprecherauswahl Ext. Lautsprecher ist.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie die Lautstärke.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob die Taste MMUTE auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung gedrückt wur<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Än<strong>de</strong>rn Sie die Farbeinstellung<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie sicher, dass die korrekte Fernsehnorm ausgewählt ist.<br />
• “Such<strong>en</strong> Sie das elektrische Gerät, das die Störung<strong>en</strong> am Fernsehgerät verursacht, und stell<strong>en</strong> Sie es<br />
in einem größer<strong>en</strong> Abstand auf.”<br />
• Schließ<strong>en</strong> Sie das Fernsehgerät an eine an<strong>de</strong>re Steckdose an.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie Ausrichtung, Standort und Anschlüsse <strong>de</strong>r Ant<strong>en</strong>ne.<br />
• Störung<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n oft durch Zimmerant<strong>en</strong>n<strong>en</strong> verursacht.<br />
• Tausch<strong>en</strong> Sie die Batteri<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung aus.<br />
• Reinig<strong>en</strong> Sie die Vor<strong>de</strong>rseite <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung (dort befin<strong>de</strong>t sich <strong>de</strong>r Infrarots<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r).<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob die Pole (+ und –) <strong>de</strong>r Batteri<strong>en</strong> wie im Batteriefach angezeigt ausgerichtet sind.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie, ob die Batteri<strong>en</strong> möglicherweise leer sind.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie Stromversorgung und Signalkabel Ihres Computers.<br />
• Beweg<strong>en</strong> Sie die Maus <strong>de</strong>s Computers, o<strong>de</strong>r drück<strong>en</strong> Sie eine Taste auf <strong>de</strong>r Tastatur.<br />
• Überprüf<strong>en</strong> Sie bei <strong>de</strong>n Gerät<strong>en</strong> (Set-Top-Box, DVD usw.) Stromversorgung und Signalkabel.<br />
• Das Fernsehgerät befin<strong>de</strong>t sich im Energiesparmodus.<br />
• Drück<strong>en</strong> Sie auf <strong>de</strong>r Fernbedi<strong>en</strong>ung die Taste Source (Quelle).<br />
• Schaltet das Fernsehgerät ein o<strong>de</strong>r aus.<br />
• W<strong>en</strong>n bei manch<strong>en</strong> extern<strong>en</strong> Gerät<strong>en</strong> Bildschirmanpassung gewählt ist, erscheint das beschädigte<br />
Bild in <strong>de</strong>r Ecke <strong>de</strong>s Bildschirms. Dieses Symptom ist auf das externe Gerät und nicht auf das<br />
Fernsehgerät zurückzuführ<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Diese erscheint, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie die EXIT-Taste gedrückt halt<strong>en</strong>. Die Geräteeinstellung<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n auf die<br />
Werkseinstellung<strong>en</strong> zurückgesetzt.<br />
Halt<strong>en</strong> Sie die erfor<strong>de</strong>rlich<strong>en</strong> Abstän<strong>de</strong> zwisch<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>m Gerät und an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Objekt<strong>en</strong> (z.B. Wän<strong>de</strong>n) ein, um ausreich<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> Lüftung<br />
sicherzustell<strong>en</strong>. W<strong>en</strong>n Sie dies nicht tun, besteht die Gefahr, dass aufgrund eines Anstiegs <strong>de</strong>r Temperatur im Innern <strong>de</strong>s Geräts<br />
ein Brand ausbricht o<strong>de</strong>r an<strong>de</strong>re Probleme mit <strong>de</strong>m Gerät auftret<strong>en</strong>. Stell<strong>en</strong> Sie das Gerät so auf, dass die in <strong>de</strong>r Abbildung<br />
gezeigt<strong>en</strong> Min<strong>de</strong>stabstän<strong>de</strong> eingehalt<strong>en</strong> wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
N Verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n Sie nur Teile von <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics, w<strong>en</strong>n Sie ein<strong>en</strong> Standfuß o<strong>de</strong>r eine Wandhalterung einsetz<strong>en</strong>.<br />
- W<strong>en</strong>n Sie Teile eines an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Herstellers verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, kann es zu Problem<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m Gerät o<strong>de</strong>r zu Verletzung<strong>en</strong> komm<strong>en</strong>,<br />
weil -das Gerät herunterfällt.<br />
- W<strong>en</strong>n Sie Teile eines an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Herstellers verw<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n, kann es zu Problem<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m Gerät o<strong>de</strong>r zu einem Brand komm<strong>en</strong>,<br />
weil -die Inn<strong>en</strong>temperatur aufgrund schlechter Belüftung <strong>de</strong>s Geräts ansteigt.<br />
N Das Ausseh<strong>en</strong> kann sich je nach Gerät unterschei<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• Aufstell<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Geräts mit <strong>de</strong>m Standfuß<br />
• Installier<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Geräts mit einer Wandhalterung<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Deutsch - 31
Technische Dat<strong>en</strong><br />
Die Beschreibung<strong>en</strong> und Eig<strong>en</strong>schaft<strong>en</strong> in diesem Handbuch wer<strong>de</strong>n nur zu Informationszweck<strong>en</strong> herausgegeb<strong>en</strong> und könn<strong>en</strong><br />
ohne vorherige Ankündigung geän<strong>de</strong>rt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>ll PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Bildgröße (Diagonal) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
Vertikal PC-Auflösung 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Audio (Ausgang) 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Abmessung<strong>en</strong> (BxHxT)<br />
Gehäuse<br />
Mit Fuß<br />
Gewicht<br />
Gehäuse<br />
Mit Fuß<br />
Umgebungsbedingung<strong>en</strong><br />
Betriebstemperatur<br />
Luftfeuchtigkeit (bei Betrieb)<br />
Lagerungstemperatur<br />
Luftfeuchtigkeit (Lagerung)<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
N Dies ist ein digitales Gerät <strong>de</strong>r Klasse B.<br />
N Än<strong>de</strong>rung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>r technisch<strong>en</strong> Dat<strong>en</strong> und <strong>de</strong>s Geräte-Designs vorbehalt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Die technisch<strong>en</strong> Dat<strong>en</strong> zur b<strong>en</strong>ötigt<strong>en</strong> Netzspannung fin<strong>de</strong>n Sie auf <strong>de</strong>m Etikett am Produkt.<br />
N Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI IN 2 (DVI) erfolg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Deutsch - 32
Instructies voor gebruik<br />
• Beeldret<strong>en</strong>tie<br />
Geef e<strong>en</strong> stilstaand beeld (bijvoorbeeld van e<strong>en</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>ospel of tij<strong>de</strong>ns het aansluit<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> computer) niet langer dan twee<br />
uur op het plasmascherm weer, omdat dit beeldret<strong>en</strong>tie kan veroorzak<strong>en</strong>. Beeldret<strong>en</strong>tie wordt ook wel inbran<strong>de</strong>n g<strong>en</strong>oemd.<br />
Verlaag bij <strong>de</strong> weergave van e<strong>en</strong> stilstaand beeld <strong>de</strong> hel<strong>de</strong>rheid <strong>en</strong> het contrast om beeldret<strong>en</strong>tie te voorkom<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Hoogte<br />
Het plasmascherm blijft normaal functioner<strong>en</strong> tot op e<strong>en</strong> hoogte van 2000 meter. Bov<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> 2000 meter functioneert het<br />
scherm mogelijk niet correct. Installeer <strong>en</strong> gebruik het scherm niet op <strong>de</strong>rgelijke plaats<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Warmte op <strong>de</strong> bov<strong>en</strong>kant van het plasmascherm.<br />
De bov<strong>en</strong>kant van het scherm kan na e<strong>en</strong> lange gebruiksperio<strong>de</strong> erg warm wor<strong>de</strong>n, omdat <strong>de</strong> warmte van het scherm zich<br />
door het v<strong>en</strong>tilatiegat aan <strong>de</strong> bov<strong>en</strong>kant van het toestel verspreidt. Dit is normaal <strong>en</strong> duidt niet op e<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>fect of storing. Zorg<br />
dat kin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> bov<strong>en</strong>kant van het product niet kunn<strong>en</strong> aanrak<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Het product maakt e<strong>en</strong> ‘krak<strong>en</strong>d’ geluid.<br />
Het krak<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> geluid kan optre<strong>de</strong>n als het product uitzet of inkrimpt door e<strong>en</strong> veran<strong>de</strong>ring in <strong>de</strong> omgeving, zoals <strong>de</strong><br />
temperatuur of luchtvochtigheid. Dit is normaal <strong>en</strong> duidt niet op e<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>fect.<br />
• Cel<strong>de</strong>fect<strong>en</strong><br />
Het plasmascherm gebruikt het paneel dat bestaat uit 2,360,000(HD-niveau) tot 6,221,000(FHD-niveau) pixels, wat het<br />
gebruik van geavanceer<strong>de</strong> productietechnologie vereist. Het scherm kan echter <strong>en</strong>kele hel<strong>de</strong>re of donkere pixels bevatt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Deze pixels zijn niet van invloed op <strong>de</strong> prestaties van het product.<br />
• Gebruik <strong>de</strong> tv niet bij e<strong>en</strong> temperatuur van min<strong>de</strong>r dan 5°C (41°F)<br />
• Als u e<strong>en</strong> stilstaand beeld te lang op het scherm weergeeft, kan plasmascherm perman<strong>en</strong>t beschadigd rak<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Als u langere tijd in 4:3 formaat naar <strong>de</strong> plasma-tv kijkt, kunn<strong>en</strong> rest<strong>en</strong> van ran<strong>de</strong>n links, rechts <strong>en</strong> in het<br />
mid<strong>de</strong>n van het scherm achterblijv<strong>en</strong>. Dit wordt veroorzaakt door het verschil in uitstraling van licht op het<br />
scherm. Het afspel<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> DVD of gebruik mak<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> spelcomputer kan hetzelf<strong>de</strong> effect op het<br />
scherm hebb<strong>en</strong>. Scha<strong>de</strong> ontstaan door het bov<strong>en</strong>g<strong>en</strong>oem<strong>de</strong> effect valt niet on<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong> garantie.<br />
• Na-afdruk op scherm.<br />
De weergave van stilstaan<strong>de</strong> beel<strong>de</strong>n van computerspelletjes <strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re computerbeel<strong>de</strong>n kunn<strong>en</strong> na langere tijd ge<strong>de</strong>eltelijk<br />
e<strong>en</strong> na-afdruk achterlat<strong>en</strong>. Om dit te voorkom<strong>en</strong> kunt u tij<strong>de</strong>ns het weergev<strong>en</strong> van stilstaan<strong>de</strong> beel<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> hel<strong>de</strong>rheid <strong>en</strong> het<br />
contrast vermin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Garantie<br />
- De garantievoorwaar<strong>de</strong>n gel<strong>de</strong>n niet voor scha<strong>de</strong> veroorzaakt door beeldret<strong>en</strong>tie.<br />
- Het inbran<strong>de</strong>n van het scherm valt niet on<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong> garantievoorwaar<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• Installatie<br />
Neem contact op met e<strong>en</strong> erk<strong>en</strong>d servicec<strong>en</strong>trum wanneer u het apparaat op e<strong>en</strong> locatie installeert met veel stof, hoge of<br />
lage temperatur<strong>en</strong>, hoge luchtvochtigheid, chemische stoff<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> waar het voortdur<strong>en</strong>d in bedrijf is, zoals op het vliegveld, het<br />
spoorwegstation etc. Doet u dat niet dan kan het apparaat ernstige scha<strong>de</strong> oplop<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Opmerking digitale tv<br />
1. Functionaliteit betreff<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> digitale tv (DVB) is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar in lan<strong>de</strong>n of gebie<strong>de</strong>n waar DVB-T-signal<strong>en</strong> (MPEG2<br />
<strong>en</strong> MPEG4 AVC) voor digitale televisie per z<strong>en</strong>dmast wor<strong>de</strong>n uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n of waar u toegang hebt tot e<strong>en</strong> compatibele<br />
DVB-C-service (MPEG2 <strong>en</strong> MPEG4 AAC) voor kabel-tv. Vraag aan uw plaatselijke aanbie<strong>de</strong>r of u DVB-T- of DVB-Csignal<strong>en</strong><br />
kunt ontvang<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. DVB-T is <strong>de</strong> Europese DVB-consortiumstandaard voor <strong>de</strong> uitz<strong>en</strong>ding van digitale televisie per z<strong>en</strong>dmast <strong>en</strong> DVB-C<br />
voor <strong>de</strong> uitz<strong>en</strong>ding van digitale televisie over <strong>de</strong> kabel. Bepaal<strong>de</strong> speciale functies zoals EPG (Electric Program<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong>), VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o on Demand) <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>rgelijke zijn echter niet bij <strong>de</strong>ze specificatie inbegrep<strong>en</strong>. Om die re<strong>de</strong>n kunn<strong>en</strong><br />
ze op dit mom<strong>en</strong>t niet wor<strong>de</strong>n on<strong>de</strong>rsteund.<br />
3. Hoewel dit televisietoestel aan <strong>de</strong> nieuwste DVB-T- <strong>en</strong> DVB-C-standaar<strong>de</strong>n voldoet [augustus 2008], kan <strong>de</strong><br />
compatibiliteit met toekomstige digitale DVB-T-uitz<strong>en</strong>ding<strong>en</strong> via <strong>de</strong> z<strong>en</strong>dmast <strong>en</strong> digitale DVB-C-uitz<strong>en</strong>ding<strong>en</strong> via <strong>de</strong><br />
kabel niet wor<strong>de</strong>n gegaran<strong>de</strong>erd.<br />
4. Sommige aanbie<strong>de</strong>rs van kabeltelevisie kunn<strong>en</strong> voor e<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>rgelijke service extra kost<strong>en</strong> in rek<strong>en</strong>ing br<strong>en</strong>g<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> u<br />
mogelijk verplicht<strong>en</strong> om met <strong>de</strong> voorwaar<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> bepaling<strong>en</strong> van hun aanbieding akkoord te gaan.<br />
5. Bepaal<strong>de</strong> functies van digitale televisie zijn mogelijk niet in alle lan<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> regio's beschikbaar <strong>en</strong> DVB-C werkt<br />
mogelijk niet bij alle aanbie<strong>de</strong>rs.<br />
6. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met <strong>de</strong> klant<strong>en</strong>service van <strong>Samsung</strong>.<br />
Contact SAMSUNG WERELDWIJD<br />
Wanneer u suggesties of vrag<strong>en</strong> heeft met betrekking tot <strong>Samsung</strong> product<strong>en</strong>, gelieve contact op te nem<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong><br />
consum<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong> di<strong>en</strong>st van SAMSUNG. (Zie <strong>de</strong> achterzij<strong>de</strong> voor mee informatie.)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Inhoud<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
De tv aansluit<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> voorberei<strong>de</strong>n<br />
Controleer <strong>de</strong> gelever<strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong>...................................4<br />
Standaardvoet gebruik<strong>en</strong>.....................................................4<br />
De standaardvoet monter<strong>en</strong><br />
(afhankelijk van het mo<strong>de</strong>l)..................................................4<br />
Overzicht van het bedi<strong>en</strong>ingspaneel....................................5<br />
Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel.........................................6<br />
Overzicht van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing....................................8<br />
Batterij<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing plaats<strong>en</strong>........................9<br />
In- <strong>en</strong> uitschakel<strong>en</strong>...............................................................9<br />
De tv op stand-by zett<strong>en</strong>......................................................9<br />
Weergave van <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u's..................................................10<br />
Werk<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS.............................................10<br />
Het scherm bekijk<strong>en</strong>..........................................................10<br />
Plug & Play-functie.............................................................11<br />
Kanaalbeheer<br />
■ Kanaal opslaan..................................................................12<br />
■ Kanal<strong>en</strong> beher<strong>en</strong>................................................................15<br />
Beeldbeheer<br />
■ De beeldinstelling<strong>en</strong> wijzig<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> herstell<strong>en</strong>.......................17<br />
Geluidsbeheer<br />
■ De geluidsstandaard wijzig<strong>en</strong>............................................20<br />
■ De geluidsmodus selecter<strong>en</strong>..............................................21<br />
Beschrijving van <strong>de</strong> functies<br />
■ Het instelling<strong>en</strong>m<strong>en</strong>u gebruik<strong>en</strong>.........................................22<br />
■ Tijd instell<strong>en</strong>.......................................................................24<br />
■ Bronlijst / Naam wijzig<strong>en</strong>....................................................25<br />
■ PC Display.........................................................................26<br />
■ Weergavemodi...................................................................26<br />
■ On<strong>de</strong>rsteund programma...................................................27<br />
Aanbeveling<strong>en</strong> voor het gebruik<br />
■ Teletekstfunctie..................................................................28<br />
■ Specificaties voor <strong>de</strong> muurbevestigingskit (VESA)............29<br />
■ De montage van <strong>de</strong> muurbevestiging voorberei<strong>de</strong>n..........30<br />
■ De TV vastzett<strong>en</strong> aan <strong>de</strong> wand..........................................30<br />
■ Problem<strong>en</strong> oploss<strong>en</strong>..........................................................31<br />
■ Installatieruimte..................................................................31<br />
■ Specificaties.......................................................................32<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
N O T<br />
Symbool Indrukk<strong>en</strong> Opmerking De toets One Touch De toets TOOL<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
De tv aansluit<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> voorberei<strong>de</strong>n<br />
Controleer <strong>de</strong> gelever<strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong><br />
Gebruikershandleiding<br />
Afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing/<br />
AAA-batterij<strong>en</strong> (2ea)<br />
Netsnoer Doek-schoon Garantiekaart/<br />
veiligheidsvoorschrift<strong>en</strong><br />
(niet beschikbaar op alle locaties)<br />
Screw (4ea) Bo<strong>de</strong>mkap Hou<strong>de</strong>r - ring (4ea)<br />
(Zie pagina 30)<br />
Ferrietkern<br />
voor stroomkabel (1ea)<br />
N<br />
De ferrietkern<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n gebruikt om <strong>de</strong> kabels af te scherm<strong>en</strong> van interfer<strong>en</strong>tie.<br />
Op<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> ferrietkern bij het aansluit<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> kabel <strong>en</strong> klem <strong>de</strong>ze om <strong>de</strong> kabel bij <strong>de</strong> plug.<br />
Standaardvoet gebruik<strong>en</strong><br />
N<br />
N<br />
Het plasmascherm moet door twee of meer person<strong>en</strong> getild<br />
wor<strong>de</strong>n. Leg het plasmascherm nooit op <strong>de</strong> grond neer om<br />
ev<strong>en</strong>tuele beschadiging aan het scherm te voorkom<strong>en</strong>. Houd het<br />
plasmascherm altijd recht.<br />
Het plasmascherm kan 20 gra<strong>de</strong>n naar links <strong>en</strong> naar rechts draai<strong>en</strong>.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
De standaardvoet monter<strong>en</strong> (afhankelijk van het mo<strong>de</strong>l)<br />
Bevestig het TV stevig op <strong>de</strong> standaardvoet met <strong>de</strong> zes schroev<strong>en</strong> om<br />
<strong>de</strong> standaardvoet aan het TV te bevestig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(Het uiterlijk van het scherm kan afwijk<strong>en</strong> van het scherm in <strong>de</strong><br />
afbeelding.)<br />
Waarschuwing<br />
Bevestig <strong>de</strong> voet stevig aan <strong>de</strong> tv<br />
voordat u <strong>de</strong>ze verplaatst, omdat <strong>de</strong><br />
standaard kan vall<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> ernstig letsel kan<br />
veroorzak<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N De tv moet door twee of meer<br />
person<strong>en</strong> getild wor<strong>de</strong>n. Leg <strong>de</strong> tv<br />
nooit op <strong>de</strong> grond neer om ev<strong>en</strong>tuele<br />
beschadiging aan het scherm te<br />
voorkom<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Zet <strong>de</strong> tv altijd rechtop neer.<br />
Als u <strong>de</strong> tv op e<strong>en</strong> muur aanbr<strong>en</strong>gt, sluit u het <strong>de</strong>ksel<br />
(1) op het verbindingsstuk van <strong>de</strong> standaardvoet met<br />
twee schroev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Overzicht van het bedi<strong>en</strong>ingspaneel<br />
N<br />
De vorm <strong>en</strong> kleur van het product kunn<strong>en</strong>, afhankelijk van het mo<strong>de</strong>l, variër<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Toets<strong>en</strong> op het<br />
voorpaneel<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong><br />
voor <strong>de</strong> bedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Hiermee schakelt u tuss<strong>en</strong> alle beschikbare invoerbronn<strong>en</strong><br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N<br />
Gebruik <strong>de</strong>ze toets in het schermm<strong>en</strong>u zoals u <strong>de</strong><br />
toets ENTERE op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing gebruikt.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Druk hierop om e<strong>en</strong> beeldm<strong>en</strong>u van <strong>de</strong> functies van uw tv<br />
weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3 + –<br />
Druk hierop om het volume hoger oflager te zett<strong>en</strong>.In het<br />
schermm<strong>en</strong>u gebruikt u <strong>de</strong>knopp<strong>en</strong> + – op <strong>de</strong>zelf<strong>de</strong><br />
manier als <strong>de</strong> knopp<strong>en</strong> ◄ <strong>en</strong> ► op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
5 AAN/UIT-LAMPJE<br />
Als <strong>de</strong> stroom is ingeschakeld, knippert het lampje ev<strong>en</strong><br />
om vervolg<strong>en</strong>s uit te gaan. In <strong>de</strong> stand-bymodus brandt het<br />
lampje.<br />
6<br />
(POWER)<br />
Druk hierop om <strong>de</strong> tv in of uit te schakel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
7 SENSOR VOOR AFSTANDSBEDIENING<br />
Richt <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing op dit punt van <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
8 LUIDSPREKER<br />
4 CH<br />
Druk hierop om het kanaal te wijzig<strong>en</strong>. In het schermm<strong>en</strong>u<br />
gebruikt u <strong>de</strong> knopp<strong>en</strong> CH op <strong>de</strong>zelf<strong>de</strong> manier als <strong>de</strong><br />
knopp<strong>en</strong> ▲ <strong>en</strong> ▼ op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel<br />
Achterpaneel<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
of<br />
8<br />
Kabeltelevisie<br />
netwerk<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
of<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
La couleur et la forme du produit peuv<strong>en</strong>t varier <strong>en</strong> fonction du modèle.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> audio- of vi<strong>de</strong>osysteem op uw toestel aansluit, di<strong>en</strong>t u alle apparat<strong>en</strong> uit te schakel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Zorg bij het aansluit<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> extern apparaat ervoor dat <strong>de</strong> kleur<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> aansluiting <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> kabel overe<strong>en</strong>kom<strong>en</strong>.<br />
1 AANSLUITEN<br />
Aansluiting voor het netsnoer.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Aansluiting voor on<strong>de</strong>rhoud.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Audio (AUDIO L/R) <strong>en</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR) ingang<strong>en</strong> voor<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Ingang<strong>en</strong> of uitgang<strong>en</strong> voor externe apparat<strong>en</strong>, zoals e<strong>en</strong><br />
vi<strong>de</strong>orecor<strong>de</strong>r, dvd-speler, spelcomputer of vi<strong>de</strong>odiscspeler.<br />
Specificaties voor <strong>de</strong> invoer/uitvoer<br />
Ingang<br />
Uitgang<br />
Aansluiting<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Audio (L/R) RGB Vi<strong>de</strong>o + audio (L/R)<br />
EXT<br />
Alle<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> tv-of DTVuitgang<br />
is<br />
✔ ✔ ✔<br />
beschikbaar.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Sluit e<strong>en</strong> compon<strong>en</strong>t voor digitale audio aan.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
RCA-audiosignal<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> tv aansluit<strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> externe<br />
bron, zoals geluidsapparatuur.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1, 2 (DVI)<br />
− Voor e<strong>en</strong> HDMI-naar-HDMI-verbinding is ge<strong>en</strong> extra<br />
audioaansluiting nodig.<br />
− Bij gebruik van <strong>de</strong> HDMI/DVIkabelverbinding, moet u<br />
<strong>de</strong> HDMI IN 2 (DVI) aansluiting gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Wat is HDMI?<br />
− “Met HDMI” (High Definition Multimedia Interface)<br />
kunn<strong>en</strong> digitale vi<strong>de</strong>ogegev<strong>en</strong>s met e<strong>en</strong> hoge<br />
<strong>de</strong>finitie <strong>en</strong> meer<strong>de</strong>re kanal<strong>en</strong> met digitale audio<br />
wor<strong>de</strong>n verzon<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
− De HDMI/DVI-uitgang on<strong>de</strong>rsteunt e<strong>en</strong> DVIaansluiting<br />
op externe apparatuur met e<strong>en</strong><br />
geschikte kabel (niet meegeleverd). Het verschil<br />
tuss<strong>en</strong> HDMI <strong>en</strong> DVI is dat het HDMI-apparaat<br />
min<strong>de</strong>r groot is, is voorzi<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> functie voor<br />
HDCP-co<strong>de</strong>ring<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
DVI-audio-uitgang<strong>en</strong> voor externe apparat<strong>en</strong>.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
75Ω Coaxiale aansluiting voor ant<strong>en</strong>ne of<br />
kabeltelevisi<strong>en</strong>etwerk.<br />
On<strong>de</strong>rsteun<strong>de</strong> modi voor HDMI/DVI <strong>en</strong> Compon<strong>en</strong>t<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50 Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60 Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t O O O O O O O<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Zijpaneel<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
De vorm <strong>en</strong> kleur van het product kunn<strong>en</strong>, afhankelijk van het mo<strong>de</strong>l, variër<strong>en</strong>.<br />
1 SLEUF VOOR ALGEME<strong>NE</strong> INTERFACE<br />
Plaats <strong>de</strong> CI-kaart (Common Interface of Algem<strong>en</strong>e Interface) in<br />
<strong>de</strong> sleuf. (Zie pagina 23.)<br />
− Wanneer u bij sommige kanal<strong>en</strong> ge<strong>en</strong> CI-kaart hebt<br />
geplaatst, wordt Vervormd signaal op het scherm<br />
weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
− De koppelingsgegev<strong>en</strong>s met e<strong>en</strong> telefoonnummer, <strong>de</strong> ID<br />
van <strong>de</strong> CI-kaart, <strong>de</strong> host-ID <strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re informatie wor<strong>de</strong>n<br />
gedur<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> 2~3 minut<strong>en</strong> weergegev<strong>en</strong>. Neem contact<br />
op met uw serviceprovi<strong>de</strong>r als er e<strong>en</strong> foutbericht wordt<br />
weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
− Wanneer <strong>de</strong> kanaalgegev<strong>en</strong>szijn geconfigureerd, wordt<br />
het bericht Update voltooid weergegev<strong>en</strong>. Hiermee wordt<br />
aangegev<strong>en</strong> dat <strong>de</strong> kanaallijst nu is bijgewerkt.<br />
N Plaats <strong>de</strong> CI-kaart in <strong>de</strong> richting die op <strong>de</strong> kaart staat<br />
gemarkeerd.<br />
N CAM is not supported in some countries and regions,check<br />
with your authorized <strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o <strong>en</strong> audio-ingang<strong>en</strong> voor externe apparat<strong>en</strong>, zoals<br />
e<strong>en</strong> camcor<strong>de</strong>r of vi<strong>de</strong>orecor<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Overzicht van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing gebruik<strong>en</strong> tot op e<strong>en</strong> afstand van ongeveer 7 meter vanaf <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
N Fel licht kan <strong>de</strong> werking van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing beïnvloe<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
1 POWER-toets<br />
(TV in- <strong>en</strong> uitschakel<strong>en</strong>)<br />
2 Rechtstreeks selecter<strong>en</strong> van TV<br />
3 Cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> voor directe kanaalkeuze<br />
4 Geeft <strong>de</strong> lijst met favoriete kanal<strong>en</strong><br />
weer.<br />
5 Geluid tij<strong>de</strong>lijk uitschakel<strong>en</strong><br />
6<br />
Volume verhog<strong>en</strong><br />
Volume verlag<strong>en</strong><br />
7 Beschikbare bron selecter<strong>en</strong><br />
8 Informatie over <strong>de</strong> huidige<br />
uitz<strong>en</strong>ding bekijk<strong>en</strong><br />
9 Snelkoppeling voor veelgebruikte.<br />
0 Cursor bestur<strong>en</strong> binn<strong>en</strong> het m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
! Lijst<strong>en</strong> met kanal<strong>en</strong> op het scherm<br />
weergev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
@ Gebruik <strong>de</strong>ze toets<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> lijst<br />
Kanaal (Channel) <strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>zovoort.<br />
$ Vorig kanaal<br />
% Volg<strong>en</strong>d kanaal<br />
Vorig kanaal<br />
^ Hoofdm<strong>en</strong>u weergev<strong>en</strong><br />
& Elektronische programmagids<br />
(EPG) weergev<strong>en</strong><br />
* Terug naar het vorige m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
( Schermm<strong>en</strong>u afsluit<strong>en</strong><br />
) Audiobeschrijving selectie.<br />
a Digitale on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling weergev<strong>en</strong><br />
Teletekstfuncties<br />
2 Teletekstmodus verlat<strong>en</strong><br />
(afhankelijk van het mo<strong>de</strong>l)<br />
7 Teletekstmodus selecter<strong>en</strong><br />
(LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Teletekst verborg<strong>en</strong> informatie<br />
9 Weergaveformaat voor teletekst<br />
! Teletekst opslaan<br />
@ Fastext-on<strong>de</strong>rwerp selecter<strong>en</strong><br />
# Teletekst weergev<strong>en</strong>/<br />
teletekstinformatie <strong>en</strong> normale<br />
uitz<strong>en</strong>ding tegelijk op scherm<br />
weergev<strong>en</strong><br />
$ Teletekst subpagina<br />
% P : volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> teletekstpagina<br />
P<br />
^ Teletekstin<strong>de</strong>x<br />
: vorige teletekstpagina<br />
* Teletekst vastzett<strong>en</strong><br />
( Teletekst uitschakel<strong>en</strong><br />
<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Batterij<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing plaats<strong>en</strong><br />
1. Op<strong>en</strong> het klepje achter op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing met e<strong>en</strong> opwaartse beweging<br />
zoals aangegev<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> afbeelding.<br />
2. Plaats twee AAA batterij<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Zorg ervoor dat <strong>de</strong> “+” <strong>en</strong> “–”-uitein<strong>de</strong>n van <strong>de</strong> batterij<strong>en</strong> overe<strong>en</strong>kom<strong>en</strong> met<br />
<strong>de</strong> afbeelding in het vakje.<br />
3. Sluit het klepje.<br />
N Verwij<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong> batterij<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> bewaar ze op e<strong>en</strong> koele, droge plaats indi<strong>en</strong> u <strong>de</strong><br />
afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing langere tijd niet gebruikt.<br />
N<br />
De afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing doet het niet! Controleer <strong>de</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> punt<strong>en</strong>:<br />
1. Is <strong>de</strong> tv ingeschakeld?<br />
2. Zijn <strong>de</strong> plus- <strong>en</strong> minpol<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> batterij<strong>en</strong> teg<strong>en</strong>gesteld geplaatst?<br />
3. Zijn <strong>de</strong> batterij<strong>en</strong> leeg?<br />
4. Is er e<strong>en</strong> stroomstoring of zit <strong>de</strong> stekker wel in het stopcontact?<br />
5. Schijnt er speciaal fluorescer<strong>en</strong>d licht of neonlicht vlakbij?<br />
In- <strong>en</strong> uitschakel<strong>en</strong><br />
Het netsnoer is bevestigd aan <strong>de</strong> achterzij<strong>de</strong> van <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
1. Steek <strong>de</strong> stekker in e<strong>en</strong> geschikt stopcontact.<br />
N Het stand-bylampje op het apparaat brandt.<br />
2. Druk op POWERP op het apparaat.<br />
N U kunt ook op <strong>de</strong> toets POWERP of <strong>de</strong> toets TV op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing drukk<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> tv in te schakel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Het meest rec<strong>en</strong>te programma dat u hebt bekek<strong>en</strong>, wordt automatisch opnieuw geselecteerd.<br />
3. Druk op <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9) of <strong>de</strong> kanaaltoets<strong>en</strong> omhoog/omlaag (< / >) p <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing of op <strong>de</strong> toets<br />
op het apparaat.<br />
N Wanneer u het apparaat voor <strong>de</strong> eerste keer inschakelt, wordt u gevraagd <strong>de</strong> taal voor <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u's te kiez<strong>en</strong>.<br />
4. Druk nogmaals op POWERP om het apparaat uit te schakel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De tv op stand-by zett<strong>en</strong><br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> tv op stand-by zett<strong>en</strong> om het <strong>en</strong>ergieverbruik te vermin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>. De stand-bymodus kan handig zijn als u ev<strong>en</strong> wilt stopp<strong>en</strong><br />
met kijk<strong>en</strong> (bijvoorbeeld tij<strong>de</strong>ns het et<strong>en</strong>).<br />
1. Druk op POWERP op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
N Het beeld wordt uitgeschakeld <strong>en</strong> er gaat e<strong>en</strong> rood stand-bylampje bran<strong>de</strong>n op het apparaat.<br />
2. Druk nogmaals op POWERP, e<strong>en</strong> cijfertoets (0-9), <strong>de</strong> toets TV of e<strong>en</strong> kanaaltoets omhoog/omlaag (< / >) om <strong>de</strong> tv weer<br />
in te schakel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Laat <strong>de</strong> tv niet gedur<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> langere tijd op stand-by staan (zoals tij<strong>de</strong>ns vakanties). Haal ook <strong>de</strong> stekker uit het stopcontact<br />
<strong>en</strong> ontkoppel <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>ne.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands -
Weergave van <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u's<br />
<br />
1. Schakel het apparaat in <strong>en</strong> druk op MENU. Het hoofdm<strong>en</strong>u verschijnt op het<br />
scherm. Aan <strong>de</strong> linkerkant van het m<strong>en</strong>u wor<strong>de</strong>n pictogramm<strong>en</strong> weergegev<strong>en</strong>:<br />
Beeld, Geluid, Kanaal, Instelling<strong>en</strong>, Invoer <strong>en</strong> On<strong>de</strong>rsteuning.<br />
2. Druk op ▲ of ▼ om e<strong>en</strong> pictogram te selecter<strong>en</strong>. Druk op ENTERE voor<br />
weergave van het subm<strong>en</strong>u van het pictogram.<br />
3. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets EXIT om het m<strong>en</strong>u te verlat<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
De schermm<strong>en</strong>u's verdwijn<strong>en</strong> na ongeveer één minuut uit beeld.<br />
Beeld<br />
Modus<br />
: Standaard<br />
Cel hel<strong>de</strong>rheid : 4<br />
Contrast : 95<br />
Hel<strong>de</strong>rheid : 45<br />
Scherpte : 50<br />
Kleur : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
Werk<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS<br />
Met <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS kunt u functies die u veel gebruikt snel <strong>en</strong> gemakkelijk selecter<strong>en</strong>. De inhoud van het Extra m<strong>en</strong>u is<br />
afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> externe invoermetho<strong>de</strong>.<br />
<br />
1. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS. Het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra verschijnt.<br />
2. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ om e<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong><br />
toets ENTERE.<br />
3. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE om <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> items te bekijk<strong>en</strong>,<br />
wijzig<strong>en</strong> of te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Extra<br />
E<strong>en</strong> meer ge<strong>de</strong>tailleer<strong>de</strong> beschrijving van <strong>de</strong> functies vindt u op <strong>de</strong><br />
correspon<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> pagina.<br />
• Beeldmodus, zie pagina 17<br />
• Geluidsmodus, zie pagina 20<br />
• Slaaptimer, zie pagina 24<br />
• Spaarstand, zie pagina 23<br />
• Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> als Favoriet (of Verw. uit Favoriet<strong>en</strong>), zie pagina 15<br />
Beeldmodus ◄ Standaard ►<br />
Geluidmodus : Aangepast<br />
Slaaptimer : Uit<br />
Spaarstand : Uit<br />
Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> als Favoriet<br />
U Verpl E Enter e Sluit<strong>en</strong><br />
Het scherm bekijk<strong>en</strong><br />
Op het scherm wor<strong>de</strong>n het huidige kanaal <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> status van bepaal<strong>de</strong> audio-<br />
/vi<strong>de</strong>oinstelling<strong>en</strong> weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
O<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets INFO om <strong>de</strong> informatie weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> INFO-knop op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing. Op het scherm wor<strong>de</strong>n het<br />
huidige kanaal <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> status van bepaal<strong>de</strong> audio-/vi<strong>de</strong>o-instelling<strong>en</strong> weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• ▲, ▼: U kunt informatie over an<strong>de</strong>re kanal<strong>en</strong> bekijk<strong>en</strong>. Als u naar het huidige<br />
geselecteer<strong>de</strong> kanaal wilt gaan, drukt u op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE.<br />
• ◄, ►: U kunt informatie over het gew<strong>en</strong>ste programma op het huidige kanaal<br />
bekijk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
N<br />
Druk nogmaals op <strong>de</strong> toets INFO of wacht ongeveer 10 secon<strong>de</strong>n. De<br />
weergave verdwijnt dan automatisch.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 10
Plug & Play-functie<br />
Wanneer u <strong>de</strong> tv voor het eerst inschakelt, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong>kele basisinstelling<strong>en</strong> automatisch achtere<strong>en</strong>volg<strong>en</strong>s uitgevoerd.<br />
N<br />
De scre<strong>en</strong>saver wordt geactiveerd wanneer langer dan 1 minuut ge<strong>en</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing wor<strong>de</strong>n gebruikt<br />
terwijl Plug & Play is ingeschakeld.<br />
De scre<strong>en</strong>saver wordt geactiveerd wanneer langer dan 15 minut<strong>en</strong> ge<strong>en</strong> bedi<strong>en</strong>ingssignaal wordt uitgevoerd.<br />
N<br />
1. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets POWER op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing. You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
language. automatisch weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Selecteer <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste taal door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ te drukk<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets<br />
ENTERE om uw keuze te bevestig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets◄ of ► om Winkel<strong>de</strong>mo te selecter<strong>en</strong> of Thuisgebruik <strong>en</strong><br />
vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
We ra<strong>de</strong>n u aan <strong>de</strong> televisie in te stell<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> modus Thuisgebruik voor<br />
het beste beeld in uw thuisomgeving.<br />
De modus Winkel<strong>de</strong>mo is alle<strong>en</strong> bedoeld voor gebruik in winkels.<br />
Wanneer het apparaat per ongeluk is ingesteld op <strong>de</strong> modus Winkel<strong>de</strong>mo <strong>en</strong> u wilt terug naar Thuisgebruik<br />
(Standard): druk op <strong>de</strong> volumeknop op <strong>de</strong> tv. Wanneer het schermm<strong>en</strong>u voor het volume wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>, drukt u vijf<br />
secon<strong>de</strong>n op <strong>de</strong> toets MENU op <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
3. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE. Selecteer <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste taal door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ te drukk<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE<br />
om uw keuze te bevestig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
4. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ om <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> voor <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> verbinding op te slaan <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op ENTERE.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Ant: ant<strong>en</strong>nesignaal.<br />
Kabel: kabelant<strong>en</strong>nesignaal.<br />
5. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ om <strong>de</strong> kanaalbron te onthou<strong>de</strong>n. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE om Ant te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Digitaal <strong>en</strong> analoog: digitale <strong>en</strong> analoge kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Digitaal: digitale kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Analoog: analoge kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Voor meer informatie over het selecter<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> modus Kabel, Zie pagina 12.<br />
N Het zoek<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> start <strong>en</strong> eindigt automatisch.<br />
N Druk op elk gew<strong>en</strong>st mom<strong>en</strong>t op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE om <strong>de</strong> opslagprocedure te on<strong>de</strong>rbrek<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Nadat alle beschikbare kanal<strong>en</strong> zijn opgeslag<strong>en</strong>, wordt het bericht De modus Clock instell<strong>en</strong>. weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
6. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets▲ of ▼ om Auto te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE.<br />
N Wanneer u Handmatig selecteert, wordt Huidige datum <strong>en</strong> tijd instell<strong>en</strong> weergegev<strong>en</strong>. (Zie pagina 24)<br />
N Wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> digitaal signaal heeft ontvang<strong>en</strong>, wordt <strong>de</strong> tijd automatisch ingesteld. Indi<strong>en</strong> dit niet het geval is, zie<br />
pagina 24 om <strong>de</strong> klok in te stell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
7. De beknopte instructie Hoe u uw nieuwe HDTV optimaal b<strong>en</strong>ut wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE.<br />
N Dit m<strong>en</strong>u is beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> Handleiding HD-verbindingin het m<strong>en</strong>u On<strong>de</strong>rsteuning.<br />
8. Het bericht TV. wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>. Wanneer u daarmee klaar b<strong>en</strong>t, drukt u op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
Plug & Play<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
U Move . E Enter<br />
Als u <strong>de</strong>ze functie wilt resett<strong>en</strong>...<br />
1. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets MENU om het m<strong>en</strong>u weer te gev<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼<br />
om Instelling<strong>en</strong> te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
2. Druk opnieuw op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE om Plug & Play te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3. Voer uw viercijferige pinco<strong>de</strong> in. De standaardpinco<strong>de</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> nieuw tv-toestel is<br />
‘0-0-0-0’.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Zie pagina 22 voor het wijzig<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong>.<br />
De functie Plug & Play is alle<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> tv-modus beschikbaar.<br />
Instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
Taalkeuze<br />
Tijd<br />
Uitz<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
Beveiliging<br />
Algeme<strong>en</strong><br />
: Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
►<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 11
Kanaalbeheer<br />
Kanaal opslaan<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Automatisch opslaan<br />
Zoekt naar alle kanal<strong>en</strong> met actieve uitz<strong>en</strong>dstations (beschikbaarheid is<br />
afhankelijk van uw land) <strong>en</strong> slaat <strong>de</strong>ze op in het geheug<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> verbinding opslaan in het geheug<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Ant: ant<strong>en</strong>nesignaal.<br />
• Cable: Cable ant<strong>en</strong>na signal.<br />
N Wanneer u Kabel selecteert,<br />
• Zoekmodus: geeft <strong>de</strong> zoekmodus weer. (Snel)<br />
- Network-ID: geeft <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificatieco<strong>de</strong> van het netwerk weer.<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>tie: geeft <strong>de</strong> frequ<strong>en</strong>tie voor het kanaal weer.<br />
- Modulatie: geeft <strong>de</strong> beschikbare modulatiewaar<strong>de</strong>n weer.<br />
- Symboolsnelheid: geeft <strong>de</strong> beschikbare symboolsnelhe<strong>de</strong>n weer.<br />
• Zoekmodus: geeft <strong>de</strong> zoekmodus weer. (Volledig, Netwerk)<br />
- Start Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Startfrequ<strong>en</strong>tie): geeft <strong>de</strong> waar<strong>de</strong>n voor <strong>de</strong> startfrequ<strong>en</strong>tie weer.<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>tie: geeft <strong>de</strong> frequ<strong>en</strong>tie voor het kanaal weer.<br />
- Modulatie: geeft <strong>de</strong> beschikbare modulatiewaar<strong>de</strong>n weer.<br />
- Symboolsnelheid: geeft <strong>de</strong> beschikbare symboolsnelhe<strong>de</strong>n weer.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> kanaalbron opslaan in het geheug<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Land<br />
• Digitaal kanaal: u kunt het land voor digitale kanal<strong>en</strong> veran<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Analoog kanaal: u kunt het land voor analoge kanal<strong>en</strong> veran<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Het invoerscherm voor <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> verschijnt. Voer uw viercijferige<br />
pinco<strong>de</strong> in.<br />
Digitaal <strong>en</strong> Analoog: digitale <strong>en</strong> analoge kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Digitaal: digitale kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Analoog: analoge kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Wanneer u Automatisch opslaan wilt uitschakel<strong>en</strong>, drukt u op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
Het bericht Autom. program. stopp<strong>en</strong>? wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Selecteer Ja door op <strong>de</strong> toets ◄ of ► te drukk<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
Wanneer e<strong>en</strong> kanaal is vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ld door <strong>de</strong> functie Kin<strong>de</strong>rslot verschijnt het pininvoerscherm.<br />
Kanaal<br />
Land<br />
Automatisch opslaan<br />
Handm. opslaan<br />
Optie Cable Search (kabel zoek<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Gids voor huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong><br />
Volledige gids<br />
Standaardgids<br />
: Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d<br />
►<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 12
❑<br />
Handm. opslaan<br />
Scant handmatig op e<strong>en</strong> kanaal <strong>en</strong> slaat het op in het geheug<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
• Digitaal kanaal (Digitaal)<br />
Handmatig opslaan voor digitale kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Digitaal kanaal is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar in DTV-modus.<br />
kanaal: stel het kanaalnummer in met behulp van <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ of met <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9).<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>tie: stel <strong>de</strong> frequ<strong>en</strong>tie in met behulp van <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Bandbreedte: stel <strong>de</strong> bandbreedte in met behulp van <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ of met <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9).<br />
Zodra dit is voltooid, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst bijgewerkt.<br />
• Analoog kanaal<br />
Handmatig opslaan voor analoge kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Programma (Programmanummer dat aan e<strong>en</strong> kanaal wordt toegewez<strong>en</strong>): stel het programmanummer in met behulp van<br />
<strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ of met <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9).<br />
• Kleursysteem → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: stelt <strong>de</strong> waar<strong>de</strong> kleursysteem in met behulp van <strong>de</strong> toets▲ of ▼.<br />
• Geluidssysteem → BG / L / I / DK: stelt <strong>de</strong> waar<strong>de</strong> geluidssysteem in met behulp van <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼.<br />
• kanaal (Als u het nummer weet van het kanaal dat u wilt opslaan): Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ om C (ant<strong>en</strong>nekanaal) of S<br />
(kabelkanaal ) te selecter<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ►, druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼ of op <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9) om het<br />
gew<strong>en</strong>ste nummer te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N U kunt het kanaalnummer ook selecter<strong>en</strong> door direct <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9) in te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Als er ge<strong>en</strong> geluid is of als het geluid is vervormd, selecteert u nogmaals <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste geluidsstandaard.<br />
• Zoek<strong>en</strong> (Als u <strong>de</strong> kanaalnummers niet weet): druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ om met zoek<strong>en</strong> te beginn<strong>en</strong>. De tuner scant het<br />
frequ<strong>en</strong>tiebereik totdat het eerste kanaal of het door u geselecteer<strong>de</strong> kanaal in beeld komt.<br />
• Opslaan (Het kanaal <strong>en</strong> het bijbehor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> programmanummer opslaan): instell<strong>en</strong> naar OK door <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE in te<br />
drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Kanaalmodus<br />
- C (Ant<strong>en</strong>nekanaalmodus): in <strong>de</strong>ze modus kunt u e<strong>en</strong> kanaal selecter<strong>en</strong> door het nummer in te toets<strong>en</strong> dat<br />
aan het z<strong>en</strong>dstation is toegewez<strong>en</strong>.<br />
- S (Kabelkanaalmodus): in <strong>de</strong>ze stand kunt u e<strong>en</strong> kanaal selecter<strong>en</strong> door het nummer in te toets<strong>en</strong> dat aan<br />
het kabelkanaal is toegewez<strong>en</strong>.<br />
❑<br />
Optie Cable Search (Cable)<br />
U kunt aanvull<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> zoekopties voor het zoek<strong>en</strong> naar e<strong>en</strong> kabelnetwerk instell<strong>en</strong>, zoals <strong>de</strong> frequ<strong>en</strong>tie <strong>en</strong> symboolsnelheid<br />
(afhankelijk van het land).<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>tie (Start~Stop): geeft <strong>de</strong> frequ<strong>en</strong>tie voor het kanaal weer.<br />
Modulatie: geeft <strong>de</strong> beschikbare modulatiewaar<strong>de</strong>n weer.<br />
Symboolsnelheid: geeft <strong>de</strong> beschikbare symboolsnelhe<strong>de</strong>n weer.<br />
N De Frequ<strong>en</strong>tie (Start-Stop) <strong>en</strong> Symboolsnelheid instell<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9).<br />
❑<br />
Gids voor huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> / Volledige gids<br />
De EPG (elektronische programmagids)-informatie wordt verstrekt door <strong>de</strong> kabelaanbie<strong>de</strong>rs. Programmavermelding<strong>en</strong><br />
kunn<strong>en</strong> leeg of verou<strong>de</strong>rd zijn t<strong>en</strong> gevolge van <strong>de</strong> informatie die voor e<strong>en</strong> bepaald kanaal wordt uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
De weergave wordt dynamisch bijgewerkt zodra nieuwe informatie beschikbaar komt.<br />
• Gids voor huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>: Voor <strong>de</strong> zes kanal<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> linkerkolom wordt informatie over het huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong><br />
programma weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Volledige gids: hiermee geeft u <strong>de</strong> programma-informatie weer als segm<strong>en</strong>t<strong>en</strong> die per uur zijn gesorteerd. Er wordt<br />
programma-informatie voor twee uur weergegev<strong>en</strong> waarin u in tijd vooruit of achteruit kunt bla<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 13
❑<br />
Standaardgids<br />
• Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d / Volledige gids: u kunt ofwel <strong>de</strong> Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d of <strong>de</strong> Volledige<br />
gids lat<strong>en</strong> weergev<strong>en</strong> wanneer u <strong>de</strong> toets GUIDE op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing<br />
indrukt.<br />
Kanaa<br />
Gids voor huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong><br />
Volledige gids<br />
Standaardgids : Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d ►<br />
Kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst<br />
Kanaalmodus : Toegev. Kanal<strong>en</strong><br />
Fijnafstemming<br />
O U kunt het gidsm<strong>en</strong>u ook op<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> door op <strong>de</strong> toets GUIDE te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De Gids voor huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> / Volledige gids gebruik<strong>en</strong><br />
Gids voor huidige <strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Nu<br />
Volg<strong>en</strong>d<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Bekijk<strong>en</strong> Informatie Pagina • Volledige gids • Sluit<strong>en</strong><br />
Volledige gids<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
f tn<br />
900 Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits!<br />
Bekijk<strong>en</strong> Informatie Pagina • Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d • +24 uur • Sluit<strong>en</strong><br />
▲/▼/◄/►,<br />
(ENTER)<br />
ROOD<br />
GROEN<br />
GEEL<br />
BLAUW<br />
INFO<br />
Selecteer e<strong>en</strong> programma door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲/▼/◄/► te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Als het volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> programma is geselecteerd, is dit gepland terwijl het klokpictogram wordt<br />
weergegev<strong>en</strong>. Wanneer <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE opnieuw wordt ingedrukt, druk dan op <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong><br />
▲/▼/◄/► om Programmering<strong>en</strong> annuler<strong>en</strong> te selecter<strong>en</strong>. De planning wordt geannuleerd <strong>en</strong> het<br />
klokpictogram verdwijnt.<br />
Zie het volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> ge<strong>de</strong>elte voor meer informatie over het plann<strong>en</strong> van programma's.<br />
Schakel<strong>en</strong> tuss<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> Volledige gids.<br />
Volledige gids: Hiermee bla<strong>de</strong>rt u snel vooruit (-24 uur).<br />
Volledige gids: Hiermee bla<strong>de</strong>rt u snel vooruit (+24 uur).<br />
De gids verlat<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De knop INFO voor uitgebrei<strong>de</strong> informatie. De ge<strong>de</strong>tailleer<strong>de</strong> informatie bevat het kanaalnummer, <strong>de</strong><br />
speelduur, <strong>de</strong> statusbalk, <strong>de</strong> leeftijdsbeperking, <strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>okwaliteit (HD/SD), geluidsmodi, on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling<br />
of teletekst, tal<strong>en</strong> voor on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling of teletekst, <strong>en</strong> e<strong>en</strong> korte sam<strong>en</strong>vatting van het geselecteer<strong>de</strong><br />
programma. “...” wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong> als <strong>de</strong> sam<strong>en</strong>vatting te lang is.<br />
❑<br />
Kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst<br />
Raadpleeg voor <strong>de</strong> uitgebrei<strong>de</strong> procedures voor het gebruik van <strong>de</strong> Kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst <strong>de</strong> beschrijving<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> pagina’s 15~16.<br />
❑<br />
Kanaalmodus<br />
Wanneer u <strong>de</strong> toets P < / > indrukt, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> kanaallijst gewisseld.<br />
• Toegev. Kanal<strong>en</strong>: kanal<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n in <strong>de</strong> lijst opgeslag<strong>en</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> gewisseld.<br />
• Favoriete kanal<strong>en</strong>: kanal<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n in <strong>de</strong> lijst favoriete kanal<strong>en</strong> gewisseld.<br />
❑<br />
Fijnafstemming (alle<strong>en</strong> analoge kanal<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Als <strong>de</strong> ontvangst goed is, hoeft u het kanaal niet ver<strong>de</strong>r af te stell<strong>en</strong> omdat dat tij<strong>de</strong>ns het zoek<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> opslaan automatisch<br />
is gebeurd. Is het signaal echter zwak of vervormd, dan kunt u het kanaal handmatig fijner afstemm<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Opgeslag<strong>en</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> die handmatig fijner zijn afgesteld, zijn gemarkeerd met e<strong>en</strong> asterisk “*” rechts van het<br />
kanaalnummer in <strong>de</strong> kanaalbalk.<br />
Als u het fijner afgestem<strong>de</strong> kanaal niet opslaat in het geheug<strong>en</strong>, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> aanpassing<strong>en</strong> niet opgeslag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Wanneer u <strong>de</strong> fijnafstemming wilt resett<strong>en</strong>, selecteert u Reset door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▼ te drukk<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets<br />
ENTERE te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 14
Kanal<strong>en</strong> beher<strong>en</strong><br />
Met dit m<strong>en</strong>u kun u favoriet<strong>en</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> toevoeg<strong>en</strong> of verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />
programmagids voor digitale uitz<strong>en</strong>ding<strong>en</strong> gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Selecteer e<strong>en</strong> kanaal in het scherm Alle kanal<strong>en</strong>, Toegevoeg<strong>de</strong><br />
kanal<strong>en</strong>, Voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong> of Geprogrammeerd door op <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong><br />
▲ of ▼<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Alle kanal<strong>en</strong>: toont alle mom<strong>en</strong>teel beschikbare kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Toegev. kan.: toont alle toegevoeg<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong>: toont alle favoriete kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Geprogrammeerd: toont alle mom<strong>en</strong>teel gereserveer<strong>de</strong> programma’s.<br />
N De gekleur<strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> Channel List gebruik<strong>en</strong><br />
- Rood (Type kanaal): schakel tuss<strong>en</strong> uw TV, Radio, Data/overig <strong>en</strong> All.<br />
- Gro<strong>en</strong> (Zoom): vergroot of verkleint e<strong>en</strong> kanaalnummer.<br />
- Geel (Keuze): selecteert meer<strong>de</strong>re kanaallijst<strong>en</strong>.<br />
-<br />
TTOOLS (Optie): het m<strong>en</strong>u Verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> (of Toevoeg<strong>en</strong>), Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> als<br />
Favoriet (of Verw. uit Favoriet<strong>en</strong>), Timer-weergave, Kanaalnaam bewerk<strong>en</strong>,<br />
Kanaalnummer wijzig<strong>en</strong>, Sorter<strong>en</strong>, Vergr<strong>en</strong>d. (of Slot uit), Alles select. (of<br />
Niets select.) of Automatisch opslaan wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(De optiem<strong>en</strong>u’s kunn<strong>en</strong> verschill<strong>en</strong>, afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> situatie.)<br />
Kanaal<br />
Toegevoeg<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong><br />
<br />
Minigids<br />
Standaardgids : Nu/Volg<strong>en</strong>d<br />
Kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst<br />
Kanaalmodus : Toegev. Kanal<strong>en</strong><br />
Fijnafstemming<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Alles • Type kanaal • Zoom • Keuze Optie<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Pictogramm<strong>en</strong> kanaalstatus wor<strong>de</strong>n weergegev<strong>en</strong><br />
A E<strong>en</strong> analoog kanaal. c Selecteer e<strong>en</strong> kanaal door op <strong>de</strong> gele knop te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
♥ E<strong>en</strong> kanaal als favoriet instell<strong>en</strong>. ( E<strong>en</strong> programma dat mom<strong>en</strong>teel wordt uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
\ E<strong>en</strong> vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ld kanaal. ) E<strong>en</strong> gereserveerd programma<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing op CH LIST om <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst<strong>en</strong> weer te<br />
gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Optiem<strong>en</strong>u kanaallijst (in All Channels / Toegevoeg<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> / Voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Tools (Extra) weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>uopties kunn<strong>en</strong>, afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> kanaalstatus, verschill<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> / Verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong><br />
U kunt e<strong>en</strong> kanaal toevoeg<strong>en</strong> of verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> uit <strong>de</strong> weergave van <strong>de</strong> door u<br />
gew<strong>en</strong>ste kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Alle verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n getoond op het m<strong>en</strong>u Alle kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
E<strong>en</strong> grijs gekleurd kanaal geeft aan dat het kanaal is verwij<strong>de</strong>rd.<br />
Het m<strong>en</strong>u Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> verschijnt alle<strong>en</strong> bij verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt ook op <strong>de</strong>zelf<strong>de</strong> manier e<strong>en</strong> kanaal verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> uit het m<strong>en</strong>u Toegev.<br />
kan. of Voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> als Favoriet / Verw. uit Favoriet<strong>en</strong><br />
U kunt kanal<strong>en</strong> die u veelvuldig bekijkt, instell<strong>en</strong> als favoriet<strong>en</strong>.<br />
T Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong> ook instell<strong>en</strong> door Extra → Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> aan Favoriet/ Verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> uit Favoriet<strong>en</strong> te<br />
selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Het symbool “♥” wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> het kanaal wordt ingesteld als favoriet.<br />
Alle favoriete kanal<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n getoond op het m<strong>en</strong>u Voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
To select the Favourite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button<br />
on the remote control.<br />
Alle kanal<strong>en</strong><br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong><br />
Toevoeg<strong>en</strong> als Favoriet<br />
Timerweergave<br />
Kanaalnummer wijzig<strong>en</strong><br />
Sorter<strong>en</strong><br />
Vergr<strong>en</strong>d.<br />
▼<br />
Alles • Type kanaal • Zoom • Keuze Optie<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 15<br />
Wordt vervolgd...
• Timer-weergave<br />
Wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> programma dat u wilt bekijk<strong>en</strong>, reserveert, schakelt het kanaal automatisch naar het gereserveer<strong>de</strong><br />
kanaal in <strong>de</strong> kanaallijst, zelfs wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> naar e<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>r kanaal kijkt. Stel eerst <strong>de</strong> huidige tijd in<br />
om e<strong>en</strong> programma te reserver<strong>en</strong>. (Zie pagina 24.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Alle<strong>en</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> in het geheug<strong>en</strong> kunn<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n gereserveerd.<br />
U kunt maand (month), dag (day), jaar (year), uur (hour) of minuut (minute) ook rechtstreeks met <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong><br />
afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
E<strong>en</strong> programma reserver<strong>en</strong> wordt getoond op het m<strong>en</strong>u Geprogrammeerd.<br />
Digitale programmagids <strong>en</strong> kijkreservering<br />
Wanneer e<strong>en</strong> digitaal kanaal is geselecteerd <strong>en</strong> u op <strong>de</strong> toets ► drukt, verschijnt <strong>de</strong> programmagids voor het kanaal.<br />
U kunt e<strong>en</strong> programma reserver<strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong>s <strong>de</strong> hierbov<strong>en</strong> beschrev<strong>en</strong> procedures.<br />
• Kanaalnaam bewerk<strong>en</strong> (alle<strong>en</strong> analoog kanaal)<br />
Kanal<strong>en</strong> kunn<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n voorzi<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> aanduiding, zodat <strong>de</strong> correspon<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> letters verschijn<strong>en</strong> wanneer<br />
het kanaal wordt geselecteerd.<br />
N<br />
De nam<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> digitale z<strong>en</strong>dkanal<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n automatisch toegewez<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> kunn<strong>en</strong> niet wor<strong>de</strong>n voorzi<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong><br />
aanduiding.<br />
• Kanaalnummer wijzig<strong>en</strong> (alle<strong>en</strong> digitaal kanaal)<br />
U kunt het kanaalnummer ook bewerk<strong>en</strong> door op <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Sorter<strong>en</strong> (alle<strong>en</strong> analoog kanaal)<br />
Hiermee kunt u <strong>de</strong> programmanummers van <strong>de</strong> opgeslag<strong>en</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> wijzig<strong>en</strong>. Deze bewerking kan nodig zijn na<br />
gebruik van <strong>de</strong> functie kanal<strong>en</strong> automatisch opslaan.<br />
• Vergr<strong>en</strong>d. / Slot uit<br />
U kunt e<strong>en</strong> kanaal vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong>, zodat het kanaal niet geselecteerd <strong>en</strong> bekek<strong>en</strong> kan wor<strong>de</strong>n. Deze functie is alle<strong>en</strong><br />
beschikbaar wanneer Kin<strong>de</strong>rslot is ingesteld naar Aan. (zie pagina 22)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Het invoerscherm voor <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> verschijnt. Voer uw viercijferige pinco<strong>de</strong> in.<br />
De standaardpinco<strong>de</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> nieuw tv-toestel is 0-0-0-0. U kunt <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> wijzig<strong>en</strong> door PIN wijzig<strong>en</strong> uit het m<strong>en</strong>u te<br />
selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Het symbool “\” wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> het kanaal wordt vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ld.<br />
• Alles kiez<strong>en</strong> / Niks selecter<strong>en</strong><br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Alles kiez<strong>en</strong>: U kunt alle kanal<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Niks selecter<strong>en</strong>: U kunt <strong>de</strong> selectie van alle geselecteer<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> ongedaan mak<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> functies add / Verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>, add to Voorkeurskanal<strong>en</strong> / Verw. uit Favoriet<strong>en</strong>, or Vergr<strong>en</strong>d. / Slot uit function<br />
tegelijkertijd voor meer<strong>de</strong>re kanal<strong>en</strong> uitvoer<strong>en</strong>. Selecteer <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste kanal<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk op <strong>de</strong> gele toets om alle<br />
geselecteer<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong> tegelijkertijd te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Het symbool c verschijnt links van <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt alle<strong>en</strong> Niks selecter<strong>en</strong> selecter<strong>en</strong> wanneer er e<strong>en</strong> kanaal is geselecteerd.<br />
• Automatisch opslaan<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Zie pagina 12 voor meer informatie over het instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Wanneer e<strong>en</strong> kanaal is vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ld door <strong>de</strong> functie Kin<strong>de</strong>rslot, verschijnt het pininvoerscherm.<br />
❑<br />
Optiem<strong>en</strong>u voor kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst (in Geprogrammeerd)<br />
U kunt e<strong>en</strong> reservering bekijk<strong>en</strong>, bewerk<strong>en</strong> of verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Info wijzig<strong>en</strong>: Selecter<strong>en</strong> om e<strong>en</strong> reservering te bekijk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Progr. annuler<strong>en</strong>: selecter<strong>en</strong> om e<strong>en</strong> reservering te annuler<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Informatie: selecter<strong>en</strong> om e<strong>en</strong> kijkreservering weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(U kunt <strong>de</strong> reserveringsinformatie ook wijzig<strong>en</strong>.)<br />
• Alles select. / Niets select.: Alle gereserveer<strong>de</strong> programma’s selecter<strong>en</strong> of<br />
<strong>de</strong>selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Geprogrammeerd<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 Info TV1 wijzig<strong>en</strong> Quincy, M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Progr. annuler<strong>en</strong><br />
TV3 The Equalizer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Informatie<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Alles select.<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Alles • Zoom • Keuze Extra Informatie<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 16
Beeldbeheer<br />
De beeldinstelling<strong>en</strong> wijzig<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> herstell<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Modus<br />
U kunt het beeld selecter<strong>en</strong> dat het beste overe<strong>en</strong>komt met uw w<strong>en</strong>s<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Dynamisch: Selecteert e<strong>en</strong> HD-beeld (High Definition) voor lichte<br />
omgeving<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Standaard: Selecteert <strong>de</strong> optimale beeldweergave voor normale<br />
omgeving<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Film: Selecteert e<strong>en</strong> comfortabele beeldweergave voor donkere omgeving<strong>en</strong>.<br />
T Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> beeldmodus ook instell<strong>en</strong> door Extra → Beeldmodus te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Beeld<br />
Modus : Standaard ►<br />
Cel hel<strong>de</strong>rheid : 4<br />
Contrast : 95<br />
Hel<strong>de</strong>rheid : 45<br />
Scherpte : 50<br />
Kleur : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Cel hel<strong>de</strong>rheid / Contrast / Hel<strong>de</strong>rheid / Scherpte / Kleur / Tint<br />
(G/R)<br />
Uw tv heeft verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> instelmogelijkhe<strong>de</strong>n waarmee u <strong>de</strong> beeldkwaliteit kunt beher<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Cel hel<strong>de</strong>rheid: Hiermee past u <strong>de</strong> pixelhel<strong>de</strong>rheid aan.<br />
Contrast: Past het contrastniveau aan.<br />
Hel<strong>de</strong>rheid: Past het hel<strong>de</strong>rheidsniveau aan.<br />
Scherpte: Past <strong>de</strong> scherpte aan.<br />
Kleur: Past <strong>de</strong> kleurint<strong>en</strong>siteit van het beeld aan met <strong>de</strong> balk op het scherm.<br />
Tint (G/R): Hoe dichter <strong>de</strong> waar<strong>de</strong> bij 100 ligt, <strong>de</strong>s te int<strong>en</strong>ser <strong>de</strong> ro<strong>de</strong> kleur<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Selecteer e<strong>en</strong> beeldmodus die u het eerst wilt aanpass<strong>en</strong>. De aangepaste waar<strong>de</strong>n wor<strong>de</strong>n voor ie<strong>de</strong>re beeldmodus<br />
aangepast.<br />
Wanneer u wijziging<strong>en</strong> aanbr<strong>en</strong>gt bij Cel hel<strong>de</strong>rheid, Contrast, Hel<strong>de</strong>rheid, Scherpte, Kleur of Tint (G/R), wordt<br />
<strong>de</strong> OSD (On Scre<strong>en</strong> Display) di<strong>en</strong>overe<strong>en</strong>komstig aangepast.<br />
In <strong>de</strong> modus Analog TV, Ext., AV <strong>en</strong> S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o van het PAL-systeem kunt u <strong>de</strong> functie Tint niet gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De instelling<strong>en</strong> voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangeslot<strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> ingang op <strong>de</strong> tv kunn<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n aangepast<br />
<strong>en</strong> opgeslag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De hoeveelheid verbruikte <strong>en</strong>ergie kan sterk wor<strong>de</strong>n vermin<strong>de</strong>rd als <strong>de</strong> hel<strong>de</strong>rheid van het beeld wordt teruggebracht.<br />
Zo wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> algem<strong>en</strong>e verbruikskost<strong>en</strong> ook lager.<br />
Geavanceer<strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Bij <strong>de</strong>ze nieuwe <strong>Samsung</strong>-tv kunt zelfs meer precieze beeldinstelling<strong>en</strong><br />
mak<strong>en</strong> dan bij voorgaan<strong>de</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>ll<strong>en</strong>. Voor het aanpass<strong>en</strong> voor het ge<strong>de</strong>tailleerd<br />
instell<strong>en</strong> van het beeld, zie hieron<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
N Geavanceer<strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong> is beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> modus Standaard of<br />
Film.<br />
• Zwarttint<strong>en</strong> → Uit / Donker / Donker<strong>de</strong>r / Donkerste<br />
U kunt het zwartniveau op het scherm selecter<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> schermdiepte aan te<br />
pass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Dynamisch contrast → Uit / Laag / Mid<strong>de</strong>l / Hoog<br />
U kunt het schermcontrast aanpass<strong>en</strong> zodat u e<strong>en</strong> optimaal contrast verkrijgt.<br />
• Gamma<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> int<strong>en</strong>siteit van <strong>de</strong> primaire kleur<strong>en</strong> aanpass<strong>en</strong> (rood, gro<strong>en</strong>, blauw).<br />
• Kleurruimte<br />
Color Space is e<strong>en</strong> kleur<strong>en</strong>matrix opgebouwd uit rood, gro<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> blauw. Selecteer <strong>de</strong> Color Space van uw voorkeur om<br />
e<strong>en</strong> zo natuurgetrouw mogelijke kleurweergave te verkrijg<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Auto: hiermee wordt automatisch het kleurbereik ingesteld op basis van <strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>o-ingangsbron.<br />
• Eig<strong>en</strong>: selecteert e<strong>en</strong> kleurbereik dat bre<strong>de</strong>r is dan het bereik van <strong>de</strong> invoervi<strong>de</strong>obron.<br />
• Witbalans<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> kleurtemperatuur aanpass<strong>en</strong> voor natuurlijkere beeldkleur<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• R-basis / G-basis / B-basis / R-niveau / G-niveau / B-niveau: als u <strong>de</strong> waar<strong>de</strong> van <strong>de</strong> aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het<br />
aangepaste scherm vernieuwd.<br />
• Reset: <strong>de</strong> standaard witbalans herstell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Huidkleur<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> roze tint<strong>en</strong> vleeskleur<strong>en</strong> in het beeld b<strong>en</strong>adrukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Als u <strong>de</strong> waar<strong>de</strong> van <strong>de</strong> aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het aangepaste scherm vernieuwd.<br />
• Randverbetering → Uit / Aan<br />
U kunt ran<strong>de</strong>n van object<strong>en</strong> b<strong>en</strong>adrukk<strong>en</strong> in het beeld.<br />
Beeld<br />
Kleur : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
Geavanceer<strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Afbeeldingsopties<br />
Beeld resett<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 17
❑<br />
Afbeeldingsopties<br />
• Kleur tint → Koel / Normaal / arm Warm / arm Warm2<br />
U kunt kiez<strong>en</strong> welke kleurtint u het prettigst vindt.<br />
N De aangepaste waar<strong>de</strong>n wor<strong>de</strong>n opgeslag<strong>en</strong> overe<strong>en</strong>komstig <strong>de</strong><br />
geselecteer<strong>de</strong> modus Beeld.<br />
N Warm1 of Warm2 is alle<strong>en</strong> ingeschakeld in <strong>de</strong> modus Film.<br />
• Formaat<br />
U kunt het beeldformaat selecter<strong>en</strong> dat het beste overe<strong>en</strong>komt met uw<br />
w<strong>en</strong>s<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Auto-breed: Hier stelt u automatisch breed in.<br />
16:9: Stelt het beeld in op <strong>de</strong> beeldverhouding 16:9.<br />
Breedbeeldzoom: Selecteer dit m<strong>en</strong>u als u 4:3-beel<strong>de</strong>n wilt bekijk<strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> breedbeeld-TV door het 4:3-beeld verticaal uit<br />
te rekk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Zoom: Rekt het 16:9-beeld verticaal uit.<br />
4:3: Stelt het beeld in op <strong>de</strong> beeldverhouding 4:3.<br />
Volledig scherm: het volledige eig<strong>en</strong> HD-signaal dat niet kan wor<strong>de</strong>n weergegev<strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> normale tv.<br />
De opties voor het beeldformaat kunn<strong>en</strong> variër<strong>en</strong> afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> ingangsbron.<br />
N De beschikbare on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong> kunn<strong>en</strong>, afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> modus, verschill<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
De instelling<strong>en</strong> voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangeslot<strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> ingang op <strong>de</strong> tv, kunn<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n aangepast <strong>en</strong><br />
opgeslag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Er kan tij<strong>de</strong>lijke beeldret<strong>en</strong>tie optre<strong>de</strong>n wanneer er langer dan twee uur e<strong>en</strong> statisch beeld op <strong>de</strong> tv wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Breedbeeldzoom: Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ► om Positie te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE . Gebruik <strong>de</strong><br />
toets ▲ of ▼ om het beeld naar bov<strong>en</strong> of b<strong>en</strong>e<strong>de</strong>n te verplaats<strong>en</strong>. Druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
Zoom: Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ► om Positie te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE . Gebruik <strong>de</strong> toets<br />
▲ of ▼ om het beeld naar bov<strong>en</strong> of b<strong>en</strong>e<strong>de</strong>n te verplaats<strong>en</strong>. Druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE . Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ►<br />
om Formaat te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE . Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ om het beeldformaat in<br />
verticale richting te vergrot<strong>en</strong> of te verklein<strong>en</strong>. Druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE .<br />
Na het selecter<strong>en</strong> van Volledig scherm in <strong>de</strong> modus HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Compon<strong>en</strong>t (1080i / 1080p): selecteer<br />
Positie door op <strong>de</strong> toets ◄ of ►te drukk<strong>en</strong>. Gebruik <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> ▲, ▼, ◄ of ► om <strong>de</strong> afbeelding te verplaats<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Reset: Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets ◄ of ► om Reset te selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE . U kunt <strong>de</strong> instelling<br />
initialiser<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Als u <strong>de</strong> functie Volledig scherm gebruikt met e<strong>en</strong> ingangssignaal HDMI 720p, wordt 1 ka<strong>de</strong>rlijn verwij<strong>de</strong>rd aan <strong>de</strong><br />
bov<strong>en</strong>kant, on<strong>de</strong>rkant, linkerkant <strong>en</strong> rechterkant zoals in <strong>de</strong> functie Overscan.<br />
• Schermmodus<br />
Wanneer u het beeldformaat op e<strong>en</strong> tv met e<strong>en</strong> breedte van 16:9 instelt op Auto-breed kunt u het gew<strong>en</strong>ste<br />
beeldformaat instell<strong>en</strong> op 4:3 WSS (Wi<strong>de</strong> Scre<strong>en</strong> Service) of niets. Omdat er voor elk land in Europa e<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>r<br />
beeldformaat geldt, is <strong>de</strong>ze functie bedoeld om het juiste beeldformaat te kiez<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• 16:9: Stelt het beeld in op <strong>de</strong> beeldverhouding 16:9.<br />
• Breedbeeldzoom: Het beeldformaat wordt met meer dan 4:3 vergroot.<br />
• Zoom: Rekt het 16:9-beeld verticaal uit.<br />
• 4:3: Hiermee selecteert u 4:3.<br />
N Deze functie is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> modus Auto-breed.<br />
Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> modus Compon<strong>en</strong>t of HDMI.<br />
• Dig. ruisfilter → Uit / Laag / Mid<strong>de</strong>l / Hoog / Auto<br />
Als het ontvang<strong>en</strong> tv-signaal zwak is, kunt u <strong>de</strong> functie Digital Noise Reduction activer<strong>en</strong> om statische ruis <strong>en</strong><br />
echobeel<strong>de</strong>n die mogelijk op het scherm verschijn<strong>en</strong>, te vermin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Als het signaal zwak is, selecteert u één van <strong>de</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re opties totdat <strong>de</strong> afbeelding het best wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• HDMI-zwartniveau → Normaal / Laag<br />
U kunt direct het zwartniveau op het scherm selecter<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> schermdiepte aan te pass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Deze functie is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar wanneer <strong>de</strong> externe ingang is verbon<strong>de</strong>n met HDMI (RGB-signal<strong>en</strong>).<br />
Beeld<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
Geavanceer<strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Afbeeldingsopties<br />
Beeld resett<strong>en</strong><br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 18<br />
Wordt vervolgd...
• Filmmodus<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> beeldmodus optimaliser<strong>en</strong> voor het weergev<strong>en</strong> van films.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Uit : De vi<strong>de</strong>obeel<strong>de</strong>n wor<strong>de</strong>n normaal verwerkt <strong>en</strong> films wor<strong>de</strong>n niet automatisch herk<strong>en</strong>d.<br />
Auto: Het beeld wordt automatisch aangepast aan <strong>de</strong> beste kwaliteit voor het weergev<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> film.<br />
• Bescherming teg<strong>en</strong> inbran<strong>de</strong>n<br />
Hiermee stelt u <strong>de</strong> opties voor <strong>de</strong> beveiliging teg<strong>en</strong> het inbran<strong>de</strong>n van het scherm in om te voorkom<strong>en</strong> dat pixels inbran<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Wanneer e<strong>en</strong> beeld te lang op <strong>de</strong>zelf<strong>de</strong> positie blijft, kan het perman<strong>en</strong>t inbran<strong>de</strong>n op het scherm.<br />
• Pixelverschuiv.: Om het risico van het inbran<strong>de</strong>n van het scherm te verklein<strong>en</strong> is dit apparaat uitgerust met technologie<br />
voor inbrandprev<strong>en</strong>tie. Met <strong>de</strong>ze technologie kunt u <strong>de</strong> beweging van het beeld op <strong>en</strong> neer (Verticaal) <strong>en</strong> van links naar<br />
rechts (Horizontaal) instell<strong>en</strong>. Met <strong>de</strong> tijdsinstelling kunt u <strong>de</strong> tijd tuss<strong>en</strong> het beweg<strong>en</strong> van het beeld programmer<strong>en</strong> in<br />
minut<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Druk op ▲ of ▼ om Pixelverschuiv. aan te zett<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE.<br />
Selecteer <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste keuze door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ te drukk<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> druk vervolg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> toets ENTERE.<br />
Beschikbare opties: Horizontaal, Verticaal, Tijd.<br />
Optimale instelling<strong>en</strong> voor pixelverschuiving<br />
On<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>el<br />
TV/Ext/AV/Compon<strong>en</strong>t/HDMI<br />
Horizontaal 0~4 2<br />
Verticaal 0~4 2<br />
Tijd (min) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
N De waar<strong>de</strong> voor Pixel Shift kan verschill<strong>en</strong> afhankelijk van het formaat (inches) <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> modus van <strong>de</strong> monitor.<br />
N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> modus Volledig scherm.<br />
• Schuiv<strong>en</strong>: Deze functie helpt ingebran<strong>de</strong> beel<strong>de</strong>n op het scherm te verwij<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> door <strong>de</strong> pixels op uw plasmascherm in e<strong>en</strong><br />
bepaald patroon te verschuiv<strong>en</strong>. Gebruik <strong>de</strong>ze functie wanneer er beel<strong>de</strong>n of symbol<strong>en</strong> op uw scherm achterblijv<strong>en</strong>, vooral<br />
na het langere tijd weergev<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> stilstaand beeld op uw scherm.<br />
• Grijswaar<strong>de</strong>n balk<strong>en</strong>: Wanneer u tv kijkt met <strong>de</strong> schermverhouding 4:3, wordt voorkom<strong>en</strong> dat het scherm beschadigd<br />
raakt door <strong>de</strong> witbalans geheel links <strong>en</strong> rechts aan te pass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
- Verduister<strong>en</strong>: Wanneer u <strong>de</strong> schermratio op 4:3 instelt, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> linker- <strong>en</strong> rechterkant donker<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
- Verhel<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>: Wanneer u <strong>de</strong> schermratio op 4:3 instelt, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> linker- <strong>en</strong> rechterkant hel<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
❑<br />
Beeldresett<strong>en</strong> → Beeldmodusresett<strong>en</strong> / Annuler<strong>en</strong><br />
Hiermee reset u alle fabrieksinstelling<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Selecteer e<strong>en</strong> beeldmodus die u het eerst wilt aanpass<strong>en</strong>. Het resett<strong>en</strong> wordt<br />
voor elke beeldmodus uitgevoerd.<br />
Beeld<br />
Geavanceer<strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Afbeeldingsopties<br />
Beeld resett<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 19
Geluidsbeheer<br />
De geluidsstandaard wijzig<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Modus → Standaard / Muziek / Film / Hel<strong>de</strong>re spraak / Aangepast<br />
U kunt het geluidseffect selecter<strong>en</strong> dat het best overe<strong>en</strong>komt met <strong>de</strong><br />
beel<strong>de</strong>n die u bekijkt.<br />
T<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> beeldmodus ook instell<strong>en</strong> door Extra → Geluidmodus te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Toonregeling<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> geluidsinstelling<strong>en</strong> aanpass<strong>en</strong> aan uw persoonlijke voorkeur<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Modus: u kunt e<strong>en</strong> geluidsmodus selecter<strong>en</strong> die bij uw persoonlijke<br />
voorkeur<strong>en</strong> past.<br />
Balans: Regelt <strong>de</strong> balans tuss<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> linker- <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> rechterspeakers.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustm<strong>en</strong>t): Het niveau van verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> bandbreedtes<br />
aanpass<strong>en</strong><br />
Reset: standaardinstelling<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> equalizer resett<strong>en</strong>.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Uit / Aan<br />
SRS TruSurround HD is e<strong>en</strong> technologie waarin TruSurround, FOCUS <strong>en</strong> TruBass wordt gecombineerd.<br />
<br />
SRS TruSurround HD stelt u in staat om te g<strong>en</strong>iet<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> virtueel 5.1 Surround Sound via <strong>de</strong> twee luidsprekers van <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
Deze functie levert niet alle<strong>en</strong> e<strong>en</strong> volle, diepe bas, maar verbetert tev<strong>en</strong>s <strong>de</strong> resolutie van <strong>de</strong> hoge frequ<strong>en</strong>ties.<br />
N<br />
Als bij het weergev<strong>en</strong> van muziek op <strong>de</strong> tv het geluid abnormaal klinkt, past u <strong>de</strong> toonregeling <strong>en</strong> SRS TruSurround HD<br />
(Aan/Uit) aan.<br />
Geluid<br />
Modus : Aangepast ►<br />
Toonregeling<br />
SRS TruSurround HD<br />
: Uit<br />
Gesprok<strong>en</strong> taal : ----<br />
Geluidsformaat : ----<br />
Audiobeschrijving<br />
Auto Volume<br />
: Uit<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS and symbol zijn han<strong>de</strong>lsmerk<strong>en</strong> van SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
TruSurround HD technologie valt on<strong>de</strong>r lic<strong>en</strong>tie van SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Gesprok<strong>en</strong> taal (alle<strong>en</strong> digitale kanal<strong>en</strong>)<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> standaardtaal voor on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling, audio <strong>en</strong> teletekst wijzig<strong>en</strong>. Hiermee geeft u <strong>de</strong> taalinformatie voor het<br />
inkom<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> signaal weer.<br />
N<br />
U kunt alle<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> taal uit <strong>de</strong> tal<strong>en</strong> waarin wordt uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n, selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Geluidsformaat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (alle<strong>en</strong> digitale kanal<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Wanneer <strong>de</strong> hoofdluidspreker <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> audio-ontvanger bei<strong>de</strong> geluid voortbr<strong>en</strong>g<strong>en</strong>, kan er echo optre<strong>de</strong>n omdat<br />
geluid in <strong>de</strong> hoofdluidspreker <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> audio-ontvanger niet op gelijke snelheid wordt ge<strong>de</strong>co<strong>de</strong>erd. Gebruik in dat<br />
geval <strong>de</strong> functie TV Speaker.<br />
N<br />
U kunt alle<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> taal uit <strong>de</strong> tal<strong>en</strong> waarin wordt uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n, selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Geproduceerd on<strong>de</strong>r lic<strong>en</strong>tie van Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby <strong>en</strong> het symbool met <strong>de</strong> dubbele D zijn han<strong>de</strong>lsmerk<strong>en</strong> van Dolby Laboratories.<br />
❑<br />
Audiobeschrijving (alle<strong>en</strong> digitale kanal<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Dit is e<strong>en</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rsteun<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> geluidsfunctie die e<strong>en</strong> aanvull<strong>en</strong>d geluidsspoor laat hor<strong>en</strong> voor blin<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> slechtzi<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Deze functie verwerkt het geluidsspoor (Audio Stream) voor <strong>de</strong> AD (Audio Description), wanneer dat sam<strong>en</strong><br />
met het hoofdgeluid (Main audio) wordt uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n. Gebruikers kunn<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> Audio Description (geluidsbeschrijving)<br />
Aan of Uit zett<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> het volume bepal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
O U kunt <strong>de</strong>ze opties selecter<strong>en</strong> door simpelweg op <strong>de</strong> toets AD van<br />
<strong>de</strong>afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing te drukk<strong>en</strong><br />
• Audiobeschrijving → Uit / Aan<br />
De geluidsbeschrijving aan-of uitzett<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Volume<br />
U kunt het volume van <strong>de</strong> geluidsbeschrijving aanpass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
Volume is actief wanneer Audiobeschrijving is ingesteld op Aan.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 20<br />
Wordt vervolgd...
❑<br />
❑<br />
Auto Volume → Uit / Aan<br />
Elk z<strong>en</strong>dstation k<strong>en</strong>t an<strong>de</strong>re signaalk<strong>en</strong>merk<strong>en</strong>, waardoor het lastig kan zijn het volume steeds opnieuw in te stell<strong>en</strong><br />
wanneer u van kanaal veran<strong>de</strong>rt. Met <strong>de</strong>ze functie kunt u het volume van het gew<strong>en</strong>ste kanaal automatisch<br />
lat<strong>en</strong> instell<strong>en</strong>. Bij e<strong>en</strong> hoog modulatiesignaal wordt <strong>de</strong> geluidsweergave verlaagd <strong>en</strong> bij e<strong>en</strong> laag modulatiesignaal<br />
wordt <strong>de</strong> geluidsweergave verhoogd.<br />
Luidspreker selecter<strong>en</strong> → Ext. luidspreker / TV-luidspreker<br />
Indi<strong>en</strong> u het geluid door aparte luidsprekers wilt hor<strong>en</strong>, schakelt u <strong>de</strong> interne versterker uit.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
De toets<strong>en</strong> – +, M MUTE werk<strong>en</strong> niet wanneer Luidspreker selecter<strong>en</strong> is uitgeschakeld Ext. luidspreker.<br />
Wanneer u Ext. luidspreker selecteert in het m<strong>en</strong>u Luidspreker selecter<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> geluidsinstelling<strong>en</strong> beperkt.<br />
Interne luidsprekers TV<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Audio-uitgang (optisch, L / R -uitgang) naar<br />
geluidssysteem<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Tv-luidspreker Luidsprekers Luidsprekers<br />
Ext. luidspreker On<strong>de</strong>rdrukk<strong>en</strong> Luidsprekers<br />
Ge<strong>en</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>osignaal On<strong>de</strong>rdrukk<strong>en</strong> On<strong>de</strong>rdrukk<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Geluid resett<strong>en</strong> → Alles resett<strong>en</strong> / Geluidsmodus resett<strong>en</strong> /<br />
Annuler<strong>en</strong><br />
u kunt <strong>de</strong> geluidsinstelling<strong>en</strong> resett<strong>en</strong> naar <strong>de</strong> fabrieksinstelling<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Geluid<br />
Auto Volume : Uit<br />
Luidspreker selecter<strong>en</strong> : TV-luidspreker<br />
Geluid resett<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
De geluidsmodus selecter<strong>en</strong><br />
Wanneer u <strong>de</strong> optie Dual l ll instelt, wordt <strong>de</strong> huidige geluidsmodus op het scherm weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Type uitz<strong>en</strong>ding<br />
Aanduiding op scherm<br />
Normale uitz<strong>en</strong>ding<br />
(Standaardgeluid)<br />
Mono (normaal gebruik)<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Normale <strong>en</strong> NICAM Mono<br />
NICAM-Stereo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normaal)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normaal)<br />
NICAM Dual-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normaal)<br />
A2<br />
Stereo<br />
Normale uitz<strong>en</strong>ding<br />
(Standaardgeluid)<br />
Mono (normaal gebruik)<br />
Tweetalig of DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Geforceerd mono)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Wanneer het stereosignaal te zwak is <strong>en</strong> er automatische z<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rverdringing optreedt, kunt u beter naar mono<br />
overschakel<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Deze functie wordt alle<strong>en</strong> geactiveerd in stereogeluidssignaal. Het wordt ge<strong>de</strong>activeerd in monogeluidssignaal.<br />
Deze functie is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> TV-modus.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 21
Beschrijving van <strong>de</strong> functies<br />
Het instelling<strong>en</strong>m<strong>en</strong>u gebruik<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Taalkeuze<br />
U kunt het m<strong>en</strong>u taal instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• On<strong>de</strong>rtiteling<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling activer<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>activer<strong>en</strong>. Gebruik dit m<strong>en</strong>u om <strong>de</strong><br />
modus Subtitle in te stell<strong>en</strong>. Normaal in dit m<strong>en</strong>u is basison<strong>de</strong>rtiteling <strong>en</strong><br />
Slechthor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n is on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling voor dov<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> slechthor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• On<strong>de</strong>rtiteling → Aan / Uit: Schakelt on<strong>de</strong>rtitels aan of uit.<br />
• Modus → Normaal / Slechthor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n: stelt <strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rtitelingsmodus in.<br />
• On<strong>de</strong>rtitelingstaal: stelt <strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rtitelingstaal in.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Wanneer u naar e<strong>en</strong> programma kijkt dat <strong>de</strong> functie Slechthor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n niet<br />
on<strong>de</strong>rsteunt, wordt Normaal automatisch geactiveerd, zelfs wanneer <strong>de</strong> modus Slechthor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n is geselecteerd.<br />
Engels is <strong>de</strong> standaardtaal als <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> taal niet beschikbaar is in <strong>de</strong><br />
uitz<strong>en</strong>ding.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong>ze opties e<strong>en</strong>voudig selecter<strong>en</strong> door op <strong>de</strong> toets SUBT. op <strong>de</strong><br />
afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Digitale tekst → Deactiver<strong>en</strong> / Activer<strong>en</strong><br />
Als het programma wordt uitgezon<strong>de</strong>n met digitale tekst, is <strong>de</strong>ze functie ingeschakeld.<br />
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
E<strong>en</strong> internationale standaard voor gegev<strong>en</strong>sco<strong>de</strong>ringssystem<strong>en</strong> die in multimedia <strong>en</strong> hypermedia wor<strong>de</strong>n<br />
gebruikt. Gegev<strong>en</strong>s wor<strong>de</strong>n geco<strong>de</strong>erd op e<strong>en</strong> hoger niveau dan het MPEG-systeem, waaron<strong>de</strong>r hypermedia<br />
voor gegev<strong>en</strong>skoppeling, zoals stilstaan<strong>de</strong> beel<strong>de</strong>n, tekstservice, animatie, beeld- <strong>en</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>obestan<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong><br />
multimediagegev<strong>en</strong>s. MHEG is e<strong>en</strong> technologie voor interactie met <strong>de</strong> gebruiker tij<strong>de</strong>ns runtime <strong>en</strong> wordt toegepast<br />
op verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> gebie<strong>de</strong>n, waaron<strong>de</strong>r VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o On Demand), ITV (interactieve tv), EC (e-commerce),<br />
afstandson<strong>de</strong>rwijs, telefonische verga<strong>de</strong>ring<strong>en</strong>, digitale bibliothek<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> netwerkspell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Teleteksttaal<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> taal voor teletekst instell<strong>en</strong> door <strong>de</strong>ze te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Engels is <strong>de</strong> standaardtaal als <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong> taal niet beschikbaar is in <strong>de</strong> uitz<strong>en</strong>ding.<br />
• Voorkeur<br />
• Eerste taal voor audio / Twee<strong>de</strong> taal voor audio / On<strong>de</strong>rtitelingstaal / Twee<strong>de</strong> taal on<strong>de</strong>rtitel / Eerste taal teletekst /<br />
Twee<strong>de</strong> taal teletekst<br />
Met <strong>de</strong>ze functie kunn<strong>en</strong> gebruikers e<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> tal<strong>en</strong> selecter<strong>en</strong>. De geselecteer<strong>de</strong> taal wordt standaard gebruikt wanneer<br />
u e<strong>en</strong> kanaal selecteert.<br />
Als u <strong>de</strong> taalinstelling wijzigt, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> Subtitle Language (taal voor on<strong>de</strong>rtiteling), Audio Language (<strong>de</strong> taal voor<br />
audio) <strong>en</strong> Teletext Language (<strong>de</strong> taal voor teletekst) in het m<strong>en</strong>u Language automatisch gewijzigd in <strong>de</strong> geselecteer<strong>de</strong><br />
taal.<br />
Met Subtitle Language, Audio Language <strong>en</strong> Teletext Language in het m<strong>en</strong>u Language geeft u e<strong>en</strong> lijst weer met tal<strong>en</strong><br />
die door het huidige kanaal wor<strong>de</strong>n on<strong>de</strong>rsteund. De geselecteer<strong>de</strong> taal is gemarkeerd. Als u <strong>de</strong>ze taalinstelling wijzigt,<br />
is <strong>de</strong> nieuwe selectie alle<strong>en</strong> geldig voor het huidige kanaal. De gewijzig<strong>de</strong> instelling is niet van invloed op <strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
voor Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language, of Primary Teletext Language van het m<strong>en</strong>u Prefer<strong>en</strong>ce.<br />
• Algem<strong>en</strong>e interface<br />
• De CI-kaart plaats<strong>en</strong><br />
1. De CI CAM-module kunt u verkrijg<strong>en</strong> bij uw lokale leverancier of door <strong>de</strong>ze<br />
telefonisch te bestell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
2. Duw <strong>de</strong> CI-kaart in <strong>de</strong> CAM in <strong>de</strong> richting van <strong>de</strong> pijl op zijn plaats.<br />
3. Plaats <strong>de</strong> CAM met <strong>de</strong> CI-kaart in <strong>de</strong> sleuf voor <strong>de</strong> algem<strong>en</strong>e interface.<br />
N Duw <strong>de</strong> CAM in <strong>de</strong> richting van <strong>de</strong> pijl volledig in <strong>de</strong> sleuf.<br />
4. Controleer of u e<strong>en</strong> beeld op e<strong>en</strong> kanaal met e<strong>en</strong> geco<strong>de</strong>erd signaal kunt<br />
bekijk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• CI-m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Hiermee kunt u het CAM-m<strong>en</strong>u selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Selecteer het CI M<strong>en</strong>u op basis van het m<strong>en</strong>u PC Card.<br />
• Toepassingsinfo<br />
Met <strong>de</strong>ze optie geeft u informatie over e<strong>en</strong> CAM in <strong>de</strong> CI-sleuf weer.<br />
Application Info heeft betrekking op <strong>de</strong> CI-kaart. U kunt <strong>de</strong> CAM altijd installer<strong>en</strong>, ongeacht of <strong>de</strong> tv is in- of uitgeschakeld.<br />
O<br />
CAM is not supported in some countries and regions,check with your authorized <strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
Instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
Taalkeuze : Ne<strong>de</strong>rland ►<br />
Tijd<br />
Uitz<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
Beveiliging<br />
Algeme<strong>en</strong><br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 22<br />
Wordt vervolgd...
❑<br />
Beveiliging<br />
• Kin<strong>de</strong>rslot → Uit / Aan<br />
Met <strong>de</strong>ze functie kunt u door mid<strong>de</strong>l van het uitschakel<strong>en</strong> van beeld <strong>en</strong> geluid voorkom<strong>en</strong> dat onbevoeg<strong>de</strong> gebruikers,<br />
zoals kin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>, ongepaste programma’s bekijk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
• Kin<strong>de</strong>rslot<br />
Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong>. Voer uw viercijferige pinco<strong>de</strong> in.<br />
De standaardpinco<strong>de</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> nieuw tv-toestel is '0-0-0-0'. U kunt <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> wijzig<strong>en</strong> door PIN wijzig<strong>en</strong> uit het m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt sommige kanal<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong>. (zie pagina 15)<br />
Kanal<strong>en</strong>lijst is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> tv-modus.<br />
Door e<strong>en</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> (persoonlijk i<strong>de</strong>ntificati<strong>en</strong>ummer) van vier cijfers in te stell<strong>en</strong>, kunt u met <strong>de</strong>ze functie voorkom<strong>en</strong> dat<br />
onbevoeg<strong>de</strong> gebruikers, zoals kin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>, ongeschikte programma’s bekijk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong>. Voer uw viercijferige pinco<strong>de</strong> in.<br />
N De standaardpinco<strong>de</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> nieuw tv-toestel is '0-0-0-0'. U kunt <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> wijzig<strong>en</strong> door PIN wijzig<strong>en</strong> uit het m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Wanneer <strong>de</strong> leeftijdsbeperking is ingesteld, wordt het symbool “\” weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Alles mag: Druk om alle tv-ratings (leeftijdsbeperking<strong>en</strong>) te ontgr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Alles blok: Druk om alle tv-ratings (leeftijdsbeperking<strong>en</strong>) te vergr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Pin wijzig<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
U kunt uw pinco<strong>de</strong> die voor het instell<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> tv is vereist, wijzig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong>. Voer uw viercijferige pinco<strong>de</strong> in.<br />
N De standaardpinco<strong>de</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> nieuw tv-toestel is '0-0-0-0'.<br />
N Als u <strong>de</strong> pinco<strong>de</strong> b<strong>en</strong>t verget<strong>en</strong>, drukt u achtere<strong>en</strong>volg<strong>en</strong>s op <strong>de</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing zodat <strong>de</strong><br />
pinco<strong>de</strong> opnieuw wordt ingesteld op '0-0-0-0': POWER (Uit), MMUTE, 8, 2, POWER (Aan).<br />
Algeme<strong>en</strong><br />
• Spelmodus → Uit / Aan<br />
Als u e<strong>en</strong> spelcomputer aansluit, zoals e<strong>en</strong> PlayStation TM of e<strong>en</strong> Xbox TM , kunt u het m<strong>en</strong>u Spelcomputer selecter<strong>en</strong> voor<br />
e<strong>en</strong> realistischere spelervaring.<br />
• Wanneer <strong>de</strong> Spelmodus is ingesteld op Aan<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
De beeldmodus Standaard wordt automatisch geselecteerd <strong>en</strong> kan niet wor<strong>de</strong>n gewijzigd.<br />
De geluidsmodus Aangepast wordt automatisch geselecteerd <strong>en</strong> kan niet wor<strong>de</strong>n gewijzigd. Pas het geluid aan met<br />
<strong>de</strong> equalizer.<br />
De optie Reset in het m<strong>en</strong>u Geluid wordt geactiveerd. De functie Reset herstelt <strong>de</strong> equalizerinstelling<strong>en</strong> naar <strong>de</strong><br />
fabrieksinstelling<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Spelmodus is niet beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> normale TV-modus of Spelmodus is ingesteld op Uit.<br />
Als het beeld slecht is wanneer er e<strong>en</strong> extern apparaat is aangeslot<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> tv, controleer dan of <strong>de</strong> spelmodus is<br />
ingeschakeld.<br />
Als u het m<strong>en</strong>u TV weergeeft in <strong>de</strong> Spelmodus, zal het beeld e<strong>en</strong> beetje trill<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De markering mark (<br />
geselecteer<strong>de</strong> bron.<br />
Deze functie on<strong>de</strong>rsteunt alle<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> spelfunctie.<br />
• Spaarstand<br />
) wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong> op het scherm. Dit betek<strong>en</strong>t dat Spelmodus is ingeschakeld voor <strong>de</strong><br />
Met <strong>de</strong>ze functie kunt u <strong>de</strong> hel<strong>de</strong>rheid van <strong>de</strong> tv aanpass<strong>en</strong> om het <strong>en</strong>ergieverbruik te vermin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong>. Wanneer u ‘s avonds tv<br />
kijkt, kunt u <strong>de</strong> modus Spaarstand op Hoog zett<strong>en</strong>. Zo kunt u <strong>de</strong> glinstering in uw og<strong>en</strong> teg<strong>en</strong>gaan <strong>en</strong> tev<strong>en</strong>s bespar<strong>en</strong> op<br />
het <strong>en</strong>ergieverbruik.<br />
Als u <strong>de</strong> optie Beeld uit selecteert, wordt het scherm uitgeschakeld <strong>en</strong> hoort u slechts het geluid. Druk op e<strong>en</strong> willekeurige<br />
toets om Beeld uit ongedaan te mak<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N Im M<strong>en</strong>ü Extras wird die Funktion Bild aus nicht unterstützt.<br />
T Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> beeldmodus ook instell<strong>en</strong> door Extra → Spaarstand te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Melodie → Uit / Laag / Mid<strong>de</strong>l / Hoog<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> in-/uitschakelingsmelodie van <strong>de</strong> tv aanpass<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N De melodie wordt niet afgespeeld.<br />
- Wanneer er ge<strong>en</strong> geluid wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>, omdat <strong>de</strong> toets MMUTE is ingedrukt.<br />
- Wanneer er ge<strong>en</strong> geluid wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>, omdat <strong>de</strong> toets – (Volume) is ingedrukt.<br />
- Wanneer <strong>de</strong> tv door <strong>de</strong> functie Slaaptimer is uitgeschakeld.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 23
Tijd instell<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Klok<br />
Het is noodzakelijk <strong>de</strong> klok in te stell<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> functies van<br />
<strong>de</strong> tv te kunn<strong>en</strong> gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
De huidige tijd wordt telk<strong>en</strong>s weergegev<strong>en</strong> wanneer u op <strong>de</strong> toets INFO drukt.<br />
Als u <strong>de</strong> voedingskabel hebt losgekoppeld, moet u <strong>de</strong> klok opnieuw instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Klokmodus<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> huidige tijd handmatig of automatisch instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Auto: hierdoor wordt <strong>de</strong> huidige tijd automatisch ingesteld door <strong>de</strong> tijd van <strong>de</strong><br />
digitale uitz<strong>en</strong>ding te gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Handmatig: hierdoor wordt <strong>de</strong> huidige tijd handmatig op e<strong>en</strong> bepaal<strong>de</strong> tijd<br />
ingesteld.<br />
• Klok instell<strong>en</strong><br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> huidige tijd handmatig instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Stel dit item in wanneer u Klokmodus op Handmatig heeft ingesteld.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> Data, Maand, Jaar, Uur, Min <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> minuut ook rechtstreeks met <strong>de</strong><br />
cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Instelling<strong>en</strong><br />
Plug & Play<br />
Taalkeuze<br />
: Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
Tijd<br />
►<br />
Uitz<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n<br />
Beveiliging<br />
Algeme<strong>en</strong><br />
Tijd<br />
Klok : -- : -- ►<br />
Slaaptimer<br />
: Uit<br />
Timer 1<br />
: Uit<br />
Timer 2<br />
: Uit<br />
Timer 3<br />
: Uit<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Slaaptimer → Uit / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 0 min / 50 min /<br />
180 min<br />
De functie sleep timer schakelt automatisch uit na e<strong>en</strong> van tevor<strong>en</strong><br />
ingestel<strong>de</strong> tijd.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
T<br />
De tv schakelt automatisch over op stand-by wanneer <strong>de</strong> timer 0 bereikt.<br />
Om <strong>de</strong> functie Slaaptimer te annuler<strong>en</strong>, selecteer Uit.<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TOOLS om het m<strong>en</strong>u Extra weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> beeldmodus ook instell<strong>en</strong> door Extra → Slaaptimer te selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3<br />
U kunt drie verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> timerinstelling<strong>en</strong> opgev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
U Verpl E Enter R Terug<br />
• Inschakeltijd: Het uur <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> minuut instell<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> activer<strong>en</strong> / <strong>de</strong>activer<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(Als u <strong>de</strong> timer met <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste instelling wilt activer<strong>en</strong>, kiest u Activer<strong>en</strong>.)<br />
• Uitschakeltijd: Het uur <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> minuut instell<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> activer<strong>en</strong> / <strong>de</strong>activer<strong>en</strong>.<br />
(Als u <strong>de</strong> timer met <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste instelling wilt activer<strong>en</strong>, kiest u Activer<strong>en</strong>.)<br />
• Volume: selecteer het gew<strong>en</strong>ste geluidsvolume.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>ne: wanneer <strong>de</strong> televisie automatisch wordt ingeschakeld kunt u kiez<strong>en</strong> tuss<strong>en</strong> DTV of ATV.<br />
• Kanaal: Selecteer het gew<strong>en</strong>ste kanaal.<br />
• Herhal<strong>en</strong>: Selecteer E<strong>en</strong>maal, Dagelijks, Ma~Vr, Ma ~ Za, Za ~ Zo, of Handmatig.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Wanneer Handmatig is geselecteerd, kunt u op <strong>de</strong> toets ► drukk<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste dag te selecter<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets<br />
ENTERE op <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste dag <strong>en</strong> het c-symbool verschijnt.<br />
U moet eerst <strong>de</strong> klok instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> ur<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> minut<strong>en</strong> ook rechtstreeks met <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing instell<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Automatisch uitschakel<strong>en</strong><br />
Als u <strong>de</strong> timer instelt op On instelt, schakelt <strong>de</strong> televisie uitein<strong>de</strong>lijk uit wanneer binn<strong>en</strong> 3 uur na het automatisch<br />
inschakel<strong>en</strong> van het toestel ge<strong>en</strong> knop wordt ingedrukt. Deze functie is alle<strong>en</strong> beschikbaar in <strong>de</strong> timermodus Aan.<br />
Met <strong>de</strong>ze functie wordt oververhitting teg<strong>en</strong>gegaan, wat kan gebeur<strong>en</strong> als het toestel te lang ingeschakeld blijft<br />
staan.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 24
Bronlijst / Naam wijzig<strong>en</strong><br />
❑ Bronlijst<br />
Hiermee kunt u <strong>de</strong> tv of an<strong>de</strong>re externe ingangsbronn<strong>en</strong> zoals dvd-spelers,<br />
aftakdoz<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> satellietontvangers die aangeslot<strong>en</strong> zijn op <strong>de</strong> tv, selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Hiermee kunt u <strong>de</strong> ingangsbron van uw keuze selecter<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI.<br />
N U kunt alle<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> externe apparat<strong>en</strong> selecter<strong>en</strong> die op <strong>de</strong> tv zijn aangeslot<strong>en</strong>. In<br />
<strong>de</strong> Bronlijst wor<strong>de</strong>n aangeslot<strong>en</strong> ingang<strong>en</strong> gemarkeerd <strong>en</strong> bov<strong>en</strong>aan <strong>de</strong> lijst<br />
geplaatst. Ingang<strong>en</strong> die niet zijn aangeslot<strong>en</strong>, wor<strong>de</strong>n on<strong>de</strong>raan <strong>de</strong> lijst geplaatst.<br />
N De kleur<strong>en</strong>toets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing met <strong>de</strong> Bronlijst gebruik<strong>en</strong><br />
- TTOOLS (Optie): geeft <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>u’s Naam wijzig<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> Informatie weer.<br />
O Druk <strong>de</strong> toets SOURCE op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing in om e<strong>en</strong> externe<br />
signaalbron weer te gev<strong>en</strong>. De tv-modus kan wor<strong>de</strong>n geselecteerd door op <strong>de</strong><br />
toets TV te drukk<strong>en</strong>, op <strong>de</strong> cijfertoets<strong>en</strong> (0-9) te drukk<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> door op <strong>de</strong> toets<br />
P < / > op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Invoer<br />
Bronlijst<br />
Naam wijzig<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Naam wijzig<strong>en</strong><br />
U kunt het op <strong>de</strong> ingang<strong>en</strong> aangeslot<strong>en</strong> apparaat e<strong>en</strong> naam gev<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> selectie<br />
van <strong>de</strong> ingangsbron te vere<strong>en</strong>voudig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• VCR / DVD / VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satelliet STB / PVR STB / AV-ontvanger / Spelcomputer / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC /<br />
DVI PC / DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N Wanneer e<strong>en</strong> pc met <strong>de</strong> resolutie PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz is aangeslot<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> HDMI<br />
IN 2 (DVI)-poort, kunt u <strong>de</strong> modus HDMI IN 2 (DVI) instell<strong>en</strong> op PC in <strong>de</strong> modus Naam wijzig<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> modus Invoer.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 25
PC Display<br />
• Software configurer<strong>en</strong> (gebaseerd op Windows XP)<br />
Hieron<strong>de</strong>r ziet u <strong>de</strong> Windows-beeldscherminstelling<strong>en</strong> voor e<strong>en</strong><br />
standaardcomputer. De v<strong>en</strong>sters op uw computer kunn<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>igszins afwijk<strong>en</strong>,<br />
afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> versie van Windows <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> geïnstalleer<strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>okaart.<br />
Maar ook dan zijn in <strong>de</strong> meeste gevall<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>zelf<strong>de</strong> basisinstallatiegegev<strong>en</strong>s<br />
van toepassing. (Neem contact op met <strong>de</strong> computerfabrikant of <strong>Samsung</strong>leverancier<br />
als dit niet het geval is.)<br />
1. Klik eerst op het configuratiescherm in het m<strong>en</strong>u Start van Windows.<br />
2. Wanneer het v<strong>en</strong>ster configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Appearance and<br />
Themes’ om e<strong>en</strong> dialoogv<strong>en</strong>ster voor het beeldscherm te op<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong>.<br />
3. Wanneer het configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Weergave’ om<br />
e<strong>en</strong> dialoogv<strong>en</strong>ster voor het beeldscherm te op<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong>.<br />
4. Selecteer het tabblad “Instelling<strong>en</strong>” in het dialoogv<strong>en</strong>ster.<br />
Geef <strong>de</strong> juiste resolutie voor <strong>de</strong> monitor op<br />
Optimum : PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixels , PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixels<br />
Als het dialoogv<strong>en</strong>ster e<strong>en</strong> optie bevat voor het instell<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> verticale<br />
frequ<strong>en</strong>tie, is <strong>de</strong> juiste waar<strong>de</strong> “60” of “60 Hz”. Klik an<strong>de</strong>rs op ‘OK’ om het<br />
dialoogv<strong>en</strong>ster te sluit<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Weergavemodi<br />
Zowel <strong>de</strong> beeldpositie als <strong>de</strong> -grootte varieert afhankelijk van het type monitor <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> bijbehor<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> resolutie.<br />
De resoluties in <strong>de</strong> tabel wor<strong>de</strong>n aangera<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
• HDMI/DVI Input<br />
Modus<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
Resolutie<br />
Horizontale<br />
frequ<strong>en</strong>tie (kHz)<br />
Verticale frequ<strong>en</strong>tie<br />
(Hz)<br />
Pixel Clockfrequ<strong>en</strong>tie<br />
(MHz)<br />
Sync Polarity<br />
(H / V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
PS50B430<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
VESA<br />
DMT<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
VESA<br />
CVT<br />
VESA<br />
GTF<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
1280 x 720<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N Wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> HDMI / DVI-kabelverbinding gebruikt, di<strong>en</strong>t u <strong>de</strong> HDMI IN 2 (DVI)-aansluiting te gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N De interlace-modus wordt niet on<strong>de</strong>rsteund.<br />
N De tv werkt mogelijk niet normaal als e<strong>en</strong> afwijk<strong>en</strong>d vi<strong>de</strong>oformaat wordt geselecteerd.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 26
On<strong>de</strong>rsteund programma<br />
❑<br />
•<br />
❑<br />
Zelfdiagnose<br />
Het beeld test<strong>en</strong>, Het geluid test<strong>en</strong>, Signaalinformatie<br />
Als u e<strong>en</strong> probleem <strong>de</strong>nkt te hebb<strong>en</strong> met het beeld, geluid of signaal, voert u <strong>de</strong> test uit. U kunt <strong>de</strong> probleemstatus controler<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Als u ge<strong>en</strong> geluid hoort via <strong>de</strong> luidsprekers van <strong>de</strong> tv controleert u voordat u <strong>de</strong> geluidstest uitvoert of voor Luidspreker<br />
selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> optie TV-luidspreker is ingesteld in het m<strong>en</strong>u Geluid.<br />
De melodie wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong> tij<strong>de</strong>ns <strong>de</strong> test, zelfs als voor Luidspreker selecter<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> optie Ext. luidspreker is<br />
ingesteld of als er op <strong>de</strong> toets M MUTE is gedrukt om het geluid te <strong>de</strong>mp<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Als <strong>de</strong> signaalsterktemeter aangeeft dat het signaal zwak is, verstelt u uw ant<strong>en</strong>ne handmatig om <strong>de</strong> signaalsterkte te<br />
versterk<strong>en</strong>. Blijf <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>ne bijstell<strong>en</strong> totdat u <strong>de</strong> positie vindt met <strong>de</strong> sterkste signaal.<br />
Software upgra<strong>de</strong><br />
Er wor<strong>de</strong>n regelmatig software-upgra<strong>de</strong>s verzon<strong>de</strong>n met het normale televisiesignaal<br />
om uw product bij te werk<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> nieuwe mogelijkhe<strong>de</strong>n van digitale televisie. Deze signal<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n automatisch<br />
ge<strong>de</strong>tecteerd, waarna <strong>de</strong> balk voor software-upgra<strong>de</strong>s wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong>. U krijgt <strong>de</strong> optie om <strong>de</strong> upgra<strong>de</strong> te installer<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Via USB<br />
Plaats e<strong>en</strong> USB-geheug<strong>en</strong>schijf met <strong>de</strong> firmware-upgra<strong>de</strong> in <strong>de</strong> tv. Let op dat u tij<strong>de</strong>ns het<br />
toevoeg<strong>en</strong> van upgra<strong>de</strong>s het apparaat niet uitschakelt of <strong>de</strong> USB-geheug<strong>en</strong>schijf verwij<strong>de</strong>rt.<br />
Nadat <strong>de</strong> firmware-upgra<strong>de</strong> is voltooid, wordt <strong>de</strong> tv automatisch in- <strong>en</strong> uitgeschakeld.<br />
Controleer <strong>de</strong> firmwareversie nadat <strong>de</strong> upgra<strong>de</strong>s zijn voltooid. Zodra <strong>de</strong> software is<br />
bijgewerkt, wor<strong>de</strong>n standaard vi<strong>de</strong>o- <strong>en</strong> audio-instelling<strong>en</strong> (fabrieksinstelling<strong>en</strong>) hersteld.<br />
• Via kanaal<br />
Hiermee wordt <strong>de</strong> software bijgewerkt die gebruikmaakt van het uitz<strong>en</strong>dsignaal.<br />
• Upgra<strong>de</strong> standby-modus<br />
Selecteer Aan door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ te drukk<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> software-upgra<strong>de</strong> voort te zett<strong>en</strong> terwijl <strong>de</strong> stroom is ingeschakeld.<br />
45 minut<strong>en</strong> nadat <strong>de</strong> tv op stand-by is gezet, wordt automatisch e<strong>en</strong> handmatige upgra<strong>de</strong> uitgevoerd. Omdat <strong>de</strong> tv intern<br />
wordt ingeschakeld, kan dit resulter<strong>en</strong> in vage beel<strong>de</strong>n op <strong>de</strong> tv. Dit kan meer dan e<strong>en</strong> uur dur<strong>en</strong> totdat <strong>de</strong> software-upgra<strong>de</strong> is<br />
voltooid.<br />
• Alternatieve software<br />
Huidige software vervang<strong>en</strong> door alternatief.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Handleiding HD-verbinding<br />
Er wor<strong>de</strong>n beknopte instructies weergegev<strong>en</strong> Hoe u uw nieuwe HDTV optimaal b<strong>en</strong>ut haalt. We bie<strong>de</strong>n u <strong>de</strong><br />
verbindingsmetho<strong>de</strong> voor HD-apparat<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Contact opnem<strong>en</strong> met <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
U kunt contact opnem<strong>en</strong> met het callc<strong>en</strong>ter van <strong>Samsung</strong> of <strong>de</strong> website van <strong>Samsung</strong> raadpleg<strong>en</strong> voor meer informatie over<br />
het product.<br />
N U kunt naar <strong>de</strong> vorige of volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> pagina bla<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> door op <strong>de</strong> toets ▲ of ▼ te drukk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
USB-geheug<strong>en</strong>schijf<br />
Zijpaneel van tv<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 27
Aanbeveling<strong>en</strong> voor het gebruik<br />
Teletekstfunctie<br />
De meeste televisiekanal<strong>en</strong> bie<strong>de</strong>n tekstinformatiedi<strong>en</strong>st<strong>en</strong> via teletekst. Op <strong>de</strong> in<strong>de</strong>xpagina van <strong>de</strong> teletekstdi<strong>en</strong>st vindt<br />
u informatie over het gebruik van <strong>de</strong> di<strong>en</strong>st. Ook kunt u naar w<strong>en</strong>s verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> opties selecter<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong><br />
afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
N Voor e<strong>en</strong> juiste weergave van teletekstinformatie is e<strong>en</strong> stabiele kanaalontvangst vereist. An<strong>de</strong>rs kan bepaal<strong>de</strong> informatie<br />
ontbrek<strong>en</strong> of wor<strong>de</strong>n bepaal<strong>de</strong> pagina’s niet weergegev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
1 : (Sluit<strong>en</strong>)<br />
De teletekstweergave verlat<strong>en</strong><br />
<br />
2 6 (in<strong>de</strong>x)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets voor weergave van <strong>de</strong> in<strong>de</strong>xpagina (inhoudspagina) tij<strong>de</strong>ns het<br />
gebruik van teletekst.<br />
1<br />
3 5 (ton<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om verborg<strong>en</strong> tekst weer te gev<strong>en</strong> (bijvoorbeeld antwoor<strong>de</strong>n<br />
op quizvrag<strong>en</strong>). Druk nogmaals op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om terug te ker<strong>en</strong> naar <strong>de</strong> normale<br />
weergave.<br />
4 4 (formaat)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om <strong>de</strong> tekst in <strong>de</strong> bov<strong>en</strong>ste helft van het scherm op dubbel formaat<br />
weer te gev<strong>en</strong>. Druk nogmaals op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om <strong>de</strong> tekst in <strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rste helft<br />
van het scherm op dubbel formaat weer te gev<strong>en</strong>. Druk nogmaals op <strong>de</strong>ze knop om<br />
terug te ker<strong>en</strong> naar <strong>de</strong> normale weergave.<br />
5 8 (opslaan)<br />
Hiermee kunt u teletekstpagina’s opslaan.<br />
6 / (teletext aan/mix)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om teletekst te activer<strong>en</strong> nadat u het kanaal dat <strong>de</strong> teletekstdi<strong>en</strong>st<br />
aanbiedt, hebt geselecteerd. Druk tweemaal op <strong>de</strong>ze knop om het huidige<br />
televisiebeeld over <strong>de</strong> teletekstpagina he<strong>en</strong> weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
7 1 (subpagina)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om <strong>de</strong> beschikbare subpagina’s weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
8 2 (volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> pagina)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om <strong>de</strong> volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> teletekstpagina weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
9 3 (vorige pagina)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om <strong>de</strong> vorige teletekstpagina weer te gev<strong>en</strong>.<br />
0 0 (modus)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets om <strong>de</strong> teletekstmodus (LIST/FLOF) te selecter<strong>en</strong>. Als u in <strong>de</strong><br />
LIST-modus op <strong>de</strong>ze toets drukt, schakelt u over naar <strong>de</strong> modus Opslaan in lijst. In<br />
<strong>de</strong>ze modus kunt u met behulp van <strong>de</strong> toets 8(opslaan) teletekstpagina’s in e<strong>en</strong><br />
lijst opslaan.<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
! 9 (vastzett<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong>ze toets als u e<strong>en</strong> rouler<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> pagina wilt vastzett<strong>en</strong>. Druk nogmaals op<br />
<strong>de</strong>ze toets om het rouler<strong>en</strong> te hervatt<strong>en</strong>.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (annuler<strong>en</strong>)<br />
Hiermee bekijkt u <strong>de</strong> uitz<strong>en</strong>ding wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> pagina zoekt.<br />
# Gekleur<strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong> (rood/gro<strong>en</strong>/geel/blauw)<br />
N<br />
Als e<strong>en</strong> z<strong>en</strong>dstation gebruikmaakt van het FASTEXT-systeem, wor<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong> verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong><br />
on<strong>de</strong>rwerp<strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> teletekstpagina van e<strong>en</strong> kleurco<strong>de</strong>ring voorzi<strong>en</strong>, die<br />
u kunt selecter<strong>en</strong> met behulp van <strong>de</strong> gekleur<strong>de</strong> toets<strong>en</strong>. Druk op <strong>de</strong> gew<strong>en</strong>ste<br />
toets. De pagina wordt weergegev<strong>en</strong> met aanvull<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> kleurco<strong>de</strong>gegev<strong>en</strong>s, die<br />
op <strong>de</strong>zelf<strong>de</strong> wijze kunn<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n geselecteerd. Om <strong>de</strong> vorige of volg<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> pagina<br />
weer te gev<strong>en</strong> drukt u op <strong>de</strong> toets met <strong>de</strong> overe<strong>en</strong>komstige kleur.<br />
U kunt <strong>de</strong> teletekstpagina’s veran<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> numerieke toets<strong>en</strong> op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 28
De teletekstpagina’s zijn in zes categorieën ver<strong>de</strong>eld:<br />
On<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>el<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
Inhoud<br />
Geselecteerd paginanummer.<br />
Aanduiding z<strong>en</strong>dstation.<br />
Huidig paginanummer of zoekindicaties.<br />
Datum <strong>en</strong> tijd.<br />
Tekst.<br />
Statusinformatie.<br />
FASTEXT-informatie.<br />
N<br />
Teletekstinformatie is vaak ver<strong>de</strong>eld over verschill<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> pagina’s die<br />
achtere<strong>en</strong>volg<strong>en</strong>s wor<strong>de</strong>n weergegev<strong>en</strong>. U kunt rechtstreeks naar <strong>de</strong>ze<br />
pagina’s gaan door:<br />
- het paginanummer in te voer<strong>en</strong><br />
- e<strong>en</strong> titel in e<strong>en</strong> lijst te selecter<strong>en</strong><br />
- e<strong>en</strong> gekleur<strong>de</strong> kop te selecter<strong>en</strong> (FASTEXT-systeem)<br />
<br />
O<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets TV om <strong>de</strong> teletekstweergave te verlat<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Specificaties voor <strong>de</strong> muurbevestigingskit (VESA)<br />
Monteer <strong>de</strong> muurbevestiging op e<strong>en</strong> stevige, loodrechte muur.<br />
Neem bij installatie op an<strong>de</strong>re plekk<strong>en</strong> contact op met uw leverancier.<br />
Bij montage op e<strong>en</strong> plafond of schuine muur kan het apparaat vall<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> lei<strong>de</strong>n tot persoonlijk letsel.<br />
Productgroep inch VESA Spec. (A * B) Standaardschroev<strong>en</strong> Aantal<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
M4<br />
LCD-TV<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
M8<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
4<br />
PDP-TV<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8 4<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
We lever<strong>en</strong> standaardafmeting<strong>en</strong> voor muurbevestigingskits, zoals geïllustreerd in <strong>de</strong> voorgaan<strong>de</strong> tabel.<br />
Wanneer u onze muurbevestigingskit aanschaft, zijn e<strong>en</strong> ge<strong>de</strong>tailleer<strong>de</strong> installatiegids <strong>en</strong> alle vereiste montageon<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong> daarbij<br />
inbegrep<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Gebruik ge<strong>en</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> die langer zijn dan <strong>de</strong> standaardafmeting<strong>en</strong>, omdat an<strong>de</strong>rs <strong>de</strong> binn<strong>en</strong>kant van <strong>de</strong> tv beschadigd kan rak<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Voor muurbevestiging<strong>en</strong> die niet aan <strong>de</strong> standaardspecificaties voor schroev<strong>en</strong> voldo<strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong>s <strong>de</strong> VESA-norm, kan <strong>de</strong> l<strong>en</strong>gte van<br />
<strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> variër<strong>en</strong> afhankelijk van <strong>de</strong> specificaties.<br />
Gebruik ge<strong>en</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> die niet voldo<strong>en</strong> aan <strong>de</strong> standaardspecificaties voor schroev<strong>en</strong> volg<strong>en</strong>s <strong>de</strong> VESA-norm. Draai <strong>de</strong><br />
schroev<strong>en</strong> niet te stevig vast, dit kan het product beschadig<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> kan er toe lei<strong>de</strong>n dat het valt, resulter<strong>en</strong>d in persoonlijk letsel.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> is niet aansprakelijk voor ongelukk<strong>en</strong> veroorzaakt hierdoor.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> is niet aansprakelijk voor productscha<strong>de</strong> of persoonlijk letsel wanneer e<strong>en</strong> muurbevestiging wordt gebruikt die niet aan <strong>de</strong><br />
VESA-norm voldoet of die niet gespecificeerd is, of wanneer <strong>de</strong> klant <strong>de</strong> installatie-instructies van het product niet opvolgt.<br />
Onze mo<strong>de</strong>ll<strong>en</strong> van 57 <strong>en</strong> 63 inch voldo<strong>en</strong> niet aan <strong>de</strong> VESA-specificaties. Gebruik daarom voor <strong>de</strong>ze mo<strong>de</strong>ll<strong>en</strong> onze speciaal<br />
sam<strong>en</strong>gestel<strong>de</strong> wandbevestigingskit.<br />
Overschrijd <strong>de</strong> 15 gra<strong>de</strong>n niet bij bevestiging van <strong>de</strong>ze tv aan <strong>de</strong> muur.<br />
Monteer <strong>de</strong> muurbevestiging niet terwijl <strong>de</strong> tv is ingeschakeld.<br />
Dit kan resulter<strong>en</strong> in persoonlijk letsel door elektrische schokk<strong>en</strong><br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 29
De montage van <strong>de</strong> muurbevestiging voorberei<strong>de</strong>n<br />
Situatie A. De muurbevestiging van<br />
SAMSUNG plaats<strong>en</strong><br />
Situatie B. De muurbevestiging van e<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re<br />
fabrikant plaats<strong>en</strong><br />
경고<br />
경고<br />
1. Plaats <strong>de</strong> muurbevestiging met e<strong>en</strong> koppelbereik van 15 kgf/cm of min<strong>de</strong>r. De on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong> kunn<strong>en</strong> beschadigd rak<strong>en</strong> als het<br />
koppel buit<strong>en</strong> het opgegev<strong>en</strong> bereik valt.<br />
2. Bij <strong>de</strong> accessoires vindt u e<strong>en</strong> hou<strong>de</strong>r <strong>en</strong> e<strong>en</strong> ring [2] voor het plaats<strong>en</strong> van muurbevestiging<strong>en</strong> voor uw <strong>Samsung</strong> TV van<br />
an<strong>de</strong>re fabrikant<strong>en</strong>. (Situatie B).<br />
N Draai <strong>de</strong> schroef [1] vast wanneer u <strong>de</strong> wandbevestiging aan <strong>de</strong> muur bevestigt.<br />
주의<br />
De TV vastzett<strong>en</strong> aan <strong>de</strong> wand<br />
주의<br />
Als u duwt of trekt aan <strong>de</strong> TV of op <strong>de</strong> TV klimt, kan <strong>de</strong>ze vall<strong>en</strong>. Zie er met name op toe dat uw kin<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> niet aan <strong>de</strong><br />
TV gaan hang<strong>en</strong> of <strong>de</strong>ze uit balans br<strong>en</strong>g<strong>en</strong>. De TV kan dan omvall<strong>en</strong>, hetge<strong>en</strong> verwonding<strong>en</strong> kan veroorzak<strong>en</strong> of zelfs<br />
fatale gevolg<strong>en</strong> kan hebb<strong>en</strong>. Neem alle voorzorgsmaatregel<strong>en</strong> die in <strong>de</strong> bijgeslot<strong>en</strong> veiligheidsfol<strong>de</strong>r wor<strong>de</strong>n g<strong>en</strong>oemd. Om<br />
veiligheidsre<strong>de</strong>n<strong>en</strong> is het raadzaam <strong>de</strong> antivalvoorzi<strong>en</strong>ing te installer<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> stabiliteit van het toetsel te verhog<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Wand<br />
Wand<br />
❑ Voorkom<strong>en</strong> dat <strong>de</strong> TV valt<br />
1. Doe <strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> beugels <strong>en</strong> bevestig <strong>de</strong>ze stevig aan <strong>de</strong> wand. Controleer of <strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> stevig in <strong>de</strong> wand zijn<br />
gedraaid.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Afhankelijk van het wandtype hebt u mogelijk aanvull<strong>en</strong>d materiaal nodig om het geheel te veranker<strong>en</strong>.<br />
De b<strong>en</strong>odig<strong>de</strong> beugels, schroev<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> draad wor<strong>de</strong>n niet meegeleverd. Deze moet<strong>en</strong> apart wor<strong>de</strong>n<br />
aangeschaft.<br />
2. Verwij<strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> in het mid<strong>de</strong>n aan <strong>de</strong> achterkant van <strong>de</strong> TV, steek <strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> door <strong>de</strong> beugels <strong>en</strong> draai<br />
<strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> weer vast in <strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
N Het is mogelijk dat <strong>de</strong> schroev<strong>en</strong> niet bij het product wor<strong>de</strong>n meegeleverd.<br />
3. Verbind <strong>de</strong> beugels die aan <strong>de</strong> TV zijn bevestigd met e<strong>en</strong> sterke draad aan <strong>de</strong> beugels die aan <strong>de</strong> wand zijn bevestigd <strong>en</strong><br />
knoop <strong>de</strong> draad stevig vast.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Plaats <strong>de</strong> TV dicht bij <strong>de</strong> wand zodat <strong>de</strong>ze niet achterover kan vall<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Het is veilig <strong>de</strong> draad zodanig aan te br<strong>en</strong>g<strong>en</strong> dat <strong>de</strong> beugels die aan <strong>de</strong> wand zijn bevestigd zich bov<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> beugels op <strong>de</strong><br />
TV of op gelijke hoogte daarmee bevin<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
Haal <strong>de</strong> draad los voordat u <strong>de</strong> TV verplaatst.<br />
N<br />
4. Controleer of alle bevestiging<strong>en</strong> goed zijn aangebracht. Controleer <strong>de</strong> bevestigingspunt<strong>en</strong> regelmatig op tek<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> van<br />
moeheid of verzwakking. Neem in geval van twijfel over <strong>de</strong> veiligheid van <strong>de</strong> bevestiging contact op met e<strong>en</strong> professionele<br />
installateur.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 30
Problem<strong>en</strong> oploss<strong>en</strong><br />
Voer <strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rstaan<strong>de</strong> e<strong>en</strong>voudige controles uit voordat u <strong>de</strong> klant<strong>en</strong>service van <strong>Samsung</strong> inschakelt.<br />
Als u het probleem niet kunt oploss<strong>en</strong> aan <strong>de</strong> hand van <strong>de</strong> on<strong>de</strong>rstaan<strong>de</strong> instructies, noteert u het mo<strong>de</strong>l <strong>en</strong> het seri<strong>en</strong>ummer van<br />
<strong>de</strong> televisie <strong>en</strong> neemt u contact op met uw plaatselijke leverancier.<br />
Ge<strong>en</strong> geluid of beeld<br />
Normaal beeld maar ge<strong>en</strong> geluid<br />
Ge<strong>en</strong> beeld of zwart-witbeeld<br />
Geluid <strong>en</strong> beeld met storing<br />
Vaag beeld of sneeuw, vervormd<br />
geluid<br />
Afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing werkt niet goed<br />
Het scherm is zwart <strong>en</strong> het aan/uitlampje<br />
knippert doorlop<strong>en</strong>d<br />
De beschadig<strong>de</strong> afbeelding wordt<br />
weergegev<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> hoek van het<br />
scherm<br />
Het bericht “Resets all settings to<br />
the <strong>de</strong>fault values” verschijnt.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Controleer of het netsnoer op e<strong>en</strong> wandstopcontact is aangeslot<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Controleer of u <strong>de</strong> toets op uw tv hebt ingedrukt.<br />
Controleer <strong>de</strong> instelling<strong>en</strong> voor het contrast <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> hel<strong>de</strong>rheid van het beeld.<br />
Controleer het geluidsvolume.<br />
Controleer of Luidsprekerselectie is Ext. luidspreker geschakeld.<br />
Controleer het geluidsvolume.<br />
Controleer of <strong>de</strong> toets MMUTE op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing is ingedrukt.<br />
Pas <strong>de</strong> kleurinstelling<strong>en</strong> aan.<br />
Controleer of het geselecteer<strong>de</strong> uitz<strong>en</strong>dsysteem correct is.<br />
• Probeer erachter te kom<strong>en</strong> welk elektrisch apparaat op <strong>de</strong> tv stoort <strong>en</strong> plaats het apparaat uit <strong>de</strong> buurt<br />
van <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
• Sluit <strong>de</strong> televisie op e<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>r stopcontact aan.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Controleer <strong>de</strong> richting, plaats <strong>en</strong> aansluiting<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>ne.<br />
Deze storing treedt vaak op bij het gebruik van e<strong>en</strong> binn<strong>en</strong>ant<strong>en</strong>ne.<br />
Vervang <strong>de</strong> batterij<strong>en</strong> van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
Reinig <strong>de</strong> bov<strong>en</strong>ste rand van <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing (transmissiev<strong>en</strong>ster).<br />
Controleer of <strong>de</strong> pol<strong>en</strong> (+ <strong>en</strong> -) van <strong>de</strong> batterij correct geplaatst zijn.<br />
Controleer of <strong>de</strong> batterij<strong>en</strong> leeg zijn.<br />
Controleer of uw computer aanstaat <strong>en</strong> of <strong>de</strong> signaalkabel in or<strong>de</strong> is.<br />
Beweeg <strong>de</strong> muis van <strong>de</strong> computer of druk op e<strong>en</strong> willekeurige toets op het toets<strong>en</strong>bord.<br />
Controleer of het apparaat (STB, DVD, etc) aanstaat <strong>en</strong> of <strong>de</strong> signaalkabel in or<strong>de</strong> is.<br />
Het <strong>en</strong>ergiebeheersysteem van <strong>de</strong> tv is actief.<br />
Druk op <strong>de</strong> toets Source op het paneel of op <strong>de</strong> afstandsbedi<strong>en</strong>ing.<br />
Zet <strong>de</strong> tv uit <strong>en</strong> weer aan.<br />
• Wanneer Volledig scherm is geselecteerd in <strong>en</strong>kele externe apparat<strong>en</strong>, wordt <strong>de</strong> beschadig<strong>de</strong><br />
afbeelding mogelijk weergegev<strong>en</strong> in <strong>de</strong> hoek van het scherm. Dit wordt veroorzaakt door <strong>de</strong> externe<br />
apparat<strong>en</strong>, niet door <strong>de</strong> tv.<br />
• Dit verschijnt als u <strong>de</strong> toets EXIT <strong>en</strong>ige tijd ingedrukt houdt. De instelling<strong>en</strong> van het product wor<strong>de</strong>n<br />
gereset naar <strong>de</strong> fabrieksinstelling<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Installatieruimte<br />
Bewaar <strong>de</strong> nodige afstand tuss<strong>en</strong> het product <strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re object<strong>en</strong> (bijv. mur<strong>en</strong>) zodat er e<strong>en</strong> goe<strong>de</strong> v<strong>en</strong>tilatie mogelijk is. Wanneer<br />
u dat niet doet, kunn<strong>en</strong> er door e<strong>en</strong> stijging van <strong>de</strong> interne temperatuur brand of problem<strong>en</strong> bij het product ontstaan. Plaats het<br />
product op zo’n manier dat <strong>de</strong> in <strong>de</strong> afbeelding aangegev<strong>en</strong> vereiste afstan<strong>de</strong>n wor<strong>de</strong>n aangehou<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
N Bij gebruik van e<strong>en</strong> voet of muurbevestiging mog<strong>en</strong> er alle<strong>en</strong> on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n gebruikt die door <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics zijn<br />
geleverd.<br />
- Het gebruik van on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re fabrikant kan lei<strong>de</strong>n tot problem<strong>en</strong> met het product of zelfs tot lichamelijk<br />
letseldoordat het product valt.<br />
- Het gebruik van on<strong>de</strong>r<strong>de</strong>l<strong>en</strong> van e<strong>en</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re fabrikant kan lei<strong>de</strong>n tot problem<strong>en</strong> met het product of zelfs tot brand vanwege<br />
e<strong>en</strong> door e<strong>en</strong> slechte v<strong>en</strong>tilatie gesteg<strong>en</strong> interne temperatuur.<br />
N<br />
Het uiterlijk van het product kan van het afgebeel<strong>de</strong> apparaat afwijk<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Bij installatie van het product met e<strong>en</strong> voet<br />
• Bij installatie van het product met e<strong>en</strong> muurbevestiging<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 31
Specificaties<br />
De beschrijving<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> k<strong>en</strong>merk<strong>en</strong> in dit boekje zijn alle<strong>en</strong> bedoeld ter informatie <strong>en</strong> kunn<strong>en</strong> zon<strong>de</strong>r k<strong>en</strong>nisgeving<br />
wor<strong>de</strong>n gewijzigd.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>lnaam PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Schermformaat (Diagonaal) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
PC-resolutie (Otimaal) 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Geluid Uitgang (Uitgang) 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Afmeting<strong>en</strong> (BxHxD)<br />
Behuizing<br />
Met voet<br />
Gewicht<br />
Behuizing<br />
Met voet<br />
Omgevingsvereist<strong>en</strong><br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
Gebruikstemperatuur<br />
Gebruiksvochtigheid<br />
Opslagtemperatuur<br />
Opslagvochtigheid<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Vormgeving <strong>en</strong> specificaties kunn<strong>en</strong> zon<strong>de</strong>r k<strong>en</strong>nisgeving wor<strong>de</strong>n gewijzigd.<br />
Dit is e<strong>en</strong> digitaal apparaat van klasse B.<br />
Zie voor informatie over <strong>de</strong> stroomvoorzi<strong>en</strong>ing <strong>en</strong> het <strong>en</strong>ergieverbruik het etiket op het product.<br />
N Wanneer u e<strong>en</strong> HDMI / DVI-kabelverbinding gebruikt, di<strong>en</strong>t u <strong>de</strong> HDMI IN 2 (DVI)-aansluiting te gebruik<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands - 32
Istruzioni per l’uso<br />
• Rit<strong>en</strong>zione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine a vi<strong>de</strong>o<br />
Non visualizzare un’immagine fissa (come ad esempio su un vi<strong>de</strong>ogioco o collegando un PC a questo PDP) per più di due<br />
ore poiché ciò può causare una rit<strong>en</strong>zione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine a vi<strong>de</strong>o. Il f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o di rit<strong>en</strong>zione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine è anche noto come<br />
“bruciatura <strong>de</strong>llo schermo”. Per evitare il f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o di rit<strong>en</strong>zione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine, ridurre il grado di luminosità e di contrasto<br />
<strong>de</strong>llo schermo quando si visualizza un’immagine fissa.<br />
• Altitudine<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eralm<strong>en</strong>te, lo schermo PDP può operare solo a un’altitudine inferiore a 2000 m. Ad altitudini superiori il display potrebbe<br />
non funzionare correttam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Riscaldam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l pannello superiore <strong>de</strong>l televisore PDP<br />
Dopo lunghi periodi di utilizzo, la parte superiore <strong>de</strong>l prodotto potrebbe risultare calda, dato che il calore si disper<strong>de</strong> attraverso<br />
il foro di v<strong>en</strong>tilazione sul pannello superiore <strong>de</strong>llo schermo. Questo f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o è <strong>de</strong>l tutto normale e non indica un difetto o un<br />
guasto. Tuttavia, è b<strong>en</strong>e impedire ai bambini di toccare la parte superiore <strong>de</strong>l prodotto.<br />
• Il prodotto emette un suono improvviso e secco.<br />
Questo f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o può verificarsi quando il prodotto si contrae o si espan<strong>de</strong> a causa di una variazione di temperatura o<br />
umidità ambi<strong>en</strong>te. È una reazione normale e non indica un difetto <strong>de</strong>ll’unità .<br />
• Difetti <strong>de</strong>i pixel<br />
Il televisore PDP utilizza un pannello composto da 2.360.000 (livello HD) a 6.221.000 (livello FHD) pixel, la cui produzione<br />
richie<strong>de</strong> una tecnologia estremam<strong>en</strong>te sofisticata. Tuttavia, alcuni pixel potrebbero risultare più luminosi o più scuri. Questo<br />
f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o non ha alcun impatto sulle prestazioni <strong>de</strong>l prodotto.<br />
• Evitare di utilizzare il prodotto a una temperatura inferiore a 5°C(41°F).<br />
• La visualizzazione prolungata di un’immagine fissa potrebbe causare un danno perman<strong>en</strong>te al pannello PDP.<br />
L’uso per un periodo prolungato <strong>de</strong>l formato 4:3 può causare la visualizzazione di tracce di bordi sulla<br />
parte sinistra, <strong>de</strong>stra e c<strong>en</strong>trale <strong>de</strong>llo schermo a causa <strong>de</strong>lle differ<strong>en</strong>ti emissioni luminose <strong>de</strong>llo schermo.<br />
La riproduzione di un DVD o l’uso di una console per vi<strong>de</strong>ogiochi può causare effetti analoghi. Questo<br />
tipo di danni non è coperto dalla garanzia.<br />
• Immagine residua.<br />
La visualizzazione prolungata di immagini fisse da vi<strong>de</strong>ogiochi o PC può causare la visualizzazione di immagini residue<br />
parziali. Per evitare questo problema, ridurre la luminosità e il contrasto m<strong>en</strong>tre si visualizzano le immagini fisse.<br />
• Garanzia<br />
- La garanzia non copre ev<strong>en</strong>tuali danni causati dalla rit<strong>en</strong>zione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
- La bruciatura <strong>de</strong>llo schermo non è coperta dalla garanzia.<br />
• Installazione<br />
Se si installa il prodotto in un ambi<strong>en</strong>te con molta polvere, temperature alte o basse, elevata umidità, sostanze chimiche<br />
oppure se si preve<strong>de</strong> di utilizzare il prodotto 24 ore al giorno, come ad esempio negli aeroporti, nelle stazioni ferroviarie, ecc.,<br />
si raccomanda di contattare un c<strong>en</strong>tro di assist<strong>en</strong>za autorizzato. La mancata osservanza di questa precauzione può causare<br />
gravi danni al prodotto.<br />
Avviso relativo alla trasmissione TV digitale<br />
1. Le funzioni relative alla televisione digitale (DVB) sono disponibili solo nelle nazioni o nelle aree in cui vi<strong>en</strong>e trasmesso<br />
il segnale digitale terrestre DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) o laddove si abbia accesso a un servizio TV via cavo<br />
compatibile DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC).<br />
Verificare con il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore locale la possibilità di ricevere segnali DVB-T o DVB-C.<br />
2. DVB-T è lo standard <strong>de</strong>l consorzio europeo DVB per la trasmissione <strong>de</strong>lla televisione digitale terrestre m<strong>en</strong>tre DVB-C<br />
è lo standard per la trasmissione <strong>de</strong>lla televisione digitale via cavo.<br />
Tuttavia, alcune funzioni quali EPG (Electronic Program Gui<strong>de</strong>), VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o on Demand) e altre non sono incluse in<br />
queste specifiche. Per questo motivo, al mom<strong>en</strong>to non sono supportate.<br />
3. Sebb<strong>en</strong>e questo televisore rispetti i più rec<strong>en</strong>ti standard DVB-T e DVB-C [agosto 2008], la compatibilità con future<br />
trasmissioni digitali terrestri DVB-T e digitali via cavo DVB-C non può essere garantita.<br />
4. Alcuni fornitori di trasmissioni TV via cavo potrebbero applicare una tariffa aggiuntiva per tali servizi e richie<strong>de</strong>re<br />
all'ut<strong>en</strong>te di accettare i termini e le condizioni <strong>de</strong>lla loro offerta.<br />
5. Alcune funzioni <strong>de</strong>lla TV digitale potrebbero non essere disponibili in alcune nazioni o regioni e lo standard DVB-C<br />
potrebbe non essere correttam<strong>en</strong>te supportato da tutti i fornitori.<br />
6. Per maggiori informazioni, contattare il locale c<strong>en</strong>tro assist<strong>en</strong>za cli<strong>en</strong>ti SAMSUNG.<br />
Contatta SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE<br />
Se avete comm<strong>en</strong>ti o doman<strong>de</strong> sui prodotti <strong>Samsung</strong>, contattate il Servizio Cli<strong>en</strong>ti <strong>Samsung</strong>.<br />
(Ve<strong>de</strong>re retro di copertina per maggiori informazioni.)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Italiano -
Sommario<br />
Collegam<strong>en</strong>to e configurazione <strong>de</strong>l televisore<br />
■ Controllo <strong>de</strong>i compon<strong>en</strong>ti...........................................................4<br />
■ Uso <strong>de</strong>l piedistallo......................................................................4<br />
■ Assemblaggio <strong>de</strong>l piedistallo (a seconda <strong>de</strong>l mo<strong>de</strong>llo).............. 4<br />
■ Pannello di controllo...................................................................5<br />
■ Pannello <strong>de</strong>i collegam<strong>en</strong>ti..........................................................6<br />
■ Telecomando..............................................................................8<br />
■ Installazione <strong>de</strong>lle batterie nel telecomando.............................. 9<br />
■ Acc<strong>en</strong>sione e spegnim<strong>en</strong>to........................................................9<br />
■ Attivazione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Standby <strong>de</strong>l televisore...................... 9<br />
■ Visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>i m<strong>en</strong>u........................................................10<br />
■ Uso <strong>de</strong>l tasto TOOLS...............................................................10<br />
■ Visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>l display......................................................10<br />
■ Funzioni Plug & Play................................................................ 11<br />
Controllo <strong>de</strong>i canali<br />
■ Memorizzazione.......................................................................12<br />
■ Gestione <strong>de</strong>i canali..................................................................15<br />
Controllo <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine<br />
■ Modifica e reimpostazione <strong>de</strong>lle impostazioni <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine... 17<br />
Controllo <strong>de</strong>ll’audio<br />
■ Modifica <strong>de</strong>llo standard audio..................................................20<br />
■ Selezione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità audio................................................21<br />
Descrizione <strong>de</strong>lle funzioni<br />
■ Configurazione <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u Setup............................................... 22<br />
■ Impostazione <strong>de</strong>ll’orologio.......................................................24<br />
■ El<strong>en</strong>co sorg<strong>en</strong>ti / Modifica Nome ............................................ 25<br />
■ Schermo <strong>de</strong>l PC.......................................................................26<br />
■ Modalità di visualizzazione......................................................26<br />
■ Programmi supportati...............................................................27<br />
Consigli per l’uso<br />
■ Funzione Teletext.....................................................................28<br />
■ Specifiche <strong>de</strong>l kit di supporto a parete (VESA)........................ 29<br />
■ Preparazione prima <strong>de</strong>ll’installazione <strong>de</strong>l supporto a parete... 30<br />
■ Fissaggio <strong>de</strong>l televisore alla parete.......................................... 30<br />
■ Risoluzione <strong>de</strong>i problemi..........................................................31<br />
■ Messa in sicurezza <strong>de</strong>lla posizione di installazione................. 31<br />
■ Specifiche................................................................................32<br />
Questo apparecchio è fabbricato in conformità al D.M.28.08.95 n.548<br />
ed in particolare a quanto specificato nell Art.2, comma 1. Questo<br />
apparecchio è fabbricato nella U.E. in conformità al D.M.28.08.95 n.548<br />
Art.2, comma 1 ed al D.M.26.03.92 Art.1<br />
Italiano<br />
N O T<br />
Simbolo Premere Nota Tasto One-Touch Tasto TOOL<br />
Italiano -
Collegam<strong>en</strong>to e configurazione <strong>de</strong>l televisore<br />
Controllo <strong>de</strong>i compon<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
Manuale <strong>de</strong>ll'ut<strong>en</strong>te Telecomando /<br />
Batterie AAA (2ea)<br />
Cavo di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione Panno di pulizia Scheda di garanzia/ Manuale<br />
Guida alla sicurezza<br />
(Non disponibile in tutte le località)<br />
Viti (4ea) Coperchio-Pannello inferiore Anello di sostegno (4ea)<br />
(ve<strong>de</strong>re a pag. 30)<br />
Nucleo in ferrite per cavo<br />
di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione (1ea)<br />
N<br />
I nuclei in ferrite sono utilizzati per schermare i cavi dalle interfer<strong>en</strong>ze. Quando si collega un cavo, aprire il nucleo<br />
in ferrite e avvolgerlo intorno al cavo vicino alla spina.<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong>l piedistallo<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Il PDP <strong>de</strong>ve essere trasportato da due o più persone. Non appoggiare mai<br />
il PDP sul pavim<strong>en</strong>to perché potrebbe danneggiarsi. Mant<strong>en</strong>ere sempre il<br />
PDP in posizione diritta.<br />
Il PDP può ruotare di 20 gradi a sinistra e a <strong>de</strong>stra.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Assemblaggio <strong>de</strong>l piedistallo (a seconda <strong>de</strong>l mo<strong>de</strong>llo)<br />
Utilizzare le 4 viti fornite in dotazione per fissare saldam<strong>en</strong>te la TV <strong>de</strong>l piedistallo<br />
al TV.<br />
(L’aspetto <strong>de</strong>ll’unità può variare rispetto all’immagine.)<br />
In caso di installazione a parete <strong>de</strong>l televisore,<br />
Chiu<strong>de</strong>re il coperchio (1) sul raccordo <strong>de</strong>l piedistallo<br />
utilizzando due viti.<br />
Avvert<strong>en</strong>za<br />
Fissare saldam<strong>en</strong>te il televisore al piedistallo<br />
prima di muoverlo, In caso contrario,<br />
potrebbe ca<strong>de</strong>re causando gravi lesioni.<br />
N Il televisore <strong>de</strong>ve essere trasportato da<br />
due o più persone. Non appoggiare mai<br />
il televisore sul pavim<strong>en</strong>to perché lo<br />
schermo potrebbe subire danni.<br />
Appoggiare sempre il televisore il<br />
posizione diritta.<br />
Italiano -
Pannello di controllo<br />
N<br />
La forma e il colore <strong>de</strong>l prodotto possono variare in base al mo<strong>de</strong>llo.<br />
Tasti <strong>de</strong>l pannello frontale<br />
Premere ogni tastoper attivare la<br />
funzione correlata.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Passa tra tutte le sorg<strong>en</strong>ti di ingresso disponibili<br />
(TV, Est. AV, Comp., HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N Nel m<strong>en</strong>u a vi<strong>de</strong>o, utilizzare questo tasto così come si<br />
usa il tasto ENTERE <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Premere per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u a vi<strong>de</strong>o con le funzioni <strong>de</strong>l<br />
televisore.<br />
3 + –<br />
Premere peraum<strong>en</strong>tare odiminuire il volume.<br />
Nel m<strong>en</strong>u a vi<strong>de</strong>o, utilizzare i pulsanti +<br />
si utilizzano i tasti ◄ e ► <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
– così come<br />
4 CH<br />
Premere per cambiare canale. Nel m<strong>en</strong>u a vi<strong>de</strong>o, utilizzare i<br />
pulsanti CH così come si utilizzano i tasti ▲ e ▼ <strong>de</strong>l<br />
telecomando.<br />
5 INDICATORE DI ALIMENTAZIO<strong>NE</strong><br />
Lampeggia e si spegne quando l’alim<strong>en</strong>tazione è attivata, e<br />
si acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> in modalità standby.<br />
6 (TASTO DI ACCENSIO<strong>NE</strong>)<br />
Premere per acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>re e spegnere il televisore.<br />
7 SENSORE DEL TELECOMANDO<br />
Puntare il telecomando in direzione di questo punto sul<br />
televisore.<br />
8 ALTOPARLANTE<br />
Italiano -
Pannello <strong>de</strong>i collegam<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
Pannello posteriore<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
8<br />
oppure<br />
Televisione via<br />
cavo Rete<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
oppure<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
La forma e il colore <strong>de</strong>l prodotto possono variare in base al mo<strong>de</strong>llo.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Quando si collega un sistema audio o vi<strong>de</strong>o al televisore, assicurarsi che tutti gli elem<strong>en</strong>ti siano sp<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
Quando si collega un dispositivo esterno, fare corrispon<strong>de</strong>re il colore <strong>de</strong>l terminale di collegam<strong>en</strong>to a quello <strong>de</strong>l cavo.<br />
1 POWER IN<br />
Collegare il cavo di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione fornito in dotazione.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Connettore riservato all’assist<strong>en</strong>za.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Ingressi (AUDIO L/R) e vi<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR) per Compon<strong>en</strong>t.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Ingressi e uscite di dispositivi esterni quali vi<strong>de</strong>oregistratori,<br />
DVD, periferiche di gioco o lettori di dischi vi<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
Specifiche di I/O<br />
Ingresso<br />
Uscita<br />
Connettore<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Audio (L/R) RGB Vi<strong>de</strong>o + Audio (L/R)<br />
EXT<br />
Solo l’uscita TV o DTV è<br />
✔ ✔ ✔<br />
disponibile.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Collegare a un compon<strong>en</strong>te audio digitale.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
Collegare i segnali audio RCA prov<strong>en</strong>i<strong>en</strong>ti dal televisore<br />
a una sorg<strong>en</strong>te esterna, come per esempio un dispositivo<br />
audio.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1,2 (DVI)<br />
Non è necessario un ulteriore collegam<strong>en</strong>to Audio per la<br />
connessione HDMI-HDMI.<br />
− Quando si effettua una connessione mediante cavo<br />
HDMI/DVI, è necessario utilizzare il jack HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
N Che cosa significa HDMI?<br />
- Alto Definition Multimedia interface permette la<br />
trasmissione di dati vi<strong>de</strong>o digitali ad alta <strong>de</strong>finizione e<br />
audio digitale a canali multipli.<br />
- l terminale HDMI/DVI supporta il collegam<strong>en</strong>to DVI<br />
a una periferica estesa con un cavo appropriato<br />
(non fornito). La differ<strong>en</strong>za tra HDMI e DVI è che il<br />
dispositivo HDMI è di dim<strong>en</strong>sioni più piccole, dispone<br />
<strong>de</strong>lla funzione di codifica HDCP (High Bandwidth<br />
Digital Copy Protection) installata, e supporta audio<br />
digitale multicanale.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
Uscite audio DVI per dispositivi esterni.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
Connettore coassiale 75Ω per reti aeree/cavo.<br />
Modalità supportate per HDMI/DVI e Compon<strong>en</strong>t<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t O O O O O O O<br />
Italiano -
Pannello laterale<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
La forma e il colore <strong>de</strong>l prodotto possono variare in base al mo<strong>de</strong>llo.<br />
1 Slot COMMON INTERFACE<br />
Inserire la scheda CI (Common Interface, interfaccia comune)<br />
nello slot. (ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 23)<br />
− Con alcuni canali, se non si inserisce la Scheda IC appare<br />
il messaggio Segnale criptato.<br />
− Le informazioni di pairing che cont<strong>en</strong>gono un numero<br />
telefonico, l’ID <strong>de</strong>lla scheda IC, l’ID host e altri dati<br />
verranno visualizzate <strong>en</strong>tro 2~3 minuti. Se vi<strong>en</strong>e<br />
visualizzato un messaggio di errore, contattare il service<br />
provi<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
− Quando la configurazione <strong>de</strong>lleinformazioni relative al<br />
canale è stata completata, vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato il messaggio<br />
Aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to completato, a indicare che l’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>i<br />
canali è stato aggiornato.<br />
N Inserire la scheda IC nella direzione indicata sulla scheda<br />
stessa.<br />
N<br />
Il modulo CAM non è supportato in alcune nazioni<br />
e regioni; controllare con il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore autorizzato<br />
di zona.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Ingressi vi<strong>de</strong>o e audio per dispositivi esterni, come ad<br />
esempio una vi<strong>de</strong>ocamera o un vi<strong>de</strong>oregistratore.<br />
Italiano -
Telecomando<br />
Il telecomando è utilizzabile fino a una distanza di 7 metri dal televisore.<br />
N Una illuminazione troppo int<strong>en</strong>sa può avere consegu<strong>en</strong>ze sulle prestazioni <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
1 Tasto POWER<br />
(acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> e spegne il televisore)<br />
2 Seleziona direttam<strong>en</strong>te il televisore<br />
3 Tasti numerici per selezionare<br />
direttam<strong>en</strong>te i canali<br />
4 Visualizza l’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>i canali preferiti.<br />
5 Disattivazione temporanea<br />
<strong>de</strong>ll'audio<br />
6 Aum<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l volume<br />
Diminuzione <strong>de</strong>l volume<br />
7 Selezione <strong>de</strong>lla sorg<strong>en</strong>te disponibile<br />
8 Cons<strong>en</strong>te di ve<strong>de</strong>re le informazioni<br />
sull'emitt<strong>en</strong>te corr<strong>en</strong>te<br />
9 Utile per selezionare rapidam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
le funzioni più frequ<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te<br />
utilizzate.<br />
0 Controlla il cursore nel m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
! Tasto di controllo <strong>de</strong>i canali<br />
@ Utilizzare questi tasti nell’el<strong>en</strong>co<br />
Canali, ecc.<br />
$ Canale prece<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
% Canale successivo<br />
Canale prece<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
^ Visualizza il m<strong>en</strong>u a vi<strong>de</strong>o principale<br />
& Visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>lla Guida<br />
elettronica ai programmi (EPG)<br />
* Ritorna al m<strong>en</strong>u prece<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
( Esce dal m<strong>en</strong>u a vi<strong>de</strong>o<br />
) Selezione <strong>de</strong>scrizione audio (AD).<br />
a Visualizzazione sottotitoli digitali<br />
Funzioni Teletext<br />
2 Uscita da Teletext (in base al<br />
mo<strong>de</strong>llo)<br />
7 Selezione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Teletext<br />
(LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Visualizzazione Teletext<br />
9 Formato Teletext<br />
! Memorizzazione Teletext<br />
@ Selezione argom<strong>en</strong>to Fastext<br />
# Schermo Teletext/visualizzazione<br />
contemporanea <strong>de</strong>lle informazioni<br />
Teletext e <strong>de</strong>lla trasmissione<br />
normale<br />
$ Pagina secondaria Teletext<br />
% P : Pagina Teletext successiva<br />
P : Pagina Teletext prece<strong>de</strong>nte<br />
^ Indice <strong>de</strong>l Teletext<br />
* Mant<strong>en</strong>im<strong>en</strong>to Teletext<br />
( Annullam<strong>en</strong>to Teletext<br />
<br />
Italiano -
Installazione <strong>de</strong>lle batterie nel telecomando<br />
1. Sollevare il coperchio sul retro <strong>de</strong>l telecomando come mostra la figura.<br />
2. Installare le due batterie AAA.<br />
N Assicurarsi che le indicazioni “+” e “–” sulle batterie corrispondano allo<br />
scherma all’interno <strong>de</strong>l vano.<br />
3. Chiu<strong>de</strong>re il coperchio come mostra la figura.<br />
N Se si preve<strong>de</strong> di non utilizzare il telecomando per un periodo di tempo<br />
prolungato, rimuovere le batterie e riporle in un luogo asciutto e fresco.<br />
N<br />
Se il telecomando non funziona! Verificare i segu<strong>en</strong>ti punti:<br />
1. Il televisore è acceso?<br />
2. I poli - e + <strong>de</strong>lle batterie sono invertiti?<br />
3. Le batterie sono esaurite?<br />
4. Si è verificata una interruzione di corr<strong>en</strong>te, o il cavo di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione è<br />
scollegato?<br />
5. È pres<strong>en</strong>te una luce a fluoresc<strong>en</strong>za speciale o un neon nelle vicinanze?<br />
Acc<strong>en</strong>sione e spegnim<strong>en</strong>to<br />
La spina di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione è collegata al pannello posteriore <strong>de</strong>l televisore.<br />
1. Inserire la spina in una presa appropriata.<br />
N L’indicatore di standby si acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>.<br />
2. Premere il pulsante POWERP sull’apparecchio.<br />
N E’ possibile acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>re il televisore anche prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto POWERP o il tasto TV sul telecomando.<br />
3. Premere i tasti numerici (0~9), il tasto canale successivo/prece<strong>de</strong>nte (< / >) sul telecomando o il tasto <br />
sull’apparecchio.<br />
N Quando si acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> l’apparecchio per la prima volta, verrà visualizzato un messaggio<br />
per la selezione <strong>de</strong>lla lingua <strong>de</strong>i m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
4. Per spegnere l’apparecchio, premere nuovam<strong>en</strong>te il tasto POWERP.<br />
Attivazione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Standby <strong>de</strong>l televisore<br />
La modalità Standby <strong>de</strong>l televisore cons<strong>en</strong>te di ridurre il consumo di corr<strong>en</strong>te. La modalità Standby è particolarm<strong>en</strong>te utile quando<br />
si <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>ra disattivare temporaneam<strong>en</strong>te il televisore, ad esempio durante i pasti.<br />
1. Premere il tasto POWERP <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
N Lo schermo si spegne e l'indicatore rosso di standby sull’apparecchio si acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>.<br />
2. Per riacc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>re il televisore, basta premere nuovam<strong>en</strong>te POWERP, i tasti numerici (0~9), il tasto TV o il tasto canale<br />
prece<strong>de</strong>nte/successivo (< / >).<br />
N Non lasciare il televisore in modalità standby per un periodo di tempo prolungato, ad esempio quando si è in vacanza. Si<br />
consiglia di scollegare l’apparecchio dal cavo di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione e dall’ant<strong>en</strong>na.<br />
Italiano -
Visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>i m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
1. A dispositivo acceso, premere il tasto MENU. Vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato il m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
principale. Sul lato sinistro <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u compaiono <strong>de</strong>lle icone: Immagine, Suono,<br />
Canale, Impostazione, Ingressi e Supporto.<br />
2. Per selezionare un’icona, premere il tasto ▲ o ▼. Per acce<strong>de</strong>re al sottom<strong>en</strong>u<br />
<strong>de</strong>ll’icona, premere il tasto ENTERE<br />
3. Premere il tasto EXIT per uscire.<br />
N La visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u a schermo vi<strong>en</strong>e disattivata dopo circa un<br />
Modalità : Standard<br />
minuto.<br />
Immagine<br />
<br />
Luce cella : 4<br />
Contrasto : 95<br />
Luminosità : 45<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>zza : 50<br />
Colore : 50<br />
Tinta (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong>l tasto TOOLS<br />
You can use the TOOLS button to select your frequ<strong>en</strong>tly used functions quickly and easily. The Strum<strong>en</strong>ti m<strong>en</strong>u changes<br />
<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on which external input mo<strong>de</strong> you are viewing.<br />
1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Verrà visualizzato il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un m<strong>en</strong>u, quindi premere ENTERE.<br />
3. Premere i tasti ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE per visualizzare, modificare o utilizzare le<br />
voci selezionate.Per una <strong>de</strong>scrizione più <strong>de</strong>ttagliata di ogni funzione, consultare la<br />
pagina corrispon<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
• Modalità immagine , ve<strong>de</strong>re pag. 17<br />
• Modalità audio, ve<strong>de</strong>re pag. 20<br />
• Timer stand-by, ve<strong>de</strong>re pag. 24<br />
• Risp. <strong>en</strong>ergia, ve<strong>de</strong>re pag. 23<br />
• Aggiungi a Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), ve<strong>de</strong>re pag 15<br />
<br />
Strum<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
Modalità immagine ◄ Standard ►<br />
Modalità audio : Personaliz<br />
Timer stand-by : Sp<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Risp. <strong>en</strong>ergia : Sp<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Aggiungi a Preferiti<br />
U Sposta E Conferma e Esci<br />
Visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>l display<br />
Il display i<strong>de</strong>ntifica il canale corr<strong>en</strong>te e lo stato di <strong>de</strong>terminate impostazioni audio e<br />
vi<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
O Premere il tasto INFO per visualizzare le informazioni.<br />
Premere INFO sul telecomando. Il televisore visualizzerà il canale, il tipo di audio<br />
e lo stato di <strong>de</strong>terminate impostazioni immagine e audio.<br />
• ▲, ▼: E' possibile visualizzare altre informazioni relative al canale. Se si<br />
<strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>ra spostarsi sul canale selezionato, premere ENTERE.<br />
• ◄, ►: E' possibile visualizzare le informazioni <strong>de</strong>l programma <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato sul<br />
canale corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N Premere nuovam<strong>en</strong>te INFO o att<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>re 10 secondi finché il display<br />
scomparirà automaticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Italiano - 10
Funzioni Plug & Play<br />
Se il televisore vi<strong>en</strong>e acceso per la prima volta, alcune impostazioni di base v<strong>en</strong>gono visualizzate automaticam<strong>en</strong>te e in sequ<strong>en</strong>za.<br />
N In modalità Plug & Play, lo Scre<strong>en</strong> Saver si attiva quando non vi<strong>en</strong>e premuto alcun tasto <strong>de</strong>l telecomando per alm<strong>en</strong>o 1<br />
minuto.<br />
N Lo Scre<strong>en</strong> Saver si attiva in caso di inattività <strong>de</strong>l sistema per alm<strong>en</strong>o 15 minuti.<br />
1. Premere il tasto POWER <strong>de</strong>l telecomando. Quindi vi<strong>en</strong>e automaticam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
selezionato il m<strong>en</strong>u You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
Selezionare la lingua <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rata prem<strong>en</strong>do il pulsante ▲ o ▼. Premere il tasto<br />
ENTERE per confermare la scelta.<br />
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Demo Negozio o Uso dom., quindi<br />
premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si consiglia di impostare la modalità TV su Uso domestico per ott<strong>en</strong>ere la migliore qualità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine in un ambi<strong>en</strong>te<br />
domestico.<br />
Demo Negozio è intesa solo per un uso commerciale <strong>de</strong>l prodotto.<br />
Se l’unità è stata acci<strong>de</strong>ntalm<strong>en</strong>te impostata sulla modalità Demo Negozio e si <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>ra tornare alla modalità Uso dom.<br />
(Standard): Premere il tasto Volume <strong>de</strong>l televisore. Quando il m<strong>en</strong>u OSD Volume vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato, t<strong>en</strong>ere premuto il<br />
tasto MENU <strong>de</strong>l televisore per 5 secondi.<br />
3. Premere il tasto ENTERE. Selezionare la lingua <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rata prem<strong>en</strong>do il pulsante ▲ o ▼. Premere il tasto ENTERE per<br />
confermare la scelta.<br />
4. Premere ▲ o ▼ per memorizzare i canali <strong>de</strong>lla connessione selezionata, quindi premere ENTERE.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Ant<strong>en</strong>na: Segnale ant<strong>en</strong>na via etere.<br />
Cavo: Segnale ant<strong>en</strong>na via cavo.<br />
5. Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼ per selezionare i canali da memorizzare. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Avvio<br />
• Digitale e Analogico: Canali digitali e analogici.<br />
• Digitale: Canali digitali<br />
• Analogico: Canali analogici.<br />
N Per una <strong>de</strong>scrizione più <strong>de</strong>ttagliata <strong>de</strong>lla selezione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Cavo, ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 12.<br />
N La ricerca <strong>de</strong>i canali inizia e termina in modo automatico.<br />
N Premere il tasto ENTERE in qualsiasi mom<strong>en</strong>to per interrompere il processo di memorizzazione.<br />
N Una volta memorizzati tutti i canali disponibili, vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato il messaggio Imposta la modalità Orologio.<br />
6. Premere il tasto ENTERE. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Auto, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
N Selezionando Manuale, comparirà Imposta la data e I'ora corr<strong>en</strong>ti. (ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 24)<br />
N Ricev<strong>en</strong>do un segale digitale, l’orario verrà impostato automaticam<strong>en</strong>te. In caso contrario, ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 24 per<br />
impostare l’orologio.<br />
7. Vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzata la breve introduzione Ott<strong>en</strong>ere le prestazioni migliori dal nuovo HDTV. Premere ENTERE .<br />
N Questo m<strong>en</strong>u è disponibile Guida per la connessione HD nel m<strong>en</strong>u Supporto.<br />
8. Vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato il messaggio Buona TV.. Al termine, premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
Plug & Play<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
Per reimpostare questa funzione...<br />
1. Premere il tasto MENU per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per<br />
selezionare Impostazione, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
2. Premere nuovam<strong>en</strong>te il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Plug & Play.<br />
3. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. Il PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è<br />
‘0-0-0-0’.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Per cambiare il PIN, ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 22.<br />
La funzione Plug & Play è disponibile solo in modalità TV.<br />
Impostazione<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Lingua m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Ora<br />
Trasmissione<br />
Sicurezza<br />
G<strong>en</strong>erale<br />
: Italiano<br />
►<br />
Italiano - 11
Controllo <strong>de</strong>i canali<br />
Memorizzazione<br />
❑<br />
Nazione<br />
• Canale digitale: Funzione per la modifica <strong>de</strong>l paese per i canali digitali.<br />
• Canale analogico: Funzione per la modifica <strong>de</strong>l paese per i canali<br />
analogici.<br />
N Comparirà la richiesta <strong>de</strong>l PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.<br />
❑<br />
Memorizzazione auto<br />
Scorrere tutti i canali per le stazioni trasmitt<strong>en</strong>ti attive e memorizzarle nella<br />
memoria <strong>de</strong>l televisore.<br />
E’ possibile memorizzare i canali <strong>de</strong>lla connessione selezionata.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>na: Segnale ant<strong>en</strong>na via etere.<br />
• Cavo: Segnale ant<strong>en</strong>na via cavo.<br />
N Selezionando Cavo,<br />
• Modalità ricerca: Visualizza la modalità di ricerca. (Rapida)<br />
- Network ID: Visualizza il codice di i<strong>de</strong>ntificazione <strong>de</strong>l network.<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>za: Visualizza la frequ<strong>en</strong>za <strong>de</strong>l canale.<br />
- Modulazione: Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili.<br />
- Symbol Rate: Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.<br />
• Modalità ricerca: Visualizza la modalità di ricerca. (Completa, Rete)<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>za inizio: Visualizza i valori iniziali di frequ<strong>en</strong>za.<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>za fine: Visualizza i valori finali di frequ<strong>en</strong>za.<br />
- Modulazione: Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili.<br />
- Symbol Rate: Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.<br />
E’ possibile memorizzare la sorg<strong>en</strong>te Canale<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Digitale e Analogico: Canali digitali e analogici.<br />
Digitale: Canali digitali<br />
Analogico: Canali analogici.<br />
Per interrompere la funzione Memorizzazione auto, premere il pulsante ENTERE .<br />
Verrà visualizzato il messaggio Interrompere la programmazione automatica?.<br />
Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Sì, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE .<br />
Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante le funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserim<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l PIN.<br />
Canale<br />
Nazione<br />
Memorizzazione auto<br />
Memorizzazione manuale<br />
Opzione ricerca via cavo<br />
Guida Attuale e Successivo<br />
Guida Completa<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>finita<br />
: Att./Succ.<br />
►<br />
Italiano - 12
❑<br />
Memorizzazione manuale<br />
Ricerca un canale manualm<strong>en</strong>te e lo memorizza nella memoria TV.<br />
• Canale analogico (Digitahi)<br />
Memorizzazione manuale <strong>de</strong>i canali digitali.<br />
N Canale digitale è disponibile solo in modalità DTV.<br />
• Canale: Impostare il numero <strong>de</strong>l canale mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9).<br />
• Frequ<strong>en</strong>za: Impostare la frequ<strong>en</strong>za utilizzando i tasti numerici.<br />
• Larg. di banda: Impostare il numero <strong>de</strong>l canale mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9).<br />
N Al termine, i canali v<strong>en</strong>gono aggiornati nell’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>i canali.<br />
• Canali analogici<br />
Memorizzazione manuale <strong>de</strong>i canali analogici.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Programmato (Numero di programma da assegnare a un canale): Impostare il numero <strong>de</strong>l canale mediante i tasti ▲, ▼<br />
o i tasti numerici (0~9).<br />
Sistema colore → Automatico / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Impostare il colore utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.<br />
Sistema audio → BG / L / I / DK: Impostare il sistema audio utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.<br />
Canale (Quando si conosce il numero <strong>de</strong>l canale da memorizzare): Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare C (ant<strong>en</strong>na)<br />
o S (cavo). Premere il tasto ►, quindi premere il tasto ▲, ▼ o un numero (0~9) per selezionare il numero <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato.<br />
N E’ anche possibile selezionare direttam<strong>en</strong>te il numero <strong>de</strong>l canale prem<strong>en</strong>do i tasti numerici (0~9).<br />
N<br />
Se l’audio è anomalo o ass<strong>en</strong>te, riselezionare lo standard audio richiesto.<br />
• Ricerca (Quando non si conosce il numero <strong>de</strong>l canale) Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per avviare la ricerca. Il sintonizzatore<br />
effettua la scansione <strong>de</strong>lla gamma di frequ<strong>en</strong>za fino a quando appare il primo canale o il canale selezionato.<br />
• Memorizza (Quando si memorizza il canale e il numero di programma corrispon<strong>de</strong>nte): Impostare a OK prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto<br />
ENTERE .<br />
N Modalità Canale<br />
- C (Ant<strong>en</strong>na): È possibile selezionare un canale immett<strong>en</strong>do in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascuna emitt<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
- S (Cavo): E’ possibile selezionare un canale immett<strong>en</strong>do in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascun canale via cavo.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Cavo Opzioni di ricerca (Cavo)<br />
E’ possibile impostare ulteriori opzioni come ad esempio la frequ<strong>en</strong>za e il symbol rate per la ricerca <strong>de</strong>lla rete via cavo (in base<br />
alla nazione).<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>za (Inizio~Fermare): Visualizza la frequ<strong>en</strong>za <strong>de</strong>l canale.<br />
Modulazione: Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili.<br />
Symbol Rate: Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>za (Inizio~Fermare) Impostare la frequ<strong>en</strong>za utilizzando i tasti numerici (0~9)<br />
Guida Attuale e Successivo / Guida Completa<br />
Le informazioni EPG (Electronic Programme Gui<strong>de</strong>) sono fornite dall’emitt<strong>en</strong>te. Le voci relative ai programmi potrebbero<br />
risultare vuote o non aggiornate, a seconda <strong>de</strong>lle informazioni trasmesse dall’emitt<strong>en</strong>te su un <strong>de</strong>terminato canale. La<br />
schermata vi<strong>en</strong>e aggiornata automaticam<strong>en</strong>te non app<strong>en</strong>a sono disponibili le nuove informazioni.<br />
• Guida Attuale e Successivo : Per i sei canali indicati nella colonna di sinistra, visualizza le informazioni sul Programma<br />
corr<strong>en</strong>te e sul Programma successivo.<br />
• Guida Completa : Visualizza la informazioni sui programmi ordinate in segm<strong>en</strong>ti di un’ora. Sono comprese uno ore di<br />
programmi che è possibile scorrere in avanti o indietro.<br />
Italiano - 13<br />
Continua...
❑<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>finita<br />
• Att./Succ. / Guida Completa: E’ possibile scegliere se visualizzare la Att./<br />
Succ. o la Guida Compl prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto GUIDE <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
Canale<br />
Guida Attuale e Successivo<br />
Guida Completa<br />
Guida Pre<strong>de</strong>finita : Att./Succ.►<br />
El<strong>en</strong>co canali<br />
Modalità Canale<br />
Sintonia fine<br />
: Can. Aggiunti<br />
O È anche possibile visualizzare la guida semplicem<strong>en</strong>te prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto GUIDE.<br />
Uso di Guida Guida Attuale e Successivo / Completa Guida<br />
Guida Attuale e Successivo<br />
Guida Completa<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Att.<br />
Succ.<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Guarda Informazioni Pagina • Guida Completa • Esci Guarda Information Pagina • Att./Succ. • Esci<br />
▲/▼/◄/►<br />
(ENTER)<br />
ROSSO<br />
VERDE<br />
GIALLO<br />
BLU<br />
INFO<br />
Selezionare il programma prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto ▲/▼/◄/►.<br />
Se si seleziona il programma successivo, appare l’icona <strong>de</strong>ll’orologio che indica la visione<br />
programmata. Prem<strong>en</strong>do nuovam<strong>en</strong>te il tasto ENTERE, premere il tasto ▲/▼/◄/► per selezionare<br />
Annulla Programmazioni; la programmazione verrà annullata e l’icona <strong>de</strong>ll’orologio scompare.<br />
Per informazioni <strong>de</strong>ttagliate sulla programmazione, consultare la pagina successiva.<br />
Alterna la Att./Succ. e la Guida Completa.<br />
Guida Completa: Per scorrere velocem<strong>en</strong>te indietro (-24 ore).<br />
Guida Completa: Per scorrere velocem<strong>en</strong>te in avanti (+24 ore).<br />
Per uscire dalla guida.<br />
Per ott<strong>en</strong>ere maggiori informazioni. Nelle informazioni <strong>de</strong>ttagliate sono compresi Channel Number,<br />
Running Time, Status Bar, Par<strong>en</strong>tal Level, Vi<strong>de</strong>o Quality Information (HD / SD), Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>s, Subtitle<br />
o Teletext, le lingue <strong>de</strong>i sottotitoli o <strong>de</strong>l Teletext e una breve <strong>de</strong>scrizione <strong>de</strong>l programma evi<strong>de</strong>nziato. “…”<br />
appare quando la <strong>de</strong>scrizione è molto lunga.<br />
❑<br />
El<strong>en</strong>co canali<br />
Per le istruzioni <strong>de</strong>ttagliate sull’uso di El<strong>en</strong>co canali, ve<strong>de</strong>re le <strong>de</strong>scrizioni a pagina 15~16.<br />
❑<br />
Modalità Canale<br />
Prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto P ▲/▼, si passerà da un canale all'altro all’interno <strong>de</strong>ll'el<strong>en</strong>co canali selezionato.<br />
• Can. Aggiunti: I canali verranno attivati secondo l'el<strong>en</strong>co canali memorizzato.<br />
• Can. Preferiti: I canali verranno attivati secondo l'el<strong>en</strong>co canali preferiti.<br />
❑<br />
Sintonia fine (solo canali digitali)<br />
Se la ricezione è chiara, non è necessario sintonizzare il canale poiché questa operazione vi<strong>en</strong>e effettuata automaticam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
durante le operazioni di ricerca e memorizzazione. Se tuttavia il segnale risulta <strong>de</strong>bole o distorto, può essere necessario<br />
sintonizzare il canale manualm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
I canali sintonizzati manualm<strong>en</strong>te e memorizzati sono evi<strong>de</strong>nziati da un asterisco* alla <strong>de</strong>stra <strong>de</strong>l numero <strong>de</strong>l canale nel<br />
relativo riquadro.<br />
Se la sintonizzazione non vi<strong>en</strong>e memorizzata, le regolazioni andranno perse.<br />
Per reimpostare la sintonia, selezionare Reset prem<strong>en</strong>do il pulsante ▼ , quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
Italiano - 14
Gestione <strong>de</strong>i canali<br />
<br />
Usando questo m<strong>en</strong>u è possibile aggiungere, cancellare o impostare i canali preferiti<br />
e utilizzare la guida <strong>de</strong>i programmi per le trasmissioni digitali.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Selezionare un canale in Tutti i Canali, Canali aggiunti, Preferiti o<br />
Programmato prem<strong>en</strong>do i tasti ▲ o ▼, quindi il tasto ENTER E.<br />
Tutti i Canali: Mostra tutti i canali attualm<strong>en</strong>te disponibili.<br />
Canali aggiunti: Mostra tutti i canali aggiunti.<br />
Preferiti: Mostra tutti i canali preferiti.<br />
Programmato: Mostra tutti i canali pr<strong>en</strong>otati.<br />
Canale<br />
Mini Guida<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>finita<br />
El<strong>en</strong>co canali<br />
Modalità Canale<br />
Sintonia fine<br />
: Att./Succ.<br />
: Can. Aggiunti<br />
N<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong>i tasti colorati nell’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>i canali<br />
- Rosso (Channel Type): Scorre tra TV, Radio, Dati / Altro e Tutti.<br />
- Ver<strong>de</strong> (Zoom): Ingrandisce o riduce il numero di un canale.<br />
- Giallo (Select): Seleziona più el<strong>en</strong>chi di canali.<br />
-<br />
TTOOLS (Option): Visualizza il m<strong>en</strong>u Cancella (o Aggiungi), Aggiungi a<br />
Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), Visione timer, Modifica nome canale,<br />
Modifica numero canale, Ordina, Blocco (o Sblocco), Seleziona tutti<br />
(o Deseleziona tutti) o Memorizzazione auto<br />
(Il m<strong>en</strong>u Options può essere diverso in base alla situazione).<br />
Canali aggiunti<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Icone sullo stato <strong>de</strong>l canale<br />
A Canale analogico. c Canale selezionato mediante il tasto giallo.<br />
♥ Canale impostato come preferito. ( Programma attualm<strong>en</strong>te trasmesso.<br />
\ Canale bloccato. ) Programma pr<strong>en</strong>otato<br />
Premere il pulsante CH LIST sul telecomando per visualizzare l’el<strong>en</strong>co canali.<br />
Tutto • Tipo canale • Zoom • Selezione Strum<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Channel List Tools (in Tutti i Canali / Canali aggiunti / Preferiti)<br />
Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
Gli elem<strong>en</strong>ti <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u Option possono differire in base allo stato <strong>de</strong>l canale.<br />
• Aggiungi / Cancella<br />
E’ possibile eliminare o aggiungere un canale per memorizzare i canali <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rati.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Tutti i canali eliminati saranno visibili nel m<strong>en</strong>u Tutti i Canali.<br />
Se il canale in el<strong>en</strong>co è evi<strong>de</strong>nziato in grigio, significa che il canale è stato<br />
eliminato.<br />
Il m<strong>en</strong>u Aggiungi vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato solo per i canali eliminati.<br />
E’ anche possibile eliminare un canale nel m<strong>en</strong>u Canali aggiunti o Preferiti allo<br />
stesso modo.<br />
• Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti<br />
I canali che si guardano più di frequ<strong>en</strong>te possono essere impostati come preferiti.<br />
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
E’ inoltre possibile impostare i canali Preferiti selezionando Strum<strong>en</strong>ti → Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Il simbolo " ♥ " verrà evi<strong>de</strong>nziato e il canale verrà impostato come Favourite.<br />
Tutti i canali preferiti saranno visibili nel m<strong>en</strong>u Preferiti.<br />
Per selezionare i canali preferiti impostati, premere il pulsante FAV.CH sul<br />
telecomando.<br />
Tutti i Canali<br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Cancella<br />
Aggiungi a Preferiti<br />
Visione timer<br />
Modifica nome canale<br />
Blocco<br />
Ordina<br />
Tutto • Tipo canale • Zoom • Selezione Strum<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
▼<br />
Continua...<br />
Italiano - 15
• Visione timer<br />
Se si è effettuata la pr<strong>en</strong>otazione di un canale, all’ora stabilita verrà visualizzato il canale pr<strong>en</strong>otato anche durante la visione di<br />
un altro canale cont<strong>en</strong>uto nella Channel List. Per pr<strong>en</strong>otare un programma impostare prima l’orario corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
(ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 24)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
E’ possibile pr<strong>en</strong>otare solo i canali memorizzati.<br />
È possibile impostare il canale, il mese, il giorno, l’anno l’ora e i minuti prem<strong>en</strong>do direttam<strong>en</strong>te i tasti numerici <strong>de</strong>l<br />
telecomando.<br />
Durante le pr<strong>en</strong>otazione di un programma comparirà il m<strong>en</strong>u Programmato.<br />
Digital Programme Gui<strong>de</strong> e Viewing Reservation<br />
Selezionando un canale digitale, e prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto ►, comparirà la Guida ai programmi.<br />
Per pr<strong>en</strong>otare un programma seguire le procedure <strong>de</strong>scritte sopra.<br />
• Modifica nome canale (solo canali analogici)<br />
Ai canali è possibile attribuire un nome in modo da visualizzarlo durante la visione.<br />
N I nomi <strong>de</strong>i canali digitali trasmessi v<strong>en</strong>gono automaticam<strong>en</strong>te assegnati e non possono essere modificati.<br />
• Modifica nome canale (solo canali digitali)<br />
È anche possibile impostare il numero di canale prem<strong>en</strong>do i tasti numerici sul telecomando.<br />
• Ordina (solo canali analogici)<br />
Questa operazione cons<strong>en</strong>te di modificare i numeri di programma <strong>de</strong>i canali memorizzati. Questa operazione è spesso<br />
necessaria dopo la memorizzazione automatica <strong>de</strong>i canali.<br />
• Blocco / Sblocco<br />
E’ possibile bloccare un canale in modo che non possa essere selezionato e visualizzato. Questa funzione è disponibile solo<br />
quando la funzione Blocco canali è impostata su Acceso. (ve<strong>de</strong>re pag. 22)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Comparirà la richiesta <strong>de</strong>l PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.<br />
Il PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è 0-0-0-0. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel<br />
m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Verrà visualizzato il simbolo " \ " e il canale verrà bloccato.<br />
• Seleziona tutti / Deseleziona tutti<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Seleziona tutti: Seleziona tutti i canali pres<strong>en</strong>ti nell’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>i canali.<br />
Deseleziona tutti: E’ possibile <strong>de</strong>selezionare tutti i canali selezionati nell'el<strong>en</strong>co canali.<br />
E’ possibile utilizzare contemporaneam<strong>en</strong>te le funzioni Aggiungi / Cancella, Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti,<br />
o Blocco / Sblocco per più canali. Selezionare i canali <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rati e premere il tasto giallo per impostare tutti i canali<br />
selezionati contemporaneam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Il simbolo c compare a sinistra <strong>de</strong>i canali selezionati.<br />
E’ possibile selezionare Deseleziona tutti solo quando è stato selezionato alm<strong>en</strong>o un canale.<br />
• Memorizzazione auto<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Per ulteriori informazioni sull’impostazione <strong>de</strong>lle opzioni, ve<strong>de</strong>re pag. 12.<br />
Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante le funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserim<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l PIN.<br />
❑<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Channel List Option (in Programme med )<br />
E’ possibile visualizzare, modificare o annullare una pr<strong>en</strong>otazione.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il m<strong>en</strong>u Option.<br />
Modifica info: Selezionare questa funzione per modificare una pr<strong>en</strong>otazione.<br />
Annulla Programmazioni: Selezionare questa funzione per annullare una<br />
pr<strong>en</strong>otazione.<br />
Informazioni: Selezionare questa funzione per visualizzare una<br />
pr<strong>en</strong>otazione.<br />
(è anche possibile modificare le informazioni relative alla pr<strong>en</strong>otazione).<br />
Seleziona tutti / Deseleziona tutti: Seleziona o <strong>de</strong>seleziona tutti i programmi<br />
pr<strong>en</strong>otati.<br />
Programmato<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 Modifica TV1 info Quincy, M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Annulla Programmazioni<br />
TV3 The Equalizzatore<br />
Informazioni<br />
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Seleziona tutti<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Tutto • Zoom • Selezione Strum<strong>en</strong>ti Informazioni<br />
Italiano - 16
Controllo <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine<br />
Modifica e reimpostazione <strong>de</strong>lle impostazioni <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Modalità<br />
È possibile selezionare il tipo di immagine che più corrispon<strong>de</strong> alle proprie esig<strong>en</strong>ze.<br />
• Dinamica: Seleziona l'alta <strong>de</strong>finizione <strong>de</strong>lle immagini per ambi<strong>en</strong>ti con forte<br />
illuminazione.<br />
• Standard: Seleziona la visualizzazione ottimale <strong>de</strong>lle immagini per normali<br />
condizioni di illuminazione ambi<strong>en</strong>tale.<br />
• Film: Seleziona una visualizzazione confortevole <strong>de</strong>lle immagini per<br />
condizioni di scarsa illuminazione ambi<strong>en</strong>tale.<br />
T<br />
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
E’ possibile anche impostare la modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine selezionando<br />
Strum<strong>en</strong>ti → Modalità immagine.<br />
Luce cella / Contrasto / Luminosità / Niti<strong>de</strong>zza / Colore / Tinta (V/R)<br />
Il televisore ha diverse opzioni che cons<strong>en</strong>tono di controllare la qualità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
• Luce cella: Regola la luminosità <strong>de</strong>i pixel.<br />
• Contrasto: Regola il livello di contrasto.<br />
• Luminosità: Regola il livello di luminosità.<br />
• Niti<strong>de</strong>zza: Regola la niti<strong>de</strong>zza.<br />
• Colore: Regola la saturazione <strong>de</strong>l colore utilizzando la barra visualizzata sullo schermo.<br />
• Tinta (V/R): Più prossimo a Rosso 100, più saturo div<strong>en</strong>ta il colore rosso.<br />
N Seleziona per prima una modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine da regolare. Per ogni modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine v<strong>en</strong>gono memorizzati i<br />
valori modificati.<br />
Immagine<br />
Modalità : Standard ►<br />
Luce cella : 4<br />
Contrasto : 95<br />
Luminosità : 45<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>zza : 50<br />
Colore : 50<br />
Tinta (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Apportando le modifiche a Luce cella, Contrasto, Luminosità, Niti<strong>de</strong>zza, Colore o Tinta (V/R), il OSD verrà regolato di<br />
consegu<strong>en</strong>za.<br />
In modalità Analog TV, Ext., AV, S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o <strong>de</strong>l sistema PAL, non è possibile utilizzare la funzione Tinta.<br />
Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV.<br />
E’ possibile ridurre significativam<strong>en</strong>te il consumo di <strong>en</strong>ergia, e i costi ad esso associati, diminu<strong>en</strong>do la luminosità <strong>de</strong>llo<br />
schermo.<br />
Impostazioni avanzate<br />
I nuovi TV <strong>Samsung</strong> permettono di impostare ancora più precisam<strong>en</strong>te la<br />
visualizzazione <strong>de</strong>lle immagini rispetto ai mo<strong>de</strong>lli prece<strong>de</strong>nti. Per eseguire le<br />
impostazioni particolareggiate ve<strong>de</strong>re più avanti.<br />
N La modalità Impostazioni avanzate è disponibile in modalità Standard o Film.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Tonalità nero → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Scuro / Più scura / Extra scura<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di selezionare il livello di nero <strong>de</strong>llo schermo per regolare la profondità<br />
<strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
Contrasto Dinamico → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Bassa / Media / Alto<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di regolare in modo ottimale il livello di contrasto <strong>de</strong>llo schermo.<br />
Gamma<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di regolare l’int<strong>en</strong>sità <strong>de</strong>i colori primari (rosso, ver<strong>de</strong>, blu).<br />
Spazio colore<br />
Reset immagine<br />
Spazio colore è la matrice di colori composta dai colori rosso, ver<strong>de</strong> e blu. Per scoprire lo straordinario mondo <strong>de</strong>i colori<br />
naturali basta selezionare lo spazio colore preferito.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Auto: Imposta automaticam<strong>en</strong>te la gamma <strong>de</strong>i colori in base alla sorg<strong>en</strong>te vi<strong>de</strong>o di ingresso.<br />
Nativa: Imposta una gamma <strong>de</strong>i colori più ampia rispetto alla sorg<strong>en</strong>te vi<strong>de</strong>o di ingresso.<br />
• Bilan bianco<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di regolare la temperatura <strong>de</strong>l colore per ott<strong>en</strong>ere immagini più naturali.<br />
• R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset/ R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo vi<strong>en</strong>e<br />
automaticam<strong>en</strong>te aggiornato.<br />
• Reset: Reimposta il bilanciam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l bianco al valore pre<strong>de</strong>finito.<br />
• Incarnato<br />
E’ possibile <strong>en</strong>fatizzare il tono incarnato <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
N Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo vi<strong>en</strong>e automaticam<strong>en</strong>te aggiornato.<br />
• Migliora imm bordi → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso<br />
E’ possibile <strong>en</strong>fatizzare i contorni <strong>de</strong>gli oggetti <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
Immagine<br />
Colore : 50<br />
Tinta (V/R)<br />
Impostazioni avanzate<br />
Opzioni immagine<br />
: V50/R50<br />
►<br />
Italiano - 17
❑<br />
Opzioni immagine<br />
• Toni colore→ Freddo / Normale / Caldo1 / Caldo2<br />
È possibile selezionare il tono <strong>de</strong>l colore ottimale per la propria vista.<br />
N Le regolazioni v<strong>en</strong>gono memorizzate in base alla modalità Immagine<br />
selezionata.<br />
N Caldo1 o Caldo2 v<strong>en</strong>gono attivate solo quando la modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine<br />
è Film.<br />
• Dim<strong>en</strong>sione<br />
È possibile impostare il formato <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine che più si adatta alle proprie<br />
esig<strong>en</strong>ze.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Automatico: Imposta l’immagine in formato Auto wi<strong>de</strong>.<br />
16:9: Imposta il formato <strong>de</strong>lle immagini su 16:9.<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Selezionare questo m<strong>en</strong>u per ve<strong>de</strong>re le immagini in formato 4:3 su un televisore in formato 16:9 allargando<br />
verticalm<strong>en</strong>te le immagini 4:3.<br />
Zoom: Allarga verticalm<strong>en</strong>te il formato 16:9 <strong>de</strong>lle immagini.<br />
4:3: Imposta il formato <strong>de</strong>lle immagini a 4:3.<br />
Adatta allo schermo: Visualizza il segnale pi<strong>en</strong>am<strong>en</strong>te nativo HD non visualizzabile mediante un normale TV.<br />
A seconda <strong>de</strong>l tipo di sorg<strong>en</strong>te di ingresso, le opzioni relative alla dim<strong>en</strong>sione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine possono variare.<br />
Le voci disponibili variano in base alla modalità selezionata.<br />
Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV.<br />
Se si visualizza una immagine fissa per oltre due ore, sullo schermo potrebbe apparire una immagine residua<br />
temporanea.<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Premere il tasto ► per selezionare Posizione, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Per spostare l’immagine<br />
in alto o in basso, utilizzare il tasto ▲ o ▼. Quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
Zoom: Premere il tasto ► per selezionare Posizione, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼<br />
per spostare l’immagine verso l’alto o il basso. Quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Premere il tasto ► per selezionare<br />
Formato, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per aum<strong>en</strong>tare o ridurre il formato <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine in<br />
direzione verticale. Quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
Dopo aver selezionata l’opzione Adatta allo schermo in modalità HDMI (1080i/1080p) o Compon<strong>en</strong>t (1080i/1080p):<br />
Selezionare Posizione prem<strong>en</strong>do il pulsante ◄ o ►. Utilizzare il tasto ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► per spostare l’immagine.<br />
Reset: Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Reset, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE . E’ possibile azzerare<br />
l’impostazione.<br />
Usando la funzione Adatta allo schermo/ con un ingresso HDMI 720p, 1 riga verrà tagliata all’inizio, alla fine, a sinistra e<br />
a <strong>de</strong>stra come nella funzione di overscan.<br />
• Mod schermo<br />
Quando si imposta la dim<strong>en</strong>sione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine a Automatico su un televisore con formato 16:9, è possibile <strong>de</strong>terminare o<br />
m<strong>en</strong>o le dim<strong>en</strong>sioni <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine da visualizzare nel formato 4:3 WSS (Wi<strong>de</strong> Scre<strong>en</strong> Service). Ogni nazione europea richie<strong>de</strong><br />
un formato <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine diverso e questa funzione <strong>de</strong>ve essere quindi selezionata dall’ut<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
16:9: Imposta il formato <strong>de</strong>lle immagini su 16:9.<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Selezionare questo m<strong>en</strong>u per ve<strong>de</strong>re le immagini in formato 4:3 su un televisore in formato 16:9 allargando<br />
verticalm<strong>en</strong>te le immagini 4:3.<br />
Zoom: Allarga verticalm<strong>en</strong>te il formato 16:9 <strong>de</strong>lle immagini.<br />
4:3: Seleziona la modalità schermo per 4:3.<br />
N Questa funzione è disponibile in modalità Automatico.<br />
Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità Comp. o HDMI.<br />
• Digital NR → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Bassa / Media / Alto / Automatico<br />
Se il segnale ricevuto dal televisore è <strong>de</strong>bole, è possibile attivare la funzione Digital Noise Reduction per ridurre i disturbi<br />
statici e l’effetto ghosting sullo schermo.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se il segnale è <strong>de</strong>bole, selezionare una <strong>de</strong>lle altre opzioni disponibili fino a ott<strong>en</strong>ere la migliore qualità visiva.<br />
• Livello di nero HDMI → Normale / Bassa<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di selezionare direttam<strong>en</strong>te il livello di nero sullo schermo per regolarne la profondità.<br />
N<br />
Questa funzione si attiva solo quando l’ingresso esterno è collegato a HDMI (segnali RGB).<br />
Picture<br />
Tinta (V/R)<br />
Impostazioni avanzate<br />
Opzioni immagine<br />
Reset immagine<br />
: V50/R50<br />
►<br />
Italiano - 18<br />
Continua...
• Modalità Film<br />
E’ possibile ottimizzare la modalità <strong>de</strong>lla immagini per la visione di film.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Off : Utilizzato per l’elaborazione di immagini vi<strong>de</strong>o; nessuna rilevazione automatica per film.<br />
Auto: Regola automaticam<strong>en</strong>te l’immagine per visualizzare al meglio programmi vi<strong>de</strong>o e film.<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection (Protezione bruciatura schermo)<br />
Configura le opzioni Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection (Protezione bruciatura schermo) per evitare e ridurre la formazione di pixel<br />
danneggiati.<br />
Se un’immagine rimane fissa per un lungo periodo di tempo, può causare una bruciatura perman<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>i pixel.<br />
• Spostam pixel: Per ridurre il rischio di incorrere nella bruciatura <strong>de</strong>llo schermo, questa unità è equipaggiata con una<br />
tecnologia che previ<strong>en</strong>e questo f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o. Questa tecnologia permette di programmare lo spostam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>lle immagini su<br />
e giù (verticali) e lateralm<strong>en</strong>te (orizzontali). L'impostazione <strong>de</strong>ll'Ora cons<strong>en</strong>te di programmare i minuti di intervallo tra uno<br />
spostam<strong>en</strong>to e l'altro <strong>de</strong>lle immagini.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Impostare Spostam pixel su On prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto ▲ o ▼, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
Selezionare l’opzione <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rata prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto ▲ o ▼, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.<br />
Le opzioni disponibili sono: Orizzontali, Verticali, Ora.<br />
Condizione ottimale per uno spostam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>i pixel<br />
Oggetto<br />
TV/Est/AV/Comp./HDMI<br />
Orizzontali 0~4 2<br />
Verticali 0~4 2<br />
Ora (Minuto) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
N Il valore Pixel Shift può differire in base alla dim<strong>en</strong>sione <strong>de</strong>l monitor (pollici) e alla modalità.<br />
N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità Adatta allo schermo.<br />
• Scorrim<strong>en</strong>to: Questa funzione cons<strong>en</strong>te di rimuovere le immagini residue sullo schermo spostando tutti i pixel sul PDP<br />
in base a una sequ<strong>en</strong>za Usare questa funzione in pres<strong>en</strong>za di immagini o simboli persist<strong>en</strong>ti sullo schermo, specialm<strong>en</strong>te<br />
quando è stata visualizzata per lungo tempo una immagine fissa.<br />
• Grigio laterale: Quando si utilizza il formato 4:3, è possibile evitare il rischio di danni allo schermo regolando il<br />
bilanciam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l bianco sull'estremità <strong>de</strong>stra e sinistra.<br />
− Scuro: Con il formato 4:3, oscura i lati <strong>de</strong>stro e sinistro.<br />
− Chiaro: Con il formato 4:3, schiarisce i lati <strong>de</strong>stro e sinistro.<br />
❑<br />
Reset immagine → Azzera modalità immagine / Cancella<br />
Ripristina tutte le impostazione <strong>de</strong>lle immagini ai valori pre<strong>de</strong>finiti.<br />
N Seleziona una modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine da regolare. Vi<strong>en</strong>e eseguita la funzione<br />
Reset per ogni modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
Immagine Picture<br />
Impostazioni avanzate<br />
Opzioni immagine<br />
Reset immagine ▲<br />
►<br />
Italiano - 19
Controllo <strong>de</strong>ll’audio<br />
Modifica <strong>de</strong>llo standard audio<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Modalità → Standard / Musica / Film / Voce cristallina / Personaliz<br />
È possibile selezionare il tipo di effetto audio da utilizzare durante la visione di una<br />
trasmissione.<br />
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
E’ possibile anche impostare la modalità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine selezionando<br />
Strum<strong>en</strong>ti → Modalità audio.<br />
Equalizzatore<br />
Le impostazioni audio possono essere regolate in base alle proprie prefer<strong>en</strong>ze<br />
personali.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Modalità: E’ possibile selezionare una modalità audio per soddisfare le proprie prefer<strong>en</strong>ze.<br />
Bilanciam<strong>en</strong>to: Controlla il bilanciam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>gli altoparlanti sinistro e <strong>de</strong>stro.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustm<strong>en</strong>t): Per regolare il livello <strong>de</strong>lle diverse frequ<strong>en</strong>ze di<br />
larghezza di banda.<br />
Reset: Ripristina le impostazione pre<strong>de</strong>finite <strong>de</strong>ll’equalizzatore.<br />
TruSurround HD SRS → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso<br />
SRS TruSurround HD è la tecnologia combinata di TruSurround e FOCUS, TruBass.<br />
<br />
SRS TruSurround HD permette di go<strong>de</strong>re di un effetto audio virtuale 5.1 Surround attraverso i due altoparlanti <strong>de</strong>l televisore.<br />
Questa funzione non solo fornisce suoni bassi e ricchi ma migliora anche i toni alti.<br />
N<br />
Se durante la riproduzione di musica sul televisore l’audio è anomalo, regolare l’equalizzatore e SRS TruSurround HD<br />
(Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso).<br />
Suono<br />
Modalità : Personaliz ►<br />
Equalizzatore<br />
TruSurround HD SRS : Sp<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Lingua <strong>de</strong>ll'audio : ----<br />
Formato audio : ----<br />
Descrozione audion<br />
Volume auto<br />
: Sp<strong>en</strong>to<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS e il simbolo sono marchi di SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnologia<br />
TruSurround HD è utilizzata su lic<strong>en</strong>za di SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Lingua <strong>de</strong>ll'audio (solo canali digitali)<br />
È possibile modificare la lingua pre<strong>de</strong>finita. Visualizza le informazioni sulla lingua relative alla trasmissione in corso.<br />
N<br />
E’ possibile selezionare solo una <strong>de</strong>lle lingue trasmesse.<br />
Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (solo canali digitali)<br />
Quando l’audio è g<strong>en</strong>erato sia dall’altoparlante principale sia dal ricevitore audio, potrebbe prodursi un effetto di eco a causa<br />
<strong>de</strong>lla diversa velocità di <strong>de</strong>codifica <strong>de</strong>i due dispositivi. In questo caso, attivare la funzione TV Speaker.<br />
N<br />
E’ possibile selezionare solo una <strong>de</strong>lle lingue trasmesse.<br />
Prodotto su lic<strong>en</strong>za di Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby e il simbolo <strong>de</strong>lla doppia D sono marchi di Dolby Laboratories.<br />
❑<br />
Descrozione audion (solo canali digitali)<br />
Questa funzione audio ausiliaria fornisce una traccia audio aggiuntiva per aiutare le persone con problemi visivi. Questa<br />
funzione gestisce il flusso audio per l’opzione AD (Audio Description), quando è trasmesso insieme all’Audio principale<br />
dall’emitt<strong>en</strong>te. Gli ut<strong>en</strong>ti possono attivare o disattivare la funzione Audio Description selezionando On o Off e regolarne il<br />
volume.<br />
O<br />
È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicem<strong>en</strong>te prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto AD<br />
sul telecomando.<br />
• Descrozione audion → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso<br />
Attiva e disattiva la funzione Audio Description.<br />
• Volume<br />
E’ possibile regolare il volume <strong>de</strong>lla funzione Audio Description.<br />
N<br />
Volume è attivo quando la funzione Descrozione audion è impostata su Acceso.<br />
Italiano - 20<br />
Continua...
❑<br />
❑<br />
Volume auto → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso<br />
Le condizioni <strong>de</strong>l segnale variano a seconda <strong>de</strong>ll’emitt<strong>en</strong>te, ma non è pratico regolare il volume ogni volta che si cambia<br />
canale. Questa funzione cons<strong>en</strong>te di regolare automaticam<strong>en</strong>te il volume <strong>de</strong>l canale <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato diminu<strong>en</strong>do il livello <strong>de</strong>ll’uscita<br />
audio quando il segnale di modulazione è alto, oppure aum<strong>en</strong>tando il livello <strong>de</strong>ll’uscita audio quando il segnale di modulazione<br />
è basso.<br />
Seleziona altoparlante → Altoparlante ester / Altoparlante TV<br />
Se si <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>ra ascoltare l’audio da altoparlanti separati, annullare l’amplificatore interno.<br />
N I tasti – +, M MUTE non sono disponibili quando Seleziona altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante esterno//<br />
Altoparlante est.<br />
N Selezionando External Speaker nel m<strong>en</strong>u Seleziona altoparlante, le impostazioni <strong>de</strong>ll’audio saranno limitate.<br />
Altoparlanti interni <strong>de</strong>l TV<br />
Audio Out (Optical, L / R Out) a sistema audio<br />
TV / Est. / AV / Comp. / HDMI<br />
TV / Est. / AV / Comp. / HDMI<br />
Altoparlante TV Uscita altoparlanti Uscita audio<br />
Altoparlante ester Mute Uscita audio<br />
Nessun segnale vi<strong>de</strong>o Mute Mute<br />
❑<br />
Reset impostazioni audio → Azzera tutto / Azz mod audio /<br />
Cancella<br />
E’ possibile ripristinare le impostazioni audio ai valori di fabbrica.<br />
Suono<br />
Volume auto<br />
: Off<br />
Seleziona altoparlante : Altoparlante TV<br />
Reset impostazioni audio ►<br />
Selezione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità audio<br />
Quando si imposta la modalità Dual I II, la modalità audio corr<strong>en</strong>te vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzata sullo schermo.<br />
Tipo di trasmissione<br />
Indicazioni a vi<strong>de</strong>o<br />
Trasmissione normale<br />
(Standard audio)<br />
Mono (Uso normale)<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Normale + NICAM Mono<br />
NICAM-Stereo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normale)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normale)<br />
NICAM Dual-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normale)<br />
A2<br />
Stereo<br />
Trasmissione normale<br />
(Standard audio)<br />
Mono (Uso normale)<br />
Bilingue o DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Mono forzato)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se il segnale stereo è <strong>de</strong>bole e si verifica un cambio automatico, passare alla modalità Mono.<br />
Questa funzione è attiva solo con segnale audio stereo. Al contrario, non è attiva con segnale audio mono.<br />
Questa funzione è disponibile solo in modalità TV.<br />
Italiano - 21
Descrizione <strong>de</strong>lle funzioni<br />
Configurazione <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u Setup<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Lingua m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
E’ possibile impostare la lingua <strong>de</strong>i m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Trasmissione<br />
• Sottotitolo<br />
È possibile attivare e disattivare i sottotitoli. Utilizzare questo m<strong>en</strong>u per impostare<br />
la modalità Subtitle. L’opzione di m<strong>en</strong>u Normale rappres<strong>en</strong>ta il sottotitolo di base<br />
m<strong>en</strong>tre Non u<strong>de</strong>nti è il sottotitolo per le persone con problemi uditivi.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Sottotitolo → Acceso / Sp<strong>en</strong>to: Attiva e disattiva i sottotitoli.<br />
Modalità → Normale / Non u<strong>de</strong>nti: Imposta la modalità <strong>de</strong>i sottotitoli.<br />
Lingua <strong>de</strong>l Sottotitolo: Imposta la lingua <strong>de</strong>i sottotitoli.<br />
Se il programma che si sta guardando non supporta la funzione Non u<strong>de</strong>nti, si<br />
attiva automaticam<strong>en</strong>te l’opzione Normale, anche se è selezionata la modalità<br />
Non u<strong>de</strong>nti.<br />
L’inglese è la lingua pre<strong>de</strong>finita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la<br />
lingua selezionata.<br />
È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicem<strong>en</strong>te prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto SUBT.<br />
sul telecomando.<br />
Impostazione<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Lingua m<strong>en</strong>u : Italiano ►<br />
Ora<br />
Trasmissione<br />
Sicurezza<br />
G<strong>en</strong>erale<br />
• Testo digitale → Attiva / Disattiva<br />
Se il programma è trasmesso con testo digitale, questa funzione è attivata.<br />
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
Uno standard internazionale per i sistemi di codifica <strong>de</strong>i dati multimediali e ipermediali. È un sistema più complesso<br />
rispetto al formato MPEG in quanto inclu<strong>de</strong> collegam<strong>en</strong>ti a dati ipermediali come immagini fisse, servizi di caratteri,<br />
animazioni, grafica e file vi<strong>de</strong>o, oltre ai dati multimediali. MHEG è una tecnologia interattiva con vari campi di<br />
applicazione, come sistemi VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), teleformazione,<br />
teleconfer<strong>en</strong>ze, librerie digitali e vi<strong>de</strong>ogiochi di rete.<br />
• Lingua Teletext<br />
E’ possibile impostare la lingua <strong>de</strong>l Teletext.<br />
N L’inglese è la lingua pre<strong>de</strong>finita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la lingua selezionata.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Prefer<strong>en</strong>za<br />
Lingua principale audio / Lingua secondaria audio / Lingua princip sottotitoli / Lingua second sottotitoli /<br />
Lingua principale Teletext / Lingua secondaria Teletext<br />
Mediante questa funzione, gli ut<strong>en</strong>ti sono in grado di selezionare una <strong>de</strong>lle lingue disponibili. La lingua selezionata vi<strong>en</strong>e<br />
impostata automaticam<strong>en</strong>te durante la selezione di un canale.<br />
Modificando l’impostazione <strong>de</strong>lla lingua, le opzioni Subtitle Language, Audio Language, Teletext Language <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Language v<strong>en</strong>gono automaticam<strong>en</strong>te impostate sulla lingua selezionata.<br />
Le opzioni Subtitle Language, Audio Language, e Teletext Language <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u Language mostrano l’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>lle lingue<br />
supportate dal canale corr<strong>en</strong>te, dove l’opzione corr<strong>en</strong>te appare evi<strong>de</strong>nziata. Se si modifica una di queste opzioni, la nuova<br />
lingua vi<strong>en</strong>e applicata solo al canale corr<strong>en</strong>te. La nuova impostazione non vi<strong>en</strong>e invece applicata alle opzioni Primary Subtitle<br />
Language, Primary Audio Language o Primary Teletext Language <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>u Prefer<strong>en</strong>ce.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Interfaccia comune<br />
Installazione <strong>de</strong>lla scheda CI<br />
1. Acquistare il modulo CI CAM presso il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore locale più vicino o via<br />
telefono.<br />
2. Inserire la scheda CI nel CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia.<br />
3. Inserire il CAM con la scheda CI installata nello slot common interface.<br />
N Inserire completam<strong>en</strong>te il CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia in modo<br />
che risulti parallelo allo slot.<br />
4. Verificare la visione <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine su un canale a segnale criptato.<br />
CI M<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Ciò permette all’ut<strong>en</strong>te di acce<strong>de</strong>re al m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong>l CAM.<br />
Selezionare il CI M<strong>en</strong>u in base alla scheda PC.<br />
• Informazioni sull’applicazione<br />
Conti<strong>en</strong>e informazioni sul CAM inserita nello slot CI e le visualizza.<br />
Le informazioni sull’applicazione sono relative alla scheda CI. È possibile installare la CAM in qualsiasi mom<strong>en</strong>to sia m<strong>en</strong>tre il<br />
televisore è acceso sia m<strong>en</strong>tre è sp<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
N Il modulo CAM non è supportato in alcune nazioni e regioni; controllare con il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore autorizzato di zona.<br />
Continua...<br />
Italiano - 22
❑<br />
Sicurezza<br />
• Blocco canali → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso<br />
Tramite questa funzione è possibile impedire agli ut<strong>en</strong>ti non autorizzati, ad esempio i bambini, di guardare programmi non<br />
adatti a loro, annullando il vi<strong>de</strong>o e azzerando l’audio.<br />
Prima <strong>de</strong>lla comparsa <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine, compare la richiesta <strong>de</strong>l PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.<br />
Il PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è '0-0-0-0'. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel<br />
m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
E’ possibile bloccare alcuni canali nell’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>i canali. (ve<strong>de</strong>re pagina 15).<br />
Blocco canali è disponibile solo in modalità TV.<br />
• Blocco Canale<br />
Questa funzione cons<strong>en</strong>te di immettere un codice PIN di i<strong>de</strong>ntificazione personale a 4 cifre <strong>de</strong>finito dall’ut<strong>en</strong>te per impedire<br />
agli ut<strong>en</strong>ti non autorizzati, come ad esempio i bambini, di ve<strong>de</strong>re programmi inadatti a loro.<br />
Prima <strong>de</strong>lla comparsa <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine, compare la richiesta <strong>de</strong>l PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.<br />
Il PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è '0-0-0-0'. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Immetti PIN nel m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Una volta impostata la classificazione <strong>de</strong>i programmi, verrà visualizzato il simbolo "\".<br />
Cons tutto: Premere per sbloccare tutte le classificazioni <strong>de</strong>i canali TV.<br />
Bloc tutto: Premere per bloccare tutte le classificazioni <strong>de</strong>i canali TV.<br />
• Cambia PIN<br />
E’ possibile modificare il numero di ID necessario per impostare il TV.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Prima <strong>de</strong>lla comparsa <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine, compare la richiesta <strong>de</strong>l PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.<br />
Il PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è '0-0-0-0'.<br />
Qualora si sia dim<strong>en</strong>ticato il codice PIN, premere i tasti <strong>de</strong>l telecomando nella sequ<strong>en</strong>za segu<strong>en</strong>te per ripristinare il codice<br />
PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finito '0-0-0-0' : POWER (Sp<strong>en</strong>to), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Acceso).<br />
G<strong>en</strong>erale<br />
• Modalità gioco → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Acceso<br />
Durante la connessione a una console per vi<strong>de</strong>ogiochi come PlayStation TM o Xbox TM , il gioco sarà più realistico selezionando il<br />
relativo m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
• Quando la Modalità gioco è Acceso<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
La modalità Immagine vi<strong>en</strong>e automaticam<strong>en</strong>te impostata su Standard e non può essere modificata.<br />
La modalità Suono vi<strong>en</strong>e automaticam<strong>en</strong>te impostata su Personalizza e non può essere modificata. Regolare l’audio<br />
mediante l’equalizzatore.<br />
La funzione Reset nel m<strong>en</strong>u Suono è attivata. La funzione Reset inizializza le impostazioni <strong>de</strong>ll’Equalizzatore alle<br />
impostazione pre<strong>de</strong>finite in fabbrica.<br />
La Modalità gioco non è disponibile nella normale modalità TV o quando la Modalità gioco è Sp<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
Se la qualità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine è sca<strong>de</strong>nte quando al televisore è collegato un dispositivo esterno, verificare se la Modalità<br />
gioco è impostata su Acceso.<br />
Visualizzando il m<strong>en</strong>u TV in Modalità gioco si potrebbe verificare un leggero sfarfallio..<br />
Il simbolo ( ) comparirà sullo schermo, a indicare che la Modalità gioco è attiva con la sorg<strong>en</strong>te selezionata.<br />
Questa funzione supporta solo la funzione giochi.<br />
• Risp. <strong>en</strong>ergia<br />
Questa funzione regola la luminosità <strong>de</strong>l televisore in modo da ridurre il consumo di <strong>en</strong>ergia. Durante la visione notturna <strong>de</strong>l<br />
televisore, impostare l’opzione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Risp. <strong>en</strong>ergia su Alto in modo da ridurre l’affaticam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>gli occhi oltre al<br />
consumo <strong>en</strong>ergetico.<br />
Selezionando Immagine off, lo schermo si spegne lasciando attivo solo l’audio. Premere un tasto qualsiasi per uscire dalla<br />
modalità Immagine off.<br />
N Nel m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti, la funzione Immagine off non è supportata.<br />
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
E’ anche possibile impostare l’opzione <strong>en</strong>ergy saving selezionando Strum<strong>en</strong>ti →<br />
Risp. <strong>en</strong>ergia.<br />
• Melodia → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / Bassa / Medio / Alto<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di regolare l’effetto audio associato all’acc<strong>en</strong>sione/spegnim<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l televisore.<br />
N La modalità Melody non funziona<br />
- Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto MMUTE.<br />
- Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto – (Volume).<br />
- Se il televisore è stato sp<strong>en</strong>to mediante la funzione Timer stand-by.<br />
Italiano - 23
Impostazione <strong>de</strong>ll’orologio<br />
❑<br />
Orologio<br />
L’impostazione <strong>de</strong>ll’orologio è necessaria per utilizzare le varie funzioni di timer <strong>de</strong>l<br />
TV.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
L’ora corr<strong>en</strong>te appare ogni qualvolta si preme il tasto INFO.<br />
Se il cavo di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione vi<strong>en</strong>e scollegato, è necessario impostare<br />
nuovam<strong>en</strong>te l’orologio.<br />
Impostazione<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Lingua m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Ora<br />
Trasmissione<br />
Sicurezza<br />
G<strong>en</strong>erale<br />
: Italiano<br />
►<br />
• Modalità orologio<br />
E’ possibile impostare manualm<strong>en</strong>te o automaticam<strong>en</strong>te l’orario corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Auto: Imposta automaticam<strong>en</strong>te l’orario corr<strong>en</strong>te utilizzando l’orario inviato<br />
dalla trasmissione digitale.<br />
Manuale: Imposta manualm<strong>en</strong>te l’ora corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Imposta Ora<br />
È possibile impostare manualm<strong>en</strong>te l’ora corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Impostare questa voce una volta impostato Modalità orologio a Manuale.<br />
È possibile impostare il Mese, il Giorno, L’anno, L’ora e i Minuti prem<strong>en</strong>do<br />
direttam<strong>en</strong>te i tasti numerici <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
Ora<br />
Orologio : -- : -- ►<br />
Timer stand-by : Sp<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Timer 1<br />
: Disattivato<br />
Timer 2<br />
: Disattivato<br />
Timer 3<br />
: Disattivato<br />
❑<br />
Timer stand-by → Sp<strong>en</strong>to / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min /<br />
150 min / 180 min<br />
Il timer di spegnim<strong>en</strong>to disattiva automaticam<strong>en</strong>te il TV dopo il tempo impostato.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Quando il timer raggiunge lo 0 il televisore passa automaticam<strong>en</strong>te in modalità Standby.<br />
Per annullare la funzione Timer stand-by, selezionare Sp<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
T<br />
Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il m<strong>en</strong>u Strum<strong>en</strong>ti. E’ anche possibile<br />
impostare il timer di spegnim<strong>en</strong>to selezionando Strum<strong>en</strong>ti → Timer stand-by.<br />
U Sposta E Conferma R Ritorno<br />
❑<br />
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3<br />
Possono essere impostate tre diverse opzioni <strong>de</strong>l Timer.<br />
• Orario TV on: Impostare l’ora e i minuti e premere Activate / Inactivate.<br />
(per attivare il timer, scegliere Attiva)<br />
• Orario TV off: Impostare l’ora e i minuti e premere Activate / Inactivate.<br />
(per attivare il timer, scegliere Attiva)<br />
• Volume: Selezionare il livello <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato <strong>de</strong>l volume.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>na: E’ possibile selezionare DTV o ATV all’acc<strong>en</strong>sione automatica <strong>de</strong>l televisore.<br />
• Canale: Selezionare il canale <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato.<br />
• Ripetizione: Selezionare Una volta, Ogni gg, Lun ~ V<strong>en</strong>, Lun ~ Sab, Sab ~ Dom, o Manuale.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Quando vi<strong>en</strong>e selezionato Manuale, premere il tasto ► per impostare il giorno <strong>de</strong>lla settimana. Premere il tasto<br />
ENTERE sul giorno <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato per visualizzare un simbolo c.<br />
E’ prima necessario impostare l’orologio.<br />
È possibile impostare l’ora, i minuti e il canale anche prem<strong>en</strong>do i tasti numerici <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
Spegnim<strong>en</strong>to in ass<strong>en</strong>za di operazioni<br />
Quando il televisore si acc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> attraverso il timer impostato su On, si spegne automaticam<strong>en</strong>te se per tre ore non vi<strong>en</strong>e<br />
premuto alcun tasto di controllo. Questa funzione è disponibile solo se il timer è impostato a On e impedisce l’ev<strong>en</strong>tuale<br />
surriscaldam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l televisore dovuto a un periodo di acc<strong>en</strong>sione troppo lungo.<br />
Italiano - 24
El<strong>en</strong>co sorg<strong>en</strong>ti / Modifica Nome<br />
❑<br />
El<strong>en</strong>co sorg<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
Questa funzione vi<strong>en</strong>e usata per selezionare il TV o un altra sorg<strong>en</strong>te di ingresso<br />
come un lettore DVD o un <strong>de</strong>co<strong>de</strong>r digitale / ricevitore satellitare (Set-Top Box)<br />
collegato al televisore. Utilizzare la funzione per selezionare la sorg<strong>en</strong>te di ingresso<br />
<strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rata.<br />
• TV, Est., AV, PC, Com., HDMI1, HDMI2 / DVI.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
E’ possibile scegliere solo i dispositivi esterni collegati al televisore. In El<strong>en</strong>co<br />
sorg<strong>en</strong>ti, gli ingressi collegati verranno evi<strong>de</strong>nziati e ordinati in cima all’el<strong>en</strong>co.<br />
Gli ingressi non collegati verranno ordinati in fondo all’el<strong>en</strong>co.<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong>i tasti colorati <strong>de</strong>l telecomando nell’el<strong>en</strong>co <strong>de</strong>lle sorg<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
- TTOOLS (Opzione): Visualizza i m<strong>en</strong>u Modifica Nome e Informazioni.<br />
Premere il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando per visualizzare una sorg<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l<br />
segnale esterna. La modalità TV può essere selezionata prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto TV,<br />
i tasti numerici (0~9), e il tasto P< / > sul telecomando.<br />
Modifica Nome<br />
El<strong>en</strong>co sorg<strong>en</strong>ti<br />
Modifica Nome<br />
• VCR / DVD / VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC / DVI PC /<br />
DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N Quando un PC con una risoluzione di PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz è collegato alla porta<br />
HDMI IN 2, è necessario impostare la modalità HDMI IN 2 (DVI) a PC in Modifica Nome <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Ingressi.<br />
Ingressi<br />
Italiano - 25
Schermo <strong>de</strong>l PC<br />
❑<br />
Impostazione <strong>de</strong>l software <strong>de</strong>l PC (basato su Windows XP)<br />
Di seguito v<strong>en</strong>gono illustrate le impostazioni di visualizzazione di Windows<br />
per un PC tipico. Le schermate visualizzate sul PC possono differire in base<br />
alla versione di Windows e alla scheda vi<strong>de</strong>o installate. Nel caso le schermate<br />
risultassero differ<strong>en</strong>ti, le stesse informazioni di base per la configurazione sono<br />
applicabili in quasi tutti i casi (in caso contrario, contattare la casa costruttrice<br />
<strong>de</strong>l computer oppure un riv<strong>en</strong>ditore <strong>Samsung</strong>).<br />
1. Fare clic sul ‘Control Panel’ nel m<strong>en</strong>u Start di Windows.<br />
2. Quando appare la finestra <strong>de</strong>l pannello di controllo, fare clic su ‘Appearance e<br />
Themes’, Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo.<br />
3. Quando appare la finestra <strong>de</strong>l pannello di controllo, fare clic su ‘Display’, Verrà<br />
visualizzata una finestra di dialogo.<br />
4. Fare clic sulla scheda ‘Settings’, nella finestra di dialogo.<br />
Impostazione <strong>de</strong>lla corretta dim<strong>en</strong>sione (risoluzione)<br />
Ottimale<br />
- PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixel<br />
- PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixel<br />
Se la finestra di dialogo <strong>de</strong>lle impostazioni conti<strong>en</strong>e un’opzione relativa alla frequ<strong>en</strong>za verticale, il valore corretto è ‘60’ o<br />
‘60 Hz’. In caso contrario, fare clic su ‘OK’ e uscire dalla finestra di dialogo.<br />
Modalità di visualizzazione<br />
La posizione e la dim<strong>en</strong>sione <strong>de</strong>llo schermo variano in base al tipo di schermo <strong>de</strong>l PC e alla relativa risoluzione.<br />
Le risoluzioni incluse nella tabella sono consigliate.<br />
• Ingresso HDMI/DVI<br />
Modalità<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
VESA DMT<br />
VESA CVT<br />
Risoluzione<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>za<br />
orizzontale (kHz<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>za<br />
verticale (Hz)<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>za di<br />
clock <strong>de</strong>i pixel<br />
(MHz)<br />
Polarità sync<br />
(O/V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
PS50B430<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
In caso di uso di u cavo di connessione HDMI / DVI è necessario usare la presa HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
La modalità interlacciata non è supportata.<br />
Questo dispositivo potrebbe non funzionare correttam<strong>en</strong>te se si seleziona un formato vi<strong>de</strong>o non standard.<br />
Italiano - 26
Programmi supportati<br />
❑<br />
•<br />
❑<br />
Auto diagnosi<br />
Test immagine, Test audio, Informazioni sul segnale<br />
In caso di problemi di Immagine, Audio o Segnale, eseguire il test. E’ possibile verificare lo stato <strong>de</strong>l problema.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se non c’è ritorno audio dagli altoparlanti <strong>de</strong>l televisore, prima di eseguire il test verificare che Seleziona altoparlante sia<br />
impostato su Altoparlante TV nel m<strong>en</strong>u Suono.<br />
E’ possibile ascoltare la melodia durante il test anche se Seleziona altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante esterno<br />
oppure l’audio è stato disattivato mediante la pressione <strong>de</strong>l tasto M MUTE.<br />
Se il misuratore <strong>de</strong>lla pot<strong>en</strong>za <strong>de</strong>l segnale indica che il segnale è <strong>de</strong>bole, regolare fisicam<strong>en</strong>te l’ant<strong>en</strong>na per aum<strong>en</strong>tare il<br />
segnale. Continuare a regolare l’ant<strong>en</strong>na fino a trovare la posizione migliore per ricevere il segnale in modo ottimale.<br />
Aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to software<br />
Gli aggiornam<strong>en</strong>ti <strong>de</strong>l prodotto, cont<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong>ti le nuove funzionalità <strong>de</strong>lla televisione digitale, v<strong>en</strong>gono trasmessi periodicam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
tramite il normale segnale televisivo. Il prodotto rileva automaticam<strong>en</strong>te questi segnali e visualizza la finestra di aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to<br />
<strong>de</strong>l software. E’ possibile avviare da questa finestra l’installazione <strong>de</strong>gli aggiornam<strong>en</strong>ti.<br />
• Tramite USB<br />
Inserire un’unità USB cont<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong>te l’aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l firmware nel televisore.<br />
Fare att<strong>en</strong>zione a non disattivare l’alim<strong>en</strong>tazione o rimuovere l’unità USB m<strong>en</strong>tre l’<br />
aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to è in corso. Al termine <strong>de</strong>ll’aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l firmware, il televisore si<br />
spegnerà e riacc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rà automaticam<strong>en</strong>te. Verificare la versione <strong>de</strong>l firmware al termine<br />
<strong>de</strong>ll’aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to. Al termine <strong>de</strong>ll’aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l software, le impostazioni vi<strong>de</strong>o e<br />
audio modificate torneranno alle impostazioni pre<strong>de</strong>finite di fabbrica.<br />
• Tramite canale<br />
Aggiorna il software mediante il segnale trasmesso.<br />
• Aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to mod Standby<br />
Per continuare l’aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to software anche quando l’alim<strong>en</strong>tazione principale è attiva, selezionare On prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto<br />
▲ o ▼ . 45 minuti dopo l’attivazione <strong>de</strong>lla modalità Standby, vi<strong>en</strong>e effettuato un aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to manuale. Poiché l’<br />
alim<strong>en</strong>tazione <strong>de</strong>ll’unità si attiva internam<strong>en</strong>te, lo schermo potrà attivarsi per breve tempo. Questo f<strong>en</strong>om<strong>en</strong>o può continuare<br />
per più di un’ora, fino al termine <strong>de</strong>ll’aggiornam<strong>en</strong>to software.<br />
• Software alternativo<br />
Sostituire il software attuale con uno alternativo.<br />
❑ Guida alla connessione HD<br />
Vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzata una breve introduzione su come ott<strong>en</strong>ere le migliori prestazioni dal vostro nuovo televisore ad alta<br />
risoluzione. Sono disponibili vari metodi di connessione per i dispositivi HD<br />
❑ Contattare <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
E’ possibile ott<strong>en</strong>ere le informazioni riguardanti il prodotto, il Call C<strong>en</strong>ter <strong>Samsung</strong> e il sito web.<br />
N E’ possibile passare alla pagina prece<strong>de</strong>nte o successiva prem<strong>en</strong>do il tasto ▲ o ▼ .<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
Unità USB<br />
Pannello laterale<br />
<strong>de</strong>l televisore<br />
Italiano - 27
Consigli per l’uso<br />
Funzione Teletext<br />
La maggior parte <strong>de</strong>lle emitt<strong>en</strong>ti televisive fornisce servizi informativi tramite il servizio Teletext. La pagina <strong>de</strong>ll’indice <strong>de</strong>l servizio<br />
Teletext conti<strong>en</strong>e informazioni sull’uso <strong>de</strong>l servizio. Inoltre, è possibile selezionare varie opzioni tramite i tasti <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
N Per ricevere correttam<strong>en</strong>te le informazioni <strong>de</strong>l servizio Teletext, è necessario che la ricezione <strong>de</strong>l canale sia stabile. In caso<br />
contrario, alcune informazioni potrebbero essere perse o alcune pagine potrebbero non essere visualizzate correttam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
1 : (esci)<br />
Esce dal servizio Teletext<br />
<br />
2 6 (indice)<br />
Premere questo tasto in qualsiasi mom<strong>en</strong>to per visualizzare la pagina <strong>de</strong>ll’indice.<br />
3 5 (scopri)<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di visualizzare il testo nascosto (risposte a quiz, ad esempio). Per<br />
tornare alla modalità di visualizzazione normale, premere di nuovo il tasto.<br />
1<br />
4 4 (formato)<br />
Premere questo tasto per raddoppiare le dim<strong>en</strong>sioni <strong>de</strong>i caratteri nella<br />
metà superiore <strong>de</strong>llo schermo. Premere di nuovo il tasto per ingrandire i caratteri<br />
nella metà inferiore <strong>de</strong>llo schermo. Per tornare alla modalità di visualizzazione<br />
normale, premere di nuovo il tasto.<br />
5 8 (memorizza)<br />
Utilizzato per memorizzare le pagine <strong>de</strong>l servizio Teletext.<br />
6 / (teletext attivo/mix)<br />
Premere questo tasto per attivare la modalità Teletext dopo avere selezionato<br />
un canale che fornisce questo tipo di servizio. Premere di nuovo il tasto per<br />
sovrapporre le informazioni <strong>de</strong>l servizio Teletext alla trasmissione corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
7 1 (pagina secondaria)<br />
Visualizza la pagina secondaria disponibile.<br />
8 2 (pagina su)<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di visualizzare la pagina Teletext successiva.<br />
9 3 (pagina giù)<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di visualizzare la pagina Teletext prece<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
0 0 (modalità)<br />
Premere questo tasto per selezionare la modalità Teletext (LIST/FLOF). Prem<strong>en</strong>do<br />
questo tasto nella modalità LIST, si attiva la modalità di memorizzazione<br />
<strong>de</strong>ll’el<strong>en</strong>co. In questa modalità è possibile memorizzare la pagina Teletext<br />
all’interno di un el<strong>en</strong>co utilizzando il tasto 8 (memorizza).<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
! 9 (manti<strong>en</strong>i)<br />
Cons<strong>en</strong>te di mant<strong>en</strong>ere visualizzata una pagina, se la pagina è collegata a più<br />
pagine secondarie che scorrono automaticam<strong>en</strong>te. Premerlo nuovam<strong>en</strong>te per<br />
ripr<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>re la visualizzazione.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (annulla)<br />
Utilizzato per visualizzare le stazioni emitt<strong>en</strong>ti durante la ricerca di una pagina.<br />
# Tasti colorati (rosso/ver<strong>de</strong>/giallo/blu)<br />
Se una emitt<strong>en</strong>te usa il sistema FASTEXT, i vari argom<strong>en</strong>ti trattati in una pagina<br />
Teletext v<strong>en</strong>gono codificati in base ai colori e possono essere selezionati<br />
prem<strong>en</strong>do i relativi tasti colorati. Premere il tasto il cui colore corrispon<strong>de</strong> a quello<br />
<strong>de</strong>ll’argom<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>si<strong>de</strong>rato. La pagina vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzata con altre informazioni<br />
colorate che possono essere selezionate allo stesso modo. Per visualizzare la<br />
pagina successiva o prece<strong>de</strong>nte, premere il tasto colorato corrispon<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
N E’ possibile cambiare le pagine teletext prem<strong>en</strong>do i tasti numerici sul telecomando.<br />
Italiano - 28
Le pagine teletext sono organizzate in base a sei categorie:<br />
Parte Cont<strong>en</strong>uti<br />
A Numero <strong>de</strong>lla pagina selezionata.<br />
B I<strong>de</strong>ntità <strong>de</strong>lla stazione emitt<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
C Numero <strong>de</strong>lla pagina corr<strong>en</strong>te o stato <strong>de</strong>lla ricerca.<br />
D Data e ora<br />
E Testo.<br />
F Informazioni sullo stato.<br />
Informazioni FASTEXT.<br />
N Le informazioni <strong>de</strong>l servizio Teletext sono spesso suddivise su più pagine<br />
visualizzate in sequ<strong>en</strong>za alle quali è possibile acce<strong>de</strong>re come segue:<br />
- Digitando il numero di pagina<br />
- Selezionando un titolo in un el<strong>en</strong>co<br />
- Selezionando un’intestazione colorata (sistema FASTEXT)<br />
O Premere il tasto TV per uscire dal servizio Teletext.<br />
<br />
Specifiche <strong>de</strong>l kit di supporto a parete (VESA)<br />
Installare il supporto su una parete solida perp<strong>en</strong>dicolare al pavim<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
Se il supporto <strong>de</strong>ve essere fissato ad altri tipi di materiale, consultare il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore di zona.<br />
Una installazione a soffitto o su pareti inclinate può provocare la caduta <strong>de</strong>ll’unità e lesioni personali.<br />
Famiglia di prodotti poll. Spec. VESA (A * B) Vite standard Quantità<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
M4<br />
LCD-TV<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
4<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
M8<br />
PDP-TV<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8 4<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sono disponibili kit di montaggio a parete per tutte le dim<strong>en</strong>sioni standard, come mostra la tabella prece<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
Insieme al kit di montaggio a parete v<strong>en</strong>gono forniti anche un manuale di istruzioni e tutti i compon<strong>en</strong>ti necessari per<br />
l’assemblaggio.<br />
Non utilizzare viti più lunghe rispetto alle dim<strong>en</strong>sioni standard, in quanto potrebbero danneggiare l’interno <strong>de</strong>l televisore.<br />
Per installazioni a parete con viti non conformi agli standard VESA, la lunghezza <strong>de</strong>lle viti può variare a seconda <strong>de</strong>lle relative<br />
specifiche.<br />
Non utilizzare viti non conformi agli standard VESA. Non serrare eccessivam<strong>en</strong>te le viti, in quanto potrebbero danneggiare<br />
il prodotto o causarne la caduta con consegu<strong>en</strong>te rischio di infortuni. <strong>Samsung</strong> <strong>de</strong>clina ogni responsabilità per questo tipo di<br />
inci<strong>de</strong>nti.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> <strong>de</strong>clina ogni responsabilità in caso di danni al prodotto o infortuni dovuti a un’installazione non conforme agli<br />
standard VESA o alle specifiche indicate oppure alla mancata osservanza <strong>de</strong>lle istruzioni di installazione <strong>de</strong>l prodotto.<br />
I mo<strong>de</strong>lli a 57” e a 63” non sono conformi alle specifiche VESA. Di consegu<strong>en</strong>za, con questo mo<strong>de</strong>llo è necessario utilizzare<br />
un kit di montaggio a parete apposito.<br />
Non superare i 15° di inclinazione quando si monta questo televisore.<br />
Non installare il Supporto a parete m<strong>en</strong>tre il televisore è acceso.<br />
In caso contrario, potrebbero verificarsi inci<strong>de</strong>nti con lesioni personali causate da scosse elettriche.<br />
Italiano - 29
Preparazione prima <strong>de</strong>ll’installazione <strong>de</strong>l supporto a parete<br />
Caso A. Installazione di un supporto a parete SAMSUNG<br />
Caso B. Installazione di un supporto a parete di un’altra marca<br />
경고<br />
1. Installare il supporto a parete con un valore di coppia di 15kgf·cm o inferiore. Applicando un valore di coppia diverso da quello<br />
indicato i compon<strong>en</strong>ti possono subire danni.<br />
2. Il kit <strong>de</strong>gli accessori conti<strong>en</strong>e un anello di sostegno [2] per l’installazione di supporti a parete di altre marche su televisori<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>. (Caso B)<br />
N Avvitare a fondo nel foro [1] durante l’installazione <strong>de</strong>lla staffa alla parete.<br />
주의<br />
Fissaggio <strong>de</strong>l televisore alla parete<br />
경고<br />
주의<br />
Tirare, spingere o arrampicarsi sul televisore sono azioni che possono provocarne la caduta. Si raccomanda<br />
di non far giocare i bambini con il televisore poiché potrebbero app<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rsi ad esso <strong>de</strong>stabilizzandolo; se ciò<br />
dovesse verificarsi, il televisore potrebbe ca<strong>de</strong>re provocando lesioni personali gravi e perfino mortali. Seguire tutte<br />
le precauzioni di sicurezza <strong>de</strong>scritte <strong>de</strong>lla docum<strong>en</strong>tazione allegata. Per una maggiore stabilità e sicurezza <strong>de</strong>l<br />
prodotto, installare il dispositivo anticaduta come segue.<br />
Parete<br />
Parete<br />
❑<br />
Per evitare una ev<strong>en</strong>tuale caduta <strong>de</strong>l televisore<br />
1. Avvitare saldam<strong>en</strong>te i ganci alla parete. Verificare che le viti di fissaggio siano b<strong>en</strong> serrate.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
A seconda <strong>de</strong>l tipo di parete, potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare anche un fisher.<br />
Poiché i ganci, le viti e il cavo di sicurezza non sono forniti in dotazione, è necessario acquistare tali materiali<br />
separatam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
2. Rimuovere le viti dal c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong>l pannello posteriore <strong>de</strong>l televisore, inserirle nei ganci e quindi avvitarle nuovam<strong>en</strong>te al<br />
televisore.<br />
N<br />
Le viti potrebbero non essere fornite insieme al prodotto.<br />
3. Collegare i ganci fissati al televisore a quelli fissati alla parete utilizzando un cavo resist<strong>en</strong>te, quindi legarlo strettam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Installare il televisore il più possibile vicino alla parete in modo che non possa ca<strong>de</strong>re all’indietro.<br />
Collegare il cavo in modo che i ganci fissati alla parete si trovino allineati o leggerm<strong>en</strong>te più in basso di quelli fissati al<br />
televisore.<br />
Slegare il cavo prima di spostare il televisore.<br />
4. Accertarsi che tutte le connessioni siano a<strong>de</strong>guatam<strong>en</strong>te fissate. Controllare periodicam<strong>en</strong>te le connessioni per verificarne<br />
l’ev<strong>en</strong>tuale usura o rottura. Per qualsiasi dubbio relativo alla sicurezza <strong>de</strong>lle connessioni effettuate, contattare un installatore<br />
specializzato.<br />
Italiano - 30
Risoluzione <strong>de</strong>i problemi<br />
Prima di contattare il Servizio di assist<strong>en</strong>za <strong>Samsung</strong>, si consiglia di eseguire i segu<strong>en</strong>ti semplici controlli.<br />
Se non si riesce a risolvere il problema segu<strong>en</strong>do le istruzioni qui indicate, annotare il mo<strong>de</strong>llo e il numero di serie <strong>de</strong>l prodotto e<br />
contattare il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore.<br />
Nessun audio o immagine<br />
Immagine normale ma audio<br />
ass<strong>en</strong>te<br />
Nessuna immagine oppure<br />
immagine in bianco e nero<br />
Interfer<strong>en</strong>ze di audio e<br />
immagine<br />
Immagini offuscate o poco<br />
niti<strong>de</strong>, audio distorto<br />
Telecomando non funzionante<br />
Lo schermo è nero e la spia<br />
di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione lampeggia in<br />
modo continuo<br />
L’immagine danneggiata vi<strong>en</strong>e<br />
visualizzata nell’angolo <strong>de</strong>llo<br />
schermo.<br />
Vi<strong>en</strong>e visualizzato il messaggio<br />
“Resets all settings to the<br />
<strong>de</strong>fault values.”.<br />
• Controllare che il cavo di alim<strong>en</strong>tazione sia collegato alla presa di corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Verificare di aver premuto il tasto sul dispositivo.<br />
• Controllare le impostazioni relative al contrasto e alla luminosità <strong>de</strong>ll’immagine.<br />
• Controllare il volume.<br />
• Controllare se Seleziona altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante ester.<br />
• Controllare il volume.<br />
• Controllare se il tasto MMUTE <strong>de</strong>l telecomando è stato premuto.<br />
• Regolare le impostazioni <strong>de</strong>l colore.<br />
• Controllare se la selezione <strong>de</strong>l sistema di trasmissione è corretta.<br />
• Provare a i<strong>de</strong>ntificare l’apparecchiatura elettrica che causa le interfer<strong>en</strong>ze e spostarla più<br />
lontano.<br />
• Collegare il televisore a un’altra presa di corr<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Controllare la direzione, la posizione e i collegam<strong>en</strong>ti <strong>de</strong>ll’ant<strong>en</strong>na.<br />
• Questo problema si verifica spesso quando si utilizza un’ant<strong>en</strong>na interna.<br />
• Sostituire le batterie <strong>de</strong>l telecomando.<br />
• Pulire il bordo superiore <strong>de</strong>l telecomando (finestra di trasmissione).<br />
• Controllare che i terminali + e - <strong>de</strong>lle batterie siano inseriti correttam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Controllare che le batterie non siano scariche.<br />
• Sul computer controllare l'alim<strong>en</strong>tazione e il cavo di segnale.<br />
• Muovere il mouse o premere un tasto qualsiasi sulla tastiera <strong>de</strong>l computer.<br />
• Sul dispositivo (STB, DVD, ecc.) verificare l'alim<strong>en</strong>tazione e il cavo segnale.<br />
• Il televisore sta utilizzando il proprio sistema di gestione alim<strong>en</strong>tazione.<br />
• Premere il tasto Source sul pannello di controllo o sul telecomando.<br />
• Spegnere e riacc<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>re il televisore.<br />
Se Adatta allo schermo selezionata, l’immagine danneggiata può essere visibile nell’angolo<br />
<strong>de</strong>llo schermo. Questa anomalia è causata dalle periferiche esterne, non dal televisore.<br />
Ciò si verifica quando si ti<strong>en</strong>e premuto il tasto EXIT per qualche istante. Le impostazioni <strong>de</strong>l<br />
prodotto v<strong>en</strong>gono reimpostate ai valori di fabbrica.<br />
Messa in sicurezza <strong>de</strong>lla posizione di installazione<br />
Mant<strong>en</strong>ere le distanze necessarie tra il prodotto e gli altri elem<strong>en</strong>ti pres<strong>en</strong>ti (per esempio le pareti) per garantire un’a<strong>de</strong>guata<br />
v<strong>en</strong>tilazione.<br />
La mancata osservanza di tale precauzione può comportare un pericolo d’inc<strong>en</strong>dio o un malfunzionam<strong>en</strong>to a causa <strong>de</strong>l<br />
surriscaldam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l prodotto.<br />
Installare il prodotto mant<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong>do le distanze indicate in figura.<br />
N Quando si usa un piedistallo o un sistema di montaggio a parete, utilizzare solo le parti fornite da <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics.<br />
- L’uso di parti di altre marche può causare un malfunzionam<strong>en</strong>to o lesioni provocate da una ev<strong>en</strong>tuale caduta <strong>de</strong>l prodotto.<br />
- L’uso di parti di altre marche può comportare un malfunzionam<strong>en</strong>to o un pericolo di inc<strong>en</strong>dio per il surriscaldam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l<br />
prodotto a causa di una v<strong>en</strong>tilazione ina<strong>de</strong>guata.<br />
N L’aspetto <strong>de</strong>l prodotto può variare a seconda <strong>de</strong>l mo<strong>de</strong>llo.<br />
• Durante l’installazione <strong>de</strong>l prodotto con un<br />
• Durante l’installazione <strong>de</strong>l prodotto con un<br />
piedistallo<br />
sistema di montaggio a parete<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Italiano - 31
Specifiche<br />
Le <strong>de</strong>scrizioni e le caratteristiche riportate in questo manuale sono fornite unicam<strong>en</strong>te a scopo informativo e sono soggette a<br />
modifiche s<strong>en</strong>za preavviso.<br />
Nome mo<strong>de</strong>llo PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>sione schermo (Diagonale) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
Risoluzione PC (Ottimale) 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360x768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Uscita<br />
Audio<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>sioni (LxPxA)<br />
Corpo<br />
Con piedistallo<br />
Peso<br />
Corpo<br />
Con piedistallo<br />
Caratteristiche ambi<strong>en</strong>tali<br />
Temperatura di esercizio<br />
Umidità di esercizio<br />
Temperatura di stoccaggio<br />
Umidità di stoccaggio<br />
10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
1221x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Questo prodotto è un’apparecchiatura digitale di Classe B.<br />
Design e specifiche sono soggetti a modifiche s<strong>en</strong>za preavviso.<br />
Per l’alim<strong>en</strong>tazione elettrica e il consumo di corr<strong>en</strong>te, consultare l’etichetta apposta al prodotto.<br />
In caso di uso di u cavo di connessione HDMI / DVI è necessario usare la presa HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
Italiano - 32
Schema blocco<br />
– <br />
DVB NIM Tuner<br />
TU<strong>NE</strong>R_CVBS<br />
CVBS0<br />
TU<strong>NE</strong>R_SIF<br />
SIF0 MADR[1:0]<br />
TS(:0)<br />
MDATA[15:0]<br />
TS<br />
EXT_DATA<br />
EXT_ADDR<br />
PCMCIA<br />
EXT_DATA[0:]<br />
SPI<br />
EXT_ADDR[0:14]<br />
4LCX3<br />
EXT<br />
4HC405PW<br />
CVBS out1<br />
SC1/2: CVBS/AUDIO_OUT<br />
CVBS out<br />
SC1: R/G/B/CVBS<br />
SC1/2: S_L/R<br />
COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT<br />
COMP_YPbPr<br />
COMP_S_L/R<br />
SIDE_S_L/R<br />
SIDE_Y/C<br />
S-VIDEO<br />
CVBS out<br />
DDC_ROM<br />
TL0<br />
TL0<br />
x<br />
AUOUTRL1<br />
GPIO11/11<br />
CVBS1<br />
GPIO11/11<br />
MSD3HCG<br />
AULR1<br />
CVBS<br />
BGA400<br />
LVDS_OUT<br />
HDMI X 3<br />
(1 Si<strong>de</strong>) IC<br />
HDMI_IN<br />
(HDMI 1.3)<br />
USB .0<br />
(Down-Load)<br />
YPBPR_INP<br />
USB .0<br />
UART<br />
COMPOSITE<br />
(1 Si<strong>de</strong>)<br />
VIDEO_CVBS<br />
VIDEO_S_L/R<br />
CVBS3<br />
AULR0<br />
IC_OUT<br />
PC_RGB/H/V<br />
PC<br />
RGB_INP<br />
PC_S_L/R<br />
PC AUDIO<br />
AULR<br />
AUOUTRL0<br />
DVI_S_L/R<br />
DVI SOUND AULR3<br />
SPDIFO<br />
DDR_DATA<br />
DDR_ADD<br />
SPI INTERFACE<br />
IC_ROM<br />
DDR<br />
51Mb* DDR<br />
51Mb*<br />
EEPROM<br />
4C51<br />
SPI<br />
SPI FLASH<br />
FLASH <strong>MB</strong> (1$)<br />
<strong>MB</strong> (1$)<br />
IC<br />
SUB MICOM<br />
WP1PS<br />
4K flash<br />
IC_PA<strong>NE</strong>L<br />
LVDS (-Bit)<br />
IR, KEY<br />
FUNCTION KEY<br />
Debug<br />
UART<br />
MAX3E<br />
Debug<br />
WALL<br />
4HC405D<br />
SOUND AMP<br />
NTP3100<br />
IC<br />
Speaker<br />
L/R<br />
HEAD PHO<strong>NE</strong><br />
HP_L/R HP_OUT<br />
MAX<br />
SPDIF_OUT<br />
SPDIF OUT
Instrucciones para el usuario<br />
• Ret<strong>en</strong>ción <strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es <strong>en</strong> la pantalla<br />
No visualice una imag<strong>en</strong> fija (como las <strong>de</strong> un vi<strong>de</strong>ojuego o cuando el PDP está conectado a un PC) <strong>en</strong> el panel <strong>de</strong>l monitor<br />
<strong>de</strong> plasma durante más <strong>de</strong> 2 horas porque podría causar la ret<strong>en</strong>ción <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> pantalla. Este f<strong>en</strong>óm<strong>en</strong>o <strong>de</strong> ret<strong>en</strong>ción<br />
<strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es también se <strong>de</strong>nomina “quemadura <strong>de</strong> pantalla”. Para evitar que se produzca esa persist<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong>,<br />
reduzca el nivel <strong>de</strong> luminosidad y <strong>de</strong> contraste <strong>de</strong> la pantalla cuando muestre imág<strong>en</strong>es fijas.<br />
• Altura<br />
La PDP pue<strong>de</strong> funcionar normalm<strong>en</strong>te hasta altitu<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> 2.000 metros. No la instale ni utilice <strong>en</strong> lugares que se <strong>en</strong>cu<strong>en</strong>tr<strong>en</strong> a<br />
más <strong>de</strong> 2.000 metros <strong>de</strong> altitud porque el funcionami<strong>en</strong>to podría ser irregular.<br />
• Calor <strong>en</strong> la parte superior <strong>de</strong>l TV PDP<br />
La parte superior <strong>de</strong>l aparato pue<strong>de</strong> cal<strong>en</strong>tarse tras un uso prolongado ya que el calor se disipa <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> el panel a través <strong>de</strong> los<br />
orificios <strong>de</strong> v<strong>en</strong>tilación <strong>de</strong> la parte superior <strong>de</strong>l aparato. Esto es normal y no indica ningún <strong>de</strong>fecto ni fallo <strong>de</strong> funcionami<strong>en</strong>to<br />
<strong>de</strong>l aparato. No obstante, <strong>de</strong>be evitarse que los niños toqu<strong>en</strong> la parte superior <strong>de</strong>l aparato.<br />
• El aparato emite una especie <strong>de</strong> ‘crujido’.<br />
A ‘cracking’ noise may occur wh<strong>en</strong> the product contracts or expands due to a change of surrounding <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>t such as<br />
temperature or humidity. This is normal and not a <strong>de</strong>fect of the unit.<br />
• Defecto <strong>de</strong> celda<br />
La PDP utiliza un panel compuesto <strong>de</strong> 2.360.000 (nivel HD) a 6.221.000 (nivel FHD) píxeles que requier<strong>en</strong> una sofisticada<br />
tecnología para su producción. No obstante, pue<strong>de</strong> que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros <strong>en</strong> la pantalla. Estos<br />
píxeles no influirán <strong>en</strong> el r<strong>en</strong>dimi<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l aparato.<br />
• Evite que el TV funcione a temperaturas por <strong>de</strong>bajo <strong>de</strong> 5°C (41°F)<br />
• La imag<strong>en</strong> fija visualizada durante <strong>de</strong>masiado tiempo pue<strong>de</strong> causar daños perman<strong>en</strong>tes <strong>en</strong> el panel <strong>de</strong> la PDP.<br />
Ver el TV PDP <strong>en</strong> formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>jar rastros <strong>de</strong> bor<strong>de</strong>s <strong>en</strong> la<br />
izquierda, <strong>de</strong>recha o c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong> la pantalla causados por la difer<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong> emisión <strong>de</strong> luz <strong>en</strong> la pantalla.<br />
Reproducir un DVD o una vi<strong>de</strong>oconsola pue<strong>de</strong> causar un efecto similar <strong>en</strong> la pantalla. La garantía no<br />
cubre estos daños.<br />
• Restos <strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es <strong>en</strong> pantalla.<br />
Ver imág<strong>en</strong>es fijas <strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>ojuegos y PC durante más tiempo <strong>de</strong>l indicado pue<strong>de</strong> producir restos <strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es parciales.<br />
Para evitar este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imág<strong>en</strong>es fijas.<br />
• Garantía<br />
- La garantía no cubre los daños causados por la ret<strong>en</strong>ción <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
- La garantía no cubre el <strong>de</strong>sgaste <strong>de</strong> la pantalla.<br />
• Instalación<br />
Póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con un c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong> servicio técnico autorizado cuando instale el equipo <strong>en</strong> un lugar expuesto a gran<br />
cantidad <strong>de</strong> polvo, temperaturas extremas, alto nivel <strong>de</strong> humedad y productos químicos, y <strong>en</strong> lugares don<strong>de</strong> se vaya a utilizar<br />
continuam<strong>en</strong>te, como aeropuertos, estaciones, etc.<br />
Nota sobre la TV digital<br />
1. Las funciones relacionadas con la TV digital (DVB) sólo están disponibles <strong>en</strong> países o regiones don<strong>de</strong> se emitan<br />
señales terrestres digitales DVB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AVC) o don<strong>de</strong> se t<strong>en</strong>ga acceso a servicios <strong>de</strong> televisión por<br />
cable compatibles con DVB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si<br />
pue<strong>de</strong> recibir señales DVB-T o DVB-C.<br />
2. DVB-T es una norma <strong>de</strong>l consorcio europeo para la transmisión <strong>de</strong> la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la<br />
transmisión <strong>de</strong> la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, <strong>en</strong> esta especificación no se incluy<strong>en</strong> algunas funciones<br />
difer<strong>en</strong>ciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica <strong>de</strong> programas), VOD (Ví<strong>de</strong>o a la carta) y otras. Por ello, <strong>en</strong> estos<br />
mom<strong>en</strong>tos aún no se admit<strong>en</strong>.<br />
3. Este equipo <strong>de</strong> televisión cumple las más actuales normas <strong>de</strong> DVB-T y DVB-C [agosto <strong>de</strong> 2008], pero no se garantiza<br />
la compatibilidad con futuras emisiones <strong>de</strong> televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C.<br />
4. Algunos proveedores <strong>de</strong> la televisión por cable pue<strong>de</strong>n cobrar un pago adicional por algunos servicios y pue<strong>de</strong>n<br />
exigir al usuario su aceptación <strong>de</strong> los términos y condiciones <strong>de</strong> su empresa.<br />
5. Algunas funciones <strong>de</strong> televisión digital pue<strong>de</strong>n no estar disponibles <strong>en</strong> algunos países o regiones; asimismo DVB-C<br />
pue<strong>de</strong> no funcionar correctam<strong>en</strong>te con todos los proveedores.<br />
6. Para obt<strong>en</strong>er más información, póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con su c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong> at<strong>en</strong>ción al cli<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE<br />
Si ti<strong>en</strong>e alguna pregunta o com<strong>en</strong>tario refer<strong>en</strong>te a nuestros productos, por favor contacte con nuestro Servicio <strong>de</strong><br />
At<strong>en</strong>ción al Cli<strong>en</strong>te (Consulte la cubierta posterior para obt<strong>en</strong>er más información.)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Español -
Cont<strong>en</strong>ido<br />
Conexión y preparación <strong>de</strong>l televisor<br />
■ Comprobación <strong>de</strong> los compon<strong>en</strong>tes.......................................... 4<br />
■ Uso <strong>de</strong>l soporte..........................................................................4<br />
■ Cómo montar la base <strong>de</strong>l soporte (según el mo<strong>de</strong>lo)................ 4<br />
■ Aspecto g<strong>en</strong>eral <strong>de</strong>l panel <strong>de</strong> control......................................... 5<br />
■ Aspecto g<strong>en</strong>eral <strong>de</strong>l panel <strong>de</strong> conexiones................................. 6<br />
■ Mando a distancia......................................................................8<br />
■ Instalación <strong>de</strong> las pilas <strong>en</strong> el mando a distancia........................ 9<br />
■ Enc<strong>en</strong>dido y apagado................................................................9<br />
■ Cómo poner el televisor <strong>en</strong> modo <strong>de</strong> espera............................. 9<br />
■ Visualización <strong>de</strong> los m<strong>en</strong>ús......................................................10<br />
■ Uso <strong>de</strong>l botón TOOLS..............................................................10<br />
■ Visualización <strong>de</strong> la pantalla .....................................................10<br />
■ Función Plug & Play................................................................. 11<br />
Control <strong>de</strong> los canales<br />
■ Memorización <strong>de</strong> canales .......................................................12<br />
■ Gestión <strong>de</strong> los canales.............................................................15<br />
Descripción <strong>de</strong> las funciones<br />
■ Configuración <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> configuración................................ 22<br />
■ Configuración <strong>de</strong> la hora..........................................................24<br />
■ Fu<strong>en</strong>tes / Editar nombre..........................................................25<br />
■ Pantalla <strong>de</strong> PC.........................................................................25<br />
■ Modos <strong>de</strong> visualización............................................................26<br />
■ Programas admitidos...............................................................27<br />
Recom<strong>en</strong>daciones<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
Función <strong>de</strong> teletexto.................................................................28<br />
Ajuste <strong>de</strong> montaje mural automático<br />
(se v<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> por separado) .........................................................29<br />
Preparación para instalar el montaje mural............................. 30<br />
Fijación <strong>de</strong>l televisor a la pared...............................................30<br />
Solución <strong>de</strong> problemas............................................................31<br />
Seguridad <strong>en</strong> el espacio <strong>de</strong> instalación................................... 31<br />
Especificaciones......................................................................32<br />
Control <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
■ Cambio y restauración <strong>de</strong> la configuración <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong>........ 17<br />
Control <strong>de</strong>l sonido<br />
■ Cambio <strong>de</strong>l estándar <strong>de</strong> sonido...............................................20<br />
■ Selección <strong>de</strong>l modo <strong>de</strong> sonido.................................................21<br />
Español<br />
N O T<br />
Símbolo Pulse Notas Botón <strong>de</strong> una pulsación Botón TOOL<br />
Español -
Conexión y preparación <strong>de</strong>l televisor<br />
Comprobación <strong>de</strong> los compon<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
Manual <strong>de</strong> instrucciones Mando a distancia /<br />
Pilas AAA (2)<br />
Cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación Paño <strong>de</strong> limpieza Tarjeta <strong>de</strong> garantía/<br />
Manual <strong>de</strong> guía <strong>de</strong><br />
seguridad (no disponible <strong>en</strong><br />
todos los lugares)<br />
Tornillos (4) Cubierta inferior Soportes anilla (4)<br />
(Consulte la página 30.)<br />
Núcleo <strong>de</strong> ferrita para<br />
cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación(1)<br />
N<br />
Los núcleos <strong>de</strong> ferrita se utilizan para proteger los cables <strong>de</strong> las interfer<strong>en</strong>cias.<br />
Cuando conecte un cable, abra el núcleo <strong>de</strong> ferrita y fíjelo alre<strong>de</strong>dor <strong>de</strong>l cable cerca <strong>de</strong>l conector.<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong>l soporte<br />
N<br />
N<br />
La PDP la <strong>de</strong>b<strong>en</strong> transportar dos o más personas. Nunca <strong>de</strong>je la PDP <strong>en</strong><br />
el suelo ya que la pantalla pue<strong>de</strong> sufrir daños. Mant<strong>en</strong>ga siempre la PDP<br />
<strong>en</strong> posición vertical.<br />
La PDP se pue<strong>de</strong> girar 20 grados a <strong>de</strong>recha e izquierda.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Cómo montar la base <strong>de</strong>l soporte (según el mo<strong>de</strong>lo)<br />
Con los 4 tornillos <strong>de</strong> sujeción <strong>de</strong> la base <strong>de</strong>l soporte y el TV, fije<br />
firmem<strong>en</strong>te éste a la base <strong>de</strong>l soporte.<br />
(Es posible que el exterior <strong>de</strong>l equipo sea difer<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l que se muestra <strong>en</strong><br />
la imag<strong>en</strong>.)<br />
Advert<strong>en</strong>cia<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> mover el televisor asegure<br />
firmem<strong>en</strong>te el soporte, para evitar que se<br />
caiga y cause daños físicos.<br />
N El televisor lo <strong>de</strong>b<strong>en</strong> transportar dos o<br />
más personas. Nunca <strong>de</strong>je el televisor <strong>en</strong><br />
el suelo ya que la pantalla pue<strong>de</strong> sufrir<br />
daños.<br />
Mant<strong>en</strong>ga siempre el televisor <strong>en</strong> su<br />
posición vertical.<br />
Si va a instalar el televisor <strong>en</strong> la pared, fije la tapa<br />
(1) <strong>en</strong> la zona <strong>de</strong> conexión <strong>de</strong> la base <strong>de</strong>l soporte<br />
con los dos tornillos para ocultar la ranura.<br />
Español -
Aspecto g<strong>en</strong>eral <strong>de</strong>l panel <strong>de</strong> control<br />
N<br />
El color y la forma <strong>de</strong>l producto pue<strong>de</strong>n variar según el mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
Botones <strong>de</strong>l panel frontal<br />
Toque cada botón para<br />
activar la función.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Cambia <strong>en</strong>tre todas las fu<strong>en</strong>tes <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada disponibles<br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N<br />
En el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>en</strong> pantalla, utilice este botón como lo<br />
haría con el botón ENTERE <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Púlselo para ver el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>en</strong> pantalla con las opciones <strong>de</strong>l<br />
televisor.<br />
3 + –<br />
Púlselos para subir o bajar el volum<strong>en</strong>. En el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>en</strong><br />
pantalla, use los botones + – <strong>de</strong>l mismo modo que<br />
los botones ◄ y ► <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
4 CH<br />
Permit<strong>en</strong> cambiar <strong>de</strong> canal. En el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>en</strong> pantalla, use los<br />
botones CH <strong>de</strong>l mismo modo que los botones<br />
▲ y ▼ <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
5 INDICADOR DE ENCENDIDO<br />
Parpa<strong>de</strong>an y se apagan cuando se <strong>en</strong>ci<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> el aparato y<br />
se ilumina <strong>en</strong> el modo <strong>en</strong> espera.<br />
6 (POWER)<br />
Púlselo para <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r o apagar el TV.<br />
7 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA<br />
El mando a distancia <strong>de</strong>be dirigirse hacia este punto <strong>de</strong>l televisor.<br />
8 ALTAVOZ<br />
Español -
Aspecto g<strong>en</strong>eral <strong>de</strong>l panel <strong>de</strong> conexiones<br />
Panel posterior<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERIVCE 2<br />
o<br />
8<br />
Red <strong>de</strong> televisión<br />
por cable<br />
SERIVCE 1<br />
o<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
Barva in oblika iz<strong>de</strong>lka sta odvisni od mo<strong>de</strong>la.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Al conectar un sistema <strong>de</strong> audio o ví<strong>de</strong>o al aparato, asegúrese <strong>de</strong> que todos los elem<strong>en</strong>tos estén apagados.<br />
Cuando conecte un dispositivo externo, <strong>de</strong>be hacer coincidir los colores <strong>de</strong>l terminal <strong>de</strong> conexión y <strong>de</strong>l cable.<br />
1 POWER IN<br />
Conexión para el cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación suministrado.<br />
2 SERVICE 1,2<br />
Conector para servicio.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Entradas <strong>de</strong> audio (AUDIO L/R) y ví<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR)<br />
para compon<strong>en</strong>tes.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Tomas <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada o salida para dispositivos externos,<br />
como aparatos <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o, reproductores <strong>de</strong> DVD, consolas<br />
<strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>ojuegos o reproductores <strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>odiscos.<br />
Especificaciones <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada/salida<br />
Entrada<br />
Salida<br />
Conector<br />
Ví<strong>de</strong>o Audio(L/R) RGB Vi<strong>de</strong>o + Audio(L/R)<br />
EXT<br />
Sólo está disponible la<br />
✔ ✔ ✔<br />
salida <strong>de</strong> TV o DTV.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Conexión para un compon<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> audio digital.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> conectar las señales <strong>de</strong> audio <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> el televisor a<br />
una fu<strong>en</strong>te externa, como un equipo <strong>de</strong> audio.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1,2(DVI)<br />
No se necesita conexión <strong>de</strong> audio adicional para una<br />
conexión <strong>de</strong> HDMI a HDMI.<br />
- Cuando se usa una conexión <strong>de</strong> cable HDMI/DVI, se<br />
<strong>de</strong>be conectar <strong>en</strong> el terminal HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
N ¿Qué es HDMI?<br />
- La interfaz multimedia <strong>de</strong> alta <strong>de</strong>finición (HDMI)<br />
permite la transmisión <strong>de</strong> los datos <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o digital <strong>de</strong><br />
alta <strong>de</strong>finición y varios canales <strong>de</strong> sonido digital.<br />
- El terminal HDMI/DVI admite la conexión DVI con un<br />
dispositivo ampliado mediante el cable apropiado (no<br />
suministrado). La difer<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>en</strong>tre los dispositivos HDMI<br />
y DVI es que el HDMI es más pequeño, ti<strong>en</strong>e instalada<br />
la función <strong>de</strong> codificación HDCP (protección alta <strong>de</strong> la<br />
copia digital <strong>de</strong>l ancho <strong>de</strong> banda) y es compatible con el<br />
sonido digital <strong>de</strong> varios canales.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
Salidas <strong>de</strong> audio DVI para dispositivos externos.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
Conector coaxial <strong>de</strong> 75 Ω para ant<strong>en</strong>a o red por cable.<br />
Modos compatibles con HDMI y compon<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>t O O O O O O O<br />
Español -
Panel lateral<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
El color y la forma <strong>de</strong>l producto pue<strong>de</strong>n variar según el mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
1 Ranura COMMON INTERFACE<br />
Inserte la tarjeta CI (Interfaz común) <strong>en</strong> la ranura.<br />
(consulte la página 23).<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si no se inserta una TARJETA CI con algunos canales, <strong>en</strong><br />
la pantalla aparece Señal codificada.<br />
En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá <strong>en</strong> la pantalla la información<br />
<strong>de</strong>l <strong>en</strong>lace que conti<strong>en</strong>e un número telefónico, un<br />
i<strong>de</strong>ntificador <strong>de</strong> TARJETA CI, un i<strong>de</strong>ntificador <strong>de</strong>l sistema<br />
y <strong>de</strong>más información. Si aparece un m<strong>en</strong>saje <strong>de</strong> error,<br />
póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con su proveedor <strong>de</strong> servicios.<br />
Una vez completada la configuración <strong>de</strong> la información<br />
<strong>de</strong>l canal, aparecerá el m<strong>en</strong>saje Actualiz. completa,<br />
indicando que la lista <strong>de</strong> canales ya se ha actualizado.<br />
Inserte la tarjeta CI <strong>en</strong> la dirección marcada sobre ella.<br />
El módulo CAM no se admite <strong>en</strong> algunos países o zonas;<br />
consulte a su distribuidor local.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Entradas <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o y audio para dispositivos externos,<br />
como una vi<strong>de</strong>ocámara o un reproductor <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
Español -
Mando a distancia<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> utilizar el mando a una distancia <strong>de</strong>l televisor <strong>de</strong> hasta 7 metros.<br />
N<br />
El exceso <strong>de</strong> luz pue<strong>de</strong> influir <strong>en</strong> el r<strong>en</strong>dimi<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
1 Botón POWER<br />
(<strong>en</strong>ci<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> y apaga el televisor)<br />
2 Selecciona directam<strong>en</strong>te los modos<br />
TV.<br />
3 Botones numéricos para acceso<br />
directo a los canales<br />
4 Pulse este botón para sintonizar sus<br />
canales favoritos.<br />
5 Interrupción mom<strong>en</strong>tánea <strong>de</strong>l sonido<br />
6 Aum<strong>en</strong>tar el volum<strong>en</strong><br />
Bajar el volum<strong>en</strong><br />
7 Selección <strong>de</strong> fu<strong>en</strong>te disponible<br />
8 Se utiliza para ver información sobre<br />
la emisión actual<br />
9 Permite seleccionar rápidam<strong>en</strong>te las<br />
funciones que se usan con mayor<br />
frecu<strong>en</strong>cia.<br />
0 Control <strong>de</strong>l cursor <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú<br />
! Botón <strong>de</strong> control <strong>de</strong>l canal<br />
@ Use estos botones <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong><br />
canales, etc.<br />
$ Canal anterior<br />
% Canal sigui<strong>en</strong>te<br />
Canal anterior<br />
^ Muestra el m<strong>en</strong>ú principal <strong>en</strong> la<br />
pantalla<br />
& Visualización <strong>de</strong> la Guía electrónica<br />
<strong>de</strong> programas (EPG).<br />
* Vuelve al m<strong>en</strong>ú anterior<br />
( Muestra la lista <strong>de</strong> canales favoritos.<br />
) Selección <strong>de</strong> la <strong>de</strong>scripción <strong>de</strong><br />
audio.<br />
a Visualización <strong>de</strong> subtítulos digitales<br />
Funciones <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
2 Sale <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
(según los mo<strong>de</strong>los)<br />
7 Selección <strong>de</strong>l modo <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
(LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Mostrar el teletexto<br />
9 Tamaño <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
! Memorización <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
@ Selección <strong>de</strong> tema <strong>de</strong> Fastext<br />
# Visualización <strong>de</strong> teletexto/mezclar<br />
información <strong>de</strong> teletexto y emisión<br />
normal<br />
$ Página secundaria <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
% P :Página sigui<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
P :Página anterior <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
^ Índice <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
* Teletexto <strong>en</strong> espera<br />
( Cancelar teletexto<br />
<br />
Español -
Instalación <strong>de</strong> las pilas <strong>en</strong> el mando a distancia<br />
1. Levante la tapa <strong>de</strong> la parte posterior <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia, como se muestra<br />
<strong>en</strong> la ilustración.<br />
2. Instale dos pilas <strong>de</strong> tamaño AAA.<br />
N Asegúrese <strong>de</strong> que los extremos “+” y “–” <strong>de</strong> las pilas concuer<strong>de</strong>n con el<br />
diagrama <strong>de</strong>l interior <strong>de</strong>l compartimi<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
3. Cierre la cubierta.<br />
N Si no va a utilizar el mando a distancia durante mucho tiempo, quite las<br />
pilas y guár<strong>de</strong>las <strong>en</strong> un lugar fresco y seco.<br />
N<br />
Si el mando a distancia no funciona. Efectúe estas comprobaciones.<br />
1. ¿Está <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido el televisor?<br />
2. ¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos <strong>de</strong> las pilas?<br />
3. ¿Se han agotado las pilas?<br />
4. ¿Ha habido un corte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergía o se ha <strong>de</strong>s<strong>en</strong>chufado el cable?<br />
5. ¿Hay <strong>en</strong> las proximida<strong>de</strong>s un fluoresc<strong>en</strong>te o un neón?<br />
Enc<strong>en</strong>dido y apagado<br />
El cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación se conecta a la parte trasera <strong>de</strong>l televisor.<br />
1. Enchufe el cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación <strong>en</strong> una toma eléctrica a<strong>de</strong>cuada.<br />
N El indicador <strong>de</strong>l modo <strong>de</strong> espera se <strong>en</strong>ci<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong> el equipo.<br />
2. Pulse el botón POWER P <strong>de</strong>l equipo.<br />
N También pue<strong>de</strong> pulsar el botón POWER P o el botón TV <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia para <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r el televisor.<br />
3. Pulse los botones numéricos (0~9) o <strong>de</strong> canales arriba/abajo (< / >) <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia o el botón >CH< <strong>de</strong>l equipo.<br />
N Cuando <strong>en</strong>ci<strong>en</strong>da el equipo por primera vez, se le pedirá que elija el idioma <strong>en</strong> el que quiere que aparezcan los m<strong>en</strong>ús.<br />
4. Para apagar el televisor, vuelva a pulsar el botón POWER P.<br />
Cómo poner el televisor <strong>en</strong> modo <strong>de</strong> espera<br />
El aparato pue<strong>de</strong> ponerse <strong>en</strong> modo <strong>de</strong> espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo <strong>de</strong> espera es muy útil si <strong>de</strong>sea<br />
interrumpir la visualización mom<strong>en</strong>táneam<strong>en</strong>te (durante la comida, por ejemplo).<br />
1. Pulse el botón POWER P <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
N La pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador <strong>de</strong> modo <strong>de</strong> espera rojo <strong>en</strong> el equipo.<br />
2. Para volver a <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>r el equipo, pulse <strong>de</strong> nuevo los botones POWER P, numéricos (0~9), TV o <strong>de</strong> canal arriba/abajo<br />
(< / >).<br />
N No <strong>de</strong>je el aparato <strong>en</strong> modo <strong>de</strong> espera durante períodos largos <strong>de</strong> tiempo (cuando está <strong>de</strong> vacaciones, por ejemplo).<br />
Lo mejor es <strong>de</strong>s<strong>en</strong>chufar el aparato <strong>de</strong> la red eléctrica y <strong>de</strong> la ant<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
Español -
Visualización <strong>de</strong> los m<strong>en</strong>ús<br />
1. Con el aparato <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido, pulse el botón MENU. En la pantalla aparece el<br />
m<strong>en</strong>ú principal. En el lado izquierdo <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú hay los iconos: Imag<strong>en</strong>, Sonido,<br />
Canal, Configuración, Entrada y Asist<strong>en</strong>cia técnica.<br />
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar uno <strong>de</strong> los iconos. Después pulse el<br />
botón ENTERE para acce<strong>de</strong>r al subm<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong>l icono.<br />
3. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir.<br />
N<br />
Pasado aproximadam<strong>en</strong>te un minuto, los m<strong>en</strong>ús <strong>de</strong> la pantalla <strong>de</strong>saparec<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Imag<strong>en</strong><br />
<br />
Modo<br />
: Estándar<br />
Iluminación <strong>de</strong> la celda : 4<br />
Contraste : 95<br />
Brillo : 45<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>z : 50<br />
Color : 50<br />
Matiz (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong>l botón TOOLS<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> usar el botón TOOLS para seleccionar rápida y fácilm<strong>en</strong>te las funciones que se usan con más frecu<strong>en</strong>cia. El m<strong>en</strong>ú<br />
Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas cambia según el modo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada externo que se está vi<strong>en</strong>do.<br />
1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Aparece el m<strong>en</strong>ú Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un m<strong>en</strong>ú y, a continuación, pulse el<br />
botón ENTERE.<br />
3. Pulse los botones ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE para ver, cambiar o usar las opciones<br />
seleccionadas.Para ver una <strong>de</strong>scripción más <strong>de</strong>tallada <strong>de</strong> cada función, consulte<br />
la página correspondi<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Modo imag<strong>en</strong>: Consulte la página 17<br />
• Modo <strong>de</strong> sonido: Consulte la página 20<br />
• Temp.<strong>de</strong>sc.: Consulte la página 24<br />
• Ahorro <strong>en</strong>ergía: Consulte la página 23<br />
• Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar <strong>de</strong> Favoritos), Consulte la página 15<br />
<br />
Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
Modo imag<strong>en</strong> ◄ Estándar ►<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> sonido : Personal<br />
Temp.<strong>de</strong>sc. : Desactivado<br />
Ahorro <strong>en</strong>ergía : Desactivado<br />
Añadir a Favoritos<br />
U Mover E Entrar e Salir<br />
Visualización <strong>de</strong> la pantalla<br />
La pantalla i<strong>de</strong>ntifica el canal actual y el estado <strong>de</strong> algunos ajustes <strong>de</strong> audio-ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información.<br />
Pulse el botón INFO <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia. El televisor mostrará el canal, el tipo<br />
<strong>de</strong> sonido y el estado <strong>de</strong> ciertos ajustes <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> y sonido.<br />
• ▲, ▼: Pue<strong>de</strong> ver otra información <strong>de</strong>l canal. Si <strong>de</strong>sea ir al canal actualm<strong>en</strong>te<br />
seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE.<br />
• ◄, ►: Pue<strong>de</strong> ver la información <strong>de</strong> programas <strong>de</strong>l canal actual.<br />
N Pulse el botón INFO otra vez o espere unos 10 segundos; la información<br />
<strong>de</strong>saparecerá automáticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Español - 10
Función Plug & Play<br />
Cuando el televisor se <strong>en</strong>ci<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativam<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> forma automática.<br />
N<br />
El salvapantallas se activa si durante más <strong>de</strong> 1 minuto no hay ninguna <strong>en</strong>trada <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> el teclado <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia<br />
mi<strong>en</strong>tras Plug & Play está <strong>en</strong> ejecución.<br />
El salvapantallas se activa si durante más <strong>de</strong> 15 minutos no se <strong>de</strong>tecta ninguna señal <strong>de</strong> funcionami<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
N<br />
1. Pulse el botón POWER <strong>en</strong> el mando a distancia.You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
language. Pue<strong>de</strong> configurar el idioma <strong>de</strong> los m<strong>en</strong>ús.<br />
Seleccione el idioma correspondi<strong>en</strong>te pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼.<br />
Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la elección.<br />
2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo ti<strong>en</strong>da o Uso doméstico, a<br />
continuación pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Es recom<strong>en</strong>dable configurar el televisor <strong>en</strong> el modo Uso doméstico para obt<strong>en</strong>er la mejor imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> un <strong>en</strong>torno<br />
doméstico.<br />
Demo ti<strong>en</strong>da sólo es necesario <strong>en</strong> los <strong>en</strong>tornos comerciales.<br />
Si la unidad acci<strong>de</strong>ntalm<strong>en</strong>te se configura <strong>en</strong> el modo Demo ti<strong>en</strong>da y se <strong>de</strong>sea volver a Uso doméstico (estándar):<br />
Pulse el botón <strong>de</strong>l volum<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>l televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSD <strong>de</strong>l volum<strong>en</strong>, mant<strong>en</strong>ga pulsado el botón MENU <strong>de</strong>l<br />
televisor durante 5 segundos.<br />
3. Pulse el botón ENTERE . Seleccione el país pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la<br />
elección.<br />
4. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para memorizar los canales <strong>de</strong> la conexión seleccionada y pulse el botón ENTERE.<br />
• Aérea: Señal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a aérea.<br />
• Cable: Señal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a <strong>de</strong>l cable.<br />
5. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> canal que <strong>de</strong>sea memorizar. Pulse el botón ENTERE para<br />
seleccionar Empezar.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos.<br />
Digital: Canales digitales.<br />
Analógico: Canales analógicos.<br />
N Para ver una <strong>de</strong>scripción más <strong>de</strong>tallada sobre cómo seleccionar el modo Cable, consulte la página 12.<br />
N La búsqueda <strong>de</strong> canales se iniciará y terminará automáticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N Pulse el botón ENTERE <strong>en</strong> cualquier mom<strong>en</strong>to para interrumpir el proceso <strong>de</strong> memorización.<br />
N Una vez memorizados todos los canales disponibles, se muestra el m<strong>en</strong>saje Configurar el modo <strong>de</strong>l reloj.<br />
6. Pulse el botón ENTERE . Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.<br />
N Si se selecciona Manual, se muestra Configura la fecha y la hora actuales. (consulte la página 24)<br />
N Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticam<strong>en</strong>te. En caso negativo, consulte la página 24 para<br />
ajustar el reloj.<br />
7. Se muestran unas breves instrucciones <strong>en</strong> Cómo obt<strong>en</strong>er el mejor r<strong>en</strong>dimi<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l nuevo HDTV. Pulse el botón ENTERE.<br />
N Este m<strong>en</strong>ú está disponible <strong>en</strong> Guía <strong>de</strong> conexión HD <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Asist<strong>en</strong>cia técnica.<br />
8. Aparecerá el m<strong>en</strong>saje Disfrute <strong>de</strong> su televisor. Cuando termine, pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Plug & Play<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sea reiniciar esta función...<br />
1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el m<strong>en</strong>ú. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar<br />
Configuración, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
2. Pulse el botón ENTERE <strong>de</strong> nuevo para seleccionar Plug & Play.<br />
3. Escriba su código PIN <strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos. El código PIN pre<strong>de</strong>terminado para un televisor<br />
nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sea cambiar el número PIN, consulte la página 22.<br />
La función Plug & Play está disponible sólo <strong>en</strong> el modo TV.<br />
Configuración<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>ú<br />
Hora<br />
Emisión<br />
Seguridad<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
: Español<br />
►<br />
Español - 11
Control <strong>de</strong> los canales<br />
Memorización <strong>de</strong> canales<br />
❑<br />
País<br />
• Canal analógico: Se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar el país <strong>de</strong> los canales analógicos.<br />
• Canal digital: Se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar el país <strong>de</strong> los canales digitales.<br />
N<br />
Aparece la pantalla para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l número PIN. Escriba su código PIN<br />
<strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos.<br />
Canal<br />
País<br />
Guardado automático<br />
Guardado manual<br />
Opción <strong>de</strong> búsqueda <strong>de</strong> cable<br />
►<br />
❑<br />
Guardado automático<br />
Busca todos los canales <strong>de</strong> las emisoras activas (la disponibilidad <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>l<br />
país) y los memoriza <strong>en</strong> el televisor.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> memorizar los canales <strong>de</strong> la conexión seleccionada.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
•<br />
Aérea: Señal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a aérea<br />
Cable: Señal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a <strong>de</strong>l cable.<br />
Al seleccionar lCable ,<br />
Modo Búsqueda: Muestra el modo <strong>de</strong> búsqueda. (Rápida)<br />
- ID red: Muestra el código <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificación <strong>de</strong> la red.<br />
- Frecu<strong>en</strong>cia: Muestra la frecu<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
- Modulación: Muestra los valores <strong>de</strong> modulación disponibles.<br />
- Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocida<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> símbolo disponibles.<br />
• Modo Búsqueda: Muestra el modo <strong>de</strong> búsqueda. (Completa, Red)<br />
- Frecu<strong>en</strong>cia (Inicio~Parada): Muestra la frecu<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
- Modulación: Muestra los valores <strong>de</strong> modulación disponibles.<br />
- Velocidad <strong>de</strong> símbolo: Muestra las velocida<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> símbolo disponibles.<br />
Guía actual y próxima<br />
Guía completa<br />
Guía pre<strong>de</strong>terminada : Act./sig.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> guardar la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l canal<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos.<br />
Digital: Canales digitales.<br />
Analógico: Canales analógicos.<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sea <strong>de</strong>t<strong>en</strong>er Guardado automático, pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Aparece el m<strong>en</strong>saje ¿Det<strong>en</strong>er guardado automático?.<br />
Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar “Sí” y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Sagoridad niños aparece la v<strong>en</strong>tana para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l código<br />
PIN.<br />
Continúa…<br />
Español - 12
❑<br />
Guardado manual<br />
Busca un canal manualm<strong>en</strong>te y lo memoriza <strong>en</strong> el televisor.<br />
• Canal digital(Digital)<br />
Almac<strong>en</strong>ami<strong>en</strong>to manual <strong>de</strong> canales digitales.<br />
N Canal digital sólo está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo <strong>de</strong> DTV.<br />
• Canal: Establezca el número <strong>de</strong>l canal con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).<br />
• Frecu<strong>en</strong>cia: Establezca la frecu<strong>en</strong>cia con los botones numéricos.<br />
• Ancho <strong>de</strong> banda: Establezca el ancho <strong>de</strong> banda con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).<br />
N Una vez finalizada, la lista <strong>de</strong> canales se actualiza automáticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Canal analógico<br />
Almac<strong>en</strong>ami<strong>en</strong>to manual <strong>de</strong> canales analógicos.<br />
• Programa (número <strong>de</strong> programa que asignar a un canal): Establezca el número <strong>de</strong>l programa con los botones ▲, ▼ o<br />
numéricos (0~9).<br />
• Sistema <strong>de</strong> color → Automático / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Establezca el sistema <strong>de</strong>l color con los botones ▲ o ▼.<br />
• Sistema <strong>de</strong> sonido → BG / L / I / DK: Establezca el sistema <strong>de</strong>l sonido con los botones ▲ o ▼.<br />
• Canal (si conoce el número <strong>de</strong> canal que <strong>de</strong>sea guardar): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar C (canal aéreo) o S<br />
(canal por cable). Pulse el botón ► y <strong>de</strong>spués ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar el número que <strong>de</strong>see.<br />
N También pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el número <strong>de</strong> canal directam<strong>en</strong>te pulsando los botones numéricos (0~9).<br />
N<br />
Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar <strong>de</strong> sonido a<strong>de</strong>cuado.<br />
• Buscar (si no conoce los números <strong>de</strong> los canales): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para iniciar la búsqueda. El sintonizador<br />
explora el rango <strong>de</strong> frecu<strong>en</strong>cia hasta que se recibe <strong>en</strong> la pantalla el primer canal o el canal que se ha seleccionado.<br />
• Guardar (cuando guar<strong>de</strong> el canal y el número <strong>de</strong> programa asociado): Establezca Aceptar pulsando el botón ENTERE .<br />
N Modo <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
- C (Modo <strong>de</strong> canal aéreo): Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar un canal introduci<strong>en</strong>do el número asignado a cada emisora aérea <strong>de</strong> este<br />
modo.<br />
- S (Modo <strong>de</strong> canal por cable): Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar un canal introduci<strong>en</strong>do el número asignado a cada canal por cable <strong>en</strong><br />
este modo.<br />
❑<br />
Opción <strong>de</strong> Búsqueda <strong>de</strong> Cable (Cable)<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> establecer opciones adicionales, como la frecu<strong>en</strong>cia y la velocidad <strong>de</strong> símbolo, para la búsqueda <strong>de</strong> la red por cable.<br />
(Dep<strong>en</strong>di<strong>en</strong>do <strong>de</strong>l país)<br />
• Frecu<strong>en</strong>cia (Inicio~Parada): Muestra la frecu<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
• Modulación: Muestra los valores <strong>de</strong> modulación disponibles.<br />
• Velocidad <strong>de</strong> símbolo: Muestra las velocida<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> símbolo disponibles.<br />
N Establezca la Frecu<strong>en</strong>cia (Inicio~Parada) y la Velocidad símbolos con los botones numéricos (0~9).<br />
❑<br />
Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa<br />
La información <strong>de</strong> la Guía electrónica <strong>de</strong> programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. Las <strong>en</strong>tradas <strong>de</strong> los programas<br />
pue<strong>de</strong>n aparecer vacías u obsoletas, según la información proporcionada por un canal <strong>de</strong>terminado. La pantalla se actualiza<br />
dinámicam<strong>en</strong>te tan pronto como la información está disponible.<br />
• Guía actual y próxima: Se muestra la información <strong>de</strong>l programa actual y sigui<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> los seis canales señalados <strong>en</strong> la<br />
columna izquierda.<br />
• Guía completa: Se muestra la información <strong>de</strong> los programas or<strong>de</strong>nados por hora <strong>en</strong> segm<strong>en</strong>tos <strong>de</strong> dos horas. Se muestra<br />
la información <strong>de</strong> uno horas <strong>de</strong> programa que se pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>splazar a<strong>de</strong>lante o atrás <strong>en</strong> el tiempo.<br />
Español - 13
❑<br />
Guía pre<strong>de</strong>terminada<br />
• Act./sig. / Guía completa: Pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>cidir que se muestre Act./sig. o Guía<br />
completa cuando se pulsa el botón GUIDE <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
Canal<br />
Guía actual y próxima<br />
Guía Completa<br />
Guía Pre<strong>de</strong>terminada :<br />
Act./sig.►<br />
Lista <strong>de</strong> Canales<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
Sintonización Fina<br />
:Canales añadidos<br />
O<br />
También pue<strong>de</strong> ver el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> la guía pulsando el botón GUIDE.<br />
Guía actual y próxima / Uso <strong>de</strong> Guía completa<br />
Guía actual y próxima<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Actual<br />
Sigui<strong>en</strong>te<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Ver Información página • Guía completa • Salir<br />
Guía completa<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
f tn<br />
900 Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits!<br />
Ver Información página • Act./sig. • Salir<br />
▲/▼/◄/►,<br />
(ENTER)<br />
RED<br />
GREEN<br />
YELLOW<br />
BLUE<br />
INFO<br />
Seleccionar un programa pulsando los botones ▲/▼/◄/►.<br />
Si el programa sigui<strong>en</strong>te está seleccionado, se concreta con un icono <strong>de</strong> reloj. Si se vuelve a pulsar<br />
el botón ENTERE, pulse los botones ▲/▼/◄/► para seleccionar Cancelar programaciones; la<br />
programación se cancela y el icono <strong>de</strong>l reloj <strong>de</strong>saparece.<br />
Para conocer los <strong>de</strong>talles <strong>de</strong> la programación <strong>de</strong> los programas, consulte la sección correspondi<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Intercambiar <strong>en</strong>tre Act./sig. o Guía completa.<br />
Guía Completa: Desplazarse rápidam<strong>en</strong>te hacia atrás (-24 horas).<br />
Guía Completa: Desplazarse rápidam<strong>en</strong>te hacia a<strong>de</strong>lante (+24 horas).<br />
Salir <strong>de</strong> la guía.<br />
Botón INFO para obt<strong>en</strong>er información <strong>de</strong>tallada. En la información <strong>de</strong>tallada se incluye el número <strong>de</strong>l<br />
canal, la hora <strong>de</strong> ejecución, la barra <strong>de</strong> estado, el nivel <strong>de</strong>l control paterno, la información <strong>de</strong> calidad <strong>de</strong>l<br />
ví<strong>de</strong>o (HD/SD), los modos <strong>de</strong> sonido, subtítulos o teletexto, los idiomas <strong>de</strong> los subtítulos o <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
y un resum<strong>en</strong> breve <strong>de</strong>l programa seleccionado. “…” se muestra si el resum<strong>en</strong> es largo.<br />
❑<br />
Lista <strong>de</strong> canales<br />
Para obt<strong>en</strong>er una <strong>de</strong>scripción <strong>de</strong>tallada sobre el uso <strong>de</strong> Lista <strong>de</strong> canales, consulte las páginas 15~16.<br />
❑<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
Cuando se pulsa el botón P / se cambian los canales <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales seleccionados.<br />
• Canales añadidos: Los canales se cambian <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales memorizados.<br />
• Canales favoritos: Los canales se cambian <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales favoritos.<br />
❑<br />
Sintonización fina (sólo canales analógicos)<br />
Si la recepción es clara, no ti<strong>en</strong>e que realizar la sintonización precisa <strong>de</strong>l canal, ya que esta operación se hace <strong>de</strong> forma<br />
automática durante la búsqueda y la memorización. Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, pue<strong>de</strong> que <strong>de</strong>ba realizar la<br />
sintonización precisa <strong>de</strong>l canal <strong>de</strong> forma manual.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Los canales que se han ajustado con sintonización fina se marcan con un asterisco “*” a la <strong>de</strong>recha <strong>de</strong>l número <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
<strong>en</strong> la banda <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
Si no almac<strong>en</strong>a <strong>en</strong> la memoria el canal que ha ajustado con la sintonización fina, los ajustes no se guardan.<br />
Para reiniciar la sintonía fina, seleccione Restablecer pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Español - 14
Gestión <strong>de</strong> los canales<br />
Con este m<strong>en</strong>ú pue<strong>de</strong> agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y<br />
usar la guía <strong>de</strong> programas <strong>de</strong> las emisoras digitales.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Selecciona un canal <strong>en</strong> la pantalla Todos los canales, Canales añadidos,<br />
Favoritos o Programado pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y el botón ENTER E.<br />
Todos los canales: Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Canales añadidos: Muestra todos los canales añadidos.<br />
Favoritos: Muestra todos los canales favoritos.<br />
Programado: Muestra todos los programas actualm<strong>en</strong>te reservados.<br />
Canal<br />
<br />
Miniguía<br />
Guía pre<strong>de</strong>terminada : Act./sig.<br />
Lista <strong>de</strong> canales<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> canal : Canales añadidos<br />
Sintonización fina<br />
N<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong> los botones <strong>de</strong> colores <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales<br />
- Rojo (Channel Type): Cambiar <strong>en</strong>tre TV, Radio, Datos / Otr y Todos.<br />
- Ver<strong>de</strong> (Zoom): Amplía o disminuye el número <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
- Amarillo (Select): Selecciona varias listas <strong>de</strong> canales.<br />
- TTOOLS (Option): Muestra los m<strong>en</strong>ús Borrar (o Añadir), Añadir a Favoritos<br />
(o Borrar <strong>de</strong> Favoritos), Visualiz. con temporiz., Modificac. número<br />
canal,Modificac. número canal, Or<strong>de</strong>nar, Bloquear (o Desbloquear),<br />
Seleccionar todos(o Deseleccionar todo) o Guardado automático.<br />
(Los m<strong>en</strong>ús <strong>de</strong> las opciones pue<strong>de</strong>n cambiar, <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>di<strong>en</strong>do <strong>de</strong> la situación.)<br />
Canales añadidos<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Iconos <strong>de</strong> la pantalla <strong>de</strong> estado <strong>de</strong>l canal<br />
Todos • Tipo <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Seleccionar Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
A Canal analógico. c Canal seleccionado al pulsar el botón amarillo.<br />
♥ Canal configurado como favorito. ( Programa que se está emiti<strong>en</strong>do.<br />
\ Canal bloqueado. ) Programa reservado.<br />
Pulse el botón CH LIST <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia para mostrar las listas <strong>de</strong> canales.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ús <strong>de</strong> herrami<strong>en</strong>tas <strong>de</strong> los canales (<strong>en</strong> All Channels / Canales añadidos / Favourites)<br />
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Los elem<strong>en</strong>tos <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> opciones pue<strong>de</strong>n variar según el estado <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
• Añadir / Borrar<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestr<strong>en</strong> los canales que <strong>de</strong>see.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Todos los canales.<br />
Un canal <strong>de</strong> color gris quiere <strong>de</strong>cir que se ha suprimido.<br />
El m<strong>en</strong>ú Añadir sólo aparece con los canales borrados.<br />
También pue<strong>de</strong> borrar un canal <strong>en</strong> los m<strong>en</strong>ús Canales añadidos o Favoritos<br />
<strong>de</strong> la misma manera.<br />
• Añadir a Favoritos / Delete to Favourite<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecu<strong>en</strong>cia.<br />
T<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el m<strong>en</strong>ú Tools (Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas).<br />
También pue<strong>de</strong> establecer los canales favoritos seleccionando Tools (Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas) → Añadir a Favoritos<br />
( o Borrar <strong>de</strong> Favoritos).<br />
Se mostrará el símbolo “♥“ y el canal se configurará como favorito.<br />
Todos los canales seleccionados se mostrarán <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Favoritos.<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sea seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón<br />
FAV.CH <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
Todos los canales<br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Borrar<br />
Añadir a Favoritos<br />
Visualiz. con temporiz.<br />
Modificac. nombre canal<br />
Or<strong>de</strong>nar<br />
Bloquear<br />
▼<br />
Todos • Tipo <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Seleccionar Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
Continúa…<br />
Español - 15
• Visualiz. con temporiz.<br />
Si reserva un programa que <strong>de</strong>sea ver, el canal se cambia automáticam<strong>en</strong>te al canal reservado <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales aunque<br />
esté vi<strong>en</strong>do otro canal. Para reservar un canal primero <strong>de</strong>be configurar la hora actual. (Consulte la página 24.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sólo se pue<strong>de</strong>n reservar los canales memorizados.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar el canal, el mes, el día, el año, la hora y el minuto directam<strong>en</strong>te pulsando los botones numéricos <strong>de</strong>l<br />
mando a distancia.<br />
La reserva <strong>de</strong> un programa se muestra <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Programme med.<br />
Guía <strong>de</strong> programas digitales y reserva <strong>de</strong> visualización<br />
Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ► aparece la guía <strong>de</strong> programas <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> reservar un programa mediante el procedimi<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>scrito anteriorm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Modificac. nombre canal (sólo canales analógicos)<br />
Los canales se pue<strong>de</strong>n etiquetar con el propósito <strong>de</strong> que cuando éstos se seleccionan se pueda ver su nombre.<br />
N Los nombres <strong>de</strong> los canales digitales se asignan automáticam<strong>en</strong>te y no se pue<strong>de</strong>n etiquetar.<br />
• Modificac. número canal (sólo canales digitales)<br />
También pue<strong>de</strong> editar el número <strong>de</strong>l canal pulsando los botones numéricos <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
• Or<strong>de</strong>nar (sólo canales analógicosl)<br />
Esta operación permite cambiar los números <strong>de</strong> programa <strong>de</strong> los canales memorizados. Pue<strong>de</strong> que sea necesario realizarla<br />
<strong>de</strong>spués <strong>de</strong> la memorización automática.<br />
• Bloquear / Desbloquear<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. Está función está disponible sólo cuando<br />
Sagoridad niños está configurado como Activado. (consulte la página 22)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Aparece la pantalla para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l número PIN. Escriba su código PIN <strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos.<br />
El código PIN pre<strong>de</strong>terminado para un televisor nuevo es “0-0-0-0”. Se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN<br />
<strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú.<br />
Se muestra el símbolo “\” y el canal queda bloqueado.<br />
• Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo<br />
• Seleccionar todos: Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar todos los canales <strong>de</strong> la lista.<br />
• Deseleccionar todo: Pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>smarcar todos los canales seleccionados <strong>de</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales.<br />
N Pue<strong>de</strong> realizar las funciones <strong>de</strong> añadir, borrar, añadir a favoritos, borrar <strong>de</strong> favoritos, bloquear o <strong>de</strong>sbloquear con varios<br />
canales al mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que <strong>de</strong>see y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales<br />
seleccionados al mismo tiempo.<br />
N La marca c aparece a la izquierda <strong>de</strong> los canales seleccionados.<br />
N Sólo se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar Deseleccionar todo si el canal está seleccionado.<br />
• Guardado automático<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sea más <strong>de</strong>talles sobre las opciones <strong>de</strong> configuración, consulte la página 12.<br />
Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Sagoridad niños, aparece la v<strong>en</strong>tana para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l código PIN.<br />
❑<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> opciones <strong>de</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales (<strong>en</strong> Programme med)<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva.<br />
N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> opciones.<br />
• Cambiar información: Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva <strong>de</strong> visualización.<br />
• Cancelar programaciones: Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva <strong>de</strong><br />
visualización.<br />
• Información: Selecciónelo para ver una reserva <strong>de</strong> visualización.<br />
(También se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar la información <strong>de</strong> reserva.)<br />
• Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todos: Seleccionar o <strong>de</strong>seleccionar todos<br />
los programas reservados.<br />
Programmed<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 Cambiar TV1 Quincy, información M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Cancelar programaciones<br />
TV3 The Equalizer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Información<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Seleccionar todos<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Tipo <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Seleccionar Tools Información<br />
Español - 16
Control <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Cambio y restauración <strong>de</strong> la configuración <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
❑<br />
Modo<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el tipo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> que mejor cumpla sus requisitos <strong>de</strong> visualización.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
T<br />
Dinámico: Selecciona una imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> alta <strong>de</strong>finición para <strong>en</strong>tornos muy iluminados.<br />
Estándar: Selecciona la mejor visualización <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> para <strong>en</strong>tornos normales.<br />
Película: Selecciona una visualización <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> confortable <strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>tornos oscuros.<br />
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el m<strong>en</strong>ú Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
También se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar el modo <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> seleccionando<br />
Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas → Modo imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Modo : Estándar ►<br />
Iluminación <strong>de</strong> la celda : 4<br />
Contraste : 95<br />
Brillo : 45<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>z : 50<br />
Color : 50<br />
Matiz(V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Iluminación <strong>de</strong> la celda / Contraste / Brillo / Niti<strong>de</strong>z / Color / Matiz (V/R)<br />
El televisor ti<strong>en</strong>e varias opciones <strong>de</strong> configuración que permit<strong>en</strong> controlar la calidad <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Cell Light (Luz <strong>de</strong> la celda): Ajusta el brillo <strong>de</strong> los píxeles.<br />
Contraste: Ajusta el nivel <strong>de</strong> contraste.<br />
Brillo: Ajusta el nivel <strong>de</strong> brillo.<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>z: Ajusta el nivel <strong>de</strong> niti<strong>de</strong>z.<br />
Color: Ajusta la saturación <strong>de</strong>l color <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> mediante la barra <strong>de</strong> la pantalla.<br />
Matiz (V/R): Cuanto más cerca <strong>de</strong> Rojo 100, más saturado está el color rojo.<br />
Seleccione el modo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> que <strong>de</strong>see ajustar <strong>en</strong> primer lugar. Los valores ajustados se guardan para cada modo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Cuando se cambian llmin.celda, Contraste, Brillo, Niti<strong>de</strong>z, Color o Matiz (V/R), la pres<strong>en</strong>tación <strong>en</strong> pantalla OSD se<br />
ajusta consecu<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
En los modos TV, Ext., AV, S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o <strong>de</strong>l sistema PAL, no se pue<strong>de</strong> usar la función Matiz.<br />
La configuración <strong>de</strong> cada dispositivo externo conectado a una <strong>en</strong>trada <strong>de</strong>l televisor se pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar y guardar.<br />
La <strong>en</strong>ergía consumida durante el uso se pue<strong>de</strong> reducir significativam<strong>en</strong>te si se disminuye el nivel <strong>de</strong>l brillo <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong>,<br />
ya que así se reduce el costo total <strong>de</strong> funcionami<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
Configuración Avanzada<br />
Los nuevos televisores <strong>Samsung</strong> permit<strong>en</strong> una configuración más precisa <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> que los mo<strong>de</strong>los anteriores. Consulte<br />
más a<strong>de</strong>lante cómo realizar una configuración <strong>de</strong>tallada.<br />
N<br />
Configuración Avanzada está disponible <strong>en</strong> los modos Estándar o Película.<br />
• Tono <strong>de</strong>l negro → Desactivado. / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el nivel <strong>de</strong> negro <strong>en</strong> la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad <strong>de</strong><br />
ésta.<br />
• Contraste dinám. → Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar el contraste <strong>de</strong> la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo.<br />
• Gamma<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar la int<strong>en</strong>sidad <strong>de</strong> los colores primarios (rojo, ver<strong>de</strong> y azul).<br />
• Gama <strong>de</strong> colores<br />
La gama <strong>de</strong> colores es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, ver<strong>de</strong> y azul. Seleccione su gama favorita <strong>de</strong> color y<br />
disfrute <strong>de</strong> unos colores auténticam<strong>en</strong>te naturales.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Automático: Configura automáticam<strong>en</strong>te la gama <strong>de</strong> color <strong>de</strong> acuerdo con la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l ví<strong>de</strong>o <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
Original: Configura la gama <strong>de</strong> color más amplia que la <strong>de</strong> la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l ví<strong>de</strong>o <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
• Balance <strong>de</strong> blanco<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar la temperatura <strong>de</strong>l color para conseguir colores más naturales.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Rojo - / Ver<strong>de</strong> - / Azul - / Rojo + / Ver<strong>de</strong> + / Azul +: Al cambiar el valor <strong>de</strong> ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada.<br />
Restablecer: Restablece el balance <strong>de</strong> blancos pre<strong>de</strong>terminado..<br />
• Tono piel<br />
Permite ac<strong>en</strong>tuar el tono rosado piel <strong>de</strong> las imág<strong>en</strong>es.<br />
N Al cambiar el valor <strong>de</strong> ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada.<br />
• Mejora <strong>de</strong>l bor<strong>de</strong> → Desactivado / Activado<br />
Permite ac<strong>en</strong>tuar los bor<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> los objetos <strong>en</strong> las imág<strong>en</strong>es.<br />
Imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Color : 50<br />
Matiz (V/R)<br />
Configuración Avanzada<br />
Opciones <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Reinicio <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
: V50/R50<br />
►<br />
Español - 17
❑<br />
Opciones <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong><br />
• Tono <strong>de</strong> color → Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el tono <strong>de</strong> color que le resulte más cómodo para la vista.<br />
N Los parámetros ajustados se almac<strong>en</strong>an <strong>de</strong> acuerdo con el modo Imag<strong>en</strong><br />
seleccionado.<br />
N Cálido1 o Cálido2 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> está<br />
configurado <strong>en</strong> Película.<br />
Imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Matiz (V/R)<br />
: V50/R50<br />
Configuración avanzada<br />
Opciones <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Reinicio <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
• Tamaño<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el tamaño <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> que mejor se adapte a sus requisitos <strong>de</strong><br />
visualización.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ancho automático: Ajusta la imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> formato <strong>de</strong> ancho automático.<br />
16:9: Configura la imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> una relación <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9.<br />
Zoom ancho: Seleccione este m<strong>en</strong>ú para ver imág<strong>en</strong>es 4:3 <strong>en</strong> un televisor con una relación 16:9 alargando la imag<strong>en</strong> 4:3<br />
verticalm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Zoom: Alarga verticalm<strong>en</strong>te la relación <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9.<br />
4:3: Configura la imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> una relación <strong>de</strong> aspecto 4:3.<br />
Ajuste <strong>en</strong> pantalla: Muestra la señal HD nativa completa que no se pue<strong>de</strong> ver <strong>en</strong> un televisor normal.<br />
Las opciones <strong>de</strong> tamaño <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> pue<strong>de</strong>n variar según la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
Las opciones disponibles pue<strong>de</strong>n diferir, según el mo<strong>de</strong>lo seleccionado.<br />
La configuración <strong>de</strong> cada dispositivo externo conectado a una <strong>en</strong>trada <strong>de</strong>l televisor se pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar y guardar.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> producirse una ret<strong>en</strong>ción temporal <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> cuando se ve una imag<strong>en</strong> estática durante más <strong>de</strong> dos horas.<br />
Zoom ancho: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para <strong>de</strong>splazar la pantalla hacia arriba o hacia abajo. Pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Zoom: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición, a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE . Pulse los botones ▲ o<br />
▼ para <strong>de</strong>splazar la imag<strong>en</strong> hacia arriba o hacia abajo. Pulse el botón ENTERE . Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar<br />
Tamaño, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE . Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el tamaño <strong>de</strong> la<br />
imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> dirección vertical. Pulse el botón ENTERE .<br />
Después <strong>de</strong> seleccionar Ajuste Pantalla <strong>en</strong> los modos HDMI (1080i/1080p) o Compon<strong>en</strong>te (1080i/1080p): Seleccione<br />
Posición con los botones ◄ o ►. Use los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Rest.: Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Restablecer, a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE . Pue<strong>de</strong><br />
inicializar la configuración.<br />
Si se usa la función Ajuste Pantalla con la <strong>en</strong>trada HDMI 720p, <strong>en</strong> los laterales superior, inferior, <strong>de</strong>recho e izquierdo <strong>de</strong><br />
la pantalla se cortará una línea como <strong>en</strong> la función <strong>de</strong> sobreexploración.<br />
• Modo Pantalla<br />
Cuando se configura el tamaño <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> como Ancho automático <strong>en</strong> un televisor panorámico 16:9, se pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>terminar<br />
el tamaño <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> para ver una imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> pantalla panorámica 4:3 WSS o ninguna. Cada país europeo exige un<br />
tamaño <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> difer<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> modo que esta función está concebida con la int<strong>en</strong>ción <strong>de</strong> que los usuarios la seleccion<strong>en</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
16:9: Configura la imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> una relación <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9.<br />
Zoom ancho: Seleccione este m<strong>en</strong>ú para ver imág<strong>en</strong>es 4:3 <strong>en</strong> un televisor con una relación 16:9 alargando la imag<strong>en</strong> 4:3<br />
verticalm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Zoom: Alarga verticalm<strong>en</strong>te la relación <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9.<br />
4:3: Selecciona el modo <strong>de</strong> pantalla como 4:3.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Esta función está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo Ancho automático.<br />
Esta función no está disponible <strong>en</strong> los modos , Compon<strong>en</strong>te o HDMI.<br />
• Digital NR → Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Automático<br />
Si la señal <strong>de</strong> emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, pue<strong>de</strong> activarse la función Digital Noise Reduction para reducir la<br />
estática y las imág<strong>en</strong>es superpuestas que pue<strong>de</strong>n aparecer <strong>en</strong> la pantalla.<br />
N<br />
Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna <strong>de</strong> las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> mejor calidad.<br />
• N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar directam<strong>en</strong>te el nivel <strong>de</strong> negro <strong>en</strong> la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad <strong>de</strong> ésta.<br />
N<br />
Esta función sólo está activa cuando se conecta la <strong>en</strong>trada externa a HDMI (señales RGB).<br />
Continúa…<br />
Español - 18
• Modo <strong>de</strong> película<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> optimizar el modo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> para ver películas.<br />
• Desactivado.: Se aplica el procesami<strong>en</strong>to básico <strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o y <strong>de</strong> no <strong>de</strong>tección automática para programas <strong>de</strong><br />
películas.<br />
• Auto: Ajusta automáticam<strong>en</strong>te para obt<strong>en</strong>er la mejor calidad <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>tre programas <strong>de</strong> películas y ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection (Protección <strong>de</strong> pantalla)<br />
Configura las opciones <strong>de</strong> la protección <strong>de</strong> pantalla inactiva para impedir que los píxeles se quem<strong>en</strong> o para reducir este riesgo.<br />
Cuando una imag<strong>en</strong> permanece <strong>en</strong> una posición <strong>de</strong>masiado tiempo pue<strong>de</strong> causar una quemadura perman<strong>en</strong>te <strong>en</strong> la pantalla.<br />
• Cambio píxel: Esta pantalla está equipada con tecnología <strong>de</strong> prev<strong>en</strong>ción para reducir la posibilidad <strong>de</strong> que se queme. Esta<br />
tecnología permite <strong>de</strong>finir el movimi<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> arriba o abajo (vertical) y <strong>de</strong> lado a lado (horizontal). El ajuste <strong>de</strong>l<br />
tiempo permite programar intervalos temporales <strong>en</strong>tre los movimi<strong>en</strong>tos <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> minutos.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Seleccione Cambio píxel <strong>en</strong> On pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y ENTERE.<br />
Seleccione la opción necesaria pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.<br />
Opciones disponibles: Horiz., verticales, Hora.<br />
Condición óptima para cambio <strong>de</strong> píxel<br />
Elem<strong>en</strong>to<br />
TV/Ext/AV/Compon<strong>en</strong>te/HDMI<br />
Horiz 0~4 2<br />
verticales 0~4 2<br />
Hora (minutos) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
El valor Pixel Shift pue<strong>de</strong> variar según el tamaño (pulgadas) <strong>de</strong>l monitor y el modo.<br />
Esta función no está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo Ajuste pantalla.<br />
• Desplazami<strong>en</strong>to: Esta función ayuda a suprimir los restos <strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es <strong>en</strong> la pantalla movi<strong>en</strong>do todos los píxeles <strong>de</strong> la<br />
PDP <strong>de</strong> acuerdo con un patrón. Utilice esta función si hay restos <strong>de</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es o símbolos <strong>en</strong> la pantalla, especialm<strong>en</strong>te<br />
<strong>de</strong>spués <strong>de</strong> haber mostrado una imag<strong>en</strong> fija <strong>en</strong> la pantalla durante un largo tiempo.<br />
• Lateral gris: Cuando se ve la televisión con una relación <strong>de</strong> pantalla <strong>de</strong> 4:3, ésta se pue<strong>de</strong> proteger <strong>de</strong> un posible daño si<br />
se ajusta el balance <strong>de</strong> blanco <strong>en</strong> ambos extremos, el izquierdo y el <strong>de</strong>recho.<br />
- Oscuro: Cuando se establece una relación <strong>de</strong> pantalla <strong>de</strong> 4:3, con esta opción se oscurec<strong>en</strong> ambos extremos, el<br />
izquierdo y el <strong>de</strong>recho.<br />
- Claro: Cuando se establece una relación <strong>de</strong> pantalla <strong>de</strong> 4:3, con esta opción se aclaran ambos extremos, el izquierdo y<br />
el <strong>de</strong>recho.<br />
❑<br />
Reinicio <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> → Restablecer modo imag<strong>en</strong> / Cancelar<br />
Restablece todos los ajustes pre<strong>de</strong>terminados.<br />
N<br />
Seleccione un modo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong> que <strong>de</strong>see restaurar. La restauración se realiza<br />
<strong>en</strong> cada modo <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Imag<strong>en</strong> Picture<br />
Configuración avanzada<br />
Opciones <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong><br />
Reinicio <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
►<br />
Español - 19
Control <strong>de</strong>l sonido<br />
Cambio <strong>de</strong>l estándar <strong>de</strong> sonido<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Modo → Estándar / Música / Película / Voz Clara / Personal<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el tipo <strong>de</strong> efecto <strong>de</strong> sonido especial que se va a usar cuando<br />
se ve un programa.<br />
T<br />
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el m<strong>en</strong>ú Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
También se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar el modo <strong>de</strong> sonido seleccionando<br />
Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas → Modo <strong>de</strong> sonido<br />
Ecualizador<br />
Es posible ajustar los parámetros <strong>de</strong>l sonido según las prefer<strong>en</strong>cias personales.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Modo: Se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar el modo <strong>de</strong> sonido que se ajuste mejor a las<br />
prefer<strong>en</strong>cias personales.<br />
Balance: Ajusta el balance <strong>en</strong>tre los altavoces izquierdo y <strong>de</strong>recho.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 2KHz / 10KHz (ajuste <strong>de</strong> ancho <strong>de</strong> banda): Para ajustar el nivel <strong>de</strong> las difer<strong>en</strong>tes frecu<strong>en</strong>cias<br />
<strong>de</strong> ancho <strong>de</strong> banda<br />
Restablecer: Restablece todos los ajustes <strong>de</strong>l ecualizador pre<strong>de</strong>terminados.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Desactivado / Activado<br />
<br />
SRS TruSurround HD es una tecnología combinada <strong>de</strong> TruSurround y FOCUS, TruBass.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD permite disfrutar <strong>de</strong> un sonido surround virtual <strong>de</strong> 5.1 canales <strong>en</strong> los dos altavoces <strong>de</strong>l televisor. Esta<br />
función proporciona no sólo bajos profundos sino que también mejora la resolución <strong>de</strong> las frecu<strong>en</strong>cias altas.<br />
N Si al reproducir música el sonido <strong>de</strong>l televisor no se oye correctam<strong>en</strong>te, ajuste el ecualizador y SRS TruSurround HD<br />
(Desactivado./Activado).<br />
Sonido<br />
Modo : Personal ►<br />
Ecualizador<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Desactivado<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> audio : ----<br />
Formato audio : ----<br />
Descripción <strong>de</strong> audio<br />
Volum<strong>en</strong> automático : Desactivado<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS y el símbolo son marcas registradas <strong>de</strong> SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
La tecnología TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo lic<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong> SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> audio (Editar nombre <strong>de</strong> canal)<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong>n cambiar los valores pre<strong>de</strong>terminados para los idiomas <strong>de</strong>l audio. Muestra la información <strong>de</strong>l idioma para el flujo <strong>de</strong><br />
<strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
N Sólo se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar uno <strong>de</strong> los idiomas que ofrece la emisora.<br />
Formato audio→ MPEG / Dolby Digital (Editar nombre <strong>de</strong> canal)<br />
Cuando el sonido se emite <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> un altavoz principal y un receptor <strong>de</strong> audio, se pue<strong>de</strong> originar un sonido <strong>de</strong> eco <strong>de</strong>bido a las<br />
difer<strong>en</strong>cias <strong>en</strong> la velocidad <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>codificación <strong>en</strong>tre el altavoz principal y un receptor <strong>de</strong> audio. En tales casos, use la función<br />
Altavoz <strong>de</strong> TV (TV Speaker).<br />
N<br />
Sólo se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar uno <strong>de</strong> los idiomas que ofrece la emisora.<br />
Fabricado bajo lic<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong> Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby y el símbolo <strong>de</strong> la doble D son marcas comerciales <strong>de</strong> Dolby Laboratories.<br />
❑<br />
Descripción <strong>de</strong> audio (Editar nombre <strong>de</strong> canal)<br />
Es una función auxiliar <strong>de</strong> audio que proporciona una pista <strong>de</strong> audio adicional para personas con problemas <strong>de</strong> vista. Esta<br />
función maneja el flujo <strong>de</strong> audio <strong>de</strong> AD (Descripción <strong>de</strong> audio) cuando se <strong>en</strong>vía <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> el emisor con el audio principal. Los<br />
usuarios pue<strong>de</strong>n activar o <strong>de</strong>sactivar la <strong>de</strong>scripción <strong>de</strong> audio y controlar el volum<strong>en</strong>.<br />
O<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón AD <strong>de</strong>l mando a<br />
distancia.<br />
• Descripción <strong>de</strong> audio → Desactivado / Activado<br />
Activa o <strong>de</strong>sactiva la función <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>scripción <strong>de</strong>l audio.<br />
• Volum<strong>en</strong><br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar el volum<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> la <strong>de</strong>scripción <strong>de</strong>l audio.<br />
N Volum<strong>en</strong> está activo cuando Descripción <strong>de</strong> audio se configura como Activado.<br />
Español - 20<br />
Continúa…
❑<br />
❑<br />
Volum<strong>en</strong> autom. → Desactivado / Activado<br />
Cada emisora ti<strong>en</strong>e sus propias condiciones <strong>de</strong> señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volum<strong>en</strong> cada vez que se cambia <strong>de</strong><br />
canal. Esta función permite ajustar automáticam<strong>en</strong>te el volum<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> un canal disminuy<strong>en</strong>do la salida <strong>de</strong> sonido cuando la<br />
señal <strong>de</strong> modulación es alta o aum<strong>en</strong>tando la salida <strong>de</strong> sonido cuando la señal <strong>de</strong> modulación es baja.<br />
Altavoz seleccionar → Altavoz externo / Altavoz <strong>de</strong> TV<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sea usar unos altavoces in<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>di<strong>en</strong>tes, cancele el amplificador interno.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Los botones – +,MMUTE no funcionan si Seleccionar Altavoz está establecido <strong>en</strong> Altavoz externo.<br />
Si se selecciona Altavoz externo <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Seleccionar Altavoz , se limita la configuración <strong>de</strong>l sonido.<br />
Altavoces internos <strong>de</strong>l televisor<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Salida <strong>de</strong> audio (óptica, salida I/D) para el sistema <strong>de</strong><br />
sonido<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
Altavoz <strong>de</strong> TV Salida <strong>de</strong> altavoces Salida <strong>de</strong> sonido<br />
Altavoz externo Sil<strong>en</strong>cio Salida <strong>de</strong> sonido<br />
Sin señal <strong>de</strong>l ví<strong>de</strong>o Sil<strong>en</strong>cio Sil<strong>en</strong>cio<br />
❑ Volum<strong>en</strong> automático : Desactivado<br />
Reinicio <strong>de</strong>l sonido → Restablecer Todo/Rest. Modo Sonido/Cancelar<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> restaurar la configuración <strong>de</strong>l sonido con los valores pre<strong>de</strong>terminados <strong>de</strong><br />
fábrica.`<br />
Sonido<br />
Seleccionar Altavoz<br />
Reinicio <strong>de</strong>l sonido<br />
: Altavoz <strong>de</strong> TV<br />
►<br />
Selección <strong>de</strong>l modo <strong>de</strong> sonido<br />
Cuando se configura Dual I-II, el modo <strong>de</strong> sonido actual se muestra <strong>en</strong> la pantalla.<br />
Tipo <strong>de</strong> emisión<br />
Indicación <strong>en</strong> pantalla<br />
Emisión normal<br />
(Audio estándar)<br />
Mono (Uso normal)<br />
NICAM<br />
Estéreo<br />
Normal + Mono NICAM<br />
NICAM estéreo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
estéreo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM DUAL-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
A2<br />
Estéreo<br />
Regular broadcast<br />
(Standard audio)<br />
Mono (Normal use)<br />
Bilingual or DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Monoaural forzado)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si la señal <strong>de</strong> estéreo es débil y el modo cambia <strong>de</strong> forma automática, cambie a mono.<br />
Esta función sólo está activa <strong>en</strong> la señal <strong>de</strong> sonido estéreo. Está <strong>de</strong>sactivada <strong>en</strong> el modo <strong>de</strong> señal monoaural.<br />
Esta función sólo está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo TV.<br />
Español - 21
Descripción <strong>de</strong> las funciones<br />
Configuración <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> configuración<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>ú<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar el idioma <strong>de</strong> los m<strong>en</strong>ús.<br />
Emisión<br />
• Subtítulos<br />
Emisión<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong>n activar o <strong>de</strong>sactivar los subtítulos. Use este m<strong>en</strong>ú para configurar<br />
Seguridad<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> subtítulo. Normal es la opción básica y Duro <strong>de</strong> oído es la opción para<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
personas con problemas <strong>de</strong> audición.<br />
• Subtítulos → Activado / Desactivado: Activa o <strong>de</strong>sactiva los subtítulos.<br />
• Modo → Normal / Duro <strong>de</strong> oído: Establece el modo <strong>de</strong> los subtítulos.<br />
• Idioma <strong>de</strong> los subtídtulos: Establece el idioma <strong>de</strong> los subtítulos.<br />
N Si el programa que se está vi<strong>en</strong>do no admite la opción Duro <strong>de</strong> oído, automáticam<strong>en</strong>te se activa Normal aunque se seleccione<br />
Duro <strong>de</strong> oído.<br />
N El inglés es el idioma pre<strong>de</strong>terminado cuando <strong>en</strong> una emisión no está disponible<br />
la selección <strong>de</strong> idiomas.<br />
O Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón SUBT. <strong>de</strong>l mando a<br />
distancia.<br />
• Texto digital → Inhabilitar / Habilitar<br />
Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está activada.<br />
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group -<br />
Grupo <strong>de</strong> expertos para la codificación <strong>de</strong> la información hipermedia y multimedia)<br />
Es una norma internacional para los sistemas <strong>de</strong> codificación <strong>de</strong> datos que se utilizan <strong>en</strong> hipermedia y multimedia. Es un<br />
nivel superior al sistema MPEG que incluye hipermedia vinculado a datos, como imág<strong>en</strong>es fijas, servicios <strong>de</strong> caracteres,<br />
animaciones, gráficos y archivos <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o así como datos multimedia. MHEG es una tecnología <strong>de</strong> interacción <strong>de</strong> tiempo<br />
<strong>de</strong> ejecución <strong>de</strong>l usuario que se aplica <strong>en</strong> varios campos, como VOD (ví<strong>de</strong>o a la carta), ITV (televisión interactiva), EC<br />
(comercio electrónico), educación a distancia, teleconfer<strong>en</strong>cias, bibliotecas digitales y juegos <strong>de</strong> red.<br />
• Idioma <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar el idioma <strong>de</strong>l teletexto seleccionando el tipo <strong>de</strong> idioma.<br />
N El inglés es el idioma pre<strong>de</strong>terminado cuando <strong>en</strong> una emisión no está disponible la selección <strong>de</strong> idiomas.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Prefer<strong>en</strong>cias<br />
Idioma principal audio/ Idioma secundario audio/ Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos / Idioma principal<br />
<strong>de</strong>l teletexto / Idioma secundario <strong>de</strong>l teletexto<br />
Con esta función los usuarios pue<strong>de</strong>n seleccionar uno <strong>de</strong> los idiomas. El idioma seleccionado aquí se convierte <strong>en</strong> el<br />
pre<strong>de</strong>terminado cuando se selecciona un canal.<br />
Si se cambia la configuración <strong>de</strong>l idioma, las opciones <strong>de</strong> idioma <strong>de</strong> los subtítulos, idioma <strong>de</strong> audio o idioma <strong>de</strong>l teletexto <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú<br />
<strong>de</strong> idioma se cambian automáticam<strong>en</strong>te al idioma seleccionado.<br />
Las opciones <strong>de</strong> idioma <strong>de</strong> los subtítulos, idioma <strong>de</strong> audio e idioma <strong>de</strong>l teletexto, <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> idioma, muestran una lista <strong>de</strong> los<br />
idiomas admitidos <strong>en</strong> el canal actual y la selección se resalta. Si cambia la configuración <strong>de</strong>l idioma, ésta sólo es válida <strong>en</strong> el canal<br />
actual. Los cambios <strong>de</strong> configuración no afectan a las opciones <strong>de</strong> idioma principal <strong>de</strong> los subtítulos, idioma principal audio o idioma<br />
principal <strong>de</strong>l teletexto <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> prefer<strong>en</strong>cias.<br />
Interfaz común<br />
Instalación <strong>de</strong> la tarjeta CI<br />
1. Pue<strong>de</strong> adquirir el módulo <strong>de</strong>l CAM <strong>de</strong> CI por teléfono o <strong>en</strong> el distribuidor más<br />
cercano a su domicilio.<br />
2. Inserte la tarjeta CI <strong>en</strong> el CAM sigui<strong>en</strong>do la dirección <strong>de</strong> la flecha hasta que <strong>en</strong>caje.<br />
3. Inserte el CAM con la tarjeta CI instalada <strong>en</strong> la ranura para interfaz común.<br />
N Inserte el CAM, sigui<strong>en</strong>do la dirección <strong>de</strong> la flecha, hasta el fondo, <strong>de</strong> modo<br />
que que<strong>de</strong> paralelo a la ranura.<br />
4. Compruebe si se v<strong>en</strong> imág<strong>en</strong>es <strong>en</strong> un canal <strong>de</strong> señal codificada.<br />
• M<strong>en</strong>ú CI<br />
Permite al usuario realizar selecciones <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú CAM proporcionado.<br />
Seleccione el m<strong>en</strong>ú CI según el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> la tarjeta PC.<br />
• Info. sobre la aplicación<br />
La interfaz común conti<strong>en</strong>e y muestra información acerca <strong>de</strong>l CAM insertado <strong>en</strong> la ranura CI.<br />
La información <strong>de</strong> la aplicación insertada se refiere a la tarjeta CI. La instalación <strong>de</strong>l CAM pue<strong>de</strong> efectuarse con el televisor<br />
<strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido o apagado.<br />
N El módulo CAM no se admite <strong>en</strong> algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local.<br />
Continúa…<br />
Español - 22<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>ú : Español ►<br />
Hora
❑<br />
Seguridad<br />
• Seguridad niños → Desactivado / Activado<br />
Esta función permite bloquear el ví<strong>de</strong>o y el audio para evitar que los usuarios no autorizados (por ejemplo, los niños) puedan<br />
ver programas poco recom<strong>en</strong>dables.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> que se muestre la pantalla <strong>de</strong> configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l código PIN. Escriba su código PIN<br />
<strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos.<br />
El código PIN pre<strong>de</strong>terminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú.<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong>n bloquear algunos canales <strong>en</strong> la lista <strong>de</strong> canales. (consulte la página 15)<br />
Seguridad para niños sólo está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo TV.<br />
• Bloqueo paterno<br />
Con esta función se pue<strong>de</strong> impedir por medio <strong>de</strong> un código PIN (número <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificación personal) <strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos <strong>de</strong>finido por<br />
el usuario que personas no autorizadas, como los niños, vean programas ina<strong>de</strong>cuados.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> que se muestre la pantalla <strong>de</strong> configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l código PIN. Escriba su código PIN <strong>de</strong><br />
4 dígitos.<br />
El código PIN pre<strong>de</strong>terminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘ 0-0-0-0 ’. Se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú.<br />
Una vez establecida la clasificación, se muestra el símbolo “\”.<br />
Perm. todo: Se pulsa para <strong>de</strong>sbloquear todos los programas <strong>de</strong> televisión.<br />
Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloquear todos los programas <strong>de</strong> televisión.<br />
• Cambiar PIN<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar el número ID personal necesario para configurar el televisor.<br />
N Antes <strong>de</strong> que se muestre la pantalla <strong>de</strong> configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción <strong>de</strong>l código PIN. Escriba su<br />
código PIN <strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos.<br />
N El código PIN pre<strong>de</strong>terminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘ 0-0-0-0 ’.<br />
N Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia <strong>en</strong> la sigui<strong>en</strong>te secu<strong>en</strong>cia para reiniciar el PIN a<br />
‘0-0-0-0’: Botón <strong>de</strong> POWER (Desactivado.), M MUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Activado).<br />
❑<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
• Modo Juego → Desactivado / Activado<br />
Si conecta una consola <strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>ojuegos, como PlayStation TM o Xbox TM , podrá disfrutar <strong>de</strong> s<strong>en</strong>saciones más realistas<br />
seleccionando el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> juegos.<br />
• Si el Modo Juego está <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
El modo Imag<strong>en</strong> cambia automáticam<strong>en</strong>te a Estándar y no se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar.<br />
El modo Sonido cambia automáticam<strong>en</strong>te a Personal y no se pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar. Ajuste el sonido con el ecualizador.<br />
El modo Rest. <strong>de</strong>l m<strong>en</strong>ú Sonido se activa. La función Rest. inicializa la configuración <strong>de</strong>l ecualizador con los valores<br />
pre<strong>de</strong>terminados <strong>de</strong> fábrica.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Modo Juego no está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo normal <strong>de</strong> TV o Modo Juego está establecido como Desactivado.<br />
Si la calidad <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong> es <strong>de</strong>fici<strong>en</strong>te cuando un dispositivo externo está conectado a TV, compruebe si la opción Modo<br />
Juego está configurada como Activado.<br />
N Si visualiza el m<strong>en</strong>ú <strong>de</strong> TV <strong>en</strong> el modo Juego, la pantalla tiembla ligeram<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N La marca ( ) que aparece <strong>en</strong> la pantalla indica que la opción Modo Juego está activa con la fu<strong>en</strong>te seleccionada.<br />
N Esta función sólo admite la función <strong>de</strong> juegos.<br />
• Ahorro <strong>en</strong>ergía<br />
Esta función ajusta el brillo <strong>de</strong>l televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergía. Si <strong>de</strong>sea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste<br />
la opción <strong>de</strong>l modo Ahorro <strong>en</strong>ergía <strong>en</strong> Alto; sus ojos se lo agra<strong>de</strong>cerán y, a<strong>de</strong>más, reducirá el consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergía.<br />
Si se selecciona Imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>sact., la pantalla se apaga y sólo se pue<strong>de</strong> oír el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón para salir <strong>de</strong><br />
Imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>sact..<br />
N En el m<strong>en</strong>ú Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas, la función Imag<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>sact. no se admite.<br />
T<br />
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el m<strong>en</strong>ú Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
También pue<strong>de</strong> configurar esta opción seleccionando Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas → Ahorro <strong>en</strong>ergía.<br />
• Melodía → Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto<br />
La melodía <strong>de</strong>l <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido y <strong>de</strong>l apagado <strong>de</strong>l televisor se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar.<br />
N La melodía no se reproduce<br />
- Cuando no hay salida <strong>de</strong> sonido <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MMUTE.<br />
- Cuando no hay salida <strong>de</strong> sonido <strong>de</strong>s<strong>de</strong> el televisor porque se ha pulsado el botón – (Volum<strong>en</strong>).<br />
- Cuando la función <strong>de</strong> temporizador ha apagado el televisor.<br />
Español - 23
Configuración <strong>de</strong> la hora<br />
❑<br />
Reloj<br />
Para usar las difer<strong>en</strong>tes funciones <strong>de</strong>l temporizador <strong>de</strong>l televisor es necesario<br />
configurar el reloj.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
La hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO.<br />
Si <strong>de</strong>sconecta el cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación, <strong>de</strong>be configurar el reloj <strong>de</strong> nuevo.<br />
• Modo <strong>de</strong> reloj<br />
Se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar la hora actual manual o automáticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Automático: Configure la hora automáticam<strong>en</strong>te mediante la información <strong>de</strong> la<br />
hora <strong>de</strong> la emisión digital.<br />
• Manual: Configure la hora actual manualm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Ajustar hora<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar la hora actual manualm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Establezca este elem<strong>en</strong>to cuando configure Modo <strong>de</strong> reloj como Manual.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar Día, Mes, Año , Hora, Minuto directam<strong>en</strong>te pulsando los botones<br />
numéricos <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
Temp.<strong>de</strong>sc. → Desactivado / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min /<br />
150 min / 180 min<br />
El temporizador <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>sconexión apaga automáticam<strong>en</strong>te el televisor <strong>de</strong>spués <strong>de</strong> un<br />
período prefijado.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
T<br />
Cuando el temporizador llega a 0, el televisor pasa al modo <strong>de</strong> espera <strong>de</strong> forma automática.<br />
Para cancelar la función Temp.<strong>de</strong>sc., seleccione Desactivado.<br />
Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el m<strong>en</strong>ú Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
También pue<strong>de</strong> configurar el temporizador seleccionando Herrami<strong>en</strong>tas → Temp. <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>sc..<br />
Configuración<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>ú<br />
Hora<br />
Emisión<br />
Seguridad<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
: Español<br />
Hora<br />
Reloj : -- : -- ►<br />
Temp.<strong>de</strong>sc.<br />
: Desactivado<br />
Temporizador 1 : Desactivar<br />
Temporizador 2 : Desactivar<br />
Temporizador 3 : Desactivar<br />
►<br />
U Mover E Entrar R Volver<br />
❑<br />
Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3<br />
La activación y <strong>de</strong>sactivación <strong>de</strong>l temporizador se pue<strong>de</strong> configurar <strong>de</strong> tres maneras.<br />
• Hora <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido: Pue<strong>de</strong> configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o <strong>de</strong>sactivar el temporizador.<br />
(Para activar el temporizador con la configuración elegida, establézcalo <strong>en</strong> Activar.)<br />
• Hora apagado: Pue<strong>de</strong> configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o <strong>de</strong>sactivar el temporizador.<br />
(Para activar el temporizador con la configuración elegida, establézcalo <strong>en</strong> Activar.)<br />
• Volum<strong>en</strong>: Pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar el nivel <strong>de</strong> volum<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>seado.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>a: Pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar DTV o ATV cuando el TV se <strong>en</strong>ci<strong>en</strong>da automáticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Canal: Permite seleccionar el canal <strong>de</strong>seado.<br />
• Repetir: Seleccione Una vez, Todos los días, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día <strong>de</strong> la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el<br />
día <strong>de</strong>seado y aparecerá la marca c.<br />
Debe ajustar el reloj <strong>en</strong> primer lugar.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
Apagado automático<br />
Si ajusta el temporizador <strong>en</strong> On, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, <strong>de</strong>spués <strong>de</strong> que<br />
el temporizador lo haya puesto <strong>en</strong> marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible <strong>en</strong> el modo On <strong>de</strong>l temporizador y evita el<br />
recal<strong>en</strong>tami<strong>en</strong>to que se pue<strong>de</strong> producir si el televisor está <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido durante <strong>de</strong>masiado tiempo.<br />
Español - 24
Fu<strong>en</strong>tes / Editar nombre<br />
❑<br />
Fu<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
Úselo para seleccionar TV u otras fu<strong>en</strong>tes <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada externas como reproductores<br />
<strong>de</strong> DVD o receptores <strong>de</strong> cable y satélite (<strong>de</strong>codificadores), conectados al televisor.<br />
Permite seleccionar la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada que se prefiera.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2 / DVI.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> elegir solam<strong>en</strong>te los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor.<br />
En Fu<strong>en</strong>tes, las <strong>en</strong>tradas conectadas se resaltan y se or<strong>de</strong>nan <strong>en</strong> la parte superior.<br />
Las <strong>en</strong>tradas que no están conectadas se or<strong>de</strong>nan <strong>en</strong> la parte inferior.<br />
Uso <strong>de</strong> los botones <strong>de</strong> colores <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia con la lista <strong>de</strong> fu<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
- TTOOLS (Option): Muestra los m<strong>en</strong>ús Editar nombre e Información.<br />
Pulse el botón SOURCE <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia para ver una fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> señal<br />
externa. El modo TV se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar pulsando el botón TV, los botones<br />
numéricos (0~9) y el botón P < / > <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
Editar nombre<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> dar un nombre al dispositivo conectado <strong>en</strong> los terminales <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada; <strong>de</strong><br />
esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
• VCR / DVD / VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC / DVI PC /<br />
DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N Cuando se conecta un or<strong>de</strong>nador con una resolución <strong>de</strong> PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz al puerto<br />
HDMI IN 2(DVI), se <strong>de</strong>be configurar el modo HDMI2 / DVI como PC <strong>en</strong> Editar nombre <strong>de</strong>l modo Entrada.<br />
Entrada<br />
Fu<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
Editar nombre<br />
Español - 25
Pantalla <strong>de</strong> PC<br />
❑<br />
Configuración <strong>de</strong>l software <strong>de</strong>l PC (basado <strong>en</strong> Windows XP)<br />
A continuación se muestra la configuración <strong>de</strong> visualización <strong>de</strong> Windows para<br />
un or<strong>de</strong>nador típico. Probablem<strong>en</strong>te la pantalla real <strong>de</strong> su PC sea distinta,<br />
según la versión concreta <strong>de</strong> Windows y <strong>de</strong> la tarjeta <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o que t<strong>en</strong>ga.<br />
Aunque las pantallas reales sean difer<strong>en</strong>tes, la información <strong>de</strong> configuración<br />
básica que se aplica <strong>en</strong> casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario,<br />
póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con el fabricante <strong>de</strong>l or<strong>de</strong>nador o con el distribuidor <strong>de</strong><br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>.)<br />
1. Primero, haga clic <strong>en</strong> ‘Panel <strong>de</strong> control’ <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Inicio <strong>de</strong> Windows.<br />
2. Cuando aparezca la v<strong>en</strong>tana <strong>de</strong>l panel <strong>de</strong> control, haga clic <strong>en</strong> ‘Apari<strong>en</strong>cia y<br />
temas’ y aparecerá un cuadro <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
3. Cuando aparezca la v<strong>en</strong>tana <strong>de</strong>l panel <strong>de</strong> control, haga clic <strong>en</strong> ‘Pantalla’ y<br />
aparecerá un cuadro <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ <strong>en</strong> el cuadro <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
Configuración correcta <strong>de</strong>l tamaño (resolución)<br />
Óptimo:<br />
- PS42B430 : 1024x768 píxeles<br />
- PS50B430 : 1360x768 píxeles<br />
Si existe una opción <strong>de</strong> frecu<strong>en</strong>cia vertical <strong>en</strong> el cuadro <strong>de</strong> diálogo <strong>de</strong> configuración <strong>de</strong> la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o ‘60<br />
Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic <strong>en</strong> ‘Aceptar’ y salga <strong>de</strong>l cuadro <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
Modos <strong>de</strong> visualización<br />
Tanto la posición <strong>en</strong> la pantalla como el tamaño varían <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>di<strong>en</strong>do <strong>de</strong>l tipo <strong>de</strong> monitor <strong>de</strong>l PC y <strong>de</strong> su resolución. Se<br />
recomi<strong>en</strong>dan las resoluciones <strong>de</strong> la tabla.<br />
• Entrada HDMI/DVI<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
VESA DMT<br />
VESA CVT<br />
Resolution<br />
Horizontal<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (kHz)<br />
Vertical<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Hz)<br />
Pixel Clock<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (MHz)<br />
Sync Polarity<br />
(H/V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
PS50B430<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Cuando se usa un cable <strong>de</strong> conexión HDMI/DVI, se <strong>de</strong>be utilizar el terminal HDMI IN 2(DVI).<br />
No se admite el modo <strong>en</strong>trelazado.<br />
El aparato pue<strong>de</strong> funcionar incorrectam<strong>en</strong>te si se selecciona un formato <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o que no sea estándar.<br />
Español - 26
Programas admitidos<br />
❑<br />
•<br />
❑<br />
Autodiagnóstico<br />
Prueba <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong>, Prueba <strong>de</strong> sonido, Información <strong>de</strong> señal<br />
Si cree que ti<strong>en</strong>e un problema con la imag<strong>en</strong>, el sonido y la señal efectúe la prueba. Podrá comprobar el estado <strong>de</strong>l problema.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Si no oye sonido a través <strong>de</strong> los altavoces <strong>de</strong>l televisor, antes <strong>de</strong> realizar la prueba <strong>de</strong> sonido compruebe que Seleccionar<br />
altavoz esté configurado como Altavoz <strong>de</strong> TV <strong>en</strong> el m<strong>en</strong>ú Sonido.<br />
La melodía se <strong>de</strong>be oír durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté configurado como Altavoz externo o se haya<br />
sil<strong>en</strong>ciado el sonido con el botón M MUTE.<br />
Si el medidor <strong>de</strong> la int<strong>en</strong>sidad <strong>de</strong> la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la ant<strong>en</strong>a para aum<strong>en</strong>tar la int<strong>en</strong>sidad <strong>de</strong> la<br />
señal. Siga ajustando la ant<strong>en</strong>a hasta que <strong>en</strong>cu<strong>en</strong>tre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte.<br />
Software Superior<br />
Para mant<strong>en</strong>er el producto actualizado con las nuevas funciones <strong>de</strong> la televisión digital se <strong>en</strong>vían periódicam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
actualizaciones <strong>de</strong> software como parte <strong>de</strong> la señal normal <strong>de</strong> televisión. Automáticam<strong>en</strong>te se <strong>de</strong>tectan estas señales y se<br />
muestra una pantalla <strong>de</strong> actualización <strong>de</strong>l software. Se pres<strong>en</strong>ta la opción <strong>de</strong> instalar la actualización.<br />
• POR USB<br />
Inserte una unidad USB que cont<strong>en</strong>ga la actualización <strong>de</strong>l firmware <strong>en</strong> el televisor.<br />
No <strong>de</strong>sconecte la alim<strong>en</strong>tación ni extraiga la unidad USB mi<strong>en</strong>tras se aplican las<br />
actualizaciones. El televisor se apagará y se <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rá automáticam<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>spués <strong>de</strong><br />
completar la actualización <strong>de</strong>l firmware. Después <strong>de</strong> realizar la actualización compruebe<br />
la versión <strong>de</strong>l firmware. Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración <strong>de</strong>l ví<strong>de</strong>o y<br />
audio que se haya efectuado vuelve a la configuración pre<strong>de</strong>terminada (<strong>de</strong> fábrica).<br />
• Por Canal<br />
Actualiza el software a través <strong>de</strong> una señal <strong>de</strong> emisión.<br />
• Modo Susp<strong>en</strong>sión<br />
Para continuar con la actualización <strong>de</strong>l software con el conmutador <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido principal activado, seleccione Act. pulsando<br />
los botones ▲ o ▼. 45 minutos <strong>de</strong>spués <strong>de</strong> haber <strong>en</strong>trado <strong>en</strong> el modo <strong>de</strong> susp<strong>en</strong>sión, se inicia automáticam<strong>en</strong>te una<br />
actualización manual. Dado que la alim<strong>en</strong>tación <strong>de</strong> la unidad está activada internam<strong>en</strong>te, la pantalla pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>rse<br />
ligeram<strong>en</strong>te. Este f<strong>en</strong>óm<strong>en</strong>o pue<strong>de</strong> durar 1 hora mi<strong>en</strong>tras la actualización <strong>de</strong>l software se completa.<br />
• Software Alternativo<br />
Reemplace el software actual por otro alternativo.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Guía <strong>de</strong> Conexión HD<br />
Se muestran unas breves instrucciones sobre cómo obt<strong>en</strong>er el mejor r<strong>en</strong>dimi<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l nuevo HDTV. Se proporciona el método<br />
<strong>de</strong> conexión <strong>de</strong> los dispositivos <strong>de</strong> alta <strong>de</strong>finición.<br />
Contacto con <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> conocer los datos <strong>de</strong>l c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong> llamadas, la página web y obt<strong>en</strong>er información <strong>de</strong> los productos <strong>de</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong>.<br />
N Pue<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>splazarse a la página anterior o sigui<strong>en</strong>te con los botones ▲ o ▼.<br />
SERIVCE 2<br />
Unidad USB<br />
Panel <strong>de</strong> TV<br />
Español - 27
Recom<strong>en</strong>daciones<br />
Función <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
La mayoría <strong>de</strong> los canales <strong>de</strong> televisión proporcionan servicios <strong>de</strong> información escrita mediante el teletexto. La página <strong>de</strong> índice<br />
<strong>de</strong> dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso <strong>de</strong> éste. Asimismo, se pue<strong>de</strong>n seleccionar diversas opciones mediante el<br />
mando a distancia para ajustar el servicio a las necesida<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>l usuario.<br />
N Para que la información <strong>de</strong>l teletexto se visualice correctam<strong>en</strong>te, la recepción <strong>de</strong>l canal <strong>de</strong>be ser estable; En caso contrario,<br />
pue<strong>de</strong> per<strong>de</strong>rse información o algunas páginas pue<strong>de</strong>n no visualizarse.<br />
1 : (salir)<br />
Sale <strong>de</strong> la visualización <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
<br />
2 6 (índice)<br />
Se utiliza para mostrar la página <strong>de</strong> índice (cont<strong>en</strong>ido) <strong>en</strong> cualquier mom<strong>en</strong>to<br />
durante la visualización <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
3 5 (mostrar)<br />
Se usa para mostrar el texto oculto (respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo). Púlselo<br />
<strong>de</strong> nuevo para volver a la pres<strong>en</strong>tación normal.<br />
4 4 (tamaño)<br />
Se utiliza para mostrar caracteres <strong>de</strong> doble tamaño <strong>en</strong> la parte superior <strong>de</strong> la<br />
pantalla. Si <strong>de</strong>sea mostrarlos también <strong>en</strong> la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el<br />
botón. Púlselo <strong>de</strong> nuevo para volver a la pres<strong>en</strong>tación normal.<br />
5 8 (guardar)<br />
Se utiliza para guardar las páginas <strong>de</strong>l teletexto.<br />
6 / (activar teletexto/mezcla)<br />
Se utiliza para activar el modo <strong>de</strong> teletexto tras seleccionar el canal que<br />
proporciona el servicio. Pulse dos veces para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla<br />
<strong>de</strong> emisión actual.<br />
7 1 (página secundaria)<br />
Se utiliza para mostrar la página secundaria disponible.<br />
8 2 (avanzar página)<br />
Se utiliza para mostrar la sigui<strong>en</strong>te página <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
9 3 (retroce<strong>de</strong>r página)<br />
Se utiliza para mostrar la página anterior <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
0 0 (modo)<br />
Se utiliza para seleccionar el modo <strong>de</strong> teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Si lo pulsa<br />
<strong>en</strong> el modo LIST (LISTA), cambia al modo <strong>de</strong> guardar List (Lista). En dicho<br />
modo se pue<strong>de</strong> guardar la página <strong>de</strong> teletexto <strong>en</strong> la lista mediante el botón<br />
8(almac<strong>en</strong>ar).<br />
! 9 (ret<strong>en</strong>er)<br />
Se utiliza para ret<strong>en</strong>er la pres<strong>en</strong>tación <strong>en</strong> una página <strong>de</strong>terminada si ésta está<br />
<strong>en</strong>lazada con varias páginas secundarias que se muestran automáticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Para reanudar, vuelva a pulsar el botón.<br />
@ 7 (cancelar)<br />
Se utiliza para visualizar la emisión cuando se busca una página.<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
# Botones <strong>de</strong> colores (rojo/ver<strong>de</strong>/amarillo/azul)<br />
N<br />
Si una emisora utiliza el sistema FASTEXT, los distintos temas cubiertos <strong>en</strong> una<br />
página <strong>de</strong> teletexto se codificarán <strong>en</strong> color y podrá seleccionarlos pulsando los<br />
botones <strong>de</strong> color. Pulse el correspondi<strong>en</strong>te al tema <strong>de</strong>seado. La página muestra<br />
otra información con código <strong>de</strong> color que se pue<strong>de</strong> seleccionar <strong>de</strong> la misma forma.<br />
Pulse el botón <strong>de</strong>l color correspondi<strong>en</strong>te para ver la página anterior o la sigui<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Pue<strong>de</strong> cambiar páginas <strong>de</strong> teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
Español - 28
Las páginas <strong>de</strong> teletexto se organizan <strong>en</strong> seis categorías:<br />
Parte Cont<strong>en</strong>ido<br />
A Número <strong>de</strong> página seleccionado.<br />
B I<strong>de</strong>ntidad <strong>de</strong>l canal.<br />
C Número <strong>de</strong> página actual o indicaciones <strong>de</strong> la búsqueda.<br />
D Fecha y hora.<br />
E Texto.<br />
F Información <strong>de</strong> estado.<br />
Información FASTEXT.<br />
N La información <strong>de</strong> teletexto se suele dividir <strong>en</strong> varias páginas que aparec<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong><br />
secu<strong>en</strong>cia y a las que se pue<strong>de</strong> acce<strong>de</strong>r:<br />
- Introduci<strong>en</strong>do el número <strong>de</strong> página.<br />
- Seleccionando un título <strong>de</strong> la lista.<br />
- Seleccionando un <strong>en</strong>cabezado <strong>de</strong> color (sistema FASTEXT).<br />
<br />
O<br />
Pulse el botón TV para salir <strong>de</strong> la visualización <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
Ajuste <strong>de</strong> montaje mural automático (se v<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> por separado)<br />
Instale el montaje mural <strong>en</strong> una pared sólida, perp<strong>en</strong>dicular al suelo.<br />
Para colocarlo <strong>en</strong> otros materiales <strong>de</strong> construcción, póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con el distribuidor más cercano<br />
Si se instala <strong>en</strong> el techo o <strong>en</strong> una pared inclinada, pue<strong>de</strong> caerse y causar graves lesiones personales.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Product Family inch VESA Spec. (A * B)<br />
LCD-TV<br />
PDP-TV<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
Standard<br />
Screw<br />
M4<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8<br />
Quantity<br />
4<br />
M8 4<br />
Se ofrec<strong>en</strong> las dim<strong>en</strong>siones estándar para los equipos <strong>de</strong> montaje mural, como se muestra <strong>en</strong> la tabla anterior.<br />
Al adquirir el equipo <strong>de</strong> montaje mural, también se distribuye un manual <strong>de</strong> instalación <strong>de</strong>tallado y todas las piezas necesarias<br />
para el montaje.<br />
No use tornillos con un tamaño superior al estándar, ya que pue<strong>de</strong>n causar daños <strong>en</strong> el interior <strong>de</strong>l televisor.<br />
Para montajes murales que no cumpl<strong>en</strong> las especificaciones <strong>de</strong> tornillos estándar VESA, la longitud <strong>de</strong> éstos pue<strong>de</strong> variar<br />
<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>di<strong>en</strong>do <strong>de</strong> las especificaciones.<br />
No use tornillos que no cumplan las especificaciones <strong>de</strong> tornillos estándar VESA<br />
No apriete excesivam<strong>en</strong>te los tornillos, ya que podría dañar el producto o provocar la caída <strong>de</strong> éste con riesgo <strong>de</strong> causar<br />
lesiones personales. <strong>Samsung</strong> no se hace responsable <strong>de</strong> este tipo <strong>de</strong> acci<strong>de</strong>ntes.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> no se hace responsable <strong>de</strong> daños o lesiones personales cuando se usa un montaje mural que no es VESA o que<br />
no cumple las especificaciones, o si el cli<strong>en</strong>te no sigue las instrucciones <strong>de</strong> instalación <strong>de</strong>l producto.<br />
Nuestros mo<strong>de</strong>los <strong>de</strong> 57” y 63” no son compatibles con las especificaciones VESA. Por ello, <strong>de</strong>be usar un equipo <strong>de</strong> montaje<br />
mural exclusivo para este mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
No se <strong>de</strong>b<strong>en</strong> superar los 15 grados <strong>de</strong> inclinación cuando se instala este televisor.<br />
No instale el equipo <strong>de</strong> montaje mural mi<strong>en</strong>tras el televisor está <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido.<br />
Se podría producir una <strong>de</strong>scarga eléctrica con riesgo <strong>de</strong> causar lesiones personales.<br />
Español - 29
Preparación para instalar el montaje mural<br />
Caso A. Instalación <strong>de</strong>l montaje mural <strong>de</strong> SAMSUNG<br />
Caso B. Instalación <strong>de</strong>l montaje mural <strong>de</strong> otra empresa<br />
경고<br />
1. Instale el montaje mural con un par <strong>de</strong> apriete <strong>de</strong> 15 kgf cm o m<strong>en</strong>os. T<strong>en</strong>ga <strong>en</strong> cu<strong>en</strong>ta que las piezas se pue<strong>de</strong>n dañar si el<br />
par <strong>de</strong> apriete es difer<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>l especificado.<br />
2. El juego <strong>de</strong> accesorios incluye soporte y anilla [2] para la instalación <strong>de</strong> un televisor SAMSUNG <strong>en</strong> un montaje mural <strong>de</strong> otra<br />
empresa. (Caso B)<br />
N Se ha <strong>de</strong> fijar <strong>en</strong> el orificio [1] cuando instale el montaje mural <strong>en</strong> la pared.<br />
주의<br />
Fijación <strong>de</strong>l televisor a la pared<br />
경고<br />
Tirar <strong>de</strong>l televisor, empujarlo o colgarse <strong>de</strong> él pue<strong>de</strong> provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los niños no se<br />
cuelgu<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>l televisor ni lo <strong>de</strong>sestabilic<strong>en</strong>; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves o incluso<br />
la muerte. Siga las precauciones <strong>de</strong> seguridad <strong>de</strong>l folleto <strong>de</strong> seguridad incluido con el producto. Para mejorar la<br />
estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación.<br />
주의<br />
Pared<br />
Pared<br />
❑<br />
Para impedir que el televisor se caiga<br />
1. Apriete firmem<strong>en</strong>te las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese <strong>de</strong> que los tornillos estén bi<strong>en</strong> afirmados <strong>en</strong> la<br />
pared.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Según el tipo <strong>de</strong> pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje.<br />
Las grapas, los tornillos y la ca<strong>de</strong>na no se suministran con el producto; <strong>de</strong>berá adquirirlos por separado.<br />
2. Quite los tornillos <strong>de</strong> la parte c<strong>en</strong>tral posterior <strong>de</strong>l televisor y con ellos monte las grapas <strong>en</strong> el televisor.<br />
N<br />
Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos.<br />
3. Monte una ca<strong>de</strong>na fuerte <strong>en</strong>tre las grapas <strong>de</strong>l televisor y <strong>de</strong> la pared <strong>de</strong> manera que que<strong>de</strong> bi<strong>en</strong> t<strong>en</strong>sada.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Instale el televisor cerca <strong>de</strong> la pared para evitar que caiga hacia a atrás.<br />
Las grapas <strong>de</strong> la pared han <strong>de</strong> estar a la misma o a m<strong>en</strong>or altura que las grapas <strong>de</strong>l televisor.<br />
Cuando se <strong>de</strong>see mover el televisor <strong>de</strong>berá aflojar la ca<strong>de</strong>na.<br />
4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bi<strong>en</strong> aseguradas. Compruébelas periódicam<strong>en</strong>te para <strong>de</strong>tectar cualquier signo<br />
<strong>de</strong> fatiga o <strong>de</strong> fallo. Si ti<strong>en</strong>e dudas sobre la seguridad <strong>de</strong> la instalación, póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con un instalador profesional.<br />
Español - 30
Solución <strong>de</strong> problemas<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> ponerse <strong>en</strong> contacto con el Servicio posv<strong>en</strong>ta <strong>de</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong>, realice las comprobaciones sigui<strong>en</strong>tes.<br />
Si no pue<strong>de</strong> resolver el problema con las instrucciones que aparec<strong>en</strong> a continuación, anote el mo<strong>de</strong>lo y el número <strong>de</strong> serie <strong>de</strong>l<br />
televisor y póngase <strong>en</strong> contacto con el distribuidor local.<br />
No hay imag<strong>en</strong> ni sonido<br />
Hay imag<strong>en</strong> pero no sonido<br />
No aparece ninguna imag<strong>en</strong> o<br />
está <strong>en</strong> blanco y negro<br />
Hay interfer<strong>en</strong>cias <strong>en</strong> el<br />
sonido o <strong>en</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong><br />
La imag<strong>en</strong> está borrosa o<br />
pres<strong>en</strong>ta niebla y el sonido<br />
está distorsionado.<br />
El mando a distancia funciona<br />
mal<br />
La pantalla está <strong>en</strong> blanco<br />
y el indicador <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>c<strong>en</strong>dido<br />
parpa<strong>de</strong>a constantem<strong>en</strong>te<br />
La imag<strong>en</strong> dañada aparece <strong>en</strong><br />
la esquina <strong>de</strong> la pantalla<br />
Aparece el m<strong>en</strong>saje “Resets<br />
all settings to the <strong>de</strong>fault<br />
values”.<br />
• Compruebe que el cable <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación esté conectado a la red eléctrica.<br />
• Compruebe que haya pulsado el botón <strong>de</strong>l equipo.<br />
• Compruebe los ajustes <strong>de</strong> contraste y brillo <strong>de</strong> la imag<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Compruebe el volum<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Compruebe que Seleccionar Altavoz esté establecido <strong>en</strong> Altavoz externo.<br />
• Compruebe el volum<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Compruebe si se ha pulsado el botón MMUTE <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
• Ajuste los valores <strong>de</strong> color.<br />
• Compruebe que el sistema <strong>de</strong> emisión seleccionado es correcto.<br />
• Trate <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificar el aparato eléctrico que está afectando al aparato y aléjelo.<br />
• Enchufe el televisor <strong>en</strong> una toma eléctrica distinta.<br />
• Compruebe la dirección, ubicación y conexiones <strong>de</strong> la ant<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
• Con frecu<strong>en</strong>cia, este tipo <strong>de</strong> interfer<strong>en</strong>cias se <strong>de</strong>b<strong>en</strong> al uso <strong>de</strong> una ant<strong>en</strong>a interior.<br />
• Sustituya las pilas <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia.<br />
• Limpie el bor<strong>de</strong> superior <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia (v<strong>en</strong>tana <strong>de</strong> transmisión).<br />
• Compruebe que los polos + y – <strong>de</strong> las pilas estén correctam<strong>en</strong>te colocados.<br />
• Compruebe que las pilas estén secas.<br />
• En el or<strong>de</strong>nador, compruebe los cables <strong>de</strong> señal y <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación.<br />
• Mueva el ratón <strong>de</strong>l or<strong>de</strong>nador o pulse una tecla.<br />
• En el equipo, compruebe (STB, DVD, etc.); el cable <strong>de</strong> señal y el <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación.<br />
• El televisor está usando su sistema <strong>de</strong> gestión <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergía.<br />
• Pulse el botón Source <strong>de</strong>l mando a distancia o <strong>de</strong>l panel.<br />
• Enci<strong>en</strong>da y apague el televisor.<br />
• Si se ha seleccionado Ajuste pantalla <strong>en</strong> algún dispositivo externo, la imag<strong>en</strong> dañada<br />
pue<strong>de</strong> aparecer <strong>en</strong> la esquina <strong>de</strong> la pantalla. Este síntoma se origina <strong>en</strong> los dispositivos<br />
externos, no <strong>en</strong> el televisor.<br />
• Aparece cuando el botón EXIT se manti<strong>en</strong>e pulsado durante unos mom<strong>en</strong>tos. La<br />
configuración <strong>de</strong>l producto se reinicia con los valores pre<strong>de</strong>terminados.<br />
Seguridad <strong>en</strong> el espacio <strong>de</strong> instalación<br />
Mant<strong>en</strong>ga la distancia requerida <strong>en</strong>tre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, pare<strong>de</strong>s) para asegurar la v<strong>en</strong>tilación a<strong>de</strong>cuada.<br />
En caso contrario, se podría producir un inc<strong>en</strong>dio por un increm<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> la temperatura interna <strong>de</strong>l producto.<br />
Instale el producto a la distancia requerida como se muestra <strong>en</strong> la ilustración.<br />
N Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics.<br />
- Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría t<strong>en</strong>er problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con el<br />
riesgo <strong>de</strong> cuasar lesiones personales.<br />
- Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría t<strong>en</strong>er problemas con el producto o éste se podría inc<strong>en</strong>diar<br />
por el increm<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> la temperatura interior <strong>de</strong>bido a una mala v<strong>en</strong>tilación.<br />
N El aspecto pue<strong>de</strong> variar según el producto.<br />
• Instalación <strong>de</strong>l producto sobre un soporte<br />
• Instalación <strong>de</strong>l producto <strong>en</strong> un montaje mural<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Español - 31
Especificaciones<br />
Las <strong>de</strong>scripciones y características <strong>de</strong> este folleto se facilitan con fines informativos solam<strong>en</strong>te y están sujetas a modificación sin<br />
previo aviso.<br />
Nombre <strong>de</strong>l mo<strong>de</strong>lo PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Tamaño <strong>de</strong> pantalla (diagonal) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
Resolución <strong>de</strong>l PC (Óptimo) 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360x768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Salida <strong>de</strong> sonido 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>siones (An x Al x P)<br />
Cuerpo principal<br />
Con soporte<br />
Peso<br />
Cuerpo principal<br />
Con soporte<br />
Consi<strong>de</strong>raciones medioambi<strong>en</strong>tales<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
Temperatura <strong>de</strong> funcionami<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Humedad <strong>de</strong> funcionami<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Temperatura <strong>de</strong> almac<strong>en</strong>ami<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Humedad <strong>en</strong> almac<strong>en</strong>ami<strong>en</strong>to<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
El diseño y las especificaciones pue<strong>de</strong>n cambiar sin previo aviso.<br />
Este dispositivo es un aparato digital <strong>de</strong> la Clase B.<br />
Para conocer la fu<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tación y el consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto.<br />
Cuando se usa un cable <strong>de</strong> conexión HDMI/DVI, se <strong>de</strong>be utilizar el terminal HDMI IN 2(DVI).<br />
Español - 32
Instruções para o utilizador<br />
• Ret<strong>en</strong>ção <strong>de</strong> imagem no ecrã<br />
Não visualize uma imagem fixa (como, por exemplo, um vi<strong>de</strong>ojogo ou se ligar um PC a este plasma) no ecrã <strong>de</strong> plasma<br />
durante m<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong> 2 horas porque po<strong>de</strong> provocar a ret<strong>en</strong>ção <strong>de</strong> imagem no ecrã. Esta ret<strong>en</strong>ção <strong>de</strong> imagem também é<br />
conhecida como queimadura <strong>de</strong> ecrã. Para evitar a ret<strong>en</strong>ção <strong>de</strong> imagem, diminua o grau <strong>de</strong> brilho e <strong>de</strong> contraste do ecrã<br />
quando visualizar uma imagem fixa.<br />
• Altitu<strong>de</strong><br />
O plasma só po<strong>de</strong> funcionar normalm<strong>en</strong>te a uma altitu<strong>de</strong> inferior a 2000 m. Po<strong>de</strong> não funcionar correctam<strong>en</strong>te num local que<br />
esteja a uma altitu<strong>de</strong> superior a 2000 m, não s<strong>en</strong>do aconselhável instalá-lo nem utilizá-lo nesse local.<br />
• Calor na parte superior do televisor plasma<br />
A parte superior do produto po<strong>de</strong> ficar qu<strong>en</strong>te, se o utilizar durante muito tempo, pois o calor dissipa-se a partir do painel,<br />
através das aberturas <strong>de</strong> v<strong>en</strong>tilação que estão em cima. Esta situação é consi<strong>de</strong>rada normal e não indica que exista qualquer<br />
avaria ou <strong>de</strong>feito n o produto. No <strong>en</strong>tanto, <strong>de</strong>ve evitar que as crianças toquem na parte superior do produto.<br />
• O televisor produz um estalido.<br />
Os estalidos po<strong>de</strong>m ocorrer quando o produto se contrair ou expandir <strong>de</strong>vido a mudanças ambi<strong>en</strong>t<strong>ais</strong> no espaço circundante,<br />
como a nível <strong>de</strong> temperatura ou humida<strong>de</strong>. Isto é normal e não repres<strong>en</strong>ta um <strong>de</strong>feito no aparelho.<br />
• Defeitos nas células<br />
O plasma utiliza um painel constituído por 2.360.000 (nível HD) a 6.221.000 (nível FHD) pixels que necessitam <strong>de</strong> uma<br />
tecnologia sofisticada para serem reproduzidos. No <strong>en</strong>tanto, po<strong>de</strong>m existir alguns pixels claros ou escuros no ecrã. Estes<br />
pixels não afectam o <strong>de</strong>semp<strong>en</strong>ho do produto.<br />
• Evite utilizar o televisor com temperaturas inferiores a 5°C(41°F).<br />
• Uma imagem fixa durante um longo período <strong>de</strong> tempo po<strong>de</strong> danificar perman<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te o ecrã <strong>de</strong> plasma.<br />
Se utilizar o televisor plasma em formato 4:3 durante um longo período <strong>de</strong> tempo, po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>ixar vestígios<br />
<strong>de</strong> marg<strong>en</strong>s à esquerda, à direita e no c<strong>en</strong>tro do ecrã, causadas pela difer<strong>en</strong>ça da emissão <strong>de</strong> luz no<br />
ecrã. Se reproduzir um DVD ou um vi<strong>de</strong>ojogo, po<strong>de</strong> causar efeitos semelhantes no ecrã. Os danos<br />
causados pelo efeito acima m<strong>en</strong>cionado não estão cobertos pela garantia.<br />
• Imagem residual no ecrã<br />
A visualização prolongada <strong>de</strong> imag<strong>en</strong>s fixas <strong>de</strong> vi<strong>de</strong>ojogos ou <strong>de</strong> um PC po<strong>de</strong> produzir imag<strong>en</strong>s residu<strong>ais</strong> parci<strong>ais</strong>. Para<br />
evitar este efeito, reduza o ‘brilho’ e o ‘contraste’ quando visualizar imag<strong>en</strong>s fixas.<br />
• Garantia<br />
- A garantia não cobre qu<strong>ais</strong>quer danos provocados pela ret<strong>en</strong>ção <strong>de</strong> imagem.<br />
- A queimadura não está coberta pela garantia.<br />
• Instalação<br />
Contacte um c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong> assistência autorizado quando instalar o aparelho num local sujeito a poeiras excessivas,<br />
temperaturas elevadas ou reduzidas, elevados índices <strong>de</strong> humida<strong>de</strong>, substâncias químicas, bem como em loc<strong>ais</strong> on<strong>de</strong><br />
o produto seja utilizado continuam<strong>en</strong>te como num aeroporto, estação <strong>de</strong> comboios, etc. Se não o fizer, po<strong>de</strong> danificar<br />
seriam<strong>en</strong>te o aparelho.<br />
Aviso sobre a TV digital<br />
1. As funcionalida<strong>de</strong>s relacionadas com a TV digital (DVB) estão ap<strong>en</strong>as disponíveis em países/regiões on<strong>de</strong> sin<strong>ais</strong><br />
terrestres digit<strong>ais</strong> DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) são transmitidos ou on<strong>de</strong> t<strong>en</strong>ha acesso a um serviço <strong>de</strong> televisão<br />
por cabo DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC) compatível. Verifique com o rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor local a possibilida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> receber<br />
sin<strong>ais</strong> DVB-T ou DVB-C.<br />
2. DVB-T é o consórcio padrão europeu para a transmissão <strong>de</strong> emissão <strong>de</strong> televisão digital terrestre <strong>en</strong>quanto o DVB-C<br />
é o <strong>de</strong> transmissão <strong>de</strong> emissão <strong>de</strong> televisão digital por cabo. Contudo, algumas funcionalida<strong>de</strong>s distintas, como o<br />
EPG [Electric Program Gui<strong>de</strong> (Guia <strong>de</strong> Programação Electrónico)], VOD [Vi<strong>de</strong>o on Demand (Ví<strong>de</strong>o a pedido)], etc.<br />
não estão incluídas nestas especificações. Deste modo, <strong>de</strong> mom<strong>en</strong>to não são suportadas.<br />
3. Embora o televisor esteja <strong>de</strong> acordo com as normas DVB-T e DVB-C [Agosto <strong>de</strong> 2008], a compatibilida<strong>de</strong><br />
com as futuras transmissões digit<strong>ais</strong> terrestres DVB-T e por cabo digital DVB-C não são garantidas.<br />
4. Alguns fornecedores <strong>de</strong> TV por cabo po<strong>de</strong>m cobrar uma taxa adicional para este tipo <strong>de</strong> serviço e po<strong>de</strong>m também<br />
requerer um acordo com os termos e condições do respectivo estabelecim<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
5. Algumas funções da TV digital po<strong>de</strong>m não estar disponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o DVB-C po<strong>de</strong> não<br />
funcionar correctam<strong>en</strong>te com todos os fornecedores.<br />
6. Para m<strong>ais</strong> informações, contacte o c<strong>en</strong>tro local <strong>de</strong> apoio ao cli<strong>en</strong>te da SAMSUNG.<br />
Contacte SAMSUNG GLOBAL<br />
Se tem algumas dúvidas ou com<strong>en</strong>tários sobre os produtos <strong>Samsung</strong>, contacte por favor a nossa linha <strong>de</strong> apoio a cli<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>. (Consulte a contracapa para obter m<strong>ais</strong> informações.)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Português -
Índice<br />
Ligar e preparar o televisor<br />
■ Verificar acessórios..............................................................4<br />
■ Utilizar a base......................................................................4<br />
■ Como montar a base (consoante o mo<strong>de</strong>lo)........................4<br />
■ Utilizar o painel <strong>de</strong> controlo..................................................5<br />
■ Ver o painel <strong>de</strong> ligação.........................................................6<br />
■ Telecomando........................................................................8<br />
■ Colocar pilhas no telecomando............................................9<br />
■ Ligar e <strong>de</strong>sligar....................................................................9<br />
■ Definir o televisor para modo <strong>de</strong> espera..............................9<br />
■ Ver os m<strong>en</strong>us................................................................... 10<br />
■ Utilizar o botão TOOLS......................................................10<br />
■ Visualização no ecrã..........................................................10<br />
■ Função Plug & Play...........................................................11<br />
Controlo <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong><br />
■ Memorizar Can<strong>ais</strong> .............................................................12<br />
■ Gerir can<strong>ais</strong>........................................................................15<br />
Descrição das funções<br />
■ Definir o M<strong>en</strong>u Configurar..................................................22<br />
■ Acertar a hora....................................................................24<br />
■ Lista <strong>de</strong> fontes / Editar nome.............................................25<br />
■ Visor do PC........................................................................26<br />
■ Modos <strong>de</strong> visualização.......................................................26<br />
■ Programa suportado..........................................................27<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
■<br />
Recom<strong>en</strong>dações <strong>de</strong> utilização<br />
Funcionalida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> teletexto...............................................28<br />
Especificações do kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> (VESA)....29<br />
Preparação antes da instalação da Montagem na<br />
Pare<strong>de</strong> na pare<strong>de</strong>..............................................................30<br />
Fixar o televisor à pare<strong>de</strong>..................................................30<br />
Resolução <strong>de</strong> problemas...................................................31<br />
Manter um espaço <strong>de</strong> instalação seguro...........................31<br />
Características Técnicas....................................................32<br />
Controlo <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
■ Alterar e repor as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> imagem...........................17<br />
Controlo <strong>de</strong> som<br />
■ Alterar o padrão <strong>de</strong> som....................................................20<br />
■ Seleccionar o modo <strong>de</strong> som..............................................21<br />
Português<br />
N O T<br />
Símbolo Carregue Nota Tecla rápida Botão TOOL<br />
Português - 3
Ligar e preparar o televisor<br />
Verificar acessórios<br />
Manual do utilizador<br />
Telecomando/Pilhas AAA<br />
(2 <strong>de</strong> cada)<br />
Cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação Pano <strong>de</strong> limpeza Garantia/Manual <strong>de</strong><br />
segurança (Não está<br />
disponível em todos os loc<strong>ais</strong>)<br />
Parafuso (4 <strong>de</strong> cada) Protecção inferior Anel <strong>de</strong> Suporte (4 <strong>de</strong><br />
cada) (Consultar página 30)<br />
Núcleo <strong>de</strong> ferrite para<br />
cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação<br />
(1 <strong>de</strong> cada)<br />
N<br />
O núcleo <strong>de</strong> ferrite é utilizado para proteger o cabo <strong>de</strong> interferências. Quando ligar um cabo, coloque o<br />
núcleo <strong>de</strong> ferrite à volta do cabo junto da ficha.<br />
Utilizar a base<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O plasma <strong>de</strong>ve ser transportado por duas ou m<strong>ais</strong> pessoas. Nunca <strong>de</strong>ite o<br />
plasma no chão porque po<strong>de</strong> danificar o ecrã. Mant<strong>en</strong>ha sempre o plasma<br />
na vertical.<br />
O plasma po<strong>de</strong> rodar 20 graus para a esquerda e para a direita.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Como montar a base (consoante o mo<strong>de</strong>lo)<br />
Pr<strong>en</strong>da bem o TV à base com os 4 parafusos fornecidos.<br />
(A parte exterior do aparelho po<strong>de</strong> ser difer<strong>en</strong>te da mostrada na figura.)<br />
Se quiser instalar o televisor na pare<strong>de</strong>, feche a<br />
tampa (1) na parte <strong>de</strong> ligação da base com dois<br />
parafusos para a ocultar.<br />
Aviso<br />
Pr<strong>en</strong>da bem a base ao televisor<br />
antes <strong>de</strong> a <strong>de</strong>slocar porque po<strong>de</strong><br />
cair e provocar graves ferim<strong>en</strong>tos.<br />
N<br />
O televisor <strong>de</strong>ve ser transportado por<br />
duas ou m<strong>ais</strong> pessoas. Nunca <strong>de</strong>ite o<br />
televisor no chão porque po<strong>de</strong> danificar<br />
o ecrã. Guar<strong>de</strong> sempre o televisor na<br />
vertical.<br />
Português -
Utilizar o painel <strong>de</strong> controlo<br />
N<br />
A cor e a forma do produto po<strong>de</strong>m variar consoante o mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
Botões do painel frontal<br />
Toque em cada botão para<br />
os utilizar.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Alterna <strong>en</strong>tre todas as fontes <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada disponíveis<br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>te, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N<br />
No m<strong>en</strong>u no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o<br />
botão ENTERE no telecomando.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Carregue neste botão para ver o m<strong>en</strong>u das funções do<br />
televisor no ecrã.<br />
3 + −<br />
Carregue nestes botões para aum<strong>en</strong>tar ou diminuir o volume.<br />
No m<strong>en</strong>u no ecrã, utilize os botões + − tal como utiliza<br />
os botões ◄ e ► do telecomando.<br />
4 CH<br />
Carregue neste botão para mudar <strong>de</strong> canal.<br />
No m<strong>en</strong>u no ecrã, utilize os botões CH tal como utiliza os<br />
botões ▲ e ▼ do telecomando.<br />
5 Indicador <strong>de</strong> corr<strong>en</strong>te<br />
Pisca e apaga-se quando o televisor está ligado; ac<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>-se<br />
quando está no modo <strong>de</strong> susp<strong>en</strong>são.<br />
6 POWER<br />
Carregue para ligar/<strong>de</strong>sligar o televisor.<br />
7 S<strong>en</strong>sor do telecomando<br />
Aponte o telecomando para este ponto no televisor.<br />
8 Altifalante<br />
Português -
Ver o painel <strong>de</strong> ligação<br />
Painel posterior<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
8<br />
ou<br />
Re<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> televisão<br />
por cabo<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
ou<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
A cor e a forma do produto po<strong>de</strong>m variar consoante o mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sempre que ligar um sistema <strong>de</strong> áudio ou <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o ao aparelho, certifique-se <strong>de</strong> que todos os elem<strong>en</strong>tos estão <strong>de</strong>sligados.<br />
Quando ligar um dispositivo externo, faça a correspondência <strong>de</strong> cores <strong>en</strong>tre o terminal e o respectivo cabo.<br />
1 POWER IN<br />
Ligue o cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação fornecido.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Conector para assistência técnica<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Entradas <strong>de</strong> áudio (AUDIO L/R) e <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR) para<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
Entradas ou saídas para dispositivos externos, t<strong>ais</strong> como<br />
vi<strong>de</strong>ogravadores, consolas <strong>de</strong> jogos ou leitores <strong>de</strong> DVD.<br />
Especificação <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>tradas/saídas<br />
Conector<br />
Entrada<br />
Ví<strong>de</strong>o Áudio (L/R) RGB<br />
EXT ✔ ✔ ✔<br />
Saída<br />
Ví<strong>de</strong>o + Áudio (L/R)<br />
Só está disponível a<br />
saída TV ou DTV.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Faça a ligação a um compon<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> áudio digital.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT (AUDIO R/L)<br />
Ligue sin<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong> áudio RCA <strong>en</strong>tre o televisor e uma fonte<br />
externa como, por exemplo, um equipam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> áudio.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1,2 (DVI)<br />
Uma ligação HDMI a HDMI não precisa <strong>de</strong> ligação áudio<br />
adicional.<br />
− Quando utilizar uma ligação <strong>de</strong> cabo HDMI/DVI, tem <strong>de</strong><br />
utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
N O que é HDMI?<br />
− Alto Definition Multimedia interface permite<br />
a transmissão <strong>de</strong> dados <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o digital <strong>de</strong> alta<br />
<strong>de</strong>finição e <strong>de</strong> som digital multi-can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
− O terminal HDMI/DVI suporta uma ligação DVI a<br />
um dispositivo alargado, com o cabo a<strong>de</strong>quado<br />
(não fornecido). A difer<strong>en</strong>ça <strong>en</strong>tre HDMI e DVI é<br />
que o dispositivo HDMI é m<strong>ais</strong> pequ<strong>en</strong>o, tem a<br />
função <strong>de</strong> codificação HDCP (Alto Bandwidth Digital<br />
Copy Protection) instalada e suporta som digital<br />
multican<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
Saídas <strong>de</strong> áudio DVI para dispositivos externos.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
75Ω Coaxial connector for Aerial/Cable Network.<br />
Modos suportados para HDMI e Compon<strong>en</strong>te<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Compon<strong>en</strong>te O O O O O O O<br />
Português -
Painel lateral<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
A cor e a forma do produto po<strong>de</strong>m variar consoante o mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
1 Ranhura COMMON INTERFACE<br />
Introduza o CI (Common Interface) card na ranhura.<br />
(consulte a página 23)<br />
− Se não introduzir o CI CARD em <strong>de</strong>terminados can<strong>ais</strong>,<br />
Sinal codificado aparece no ecrã.<br />
− As informações <strong>de</strong> associação incluindo um número<br />
<strong>de</strong> telefone, ID do CI CARD, ID do anfitrião e outras<br />
informações aparecem cerca <strong>de</strong> 2 a 3 minutos <strong>de</strong>pois.<br />
Se aparecer uma m<strong>en</strong>sagem <strong>de</strong> erro, contacte o seu<br />
fornecedor <strong>de</strong> serviços.<br />
− Assim que terminar a configuração das informações sobre<br />
os can<strong>ais</strong>, aparece a m<strong>en</strong>sagem indicando que a lista <strong>de</strong><br />
can<strong>ais</strong> já está actualizada.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Introduza o Cartão-CI na direcção indicada<br />
O CAM não é suportado em <strong>de</strong>terminados países e<br />
regiões; peça informações ao rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor autorizado.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Entradas <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o e áudio para dispositivos externos<br />
como, por exemplo, uma câmara <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o ou um<br />
vi<strong>de</strong>ogravador.<br />
Português -
Telecomando<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> utilizar o telecomando até aproximadam<strong>en</strong>te 7 metros <strong>de</strong> distância do televisor.<br />
N O funcionam<strong>en</strong>to do telecomando po<strong>de</strong> ser afectado por luzes fortes.<br />
1 Botão POWER<br />
(liga e <strong>de</strong>sliga o Televisor)<br />
2 Selecciona o modo <strong>de</strong> televisor <strong>de</strong><br />
forma directa<br />
3 Botões numéricos para acesso<br />
directo aos can<strong>ais</strong><br />
4 Mostra a lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> favoritos.<br />
5 Desligar o som temporariam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
6 Aum<strong>en</strong>to do volume<br />
Diminuição do volume<br />
7 Selecção <strong>de</strong> fontes disponíveis<br />
8 Utilize este botão para ver<br />
informações sobre o programa que<br />
está a ser transmitido<br />
9 Utilize este botão para<br />
seleccionar rapidam<strong>en</strong>te funções<br />
frequ<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te utilizadas.<br />
0 Controlar o cursor no m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
! Utilize este botão para ver as listas<br />
<strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> no ecrã.<br />
@ Utilize estes botões nos modos Lista<br />
Can<strong>ais</strong>, etc.<br />
$ Canal anterior<br />
% Canal seguinte<br />
Canal anterior<br />
^ Mostra o m<strong>en</strong>u principal no ecrã<br />
& Visualização do Guia <strong>de</strong> Programação<br />
Electrónico (EPG)<br />
* Volta para o m<strong>en</strong>u anterior<br />
( Sair do m<strong>en</strong>u no ecrã<br />
) selecção da <strong>de</strong>scrição áudio.<br />
a Visualização <strong>de</strong> leg<strong>en</strong>das digit<strong>ais</strong><br />
Funções <strong>de</strong> Teletexto<br />
2 Sair do ecrã <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
(consoante o mo<strong>de</strong>lo)<br />
7 Selecção do modo <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
(LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Mostrar teletexto<br />
9 Tamanho do teletexto<br />
! Memorizar teletexto<br />
@ Selecção <strong>de</strong> tópicos Fastext<br />
# Apres<strong>en</strong>tação do teletexto/combinar<br />
informações <strong>de</strong> teletexto com a<br />
transmissão normal<br />
$ Página secundária do teletexto<br />
% P :Página seguinte do teletexto<br />
P<br />
:Página anterior do teletexto<br />
^ Índice do teletexto<br />
* Modo <strong>de</strong> espera da página <strong>de</strong><br />
teletexto<br />
( Cancelar teletexto<br />
<br />
Português -
Colocar pilhas no telecomando<br />
1. Levante a tampa na parte <strong>de</strong> trás do telecomando como se mostra na figura.<br />
2. Coloque duas pilhas <strong>de</strong> tamanho AAA.<br />
N Faça correspon<strong>de</strong>r os pólos + e – das pilhas com o diagrama exist<strong>en</strong>te no<br />
compartim<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
3. Feche a tampa<br />
N Se não t<strong>en</strong>cionar utilizar o telecomando durante muito tempo, retire as<br />
pilhas e guar<strong>de</strong>-as num local fresco e seco.<br />
N<br />
Se o telecomando não funcionar! Verifique o seguinte:<br />
1. O televisor está ligado?<br />
2. Os pólos + e - das pilhas estão invertidos?<br />
3. As pilhas estão gastas?<br />
4. Houve um corte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia ou o cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação está <strong>de</strong>sligado?<br />
5. Há alguma lâmpada fluoresc<strong>en</strong>te especial ou luz <strong>de</strong> néon por perto?<br />
Ligar e <strong>de</strong>sligar<br />
O cabo <strong>de</strong> ligação à corr<strong>en</strong>te está ligado à parte traseira do televisor.<br />
1. Ligue o cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação a uma tomada a<strong>de</strong>quada.<br />
N O indicador <strong>de</strong> modo <strong>de</strong> espera do televisor ac<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>-se.<br />
2. Carregue no botão POWERP do televisor.<br />
N Também po<strong>de</strong> carregar no botão POWERP ou no botão TV do telecomando para ligar o televisor.<br />
É automaticam<strong>en</strong>te seleccionado o último canal a que assistiu.<br />
3. Carregue no botão numérico (0~9) ou no botão <strong>de</strong> canal para cima / para baixo (< / >) do telecomando, ou no botão<br />
do televisor.<br />
N Quando liga o televisor pela primeira vez, é-lhe pedido que escolha o idioma no qual os m<strong>en</strong>us são apres<strong>en</strong>tados.<br />
4. Para <strong>de</strong>sligar o televisor, carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te no botão POWERP.<br />
Definir o televisor para modo <strong>de</strong> espera<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o seu televisor para o modo <strong>de</strong> espera, para reduzir o consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia. O modo <strong>de</strong> espera é útil quando precisa<br />
<strong>de</strong> interromper a visualização temporariam<strong>en</strong>te (por exemplo, durante a refeição).<br />
1. Carregue no botão POWERP do telecomando.<br />
N O ecrã apaga-se e aparece o indicador luminoso vermelho do modo <strong>de</strong> espera no televisor.<br />
2. Para voltar a ligar o televisor, basta carregar novam<strong>en</strong>te em POWERP, nos botões numéricos (0~9), no botão TV ou no<br />
botão <strong>de</strong> canal para cima / para baixo (< / >).<br />
N Não <strong>de</strong>ixe o televisor em modo <strong>de</strong> espera durante longos períodos <strong>de</strong> tempo (por exemplo, quando vai <strong>de</strong> férias).<br />
Aconselha-se que <strong>de</strong>sligue o televisor da corr<strong>en</strong>te eléctrica e da ant<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
Português -
Ver os m<strong>en</strong>us<br />
<br />
1. Com o televisor ligado, carregue no botão MENU. O m<strong>en</strong>u principal aparece<br />
no ecrã. No lado esquerdo do m<strong>en</strong>u aparecem ícones: Imagem, Som, Canal,<br />
Configurar, Entrada, Assistência.<br />
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dos ícones. Em seguida,<br />
carregue no botão ENTERE para ace<strong>de</strong>r ao subm<strong>en</strong>u do ícone.<br />
3. Carregue no botão EXIT para sair.<br />
N Os m<strong>en</strong>us no ecrã <strong>de</strong>saparecem após cerca <strong>de</strong> um minuto.<br />
Modo : Standard<br />
Imagem<br />
Lumin. Células : 4<br />
Contraste : 95<br />
Brilho : 45<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>z : 50<br />
Cor : 50<br />
Matiz (Vr/Vm) : Vr50/Vm50<br />
Utilizar o botão TOOLS<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> utilizar o botão TOOLS para seleccionar <strong>de</strong> modo rápido e fácil funções utilizadas frequ<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te. O m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
altera consoante o modo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada externa que está a visualizar.<br />
1. Carregue no botão TOOLS . O Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas irá aparecer.<br />
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um m<strong>en</strong>u, <strong>de</strong>pois carregue no botão<br />
ENTERE.<br />
3. Carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE para apres<strong>en</strong>tar, alterar, ou utilizar os<br />
it<strong>en</strong>s seleccionados. Para obter uma <strong>de</strong>scrição m<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>talhada <strong>de</strong> cada função,<br />
Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
consulte a página correspon<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
• Modo Imagem: consulte a página 17<br />
• Modo Som: consulte a página 20<br />
• Temporizador: consulte a página 24<br />
• Poupança <strong>en</strong>erg.: consulte a página 23<br />
• Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), consulte a página 15<br />
<br />
Modo Imagem ◄ Standard ►<br />
Modo Som : Personalizar<br />
Temporizador : Deslig.<br />
Poupança <strong>en</strong>erg. : Deslig.<br />
Adicionar aos favoritos<br />
U Mover E Enter e Sair<br />
Visualização no ecrã<br />
A visualização no ecrã i<strong>de</strong>ntifica o canal actual e o estado <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>terminadas<br />
<strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> áudio-ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações.<br />
Carregue no botão INFO no telecomando. O canal, o tipo <strong>de</strong> som e o estado <strong>de</strong><br />
<strong>de</strong>terminadas <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> imagem e som são apres<strong>en</strong>tados no televisor.<br />
• ▲, ▼: po<strong>de</strong> visualizar outras informações do canal. Se quer passar para o<br />
canal actualm<strong>en</strong>te seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE.<br />
• ◄, ►: po<strong>de</strong> visualizar as informações do programa pret<strong>en</strong>dido no canal actual.<br />
N Carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te no botão INFO ou espere aproximadam<strong>en</strong>te 10<br />
segundos e o ecrã <strong>de</strong>saparece automaticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Português - 10
Função Plug & Play<br />
Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as <strong>de</strong>finições básicas ocorrem automática e subsequ<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N A Protecção <strong>de</strong> Ecrã é activada quando n<strong>en</strong>huma tecla no controlo remoto é carregada durante m<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong> 1 minuto <strong>en</strong>quanto o<br />
Plug & Play está em funcionam<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
N A Protecção <strong>de</strong> Ecrã é activada caso não exista n<strong>en</strong>hum sinal em funcionam<strong>en</strong>to durante m<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong> 15 minutos.<br />
1. Carregue no botão POWER do telecomando.aparece automaticam<strong>en</strong>te o m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language. Seleccione o idioma apropriado carregando<br />
nos botões ▲ ou ▼.<br />
Carregue no botão ENTERE para confirmar a escolha.<br />
2. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Demo <strong>de</strong> Loja ou Uso<br />
Doméstico e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE .<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Recom<strong>en</strong>damos uma configuração do televisor para o modo Uso<br />
Doméstico <strong>de</strong> modo a usufruir da melhor imagem no seu ambi<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> casa.<br />
O modo Demo <strong>de</strong> Loja <strong>de</strong>stina-se a ap<strong>en</strong>as aos loc<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong> v<strong>en</strong>da a retalho.<br />
Se a unida<strong>de</strong> ficar aci<strong>de</strong>ntalm<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>finida para o modo Demo <strong>de</strong> Loja e <strong>de</strong>sejar voltar ao Uso Doméstico (Standard):<br />
carregue no botão <strong>de</strong> volume no televisor. Quando aparecer o OSD <strong>de</strong> volume, carregue sem largar o botão MENU no<br />
televisor durante 5 segundos.<br />
3. Carregue no botão ENTERE para. Seleccione o país apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão<br />
ENTERE para confirmar a escolha.<br />
4. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para memorizar os can<strong>ais</strong> da ligação seleccionada e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Ant<strong>en</strong>a : Sinal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
Cabo : Sinal <strong>de</strong> cabo.<br />
5. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a fonte do canal para memorizar. Carregue no botão ENTERE para<br />
seleccionar Iniciar.<br />
• Digital e Analógico: can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong> e analógicos.<br />
• Digital: can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
• Analógico: can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Para obter uma <strong>de</strong>scrição m<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>talhada <strong>de</strong> como seleccionar o modo Cabo, consulte a página 12.<br />
A procura <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> começa e termina automaticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
Carregue no botão ENTERE em qualquer altura, para interromper o processo <strong>de</strong> memorização.<br />
Depois <strong>de</strong> todos os can<strong>ais</strong> disponíveis terem sido memorizados, aparece a m<strong>en</strong>sagem Ajustar o Modo Relógio.<br />
6. Carregue no botão ENTERE . Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Automático e, em seguida, no botão<br />
ENTERE.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se seleccionar Manual, aparece Ajustar data e hora actu<strong>ais</strong>. (consulte a página 24)<br />
Se receber um sinal digital, a hora é <strong>de</strong>finida automaticam<strong>en</strong>te. Se não for o caso, consulte a página 24 para acertar o<br />
relógio.<br />
7. É apres<strong>en</strong>tada uma breve <strong>de</strong>scrição <strong>de</strong> Como obter o melhor <strong>de</strong>semp<strong>en</strong>ho do novo televisor HD. Carregue no botão<br />
ENTERE.<br />
N TEste m<strong>en</strong>u está disponível em Guia <strong>de</strong> ligação HD no m<strong>en</strong>u Assistência.<br />
8. Aparece a m<strong>en</strong>sagem Desfrute do TV. Quando tiver terminado, carregue no botão ENTERE .<br />
Plug & Play<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
Se <strong>de</strong>sejar repor esta função...<br />
1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o m<strong>en</strong>u. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼<br />
para seleccionar Configurar e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.<br />
2. Carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.<br />
3. Introduza o número PIN <strong>de</strong> 4 digitos. O número PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finido <strong>de</strong> um novo<br />
televisor é ‘0-0-0-0’.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se <strong>de</strong>seja alterar o número PIN, consulte a página 22.<br />
A função Plug & Play só está disponível no modo TV.<br />
Configurar<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Idioma do m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Tempo<br />
Transmissão<br />
Segurança<br />
Geral<br />
: Português<br />
►<br />
Português - 11
Controlo <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong><br />
Memorizar Can<strong>ais</strong><br />
❑<br />
País<br />
• Canal digital: Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o país para os can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
• Can<strong>ais</strong> Analógicos: Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o país para os can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos.<br />
N<br />
❑<br />
Aparece o ecrã para que introduza o número PIN. Introduza o número PIN<br />
<strong>de</strong> 4 digitos.<br />
Memor. auto.<br />
Procura todos os can<strong>ais</strong> com estações emissoras activas (a disponibilida<strong>de</strong><br />
<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> do seu país) e guarda-os na memória do televisor.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> memorizar os can<strong>ais</strong> da ligação seleccionada.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
•<br />
Ant<strong>en</strong>a : Sinal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
Cabo : Sinal <strong>de</strong> cabo.<br />
Se seleccionar Cabo,<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> procura: Mostra o modo <strong>de</strong> procura. (Rápida)<br />
- ID <strong>de</strong> re<strong>de</strong>: Mostra o código <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificação <strong>de</strong> re<strong>de</strong>.<br />
- Frequência: Mostra a frequência para o canal.<br />
- Modulação: Mostra os valores <strong>de</strong> modulação disponíveis.<br />
- Taxa <strong>de</strong> símbolos: Mostra as taxas <strong>de</strong> símbolos disponíveis.<br />
• Modo <strong>de</strong> procura: Mostra o modo <strong>de</strong> procura. (Completa, Re<strong>de</strong>)<br />
- Frequência (Iniciar ~ Parar) : Mostra a frequência para o canal.<br />
- Modulação: Mostra os valores <strong>de</strong> modulação disponíveis.<br />
- Taxa <strong>de</strong> símbolos: Mostra as taxas <strong>de</strong> símbolos disponíveis.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> memorizar a fonte <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Digital e Analógico: can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong> e analógicos.<br />
Digital: can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
Analógico: can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se <strong>de</strong>seja parar Memor. auto., carregue no botão ENTERE .<br />
Aparece a m<strong>en</strong>sagem Parar a programação automática?.<br />
Seleccione Sim carregando nos botões ◄ ou ► e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE .<br />
Se o canal estiver bloqueado <strong>de</strong>vido à função Bloqueio crianças, aparece a janela para introduzir o PIN.<br />
Canal<br />
País<br />
Memor. auto.<br />
Memor. manual<br />
Opção <strong>de</strong> Procura por Cabo<br />
Guia actual e seguinte<br />
Guia completo<br />
Guia pre<strong>de</strong>f.<br />
: Act./Post.<br />
►<br />
Português - 12
❑<br />
Memor. manual<br />
Procura o canal manualm<strong>en</strong>te e guarda-o na memória do televisor.<br />
• Canal digital (Digital)<br />
Guarda manualm<strong>en</strong>te os can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
N O Canal digital só está disponível no modo DTV.<br />
• Canal: Define o número do canal utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).<br />
• Frequência: Define a frequência utilizando os botões numéricos.<br />
• Largura banda: Define a banda utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).<br />
N Quando terminar, os can<strong>ais</strong> são actualizados na lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
• Can<strong>ais</strong> Analógicos<br />
Guarda manualm<strong>en</strong>te os can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
• Programa (Número do programa a ser atribuído a um canal): Define o número do programa utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou<br />
os botões numéricos (0~9).<br />
• Sistema cores → Automático / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Define os valores do sistema <strong>de</strong> cores utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.<br />
• Sound System → BG / L / I / DK: Define os valores do sistema <strong>de</strong> som utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.<br />
• Canal (Se souber o número do canal a memorizar): Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar C (canal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a) ou<br />
S (canal <strong>de</strong> cabo). Carregue no botão ► e, em seguida, nos botões ▲, ▼ ou numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar o número<br />
<strong>de</strong>sejado.<br />
N Também po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o número do canal directam<strong>en</strong>te, carregando nos botões numéricos (0~9).<br />
N Se não ouvir som ou se o som não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão <strong>de</strong> som pret<strong>en</strong>dido.<br />
• Busca (Se não souber os números dos can<strong>ais</strong>): Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para iniciar a procura. O sintonizador<br />
pesquisa a amplitu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> frequências até aparecer no ecrã o primeiro canal ou o canal seleccionado.<br />
• Memorizar (Quando memoriza o canal e o número do programa associado): Defina para OK carregando no botão<br />
ENTERE.<br />
N Modo <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
- C (Modo <strong>de</strong> canal <strong>de</strong> ant<strong>en</strong>a): Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada estação emissora<br />
neste modo.<br />
- S (Modo <strong>de</strong> canal <strong>de</strong> cabo): Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada canal <strong>de</strong> cabo neste<br />
modo.<br />
Opção <strong>de</strong> Procura por Cabo (Cabo)<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir opções <strong>de</strong> procura adicion<strong>ais</strong>, como a frequência e a taxa <strong>de</strong> símbolos para a procura <strong>de</strong> re<strong>de</strong> por<br />
cabo.(Consoante o país)<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Frequência (Iniciar – Parar) : Mostra a frequência para o canal.<br />
Modulação: Mostra os valores <strong>de</strong> modulação disponíveis.<br />
Taxa <strong>de</strong> símbolos: Mostra as taxas <strong>de</strong> símbolos disponíveis.<br />
Define a frequência (Iniciar – Parar) e Taxa <strong>de</strong> símbolos utilizando os botões numéricos(0-9).<br />
Guia actual e seguinte / Guia completo<br />
As informações do EPG (Guia <strong>de</strong> programação electrónico) são fornecidas pelas estações emissoras. Po<strong>de</strong> haver <strong>en</strong>tradas<br />
<strong>de</strong> programas em branco ou <strong>de</strong>sactualizadas em consequência da transmissão <strong>de</strong> informações num <strong>de</strong>terminado canal. O<br />
ecrã é actualizado <strong>de</strong> forma dinâmica à medida que ficam disponíveis novas informações.<br />
• Guia actual e seguinte: Mostra informações sobre o programa actual e seguinte, para os seis can<strong>ais</strong> indicados na coluna<br />
do lado esquerdo.<br />
• Guia completo: Mostra informações sobre os programas <strong>de</strong> hora em hora. Aparecem informações sobre duas horas <strong>de</strong><br />
programação que po<strong>de</strong> percorrer para a fr<strong>en</strong>te ou para trás no tempo.<br />
Português - 13
❑<br />
Guia pre<strong>de</strong>f.<br />
• Act./Post. / Guia completo: Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>cidir <strong>en</strong>tre mostrar o Act./Post. ou o Guia<br />
completo quando carrega no botão GUIDE do telecomando.<br />
Canal<br />
Guia actual e seguinte<br />
Guia completo<br />
Guia pre<strong>de</strong>f. : Act./Post. ►<br />
Lista can<strong>ais</strong><br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> canal : Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados<br />
Sintonia fina<br />
O<br />
Também po<strong>de</strong> ace<strong>de</strong>r ao m<strong>en</strong>u do guia carregando no botão GUIDE.<br />
Utilizar o Guia actual e seguinte / Guia completo<br />
Guia actual e seguinte<br />
Guia completo<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Act.<br />
Post.<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Ver Informação Página • Guia completo • Sair Ver Informação Página • Act./Post. • Sair<br />
▲/▼/◄/►,<br />
(ENTER)<br />
VERMELHO<br />
VERDE<br />
AMARELO<br />
AZUL<br />
INFO<br />
Seleccionar um programa carregando nos botões ▲/▼/◄/►.<br />
Se seleccionar o programa seguinte, fica planeado com o ícone <strong>de</strong> relógio visível. Se carregar <strong>de</strong> novo<br />
no botão ENTERE, carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/► para seleccionar Cancelar ag<strong>en</strong>dam<strong>en</strong>tos, o<br />
que faz com que os ag<strong>en</strong>dam<strong>en</strong>tos fiquem cancelados e o ícone do relógio <strong>de</strong>sapareça.<br />
Para m<strong>ais</strong> informações sobre o ag<strong>en</strong>dam<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> programas, consulte a respectiva secção.<br />
Alternar <strong>en</strong>tre o Act./Post. e o Guia completo.<br />
Guia completo: Andar rapidam<strong>en</strong>te para trás (-24 horas).<br />
Guia completo: Andar rapidam<strong>en</strong>te para a fr<strong>en</strong>te (+24 horas).<br />
Sair do guia<br />
Botão INFO para obter informação <strong>de</strong>talhada. Estão incluídos na informação <strong>de</strong>talhada coisas como<br />
o Número do canal, a Duração do programa, a Barra <strong>de</strong> estado, a Autorida<strong>de</strong> par<strong>en</strong>tal, a Informação<br />
sobre a qualida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o (HD / SD), os Modos <strong>de</strong> áudio, as Leg<strong>en</strong>das ou o Teletexto, as línguas das<br />
leg<strong>en</strong>das ou do teletexto e um breve resumo sobre o programa realçado. “…” aparece caso o resumo<br />
seja <strong>de</strong>masiado longo.<br />
❑<br />
Lista can<strong>ais</strong><br />
Para m<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>talhes sobre o procedim<strong>en</strong>to na utilização <strong>de</strong> Lista can<strong>ais</strong>, consulte as <strong>de</strong>scrições nas páginas 15~16.<br />
❑<br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
Ao carregar no botão P < / >, o canal muda <strong>de</strong> acordo com a lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> seleccionados.<br />
• Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados: A mudança <strong>de</strong> canal é feita <strong>de</strong> acordo com a lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> memorizados.<br />
• Can<strong>ais</strong> favoritos: A mudança <strong>de</strong> canal é feita <strong>de</strong> acordo com a lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> favoritos.<br />
❑<br />
Sintonia fina (só can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos)<br />
Se a recepção estiver nítida, não precisa <strong>de</strong> fazer a sintonização fina do canal, uma vez que isso é feito automaticam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
durante a procura e memorização. Se, no <strong>en</strong>tanto, o sinal estiver fraco ou distorcido, po<strong>de</strong> ser necessário fazer uma<br />
sintonização fina <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> manualm<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Os can<strong>ais</strong> nos qu<strong>ais</strong> se fez a sintonização fina que foram guardados estão marcados com um asterisco “*” no lado direito<br />
do número do canal na banda <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
Se não guardar na memória o canal on<strong>de</strong> foi efectuada a sintonização fina, os ajustes não são gravados.<br />
Para repor a sintonização fina, seleccione Reiniciar carregando nos botões ▼ e, em seguida, carregue no botão<br />
ENTERE .<br />
Português - 14
Gerir can<strong>ais</strong><br />
Utilizando este m<strong>en</strong>u, po<strong>de</strong> Adicionar / Eliminar ou <strong>de</strong>finir os can<strong>ais</strong> favoritos e utilizar<br />
o guia <strong>de</strong> programas para transmissões digit<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Seleccione um canal no ecrã Todos os Can<strong>ais</strong>, Can<strong>ais</strong> Adicionados, Favorito,<br />
Programado, carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼ e no botão ENTERE.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Todos os can<strong>ais</strong>: mostra todos os can<strong>ais</strong> disponíveis.<br />
Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados: mostra todos os can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados.<br />
Favorito: mostra todos os can<strong>ais</strong> favoritos.<br />
Programado: mostra todos os programas actualm<strong>en</strong>te reservados.<br />
Utilizar os Botões coloridos com a Lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong><br />
- Vermelho (Tipo <strong>de</strong> canal): alterna <strong>en</strong>tre TV, Rádio, Dados / outra ou All.<br />
- Ver<strong>de</strong> (Zoom): avança ou retroce<strong>de</strong> o número do canal.<br />
- Amarelo (Selec.): selecciona múltiplas listas <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
- T TOOLS (Opção): mostra o m<strong>en</strong>u Apagar (ou Adicionar), Adicionar aos<br />
favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), Visual. Temporizador, Editar nome<br />
<strong>de</strong> canal, Edição do Canal nº, Or<strong>de</strong>nar, Bloquear (ou Desbloq.), Selec.<br />
Todos(ou Anular selecção) ou Memor. auto..<br />
(O m<strong>en</strong>u Opções po<strong>de</strong> variar consoante a situação.)<br />
Canal<br />
Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados<br />
<br />
Mini guia<br />
Guia pre<strong>de</strong>f. : Act./Post.<br />
Lista can<strong>ais</strong><br />
Modo <strong>de</strong> canal : Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados<br />
Sintonia fina<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Todos • Tipo <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Selec. Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
Ícones do ecrã sobre o estado do canal<br />
A Um canal analógico. c Um canal seleccionado carregando no botão amarelo.<br />
♥ Um canal <strong>de</strong>finido como Favorito. ( Um programa que está a ser transmitido.<br />
\ Um canal bloqueado. ) Um programa reservado<br />
Carregue no botão CH LIST do telecomando para ver as listas <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> ferram<strong>en</strong>tas <strong>de</strong> lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> (em Todos os can<strong>ais</strong> / Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados / Favoritos)<br />
Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
O m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> opções po<strong>de</strong> variar <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ndo do estado do canal.<br />
• Adicionar / Apagar<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> eliminar ou adicionar um canal a ser mostrado nos can<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>sejados.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Todos os can<strong>ais</strong> eliminados são mostrados no m<strong>en</strong>u Todos os can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
Um canal a cinz<strong>en</strong>to indica que o canal foi eliminado.<br />
O m<strong>en</strong>u Adicionar ap<strong>en</strong>as aparece para can<strong>ais</strong> eliminados.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> eliminar da mesma maneira um canal no m<strong>en</strong>u Can<strong>ais</strong> adicionados ou<br />
Favourite.<br />
• Adicionar aos favoritos / Delete to Favourite<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir can<strong>ais</strong> que vê frequ<strong>en</strong>tem<strong>en</strong>te como favoritos.<br />
T<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Também po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o canal favorito seleccionando Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas → Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos<br />
favoritos).<br />
O símbolo “♥” é mostrado e o canal é <strong>de</strong>finido como um favorito.<br />
Todos os can<strong>ais</strong> favoritos são mostrados no m<strong>en</strong>u Favoritos.<br />
Para seleccionar os can<strong>ais</strong> configurados como favoritos, carregue no botão<br />
FAV.CH do telecomando.<br />
Todos os can<strong>ais</strong><br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Apagar<br />
Adicionar aos favoritos<br />
Visual. Temporizador<br />
Editar nome <strong>de</strong> canal<br />
Or<strong>de</strong>nar<br />
Bloquear<br />
▼<br />
Todos • Tipo <strong>de</strong> canal • Zoom • Selec. Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
Português - 15<br />
Continua...
• Visual. Temporizador<br />
Se reservar um programa a que quer assistir, o televisor muda automaticam<strong>en</strong>te para o canal da lista on<strong>de</strong> tinha reservado o<br />
programa; mesmo que esteja a visualizar outro canal. Para reservar um programa <strong>de</strong>fina primeiro a hora actual. (Consulte a<br />
página 24.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Só po<strong>de</strong>m ser reservados can<strong>ais</strong> memorizados.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir directam<strong>en</strong>te o canal, o mês, o dia, o ano, a hora e o minuto, se carregar nos botões numéricos do<br />
telecomando.<br />
A reserva <strong>de</strong> um programa é mostrada no m<strong>en</strong>u Programado.<br />
Guia <strong>de</strong> programas digit<strong>ais</strong> e Reservas <strong>de</strong> visualização<br />
Se carregar no botão ►, quando seleccionar um canal digital, aparece o Guia <strong>de</strong> programas <strong>de</strong>sse canal.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> reservar um programa se seguir os procedim<strong>en</strong>tos <strong>de</strong>scritos acima.<br />
• Editar nome <strong>de</strong> canal (só can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos)<br />
Os can<strong>ais</strong> po<strong>de</strong>m ser etiquetados <strong>de</strong> modo a que as letras que os <strong>de</strong>finem aparecem quando os mesmos são seleccionados.<br />
N<br />
Os nomes dos can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong> são atribuidos automaticam<strong>en</strong>te e não po<strong>de</strong>m ser etiquetados.<br />
• Edição do Canal nº (só can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>)<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> também editar o número do canal se carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.<br />
• Or<strong>de</strong>nar (só can<strong>ais</strong> analógicos)<br />
Esta operação permite alterar os números <strong>de</strong> programa dos can<strong>ais</strong> memorizados. Esta operação po<strong>de</strong> ser necessária <strong>de</strong>pois<br />
<strong>de</strong> utilizar a memorização automática.<br />
• Bloquear / Desbloq.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> bloquear um canal para que o mesmo não seja nem seleccionado nem visualizado. Esta função está disponível ap<strong>en</strong>as<br />
quando o Bloqueio crianças está <strong>de</strong>finido para Lig.. (consulte a página 22)<br />
N Aparece o ecrã para que introduza o número PIN. Introduza o número PIN <strong>de</strong> 4 digitos.<br />
N O número PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finido <strong>de</strong> um novo televisor é ‘0-0-0-0’. Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o PIN, seleccionando Alterar PIN do m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
N Aparece o símbolo “\” e o canal é bloqueado.<br />
• Selec. Todos / Anular selecção<br />
• Selec. Todos: Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar todos os can<strong>ais</strong> da lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
• Anular selecção: Po<strong>de</strong> anular a selecção <strong>de</strong> todos os can<strong>ais</strong> da lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
N Po<strong>de</strong> executar as funções adicionar / eliminar, adicionar so Favoritos / eliminar dos Favoritos ou bloquear / <strong>de</strong>sbloquear<br />
para vários can<strong>ais</strong> ao mesmo tempo. Seleccione os can<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>sejados e carregue, ao mesmo tempo, no botão amarelo<br />
para <strong>de</strong>finir todos os can<strong>ais</strong> seleccionados.<br />
N A marca c aparece à esquerda dos can<strong>ais</strong> seleccionados.<br />
N Só po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar Anular selecção quando há um canal seleccionado.<br />
• Memor. auto.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Para m<strong>ais</strong> informações sobre a configuração das opções, consulte a página 12.<br />
Se o canal estiver bloqueado <strong>de</strong>vido à função Bloqueio crianças, aparece a janela para introduzir o PIN.<br />
❑<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> opções <strong>de</strong> lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong> (em Programme med)<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> visualizar, modificar ou eliminar uma reserva.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Alterar informações: Seleccione para alterar uma reserva visualizada.<br />
Cancelar planos: Seleccione para cancelar uma reserva visualizada.<br />
Informação: Seleccione para visualizar uma reserva visualizada.<br />
(Também po<strong>de</strong> alterar uma informação <strong>de</strong> reserva.)<br />
Selec. Todos / Anular selecção : Seleccione ou anule a selecção <strong>de</strong> todos os<br />
programas reservados.<br />
Programado<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 TV1 Alterar informações<br />
Quincy, M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Cancelar planos<br />
TV3 The Equalizador<br />
20:59 2<br />
Informação<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Selec. Todos<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Todos • Zoom • Selec. Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas Informação<br />
Português - 16
Controlo <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
Alterar e repor as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
❑<br />
Modo<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o tipo <strong>de</strong> imagem que melhor correspon<strong>de</strong> aos seus requisitos <strong>de</strong><br />
visualização.<br />
• Dinâmico: Selecciona uma imagem <strong>de</strong> alta <strong>de</strong>finição para ser exibida em<br />
ambi<strong>en</strong>tes iluminados.<br />
• Standard: Selecciona a imagem para ser exibida em óptimas condições em<br />
ambi<strong>en</strong>tes norm<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
• Filme: Selecciona a imagem para ser exibida em boas condições em ambi<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
escuros.<br />
Imagem<br />
Modo : Standard ►<br />
Lumin. Células : 4<br />
Contraste : 95<br />
Brilho : 45<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>z : 50<br />
Cor : 50<br />
Matiz (Vr / Vm) : Vr50/Vm50<br />
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Também po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o modo <strong>de</strong> imagem se seleccionar Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
→ Modo Imagem.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Lumin. Células / Contraste / Brilho / Niti<strong>de</strong>z / Cor / Matiz (Vr/Vm)<br />
O televisor tem várias opções <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finição que permitem controlar a qualida<strong>de</strong> da imagem.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Lumin. Células: Ajusta o brilho da retro-iluminação do LCD.<br />
Contraste: Ajusta o nível <strong>de</strong> contraste.<br />
Brilho: Ajusta o nível <strong>de</strong> brilho.<br />
Niti<strong>de</strong>z: Ajusta a niti<strong>de</strong>z.<br />
Cor: Ajusta a saturação da cor da imagem utilizando a barra no ecrã.<br />
Matiz (Vr/Vm): Quanto m<strong>ais</strong> se aproximar <strong>de</strong> Red 100 (Vermelho 100), m<strong>ais</strong> saturada fica a cor vermelha.<br />
Seleccione o modo <strong>de</strong> imagem para ajustado em primeiro lugar. Os valores <strong>de</strong> ajuste são gravados com cada modo <strong>de</strong><br />
imagem.<br />
Quando faz alterações a Lumin. Células, Contraste, Brilho, Niti<strong>de</strong>z, Cor ou Matiz(Vr/Vm), o OSD ajusta-se em conformida<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Nos modos TV Analógica, Ext., AV, S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o dos sistema PAL, não po<strong>de</strong> utilizar a função Matiz.<br />
As <strong>de</strong>finições po<strong>de</strong>m ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma <strong>en</strong>trada do televisor.<br />
O consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia durante a utilização po<strong>de</strong> ser reduzido <strong>de</strong> forma significativa se o nível <strong>de</strong> brilho da imagem for<br />
reduzido, isto reduz o custo geral <strong>de</strong> funcionam<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
Definições avançadas<br />
O novo televisor <strong>Samsung</strong> permite-lhe <strong>de</strong>finir <strong>de</strong> modo m<strong>ais</strong> preciso as imag<strong>en</strong>s<br />
do que mo<strong>de</strong>los anteriores. Veja abaixo como ajustar as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong>talhadas<br />
das imag<strong>en</strong>s.<br />
N Definições avançadas está disponível no modo Standard ou no modo Filme.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Tonalida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> preto → Deslig. / Escuro / M<strong>ais</strong> escuro / Muito escuro<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o nível <strong>de</strong> preto no ecrã para ajustar a int<strong>en</strong>sida<strong>de</strong> do ecrã.<br />
Contraste dinâm. → Deslig. / Médio / Médio / Alta<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ajustar o contraste do ecrã até obter o contraste i<strong>de</strong>al.<br />
Gamma<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ajustar a int<strong>en</strong>sida<strong>de</strong> da cor primária (vermelho, ver<strong>de</strong>, azul).<br />
Matriz <strong>de</strong> cores<br />
Reposição <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
Matriz <strong>de</strong> Cores é um esquema <strong>de</strong> cores composto por vermelho, ver<strong>de</strong> e azul. Seleccione a sua Matriz <strong>de</strong> Cores favorita<br />
para obter uma cor m<strong>ais</strong> natural.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Automático: Define automaticam<strong>en</strong>te o intervalo <strong>de</strong> cores consoante a fonte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
Nativa: Aum<strong>en</strong>ta o intervalo <strong>de</strong> cores relativam<strong>en</strong>te ao da fonte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
• Equilíbrio do branco<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ajustar a temperatura da cor <strong>de</strong> modo a obter imag<strong>en</strong>s com cores m<strong>ais</strong> natur<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Verm.-Offset / Ver<strong>de</strong>-Offset / Azul-Offset / Verm.-Gain / Ver<strong>de</strong>-Gain / Azul-Gain: Se alterar os valores ajustados actualiza o ecrã.<br />
Reiniciar: Repõe o equilíbrio do branco pre<strong>de</strong>finido.<br />
• Tom <strong>de</strong> pele<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> realçar o tom cor <strong>de</strong> pele da imagem.<br />
N Se alterar os valores ajustados actualiza o ecrã.<br />
• Melhor. extremid. → Deslig. / Lig.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> realçar os limites dos objectos na imagem.<br />
Imagem<br />
Cor : 50<br />
Matiz (Vr/Vm)<br />
Definições avançadas<br />
Opções <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
: Vr50/Vm50<br />
►<br />
Português - 17
❑<br />
Opções <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
• Tonalida<strong>de</strong> → Cores frias / Normal / Cores qu<strong>en</strong>tes1 / Cores qu<strong>en</strong>tes2<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o tom <strong>de</strong> cor m<strong>ais</strong> confortável para si.<br />
N Os valores ajustados são guardados consoante o modo <strong>de</strong> Imagem<br />
seleccionado.<br />
N Cores qu<strong>en</strong>tes1 ou Cores qu<strong>en</strong>tes2 só estão activados quando modo <strong>de</strong><br />
imagem está em Filme.<br />
Imagem<br />
Matiz (Vr/Vm) : Vr50/Vm50<br />
Definições avançadas<br />
Opções <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
Reposição <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
►<br />
• Tamanho<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o tamanho <strong>de</strong> imagem que melhor correspon<strong>de</strong> às suas<br />
necessida<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> visualização.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Automático: Ajusta imagem para formato Auto Wi<strong>de</strong>.<br />
16:9: Define a imagem para a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9.<br />
Zoom 16:9: Seleccione este m<strong>en</strong>u para ver imag<strong>en</strong>s com a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 4:3 num televisor com a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto<br />
16:9, esticando a imagem 4:3 na vertical.<br />
Zoom: Estica a imagem com a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9 na vertical.<br />
4:3: Define a imagem para a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 4:3.<br />
Ajustar ao ecrã: Mostra o sinal HD nativo completo que não é possível ver utilizando um televisor normal.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
As opções do tamanho da imagem po<strong>de</strong>m variar consoante a fonte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
As opções disponíveis po<strong>de</strong>m variar consoante o modo seleccionado.<br />
As <strong>de</strong>finições po<strong>de</strong>m ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma <strong>en</strong>trada do televisor.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ocorrer uma ret<strong>en</strong>ção temporária da imagem quando ver uma imagem fixa por um período superior a duas horas.<br />
Zoom 16:9: Carregue nos botões ► para seleccionar Posição e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE . Carregue<br />
nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para mover o ecrã para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE .<br />
Zoom: Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Posição e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue<br />
nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para <strong>de</strong>slocar a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE .<br />
Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Tamanho e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE . Carregue nos botões<br />
▲ ou ▼ para ampliar ou reduzir o tamanho da imagem numa imagem vertical. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.<br />
Depois <strong>de</strong> seleccionar Ajustar ao ecrã nos modos HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Compon<strong>en</strong>te (1080i / 1080p): Seleccione<br />
Posição carregando nos botões ◄ ou ►. Utilize os botões ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► para mover a imagem.<br />
Reiniciar: Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Reiniciar e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE . Po<strong>de</strong><br />
inicializar a <strong>de</strong>finição.<br />
Se utilizar a função Ajustar ao ecrã com uma <strong>en</strong>trada <strong>de</strong> HDMI 720p, é cortada uma linha na parte <strong>de</strong> cima, na parte <strong>de</strong><br />
baixo, à esquerda e à direita como na função <strong>de</strong> procura.<br />
• Modo <strong>de</strong> ecrã<br />
Se <strong>de</strong>finir o tamanho da imagem para Wi<strong>de</strong> Automático num televisor panorâmico 16:9, po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>terminar o tamanho que<br />
pret<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong> ver: a imagem 4:3 WSS (Wi<strong>de</strong> Scre<strong>en</strong> Service) ou n<strong>en</strong>huma. Cada país europeu requer um tamanho <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
difer<strong>en</strong>te pelo que esta função permite aos utilizadores seleccionar o tamanho.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
16:9: Define a imagem para a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9.<br />
Zoom 16:9: Seleccione este m<strong>en</strong>u para ver imag<strong>en</strong>s com a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 4:3 num televisor com a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto<br />
16:9, esticando a imagem 4:3 na vertical.<br />
Zoom: Estica a imagem com a relação <strong>de</strong> aspecto 16:9 na vertical.<br />
4:3: Seleciona o modo da tela para 4:3.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Esta função está disponível no modo Wi<strong>de</strong> Automático.<br />
Esta função não está disponível nos modos, Compon<strong>en</strong>te ou HDMI.<br />
• NR Digital → Deslig. / Baixa / Médio / Alto / Automático<br />
Se o sinal <strong>de</strong> transmissão recebido pelo seu televisor for fraco, po<strong>de</strong> activar a função <strong>de</strong> Redução do Ruído Digital para<br />
ajudar a diminuir os efeitos da electricida<strong>de</strong> estática ou <strong>de</strong> fantasma que possam aparecer no ecrã.<br />
N<br />
Se o sinal for fraco, seleccione uma das outras opções até que apareça no ecrã a melhor imagem.<br />
• Nv.pr.HDMI → Normal / Baixa<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar directam<strong>en</strong>te o nível <strong>de</strong> preto no ecrã para ajustar a int<strong>en</strong>sida<strong>de</strong> do ecrã.<br />
N<br />
Esta função só está activa quando ligar a <strong>en</strong>trada externa a HDMI (sin<strong>ais</strong> RGB).<br />
Português - 18<br />
Continua...
• Modo Filme<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> optimizar o modo da imagem especialm<strong>en</strong>te para ver filmes.<br />
• Deslig.: Processam<strong>en</strong>to básico <strong>de</strong> imagem <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o aplicado, sem <strong>de</strong>tecção automática para programas com base num<br />
filme.<br />
• Auto: Ajusta-se automaticam<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> forma a obter a melhor qualida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> imagem <strong>en</strong>tre os programas <strong>de</strong> filme e ví<strong>de</strong>o.<br />
• Protecção <strong>de</strong> ecrã<br />
Configura as opções <strong>de</strong> (Protecção <strong>de</strong> ecrã) para prev<strong>en</strong>ir e reduzir a queimadura <strong>de</strong> pixels.<br />
Quando uma imagem fica <strong>de</strong>masiado tempo na mesma posição, po<strong>de</strong> causar uma queimadura <strong>de</strong> ecrã perman<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Mudar pixels: Este aparelho está equipado com tecnologia <strong>de</strong> prev<strong>en</strong>ção contra queimadura <strong>de</strong> ecrã, o que reduz a<br />
possibilida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> ocorrência <strong>de</strong>ste efeito. Esta tecnologia permite regular o movim<strong>en</strong>to da imagem para cima/baixo (Linha<br />
vertical) e lateralm<strong>en</strong>te (Pt horizontal). A <strong>de</strong>finição Time permite programar, em minutos, o tempo <strong>en</strong>tre movim<strong>en</strong>tos da<br />
imagem.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Defina Mudar pixels para Lig. carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼ e, <strong>de</strong>pois, prima o botão ENTERE.<br />
Seleccione a opção pret<strong>en</strong>dida carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼ e, <strong>de</strong>pois, prima o botão ENTERE.<br />
Opções disponíveis: horizontal, vertical, Tempo<br />
Condição óptima para a mudança <strong>de</strong> pixels<br />
Item<br />
TV/Ext/AV/Compon<strong>en</strong>te/HDMI<br />
horizontal 0~4 2<br />
vertical 0~4 2<br />
Tempo (Minuto) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
O valor do Pixel Shift po<strong>de</strong> ser difer<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ndo do tamanho do monitor (polegadas) e do modo.<br />
Esta função não está disponível no modo Ajustar ao ecrã.<br />
• Deslocam<strong>en</strong>to: Esta função permite remover as imag<strong>en</strong>s residu<strong>ais</strong> do ecrã, mov<strong>en</strong>do todos os pixels no plasma <strong>de</strong> acordo<br />
com um padrão. Utilize esta função quando ainda houver imag<strong>en</strong>s residu<strong>ais</strong> ou símbolos no ecrã, especialm<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>pois da<br />
visualização <strong>de</strong> uma imagem fixa no ecrã durante muito tempo.<br />
• Cinz<strong>en</strong>to lateral: Quando vir televisão no formato 4:3, se regular o equilíbrio do branco nas extremida<strong>de</strong>s esquerda e<br />
direita, po<strong>de</strong> evitar danos no ecrã.<br />
- Escuro: Se <strong>de</strong>finir o tamanho do ecrã para 4:3, escurece os lados esquerdo e direito.<br />
- Claro: Se <strong>de</strong>finir o tamanho do ecrã para 4:3, aclara os lados esquerdo e direito.<br />
❑<br />
Reposição <strong>de</strong> imagem → Repor modo <strong>de</strong> imagem / Cancelar<br />
Repõe os valores pre<strong>de</strong>finidos das <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> imagem.<br />
N Seleccione o modo <strong>de</strong> imagem a ser resposto. A reposição é feita para cada<br />
modo <strong>de</strong> imagem.<br />
Imagem<br />
Definições avançadas<br />
Opções <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
Reposição <strong>de</strong> imagem<br />
►<br />
Português - 19
Controlo <strong>de</strong> som<br />
Alterar o padrão <strong>de</strong> som<br />
❑<br />
Modo → Standard / Música / Filme / Voz nítida / Personalizar<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o tipo <strong>de</strong> efeitos sonoros especi<strong>ais</strong> a utilizar, quando estiver a ver<br />
uma <strong>de</strong>terminada emissão.<br />
Som<br />
Modo<br />
: Personalizar ►<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Também po<strong>de</strong> configurar o modo <strong>de</strong> som se seleccionar Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas →<br />
Modo Som.<br />
Equalizador<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ajustar as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> som <strong>de</strong> acordo com as suas preferências pesso<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
Volume auto. : Deslig.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Modo: Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar o modo <strong>de</strong> som <strong>de</strong> acordo com as suas preferências pesso<strong>ais</strong>.<br />
Balanço: Controla o equilíbrio <strong>en</strong>tre os altifalantes esquerdo e direito.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste <strong>de</strong> banda): Para ajustar o nível <strong>de</strong> difer<strong>en</strong>tes frequências <strong>de</strong> largura <strong>de</strong><br />
banda<br />
• Reiniciar: Repõe os valores pre<strong>de</strong>finidos do equalizador.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Deslig. / Lig.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD é a tecnologia combinada <strong>en</strong>tre TruSurround e FOCUS, TruBass.<br />
A função SRS TruSurround HD permite-lhe <strong>de</strong>sfrutar <strong>de</strong> um efeito <strong>de</strong> som Surround 5.1 nos dois altifalantes do televisor.<br />
Para além <strong>de</strong> oferecer graves int<strong>en</strong>sos e ricos, esta função também melhora a resolução das frequências altas.<br />
N<br />
Equalizador<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Deslig.<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> áudio : ----<br />
Formato <strong>de</strong> áudio : ----<br />
Descrição áudio<br />
<br />
Se o som não estiver normal durante a reprodução <strong>de</strong> música no televisor, regule o equalizador e SRS TruSurround HD<br />
(Deslig./Lig.).<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS e símbolo são marcas comerci<strong>ais</strong> da SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
A tecnologia TruSurround HD está incorporada sob lic<strong>en</strong>ça da SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Idioma <strong>de</strong> áudio (só can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>)<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o valor pre<strong>de</strong>finido dos idiomas <strong>de</strong> áudio. Apres<strong>en</strong>ta a informação do idioma da transmissão a ser recebida.<br />
N<br />
Só po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>tre as línguas disponíveis na transmissão.<br />
Formato <strong>de</strong> áudio → MPEG / Dolby Digital+ (só can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>)<br />
Se o som for emitido tanto pelo altifalante principal como pelo receptor <strong>de</strong> áudio, po<strong>de</strong> ouvir-se um eco <strong>de</strong>vido à difer<strong>en</strong>ça<br />
na velocida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>scodificação <strong>en</strong>tre o altifalante principal e o receptor <strong>de</strong> áudio. Neste caso, utilize a função Altifalante do<br />
televisor.<br />
N<br />
Só po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>tre as línguas disponíveis na transmissão.<br />
Fabricado sob lic<strong>en</strong>ça da Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby e o símbolo <strong>de</strong> duplo D são marcas comerci<strong>ais</strong> da Dolby Laboratories.<br />
❑<br />
Descrição áudio (só can<strong>ais</strong> digit<strong>ais</strong>)<br />
Esta é uma função auxiliar <strong>de</strong> áudio que fornece uma faixa <strong>de</strong> áudio adicional para pessoas com <strong>de</strong>ficiências visu<strong>ais</strong>. Esta<br />
função gere o fluxo <strong>de</strong> áudio para o AD (Descrição <strong>de</strong> áudio), quando é <strong>en</strong>viado pelo transmissor juntam<strong>en</strong>te com o Áudio<br />
principal. Os utilizadores po<strong>de</strong>m ligar ou <strong>de</strong>sligar a Descrição <strong>de</strong> áudio e regular o volume.<br />
O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão AD do telecomando.<br />
• Descrição áudio → Deslig. / Lig.<br />
Ligue e <strong>de</strong>sligue a função <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>scrição <strong>de</strong> áudio.<br />
• Volume<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ajustar o volume da <strong>de</strong>scrição <strong>de</strong> áudio.<br />
N<br />
Volume está activo quando a Descrição áudio está <strong>de</strong>finida para Lig.<br />
Português - 20<br />
Continua...
❑<br />
❑<br />
Volume auto. → Deslig. / Lig.<br />
Cada estação emissora tem condições <strong>de</strong> sinal específicas e, por isso, não é fácil ajustar o volume sempre que muda <strong>de</strong><br />
canal. Esta função permite ajustar automaticam<strong>en</strong>te o volume do canal pret<strong>en</strong>dido, baixando o som quando o sinal <strong>de</strong><br />
modulação é alto ou aum<strong>en</strong>tando o som quando o sinal <strong>de</strong> modulação é baixo.<br />
Altifalante Seleccionar → Altifalante Exter. / Altifalante do televisor<br />
Se quiser ouvir som através <strong>de</strong> colunas separadas, cancele o amplificador interno.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Os botões – + e M MUTE não funcionam quando o Altifalante Seleccionar está <strong>de</strong>finido para Altifalante Exter...<br />
Se seleccionar Altifalante Exter. no m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> Altifalante Seleccionar, as <strong>de</strong>finições são limitadas.<br />
Altifalantes internos do televisor<br />
Audio Out (Óptico, Saída E / D) para Sistema <strong>de</strong> som<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>te / HDMI<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Compon<strong>en</strong>te / HDMI<br />
Altifalante do televisor Altifalante <strong>de</strong> saída Saída <strong>de</strong> som<br />
Altifalante Exter. Silêncio Saída <strong>de</strong> som<br />
Sem sinal <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o Silêncio Silêncio<br />
❑<br />
Reposição <strong>de</strong> som → Repor tudo / Repor modo <strong>de</strong> som /<br />
Cancelar<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> repor as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> som pre<strong>de</strong>finidas.<br />
Som<br />
Volume auto. : Deslig.<br />
Altifalante Seleccionar : Altifalante do tv.<br />
Reposição <strong>de</strong> som<br />
►<br />
Seleccionar o modo <strong>de</strong> som<br />
Quando <strong>de</strong>fine para Dual l ll, aparece no ecrã o modo <strong>de</strong> som actual.<br />
Tipo <strong>de</strong> emissão<br />
Indicação no ecrã<br />
Emissão normal<br />
(Som standard)<br />
Mono (Uso normal)<br />
NICAM<br />
Estéreo<br />
Regular + NICAM Mono<br />
NICAM-Estéreo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
Estéreo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM Dual-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
A2<br />
Estéreo<br />
Emissão normal<br />
(Som standard)<br />
Mono (Uso normal)<br />
Bilingue ou DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Estéreo<br />
Estéreo<br />
Mono<br />
(Mono forçado)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se o sinal <strong>de</strong> estéreo for fraco e ocorrer uma mudança automática mu<strong>de</strong> para o modo Mono.<br />
Está função só está activa no sinal <strong>de</strong> som estéreo. Está <strong>de</strong>sactivada no sinal <strong>de</strong> som mono.<br />
Esta função só está disponível no modo TV.<br />
Português - 21
Descrição das funções<br />
Definir o M<strong>en</strong>u Configurar<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Idioma do m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o idioma para o m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Transmissão<br />
Leg<strong>en</strong>da<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> activar e <strong>de</strong>sactivar as leg<strong>en</strong>das. Utilize este m<strong>en</strong>u para <strong>de</strong>finir o Modo<br />
<strong>de</strong> leg<strong>en</strong>das. Normal no m<strong>en</strong>u são as leg<strong>en</strong>das básicas e Surdos são as<br />
leg<strong>en</strong>das para uma pessoa com <strong>de</strong>ficiências auditivas.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Leg<strong>en</strong>da → Lig. / Deslig.: Activa ou <strong>de</strong>sactiva as leg<strong>en</strong>das.<br />
Modo → Normal / Surdos: <strong>de</strong>fine o modo <strong>de</strong> leg<strong>en</strong>da.<br />
Idioma das leg<strong>en</strong>das: <strong>de</strong>fine o idioma da leg<strong>en</strong>da.<br />
Se o programa que estiver a ver não suportar a função Surdos, o modo<br />
Normal é automaticam<strong>en</strong>te activado mesmo que o modo Surdos esteja<br />
seleccionado.<br />
O inglês é a pre<strong>de</strong>finição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não<br />
está disponível na transmissão.<br />
Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão SUBT. do<br />
telecomando.<br />
• Texto digital → Desactivar / Activar<br />
Se o programa for transmitido com texto digital, esta função é activada.<br />
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
Uma norma internacional para sistemas <strong>de</strong> codificação <strong>de</strong> dados utilizada em multimédia e hipermédia. Funciona a um<br />
nível m<strong>ais</strong> elevado do que o sistema MPEG, incluindo hipermédia <strong>de</strong> ligação <strong>de</strong> dados t<strong>ais</strong> como imag<strong>en</strong>s fixas, serviço <strong>de</strong><br />
caracteres, animação, gráficos e ficheiros <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o, bem como dados multimédia. MHEG é uma tecnologia <strong>de</strong> interacção<br />
com o utilizador em tempo <strong>de</strong> execução e está a ser aplicada a diversos campos, incluindo VOD (Vi<strong>de</strong>o-On-Demand), ITV<br />
(Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-educação, teleconferência, bibliotecas digit<strong>ais</strong> e jogos em re<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Idioma do teletexto<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o idioma do Teletexto seleccionando o idioma.<br />
N<br />
O inglês é a pre<strong>de</strong>finição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não está disponível na transmissão.<br />
• Prefer.<br />
• Idioma principal/Idioma secundário/Idioma principal das leg<strong>en</strong>das/Idioma secundário das leg<strong>en</strong>das/Idioma<br />
principal do teletexto/Idioma secundário do teletexto<br />
Utilizando esta funcionalida<strong>de</strong>, os utilizadores po<strong>de</strong>m seleccionar um dos idiomas. O idioma seleccionado aqui é o<br />
pre<strong>de</strong>finido para quando o utilizador selecciona um canal.<br />
Se alterar a <strong>de</strong>finição <strong>de</strong> idioma, o Idioma das leg<strong>en</strong>das, o Idioma <strong>de</strong> áudio e o Idioma do teletexto do m<strong>en</strong>u Idioma<br />
mudam automaticam<strong>en</strong>te para o idioma seleccionado.<br />
O Idioma <strong>de</strong> áudio, o Idioma das leg<strong>en</strong>das e o Idioma do teletexto do m<strong>en</strong>u Idioma mostram uma lista <strong>de</strong> idiomas<br />
suportados pelo canal actual e a selecção aparece realçada. Se alterar esta <strong>de</strong>finição <strong>de</strong> idioma, a nova selecção só<br />
é válida para o canal actual. A <strong>de</strong>finição alterada não muda a <strong>de</strong>finição do Idioma principal, do Idioma principal das<br />
leg<strong>en</strong>das, nem do Idioma principal do teletexto no m<strong>en</strong>u Preferência.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Interface comum<br />
Instalar o CI Card<br />
1. Adquira o módulo CI CAM no rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor m<strong>ais</strong> próximo ou por telefone.<br />
2. Introduza o CI CARD no CAM na direcção da seta até ficar <strong>en</strong>caixado.<br />
3. Introduza o CAM, com o CI CARD colocado, na ranhura da interface comum.<br />
N Introduza o CAM até ao fim na direcção da seta, <strong>de</strong> modo a ficar paralelo à<br />
ranhura.<br />
4. Verifique se consegue ver uma imagem num canal <strong>de</strong> sinal codificado.<br />
• M<strong>en</strong>u CI<br />
Isto permite ao utilizador seleccionar a partir do m<strong>en</strong>u fornedido pelo CAM.<br />
Seleccione o M<strong>en</strong>u CI com base no m<strong>en</strong>u do PC Card.<br />
• Informação sobre aplicações<br />
Contém informações sobre o CAM introduzido na ranhura CI e apres<strong>en</strong>ta-as no ecrã.<br />
Os dados apres<strong>en</strong>tados em Application Info referem-se ao CI CARD. Po<strong>de</strong> instalar o CAM a qualquer altura,<br />
in<strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ntem<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong> o televisor estar ligado ou <strong>de</strong>sligado.<br />
N<br />
O CAM não é suportado em <strong>de</strong>terminados países e regiões; peça informações ao rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor autorizado.<br />
Configurar<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Idioma do m<strong>en</strong>u : Português ►<br />
Tempo<br />
Transmissão<br />
Segurança<br />
Geral<br />
Português - 22<br />
Continua...
❑<br />
Segurança<br />
Bloqueio crianças → Deslig. / Lig.<br />
Esta função impe<strong>de</strong> que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, vejam programas não apropriados, cortando a imagem<br />
e o som.<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> aparecer a janela <strong>de</strong> configuração, aparece o ecrã para que introduza o número PIN. Introduza o número PIN<br />
<strong>de</strong> 4 digitos.<br />
O número PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finido <strong>de</strong> um novo televisor é '0-0-0-0'. Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o PIN seleccionando Alterar PIN do m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> bloquear can<strong>ais</strong> da Lista <strong>de</strong> can<strong>ais</strong>. (consulte a página 15)<br />
Bloqueio crianças só está disponível no modo <strong>de</strong> TV.<br />
Bloqueio para crianças<br />
Esta função permite evitar que utilizadores não autorizados como, por exemplo, crianças, assistam a programas<br />
ina<strong>de</strong>quados, através <strong>de</strong> um código PIN (número <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificação pessoal) <strong>de</strong> 4 dígitos <strong>de</strong>finido pelo utilizador.<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> aparecer a janela <strong>de</strong> configuração, aparece o ecrã para que introduza o número PIN. Introduza o número PIN<br />
<strong>de</strong> 4 digitos.<br />
O número PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finido <strong>de</strong> um novo televisor é '0-0-0-0'. Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o PIN seleccionando Alterar PIN do m<strong>en</strong>u.<br />
Quando as classificações par<strong>en</strong>t<strong>ais</strong> estão <strong>de</strong>finidas, aparece o símbolo “\”.<br />
Perm. Tudo: Carregue para <strong>de</strong>sbloquear as classificações do televisor.<br />
Bloq. Tudo: Carregue para bloquear as classificações do televisor.<br />
• Alterar PIN<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> alterar o seu número <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificação pessoal que lhe é exigido para configurar o televisor.<br />
N Antes <strong>de</strong> aparecer a janela <strong>de</strong> configuração, aparece o ecrã para que introduza o número PIN. Introduza o número PIN<br />
<strong>de</strong> 4 digitos.<br />
N O número PIN pre<strong>de</strong>finido <strong>de</strong> um novo televisor é '0-0-0-0'.<br />
N Caso se esqueça do código PIN, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela sequência seguinte, repondo o PIN para<br />
'0-0-0-0': POWER (Desligado), M MUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Ligado).<br />
❑<br />
Geral<br />
• Modo Jogo<br />
Quando ligar uma consola <strong>de</strong> jogos, como a PlayStation TM ou a Xbox TM , po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>sfrutar <strong>de</strong> uma experiência <strong>de</strong> jogo m<strong>ais</strong><br />
realista seleccionando o m<strong>en</strong>u Jogos.<br />
• Se o Modo Jogo estiver <strong>de</strong>finido para Lig.<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O modo Imagem muda automaticam<strong>en</strong>te para Standard e não po<strong>de</strong> ser alterado.<br />
O modo Som muda automaticam<strong>en</strong>te para Personal. e não po<strong>de</strong> ser alterado. Regule o som utilizando o equalizador.<br />
A opção Reiniciar do m<strong>en</strong>u Som é activada. A função Reiniciar repõe os valores pre<strong>de</strong>finidos do Equalizador.<br />
O Modo Jogo não está disponível no modo TV normal ou está <strong>de</strong>finido para Deslig.<br />
Se, <strong>de</strong>pois <strong>de</strong> ligar o dispositivo externo ao televisor, a imagem não estiver em condições, verifique se Modo Jogo está<br />
<strong>de</strong>finido para Lig.<br />
Se visualizar o m<strong>en</strong>u TV durante o Modo Jogo, o ecrã treme ligeiram<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N<br />
N A marca ( ) aparece no ecrã, o que significa que o Modo Jogo está activado na fonte seleccionada.<br />
N Esta função só suporta a função Jogos.C<br />
• Poupança <strong>en</strong>erg.<br />
Esta função ajusta o brilho do televisor para reduzir o consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia. Quando estiver a ver televisão à noite, <strong>de</strong>fina o<br />
modo Poupança <strong>en</strong>erg. para Alto, <strong>de</strong> forma a reduzir a fadiga ocular, bem como o consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia.<br />
Se seleccionar Imagem Desligada, o ecrã <strong>de</strong>sliga-se e ap<strong>en</strong>as conseguirá ouvir o som. Carregue em qualquer botão para sair<br />
da função Imagem Desligada.<br />
N o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas, a função Imagem Desligada não é suportada.<br />
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Também po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o modo <strong>de</strong> poupança <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia se seleccionar Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas<br />
→ Modo Imagem.<br />
• Melodia → Deslig. / Baixa / Médio / Alto<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> ajustar a melodia que toca quando liga/<strong>de</strong>sliga o televisor.<br />
N A Melodia não toca<br />
- Quando não sai som do televisor porque se carregou no botão MMUTE.<br />
- Quando o televisor não emite som porque se carregou no botão – (Volume).<br />
- Quando o televisor é <strong>de</strong>sligado pela função Temporizador.<br />
Português - 23
Acertar a hora<br />
❑<br />
Relógio<br />
Tem <strong>de</strong> acertar o relógio <strong>de</strong> modo a que possa utilizar as funcionalida<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong><br />
temporizador do televisor.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
A hora actual aparece <strong>de</strong> cada vez que carregar no botão INFO.<br />
Se <strong>de</strong>sligar o cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação, tem <strong>de</strong> acertar novam<strong>en</strong>te o relógio.<br />
• Modo Relógio<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir a hora actual manual ou automaticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Automático: Defina automaticam<strong>en</strong>te a hora actual, utilizando a hora da<br />
transmissão digital.<br />
• Manual: Defina manualm<strong>en</strong>te a hora actual para uma hora específica.<br />
• Ajuste o Relógio<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir manualm<strong>en</strong>te a hora actual.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Configure esta opção quando tiver <strong>de</strong>finido Modo Relógio para Manual.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir directam<strong>en</strong>te o Dia, o Mês, o Ano, a Hora e o Minuto, se<br />
carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.<br />
Temporizador → Deslig. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150<br />
min / 180 min<br />
O temporizador <strong>de</strong>sliga automaticam<strong>en</strong>te o televisor após o tempo pre<strong>de</strong>finido.<br />
N O televisor <strong>de</strong>sliga-se automaticam<strong>en</strong>te para o modo <strong>de</strong> espera quando o<br />
temporizador atinge o 0.<br />
N Para cancelar a função Temporizador, seleccione Deslig..<br />
Configurar<br />
Plug & Play<br />
Idioma do m<strong>en</strong>u : Português<br />
Tempo<br />
►<br />
Transmissão<br />
Segurança<br />
Geral<br />
Tempo<br />
Relógio : -- : -- ►<br />
Temporizador<br />
: Deslig.<br />
Temporizador 1 : Desactivado<br />
Temporizador 2 : Desactivado<br />
Temporizador 3 : Desactivado<br />
U Mover E Enter R Voltar<br />
T<br />
Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o m<strong>en</strong>u Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas.<br />
Também po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir o temporizador se seleccionar Ferram<strong>en</strong>tas →<br />
Temporizador.<br />
❑<br />
Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finir três horas difer<strong>en</strong>tes para ligar / <strong>de</strong>sligar através do temporizador.<br />
• Ligar à hora <strong>de</strong>finida: Defina a hora, o minuto e activar / <strong>de</strong>sactivar.<br />
(Para activar o temporizador com a <strong>de</strong>finição escolhida, seleccione Activar.)<br />
• Desligar à hora <strong>de</strong>finida: Defina a hora, o minuto e activar / <strong>de</strong>sactivar.<br />
(Para activar o temporizador com a <strong>de</strong>finição escolhida, seleccione Activar.)<br />
• Volume: Defina o nível <strong>de</strong> volume pret<strong>en</strong>dido.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>a: Po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar quer DTV ou ATV quando a televisão se liga automaticam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Canal: Seleccione o canal <strong>de</strong>sejado.<br />
• Repetir: Seleccione Uma vez, Diariam<strong>en</strong>te, Seg~Sex, Mon~Sat, Sáb~Dom ou Manual.<br />
N Quando Manual está seleccionado, carregue no botão ► para seleccionar o dia da semana pret<strong>en</strong>dido. Carregue no<br />
botão ENTERE em cima do dia <strong>de</strong>sejado e aparece a marca c.<br />
N Deve acertar o relógio primeiro.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> acertar as horas, os minutos e o canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.<br />
Desligar automaticam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
Quando programar o temporizador para Ligado, o televisor acabará por se <strong>de</strong>sligar se não carregar em n<strong>en</strong>hum comando<br />
durante 3 horas <strong>de</strong>pois do temporizador ter ligado o televisor. Esta função só está disponível no modo Ligado do<br />
temporizador e permite evitar sobreaquecim<strong>en</strong>tos, que possam ocorrer se o televisor permanecer ligado durante muito tempo.<br />
Português - 24
Lista <strong>de</strong> fontes / Editar nome<br />
❑<br />
Lista <strong>de</strong> fontes<br />
Utilize para seleccionar o televisor ou outras fontes <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada externas como<br />
leitores <strong>de</strong> DVD, receptores <strong>de</strong> satélite / Cable Box (Set-Top Box) ligadas ao<br />
televisor. Utilize para seleccionar a sua fonte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada preferida.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>te, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI.<br />
N Po<strong>de</strong> escolher ap<strong>en</strong>as os dispositivos externos que estão ligados ao televisor.<br />
Na Lista <strong>de</strong> fontes, as <strong>en</strong>tradas ligadas são realçadas e mostradas no topo.<br />
As <strong>en</strong>tradas que não estejam ligadas, são mostradas na parte <strong>de</strong> baixo.<br />
N Utilizar os Botões coloridos do telecomando com a Lista <strong>de</strong> fontes<br />
- T TOOLS (Opção): Mostra os m<strong>en</strong>us Editar nome e Informação.<br />
O Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando para visualizar uma fonte <strong>de</strong><br />
sinal externo. O modo TV po<strong>de</strong> ser seleccionado se carregar no botão TV, nos<br />
botões numéricos (0~9) e no botão P < / > do telecomando.<br />
❑<br />
Lista <strong>de</strong> fontes<br />
Editar nome<br />
Editar nome<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> atribuir um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada para facilitar a<br />
selecção da fonte <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trada.<br />
• VCR / DVD / VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC / DVI PC / DVI /<br />
TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N Quando um PC com a resolução <strong>de</strong> PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz está ligado a uma porta<br />
HDMI IN 2 (DVI), <strong>de</strong>ve configurar o modo HDMI2 / DVI para PC em Editar nome do modo Entrada.<br />
Entrada<br />
Português - 25
Visor do PC<br />
• Configurar o software do PC (com base no Windows XP)<br />
As <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> visualização do Windows num computador normal são<br />
apres<strong>en</strong>tadas abaixo. Os ecrãs que aparecem no monitor do PC são<br />
provavelm<strong>en</strong>te difer<strong>en</strong>tes consoante a sua versão do Windows e a sua placa<br />
<strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o. Contudo, mesmo que os ecrãs pareçam difer<strong>en</strong>tes, são aplicadas,<br />
em quase todos os casos, as mesmas informações <strong>de</strong> configuração básicas.<br />
(Se tal não acontecer, contacte o fabricante do computador ou um rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>.)<br />
1. Primeiro, clique em ‘Painel <strong>de</strong> controlo’ no m<strong>en</strong>u <strong>de</strong> Iniciar do Windows.<br />
2. Quando aparece a janela do painel <strong>de</strong> controlo, clique em ‘Aparência e Temas’<br />
e aparece uma janela <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
3. Quando aparece a janela do painel <strong>de</strong> controlo, clique em ‘Visualização’ e<br />
aparece uma janela <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
4. Navegue pelo separador <strong>de</strong> ‘Definições’ na janela <strong>de</strong> diálogo <strong>de</strong> visualização.<br />
A <strong>de</strong>finição <strong>de</strong> tamanho correcta (resolução)<br />
I<strong>de</strong>al : PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixels, PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixels<br />
Se existir uma opção <strong>de</strong> frequência vertical na janela <strong>de</strong> diálogo das <strong>de</strong>finições<br />
da visualização, o valor correcto é <strong>de</strong> ‘60’ ou <strong>de</strong> ‘60 Hz’. Se não for o caso, clique ap<strong>en</strong>as em ‘OK’ e saia da janela <strong>de</strong> diálogo.<br />
Modos <strong>de</strong> visualização<br />
A posição e o tamanho do ecrã variam <strong>de</strong> acordo com o tipo <strong>de</strong> monitor do PC e a respectiva resolução.<br />
Recom<strong>en</strong>dam-se as resoluções apres<strong>en</strong>tadas na tabela.<br />
• Entrada HDMI/DVI<br />
Modo<br />
Resolução<br />
Frequência<br />
horizontal<br />
(kHz)<br />
Frequência<br />
vertical (Hz)<br />
Frequência<br />
do relógio em<br />
pixels (MHz)<br />
Polarida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />
sincronização<br />
(H/V)<br />
PS42B430<br />
PS50B430<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
VESA DMT<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
VESA CVT<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Quando utilizar um cabo <strong>de</strong> ligação HDMI/DVI, <strong>de</strong>ve utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
O modo <strong>en</strong>trelaçado não é suportado.<br />
O aparelho po<strong>de</strong> não funcionar correctam<strong>en</strong>te se seleccionar um formato <strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o que não seja o padrão.<br />
Português - 26
Programa suportado<br />
❑<br />
Auto-diagnóstico<br />
• Teste <strong>de</strong> imagem, Teste <strong>de</strong> som, Informações sobre o sinal<br />
Se acha que tem problemas ao nível da imagem, do som e do sinal, execute o respectivo teste. Po<strong>de</strong> ver o estado do<br />
problema.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Se não ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes do televisor, antes <strong>de</strong> executar um teste <strong>de</strong> som, certifique-se <strong>de</strong> que a opção<br />
Seleccionar Altifalante está <strong>de</strong>finida para Altifalante do tv. no m<strong>en</strong>u Som.<br />
A melodia será ouvida durante o teste mesmo que a opção Seleccionar Altifalante esteja <strong>de</strong>finida para Altifalante<br />
Exter., ou mesmo que o som seja cortado carregando no botão M MUTE.<br />
Se o medidor da int<strong>en</strong>sida<strong>de</strong> do sinal indicar que o sinal é fraco, ajuste fisicam<strong>en</strong>te a ant<strong>en</strong>a para aum<strong>en</strong>tar a int<strong>en</strong>sida<strong>de</strong><br />
do sinal. Continue a ajustar a ant<strong>en</strong>a até <strong>en</strong>contrar a melhor posição com o sinal m<strong>ais</strong> forte.<br />
Actualização do software<br />
Para manter o produto actualizado com novas funções da televisão digital, são transmitidas periodicam<strong>en</strong>te actualizações <strong>de</strong><br />
software como parte do sinal <strong>de</strong> televisão normal. O televisor <strong>de</strong>tecta automaticam<strong>en</strong>te estes sin<strong>ais</strong> e apres<strong>en</strong>ta a faixa <strong>de</strong><br />
actualização do software. Tem a opção <strong>de</strong> instalar ou não a actualização.<br />
• Por USB<br />
Introduza no televisor a unida<strong>de</strong> USB que contém a actualização do firmware. T<strong>en</strong>ha<br />
cuidado para não <strong>de</strong>sligar a corr<strong>en</strong>te ou retirar a unida<strong>de</strong> USB <strong>en</strong>quanto as actualizações<br />
estiverem a ser executadas. O televisor <strong>de</strong>sliga-se e volta a ligar-se automaticam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
após terminar a actualização do firmware. Verifique a versão <strong>de</strong> firmware <strong>de</strong>pois <strong>de</strong><br />
concluídas as actualizações. Quando o software é actualizado, as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> áudio e<br />
<strong>de</strong> ví<strong>de</strong>o que fez voltam às pre<strong>de</strong>finições (<strong>de</strong> fábrica).<br />
• Por um canal<br />
Actualiza o software através do sinal <strong>de</strong> transmissão.<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
Unida<strong>de</strong> USB<br />
Painel<br />
• Actual. no Modo <strong>de</strong> Espera<br />
Para continuar a actualizar o software com o interruptor <strong>de</strong> corr<strong>en</strong>te principal ligado, seleccione On (Lig.) carregando no botão<br />
▲ ou ▼. 45 minutos <strong>de</strong>pois <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>trar no modo <strong>de</strong> espera, uma actualização manual é iniciada automaticam<strong>en</strong>te. Dado que o<br />
aparelho está ligado internam<strong>en</strong>te, o ecrã po<strong>de</strong> ficar aceso durante algum tempo. Este f<strong>en</strong>óm<strong>en</strong>o po<strong>de</strong> persistir durante m<strong>ais</strong><br />
<strong>de</strong> 1 hora até a actualização do software ficar concluída.<br />
• Software Alternativo<br />
Substitui o software actual com o alternativo.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Guia <strong>de</strong> ligação HD<br />
É apres<strong>en</strong>tada uma breve <strong>de</strong>scrição <strong>de</strong> como obter o melhor <strong>de</strong>semp<strong>en</strong>ho do novo televisor HD. Mostramos o método <strong>de</strong><br />
ligação para dispositivos HD.<br />
Contactar a <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Po<strong>de</strong> contactar o c<strong>en</strong>tro <strong>de</strong> at<strong>en</strong>dim<strong>en</strong>to e consultar o website da <strong>Samsung</strong> para obter informações sobre o produto.<br />
N Po<strong>de</strong> passar para a página anterior ou para a página seguinte carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼.<br />
Português - 27
Recom<strong>en</strong>dações <strong>de</strong> utilização<br />
Funcionalida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> teletexto<br />
A maioria das estações <strong>de</strong> televisão fornece serviços <strong>de</strong> informação por escrito através da função <strong>de</strong> Teletexto. A página <strong>de</strong><br />
índice do serviço <strong>de</strong> teletexto fornece informações sobre como utilizar o serviço. Além disso, po<strong>de</strong> seleccionar várias opções <strong>de</strong><br />
acordo com os seus requisitos, utilizando os botões do telecomando.<br />
N Para que as informações <strong>de</strong> teletexto sejam apres<strong>en</strong>tadas correctam<strong>en</strong>te, é preciso que a recepção dos can<strong>ais</strong> se processe<br />
em boas condições. Caso contrário, po<strong>de</strong>m faltar informações ou po<strong>de</strong>m não aparecer algumas páginas.<br />
1 : (sair)<br />
Sair da apres<strong>en</strong>tação <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
<br />
2 6 (índice)<br />
Utiliza-se para ver a página <strong>de</strong> índice (conteúdo) a qualquer mom<strong>en</strong>to em que<br />
está a visualizar o teletexto.<br />
3 5 (mostrar)<br />
Visualizar texto oculto (respostas a jogos <strong>de</strong> perguntas e respostas, por exemplo).<br />
Para ver o ecrã normal, carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te no botão.<br />
4 4 (tamanho)<br />
Visualizar as letras com o dobro do tamanho na meta<strong>de</strong> superior do ecrã. Para<br />
aparecer na meta<strong>de</strong> inferior do ecrã, carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te. Para visualizar o ecrã<br />
normal, carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te no botão.<br />
5 8 (guardar)<br />
Guardar as páginas <strong>de</strong> teletexto.<br />
6 / (activar teletexto/sobrepor)<br />
Activar o modo <strong>de</strong> teletexto <strong>de</strong>pois <strong>de</strong> seleccionar o canal com o serviço <strong>de</strong><br />
teletexto. Carregue duas vezes para sobrepor o ecrã <strong>de</strong> transmissão actual ao<br />
teletexto.<br />
7 1 (página secundária)<br />
Visualizar a página secundária disponível.<br />
8 2 (página para cima)<br />
Utiliza-se para ver a próxima página do teletexto.<br />
9 3 (página para baixo)<br />
Utiliza-se para ver a página anterior do teletexto.<br />
0 0 (modo)<br />
Seleccionar o modo <strong>de</strong> teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Se carregar no modo LIST, muda<br />
para o modo <strong>de</strong> Lista <strong>de</strong> memorização. No modo <strong>de</strong> Lista <strong>de</strong> memorização, po<strong>de</strong><br />
guardar a página <strong>de</strong> teletexto na lista utilizando o botão 8(guardar).<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
! 9 (modo <strong>de</strong> espera)<br />
Para manter o ecrã numa <strong>de</strong>terminada página, se a página seleccionada<br />
estiver ligada a várias páginas secundárias que aparecem automaticam<strong>en</strong>te em<br />
sequência. Para continuar, carregue novam<strong>en</strong>te neste botão.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (cancelar)<br />
Utiliza-se para ver a emissão <strong>en</strong>quanto procura uma página.<br />
# Botões coloridos (vermelho/ver<strong>de</strong>/amarelo/azul)<br />
N<br />
Se a estação emissora utilizar o sistema FASTEXT, os difer<strong>en</strong>tes tópicos<br />
apres<strong>en</strong>tados na página <strong>de</strong> teletexto aparecem codificados com cores. Para<br />
os seleccionar, carregue nos botões coloridos. Carregue num <strong>de</strong>sses botões,<br />
<strong>de</strong> acordo com o que pret<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>. A página inclui outras informações a cores que<br />
po<strong>de</strong>m ser seleccionadas da mesma maneira. Para visualizar a página anterior ou<br />
a página seguinte, carregue no botão colorido correspon<strong>de</strong>nte.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> alterar páginas <strong>de</strong> teletexto com os botões numéricos do telecomando.<br />
Português - 28
As páginas do teletexto estão divididas em seis categorias:<br />
N<br />
Parte<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
Conteúdo<br />
Número da página seleccionada.<br />
Nome da estação emissora.<br />
Número da página actual ou indicações da procura.<br />
Data e hora.<br />
Texto.<br />
Informações sobre o estado.<br />
Informações FASTEXT.<br />
As informações <strong>de</strong> teletexto são muitas vezes divididas em várias páginas<br />
mostradas em sequência e às qu<strong>ais</strong> po<strong>de</strong> ace<strong>de</strong>r:<br />
- Introduzindo o número da página<br />
- Seleccionando um título numa lista<br />
- Seleccionando um título a cores (sistema FASTEXT)<br />
<br />
O<br />
Carregue no botão TV para sair do teletexto.<br />
Especificações do kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> (VESA)<br />
Instale o kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> numa pare<strong>de</strong> sólida perp<strong>en</strong>dicular ao chão.<br />
Se montar noutros materi<strong>ais</strong>, contacte o rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor m<strong>ais</strong> próximo.<br />
Se instalar no tecto ou numa pare<strong>de</strong> inclinada, po<strong>de</strong> cair e causar ferim<strong>en</strong>tos graves.<br />
Família <strong>de</strong><br />
produtos<br />
Televisor LCD<br />
Televisor plasma<br />
polegadas Espec. VESA (A * B) Parafuso normal Quantida<strong>de</strong><br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
M4<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
4<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
M8<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
M8 4<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Fornecemos as medidas standard para kits <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> como se mostra na tabela acima.<br />
Na aquisição do nosso kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong>, são fornecidos um manual <strong>de</strong> instalação <strong>de</strong>talhada e todas as peças<br />
necessárias para a montagem.<br />
Não utilize parafusos com medida superior à standard porque po<strong>de</strong>m danificar o interior do televisor.<br />
Para os kits <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> não conformes às especificações <strong>de</strong> parafusos da norma VESA, o comprim<strong>en</strong>to dos<br />
parafusos po<strong>de</strong> ser difer<strong>en</strong>te, <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>do das respectivas especificações.<br />
Não utilize parafusos não conformes às especificações <strong>de</strong> parafusos da norma VESA. Não aperte <strong>de</strong>masiado os parafusos,<br />
pois po<strong>de</strong> danificar o produto ou fazê-lo cair, causando ferim<strong>en</strong>tos pesso<strong>ais</strong>. A <strong>Samsung</strong> não se responsabiliza por este tipo<br />
<strong>de</strong> aci<strong>de</strong>ntes.<br />
A <strong>Samsung</strong> não se responsabiliza por danos nos produtos ou por ferim<strong>en</strong>tos pesso<strong>ais</strong> se for utilizado um kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na<br />
pare<strong>de</strong> não conforme à VESA ou não especificado ou se o consumidor não seguir as instruções <strong>de</strong> instalação do produto.<br />
Os nossos mo<strong>de</strong>los <strong>de</strong> 57 e 63 não estão em conformida<strong>de</strong> com as especificações da VESA. Deste modo, <strong>de</strong>ve utilizar o<br />
nosso kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>dicado a este mo<strong>de</strong>lo.<br />
Não exceda uma inclinação superior a 15 graus quando montar este televisor.<br />
Não instale o Kit <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong> com o televisor ligado.<br />
Po<strong>de</strong> resultar em ferim<strong>en</strong>tos pesso<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>vido a choques eléctricos.<br />
Português - 29
Preparação antes da instalação da Montagem na Pare<strong>de</strong> na pare<strong>de</strong><br />
Caso A. Instalar a Montagem na Pare<strong>de</strong> da <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Caso B. Instalar a Montagem na Pare<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> outra empresa<br />
경고<br />
1. Instale a Montagem na Pare<strong>de</strong> com um intervalo <strong>de</strong> torque <strong>de</strong> 15 kg/cm ou inferior. As peças po<strong>de</strong>m danificar-se se o torque<br />
não tiver o intervalo especificado.<br />
2. O Kit <strong>de</strong> Acessórios inclui um Anel <strong>de</strong> Suporte [2] para a instalação <strong>de</strong> uma Montagem na Pare<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> outra empresa para o<br />
televisor <strong>Samsung</strong>. (Caso B)<br />
N Introduza os parafusos no respectivo orifício [1] quando instalar o suporte <strong>de</strong> montagem na pare<strong>de</strong>.<br />
주의<br />
Fixar o televisor à pare<strong>de</strong><br />
경고<br />
Puxar, empurrar, ou subir para cima do televisor po<strong>de</strong> provocar a queda do mesmo. Em especial, certifique-se <strong>de</strong> que<br />
as crianças não se p<strong>en</strong>duram ou <strong>de</strong>sestabilizam o televisor, o que po<strong>de</strong>ria provocar a queda do mesmo e resultar em<br />
주의 aci<strong>de</strong>ntes graves ou morte. Siga todas as precauções <strong>de</strong> segurança fornecidas no Folheto <strong>de</strong> Segurança incluído.<br />
Para estabilida<strong>de</strong> adicional, instale o dispositivo anti-queda por razões <strong>de</strong> segurança, como <strong>de</strong>scrito em seguida.<br />
Pare<strong>de</strong><br />
Pare<strong>de</strong><br />
❑<br />
Para evitar a queda do televisor<br />
1. Introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse-os com firmeza à pare<strong>de</strong>. Verifique se os parafusos foram aparafusados<br />
com firmeza à pare<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N Po<strong>de</strong> necessitar <strong>de</strong> material adicional, tal como um suporte, consoante o tipo <strong>de</strong> pare<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N Uma vez que os grampos, parafusos e cordão não são fornecidos, adquira-os em separado.<br />
2. Retire os parafusos da parte c<strong>en</strong>tral traseira do televisor, introduza os parafusos nos grampos, <strong>de</strong>pois aparafuse os parafusos<br />
ao televisor novam<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
N Os parafusos po<strong>de</strong>m não ser fornecidos com o produto.<br />
3. Ligue os grampos fixados ao televisor e os grampos fixados à pare<strong>de</strong> com um cordão forte, <strong>de</strong>pois aperte muito bem o<br />
cordão.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Instale o televisor perto da pare<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> forma a não cair para trás.<br />
É m<strong>ais</strong> seguro ligar o cordão <strong>de</strong> modo a que os grampos fixados à pare<strong>de</strong> estejam ao mesmo nível ou abaixo dos grampos<br />
fixados ao televisor.<br />
Desaperte o cordão antes <strong>de</strong> transportar o televisor.<br />
4. Verifique se todas as ligações estão <strong>de</strong>vidam<strong>en</strong>te presas. Verifique regularm<strong>en</strong>te as ligações para evitar qualquer sinal <strong>de</strong><br />
gasto ou falha. Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre a segurança das suas ligações, contacte um instalador profissional.<br />
Português - 30
Resolução <strong>de</strong> problemas<br />
Antes <strong>de</strong> contactar o serviço <strong>de</strong> assistência ao cli<strong>en</strong>te da <strong>Samsung</strong>, faça estas verificações simples.<br />
Se não conseguir resolver o problema utilizando as instruções referidas abaixo, anote o número <strong>de</strong> série e o do mo<strong>de</strong>lo do<br />
televisor e contacte o rev<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>dor.<br />
Não há som nem imagem<br />
A imagem está normal mas não se<br />
ouve o som<br />
Não há imagem ou a imagem está<br />
a preto e branco<br />
Interferências no som e na<br />
imagem<br />
A imagem está esbatida ou tem<br />
chuva, o som tem distorções<br />
O telecomando não funciona<br />
O ecrã está preto e o indicador<br />
luminoso <strong>de</strong> corr<strong>en</strong>te está a<br />
piscar<br />
A imagem danificada aparece no<br />
canto do ecrã<br />
Aparece a m<strong>en</strong>sagem ‘Resets all<br />
settings to the <strong>de</strong>fault values’.<br />
Manter um espaço <strong>de</strong> instalação seguro<br />
• Verifique se o cabo <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação está ligado a uma tomada <strong>de</strong> pare<strong>de</strong>.<br />
• Verifique se carregou no botão do seu equipam<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
• Verifique as programações <strong>de</strong> contraste e brilho da imagem.<br />
• Verifique o volume.<br />
• Verifique se o Altifalante Seleccionar está <strong>de</strong>finido para Altifalante Exter..<br />
• Verifique o volume.<br />
• Verifique se o botão M MUTE do telecomando foi carregado.<br />
• Ajuste as <strong>de</strong>finições <strong>de</strong> cor.<br />
• Verifique se o sistema <strong>de</strong> emissão seleccionado está correcto.<br />
• T<strong>en</strong>te i<strong>de</strong>ntificar o aparelho eléctrico que está a provocar interferências no<br />
equipam<strong>en</strong>to e afaste-o.<br />
• Ligue o televisor a uma tomada difer<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
• Verifique a direcção, localização e ligações da ant<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
• Estas interferências ocorrem normalm<strong>en</strong>te <strong>de</strong>vido à utilização <strong>de</strong> uma ant<strong>en</strong>a interna.<br />
• Substitua as pilhas do telecomando.<br />
• Limpe a parte superior do telecomando (janela <strong>de</strong> transmissão).<br />
• Verifique se os termin<strong>ais</strong> + e - das pilhas estão correctam<strong>en</strong>te ori<strong>en</strong>tados.<br />
• Verifique se as pilhas estão gastas.<br />
• No computador, verifique: corr<strong>en</strong>te, cabo <strong>de</strong> sinal.<br />
• Mova o rato do computador ou carregue numa tecla do teclado.<br />
• No equipam<strong>en</strong>to, verifique: (STB, DVD, etc), corr<strong>en</strong>te, cabo <strong>de</strong> sinal.<br />
• O televisor está a utilizar o sistema <strong>de</strong> gestão <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia.<br />
• Carregue no botão Source no painel ou no telecomando.<br />
• Desligue e volte a ligar o televisor.<br />
• Se Ajustar ao ecrãa estiver seleccionado em algum dispositivo externo, a imagem<br />
danificada po<strong>de</strong> aparecer no canto do ecrã. O sintoma é causado por dispositivos<br />
externos, não pelo televisor.<br />
• Esta m<strong>en</strong>sagem aparece quando carrega no botão EXIT <strong>de</strong> modo contínuo durante<br />
algum tempo. Os valores pre<strong>de</strong>finidos do produto são repostos.<br />
Mant<strong>en</strong>ha as distâncias recom<strong>en</strong>dadas, <strong>en</strong>tre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma pare<strong>de</strong>) para garantir a v<strong>en</strong>tilação<br />
a<strong>de</strong>quada. Caso contrário, po<strong>de</strong> provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto <strong>de</strong>vido ao aum<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> temperatura no interior do<br />
mesmo. Instale o produto <strong>de</strong> modo a que as distâncias recom<strong>en</strong>dadas, assinaladas na figura seguinte, sejam respeitadas.<br />
N Se utilizar uma base ou suporte para montagem na pare<strong>de</strong>, utilize ap<strong>en</strong>as as peças fornecidas pela <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics.<br />
- O facto <strong>de</strong> utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, po<strong>de</strong> resultar em danos materi<strong>ais</strong> ou ferim<strong>en</strong>tos graves em caso<br />
<strong>de</strong> queda do produto.<br />
- O facto <strong>de</strong> utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, po<strong>de</strong> resultar em danos materi<strong>ais</strong> ou provocar um incêndio<br />
<strong>de</strong>vido ao aum<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong> temperatura no interior do produto por v<strong>en</strong>tilação ina<strong>de</strong>quada.<br />
N O aspecto exterior po<strong>de</strong> ser difer<strong>en</strong>te, <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>ndo do produto.<br />
• Se instalar o produto com uma base<br />
• Se instalar o produto com um suporte para<br />
montagem na pare<strong>de</strong><br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Português - 31
Características Técnicas<br />
As <strong>de</strong>scrições e características incluídas neste folheto <strong>de</strong>stinam-se ap<strong>en</strong>as a fins informativos e estão sujeitas a alterações sem<br />
aviso prévio.<br />
Nome do mo<strong>de</strong>lo PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Tamanho do Ecrã (Diagonal) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
Resolução <strong>de</strong> PC (I<strong>de</strong>al) 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360x768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Som (Saída) 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>sões (WxHxD)<br />
Televisor ap<strong>en</strong>as<br />
Com base<br />
Peso<br />
Televisor ap<strong>en</strong>as<br />
Com base<br />
Características ambi<strong>en</strong>t<strong>ais</strong><br />
Temperatura <strong>de</strong> funcionam<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Humida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> funcionam<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Temperatura <strong>de</strong> armaz<strong>en</strong>am<strong>en</strong>to<br />
Humida<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> armaz<strong>en</strong>am<strong>en</strong>to<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, sem con<strong>de</strong>nsação<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, sem con<strong>de</strong>nsação<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Trata-se <strong>de</strong> um aparelho digital <strong>de</strong> Classe B.<br />
Design e características técnicas sujeitos a alterações sem aviso prévio.<br />
Para informações sobre a fonte <strong>de</strong> alim<strong>en</strong>tação e o consumo <strong>de</strong> <strong>en</strong>ergia, veja a etiqueta colada ao produto.<br />
Quando utilizar um cabo <strong>de</strong> ligação HDMI/DVI, <strong>de</strong>ve utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
Português - 32
Navodila za uporabnike<br />
• Zadrževanje slike na zaslonu<br />
Na plazma televizorju ne prikazujte dolgo mirujoče slike (kot je vi<strong>de</strong>o igra ali zaslon pri priključitvi računalnika), saj lahko<br />
to povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu. Tako zadrževanje slike se im<strong>en</strong>uje tudi »ožig zaslona«. Da bi se izognili takemu<br />
zadrževanju slike, pri prikazovanju mirujoče slike zmanjšajte stopnjo svetlosti in kontrasta zaslona.<br />
• Višina<br />
Zaslon PDP lahko normalno <strong>de</strong>luje na nadmorski višini pod 2000 m. Ne uporabljajte ga na nadmorskih višinah nad 2000 m,<br />
ker lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do mot<strong>en</strong>j v <strong>de</strong>lovanju.<br />
• Segrevanje zgornjega <strong>de</strong>la PDP-TV<br />
Zgornji <strong>de</strong>l iz<strong>de</strong>lka se lahko pri dolgotrajni uporabi zelo segreje, ker se toplota iz iz<strong>de</strong>lka odvaja skozi odprtino v zgornjem <strong>de</strong>lu.<br />
To je običajno in ni posledica okvare ali napake na iz<strong>de</strong>lku. Vse<strong>en</strong>o pa morate otrokom preprečiti dotikanje zgornjega <strong>de</strong>la<br />
iz<strong>de</strong>lka.<br />
• Iz<strong>de</strong>lek prasketa<br />
Televizor se pri prilagajanju okolju (na primer temperaturi in vlažnosti zraka) lahko razširja ali krči in ob tem prasketa. To je<br />
običajno in ni posledica napake na iz<strong>de</strong>lku.<br />
• Poškodovane pike<br />
Na zaslonu PDP je od 2.360.000 (HD slika) do 6.221.000 (FHD-slika) pik, ki so iz<strong>de</strong>lane z zelo napredno tehnologijo. Kljub<br />
temu je lahko na zaslonu nekaj svetlih ali temnih slikovnih pik. Te svetlobne pike ne bodo vplivale na <strong>de</strong>lovanje iz<strong>de</strong>lka.<br />
• Televizorja ne uporabljajte pri temperaturah pod 5°C(41°F)<br />
• Če je na PDP-zaslonu predolgo prikazana mirujoča slika, ga to lahko trajno poškoduje.<br />
Dolgotrajno gledanje PDP-TV v formatu slike 4:3 lahko povzroči sledi okvirja take slike na levi in <strong>de</strong>sni<br />
strani ter na sredini zaslona. To se zgodi zaradi razlike v oddajanju svetlobe na različnih <strong>de</strong>lih zaslona.<br />
Predvajanje DVD-ja ali uporaba igralne konzole lahko povzroči podobne učinke. Garancija ne vključuje<br />
poškodb, ki so nastale na tak način.<br />
• Zakasnela slika na zaslonu.<br />
Če je na zaslonu dolgo časa prikazana mirujoča računalniška slika ali slika iz vi<strong>de</strong>o iger, lahko to povzroči <strong>de</strong>lni prikaz<br />
zakasnele slike na zaslonu. Ta učinek preprečite tako, da pri prikazu mirujočih slih zmanjšate svetlost in kontrast.<br />
• Garancija<br />
- Garancija ne vključuje ško<strong>de</strong>, ki jo povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu.<br />
- Garancija ne vključuje poškodb zaradi vžgane slike.<br />
• Namestitev<br />
Pri namestitvi iz<strong>de</strong>lka v okolju z veliko prahu, visoko ali nizko temperaturo, visoko vlažnostjo, kemičnimi snovmi ali v okoljih,<br />
kjer neprestano <strong>de</strong>luje (na primer letališče, železniška postaja), se obrnite na pooblašč<strong>en</strong>i servisni c<strong>en</strong>ter. Če tega ne storite,<br />
lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do resne poškodbe naprave.<br />
Obvestilo o digitalni televiziji<br />
1. Funkcije, ki so povezane z digitalnim televizijskim signalom (DVB), so na voljo samo v državah/na območjih, kjer se<br />
oddajajo digitalni prizemni signali (MPEG2 IN MPEG4 AVC), ali kjer je mogoč dostop do združljive storitve kabelske<br />
televizije DVB-C (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AAC). Pri lokalnem trgovcu preverite, ali imate dostop do signala DVB-T ali<br />
DVB-C.<br />
2. Čeprav je TV v skladu z najnovejšimi standardi DVB-T [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti združljivosti s prihodnjimi<br />
sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije. V tej specifikaciji pa niso vključ<strong>en</strong>e nekatere funkcije, kot so EPG (elektronski<br />
programski vodnik), VOD (vi<strong>de</strong>o na zahtevo) itd. Torej za<strong>en</strong>krat še niso podprte.<br />
3. Čeprav je televizor v skladu z najnovejšima standardoma DVB-T in DVB-C [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti<br />
združljivosti s prihodnjimi sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije in digitalne kabelske televizij.<br />
4. Nekateri ponudniki kabelske televizije morda takšno storitev dodatno zaračunavajo in se boste zato morda morali<br />
strinjati z določbami in pogoji njihovega poslovanja.<br />
5. V nekaterih državah ali regijah nekatere funkcije digitalne televizije morda niso na voljo in digitalna kabelska televizija<br />
morda ne bo <strong>de</strong>lovala pravilno pri vseh ponudnikih.<br />
6. Za dodatne informacije se obrnite na lokalni <strong>Samsung</strong>ov c<strong>en</strong>ter za pomoč strankam.<br />
SAMSUNGOVA ZASTOPNIŠTVA PO SVETU<br />
Če imate kakršnokoli vprašanje ali kom<strong>en</strong>tar gle<strong>de</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong>ovih iz<strong>de</strong>lkov, se obrnite na SAMSUNGOV c<strong>en</strong>ter za pomoč<br />
strankam. (Za več informacij si oglejte hrbtno platnico.)<br />
© 2008 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Co., Ltd. Ltd. All rights All rights reserved. reserved.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Vsebina<br />
Priključitev in Priprava TV-ja<br />
■ Pregled <strong>de</strong>lov.......................................................................4<br />
■ Uporaba stojala....................................................................4<br />
■ Navodila za sestavljanj stojala (odvisno od mo<strong>de</strong>la)...........4<br />
■ Ogled nadzorne plošče........................................................5<br />
■ Priključitv<strong>en</strong>a plošča............................................................6<br />
■ Oddalj<strong>en</strong>i nadzor..................................................................8<br />
■ Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik.............................9<br />
■ Vklop in izklop......................................................................9<br />
■ Preklop TV-ja v stanje pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti...................................9<br />
■ Ogled m<strong>en</strong>ijev....................................................................10<br />
■ Uporaba gumba TOOLS....................................................10<br />
■ Ogled prikaza.....................................................................10<br />
■ Funkcija Plug & Play (Vstavi in pož<strong>en</strong>i).............................11<br />
Upravljanje Kanalov<br />
■ Shranjevanje kanalov ........................................................12<br />
■ Upravljanje kanalov............................................................15<br />
Opis Funkcij<br />
■ Konfiguriranje m<strong>en</strong>ija Setup...............................................22<br />
■ Nastavitev časa..................................................................24<br />
■ Source List/Edit Name.......................................................25<br />
■ Računalniški zaslon...........................................................26<br />
■ Načini zaslona....................................................................26<br />
■ Podprti program.................................................................27<br />
Priporočila Gle<strong>de</strong> Uporabe<br />
■ Funkcija teleteksta.............................................................28<br />
■ Specifikacije kompleta za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o (VESA)........29<br />
■ Priprava na namestitev opreme za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o.......30<br />
■ Pritrditev televizorja na st<strong>en</strong>o.............................................30<br />
■ Odpravljanje težav.............................................................31<br />
■ Zaščita prostora za namestitev..........................................31<br />
■ Specifikacije.......................................................................32<br />
Upravljanje Slike<br />
■ Spreminjanje in ponastavljanje slikovnih nastavitev..........17<br />
Nadzor Zvoka<br />
■ Sprememba zvočnega standarda......................................20<br />
■ Izbira zvočnega načina......................................................21<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina<br />
N O T<br />
Simbol Pritisnite Opomba Gumb na dotik TOOLS<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Priključitev in priprava TV-ja<br />
Pregled <strong>de</strong>lov<br />
Uporabniška navodila<br />
Daljinski upravljalnik/<br />
baterije AAA (2ea)<br />
Napajalni kabelc Čistilna krpica Garancijska kartica/<br />
Varnostni priročnik (ni na<br />
voljo na vseh lokacijah)<br />
Screw (4ea) Spodnji pokrov Držalni obroč (4ea)<br />
(oglejte si 30 stran)<br />
Feritni obroč za<br />
napajalni kabel (1ea)<br />
N<br />
Feritni obroč ščiti kable pred motnjami. Ko želite povezati kabel, odprite feritni obroč in<br />
ga namestite okoli kabla v bližini vtiča.<br />
Uporaba stojala<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Priporočljivo je, da PDP nosi več oseb. PDP nikoli ne postavite tako, da<br />
je zaslon obrnj<strong>en</strong> navzdol, ker lahko tako poškodujete zaslon. PDP naj bo<br />
vedno pokonci<br />
PDP je mogoče obračati v levo ali v <strong>de</strong>sno pod kotom 20 stopinj.<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Navodila za sestavljanj stojala (odvisno od mo<strong>de</strong>la)<br />
S šestimi vijaki za pritrditev stojala in TV, trdno spojite TV s stojalom.<br />
(Zunanjost televizorja je morda drugačna kot na sliki.)<br />
Pri namestitvi televizorja na st<strong>en</strong>o zaprite pokrov (1)<br />
na <strong>de</strong>lu za pritrditev stojala.<br />
Opozorilo<br />
Stojalo mora biti dobro pritrj<strong>en</strong>o na<br />
televizor, pre<strong>de</strong>n ga premaknete, ker<br />
lahko pa<strong>de</strong> in povzroči resno poškodbo.<br />
N Priporočljivo je, da več oseb nosi<br />
zaslon PDP. Televizorja nikoli ne<br />
postavite tako, da je zaslon obrnj<strong>en</strong><br />
navzdol, ker lahko tako poškodujete<br />
zaslon.<br />
Vedno ga shranite v pokončnem<br />
položaju.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Ogled nadzorne plošče<br />
N<br />
The product colour and shape may vary <strong>de</strong>p<strong>en</strong>ding on the mo<strong>de</strong>l.<br />
Gumbi na sprednji plošči<br />
Za upravljanje pritiskajte<br />
posamezne gumbe.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Preklapljanje med vsemi razpoložljivimi vhodnimi viri<br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N<br />
Na m<strong>en</strong>iju na zaslonu ta gumb uporabljajte kot gumb<br />
ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
2 MENU<br />
Pritisnite za ogled m<strong>en</strong>ija na zaslonu s funkcijami<br />
televizorja.<br />
3 + –<br />
Pritisniteza povečanjeali zmanjšanje glasnosti.<br />
V m<strong>en</strong>iju na zaslonu uporabite gumba + – na <strong>en</strong>ak<br />
način, kot uporabljate gumba ◄ in ► na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku.<br />
4 CH<br />
Pritisnite za m<strong>en</strong>javo kanala. V m<strong>en</strong>iju na zaslonu uporabite<br />
gumba CH na <strong>en</strong>ak način, kot uporabljate gumba<br />
▲ in▼ na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
5 INDIKATOR NAPAJANJA<br />
Utripa in se ugasne, ko je napajanje vkloplj<strong>en</strong>o, in zasveti v<br />
stanju pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti.<br />
6 (POWER)<br />
Pritisnite za vklop in izklop televizorja.<br />
7 SENZOR DALJINSKEGA UPRAVLJALNIKA<br />
Daljinski upravljalnik usmerite proti tej točki na televizorju.<br />
8 ZVOČNIK<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Priključitv<strong>en</strong>a plošča<br />
Hrbtna plošča<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
8<br />
ali<br />
Televizijsko kabelsko<br />
omrežje<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
ali<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
Barva in oblika iz<strong>de</strong>lka sta odvisni od mo<strong>de</strong>la.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Kadar na televizor priključujete avdio ali vi<strong>de</strong>o sistem, poskrbite, da so vsi elem<strong>en</strong>ti izključ<strong>en</strong>i.<br />
Ko priključujete zunanjo napravo, mora biti barva priključka <strong>en</strong>aka barvi kabla.<br />
1 POWER IN<br />
Priključite prilož<strong>en</strong>i napajalni kabel.<br />
2 SERVICE 1,2<br />
Spojnik za servis.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Avdio (AUDIO L/R) in vi<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR) vhodi za<br />
kompon<strong>en</strong>te.<br />
4 EXT(RGB)<br />
Vhodi oziroma izhodi za zunanje naprave, na primer<br />
vi<strong>de</strong>orekor<strong>de</strong>r, DVD-predvajalnik, vi<strong>de</strong>o igralna naprava ali<br />
predvajalnik vi<strong>de</strong>o plošč.<br />
Specifikacije za vhod/izhod<br />
Spojnik<br />
Vhod<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Avdio(L/R (L/D)) RGB<br />
EXT ✔ ✔ ✔<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Povežite z digitalno avdio kompon<strong>en</strong>to.<br />
Izhod<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o + Avdio (L/R (L/D))<br />
Na voljo je le TV- ali<br />
DTV-izhod.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
Zvočni signal RCA iz televizorja priklopite na zunanji vir, na<br />
primer avdio sistem.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1, 2 (DVI)<br />
Ta povezavo HDMI s HDMI ne potrebujete dodatne avdio<br />
povezave.<br />
- Ko uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, morate uporabiti vtič<br />
HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
N Kaj je HDMI?<br />
- High Definition Multimedia interface omogoča<br />
pr<strong>en</strong>os digitalnih vi<strong>de</strong>o podatkov z visoko razločljivostjo<br />
in več kanalov digitalnega avdia<br />
- Spojnik HDMI/DVI podpira DVI-povezavo do razširj<strong>en</strong>e<br />
naprave z ustreznim kablom (ni prilož<strong>en</strong>o). HDMI in<br />
DVI se razlikujeta po tem, da je naprava HDMI manjša,<br />
da ima vgraj<strong>en</strong>o funkcijo kodiranja HDCP (zaščita pred<br />
kopiranjem za širokopasovno digitalno vsebino) in da<br />
podpira večkanalni digitalni avdio.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
Avdio izhodi DVI za zunanje naprave.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
Koaksialni spojnik z uporom 75 Ω za ant<strong>en</strong>o/kabelsko<br />
omrežje.<br />
Podprti načini za HDMI/DVI in kompon<strong>en</strong>tno<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Kompon<strong>en</strong>tno O O O O O O O<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Stranska plošča<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
Barva in oblika iz<strong>de</strong>lka sta odvisni od mo<strong>de</strong>la.<br />
1 COMMON INTERFACE Slot<br />
Vrežo vstavite kartico splošnega vmesnika.<br />
(oglejte si stran 23)<br />
− Če pri nekaterih kanalih ni vstavlj<strong>en</strong>a CI CARD, se na<br />
zaslonu prikaže sporočilo Scramble Signal.<br />
− V 2-3 minutah se prikažejo informacije o združitvi s<br />
telefonsko številko, ID-jem kartice za splošni vmesnik,<br />
ID-jem gostitelja ter drugimi informacijami. Če se prikaže<br />
sporočilo o napaki, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev.<br />
− Ko je konfiguracijainformacij o kanalih dokončana, se<br />
prikaže sporočilo Updating Completed, kar pom<strong>en</strong>i, da je<br />
seznam kanalov zdaj posodoblj<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N CI-kartico vstavite v smeri, kot je označ<strong>en</strong>a na njej.<br />
N CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri<br />
pooblašč<strong>en</strong>em prodajalcu.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o in avdio vhodi za zunanje naprave, kot sta<br />
vi<strong>de</strong>okamera ali vi<strong>de</strong>orekor<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Oddalj<strong>en</strong>i nadzor<br />
Daljinski upravljalnik lahko uporabljate do oddalj<strong>en</strong>osti približno 7 m od televizorja.<br />
N Na <strong>de</strong>lovanje daljinskega upravljalnika lahko vpliva močna svetloba.<br />
1 Gumb POWER<br />
(vklop in izklop televizorja)<br />
2 Neposredna izbira načina TV<br />
3 Številski gumbi za neposre<strong>de</strong>n<br />
dostop do kanalov<br />
4 Za prikaz seznama priljublj<strong>en</strong>ih<br />
kanalov.<br />
5 Začas<strong>en</strong> izklop zvoka<br />
6 Zvišanje glasnosti<br />
Znižanje glasnosti<br />
7 Izbira razpoložljivih virov<br />
8 Za ogled informacij o tr<strong>en</strong>utnem<br />
programu<br />
9 Za hitro izbiro pogosto uporablj<strong>en</strong>ih<br />
funkcij.<br />
0 Nadzor kazalke v m<strong>en</strong>iju<br />
! Za prikaz seznamov kanalov na<br />
zaslonu.<br />
@ Te gumbe uporabite pri seznamu<br />
kanalov, itd.<br />
$ Prejšnji kanal<br />
% Naslednji kanal<br />
Prejšnji kanal<br />
^ Prikaz glavnega m<strong>en</strong>ija na zaslonu<br />
& Prikaz elektronskega programskega<br />
vodiča (EPG)<br />
* Vrnitev na prejšnji m<strong>en</strong>i<br />
( Izhod iz m<strong>en</strong>ija na zaslonu<br />
) Izbira zvočnega opisa.<br />
a Prikaz digitalnih podnapisov<br />
Funkcije teleteksta<br />
2 Izhod iz teleteksta<br />
(odvisno od mo<strong>de</strong>la)<br />
7 Izbira načina teleteksta (LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Prikaz teleteksta<br />
9 Izbira velikosti teleteksta<br />
! Shranjevanje teleteksta<br />
@ Izbira teme Fastext<br />
# Prikaz teleteksta/hkrat<strong>en</strong> prikaz<br />
teleteksta in televizijskega programa<br />
$ Podstran teleteksta<br />
% P : Naslednja stran teleteksta<br />
P : Prejšnja stran teleteksta<br />
^ Kazalo teleteksta<br />
* Zadržanje strani teleteksta<br />
( Preklic teleteksta<br />
<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik<br />
1. Odprite pokrovček na hrbtni strani daljinskega upravljalnika, kot je prikazano na<br />
sliki.<br />
2. Vstavite dve bateriji AAA.<br />
N Zagotovite, da sta '+' in '–' pola baterije usmerj<strong>en</strong>a skladno s prikazom<br />
znotraj ležišča za baterije.<br />
3. Zaprite pokrov.<br />
N Če daljinskega upravljalnika dalj časa ne boste uporabljali, odstranite<br />
baterije in jih shranite na hladnem in suhem mestu.<br />
N<br />
Če daljinski upravljalnik ne <strong>de</strong>luje! Preverite naslednje:<br />
1. Je televizor vkloplj<strong>en</strong>?<br />
2. Sta plus in minus pola baterije zam<strong>en</strong>jana?<br />
3. So baterije prazne?<br />
4. Je prišlo do izpada napajanja oziroma je napajalni kabel izključ<strong>en</strong>?<br />
5. Je v bližini posebna fluoresc<strong>en</strong>tna luč ali neonska tabla?<br />
Vklop in izklop<br />
Kabel za napajanje se nahaja na hrbtni strani TV-ja.<br />
1. Napajalni kabel vključite v ustrezno vtičnico.<br />
N Indikator stanja pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti na TV-ju začne svetiti.<br />
2. Pritisnite gumb POWER P na TV-ju.<br />
N TV lahko vklopite tudi s pritiskom gumba POWER P ali TV na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
Nazadnje gledan program je znova samo<strong>de</strong>jno izbran.<br />
3. Pritisnite številski gumb (0~9) ali gumb za kanal navzgor/navzdol (< / >) na daljinskem upravljalniku ali pa gumb<br />
na TV-ju.<br />
N Ob prvem vklopu TV-ja boste pozvani, da izberete jezik, v katerem naj bodo prikazani m<strong>en</strong>iji.<br />
4. Za izklop TV-ja ponovno pritisnite gumb POWER P.<br />
Preklop TV-ja v stanje pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti<br />
TV lahko preklopite v stanje pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti in s tem zmanjšate porabo <strong>en</strong>ergije. Stanje pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti je uporabno, če želite<br />
začasno prekiniti gledanje (na primer med jedjo).<br />
1. Pritisnite gumb POWER P na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
N Zaslon se izklopi in na TV-ju začne svetiti r<strong>de</strong>či indikator stanja pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti.<br />
2. Za ponov<strong>en</strong> vklop TV-ja <strong>en</strong>ostavno ponovno pritisnite gumb POWER P, številske gumbe (0~9), gumb TV ali gumb za kanal<br />
navzgor/navzdol (< / >).<br />
N TV-ja ne puščajte v stanju pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti dlje časa (na primer, ko greste na dopust). Priporočamo tudi, da izključite<br />
napajanje in ant<strong>en</strong>o.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina -
Ogled m<strong>en</strong>ijev<br />
<br />
1. Ko je vkloplj<strong>en</strong>o napajanje, pritisnite gumb MENU. Na zaslonu se prikaže glavni<br />
m<strong>en</strong>i. Na levi strani m<strong>en</strong>ija so ikone: Slika, Zvok, Kanal, Nastavitev, Vhod in,<br />
Support.<br />
2. Za izbiro <strong>en</strong>e od ikon pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼ Za dostop do podm<strong>en</strong>ija ikone<br />
pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
3. Za izhod pritisnite gumb EXIT.<br />
N M<strong>en</strong>iji na zaslonu izginejo z zaslona po približno <strong>en</strong>i minuti.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Standard<br />
Picture<br />
Cell Light : 4<br />
Contrast : 95<br />
Brightness : 45<br />
Sharpness : 50<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
Uporaba gumba TOOLS<br />
<br />
Gumb TOOLS lahko uporabljate za hitro in preprosto izbiro funkcij, ki jih pogosto uporabljate. M<strong>en</strong>i Tools se sprem<strong>en</strong>i gle<strong>de</strong> na<br />
način zunanjega vhoda, ki ga gledate.<br />
1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pojavi se m<strong>en</strong>i Tools.<br />
2. Za izbiro <strong>en</strong>e od ikon pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
3. Pritisnite gumbe ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE, da prikažete, sprem<strong>en</strong>ite ali uporabite<br />
izbrane elem<strong>en</strong>te. Podrobnejši opis posameznih funkcij si oglejte na za<strong>de</strong>vnih<br />
straneh.<br />
Tools<br />
• Picture Mo<strong>de</strong>: oglejte si 17. stran<br />
• Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>: oglejte si 20. stran<br />
Sound Mo<strong>de</strong> : Custom<br />
Sleep Timer : Off<br />
• Sleep Timer: oglejte si 24. stran<br />
Energy Saving : Off<br />
• Energy Saving: oglejte si 23. stran<br />
Add to Favourite<br />
• Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite), oglejte si 15. stran<br />
Picture Mo<strong>de</strong> ◄ Standard ►<br />
U Move E Enter e Exit<br />
Ogled prikaza<br />
Prikaz označuje tr<strong>en</strong>utni kanal in stanje določ<strong>en</strong>ih zvočnih in slikovnih nastavitev.<br />
O Za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO.<br />
Na televizorju se bodo prikazali kanal, vrsta zvoka in stanje določ<strong>en</strong>ih slikovnih in<br />
zvočnih nastavitev.<br />
• ▲, ▼: Za ogled drugih informacij o kanalu. Če se želite pomakniti na tr<strong>en</strong>utno<br />
izbran kanal, Pritisnite ENTERE Gumb.<br />
• ◄, ►: Ogledate si lahko informacije o žel<strong>en</strong>i oddaji na tr<strong>en</strong>utnem kanalu.<br />
N Znova pritisnite gumb INFO ali počakajte približno 10 sekund, da prikaz<br />
samo<strong>de</strong>jno izgine.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 10
Funkcija Plug & Play (Vstavi in pož<strong>en</strong>i)<br />
Pri prvem vklopu TV-ja se samo<strong>de</strong>jno prikažejo osnovne nastavitve.<br />
N Ohranjevalnik zaslona se aktivira, če medtem ko je zagnan Plug & Play, več kot 1 minuto ne pritisnete nob<strong>en</strong>ega gumba na<br />
daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
N Ohranjevalnik zaslona se aktivira, če več kot 15 minut ni signala.<br />
1. Pritisnite gumb POWER na daljinskem upravljalniku. You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
language. Za nastavitev jezika m<strong>en</strong>ija. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezni jezik.<br />
Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
2. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite Store Demo ali Home Use in nato pritisnite gumb<br />
ENTERE .<br />
N Priporočamo, da TV nastavite na način Home Use, saj to zagotavlja<br />
najboljšo sliko v domačem okolju.<br />
N Store Demo je nam<strong>en</strong>j<strong>en</strong> samo uporabi v trgovinah.<br />
N Če je <strong>en</strong>ota naključno nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na način Store Demo in se želite vrniti v način Home Use (Standard): Na TV-ju<br />
pritisnite gumb za glasnost. Ko je na zaslonu prikaz glasnosti, pritisnite gumb MENU na TV-ju in ga držite 5 sekund.<br />
3. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezno državo. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
4. Pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼, da shranite kanale izbrane povezave, in pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
• Air: signal običajne ant<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
• Cable: signal kabelske ant<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
5. Z gumbom ▲ ali▼ izberite kanal, ki ga želite shraniti. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE , da izberete Start.<br />
• Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali.<br />
• Digital: digitalni kanali.<br />
• Analogue: analogni kanali.<br />
N Za podrobnejši opis izbire načina Cable si oglejte, oglejte si stran 12.<br />
N Iskanje kanalov se bo samo<strong>de</strong>jno začelo in končalo.<br />
N Če želite shranjevanje kadar koli prekiniti, pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
N Ko so shranj<strong>en</strong>i vsi kanali, ki so na voljo, se prikaže sporočilo Set the Clock Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
6. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Auto in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
N Če izberete Manual, se prikaže Set curr<strong>en</strong>t date and time (oglejte si stran 24).<br />
N Če ste prejeli digitalni signal, se bo čas samo<strong>de</strong>jno nastavil. Če ne, si oglejte 24. stran, da nastavite uro.<br />
7. Prikažejo se kratka navodila How to get the best performance from your new HDTV. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
N Ta m<strong>en</strong>i je razpoložljivi HD Connection Gui<strong>de</strong> v m<strong>en</strong>iju Support.<br />
8. Prikaže se sporočilo Enjoy your viewing.. Ko končate, pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Plug & Play<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
Za ponastavitev te funkcije ...<br />
1. Za prikaz m<strong>en</strong>ija pritisnite gumb MENU. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Setup in nato<br />
pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
2. Znova pritisnite gumb ENTERE , da izberete Plug & Play.<br />
3. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega TV-ja je ‘0-0-0-0’.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če želite kodo PIN sprem<strong>en</strong>iti, si oglejte 22. stran.<br />
Funkcija Plug & Play je na voljo samo v načinu TV-ja.<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language<br />
Time<br />
Broadcast<br />
Security<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
: English<br />
►<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 11
Upravljanje kanalov<br />
Shranjevanje kanalov<br />
❑<br />
Country<br />
• Digital Channel: Sprem<strong>en</strong>ite lahko državo digitalnih kanalov.<br />
• Analogue Channel: Sprem<strong>en</strong>ite lahko državo analognih kanalov.<br />
N<br />
Prikaže se zaslon za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.<br />
Channel<br />
Country<br />
Auto Store<br />
Manual Store<br />
►<br />
❑<br />
Auto Store<br />
Poišče vse kanale aktivnih televizijskih postaj (odvisno od države) in jih shrani v<br />
pomnilnik televizorja.<br />
Kanale izbrane povezave lahko shranite.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
•<br />
Air: signal običajne ant<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
Cable: signal kabelske ant<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
Če izberete Cable,<br />
Search Mo<strong>de</strong>: za prikaz načina iskanja. (Quick)<br />
- Network ID: za prikaz i<strong>de</strong>ntifikacijske ko<strong>de</strong> omrežja.<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy: za prikaz frekv<strong>en</strong>ce kanala.<br />
- Modulation: za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije.<br />
- Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.<br />
• Search Mo<strong>de</strong>: za prikaz načina iskanja. (Full, Network)<br />
- Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Start~Stop): za prikaz frekv<strong>en</strong>ce kanala.<br />
- Modulation: za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije.<br />
- Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.<br />
Za shranjevanje vira kanala<br />
• Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali.<br />
• Digital: digitalni kanali.<br />
• Analogue: analogni kanali.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če želite ustaviti izvajanje funkcije Auto Store, pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Prikaže se sporočilo Stop Auto Store?.<br />
Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite Yes in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Če je kanal zakl<strong>en</strong>j<strong>en</strong> s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN.<br />
Cable Search Option<br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
: Now/Next<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 12
❑<br />
Manual Store<br />
Ročno poišče kanal in ga shrani v pomnilnik TV-ja.<br />
• Digital Channel (Digital)<br />
Ročno shranjevanje digitalnih kanalov.<br />
N Digitalni kanal je na voljo samo v načinu DTV.<br />
• Channel: Z gumbom▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko kanala.<br />
• Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy: s številskimi gumbi nastavite frekv<strong>en</strong>co.<br />
• Bandwidth: Z gumbom▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite pasovno širino.<br />
N Ko se iskanje dokonča, so posodoblj<strong>en</strong>i kanali v seznamu kanalov.<br />
• Analogue Channel<br />
Ročno shranjevanje analognega kanala.<br />
• Programme (številka programa, ki naj bo do<strong>de</strong>lj<strong>en</strong>a kanalu): z gumbom ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko<br />
programa.<br />
• Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost barvnega sistema.<br />
• Sound System → BG / L / I / DK: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost zvočnega sistema.<br />
• Channel (če poznate številko kanala za shranjevanje): Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite C (Običajna ant<strong>en</strong>a) ali S (Kabelski<br />
kanal). Pritisnite gumb ► in nato z gumbom ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) izberite žel<strong>en</strong>o številko.<br />
N Številko kanala lahko izberete tudi neposredno s pritiskom številskih gumbov (0~9).<br />
N<br />
Če ni zvoka ali le-ta ni normal<strong>en</strong>, znova izberite zahtevani zvočni standard.<br />
• Search (če ne poznate številk kanalov): za začetek iskanja pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Kanalnik pregleda frekv<strong>en</strong>čni razpon,<br />
dokler se na zaslonu ne prikaže prvi kanal ali izbrani kanal.<br />
• Store (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa): Nastavite na OK tako, da pritisnete gumb ENTERE .<br />
N Kanalni način<br />
- C (Način običajne ant<strong>en</strong>e): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom določ<strong>en</strong>e številke za posamezno oddajno postajo v tem<br />
načinu.<br />
- S (Način kabelskega kanala): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom določ<strong>en</strong>e številke za vsak kabelski kanal v tem načinu.<br />
❑<br />
Cable Search Options (Cable)<br />
Za iskanje kabelskega omrežja lahko nastavite dodatne možnosti iskanja, kot sta frekv<strong>en</strong>ca in hitrost simbola. (Odvisno od<br />
države).<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Start~Stop): za prikaz frekv<strong>en</strong>ce kanala.<br />
Modulation: za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije.<br />
Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.<br />
N S številskimi gumbi (0–9) nastavite Frequ<strong>en</strong>cy (Start~Stop) in Symbol Rate.<br />
❑<br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong> / Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Informacije EPG (elektronski programski vodnik) posredujejo izdajatelji televizijskega programa. Informacije o programu so<br />
lahko zastarele ali jih ni, kar je posledica oddajanja informacij določ<strong>en</strong>e televizijske postaje. Zaslon se bo dinamično posodobil<br />
takoj, ko bodo na voljo nove informacije.<br />
• Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong>: Za šest kanalov, ki so nave<strong>de</strong>ni v levem stolpcu, se prikažejo informacije o tr<strong>en</strong>utnem in naslednjem<br />
programu.<br />
• Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: Informacije o programu so prikazane za <strong>en</strong>o uro. Prikazane so informacije o dveh urah programa, po katerih<br />
se lahko pomikate naprej ali nazaj gle<strong>de</strong> na čas.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 13
❑<br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
• Now/Next / Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: Odločite se lahko, ali želite prikazati Now/Next ali Full<br />
Gui<strong>de</strong>, potem ko pritisnete gumb GUIDE na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
Channel<br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong> : Now/Next ►<br />
Channel List<br />
Channel Mo<strong>de</strong> : Ad<strong>de</strong>d Ch.<br />
Fine Tune<br />
O<br />
M<strong>en</strong>i vodiča lahko prikažete tudi s pritiskom gumba GUIDE.<br />
Uporaba Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong> / Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Now & Next Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Now<br />
Next<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Watch Information Page • Full Gui<strong>de</strong> • Exit<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
f tn<br />
900 Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
Watch Information Page • Now/Next • Exit<br />
▲/▼/◄/►,<br />
(ENTER)<br />
RDEČI<br />
ZELENI<br />
RUMENI<br />
MODRI<br />
INFO<br />
Z gumbom ▲/▼/◄/► izberite program.<br />
Če je izbran naslednji program, je umešč<strong>en</strong> na razpored s prikazano ikono ure. Če znova pritisnete<br />
gumb ENTERE, pritisnite gumb ▲/▼/◄/►, da izberete možnost Cancel Schedules, Določanje<br />
razporeda se prekliče in ikona ure izgine.<br />
Za podrobnosti o določanju razporeda programov si oglejte ustrezni raz<strong>de</strong>lek.<br />
Preklapljanje med možnostma Now/Next in Full Gui<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: hiter pomik nazaj (-24 ur).<br />
Full Gui<strong>de</strong>: hiter pomik naprej (+24 ur).<br />
Izhod iz vodnika.<br />
Gumb INFO za podrobne informacije. Podrobne informacije vključujejo številko kanala, čas predvajanja,<br />
informacije o statusni vrstici, starševskem nadzoru, kakovosti vi<strong>de</strong>a (HD/SD), zvočnih načinih,<br />
podnaslovih ali teletekstu, jeziku podnaslovov ali teleteksta ter kratek povzetek označ<strong>en</strong>ega programa.<br />
Če je povzetek dolg, se prikaže ….<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Channel List<br />
Za podrobne postopke uporabe funkcij Channel List, si oglejte opise na 15. in 16. strani.<br />
Channel Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Ko pritisnete gumb P < / >, preklopite med kanali, ki so na seznamu izbranih kanalov.<br />
• Ad<strong>de</strong>d Ch.: Preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu shranj<strong>en</strong>ih kanalov.<br />
• Favourite Ch.: Preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu priljublj<strong>en</strong>ih kanalov.<br />
Fine Tune (samo analogni kanali)<br />
Če je sprejem jas<strong>en</strong>, fina naravnava ni potrebna, ker se samo<strong>de</strong>jno izve<strong>de</strong> med iskanjem in shranjevanjem. Če je signal šibak<br />
ali popač<strong>en</strong>, boste kanal mogoče morali ročno fino naravnati.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Shranj<strong>en</strong>i fino naravnani kanali so označ<strong>en</strong>i z zvezdico* na <strong>de</strong>sni strani številke kanala na traku s kanalom.<br />
Če fino naravnanega kanala ne shranite v pomnilnik, se prilagoditve ne shranijo.<br />
Če želite ponastaviti fino naravnavo, izberite Reset s pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 14
Upravljanje kanalov<br />
<br />
S tem m<strong>en</strong>ijem lahko dodate/izbrišete ali nastavite priljublj<strong>en</strong>e kanale in uporabljate<br />
programski vodnik za digitalne pr<strong>en</strong>ose.<br />
N<br />
Izberite kanal s pritiskom gumbov ▲ali▼ in ENTERE na zaslonu All Channels,<br />
Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels, Favourites ali Programmed. Nato lahko gledate izbrani<br />
kanal.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
All Channels: Prikaže vse tr<strong>en</strong>utno razpoložljive kanale.<br />
Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels: Prikaz vseh dodanih kanalov.<br />
Favourites: Prikaz vseh priljublj<strong>en</strong>ih kanalov.<br />
Programme med: Prikaz tr<strong>en</strong>utno rezerviranih oddaj.<br />
N Uporaba barvnih gumbov skupaj z možnostjo Channel List<br />
- Red (Channel Type): Preklapljanje med možnostmi TV, Radio, Data/Other in All.<br />
N<br />
- Gre<strong>en</strong> (Zoom): Povečanje ali pomanjšanje številke kanala.<br />
- Yellow (Select): Izbira več seznamov kanalov.<br />
-<br />
TTOOLS (Option): Prikaz m<strong>en</strong>ija Delete (ali Add), Add to Favourite (ali Delete<br />
from Favourite), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel Number,<br />
Sort, Lock (ali Unlock), Select All (ali Deselect All) ali Auto Store.<br />
(M<strong>en</strong>iji možnosti so lahko drugačni, odvisno od okoliščin.)<br />
Ikone stanja kanala<br />
A Analogni kanal. c Kanal, izbran s pritiskom rum<strong>en</strong>ega gumba.<br />
♥ Kanal, ki je nastavlj<strong>en</strong> kot priljublj<strong>en</strong>i. ( Oddaja, ki se tr<strong>en</strong>utno predvaja.<br />
\ Zakl<strong>en</strong>j<strong>en</strong> kanal. ) Rezervirana oddaja.<br />
Channel<br />
Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels<br />
Mini Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Default Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Channel List<br />
Channel Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Fine Tune<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
: Now/Next<br />
: Ad<strong>de</strong>d Ch.<br />
All • Channel Type • Zoom • Select Tools<br />
O<br />
Te možnosti lahko izberete tudi s pritiskom na gumb CH LIST na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<strong>en</strong>i z orodji seznama kanalov (v možnosti All Channels/Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels/Favourites)<br />
Za uporabo m<strong>en</strong>ija Tools pritisnite gumb TOOLS.<br />
Elem<strong>en</strong>ti m<strong>en</strong>ija z možnostmi se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od stanja kanala.<br />
• Add / Delete<br />
Lahko izbrišete ali dodate kanal, da prikažete žel<strong>en</strong>e kanale.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v m<strong>en</strong>iju All Channels.<br />
Če je kanal obarvan sivo, to pom<strong>en</strong>i, da je bil izbrisan.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>i Add se prikaže samo pri izbrisanih kanalih.<br />
Na <strong>en</strong>ak način lahko izbrišete kanal v m<strong>en</strong>iju Ad<strong>de</strong>d Channels ali Favourite.<br />
• Add to Favourite/Delete from Favourite<br />
Kanale, ki jih pogosto gledate, lahko nastavite kot priljublj<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
All Channels<br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C -- Delete<br />
A 2 C -- Add to Favourite<br />
A 3 C -- Timer Viewing<br />
A 4 C -- Edit Channel Name<br />
A 5 C -- Sort<br />
A 6 C -- Lock<br />
A 7 C --<br />
▼<br />
A 8 C --<br />
All • Channel Type • Zoom • Select Tools<br />
T<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže m<strong>en</strong>i Tools.<br />
Priljublj<strong>en</strong>i kanal lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Add to Favorite ( ali Delete from Favorite)<br />
Prikazan bo simbol ♥ in kanal bo nastavlj<strong>en</strong> kot priljublj<strong>en</strong>i.<br />
Vsi priljublj<strong>en</strong>i kanali bodo prikazani v m<strong>en</strong>iju Favourite.<br />
Če želite izbrati priljublj<strong>en</strong>e kanale, ki ste jih nastavili, pritisnite gumb FAV.CH<br />
na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
se nadaljuje …<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 15
• Timer Viewing<br />
Če rezervirate oddajo, ki si jo želite ogledati, se kanal na seznamu kanalov samo<strong>de</strong>jno preklopi v rezerviranega, tudi če<br />
gledate drug kanal. Če želite rezervirati oddajo najprej nastavite tr<strong>en</strong>utni čas. (Oglejte si 24. stran.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Rezervirati je mogoče samo shranj<strong>en</strong>e kanale.<br />
Kanal, mesec, dan, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku.<br />
Rezerviranje programa bo prikazano v m<strong>en</strong>iju Programme med.<br />
Programski vodnik za digitalne kanale in rezerviranje oddaj<br />
Če je izbran digitalni kanal in pritisnete gumb ►, se prikaže programski vodnik za ta kanal.<br />
Oddajo lahko rezervirate po zgoraj opisanih postopkih.<br />
• Edit Channel Name (samo pri analognih kanalih)<br />
Kanale lahko označite, tako da se vsakič, ko izberete določ<strong>en</strong> kanal, prikaže njegovo ime.<br />
N<br />
Digitalnim kanalom so im<strong>en</strong>a samo<strong>de</strong>jno do<strong>de</strong>lj<strong>en</strong>a in jih ni mogoče določiti.<br />
• Edit Channel Number (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)<br />
Urejate lahko tudi številke kanalov, in sicer s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
• Sort (samo pri analognih kanalih)<br />
Ta postopek omogoča spremembo številk programov shranj<strong>en</strong>ih kanalov. To postopek boste mogoče morali izvesti po uporabi<br />
funkcije samo<strong>de</strong>jnega shranjevanja.<br />
• Lock/Unlock<br />
Kanal lahko zakl<strong>en</strong>ete, tako da ga ni mogoče izbrati in gledati. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, če je možnost Child Lock<br />
nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na On. (Oglejte si 22. stran.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Prikaže se zaslon za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.<br />
Privzeta koda PIN novega TV-ja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko sprem<strong>en</strong>ite tako, da v m<strong>en</strong>iju izberete Change PIN.<br />
Prikazan bo simbol “\” in kanal bo zakl<strong>en</strong>j<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Select All / Deselect All<br />
• Select All: izberete lahko vse kanale na seznamu kanalov.<br />
• Deselect All: Prekličete lahko izbor vseh kanalov, ki so izbrani na seznamu kanalov.<br />
N Istočasno lahko dodate/izbrišete več kanalov, jih dodate priljublj<strong>en</strong>im/izbrišete iz priljublj<strong>en</strong>ih ali jih zakl<strong>en</strong>ete/odkl<strong>en</strong>ete.<br />
Če želite istočasno nastaviti vse izbrane kanale, izberite žel<strong>en</strong>e kanale in pritisnite rum<strong>en</strong>i gumb.<br />
N Levo od izbranih kanalov se prikaže znak c.<br />
N Možnost Deselect All lahko izberete samo, če je kateri kanal izbran.<br />
• Auto Store<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Za podrobnosti o nastavitvah možnosti si oglejte 12. stran.<br />
Če je kanal zakl<strong>en</strong>j<strong>en</strong> s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN.<br />
❑<br />
Channel List Tools M<strong>en</strong>u (in Programmed)<br />
Rezervacijo si lahko ogledate, jo sprem<strong>en</strong>ite ali izbrišete.<br />
N Če želite uporabljati m<strong>en</strong>i z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS.<br />
• Change Info: sprememba rezervacije oddaje.<br />
• Cancel Schedules: preklic rezervacije oddaje.<br />
• Information: ogled rezervacije oddaje. (Lahko tudi sprem<strong>en</strong>ite podatke o<br />
rezervaciji.)<br />
• Select All / Deselect All : Za izbiro ali preklic izbire vseh rezerviranih oddaj.<br />
Programmed<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 TV1 Change Quincy, Info M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Cancel Schedules<br />
TV3 The Equalizer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Information<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Select All<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
All • Zoom • Select Tools Information<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 16
Upravljanje slike<br />
Spreminjanje in ponastavljanje slikovnih nastavitev<br />
❑<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Izberete lahko vrsto slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Dynamic: Vyberie obraz s vysokým rozlíš<strong>en</strong>ím pre svetlé prostredia.<br />
Standard: Vyberie optimálne zobraz<strong>en</strong>ie obrazu pre normálne prostredia.<br />
Movie: Vyberie pohodlné zobraz<strong>en</strong>ie obrazu pre tmavé prostredia.<br />
T<br />
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete m<strong>en</strong>i Tools.<br />
Slikovni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Picture<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Standard ►<br />
Cell Light : 4<br />
Contrast : 95<br />
Brightness : 45<br />
Sharpness : 50<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
❑<br />
Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)<br />
Televizor ima več možnosti nastavitev za nadzor kakovosti slike.<br />
• Cell Light: Nastavitev svetlosti slikovnih pik.<br />
• Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level.<br />
• Brightness: Nastavuje úroveň kontrastu.<br />
• Sharpness: Nastavuje ostrosť.<br />
• Colour: Nastavuje sýtosť farieb obrazu pomocou ukazovateľa na obrazovke.<br />
• Tint (G/R): Čím bližšie k Červ<strong>en</strong>ej 100, tým nasýt<strong>en</strong>ejšou sa červ<strong>en</strong>á farba stane.<br />
N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite najprej prilagoditi. Prilagoj<strong>en</strong>e vrednosti se shranijo za vse slikovne načine.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če sprem<strong>en</strong>ite možnost Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour ali Tint (G/R), se prikaz na zaslonu<br />
ustrezno prilagodi.<br />
V načinih analognega TV-ja, zunanjega, AV in S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o sistema PAL funkcije Tint ni mogoče uporabljati.<br />
Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod TV-ja.<br />
Količino porablj<strong>en</strong>e <strong>en</strong>ergije lahko opazno zmanjšate, če znižate rav<strong>en</strong> svetlosti slike, s čimer boste tudi znižali celotne<br />
tekoče stroške.<br />
❑<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Novi <strong>Samsung</strong>ov TV omogoča celo natančnejše slikovne nastavitve kot prejšnji<br />
mo<strong>de</strong>li. Če želite prilagoditi podrobne slikovne nastavitve, si oglejte spodnje<br />
besedilo.<br />
N Advanced Settings je na voljo v načinu Standard ali Movie.<br />
• Black Tone → Off / Low / Medium / High<br />
Na zaslonu lahko izberete rav<strong>en</strong> črne in tako prilagodite globino zaslona.<br />
• Dynamic Contrast → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest<br />
Prilagodite lahko kontrast zaslona, tako da je za optimal<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• Gamma<br />
Nastavite lahko int<strong>en</strong>zivnost primarnih barv (r<strong>de</strong>če, zel<strong>en</strong>e, modre).<br />
• Colour Space<br />
Barvni prostor je barvna matrika, ki je sestavlj<strong>en</strong>a iz r<strong>de</strong>če, zel<strong>en</strong>e in modre barve. Izberite najljubši barvni prostor za prikaz<br />
najnaravnejših barv.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Auto: samo<strong>de</strong>jna nastavitev barvnega razpona gle<strong>de</strong> na vhodni vi<strong>de</strong>o vir.<br />
Native: nastavitev širšega barvnega razpona od vhodnega vi<strong>de</strong>o vira.<br />
• White Balance<br />
Prilagodite lahko barvno temperaturo za naravnejše barve slik.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Če sprem<strong>en</strong>ite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagoj<strong>en</strong>i zaslon.<br />
Reset: za ponastavitev privzete izravnave belin.<br />
• Flesh Tone<br />
Poudarite lahko rožnati ton slike.<br />
N Če sprem<strong>en</strong>ite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagoj<strong>en</strong>i zaslon.<br />
• Edge Enhancem<strong>en</strong>t → Off / On<br />
Na sliki lahko poudarite robove predmetov.<br />
Picture<br />
Colour : 50<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Picture Options<br />
Picture Reset<br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 17
❑<br />
Picture Options<br />
• Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2<br />
Izberete lahko barvni ton, ki je najudobnejši za vaše oči.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Prilagoj<strong>en</strong>e vrednosti se shranijo v skladu z izbranim načinom Picture.<br />
Warm1 ali Warm2 je aktivna samo, če je slikovni način nastavlj<strong>en</strong> na Movie.<br />
Picture<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Picture Options<br />
Picture Reset<br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
• Size<br />
Izberete lahko velikost slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Auto Wi<strong>de</strong>: Nastaví obraz vo formáte Automaticky širokouhlo.<br />
16:9: Nastaví obraz na pomer strán 16:9.<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Vyberte túto ponuku, aby ste zobrazili obraz v pomere strán 4:3 cez TV s pomerom strán 16:9 tak, že<br />
roztiahnete obraz 4:3 vertikálne.<br />
Zoom: Roztiahne obraz s pomerom strán 16:9 vertikálne.<br />
4:3: Nastaví obraz na pomer strán 4:3.<br />
Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit: Zobrazí kompletný prirodz<strong>en</strong>ý signál s vysokým rozlíš<strong>en</strong>ím, ktorý sa nedá zobraziť pomocou normálneho TV.<br />
Možnosti velikosti slike se lahko razlikujejo gle<strong>de</strong> na vhodni vir.<br />
Razpoložljivi elem<strong>en</strong>ti se lahko razlikujejo gle<strong>de</strong> na izbrani način.<br />
Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod TV-ja.<br />
Če je na televizorju več kot dve uri prikazana negibna slika, se lahko pojavi začasno zadržanje slike.<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Z gumbom ► izberite Position in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼, če želite zaslon pomakniti navzgor/navzdol. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Zoom: Z gumbom ► izberite Position in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE . Pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼, če želite pomakniti<br />
sliko navzgor ali navzdol. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE . Z gumbom ► izberite Size in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼, če želite povečati ali zmanjšati velikost slike v navpični smeri. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE .<br />
Ko izberete Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit v načinu HDMI (1080i/1080p) ali Compon<strong>en</strong>t (1080i/1080p): z gumbom ◄ ali ►izberite Position.<br />
Z gumbom ▲, ▼, ◄ ali ► pomaknite sliko.<br />
Reset: Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite Reset in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Nastavitev lahko inicializirate.<br />
Če funkcijo Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit uporabite pri vhodu HDMI 720p, bo odrezana po 1 vrstica zgoraj, spodaj, levo in <strong>de</strong>sno, kot pri<br />
funkciji zmanjšanja prevelike slike.<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Ko pri širokozaslonskem TV-ju 16:9 velikost slike nastavite na Auto Wi<strong>de</strong>, lahko določite velikost za sliko 4:3 WSS ali pa<br />
ne določite teh nastavitev. V posameznih evropskih državah so zahtevane različne velikosti slike, zato to funkcijo izbere<br />
uporabnik.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
16:9: Nastaví obraz na pomer strán 16:9.<br />
Wi<strong>de</strong> Zoom: Vyberte túto ponuku, aby ste zobrazili obraz v pomere strán 4:3 cez TV s pomerom strán 16:9 tak, že<br />
roztiahnete obraz 4:3 vertikálne.<br />
Zoom: Roztiahne obraz s pomerom strán 16:9 vertikálne.<br />
4:3: Vyberie režim obrazovky pre 4:3.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Funkcija je na voljo v načinu Auto Wi<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Funkcija ni na voljo v načinih, Compon<strong>en</strong>t in HDMI.<br />
• Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto<br />
Če je sprejeti TV-signal šibak, lahko aktivirate funkcijo Digitalno odpravljanje šumov za zmanjšanje statičnih mot<strong>en</strong>j in odsevov<br />
na zaslonu.<br />
N<br />
Če je signal šibak, izberite <strong>en</strong>o od ostalih možnosti, tako da je slika prikazana v največji kakovosti.<br />
• HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low<br />
Neposredno lahko na izberete rav<strong>en</strong> črne na zaslonu, da prilagodite globino zaslona.<br />
N<br />
Funkcija je aktivna samo, kadar je zunanji vhod povezan s HDMI (signali RGB).<br />
se nadaljuje …<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 18
• Film Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Optimizirate lahko slikovni način za gledanje filmov.<br />
• Off : uporabi se osnovna ob<strong>de</strong>lava slike vi<strong>de</strong>a, brez samo<strong>de</strong>jnega zaznavanja filmov.<br />
• Auto: za samo<strong>de</strong>jno prilagoditev na najboljšo kakovost slike pri filmih in vi<strong>de</strong>ih.<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection<br />
za konfiguriranje možnosti zaščite pred ožigom zaslona, s katerimi se prepreči in zmanjša ožig slikovnih pik.<br />
Če je slika predolgo na istem položaju, lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do trajnega ožiga zaslona.<br />
• Pixel Shift: V napravo je vgraj<strong>en</strong>a tehnologija za preprečevanje ožiga zaslona, ki zmanjša možnost ožiga. Ta tehnologija<br />
omogoča nastavitev premikanja slike v smeri navzgor/navzdol in od <strong>en</strong>e strani do druge. Časovne nastavitve vam<br />
omogočajo določanje števila minut med premiki slike.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Vklopite možnost Pixel Shift s pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
S pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite žel<strong>en</strong>o možnost in pritisnite gumb ENTERE.<br />
Možnosti, ki so na voljo: Horizontal, Vertical, Time.<br />
Optimalne razmere za pomikanje slikovnih pik<br />
Item<br />
PC TV/Ext/AV/Compon<strong>en</strong>t/HDMI<br />
Horizontal 0~4 2<br />
Vertical 0~4 2<br />
Time (minute) 1~4 min 3 min<br />
Vrednost pomika slikovne pike je odvisna od velikosti monitorja (palcev) in načina.<br />
Ta funkcija ni na voljo v načinu Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit.<br />
• Scrolling: ta funkcija pomaga pri odstranjevanju zakasnele slike z zaslona, tako da vse slikovne pike na zaslonu PDP<br />
premika po določ<strong>en</strong>em vzorcu. Še posebej je uporabna, če je na zaslonu bila zelo dolgo prikazana mirujoča slika.<br />
• Si<strong>de</strong> Gray: ay: če TV gledate v razmerju slike 4:3, se s prilagoditvijo izravnave belin na skrajnje levi in skrajnje <strong>de</strong>sni strani<br />
televizorja prepreči škoda.<br />
- Dark: če razmerje slike nastavite na 4:3, potemni levo in <strong>de</strong>sno stran.<br />
- Light: če razmerje slike nastavite na 4:3, posvetli levo in <strong>de</strong>sno stran.<br />
❑<br />
Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mo<strong>de</strong> / Cancel<br />
Advanced Settings<br />
Ponastavitev vseh slikovnih nastavitev na privzete vrednosti.<br />
N<br />
Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite ponastaviti. Funkcija ponastavitve se<br />
izve<strong>de</strong> za vse slikovne načine.<br />
Picture<br />
Picture Options<br />
Picture Reset<br />
►<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 19
Nadzor zvoka<br />
Sprememba zvočnega standarda<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom<br />
Izberete lahko vrsto posebnih zvočnih učinkov ob gledanju določ<strong>en</strong>e oddaje.<br />
T<br />
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete m<strong>en</strong>i Tools.<br />
Zvočni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
Equalizer<br />
Zvočne nastavitve lahko prilagodite popolnoma po vaši želji.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>: izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza.<br />
Balance: nadzor ravnovesja med <strong>de</strong>snim in levim zvočnikom.<br />
100Hz/300Hz/1kHz/3kHz/10kHz (nastavitev pasovne širine): nastavitev ravni frekv<strong>en</strong>c različnih pasovnih širin.<br />
Reset: ponastavitev nastavitev iz<strong>en</strong>ačevalnika na privzete vrednosti.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On<br />
SRS TruSurround HD združuje tehnologije TruSurround, FOCUS in TruBass.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD proizvaja zvočni učinek navi<strong>de</strong>znega 5.1-kanalnega prostorskega zvoka, ki prihaja iz dveh zvočnikov<br />
televizorja. Ta funkcija ne zagotavlja samo bogatih globokih nizkih tonov, ampak ob<strong>en</strong>em izboljša tudi visoko frekv<strong>en</strong>čno<br />
ločljivost.<br />
N<br />
Če med predvajanjem glasbe na televizorju zvok ni normal<strong>en</strong>, nastavite iz<strong>en</strong>ačevalnik in SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On).<br />
Sound<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> : Custom ►<br />
Equalizer<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Off<br />
Audio Language : ----<br />
Audio Format : ----<br />
Audio Description<br />
Auto Volume : Off<br />
<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS in simbol so blagovne znamke podjetja SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
Tehnologija TruSurround XT je vgraj<strong>en</strong>a pod lic<strong>en</strong>co podjetja SRS Labs, Inc.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Audio Language (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)<br />
Sprem<strong>en</strong>ite lahko privzete vrednosti za jezik avdia. Prikaže informacije o jeziku za dohodni tok.<br />
N<br />
Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so <strong>de</strong>jansko oddajani.<br />
Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)<br />
Pri istočasnem oddajanju zvoka iz glavnega zvočnika in avdio sprejemnika lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do odmeva zaradi različne hitrosti<br />
odkodiranja za glavni zvočnik in avdio sprejemnik. V tem primeru uporabite funkcijo zvočnika TV-ja.<br />
N<br />
Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so <strong>de</strong>jansko oddajani.<br />
Iz<strong>de</strong>lano pod lic<strong>en</strong>co Dolby Laboratories.<br />
Dolby in simbol DD sta blagovni znamki družbe Dolby Laboratories.<br />
❑<br />
Audio Description (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)<br />
To je dodatna funkcija za zvok, ki omogoča dodatne zvočne posnetke za slabovidne. Ta funkcija je nam<strong>en</strong>j<strong>en</strong>a zvočnemu toku<br />
za AD (Audio Description), če jo oddajnik pošlje skupaj z glavnim zvokom. Uporabniki lahko zvočni opis izklopijo in vklopijo ter<br />
uravnavajo glasnost.<br />
O Te možnosti lahko <strong>en</strong>ostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba AD na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku.<br />
• Audio Description → Off / On<br />
vklop ali izklop funkcije zvočnega opisa.<br />
• Volume<br />
prilagodite lahko glasnost zvočnega opisa.<br />
N<br />
Volume je aktivna, če je možnost Audio Description nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na On.<br />
se nadaljuje …<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 20
❑<br />
❑<br />
Auto Volume → Off / On<br />
Vsaka postaja ima svoje signalne pogoje, zato ni <strong>en</strong>ostavno regulirati glasnosti ob vsaki zam<strong>en</strong>javi kanala. Ta funkcija<br />
omogoča samo<strong>de</strong>jno regulacijo glasnosti žel<strong>en</strong>ega kanala z znižanjem glasnosti v primeru visokega modulacijskega signala<br />
ali zvišanjem glasnosti v primeru nizkega modulacijskega signala.<br />
Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker<br />
Če želite slišati zvok iz loč<strong>en</strong>ih zvočnikov, izklopite notranji ojačevalnik.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če je možnost Speaker Select nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na External Speaker, gumbi – +, M MUTE ne <strong>de</strong>lujejo.<br />
Če izberete External Speaker v m<strong>en</strong>iju Speaker Select, bodo zvočne nastavitve omej<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
Notranji zvočniki TV-ja<br />
Avdio izhod (optični, izhod L/D) v zvočnem sistemu<br />
TV / Ext./AV/S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o/kompon<strong>en</strong>ta/HDMI<br />
TV / Ext./AV/S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o/kompon<strong>en</strong>ta/HDMI<br />
Zvočnik TV-ja Izhod zvočnikov Izhod zvoka<br />
Zunanji zvočnik Nemo Izhod zvoka<br />
Ni vi<strong>de</strong>o signala Nemo Nemo<br />
Auto Volume : Off<br />
❑ Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mo<strong>de</strong> / Cancel<br />
Zvočne nastavitve lahko obnovite na tovarniške vrednosti.<br />
Sound<br />
Speaker Select<br />
Sound Reset<br />
: TV Speaker<br />
►<br />
Izbira zvočnega načina<br />
Če nastavite Dual l ll, se na zaslonu prikaže tr<strong>en</strong>utni zvočni način.<br />
Vrsta oddaje<br />
Indikator na zaslonu<br />
Običajna oddaja<br />
(standardni avdio)<br />
Mono (Normalna uporaba)<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Običajno + NICAM Mono<br />
NICAM stereo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Običajno)<br />
Mono<br />
(Običajno)<br />
NICAM DUAL-I/II<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Dual-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Običajno)<br />
A2<br />
Stereo<br />
Običajna oddaja<br />
(standardni avdio)<br />
Mono (Normalna uporaba)<br />
Dvojezično ali DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Prisilni mono)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če je stereo signal šibak in pri<strong>de</strong> do samo<strong>de</strong>jnega preklopa, preklopite na Mono.<br />
Ta funkcija je aktivirana samo v stereo zvočnem signalu. V mono zvočnem signalu je <strong>de</strong>aktivirana.<br />
Ta funkcija je na voljo samo v načinu TV-ja.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 21
Opis Funkcij<br />
Konfiguriranje m<strong>en</strong>ija Setup<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language<br />
Nastavite lahko jezik m<strong>en</strong>ija.<br />
Broadcast<br />
• Subtitle<br />
Lahko aktivirate in <strong>de</strong>aktivirate podnapise. S tem m<strong>en</strong>ijem nastavite način<br />
podnapisov. Normal predstavlja osnovne podnapise, Hard of hearing pa<br />
podnapise za slušno priza<strong>de</strong>te.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Subtitle → Off / On: vklop ali izklop podnapisov.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong> → Normal / Hard of hearing: nastavitev načina podnapisov.<br />
Subtitle Language: nastavitev jezika podnapisov.<br />
Če program, ki ga gledate, ne podpira funkcije Hard of hearing, se samo<strong>de</strong>jno<br />
vklopi način Normal, čeprav je izbran način Hard of hearing.<br />
Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.<br />
To možnost lahko <strong>en</strong>ostavno izberete s pritiskom na gumb SUBT. na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku.<br />
• Digital Text → Disable / Enable<br />
Ta funkcija je omogoč<strong>en</strong>a, če je program oddajan z digitalnim besedilom.<br />
N<br />
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)<br />
Mednarodni standard za sisteme za kodiranje podatkov, ki se uporablja za večpredstavnost in hiperpredstavnost. Je<br />
na višjem nivoju kot sistem MPEG in vključuje hiperpredstavnost s povezanimi podatki, kot so slike, znakovne storitve,<br />
animacije, grafike in vi<strong>de</strong>o datoteke ter večpredstavnostne datoteke. MHEG je tehnologija, ki omogoča so<strong>de</strong>lovanje<br />
uporabnika med <strong>de</strong>lovanjem, in se uporablja na različnih področjih, kot so VOD (vi<strong>de</strong>o na zahtevo), ITV (interaktivna TV),<br />
EC (elektronsko poslovanje), teleizobraževanje, telekonfer<strong>en</strong>ce, digitalne knjižnice in omrežne igre.<br />
• Teletext Language<br />
Nastavite lahko jezik teleteksta, in sicer tako, da izberete vrsto jezika.<br />
N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.<br />
• Prefer<strong>en</strong>ce<br />
• Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language<br />
/ Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language<br />
S to funkcijo lahko uporabnik izbere <strong>en</strong>ega od jezikov. Tukaj izbrani jezik je privzeti jezik, ko uporabnik izbere kanal.<br />
Če sprem<strong>en</strong>ite nastavitev jezika, se možnosti m<strong>en</strong>ija Language (Jezik) Subtitle Language (Jezik podnapisov), Audio<br />
Language (Jezik avdia) in Teletext Language (Jezik teleteksta) samo<strong>de</strong>jno sprem<strong>en</strong>ijo v izbrani jezik.<br />
Možnosti m<strong>en</strong>ija Language – Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language – prikazujejo seznam jezikov, ki<br />
jih podpira tr<strong>en</strong>utni kanal; izbor je označ<strong>en</strong>. Če sprem<strong>en</strong>ite to nastavitev jezika, nov izbor velja samo za tr<strong>en</strong>utni kanal.<br />
S spremembo nastavitve se ne sprem<strong>en</strong>ijo nastavitve m<strong>en</strong>ija Prefer<strong>en</strong>ce: Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio<br />
Language in Primary Teletext Language.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Common Interface<br />
Namestitev kartice CI<br />
1. Modul kartice za splošni vmesnik kupite pri najbližjem prodajalcu ali po telefonu.<br />
2. Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v CAM v smeri puščici, da se zaskoči na<br />
mestu.<br />
3. CAM z namešč<strong>en</strong>o kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v režo za splošni<br />
vmesnik.<br />
N<br />
CAM vstavite v smeri puščice do konca, tako da je vzpore<strong>de</strong>n z režo.<br />
4. Preverite, ali na kanalu z mot<strong>en</strong>im signalom vidite sliko.<br />
• CI M<strong>en</strong>u<br />
Uporabniku omogoča, da lahko izbira iz m<strong>en</strong>ija, ki ga omogoča CAM.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>i splošnega vmesnika izberite gle<strong>de</strong> na kartico PC.<br />
• Application Info.<br />
Prikaže informacije o CAM-u, ki je vstavlj<strong>en</strong> v režo za splošni vmesnik.<br />
Informacije o aplikaciji se nanašajo na kartico splošnega vmesnika. CAM lahko namestite kadarkoli, ne gle<strong>de</strong> na to, ali je TV<br />
vkloplj<strong>en</strong> ali izkloplj<strong>en</strong>.<br />
N CAM is not supported in some countries and regions,check with your authorized <strong>de</strong>aler.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 22<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language : English ►<br />
Time<br />
Broadcast<br />
Security<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
se nadaljuje …
❑<br />
Security<br />
• Child Lock → Off / On<br />
Ta funkcija preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa nepooblašč<strong>en</strong>im uporabnikom (na primer otrokom) tako, da prepreči<br />
predvajanje slike in zvoka.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>n se prikaže nastavitv<strong>en</strong>i zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.<br />
Privzeta koda PIN novega TV-ja je '0-0-0-0'. Kodo PIN lahko sprem<strong>en</strong>ite tako, da v m<strong>en</strong>iju izberete Change PIN.<br />
Zakl<strong>en</strong>ete lahko nekatere kanale na seznamu kanalov (oglejte si 15. stran).<br />
Child Lock je na voljo samo v načinu TV-ja.<br />
• Par<strong>en</strong>tal Lock<br />
Ta funkcija nepooblašč<strong>en</strong>im uporabnikom, na primer otrokom, preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa, in sicer s<br />
4-mestno kodo PIN (osebna i<strong>de</strong>ntifikacijska številka), ki jo določi uporabnik.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>n se prikaže nastavitv<strong>en</strong>i zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.<br />
Privzeta koda PIN novega TV-ja je '0-0-0-0'. Kodo PIN lahko sprem<strong>en</strong>ite tako, da v m<strong>en</strong>iju izberete Change PIN.<br />
Ko so oznake starševskega nadzora nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a, se prikaže simbol “\”.<br />
Allow All: pritisnite, da odkl<strong>en</strong>ete vse oznake TV-ja.<br />
Block All: pritisnite, da zakl<strong>en</strong>ete vse oznake TV-ja.<br />
• Change PIN<br />
❑<br />
Sprem<strong>en</strong>ite lahko osebno i<strong>de</strong>ntifikacijsko številko, ki je potrebna za nastavitev TV-ja.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>n se prikaže nastavitv<strong>en</strong>i zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos ko<strong>de</strong> PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.<br />
Privzeta koda PIN novega TV-ja je '0-0-0-0'.<br />
Če PIN pozabite, pritisnite gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku v naslednjem zaporedju, s čimer PIN ponastavite na<br />
'0-0-0-0': POWER (Izklop), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Vklop).<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
• Game Mo<strong>de</strong> → Off / On<br />
Pri povezavi z igralno konzolo, kot je PlayStation TM ali Xbox TM , lahko uživate v bolj realistični izkušnji tako, da izberete m<strong>en</strong>i<br />
iger.<br />
• Ko je možnost Game Mo<strong>de</strong> nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na On<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Slikovni način se samo<strong>de</strong>jno sprem<strong>en</strong>i v način Standard in ga ni mogoče sprem<strong>en</strong>iti.<br />
Zvočni način se samo<strong>de</strong>jno sprem<strong>en</strong>i v način Custom in ga ni mogoče sprem<strong>en</strong>iti. Z iz<strong>en</strong>ačevalnikom prilagodite zvok.<br />
Aktivira se možnost Reset v m<strong>en</strong>iju zvoka. Funkcija Reset inicializira nastavitve iz<strong>en</strong>ačevalnika na tovarniške nastavitve.<br />
Možnost Game Mo<strong>de</strong> ni na voljo v običajnem načinu TV ali Game Mo<strong>de</strong> nastavlj<strong>en</strong> na Off.<br />
Če je ob priključ<strong>en</strong>i zunanji napravi kakovost slike slaba, preverite, ali je možnost Game Mo<strong>de</strong> nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na On.<br />
Če m<strong>en</strong>i televizorja prikazujete z možnostjo načina iger, zaslon rahlo miglja.<br />
N Na zaslonu ( ) se prikaže oznaka , ki pom<strong>en</strong>i, da je za izbrani vir vkloplj<strong>en</strong> način Game Mo<strong>de</strong>.<br />
N Ta funkcija podpira samo funkcijo igre.<br />
• Energy Saving<br />
Ta funkcija prilagodi svetlost TV-ja, tako da se zmanjša poraba <strong>en</strong>ergije. Če TV gledate ponoči, nastavite možnost načina<br />
Energy Saving na High, da zmanjšate utrujanje oči in tudi porabo <strong>en</strong>ergije.<br />
Če izberete Picture Off, se izklopi slika in predvaja se samo zvok. Za izklop funkcije Picture Off pritisnite kateri koli gumb.<br />
N V m<strong>en</strong>iju Tools funkcija Picture Off ni podprta.<br />
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete m<strong>en</strong>i Tools.<br />
Možnost varčevanja <strong>en</strong>ergije lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Energy Saving.<br />
• Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High<br />
Prilagodite lahko melodijo ob vklopu ali izklopu televizorja.<br />
N Melodija se ne predvaja<br />
- Ko iz TV-ja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb MMUTE.<br />
- Če iz TV-ja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb – (Glasnost).<br />
- Ko se televizor izklopi s funkcijo Sleep Timer.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 23
Nastavitev časa<br />
❑<br />
Clock<br />
Uro morate nastaviti, da lahko uporabljate različne funkcije časovnika TV-ja.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ob vsakem pritisku gumba INFO se bo prikazal tr<strong>en</strong>utni čas.<br />
Če izključite napajalni kabel, morate uro ponovno nastaviti.<br />
• Clock Mo<strong>de</strong><br />
Tr<strong>en</strong>utni čas lahko nastavite ročno ali samo<strong>de</strong>jno.<br />
• Auto: samo<strong>de</strong>jna nastavitev tr<strong>en</strong>utnega časa z uporabo digitalno oddajanega<br />
časa.<br />
• Manual: ročna nastavitev tr<strong>en</strong>utnega časa.<br />
• Clock Set<br />
Tr<strong>en</strong>utni čas lahko nastavite ročno.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ta elem<strong>en</strong>t nastavite, če ste možnost Clock Mo<strong>de</strong> nastavili na Manual.<br />
Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskom<br />
številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min<br />
Izklopni časovnik samo<strong>de</strong>jno izklopi TV po prednastavlj<strong>en</strong>em času.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ko časovnik doseže 0, se TV samo<strong>de</strong>jno preklopi v stanje pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti.<br />
Če želite preklicati <strong>de</strong>lovanje funkcije Sleep Timer, izberite Off.<br />
Setup<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language : English<br />
Time<br />
►<br />
Broadcast<br />
Security<br />
G<strong>en</strong>eral<br />
Time<br />
Clock : -- : -- ►<br />
Sleep Timer<br />
: Off<br />
Timer 1<br />
: Inactivated<br />
Timer 2<br />
: Inactivated<br />
Timer 3<br />
: Inactivated<br />
U Move E Enter R Return<br />
❑<br />
T<br />
Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete m<strong>en</strong>i Tools.<br />
Izklopni časovnik lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sleep Timer.<br />
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3<br />
Opravite lahko tri različne nastavitve vklopa/izklopa časovnika.<br />
• On Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/<strong>de</strong>aktiviranje.<br />
(Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo nastavite na možnost Activate.)<br />
• Off Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/<strong>de</strong>aktiviranje.<br />
(Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo nastavite na možnost Activate.)<br />
• Volume : nastavitev žel<strong>en</strong>e glasnosti.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>na: izberete lahko, ali naj se ob samo<strong>de</strong>jnem vklopu televizorja uporabi DTV ali ATV.<br />
• Channel: za izbiro žel<strong>en</strong>ega kanala.<br />
• Repeat: za izbiro Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun ali Manual.<br />
N Če je izbrana možnost Manual, pritisnite ►, da izberete žel<strong>en</strong>i dan v tednu. Za žel<strong>en</strong>i dan pritisnite gumb ENTERE in<br />
prikazala se bo oznaka c.<br />
N Najprej morate nastaviti uro.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Uro, minute in kanal lahko nastavite s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
Auto Power Off<br />
Če vklopite časovnik, se bo TV izklopil, če tri ure potem, ko je časovnik vklopil TV, ni bila pritisnj<strong>en</strong>a nob<strong>en</strong>a kontrola. Ta<br />
funkcija je na voljo samo, ko je vkloplj<strong>en</strong> časovnik, in preprečuje pregrevanje, do katerega lahko pri<strong>de</strong>, če je TV predolgo<br />
vkloplj<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 24
Source List/Edit Name<br />
❑<br />
Source List<br />
Za izbiro TV-ja ali drugih zunanjih vhodnih virov, ki so povezani s TV-jem, na primer<br />
predvajalnikov DVD ali kabelskih/satelitskih sprejemnikov. Uporabite za izbiro<br />
žel<strong>en</strong>ega vhodnega vira.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Izberete lahko samo zunanje naprave, ki so povezane s TV-jem. Na seznamu<br />
Source List se bodo povezani vhodi označili in pomaknili na vrh. Nepovezani<br />
vhodi pa se bodo pomaknili na dno.<br />
Uporaba barvnih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku za seznam virov<br />
- TTOOLS (Option): prikaz m<strong>en</strong>ijev Edit Name in Information.<br />
Če si želite ogledati zunanji signalni vir, pritisnite gumb SOURCE na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku. Način TV-ja lahko izberete s pritiskom gumba TV, številskih<br />
gumbov (0~9) ali gumba P < / > na daljinskem upravljalniku.<br />
Input<br />
Source List<br />
Edit Name<br />
❑<br />
Edit Name<br />
U kunt het op <strong>de</strong> ingang<strong>en</strong> aangeslot<strong>en</strong> apparaat e<strong>en</strong> naam gev<strong>en</strong> om <strong>de</strong> selectie van <strong>de</strong> ingangsbron te vere<strong>en</strong>voudig<strong>en</strong>.<br />
• VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcor<strong>de</strong>r / PC / DVI PC / DVI / TV / IPTV /<br />
Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N<br />
Če je na vrata HDMI IN 2 povezan računalnik z ločljivostjo PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz,<br />
nastavite način HDMI IN 2 (DVI) v možnosti Edit Name načina Input na PC.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 25
Računalniški zaslon<br />
• Nastavitev programske opreme PC-ja (v okolju Windows XP)<br />
Spodaj so prikazane nastavitve zaslona v OS Windows za tipični računalnik.<br />
Dejanski prikazi na računalniškem zaslonu bodo najbrž drugačni, odvisno<br />
od različice operacijskega sistema Windows in grafične kartice. Četudi se<br />
<strong>de</strong>janski prikazi razlikujejo, v večini primerov veljajo iste osnovne nastavitv<strong>en</strong>e<br />
informacije. (Sicer se obrnite na proizvajalca računalnika ali <strong>Samsung</strong>ovega<br />
trgovca.)<br />
1. Najprej kliknite na možnost ‘Nadzorna plošča’ v m<strong>en</strong>iju Start v OS Windows.<br />
2. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite na ‘Vi<strong>de</strong>z in teme’ in prikazalo se<br />
bo pogovorno okno zaslona.<br />
3. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite na ‘Zaslon’ in prikazalo se bo<br />
pogovorno okno zaslona.<br />
4. Pomaknite se na zavihek ‘Nastavitve’ v pogovornem oknu zaslona.<br />
Pravilna nastavitev velikosti (ločljivost)<br />
Optimalno : PS42B430 : 1024x768 pixels, PS50B430 : 1360x768 pixels<br />
Če je v pogovornem oknu nastavitev zaslona na voljo možnost za navpično<br />
frekv<strong>en</strong>co, je nj<strong>en</strong>a ustrezna vrednost ‘60’ ali ‘60 Hz’. Sicer samo kliknite ‘V<br />
redu’ in zaprite pogovorno okno.<br />
Načini zaslona<br />
Položaj in velikost zaslona se razlikujeta gle<strong>de</strong> na vrsto računalniškega monitorja in njegovo ločljivost.<br />
Priporoč<strong>en</strong>e so ločljivosti v tabeli.<br />
• Vhod HDMI/DVI<br />
Način<br />
Ločljivost<br />
Vodoravna<br />
frekv<strong>en</strong>ca (kHz)<br />
Navpična<br />
frekv<strong>en</strong>ca (Hz)<br />
Točkovna ura<br />
(MHz)<br />
Polariteta sinhr.<br />
(V/N)<br />
PS42B430<br />
PS50B430<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
VESA DMT<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
VESA CVT<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, morate uporabiti vtič HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
Način prepletanja ni podprt.<br />
Če izberete nestandardno obliko vi<strong>de</strong>o zapisa, TV mogoče ne bo <strong>de</strong>loval pravilno.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 26
Podprti program<br />
❑<br />
Self Diagnosis<br />
• Picture Test, Sound Test, Signal Information<br />
Če m<strong>en</strong>ite, da imate težave s sliko, zvokom ali signalom, izvedite preskus. Ogledate si lahko stanje težave.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Če iz zvočnikov televizorja ne prihaja zvok, pred izvedbo preskusa zvoka preverite, ali je v m<strong>en</strong>iju Sound možnost Speaker<br />
Select nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na TV Speaker.<br />
Med preskusom se melodija predvaja tudi, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na External Speaker ali če je bil<br />
zvok izkloplj<strong>en</strong> s pritiskom gumba MMUTE.<br />
Če merilnik jakosti signalov kaže, da je signal šibak, fizično prilagodite ant<strong>en</strong>o, da povečate jakost signalov. Nadaljujte s<br />
prilagajanjem ant<strong>en</strong>e, dokler ne naj<strong>de</strong>te najboljšega položaja z najmočnejšim signalom.<br />
Software Upgra<strong>de</strong><br />
Da bi bil iz<strong>de</strong>lek opremlj<strong>en</strong> z najnovejšimi funkcijami digitalne televizije, so nadgradnje programske opreme redno oddajane kot<br />
<strong>de</strong>l običajnega televizijskega signala. Televizor samo<strong>de</strong>jno zazna take signale in prikaže obvestilo o nadgradnji programske<br />
opreme. Imate možnost namestitve nadgradnje.<br />
• By USB<br />
Pogon USB, na katerem je nadgradnja v<strong>de</strong>lane programske opreme, vstavite v televizor.<br />
Pazite, da med posodobitvijo ne odklopite napajanja ali odstranite pogona USB. Ko bo<br />
nadgradnja v<strong>de</strong>lane programske opreme končana, se bo televizor samo<strong>de</strong>jno izklopil in<br />
znova vklopil. Po končani nadgradnji preverite različico v<strong>de</strong>lane programske opreme. Ko<br />
je programska oprema nadgraj<strong>en</strong>a, se uporabniške nastavitve vi<strong>de</strong>a in zvoka vrnejo na<br />
privzete (tovarniške) vrednosti.<br />
• By Channel<br />
Nadgradnja programske opreme z uporabo oddajnega signala.<br />
• Standby Mo<strong>de</strong> Upgra<strong>de</strong><br />
Da nadaljujete nadgradnjo programske opreme z vkloplj<strong>en</strong>im glavnim napajanjem, s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite<br />
On. 45 minut po preklopu v stanje pripravlj<strong>en</strong>osti se samo<strong>de</strong>jno izve<strong>de</strong> ročna nadgradnja. Ker je napajanje iz<strong>de</strong>lka vkloplj<strong>en</strong>o<br />
notranje, lahko zaslon rahlo sveti. Ta pojav lahko traja več kot 1 uro, dokler se nadgradnja programske opreme ne dokonča.<br />
• Alternative Software<br />
Zam<strong>en</strong>java tr<strong>en</strong>utne programske opreme z novejšo.<br />
❑<br />
HD Connection Gui<strong>de</strong><br />
Prikažejo se kratka navodila, kako optimalno izkoristiti novi HDTV. Nudimo način povezave za naprave HD.<br />
❑ Contact <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Na voljo vam je <strong>Samsung</strong>ov klicni c<strong>en</strong>ter, spletno mesto in informacije o iz<strong>de</strong>lku.<br />
N S pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ se lahko pomaknete na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran.<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
Pogon USB<br />
plošča<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 27
Priporočila gle<strong>de</strong> uporabe<br />
Funkcija teleteksta<br />
Večina TV-postaj nudi informacije v pisni obliki prek teleteksta. Na začetni stran teleteksta boste dobili informacije o tem, kako<br />
uporabljati to storitev. Poleg tega lahko z gumbi na daljinskem upravljalniku izbirate različne možnosti, ki bodo zadovoljile vaše<br />
potrebe.<br />
N Za pravil<strong>en</strong> prikaz informacij teleteksta mora biti sprejem kanala stanovit<strong>en</strong>. Sicer lahko manjka kakšna informacija ali pa<br />
nekatere strani ne morejo biti izpisane.<br />
1 : (Izhod)<br />
Izhod iz prikaza teleteksta.<br />
2 6 (Kazalo)<br />
Za izpis vsebine in<strong>de</strong>ksa kadar koli, ko gledate teletekst.<br />
3 5 (Razkrij)<br />
Uporabite za odkrivanje skritega besedila (na primer odgovori na vprašanja iz kviza).<br />
Za prikaz običajnega zaslona pritisnite še <strong>en</strong>krat.<br />
1<br />
<br />
4 4 (Velikost)<br />
Pritisnite za prikaz črk dvojne velikosti v zgornji polovici zaslona. Za spodnjo<br />
polovico zaslona pritisnite še <strong>en</strong>krat. Za prikaz običajnega zaslona pritisnite še<br />
<strong>en</strong>krat.<br />
5 8 (Shrani)<br />
Uporabite za shranjevanje strani teleteksta.<br />
6 / (teletekst vkloplj<strong>en</strong>/mešano)<br />
Pritisnite, da boste aktivirali teletekst, potem ko ste izbrali kanal, ki omogoča storitev<br />
teleteksta. Pritisnite dvakrat, da teletekst prekrijete s tr<strong>en</strong>utnim zaslonom.<br />
7 1 (Podstran)<br />
Za prikaz podstrani, ki je na voljo.<br />
8 2 (Stran gor)<br />
Za prikaz naslednje strani teleteksta.<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
9 3 (Stran dol)<br />
Za prikaz prejšnje strani teleteksta.<br />
0 0 (Način)<br />
Pritisnite za izbiro načina teleteksta (LIST/FLOF). Če ga pritisnete v načinu LIST, bo<br />
preklopil v način List save. V načinu List save lahko z gumbom 8 (Shrani) shranite<br />
stran teleteksta na seznam.<br />
6<br />
#<br />
! 9 (Zadrži)<br />
Uporabite zato, da boste zadržali prikazano stran, če je izbrana stran povezana z<br />
več drugimi stranmi, ki sledijo samo<strong>de</strong>jno. Za nadaljevanje gumb znova pritisnite.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (Prekliči)<br />
Za prikaz oddaje med iskanjem strani.<br />
# Barvni gumbi (r<strong>de</strong>či/zel<strong>en</strong>i/rum<strong>en</strong>i/modri)<br />
N<br />
Če televizijska postaja uporablja sistem FASTEXT, so različne teme na strani<br />
teleteksta označ<strong>en</strong>e z različnimi barvami, izberete pa jih lahko s pritiskom na<br />
obarvane gumbe. Pritisnite <strong>en</strong>ega od njih, odvisno od vaših želja. Prikaže se stran<br />
z ostalimi obarvanimi informacijami, ki jih lahko izberete na isti način. Za prikaz<br />
prejšnje ali naslednje strani pritisnite ustrezni barvni gumb.<br />
Strani teleteksta lahko sprem<strong>en</strong>ite s pritiskom na številske gumbe na daljinskem<br />
upravljalniku.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 28
Strani teleteksta so organizirane v šestih kategorijah:<br />
Del Vsebina<br />
A Številka izbrane strani.<br />
B I<strong>de</strong>ntiteta TV-kanala.<br />
C Številka tr<strong>en</strong>utne strani ali indikatorji iskanja.<br />
D Datum in čas.<br />
E Besedilo.<br />
F Informacije o stanju.<br />
Informacije FASTEXT.<br />
N Informacije teleteksta so pogosto raz<strong>de</strong>lj<strong>en</strong>e na več zaporednih strani, do katerih<br />
imate dostop z:<br />
- Vnosom številke strani<br />
- Izbiro naslova na seznamu<br />
- Izbiro obarvanega naslova (sistem FASTEXT)<br />
<br />
O<br />
Pritisnite gumb TV, če želite zapreti prikaz teleteksta.<br />
Specifikacije kompleta za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o (VESA)<br />
Opremo za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o namestite na trdno st<strong>en</strong>o, pravokotno na tla.<br />
Pri pritrjevanju na druge gradb<strong>en</strong>e materiale se obrnite na najbližjega prodajalca.<br />
Če ga namestite na strop ali poševno st<strong>en</strong>o, lahko pa<strong>de</strong> in povzroči hu<strong>de</strong> telesne poškodbe.<br />
Družina iz<strong>de</strong>lkov Palci Spec. VESA (A * B)<br />
LCD-TV<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
Standardni<br />
vijak<br />
M4<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
M8<br />
Količina<br />
4<br />
PDP-TV<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8 4<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Zagotavljamo standardne dim<strong>en</strong>zije kompletov opreme za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o, kot je prikazano v zgornji tabeli.<br />
Pri nakupu našega kompleta opreme za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o dobite podrobna navodila za namestitev in vse <strong>de</strong>le, ki jih<br />
potrebujete pri tem.<br />
Ne uporabljajte vijakov, katerih dim<strong>en</strong>zije so daljše od standardnih, saj lahko poškodujejo notranjost televizorja.<br />
Pri opremi za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o, ki ne ustreza specifikacijam za vijake standarda VESA, se lahko dolžina vijakov razlikuje<br />
gle<strong>de</strong> na nj<strong>en</strong>e specifikacije.<br />
Ne uporabljajte vijakov, ki ne ustrezajo specifikacijam za vijake standarda VESA. Vijakov ne privijajte premočno, saj lahko<br />
poškodujete iz<strong>de</strong>lek ali povzročite, da ta pa<strong>de</strong>, in tako poškodujete sebe ali druge. <strong>Samsung</strong> ni odgovor<strong>en</strong> za take nesreče.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> ni odgovor<strong>en</strong> za poškodovanje iz<strong>de</strong>lka in telesne poškodbe, če stranka uporablja opremo za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o, ki ni<br />
VESA ali ki ni odobr<strong>en</strong>a, ali če ne upošteva navodil za namestitev iz<strong>de</strong>lka.<br />
Naša mo<strong>de</strong>la velikosti 57 in 63 palcev ne ustrezata specifikacijam VESA. Zato morate za ta mo<strong>de</strong>l uporabiti naš nam<strong>en</strong>ski<br />
komplet opreme za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o.<br />
Ko pritrjujete TV, ga ne nagnite za več kot 15 stopinj.<br />
Kompleta za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o ne nameščajte, ko je TV vkloplj<strong>en</strong>.<br />
To lahko povzroči telesne poškodbe zaradi električnega šoka.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 29
Priprava na namestitev opreme za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o<br />
Primer A: Namestitev opreme SAMSUNG za<br />
pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o<br />
Primer B: Namestitev opreme za pritrditev na<br />
st<strong>en</strong>o drugih proizvajalcev<br />
경고<br />
경고<br />
1. Opremo za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o namestite z vrtilnim mom<strong>en</strong>tom 15 kgf·cm ali manj. Če je vrtilni mom<strong>en</strong>t izv<strong>en</strong> določ<strong>en</strong>ega<br />
razpona, lahko poškodujete <strong>de</strong>le iz<strong>de</strong>lka.<br />
2. V kompletu dodatne opreme je držalo – obroč [2], s katerim lahko na televizor <strong>Samsung</strong> namestite opremo za pritrditev na<br />
st<strong>en</strong>o drugega proizvajalca. (Primer B)<br />
N Privijte vijak v luknjo [1] pri nameščanju opreme za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o.<br />
주의<br />
Pritrditev televizorja na st<strong>en</strong>o<br />
주의<br />
Televizorja ni dovolj<strong>en</strong>o vleči, potiskati ali nanj plezati, saj lahko pa<strong>de</strong>. Posebno bodite pozorni na to, da se na<br />
televizor ne nagibajo ali ga premikajo otroci, saj se lahko prevrne, kar lahko povzroči težje poškodbe ali smrt.<br />
Upoštevajte varnostne ukrepe, nave<strong>de</strong>ne na prilož<strong>en</strong>em letaku z varnostnimi ukrepi. Da zagotovite več stabilnosti,<br />
namestite varnostni pripomoček za preprečevanje padcev, kot je opisano v nadaljevanju.<br />
❑<br />
Da preprečite pa<strong>de</strong>c televizorja<br />
1. Namestite vijaka v objemki in ju trdno privijte na st<strong>en</strong>o. Preverite, ali sta vijaka trdno privita na st<strong>en</strong>o.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Morda boste potrebovali dodat<strong>en</strong> material, kot je sidrni vložek, odvisno od vrste st<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
Ker vijaka, objemki in vrvica, ki so potrebni za to, niso prilož<strong>en</strong>i, jih kupite posebej.<br />
2. Odstranite vijaka iz osrednjega <strong>de</strong>la hrbtne strani televizorja, namestite ju v objemki in privijte nazaj na televizor.<br />
N Vijaka morda nista prilož<strong>en</strong>a iz<strong>de</strong>lku.<br />
3. Objemki, namešč<strong>en</strong>i na televizorju, in objemki, pritrj<strong>en</strong>i na st<strong>en</strong>o, povežite z močno vrvico in jo zavežite.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Televizor namestite blizu st<strong>en</strong>e, tako da ne more pasti nazaj.<br />
Vrvico je varno privezati tako, da sta objemki na st<strong>en</strong>i v višini objemk na televizorju ali nižje.<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>n televizor premaknete, odvežite vrvico.<br />
4. Preverite, ali so vsi spoji trdni. Redno preverjajte, ali so spoji poškodovani. Če niste prepričani o varni namestitvi, se obrnite na<br />
strokovnjaka za namestitev.<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 30
Odpravljanje težav<br />
Pre<strong>de</strong>n se obrnete na <strong>Samsung</strong>ovo poprodajno službo, izvedite naslednje <strong>en</strong>ostavne kontrole.<br />
Če težave ne morete odpraviti s pomočjo spodnjih navodil, si zabeležite številko mo<strong>de</strong>la in serijsko številko televizorja in se obrnite<br />
na lokalnega trgovca.<br />
Ni zvoka ali slike<br />
Slika je normalna, v<strong>en</strong>dar ni<br />
zvoka<br />
Ni slike oziroma slika je črnobela<br />
Zvočne in slikovne motnje<br />
Nejasna ali snež<strong>en</strong>a slika,<br />
popač<strong>en</strong> zvok<br />
Nepravilno <strong>de</strong>lovanje<br />
daljinskega upravljalnika<br />
Zaslon je črn in lučka<br />
indikatorja napajanja<br />
neprekinj<strong>en</strong>o utripa<br />
V kotu zaslona se prikaže<br />
poškodovana slika.<br />
Prikaže se sporočilo ‘Resets<br />
all settings to the <strong>de</strong>fault<br />
values’.<br />
• Preverite, ali je napajalni kabel priključ<strong>en</strong> v st<strong>en</strong>sko vtičnico.<br />
• Ne pozabite pritisniti gumba na TV-ju.<br />
• Preverite nastavitev kontrasta in svetlosti slike.<br />
• Preverite glasnost.<br />
• Preverite, ali je možnost Speaker Select nastavlj<strong>en</strong>a na External Speaker.<br />
• Preverite glasnost.<br />
• Preverite, ali ste na daljinskem upravljalniku pritisnili gumb MMUTE .<br />
• Prilagodite barvne nastavitve.<br />
• Preverite, ali je izbran ustrez<strong>en</strong> oddajni sistem.<br />
• Odkrijte, katera električna naprava moti <strong>de</strong>lovanje TV-ja, in ga postavite stran od nje.<br />
• TV vključite v drugo st<strong>en</strong>sko vtičnico.<br />
• Preverite smer, lokacijo in povezavo ant<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
• Do teh mot<strong>en</strong>j pogosto pri<strong>de</strong> zaradi uporabe sobne ant<strong>en</strong>e.<br />
• Zam<strong>en</strong>jajte baterije daljinskega upravljalnika.<br />
• Očistite zgornji rob daljinskega upravljalnika (oddajno okno).<br />
• Preverite, ali sta konca baterije + in – pravilno vstavlj<strong>en</strong>a.<br />
• Preverite, ali sta bateriji prazni.<br />
• Na računalniku preverite napajanje, signalni kabel.<br />
• Premaknite miško računalnika ali pritisnite katero koli tipko na tipkovnici.<br />
• Na opremi (STB, DVD, itd.) preverite napajanje, signalni kabel.<br />
• TV uporablja svoj sistem za upravljanje porabe.<br />
• Na plošči ali daljinskem upravljalniku pritisnite gumb Source.<br />
• Izklopite in vklopite TV.<br />
• Če je v nekaterih zunanjih napravah izbrano Scre<strong>en</strong> Fit, se lahko v kotu zaslona prikaže<br />
poškodovana slika. To težavo povzročajo zunanje naprave in ne TV.<br />
• To sporočilo se prikaže, če nekaj časa držite pritisnj<strong>en</strong> gumb EXIT. Za ponastavitev<br />
nastavitev iz<strong>de</strong>lka na tovarniške vrednosti.<br />
Zaščita prostora za namestitev<br />
Iz<strong>de</strong>lek mora biti na zahtevani oddalj<strong>en</strong>osti od ostalih predmetov (npr. st<strong>en</strong>), da zagotovite ustrezno prezračevanje.<br />
Sicer lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do požara ali težave z iz<strong>de</strong>lkom zaradi povišanja notranje temperature iz<strong>de</strong>lka.<br />
Iz<strong>de</strong>lek namestite na zahtevani oddalj<strong>en</strong>osti, ki je nave<strong>de</strong>na na sliki.<br />
N Če želite uporabiti stojalo ali opremo za pritrditev na st<strong>en</strong>o, uporabite samo <strong>de</strong>le, ki jih nudi podjetje <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics.<br />
- Čer uporabite <strong>de</strong>le drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do težav z iz<strong>de</strong>lkom ali do telesne poškodbe zaradi padca iz<strong>de</strong>lka.<br />
- Če uporabite <strong>de</strong>le drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pri<strong>de</strong> do težav z iz<strong>de</strong>lkom ali do požara zaradi povišanja notranje<br />
temperature iz<strong>de</strong>lka, ki je posledica slabega prezračevanja.<br />
N Vi<strong>de</strong>z se lahko razlikuje gle<strong>de</strong> na iz<strong>de</strong>lek.<br />
• Namestitev iz<strong>de</strong>lka s stojalom<br />
• Namestitev iz<strong>de</strong>lka z opremo za pritrditev na<br />
st<strong>en</strong>omount<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 31
Specifikacije<br />
Opisi in značilnosti v tej knjižici so zgolj informativne narave in se lahko sprem<strong>en</strong>ijo brez predhodnega obvestila.<br />
Ime mo<strong>de</strong>la PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Velikost zaslona (diagonala) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
Ločljivost PC-ja 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360x768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Izhod zvoka 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Dim<strong>en</strong>zije (ŠxVxG)<br />
Osrednji <strong>de</strong>l<br />
S stojalom<br />
Teža<br />
Osrednji <strong>de</strong>l<br />
S stojalom<br />
Okoljski vidiki<br />
Delovna temperatura<br />
Delovna vlažnost<br />
Temperatura shranjevanja<br />
Vlažnost pri shranjevanju<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
31 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Zasnovo in specifikacije lahko sprem<strong>en</strong>imo brez obvestila.<br />
Naprava je digitalni aparat razreda B.<br />
Za napajanje in porabo <strong>en</strong>ergije si oglejte nalepko na iz<strong>de</strong>lku.<br />
Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, morate uporabiti vtič HDMI IN 2 (DVI).<br />
Slov<strong>en</strong>ščina - 32
Kullanım Talimatları<br />
• Ekran Görüntüsünün Takılması<br />
Plazma ekranı üzerin<strong>de</strong> hareketsiz bir görüntünün (Plazma monitöre bağlanmış olan bir vi<strong>de</strong>o oyun cihazı veya bilgisayarı<br />
kullanırk<strong>en</strong>) 2 saatt<strong>en</strong> fazla kalmasına izin vermeyin; aksi takdir<strong>de</strong> bu, ekrandaki görüntünün kalıcı olmasına yol açar.<br />
Bu görüntü takılmasına, “ ekran yanması” da <strong>de</strong>nir. Bu tür bir kalıcı görüntüyü önlemek için hareketsiz bir görüntü ekrandayk<strong>en</strong><br />
parlaklık ve kontrast <strong>de</strong>ğerlerini düşük bir seviyeye ayarlayınız.<br />
• Bulunduğunuz Rakım<br />
Bu PDP’nin normal çalışabilmesi için 2000m’<strong>de</strong>n düşük bir rakımda olması gerekir. 2000 m’<strong>de</strong>n daha yüksek rakımlarda<br />
düzgün çalışmayabilir; böyle bir yere kurmayın ve çalıştırmayın.<br />
• PDP TV’nin üst kısmında ısınma<br />
Uzun süreli kullanımdan sonra panelin yaydığı aşırı ısı ürünün üst kısmındaki havalandırma <strong>de</strong>liğin<strong>de</strong>n çıktığı için, ürünün üst<br />
tarafı sıcak olabilir. Bu normaldir ve ürün<strong>de</strong> herhangi bir kusur ya da çalışma hatası olduğu anlamına gelmez. Ancak, çocuklar<br />
ürünün üst kısmına dokundurulmamalıdır.<br />
• Ürün<strong>de</strong>n çıtırtılar geliyor.<br />
Sıcaklık veya nem gibi çevre koşullarındaki <strong>de</strong>ğişiklik ne<strong>de</strong>niyle ürün daraldığı veya g<strong>en</strong>işlediği zaman çıtırtı oluşabilir.<br />
Bu normaldir ve ünit<strong>en</strong>in bir kusuru <strong>de</strong>ğildir.<br />
• Hücre Kusurları<br />
PDP’<strong>de</strong>, 2.360.000 (HD-düzeyi) ila 6.221.000 (FHD-düzeyi) piksel<strong>de</strong>n oluşan ve bu ne<strong>de</strong>nle karmaşık bir üretim teknolojisi<br />
gerektir<strong>en</strong> bir panel kullanılmaktadır. Bununla birlikte, ekranda birkaç parlak veya karanlık piksel bulunabilir. Bu piksellerin,<br />
ürünün performansına olumsuz etkisi olmaz.<br />
• TV’yi 5°C (41°F) altındaki sıcaklıklarda çalıştırmaktan kaçının<br />
• Çok uzun süreyle görüntül<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> durağan bir görüntü PDP Panelin<strong>de</strong> kalıcı hasara ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
PDP TV’nin uzun süre 4:3 formatında izl<strong>en</strong>mesi, ekrandaki farklı ışın emisyonundan dolayı ekranın<br />
solunda, sağında ve ortasında görüntül<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> k<strong>en</strong>arların izlerinin kalmasına yol açabilir. DVD veya oyun<br />
konsolu çalıştırmak da ekranda b<strong>en</strong>zer bir etkiye ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir. Yukarıdaki etkilerin ne<strong>de</strong>n olduğu<br />
hasarlar Garanti kapsamında <strong>de</strong>ğildir.<br />
• Ekrandaki görüntü izleri.<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o oyunlarının ve PC’nin durağan görüntülerinin belirli bir süre<strong>de</strong>n fazla ekranda kalması, kısmi görüntü izleri oluşturabilir.<br />
Bu etkiyi önlemek için, durağan görüntüleri ekranda tutark<strong>en</strong> ‘parlaklık’ ve ‘kontrast’ <strong>de</strong>recelerini azaltın.<br />
• Garanti<br />
- Kalıcı görüntü ile ilgili hasarlar garanti kapsamına girmez.<br />
- Ekranın yanması garanti kapsamında <strong>de</strong>ğildir.<br />
• Montaj<br />
Setinizi çok tozlu, aşırı yüksek ya da düşük sıcaklıklı, aşırı nemli, kimyasal mad<strong>de</strong> içer<strong>en</strong> ve havalimanı, tr<strong>en</strong> istasyonu vs. gibi<br />
sürekli çalışma gerektir<strong>en</strong> yerlere takmadan önce mutlaka yetkili bir servis merkeziyle görüşün. Aksi takdir<strong>de</strong> setiniz<strong>de</strong> ciddi<br />
hasarlar meydana gelebilir.<br />
Dijital TV Uyarısı<br />
1. Digital TV(DVB) ile ilgili olan işlevler, yalnız DVB-T (MPEG2 ve MPEG4 AVC) dijital yer üstü sinyallerinin yayınlandığı ya da<br />
uyumlu bir DVB-C(MPEG2 ve MPEG4 AAC) kablolu TV hizmetine erişiminizin olduğu ülkeler<strong>de</strong>/alanlarda kullanılabilir.<br />
Lütf<strong>en</strong> bölg<strong>en</strong>iz<strong>de</strong>ki DVB-T ya da DVB-C sinyallerinin alınma olasılığı hakkında yerel bayiiniz ile görüşünüz.<br />
2. DVB-T; dijital yer üstü televizyonların yayını için bir DVB Avrupa Birliği standardıdır ve DVB-C ise, kablolu dijital TV'lerin<br />
yayını içindir.<br />
Ancak, EPG (Elektrikli Program Kılavuzu), VOD (Talep üzerine vi<strong>de</strong>o) ve diğerleri gibi bazı ayrıştırılmış özellikler, bu<br />
spesifikasyona dahil edilmemiştir. Bu ne<strong>de</strong>nle, şu anda <strong>de</strong>stekl<strong>en</strong>memektedirler.<br />
3. Bu TV seti [Ağustos, 2008] itibarıyla geçerli DVB-T standartlarını karşılasa bile, gelecekteki DVB-T dijital karasal yayın ve<br />
DVB-C dijital kablo yayınları ile uyumluluğu garanti edilemez.<br />
4. Bazı kablolu TV sağlayıcıları, bu tür bir hizmet için ek ö<strong>de</strong>me talep e<strong>de</strong>bilirler ve onların koşullarına ve durumlarına<br />
uymanız gerekebilir.<br />
5. Bazı Dijital TV fonksiyonları, bazı ülkeler<strong>de</strong> ya da bölgeler<strong>de</strong> kullanımda olmayabilir ve DVB-C, tüm sağlayıcılar ile doğru<br />
şekil<strong>de</strong> çalışmayabilir.<br />
6. Daha fazla bilgi için lütf<strong>en</strong> yerel <strong>Samsung</strong> müşteri hizmetleri merkeziniz ile iletişim kurun.<br />
SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE ile irtibata geçin<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> ürünleriyle ilgili soru ya da yorumlarınız olursa lütf<strong>en</strong> SAMSUNG müşteri <strong>de</strong>stek merkezine başvurun.<br />
(Daha fazla bilgi için arka kapağa bakın.)<br />
© 2009 <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />
Türkçe - 2
İçin<strong>de</strong>kiler<br />
TV'nizin Bağlanması ve Hazırlanması<br />
■ Parçaların Kontrol Edilmesi........................................................4<br />
■ Stand Tabanının Kullanımı.........................................................4<br />
■ Stand Tabanının kurulması (mo<strong>de</strong>le bağlıdır)............................ 4<br />
■ Kontrol Paneli ............................................................................5<br />
■ Bağlantı Paneli...........................................................................6<br />
■ Uzaktan Kumandaya Bakış........................................................8<br />
■ Uzaktan Kumandaya Pil Takma.................................................9<br />
■ Açma ve Kapatma......................................................................9<br />
■ Televizyonunuzun Bekleme Moduna Alınması........................... 9<br />
■ M<strong>en</strong>üleri Görme.......................................................................10<br />
■ TOOLS Düğmesini Kullanma...................................................10<br />
■ Monitöre Bakış.........................................................................10<br />
■ Plug & Play Özelliği.................................................................. 11<br />
Kanal Kontrolü<br />
■ Kanalların kay<strong>de</strong>dilmesi ..........................................................12<br />
■ Kanalları Yönetmek..................................................................15<br />
İşlev Tanımı<br />
■ Kurulum M<strong>en</strong>üsünün Yapılandırılması..................................... 22<br />
■ Saati Ayarlama.........................................................................24<br />
■ Kaynak Listesi/ İsim Değiştir....................................................25<br />
■ PC Ekranı.................................................................................26<br />
■ Ekran Modları...........................................................................26<br />
■ Destekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Program..............................................................27<br />
Kullanımla İlgili Öneriler<br />
■ Teleteks Özelliği.......................................................................28<br />
■ WDuvara Montaj Kitinin Özellikleri (VESA).............................. 29<br />
■ Duvar Askısını duvara takmadan önce hazırlık yapma............ 30<br />
■ TV’yi Duvara Sabitleme...........................................................30<br />
■ Sorun Gi<strong>de</strong>rme.........................................................................31<br />
■ Kurulum Alanının Sabitl<strong>en</strong>mesi................................................31<br />
■ Teknik Özellikler.......................................................................32<br />
Görüntü Kontrolü<br />
■ Görüntü Ayarlarının Değiştirilmesi ve Sıfırlanması ................. 17<br />
Ses Kontrolü<br />
■ Ses Standardının Değiştirilmesi...............................................20<br />
■ Ses Modunun Seçilmesi..........................................................21<br />
Türkçe<br />
N O T<br />
Sembol Basın Not Tek Basmalı Düğme TOOL Düğmesi<br />
Türkçe - 3
TV'nizin Bağlanması ve Hazırlanması<br />
Parçaların Kontrol Edilmesi<br />
Kullanım Kılavuzu<br />
Uzaktan Kumanda/<br />
AAA Piller (2ea)<br />
Güç Kablosu Temizleme Bezi Garanti Kartı/<br />
Güv<strong>en</strong>lik Kılavuzu El Kitabı<br />
(Her yer<strong>de</strong> yoktur)<br />
Vidalar (4ea) Kapak-Alt Tutucu-Halka (4ea)<br />
(Bkz. sayfa 30)<br />
Güç Kablosu için<br />
Ferrit Çekir<strong>de</strong>k (1ea)<br />
N<br />
Ferrit çekir<strong>de</strong>k, kabloyu girişim<strong>de</strong>n korumak için kullanılır.<br />
Bir kabloyu bağlark<strong>en</strong>, ferrit çekir<strong>de</strong>ği açın ve kablonun etrafına geçirin.<br />
Stand Tabanının Kullanımı<br />
N<br />
N<br />
PDP iki veya daha fazla kişi tarafından taşınmalıdır. Ekran hasar<br />
görebileceği için, PDP'yi asla zemin üzerine bırakmayın. PDP'yi daima dik<br />
konumda muhafaza edin.<br />
PDP sağ ve sol yön<strong>de</strong> 20 <strong>de</strong>rece dönebilir<br />
-20° ~ 20°<br />
Stand Tabanının kurulması (mo<strong>de</strong>le bağlıdır)<br />
Stand tabanı ve monitörü sabitlemek için 4 vida kullanarak TV sıkıca stand<br />
tabanına takın.<br />
(Setin dış görünümü resim<strong>de</strong> gösteril<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n farklı olabilir.)<br />
TV’nizi duvara monte etm<strong>en</strong>iz durumunda, iki vidayla<br />
stand tabanı bağlantı parçasındaki kapağı (1)<br />
kapatarak gizleyin.<br />
Uyarı<br />
TV’yi hareket ettirme<strong>de</strong>n önce<br />
standı TV’ye sıkıca sabitleyin, aksi takdir<strong>de</strong><br />
stand düşüp ciddi yaralanmaya ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
N<br />
TV iki veya daha fazla kişi tarafından<br />
taşınmalıdır. Ekran hasar görebileceği için,<br />
TV’yi asla zemin üzerine bırakmayın.<br />
TV’yi daima dik konumda muhafaza edin.<br />
Türkçe -
Kontrol Paneli<br />
N<br />
Ürünün r<strong>en</strong>gi ve şekli, mo<strong>de</strong>le bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.<br />
Ön Panel düğmeleri<br />
Çalıştırmak için her<br />
düğmeye dokunun.<br />
1 SOURCE<br />
Tüm mevcut giriş kaynaklarını içer<strong>en</strong> bir m<strong>en</strong>ü görüntüler<br />
(TV, Ext. AV, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI).<br />
N Ekranda gösterimli m<strong>en</strong>ü<strong>de</strong>, uzaktan kumanda<br />
üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki ENTER E düğmesini kullanır gibi bu<br />
düğmeyi kullanın.<br />
2 MENU<br />
TV’nizin özellikler ekran m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görmek için basın.<br />
3 + –<br />
Ses düzeyiniartırmak veya azaltmak için basın.<br />
Ekran m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>, + – düğmelerini<br />
kullanırk<strong>en</strong>,uzaktan kumandada ◄ and ► düğmelerini<br />
kullanın.<br />
4 CH<br />
Kanalları <strong>de</strong>ğiştirmek için basın. Ekran m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>,<br />
CH düğmelerini kullanırk<strong>en</strong>, uzaktan kumandada<br />
▲ ve ▼düğmelerini kullanın.<br />
5 Güç Göstergesi<br />
Güç açıkk<strong>en</strong> yanıp söner ve kapanır; bekleme modunda<br />
sürekli yanar.<br />
6 (POWER)<br />
TV’yi açıp kapatmak için basın.<br />
7 Uzaktan Kumanda S<strong>en</strong>sörü<br />
Uzaktan kumandayı TV üzerin<strong>de</strong> bu noktaya doğru tutun.<br />
8 Hoparlör<br />
Türkçe -
Bağlantı Paneli<br />
Arka Panel<br />
1<br />
2<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
8<br />
ya da<br />
Kablolu Televizyon<br />
Şebekesi<br />
SERVICE 1<br />
ya da<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
6<br />
7<br />
N<br />
Ürünün r<strong>en</strong>gi ve şekli, mo<strong>de</strong>le bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Cihazınıza herhangi bir ses ya da vi<strong>de</strong>o sistemi bağlark<strong>en</strong>, tüm sistemlerin kapalı olduğundan emin olun.<br />
Harici bir cihaza bağlark<strong>en</strong>, bağlantı terminalinin r<strong>en</strong>giyle kabloyu uyumlu hale getirin.<br />
1 POWER IN<br />
Ürünle veril<strong>en</strong> elektrik kablosunu takın.<br />
2 SERVICE 1, 2<br />
Servis konektörü.<br />
3 COMPO<strong>NE</strong>NT IN<br />
Parça için Audio (AUDIO L/R) ve vi<strong>de</strong>o (Y/PB/PR) girişleri.<br />
4 EXT (RGB)<br />
VCR, DVD, vi<strong>de</strong>o oyun cihazları ya da vi<strong>de</strong>o disk çalarlar<br />
gibi harici cihazlar için giriş ya da çıkış bağlantıları.<br />
Input/Output Specification<br />
Giriş<br />
Output<br />
Konektör<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Audio(L/R) RGB Vi<strong>de</strong>o + Audio (L/R)<br />
EXT<br />
Yalnızca TV ya da DTV<br />
✔ ✔ ✔<br />
çıkışı kullanılabilir.<br />
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)<br />
Dijital Ses Cihazına takın.<br />
6 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)<br />
TV’<strong>de</strong>n RCA ses sinyallerini, Ses cihazı gibi harici bir<br />
kaynağa bağlayın.<br />
7 HDMI IN 1, 2 (DVI)<br />
HDMI - HDMI bağlantıları için ek Audio bağlantısı gerekmez.<br />
- HDMI/DVI kablo bağlantısı kullanırk<strong>en</strong>, HDMI IN 2 (DVI)<br />
jakını kullanmalısınız.<br />
N HDMI nedir?<br />
- Yüksek Tanımlı Multimedya Arayüzü, yüksek<br />
tanımlı dijital görüntü verilerinin ve çok kanallı dijital<br />
ses aktarımını sağlar.<br />
- HDMI/DVI terminali, uygun kablolarla (ürün ile<br />
verilmez) ek cihazlara DVI bağlantısını <strong>de</strong>stekler.<br />
HDMI ve DVI arasındaki fark, HDMI cihazının daha<br />
küçük olması, HDCP (Yüksek Bant G<strong>en</strong>işliği Dijital<br />
Kopyalama Koruma) kodlama özelliğinin yüklü olması<br />
ve çok kanallı dijital sesi <strong>de</strong>steklemesidir.<br />
DVI AUDIO IN<br />
Harici cihazlar için DVI ses çıkışları.<br />
8 ANT IN<br />
Ant<strong>en</strong>/Kablo TV şebekesi için 75Ω koaksiyel konektör.<br />
HDMI/DVI ve Parça için <strong>de</strong>stekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> modlar<br />
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p<br />
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O<br />
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O<br />
Parça O O O O O O O<br />
Türkçe -
Yan Paneli<br />
1<br />
2<br />
N<br />
Ürünün r<strong>en</strong>gi ve şekli, mo<strong>de</strong>le bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.<br />
1 G<strong>en</strong>el Arayüz Yuvası<br />
Yuvaya CI (G<strong>en</strong>el Arayüz) kartını yerleştirin.<br />
(bkz. sayfa 23)<br />
− Bazı kanallarda CI Kartı takılmadığında, ekranda<br />
Karışmış Sinyal mesajı görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
− Bir telefon numarası, CI KART Kimliği, Ana Makine<br />
Kimliği ve diğer bilgileri içer<strong>en</strong> eşleştirme bilgileri yaklaşık<br />
2~3 dakika için<strong>de</strong> görüntül<strong>en</strong>ecektir. Bir hata iletisi<br />
görüntül<strong>en</strong>irse, lütf<strong>en</strong> hizmet sağlayıcınızla görüşün.<br />
− Kanal bilgileri yapılandırması tamamlandığında, kanal<br />
listesinin artık güncell<strong>en</strong>diğini belirt<strong>en</strong> Güncelleme<br />
Tamamlandı mesajı görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
N CI-Kartını, üzerin<strong>de</strong> belirtil<strong>en</strong> yön<strong>de</strong> yerleştirin.<br />
N CAM bazı ülkeler<strong>de</strong> ve bölgeler<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>stekl<strong>en</strong>mez, yetkili<br />
satıcınızla kontrol edin.<br />
2 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)<br />
Kamera veya VCR gibi harici cihazlar için vi<strong>de</strong>o ve ses<br />
girişleri.<br />
Türkçe -
Uzaktan Kumandaya Bakış<br />
Uzaktan kumandayı TV’<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> fazla 23 fit kadar uzakta kullanabilirsiniz.<br />
N Parlak ışık, uzaktan kumandanın performansını etkileyebilir.<br />
1 POWER düğmesi<br />
(TV’yi açar ve kapatır)<br />
2 Doğrudan TV modunu seçer<br />
3 Kanal numarasını doğrudan girmek<br />
için numara düğmeleri<br />
4 Sık kullanılanlar kanal listesini<br />
görüntüler.<br />
5 Sesi geçici olarak kapatma<br />
6 Ses seviyesinin artırılması<br />
Ses seviyesinin azaltılması<br />
7 Kullanılabilir kaynak seçimi<br />
8 Geçerli yayındaki bilgileri görmek<br />
için kullanın<br />
9 Sık kullanılan işlevleri hızla seçmek<br />
için kullanın.<br />
0 Control the cursor in the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
! Ekranda Kanal Listelerini<br />
görüntülemek için kullanın.<br />
@ Kanal listesi Pro vb.'<strong>de</strong> bulunan bu<br />
düğmeleri kullanın.<br />
$ Önceki kanal<br />
% Sonraki kanal<br />
Önceki kanal<br />
^ Ana ekran m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntüler<br />
& Elektronik Program Kılavuzu<br />
* Önceki m<strong>en</strong>üye geri döner<br />
( Ana ekran m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>n çıkar<br />
) Sesli Açıklama seçimi.<br />
a Dijital altyazı görünümüTeletekst<br />
İşlevleri<br />
Teletext Functions<br />
2 Teletekst görünümün<strong>de</strong>n çıkar<br />
(mo<strong>de</strong>le bağlı olarak)<br />
7 Teletekst modu seçimi (LIST/FLOF)<br />
8 Teletekst gösterimi<br />
9 Teletekst boyutu<br />
! Teleteksti hafızaya alma<br />
@ Fastext konu seçimi<br />
# Teletekst gösterimi/teletekst bilgileri<br />
ve normal yayının aynı anda<br />
gösterimi<br />
$ Teletekst alt sayfası<br />
% P :Teletekstte sonraki sayfa<br />
P :Teletekstte önceki sayfa<br />
^ Teletekst dizini<br />
* Teletekst tutma<br />
( Teletekst iptali<br />
<br />
Türkçe -
Uzaktan Kumandaya Pil Takma<br />
1. Resim<strong>de</strong> gösterildiği gibi uzaktan kumandanın arkasındaki kapağı kaldırın.<br />
2. İki AAA boyutunda pil takın.<br />
N Pillerin “+” ve “–” uçlarının bölme için<strong>de</strong>ki şekle uygun olmasına dikkat edin.<br />
3. Kapağı kapatın<br />
N Uzaktan kumandayı uzunca bir süre kullanmayacaksanız, pilleri çıkarın ve<br />
serin ve kuru bir yer<strong>de</strong> muhafaza edin.<br />
N<br />
Uzaktan kumanda çalışmazsa! Aşağıdakileri kontrol edin:<br />
1. TV açık mı?<br />
2. Pillerin artı ve eksi uçları ters olarak mı takılmış?<br />
3. Piller bitmiş mi?<br />
4. Elektrik kesintisi veya güç kablosunun çıkması gibi bir durum var mı?<br />
5. Yakınlarda flüoresan lambası veya neon işareti var mı?<br />
Açma ve Kapatma<br />
Güç kablosu, cihazınızın arka tarafına bağlıdır.<br />
1. Güç kablosunu uygun bir prize takın.<br />
N Cihazınız üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki bekleme göstergesi ışığı yanar.<br />
2. Cihazınız üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki POWER P düğmesine basın.<br />
N TV'yi açmak için uzaktan kumandanın POWER P ya da TV düğmesine <strong>de</strong> basabilirsiniz.<br />
3. Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki numara düğmelerine (0~9) veya kanal yukarı/aşağı (< / >) düğmesine veya cihazınızdaki<br />
< CH > düğmesine basın.<br />
N Cihazı ilk kez açtığınızda, m<strong>en</strong>ülerin görüntül<strong>en</strong>mesini istediğiniz dili seçm<strong>en</strong>iz ist<strong>en</strong>ecektir.<br />
4. Cihazınızı kapatmak için y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n POWERP düğmesine basın.<br />
Televizyonunuzun Bekleme Moduna Alınması<br />
Cihazınız, güç tüketimini azaltmak için bekleme moduna alınabilir. Bekleme modu izlemeyi geçici olarak (örneğin yemek sırasında)<br />
kesmek istediğiniz<strong>de</strong> yararlı olur.<br />
1. Uzaktan kumandanın POWERP düğmesine basın.<br />
N Ekrandaki görüntü kapanır ve cihazınızın üzerin<strong>de</strong> kırmızı bekleme göstergesi yanar.<br />
2. Cihazınızı y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n açmak için tekrar POWERP, düğmesine, numara düğmelerine (0~9), TV düğmesine veya kanal yukarı/<br />
aşağı (< / >) düğmesine basmanız yeterlidir.<br />
N Cihazınızı uzun süre (örneğin, tatile gittiğiniz<strong>de</strong>) bekleme modunda bırakmayın. Cihazı elektrik şebekesin<strong>de</strong>n ve ant<strong>en</strong><br />
bağlantılarından ayırmak <strong>en</strong> doğru işlemdir.<br />
Türkçe -
M<strong>en</strong>üleri Görme<br />
1. Cihazınız açıkk<strong>en</strong> MENU düğmesine basın. Ana m<strong>en</strong>ü ekranda görünür.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ünün sol tarafında simgeler bulunur: Görüntü, Ses, Kanal, Kurulum,<br />
Giriş, Destek.<br />
2. Simgeler<strong>de</strong>n birini seçmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından,<br />
simgelerin alt m<strong>en</strong>üsüne girmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
3. Çıkmak için EXIT düğmesine basın.<br />
N Ekranda görül<strong>en</strong> m<strong>en</strong>üler yaklaşık bir dakika sonra kaybolacaktır.<br />
Modu : Standart<br />
Görüntü<br />
<br />
Hücre Işığı : 4<br />
Kontrast : 95<br />
Parlaklık : 45<br />
Netlik : 50<br />
R<strong>en</strong>k : 50<br />
Ton (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
TOOLS Düğmesini Kullanma<br />
Sık kullanılan işlevlerinizi hızla ve kolayca seçmek için TOOLS düğmesini kullanabilirsiniz. Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsü hangi harici giriş<br />
modunu izlediğinize bağlı olarak <strong>de</strong>ğişir.<br />
1. TOOLS düğmesine basın. Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsü görünecektir<br />
2. Bir m<strong>en</strong>ü seçmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine<br />
basın.<br />
3. Seçil<strong>en</strong> öğeleri görüntülemek, <strong>de</strong>ğiştirmek veya kullanmak için ▲/▼/◄/►/<br />
ENTERE düğmesine basın. Her işlevin <strong>de</strong>taylı açıklaması için, ilgili sayfaya başvurun.<br />
Araçlar<br />
• Resim Modu, bkz. sayfa 17<br />
• Ses Modu, bkz. sayfa 20<br />
• Kapanış Ayarı, bkz. sayfa 24<br />
• Enrj. Tasarrufu, bkz. sayfa 23<br />
• Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle (ya da Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil), bkz. sayfa 15<br />
<br />
Resim Modu ◄ Standart ►<br />
Ses Modu : Kişisel<br />
Kapanış Ayarı : Kapalı<br />
Enrj. Tasarrufu : Kapalı<br />
Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle<br />
U Taşı E Giriş e Çıkış<br />
Monitöre Bakış<br />
Ekran, geçerli kanalı ve bazı belirli ses-vi<strong>de</strong>o ayarlarının durumunu tanımlar.<br />
O Bilgileri görüntülemek için INFO düğmesine basın.<br />
Uzaktan kumandadaki PAIRING düğmesine basın. TV; kanalı, sesin türünü ve<br />
belirli görüntü ve ses ayarlarının durumunu görüntüleyecektir.<br />
• ▲, ▼: Diğer kanal bilgilerini görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Geçerli durumda seçili kanala<br />
gitmek istediğiniz<strong>de</strong>, ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
• ◄, ►: Geçerli kanalda ist<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> programın bilgilerini görüntüleyebilirsiniz.<br />
N INFO düğmesine bir kez daha basın veya yaklaşık 10 saniye bekleyin, ekran<br />
otomatik olarak kaybolur.<br />
abc1<br />
DTV Air<br />
15<br />
18:11 Thu 6 Jan<br />
Life On V<strong>en</strong>us Av<strong>en</strong>ue<br />
Unclassified<br />
No Detaild Information<br />
18:00 ~ 6:00<br />
E Watch<br />
' Information<br />
Türkçe - 10
Plug & Play Özelliği<br />
TV ilk kez açıldığında, temel ayarlar otomatik olarak başlar ve birbiri ardına <strong>de</strong>vam e<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Plug & Play çalışırk<strong>en</strong> 1 dakika boyunca uzaktan kumandadan bir tuşa basılmazsa Ekran Koruyucu etkinleştirilir.<br />
15 dakika boyunca bir çalıştırma sinyali verilmezse, Ekran Koruyucu etkinleştirilir.<br />
1. Uzaktan kumandanın POWER düğmesine basın. You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u<br />
language. m<strong>en</strong>üsü otomatik olarak gösterilir. ▲ ve ya ▼ düğmesine basarak<br />
uygun dili seçin.<br />
Seçiminizi onaylamak için ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
Plug & Play<br />
You can set the m<strong>en</strong>u language.<br />
2. ◄ ya da ► düğmesine basarak Dükkan Demo ya da Ev<strong>de</strong> Kullanım seç<strong>en</strong>eğini<br />
seçin, ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ev ortamınızda <strong>en</strong> iyi resim için TV’yi Ev<strong>de</strong> Kullanıme moduna ayarlamanızı<br />
öneririz.<br />
Dükkan Demo modu yalnızca satış ortamlarında kullanmak içindir.<br />
Cihaz kazara Dükkan Demo moduna ayarlanmışsa ve siz Ev<strong>de</strong> Kullanım moduna (Standart) dönmek istiyorsanız:<br />
Televizyon üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki Volume düğmesine basın. Ses OSD görüntül<strong>en</strong>diğin<strong>de</strong> televizyon üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki MENU düğmesine<br />
basın ve 5 saniye boyunca basılı tutun.<br />
3. ENTERE düğmesine basın. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak uygun ülkeyi seçin. Seçiminizi onaylamak için ENTERE<br />
düğmesine basın.<br />
4. Seçili bağlantının kanallarını kay<strong>de</strong>tmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın, sonra ENTER E düğmesine basın.<br />
• Dış ant<strong>en</strong>: Dış ant<strong>en</strong> sinyalidir.<br />
• Kablo: Kablolu ant<strong>en</strong> sinyalidir.<br />
5. ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basarak hafızaya alınacak kanal kaynağını seçin. Başlama seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçmek için ENTERE<br />
düğmesine basın.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Dijital & Analog: Dijital ve Analog kanallar.<br />
Dijitalı: Dijital kanallar.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>u Language :<br />
▲<br />
Ne<strong>de</strong>rlands<br />
U Move E Enter<br />
Analog: Analog kanallar.<br />
N Kablolu modu seçme hakkında daha ayrıntılı açıklamalar için, bkz. sayfa 12.<br />
N Kanal arama işlemi otomatik olarak başlatılır ve sonlandırılır.<br />
N Kayda alma işlemini herhangi bir anda kesmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
N Bulunabil<strong>en</strong> tüm kanallar hafızaya alındıktan sonra, Saat Modunu ayarlayın. gösterilir.<br />
6. ENTERE düğmesine basın. Auto seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine ve adından ENTERE düğmesine basın<br />
N <strong>Manuel</strong> seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçers<strong>en</strong>iz Geçerli tarih ve zamanı ayarlayın gösterilir. (bkz. sayfa 24)<br />
N Bir dijital sinyal alırsanız, zaman otomatik olarak ayarlanacaktır. Almazsanız, saati ayarlamak için bkz. sayfa 24.<br />
7. Y<strong>en</strong>i HDTV’niz<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> iyi şekil<strong>de</strong> yararlanma yolları hakkında kısa bir talimat görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir. ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
N Destek m<strong>en</strong>üsünün HD Bağlantısı Kılavuzu için<strong>de</strong>n bu m<strong>en</strong>ü kullanılabilir.<br />
8. TV'niz<strong>de</strong>n keyif alın, mesajı gösterilir. Bitirdiğiniz<strong>de</strong> ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
English<br />
Eesti<br />
▼<br />
Bu özelliği sıfırlamak istiyorsanız...<br />
1. M<strong>en</strong>üyü görüntülemek için MENU düğmesine basın. Kurulum seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçmek<br />
için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
2. Plug & Play seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçmek için ENTERE düğmesine tekrar basın.<br />
3. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin. Y<strong>en</strong>i bir TV’nin varsayılan PIN numarası<br />
‘0-0-0-0’dır.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
PIN numarasını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirmek istiyorsanız sayfa 22’ye bakın.<br />
Plug & Play özelliği yalnızca TV modunda kullanılabilir.<br />
Kurulum<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü Dili<br />
Zaman<br />
Yayın<br />
Güv<strong>en</strong>lik<br />
G<strong>en</strong>el<br />
: Türkçe<br />
►<br />
Türkçe - 11
Kanal Kontrolü<br />
Kanalların kay<strong>de</strong>dilmesi<br />
❑<br />
Ülke<br />
• Dijital Kanal: Dijital kanallar için ülkeyi <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.<br />
• Analog Kanal: Analog kanallar için ülkeyi <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
❑<br />
PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.<br />
Otomatik kayıt<br />
Etkin yayın istasyonları olan tüm kanalları tarar (ve kullanılabilirlik ülk<strong>en</strong>ize göre<br />
<strong>de</strong>ğişir) ve bunları TV’nin hafızasına kay<strong>de</strong><strong>de</strong>r.<br />
Seçili bağlantının kanallarını hafızaya kay<strong>de</strong><strong>de</strong>bilirsiniz.<br />
• Dış Ant<strong>en</strong>: Dış ant<strong>en</strong> sinyalidir.<br />
• Kablo: Kablolu ant<strong>en</strong> sinyalidir.<br />
N Kablo seçerk<strong>en</strong>,<br />
• Arama Modu: Arama modunu görüntüler. (Hızlı)<br />
- Network ID: Şebeke tanımlama kodunu görüntüler.<br />
- Frekans: Kanalın frekansını görüntüler.<br />
- Modülasyon: Kullanılabilir modülasyon <strong>de</strong>ğerlerini görüntüler.<br />
- Simge Hızı: Kullanılabilir simge hızlarını görüntüler.<br />
• Arama Modu: Arama modunu görüntüler. (Tam, Ağ)<br />
- Frekans(Başlat ~ Durdur): Kanalın frekansını görüntüler.<br />
- Modülasyon: Kullanılabilir modülasyon <strong>de</strong>ğerlerini görüntüler.<br />
- Simge Hızı: Kullanılabilir simge hızlarını görüntüler.<br />
Kanal kaynağını hafızaya kay<strong>de</strong><strong>de</strong>bilirsiniz.<br />
• Kablolu Alıcı & Analog: Dijital ve Analog kanallar.<br />
• Kablolu Alıcı: Dijital kanallar.<br />
• Analog: Analog kanallar.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Otomatik kayıt işlemini durdurmak isters<strong>en</strong>iz ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
Otomatik Programlama Durdurulsun mu? mesajı görünecektir.<br />
◄ ya da ► düğmesine basarak Yes seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin, ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi ile kilitl<strong>en</strong>mişse, PIN giriş p<strong>en</strong>ceresi görünür.<br />
Kanal<br />
Ülke<br />
Otomatik kayıt<br />
El<strong>de</strong>n kayıt<br />
Kablolu Arama Seç<strong>en</strong>eği<br />
Şimdiki ve Sonraki Kılavuz<br />
Tam Kılavuz<br />
Varsayılan Kılavuz<br />
: Şimdi/Son.<br />
►<br />
Türkçe - 12
❑<br />
El<strong>de</strong>n kayıt<br />
Bir kanalı elle tarar ve bunu TV’nin hafızasına kay<strong>de</strong><strong>de</strong>r.<br />
• Dijital Kanal (Dijital)<br />
Dijital kanalların elle kay<strong>de</strong>dilmesi<br />
N Digital Channel yalnızca DTV modunda geçerlidir.<br />
• kayıt: ▲, ▼ ya da numara (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak kanal numarasını belirtin.<br />
• Frekans: Numara düğmelerini kullanarak frekansı belirtin.<br />
• Bant g<strong>en</strong>işliği: ▲, ▼ ya da numara (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak bant g<strong>en</strong>işliğini belirtin.<br />
N Tamamlandığında, kanal listesin<strong>de</strong>ki kanallar güncell<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
• Analog kayıt<br />
Analog kanalların elle kay<strong>de</strong>dilmesi.<br />
❑<br />
• Program (Kanala atanacak program numarası): ▲, ▼ ya da numara (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak program numarasını<br />
ayarlar.<br />
• R<strong>en</strong>k Sistemi → Otomatik / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesini kullanarak r<strong>en</strong>k sistemi <strong>de</strong>ğerini ayarlar.<br />
• Ses Sistemi → BG / L / I / DK: ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesini kullanarak ses sistemi <strong>de</strong>ğerini ayarlar.<br />
• Kanal (Kay<strong>de</strong>dilecek kanal numarasını biliyorsanız): ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basarak C (Karasal kanal) ya da S (Kablo<br />
kanalı) seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin. ► düğmesine basın, ardından gerekli numarayı seçmek için ▲, ▼ ya da numara (0~9)<br />
düğmelerine basın.<br />
N Kanal numarasını, numara (0~9) düğmelerine basarak doğrudan seçebilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
Ses yoksa ya da normal olmayan bir ses varsa, gerekli ses standardını y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n seçin.<br />
• Ara (Kanal numaralarını bilmediğiniz<strong>de</strong>): Aramayı başlatmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Kanal Ayarcısı ilk kanal ya<br />
da sizin seçtiğiniz kanal ekranda görüntül<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong>e kadar frekans aralığını tarar.<br />
• Kayıt (Kanal ve ilgili program numarasını kay<strong>de</strong>ttiğiniz<strong>de</strong>): ENTERE düğmesine basarak Tamam ayarına getirin.<br />
N Kanal modu<br />
- C (Karasal kanal modu): Bu modda ik<strong>en</strong>, ant<strong>en</strong>le alınan her bir istasyona atanmış numarayı girerek bir<br />
kanal seçebilirsiniz.<br />
- S (Kablo kanalı modu): Bu modda ik<strong>en</strong>, kablo ile alınan her bir istasyona atanmış numarayı girerek bir kanal<br />
seçebilirsiniz.<br />
Tam Arama Parametrelerini Dznl (Kablo)<br />
Kablolu TV şebekesi arama için frekans ve simge hızı gibi ek arama seç<strong>en</strong>ekleriniayarlayabilirsiniz. (Ülkeye bağlı olarak)<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Frekans (Başlat-Durdur): Kanalın frekansını görüntüler.<br />
Modülasyon: Kullanılabilir modülasyon <strong>de</strong>ğerlerini görüntüler.<br />
Simge Hızı: Kullanılabilir simge hızlarını görüntüler.<br />
Numara düğmelerini (0~9) kullanarak Frekansı (Başlat-Durdur) ve Simge Hızını ayarlayın.<br />
❑<br />
Şimdiki ve Sonraki Kılavuz / Tam Kılavuz<br />
EPG (Elektronik Program Kılavuzu) bilgileri yayıncılar tarafından sağlanır. Herhangi bir kanalda bilgi yayını sebebiyle boş veya<br />
güncelliğini yitirmiş program girişleri görünebilir. Y<strong>en</strong>i bilgiler gelir gelmez ekran dinamik şekil<strong>de</strong> güncell<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
• Şimdiki ve Sonraki Kılavuz: Sol sütunda gösteril<strong>en</strong> altı kanal için, Geçerli program ve Sonraki program bilgileri<br />
görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
• Tam Kılavuz: Program bilgilerini zamana göre sıralanmış bir saatlik dilimler şeklin<strong>de</strong> görüntüler. Zamana göre ileri ya<br />
da geri kaydırılabil<strong>en</strong> iki saatlik program bilgileri görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
Türkçe - 13
❑<br />
Varsayılan Kılavuz<br />
• Şimdi/Son. / Tam Kılavuz: Uzaktan kumandadaki GUIDE düğmesi basılı<br />
olduğunda Şimdi/Son. ya da Tam Kılavuz görüntülemeyi seçebilirsiniz.<br />
Kanal<br />
Şimdiki ve Sonraki Kılavuz<br />
Tam Kılavuz<br />
Varsayılan Kılavuz : Şimdi/Son.<br />
►<br />
Kanal Listes<br />
Režim kanálů<br />
İnce Ayar<br />
: Přidané kanály<br />
O<br />
Kılavuz m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülemek için GUIDE düğmesine basmanız da yeterlidir.<br />
Şimdiki ve Sonraki Kılavuz/ Tam Kılavuz Kullanımı<br />
Şimdiki ve Sonraki Kılavuz<br />
Tam Kılavuz<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
DTV Cable 900 f tn<br />
2:10 Tue 1 Jun<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
Freshm<strong>en</strong> On Campus<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
2:00 - 2:30<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
No Detailed Information<br />
Şimdi<br />
Son.<br />
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
900 f tn Freshm<strong>en</strong> O.. Street Hypn.. No Information<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
901 ITV Play Mint Extra<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
902 Kerrang! Loa<strong>de</strong>d<br />
No Information<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 Kiss Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC Kisstory<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
903 oneword The Distillery<br />
No Information<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
▼ 903 Smash Hits! Smash Hits! Sunday<br />
İzle Bilgi Sayfa • Tam Kılavuz • Çıkış İzle Bilgi Sayfa • Şimdi/Son. • Çıkış<br />
▲/▼/◄/►<br />
(Giriş)<br />
KIRMIZI<br />
YEŞİL<br />
SARI<br />
MAVİ<br />
INFO<br />
▲/▼/◄/► düğmesine basarak bir program seçin.<br />
Sonraki program seçilirse, saat simgesi görüntül<strong>en</strong>erek program zamanlanır. ENTER E düğmesine<br />
tekrar basılırsa, ▲/▼/◄/► düğmesine basarak Programları Değiştirme'yi seçin, saat simgesinin<br />
kaybolması ile zamanlama işlemi iptal edilir.<br />
Programların zamanlanmasıyla ilgili ayrıntılar için ilgili bölüme bakın.<br />
Şimdi/Son. ya da Tam Kılavuz arasında geçiş yapar.<br />
Tam Kılavuz: Geriye hızlı hareket (-24 saat).<br />
Tam Kılavuz: İleriye hızlı hareket (+24 saat).<br />
Kılavuzdan çıkar.<br />
INFO düğmesi ayrıntılı bilgi verir. Ayrıntılı bilgi için<strong>de</strong> Channel Number, Running Zaman, Status Bar,<br />
Par<strong>en</strong>tal Level, Vi<strong>de</strong>o Quality Information (HD / SD), Sound Mo<strong>de</strong>s, Subtitle ya da Teletext, Subtitle veya<br />
Teletext dilleri ve vurgulanan programın kısa bir özeti bulunur. özet uzunsa "..." görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
❑<br />
Kanal Listesi<br />
Kanal Listesi kullanımı hakkındaki ayrıntılı prosedürler için sayfa 15~16’teki açıklamalara bakın.<br />
❑<br />
Kanal Modu<br />
P ▲/▼ düğmesine basıldığında, Kanallar seçil<strong>en</strong> kanal listesi dahilin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>ğişecektir.<br />
• Ekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Kanallar: Kanallar kay<strong>de</strong>dilmiş kanal listesi için<strong>de</strong> geçiş yapacaktır.<br />
• Sık kullanılan Kanallar: Kanallar sık kullanılan kanal listesi için<strong>de</strong> geçiş yapacaktır.<br />
❑<br />
İnce Ayar (yalnızca analog kanal)<br />
Alınan görüntü netse, arama ve kay<strong>de</strong>tme işlemi sırasında otomatik olarak yapılmış olduğu için kanalın ince ayarını<br />
yapmanıza gerek yoktur. Ancak sinyal zayıf ya da bozuksa, kanalın ince ayarını elle yapmanız gerekebilir.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
İnce ayarlanan kanalların, kanal etiketin<strong>de</strong>ki kanal numarasının sağ tarafında bir yıldız “*” işareti bulunur.<br />
If you do not store the fine-tuned channel in memory, adjustm<strong>en</strong>ts are not saved.<br />
İnce ayarı sıfırlamak için, ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak Sıfırla seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine<br />
basın.<br />
Türkçe - 14
Kanalları Yönetmek<br />
Bu m<strong>en</strong>üyü kullanarak Favori kanalları Ekleyebilir / Silebilir ya da ayarlayabilir ve<br />
dijital yayınlar için program kılavuzunu kullanabilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
Tüm Kanallar, Ekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Kanallar, Sık Kullanılanlar ya da Programlandı<br />
ekranında ▲ ya da ▼ düğmelerine ve ENTERE düğmesine basarak bir kanal<br />
seçin. Ardından seçil<strong>en</strong> kanalı izleyebilirsiniz.<br />
Tüm Kanallar: O anda mevcut tüm kanalları gösterir.<br />
Ekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Kanallar: Tüm ekl<strong>en</strong>miş kanalları gösterir.<br />
Sık Kullanılanlar: Tüm favori kanalları gösterir.<br />
Programlandı: Tüm geçerli rezerv edilmiş kanalları gösterir.<br />
Kanal Listesin<strong>de</strong> r<strong>en</strong>kli düğmelerin kullanılması<br />
- Kırmızı (Kanal Tipi): TV, Radyo, Veri/Diğer ve Tümü seç<strong>en</strong>ekleriniz<br />
arasında geçiş yapar.<br />
- Yeşil (Zoom): Bir kanal numarasını büyütür ya da küçültür.<br />
- Sarı (Seçim): Bir<strong>de</strong>n fazla kanal listesi seçer.<br />
- TOOLS(Seç<strong>en</strong>ek): Sil (ya da Ekle), Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle (ya da Sık<br />
Kullanılanlardan Sil), Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme, Kanal Adı Düz<strong>en</strong>leme,<br />
Kanal Numarası Düz<strong>en</strong>leme,Sınıflama, Kilit (ya da Kilit aç), Tümünü<br />
Seç (ya daTüm seçimleri kaldır) ya da Otomatik kayıt m<strong>en</strong>üsünü gösterir.<br />
(Seç<strong>en</strong>ekler m<strong>en</strong>üsü duruma göre <strong>de</strong>ğişebilir.)<br />
Channel<br />
Ekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Kanallar<br />
<br />
Mini Kılavuz<br />
Varsayılan Kılavuz :Şimdi/Son.<br />
Kanal Listesi<br />
Režim kanálů : Přidané kanály<br />
İnce Ayar<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 ♥ C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Tümü • Kanal Tipi • Zoom • Seçim Araçlar<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Kanal Durum Ekranı Simgeleri<br />
A Bir analog kanal. c Sarı düğmeye basılarak seçil<strong>en</strong> bir kanal.<br />
♥ Favori olarak ayarlanmış bir kanal. ( O anda yayınlanmakta olan bir kanal.<br />
\ Kilitl<strong>en</strong>miş bir kanal. ) Rezerv edilmiş bir program<br />
Kanal listelerini getirmek için uzaktan kumandadaki CH LIST düğmesine basın.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Kanal Listesi Araçlar M<strong>en</strong>üsü<br />
Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsünü kullanmak için Araçlar düğmesine basın.<br />
Seç<strong>en</strong>ek m<strong>en</strong>üsü öğeleri kanal durumuna göre <strong>de</strong>ğişebilir.<br />
• Ekle / Sil<br />
İstediğiniz kanalları görüntülemek için bir kanalı silebilir ya da ekleyebilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Silin<strong>en</strong> tüm kanallar Tüm Kanallar m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong> gösterilecektir.<br />
Gri r<strong>en</strong>kli bir kanal, kanalın silindiğini gösterir.<br />
Ekle m<strong>en</strong>üsü yalnızca siliniş kanallar için görünür.<br />
Ayrıca bir kanalı Ekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Kanallar ya da Favori m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> aynı şekil<strong>de</strong><br />
silebilirsiniz.<br />
• Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle / Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil<br />
Sık seyrettiğiniz kanalları favoriler olarak ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
Tüm Kanallar<br />
<br />
824 UKTV Gold<br />
825 UKTV style<br />
A 1 C --<br />
A 2 C --<br />
A 3 C --<br />
A 4 C --<br />
A 5 C --<br />
A 6 C --<br />
A 7 C --<br />
A 8 C --<br />
Tümü • Kanal Tipi • Zoom • Seçim Araçlar<br />
Sil<br />
Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle<br />
Kilit<br />
Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme<br />
Kanal Adı Düz<strong>en</strong>leme<br />
Sınıflama<br />
▼<br />
T Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Araçlar → Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle / Sık<br />
Kullanılanlardan Sil seçimini yaparak Favori kanalı da ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
“♥” sembolü gösterilecek ve kanal bir favori olarak ayarlanacaktır.<br />
Tüm favori kanallar Favori m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong> gösterilecektir.<br />
Ayarladığınız favori kanalları seçmek için uzaktan kumandadaki FAV.CH<br />
düğmesine basın.<br />
Türkçe - 15<br />
Devam ediyor...
• Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme<br />
İzlemek istediğiniz bir programı rezerv ettiys<strong>en</strong>iz, başka bir kanal izliyor olsanız bile kanal otomatik olarak Kanal Listesin<strong>de</strong>ki<br />
rezerv edilmiş kanala geçecektir. Bir programı rezerv etmek için önce geçerli zamanı ayarlayın. (Bkz. Sayfa 24.)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Yalnızca hafızaya alınmış kanallar rezerv edilebilir.<br />
Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki numara düğmelerini basarak kanal, ay, gün, yıl, saat ve dakika ayarlarını doğrudan<br />
yapabilirsiniz.<br />
Bir programın rezerv edilmesi Programlandı m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong> gösterilecektir.<br />
Dijital Program Kılavuzu ve İzleme Rezervasyonu<br />
Bir dijital kanal seçildiğin<strong>de</strong> ve ► düğmesine bastığınızda kanalın Program Kılavuzu görünür.<br />
Yukarıda anlatılan prosedürlere göre bir programı rezerve e<strong>de</strong>bilirsiniz.<br />
• Kanal Adı Düz<strong>en</strong>leme (yalnızca analog kanal)<br />
Kanallar çağrı harfleri kanal seçildiğin<strong>de</strong> görünecek şekil<strong>de</strong> etiketl<strong>en</strong>ebilir.<br />
N<br />
Dijital yayın kanallarının adları otomatik olarak adlandırılır ve etiketl<strong>en</strong>emez.<br />
• Kanal Numarası Düz<strong>en</strong>leme (yalnızca dijital kanal)<br />
Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki numara düğmelerini kullanarak da bir kanal numarası düz<strong>en</strong>leyebilirsiniz.<br />
• Sınıflama (yalnızca analog kanal)<br />
Bu işlem, kayıtlı kanalların kanal numarasını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirm<strong>en</strong>ize olanak verir. Bu işlem otomatik kay<strong>de</strong>tme kullanıldıktan sonra<br />
gerekli olabilir.<br />
• Kilit / Kilit aç<br />
Bir kanalı kilitleyebilirsiniz, bu saye<strong>de</strong> kanal seçilemez ve izl<strong>en</strong>emez. Bu işlev yalnızca Çocuk Kilidi öğesi Açık olarak<br />
ayarlandığında kullanılabilir. (bkz. sayfa 22)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.<br />
Y<strong>en</strong>i bir TV’nin varsayılan PIN numarası "0-0-0-0" dır. M<strong>en</strong>ü<strong>de</strong>n PIN Değiştir seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçerek PIN’i <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.<br />
“\” sembolü gösterilecek ve kanal kilitl<strong>en</strong>ecektir.<br />
• Tümünü Seç / Tüm seçimleri kaldır<br />
• Tümünü Seç: Kanal listesin<strong>de</strong>ki tüm kanalları seçebilirsiniz.<br />
• Tüm seçimleri kaldır: Kanal listesin<strong>de</strong>ki seçili tüm kanalların seçimini kaldırabilirsiniz.<br />
N Aynı anda bir<strong>de</strong>n fazla kanal için ekleme / silme, Favorilere ekleme / Favoriler<strong>de</strong>n silme ya da kilitleme / kilit açma<br />
işlevlerini gerçekleştirebilirsiniz. Tüm seçilmiş kanalları aynı anda ayarlamak için gerekli kanalı seçin ve sarı düğmeye<br />
basın.<br />
N Seçil<strong>en</strong> kanalların solunda c işareti görünür.<br />
N Seçilmiş bir kanal olduğunda yalnızca Tüm seçimleri kaldır seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçebilirsiniz.<br />
• Otomatik kayıt<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ayarlama seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri hakkında daha fazla bilgi için sayfa 12’a başvurun.<br />
Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi ile kilitl<strong>en</strong>mişse, PIN giriş p<strong>en</strong>ceresi görünür.<br />
❑<br />
Kanal Listesi Araçlar M<strong>en</strong>üsü (Programlandı m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>)<br />
Bir rezervasyonu görüntüleyebilir, <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilir ya da silebilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Seç<strong>en</strong>ek m<strong>en</strong>üsünü kullanmak için TOOLS düğmesine basın.<br />
Bilgileri Değiştirme: Bir izleme rezervasyonunu <strong>de</strong>ğiştirmek için seçin.<br />
Programları Değiştirme: Bir izleme rezervasyonunu iptal etmek için seçin.<br />
Bilgi: Bir izleme rezervasyonunu izlemek için seçin.<br />
(Ayrıca rezervasyon bilgisini <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.)<br />
Tümünü Seç / Tüm seçimleri kaldır: Tüm rezerv edilmiş programları seçin<br />
veya seçimleri kaldırın.<br />
Programlandı<br />
1 / 1 / 2009<br />
13:59 5 TV1 Bilgileri Quincy, Değiştirme M.E<br />
18:59 2<br />
Programları Değiştirme<br />
TV3 The Ekolayzer<br />
20:59 2<br />
Bilgi<br />
TV3 McMillan & Wife<br />
Tümünü Seç<br />
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer<br />
Tümü • Zoom • Seçim Araçlar Bilgi<br />
Türkçe - 16
Görüntü Kontrolü<br />
Görüntü Ayarlarının Değiştirilmesi ve Sıfırlanması<br />
❑<br />
Modu<br />
İzleme gereksinimlerinize <strong>en</strong> uygun resim türünü seçebilirsiniz.<br />
• Dinamik: Parlak ortamlar için yüksek tanımlamalı resim seçer.<br />
• Standart: Normal ortamlar için <strong>en</strong> iyi resim görüntüsünü seçer.<br />
• Sinema: Karanlık ortamlar için uygun resim görüntüsünü seçer.<br />
T<br />
Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın.<br />
Ayrıca Araçlar → Resim Modu öğesini seçerek resim modunu da<br />
ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
Görüntü<br />
Modu : Standart ►<br />
Hücre Işığı : 4<br />
Kontrast : 95<br />
Parlaklık : 45<br />
Netlik : 50<br />
R<strong>en</strong>k : 50<br />
Ton (G/R)<br />
: G50/R50<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Hücre Işığı / Kontrast / Parlaklık / Netlik / R<strong>en</strong>k / Ton (G/R)<br />
Televizyonunuzda, resim kalitesine kumanda etm<strong>en</strong>izi sağlayacak çeşitli ayarlar bulunmaktadır.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Hücre Işığı: Piksel parlaklığını ayarlar.<br />
Kontrast: Kontrast düzeyini ayarlar.<br />
Parlaklık: Parlaklık düzeyini ayarlar.<br />
Netlik: Netliği ayarlar.<br />
R<strong>en</strong>k: Ekrandaki çubuğu kullanarak r<strong>en</strong>k doyumunu ayarlar.<br />
Ton (G/R): Kırmızı 100'e ne kadar yakın olursa kırmızı r<strong>en</strong>k o kadar doygun olur.<br />
Önce ayarlanacak bir resim modu seçin. Ayarlanan <strong>de</strong>ğerler her resim modu için kay<strong>de</strong>dilecektir.<br />
Hücre Işığı, Kontrast, Parlaklık, Netlik, R<strong>en</strong>k ya da Ton (G/R) ayarlarında <strong>de</strong>ğişiklik yaptığınızda OSD <strong>de</strong> uygun şekil<strong>de</strong><br />
ayarlanacaktır.<br />
PAL sisteminin Analog TV, Ext., AV, S-Vi<strong>de</strong>o modlarında Ton İşlevini kullanamazsınız.<br />
Ayarlar, televizyonun bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir.<br />
Resmin parlaklık düzeyi azaltılırsa kullanım süresince tüketil<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong>erji önemli ölçü<strong>de</strong> azaltılabilir ve bu, toplam çalışma<br />
maliyetini düşürür.<br />
Gelişmiş Ayarlar<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>’un y<strong>en</strong>i TV’leri önceki mo<strong>de</strong>llere göre daha hassas görüntü ayarları<br />
yapmanıza izin veriyor. Ayrıntılı görüntü ayarlarını yapmak için aşağıya bakın.<br />
N Gelişmiş Ayarlar m<strong>en</strong>üsü Standart ya da Sinema modunda kullanılabilir.<br />
• Siyah Tonu → Kpalı / Koyu / Daha Koyu / En Koyu<br />
Ekran <strong>de</strong>rinliğini ayarlamak için ekrandaki siyahlık düzeyini seçebilirsiniz.<br />
• Dinamik Kontrast → Kapalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek<br />
En iyi kontrast sağlanacak şekil<strong>de</strong> ekran kontrastını ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
• Gamma<br />
Ana r<strong>en</strong>k (Kırmızı, Yeşil, Mavi) yoğunluğunu ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
• R<strong>en</strong>k Alanı<br />
R<strong>en</strong>k Alanı kırmızı, yeşil ve mavi r<strong>en</strong>kler<strong>de</strong>n oluşan bir r<strong>en</strong>k tablosudur. En doğal r<strong>en</strong>kleri yaşamak için beğ<strong>en</strong>diğiniz R<strong>en</strong>k<br />
Alanını seçin.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Otomatik: Vi<strong>de</strong>o giriş kaynağına göre r<strong>en</strong>k aralığını otomatik olarak ayarlar.<br />
Doğal: Vi<strong>de</strong>o giriş kaynağından daha g<strong>en</strong>iş r<strong>en</strong>k aralığı ayarlar.<br />
• Beyaz D<strong>en</strong>gesi<br />
Daha doğal görüntü r<strong>en</strong>kleri için r<strong>en</strong>k sıcaklığını ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
• R-Kapalıset / G-Kapalıset / B-Kapalıset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Ayar <strong>de</strong>ğerinin <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilmesi, ayarlanmış ekranı<br />
y<strong>en</strong>ileyecektir.<br />
• Sıfırla: Varsayılan beyaz <strong>de</strong>ngesine sıfırlar.<br />
• T<strong>en</strong> Tonu<br />
Resim<strong>de</strong>ki pembe cilt tonu nu vurgulayabilirsiniz.<br />
N Ayar <strong>de</strong>ğerinin <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilmesi, ayarlanmış ekranı y<strong>en</strong>ileyecektir.<br />
• K<strong>en</strong>ar Geliştirme → Kapalı / Açık<br />
Resim<strong>de</strong>ki nesne sınırlarını vurgulayabilirsiniz.<br />
Görüntü<br />
R<strong>en</strong>k : 50<br />
Ton (G/R)<br />
Gelişmiş Ayarlar<br />
Resim Seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
Resim Sıfırlama<br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
Türkçe - 17
❑<br />
Resim Seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
• R<strong>en</strong>k Tonu → Mavi / Normal / Kırmızı 1 / Kırmızı 2<br />
Gözlerinize <strong>en</strong> uygun r<strong>en</strong>k tonunu seçebilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ayarlanan <strong>de</strong>ğerler seçili Görüntü moduna göre kay<strong>de</strong>dilir.<br />
Kırmızı 1 ya da Kırmızı 2 yalnızca resim modu Sinema olduğunda<br />
etkinleştirilir.<br />
• Boyut<br />
İzleme gereksinimlerinize <strong>en</strong> uygun görüntü boyutunu seçebilirsiniz.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Oto G<strong>en</strong>iş: Otomatik G<strong>en</strong>iş biçim<strong>de</strong> resmi ayarlar.<br />
16:9: Resmi 16:9 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranına ayarlar.<br />
G<strong>en</strong>iş Yknlştrm: 4:3 resmi dikey olarak daraltarak 16:9 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranına sahip TV'<strong>de</strong> 4:3 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranındaki resimleri<br />
seyretmek için bu m<strong>en</strong>üyü seçin.<br />
Zoom: 16:9 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranındaki resmi dikey olarak daraltır.<br />
4:3: Resmi 4:3 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranına ayarlar.<br />
Ekrana Sığdır: Normal TV ile seyredilemey<strong>en</strong> tam doğal HD sinyalini gösterir.<br />
Resim boyutu seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri, giriş kaynağına bağlı olarak <strong>de</strong>ğişebilir.<br />
Kullanılabilir öğeler, seçil<strong>en</strong> moda bağlı olarak farklı olabilir.<br />
Ayarlar, televizyonun bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir.<br />
Cihazda 2 saatt<strong>en</strong> fazla durağan bir görüntü izlediğiniz<strong>de</strong> geçici görüntü takılması oluşabilir.<br />
G<strong>en</strong>iş Yknlştrm: ► düğmesine basarak Konum seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. Ekranı<br />
yukarı / aşağı hareket ettirmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
Zoom: ► düğmesine basarak Konum seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. Görüntüyü yukarı ve<br />
aşağı hareket ettirmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. ► düğmesine basarak<br />
Boyut seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. Görüntüyü dikey yön<strong>de</strong> büyütmek ya da küçültmek için<br />
▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.<br />
HDMI (1080i/1080p) veya Parça (1080i/1080p) modunda Ekrana Sığdır seçildikt<strong>en</strong> sonra: ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak<br />
Konum seç<strong>en</strong>eğini belirleyin. Görüntüyü hareket ettirmek için ▲, ▼, ◄ veya ► düğmesini kullanın.<br />
Sıfırla: ◄ ya da ► düğmesine basarak Sıfırla seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. Ayarları<br />
başlatabilirsiniz.<br />
HDMI 720p girişiyle Ekrana Sığdır işlevini kullanırsanız, Overscan işlevin<strong>de</strong> olduğu gibi 1 hat üstt<strong>en</strong>, alttan, soldan ve<br />
sağdan kesilir.<br />
• Ekran Modu<br />
Görüntü boyutunu 16:9 g<strong>en</strong>işaçı TV’<strong>de</strong> Oto G<strong>en</strong>iş ayarına getirirk<strong>en</strong>, 4:3 WSS (G<strong>en</strong>iş Ekran Hizmeti) görüntü görmek<br />
istediğiniz görüntü boyutuna karar verebilir ya da hiçbir şey yapmayabilirsiniz. Her Avrupa ülkesi farklı görüntü boyutu<br />
gerektirir, dolayısıyla bu işlev kullanıcıların seçmesi için tasarlanmıştır.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
16:9: Resmi 16:9 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranına ayarlar.<br />
G<strong>en</strong>iş Yknlştrm: 4:3 resmi dikey olarak daraltarak 16:9 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranına sahip TV'<strong>de</strong> 4:3 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranındaki resimleri<br />
seyretmek için bu m<strong>en</strong>üyü seçin.<br />
Zoom: 16:9 <strong>en</strong>-boy oranındaki resmi dikey olarak daraltır.<br />
4:3: 4:3 için ekran modunu seçer.<br />
N Bu işlev Oto G<strong>en</strong>iş modunda kullanılabilir.<br />
Parça veya HDMI modunda bu işlev kullanılamaz.<br />
• Dijital azal → Kapalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek / Otomatik<br />
TV’nizin aldığı yayın sinyali zayıfsa, ekranda görülebilecek parazit ya da gölgeleri gi<strong>de</strong>rmek için Dijital Gürültü Azaltma özelliği<br />
kullanılabilir.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Sinyal zayıfsa, <strong>en</strong> iyi görüntüyü el<strong>de</strong> edinceye kadar diğer seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri <strong>de</strong>neyin.<br />
• HDMI Siyahlık Düzeyi → Normal / Düşük<br />
Ekran <strong>de</strong>rinliğini ayarlamak için doğrudan ekrandaki siyahlık düzeyini seçebilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
Bu işlev yalnızca harici giriş HDMI’ya (RGB sinyalleri) bağlandığında etkindir.<br />
Görüntü<br />
Tint (G/R)<br />
Gelişmiş Ayarlar<br />
Resim Seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
Resim Sıfırlama<br />
: G50/R50<br />
►<br />
Türkçe - 18<br />
Devam ediyor...
• Film modu<br />
Film izlemek için resim modunu <strong>en</strong> iyi duruma getirebilirsiniz.<br />
• Kpalı : Temel vi<strong>de</strong>o görüntü işleme uygulanır ve film tabanlı programlar için otomatik algılama yoktur.<br />
• Oto: Film ve vi<strong>de</strong>o programları arasında <strong>en</strong> iyi görüntü kalitesini otomatik olarak ayarlar.<br />
• Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection (Ekran Yanığından Koruma)<br />
Piksel yanıklarını önlemek için Scre<strong>en</strong> Burn Protection Options’ı yapılandırır.<br />
Bir görüntü, bir konumda çok fazla bekletildiği zaman, ekranda daimi bir yanığa ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
• Piksel Kayması: Ekran yanması olasılığını <strong>en</strong> aza indirmek için bu birim<strong>de</strong> ekran yanması önleme teknolojisi<br />
bulunmaktadır. Bu teknoloji, resimleri yukarı/aşağı (Dikey) ve yanlara (Yatay) hareket ettirm<strong>en</strong>ize olanak sağlar. Zaman<br />
ayarı, resimlerin hareket ettirilmesi için geçecek süreyi dakika cinsin<strong>de</strong>n ayarlamanızı sağlar.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Piksel Kayması modunu On <strong>de</strong>ğerine ayarlamak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine ve ardından ENTER E düğmesine basın.<br />
▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak istediğiniz seç<strong>en</strong>eği belirleyin ve ENTER E düğmesine basın.<br />
Kullanılabilir seç<strong>en</strong>ekler şunlardır: Yatay, Dikey, Zaman.<br />
Piksel geçişi için <strong>en</strong> iyi koşul<br />
öğeleri<br />
TV/Harici/AV/Parça/HDMI<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Yatay 0~4 2<br />
Dikey 0~4 2<br />
Zaman (Dakika) 1~4 dak 3 dak<br />
Piksel Kayması <strong>de</strong>ğeri, monitör boyutu (inç) ve moduna bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.<br />
Bu işlev Ekrana Sığdır modunda kullanılamaz.<br />
• Kaydırma: Bu işlev, PDP üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki tüm pikselleri <strong>de</strong>s<strong>en</strong>e göre hareket ettirerek ekranda kalan görüntü izlerinin ortadan<br />
kaldırılmasına yardımcı olur Özellikle ekranda uzun bir süre sabit bir görüntü gösterildikt<strong>en</strong> sonra ekranda görüntü ya da<br />
sembol izleri kaldığında bu işlevi kullanın.<br />
• K<strong>en</strong>ar Gri: 4:3 ekran oranında TV izlerk<strong>en</strong>, aşırı sol ve sağ k<strong>en</strong>arlarda beyaz <strong>de</strong>ngesi ayarlanarak ekranın zarar görmesi<br />
<strong>en</strong>gell<strong>en</strong>ir.<br />
- Koyu: Ekran oranını 4:3'e ayarladığınızda, sol ve sağ k<strong>en</strong>arlarını koyulaştırır.<br />
- Açık: Ekran oranını 4:3'e ayarladığınızda, sol ve sağ k<strong>en</strong>arlarını aydınlatır.<br />
❑<br />
Resim Sıfırlama → Resim Modunu Sıfırla / İptal<br />
Tüm resim ayarlarını varsayılan <strong>de</strong>ğerlerine sıfırlar.<br />
N<br />
Önce sıfırlanacak bir resim modu seçin. Her resim modu için sıfırlama<br />
gerçekleştirilir.<br />
Görüntü<br />
Gelişmiş Ayarlar<br />
Resim Seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
Resim Sıfırlama<br />
►<br />
Türkçe - 19
Ses Kontrolü<br />
Ses Standardının Değiştirilmesi<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Modu → Standart / Müzik / Sinema / Sesi Netleştir / Kişisel<br />
Belirli bir yayını izlerk<strong>en</strong> kullanılacak özel ses efekti türünü seçebilirsiniz.<br />
T<br />
Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın.<br />
Resim modunu ayrıca Araçlar → Ses Modu öğesini seçerek <strong>de</strong><br />
ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
Ekolayzer<br />
Ses ayarları kişisel tercihlerinize göre <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilebilir.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Modu: Kişisel tercihlerinize uygun bir ses modu seçebilirsiniz.<br />
Balans: Sağ ve sol hoparlörler arasındaki <strong>de</strong>ngeyi kontrol e<strong>de</strong>r.<br />
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustm<strong>en</strong>t): Farklı bant g<strong>en</strong>işliği frekanslarının seviyelerini ayarlamak için<br />
Sıfırla: Ekolayzır ayarlarını varsayılan <strong>de</strong>ğerlere sıfırlar.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD → Kapalı / Açık<br />
SRS TruSurround HD TruSurround ve FOCUS, TruBass teknolojilerinin birleşimidir.<br />
SRS TruSurround HD, TV’nin iki hoparlörün<strong>de</strong>n sanal 5.1 Surround Sound efektinin keyfini çıkarmanızı sağlar. Bu işlev<br />
yalnızca z<strong>en</strong>gin <strong>de</strong>rinlikli bas olmakla kalmaz, aynı zamanda yüksek frekans çözünürlüğü <strong>de</strong> sağlar.<br />
N<br />
TV müzik çalark<strong>en</strong> ses anormalse, lütf<strong>en</strong> ekolayzer ve SRS TruSurround HD (Kpalı/Açık) ayarını yapın.<br />
Ses<br />
Modu : Kişisel ►<br />
Ekolayzer<br />
SRS TruSurround HD : Kapalı<br />
Ses Dili : ----<br />
Ses Biçimi : ----<br />
Sesli Açıklama<br />
Oto ses ayar : Kapalı<br />
<br />
TruSurround HD, SRS ve sembolü SRS Labs, Inc.’ın ticari markalarıdır.<br />
TruSurround HD teknolojisi SRS Labs, Inc. lisansı ile bu cihaza dahil edilmiştir.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
Ses Dili (yalnızca analog kanal)<br />
Ses dillerinin varsayılan ayarını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz. Gel<strong>en</strong> akışın dil bilgilerini görüntüler.<br />
N<br />
Yalnızca gerçekte yayınlanan diller arasından seçim yapabilirsiniz.<br />
Ses Biçimi → MPEG / Dolby dijital (yalnızca analog kanal)<br />
Hem ana hoparlör<strong>de</strong>n hem ses alıcısından ses verildiğin<strong>de</strong>, ana hoparlör ve ses alıcısı arasındaki şifre çözme hızı farkından<br />
dolayı ses yankısı oluşabilir. Bu durumda, TV Hoparlörü işlevini kullanın.<br />
N<br />
Yalnızca gerçekte yayınlanan diller arasından seçim yapabilirsiniz.<br />
Dolby Laboratories lisansı altında üretilmiştir.<br />
Dolby ve double-D (çift D) sembolü, Dolby Laboratories’in ticari markalarıdır.<br />
❑<br />
Sesli Açıklama (yalnızca analog kanal)<br />
Bu, görme özürlü kişilere ilave ses bandı kanalı sağlayan yardımcı bir ses işlevidir. Bu işlev AD (Audio Description) için,<br />
yayıncıdan gel<strong>en</strong> ana sesle birlikte gön<strong>de</strong>rildiğin<strong>de</strong> Audio Stream’i kullanır. Kullanıcılar Audio Description’ı On veya Kapalı<br />
konumlarına getirebilirler ve sesi kontrol e<strong>de</strong>bilirler.<br />
O<br />
Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki AD düğmesine basarak da bu seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
belirleyebilirsiniz.<br />
• Sesli Açıklama → Kapalı / Açık<br />
Ses açıklaması işlevini açar ya da kapatır.<br />
• Düzey<br />
Ses açıklama ses seviyesini ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
Düzey ayarı, Sesli Açıklama öğesi Açık olarak ayarlandığında etkindir.<br />
Devam ediyor...<br />
Türkçe - 20
❑<br />
❑<br />
Oto ses ayar → Kapalı / Açık<br />
Her yayın istasyonunun k<strong>en</strong>di sinyal koşulları vardır ve her kanal <strong>de</strong>ğiştiği zaman ses seviyesini ayarlamak kolay <strong>de</strong>ğildir. Bu<br />
özellik modülasyon sinyali yüksekse ses çıkışını düşürerek ya da modülasyon sinyali çok zayıfsa ses çıkışını yükselterek,<br />
ist<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> kanalın ses düzeyini otomatik olarak ayarlar.<br />
Hoparlörü Seçin → Harici Hoparlör / TV Hoparlörü<br />
Sesi ayrı hoparlörler<strong>de</strong>n duymak istediğiniz takdir<strong>de</strong>, dahili amplifikatörü iptal edin.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
– +, M MUTE Harici Hoparlör, Hoparlörü Seçin olduğunda çalışmaz.<br />
Hoparlörü Seçin m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong> Harici Hoparlör seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçtiys<strong>en</strong>iz ses ayarları sınırlanacaktır.<br />
TV’nin Dahili Hoparlörleri<br />
Ses Sistemine Ses Çıkışı (Optik, Sol / Sağ Çıkış)<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Kompon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
TV / Ext. / AV / Kompon<strong>en</strong>t / HDMI<br />
TV Hoparlörü Hoparlör Çıkışı Ses Çıkışı<br />
Harici Hoparlör Sessiz Ses Çıkışı<br />
Vi<strong>de</strong>o Sinyali Yok Sessiz Sessiz<br />
❑ Oto ses ayar : Kpalı<br />
Ses Sıfırlama → Tümünü Sıfırla/ Ses Modunu Sıfırla / İptal<br />
Ses ayarlarını fabrika varsayılan <strong>de</strong>ğerlerine geri yükleyebilirsiniz.<br />
Ses<br />
Hoparlörü Seçin<br />
Ses Sıfırlama<br />
: TV Hoparlörü<br />
►<br />
Ses Modunun Seçilmesi<br />
Çift I-II konumuna ayarladığınızda geçerli ses modu ekranda görüntül<strong>en</strong>ecektir.<br />
Yayın türü<br />
Ekran göstergesi<br />
Normal yayın<br />
(Standart ses)<br />
Mono (Normal kullanım)<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Normal + NICAM<br />
Mono<br />
NICAM Stereo<br />
NICAM<br />
NICAM<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
NICAM Çift I-II<br />
NICAM<br />
Çift-1<br />
NICAM<br />
Çift-2<br />
Mono<br />
(Normal)<br />
Normal yayın<br />
(Standart ses)<br />
Mono (Normal kullanım)<br />
A2<br />
Stereo<br />
Bilingual (İki dilli)<br />
ya da DUAL-I/II<br />
Çift I<br />
Çift II<br />
Stereo<br />
Stereo<br />
Mono<br />
(Monoya dönüştürülmüş)<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Stereo sinyali zayıfsa ve otomatik geçiş meydana geliyorsa, mono moduna geçin.<br />
Bu işlev yalnızca stereo ses sinyalin<strong>de</strong> etkinleştirilir. Mono ses sinyalin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>vre dışı bırakılır.<br />
Bu işlev sa<strong>de</strong>ce TV modunda kullanılabilir.<br />
Türkçe - 21
İşlev Tanımı<br />
Kurulum M<strong>en</strong>üsünün Yapılandırılması<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü Dili<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü dilini ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
Yayın<br />
• Altyazı<br />
Altyazıları etkinleştirebilir veya <strong>de</strong>vre dışı bırakabilirsiniz. Altyazı Modunu<br />
ayarlamak için bu m<strong>en</strong>üyü kullanın. M<strong>en</strong>ü altındaki Normal, temel altyazı, İşitme<br />
<strong>en</strong>gelli seç<strong>en</strong>eği ise işitme <strong>en</strong>gelli kişilere yönelik altyazıdır.<br />
• Altyazı → Açık / Kapalı: Altyazıları açar ya da kapatır.<br />
• Modu → Normal / İşitme <strong>en</strong>gelli: Altyazı modunu ayarlar.<br />
• Altyazı Dili: Altyazı dilini ayarlar.<br />
N Seyrettiğiniz program İşitme <strong>en</strong>gelli işlevini <strong>de</strong>steklemiyorsa, İşitme <strong>en</strong>gelli<br />
modu seçilse bile otomatik olarak Normal ayarı etkinleşir.<br />
N Seçil<strong>en</strong> dilin yayında kullanılabilir olmaması durumunda İngilizce varsayılan<br />
dildir.<br />
O Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki SUBT. düğmesine basarak da bu seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
belirleyebilirsiniz.<br />
Kurulum<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü Dili : Türkçe ►<br />
Zaman<br />
Yayın<br />
Güv<strong>en</strong>lik<br />
G<strong>en</strong>el<br />
• Dijital Metin → Devre Dışı / Etkinleştir<br />
Program dijital metinle yayınlanırsa bu özellik etkinleştirilir.<br />
N<br />
MHEG (Çoklu Ortam ve Hiper Ortam Bilgileri Kodlama Uzmanları Grubu)<br />
Çoklu ortam ve hiper ortamda kullanılan veri kodlama sistemlerinin Uluslararası bir standardıdır. Bu, hareketsiz görüntü,<br />
karakter hizmeti, animasyon, grafik ve vi<strong>de</strong>o dosyaları gibi veri birleştir<strong>en</strong> hiper ortam ve çoklu ortam verilerini içer<strong>en</strong><br />
MPEG sistemin<strong>de</strong>n daha yüksek düzey<strong>de</strong>dir. MHEG, kullanıcı çalışma süresi etkileşim teknolojisi olup aralarında VOD<br />
(İsteğe Bağlı Vi<strong>de</strong>o), ITV (Etkileşimli TV), EC (Elektronik Ticaret), tele-eğitim, tele-konferans, dijital kitaplıklar ve ağ<br />
oyunlarının bulunduğu çeşitli ortamlara uygulanır.<br />
• Teletekst Dili<br />
Dil türünü seçerek teletekst dilini ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
N<br />
• Tercih<br />
Seçil<strong>en</strong> dilin yayında kullanılabilir olmaması durumunda İngilizce varsayılan dildir.<br />
• Birinci Yayın Dili / İkinci Yayın Dili / Altyazı Dili / İkinci Altyazı Dili / Birinci Teletekst Dili / İkinci Teletekst Dili<br />
Bu özelliği kullanarak kullanıcılar diller<strong>de</strong>n birini seçebilir. Kullanıcı bir kanal seçtiğin<strong>de</strong>, burada seçil<strong>en</strong> dil varsayılan<br />
olarak kullanılır.<br />
Dil ayarını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirirs<strong>en</strong>iz, Language m<strong>en</strong>üsünün Altyazı Dili, Ses Dili ve Teletekst Dili ayarları otomatik olarak seçil<strong>en</strong> dile<br />
geçer.<br />
Language m<strong>en</strong>üsünün Altyazı Dili, Ses Dili ve Teletekst Dili öğeleri, geçerli kanalın <strong>de</strong>steklediği dillerin bir listesini gösterir<br />
ve seçim vurgulanır. Bu dil ayarını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirirs<strong>en</strong>iz, y<strong>en</strong>i seçim sa<strong>de</strong>ce o an görüntül<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> kanal için geçerlidir. Değiştiril<strong>en</strong><br />
ayar, Tercih m<strong>en</strong>üsünün Altyazı Dili, Primary Ses Dili ya da Primary Teletekst Dili ayarını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirmez.<br />
• G<strong>en</strong>el Arayüz<br />
• CI Card'ı Takma<br />
1. En yakın bayinizi ziyaret e<strong>de</strong>rek veya telefonla arayarak CI CAM modülünü<br />
satın alın.<br />
2. CI CARD'ı yerine oturana kadar CAM birimine ok yönün<strong>de</strong> yerleştirin.<br />
3. CI CARD takılı olan CAM birimini g<strong>en</strong>el arayüz yuvasına yerleştirin.<br />
N<br />
CAM'ı yuvayla paralel olacak şekil<strong>de</strong> ucuna doğru ok yönün<strong>de</strong> yerleştirin.<br />
4. Karışmış sinyal kanalında bir resim görüp göremediğinizi kontrol edin.<br />
• CI M<strong>en</strong>üsü<br />
Bu, kullanıcının CAM sağlanan m<strong>en</strong>ü<strong>de</strong>n seçim yapmasına olanak sağlar.<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü PC Kartına dayalı CI M<strong>en</strong>u’yü (G<strong>en</strong>el Arayüz M<strong>en</strong>üsü) seçin.<br />
• Uygulama Bilgisi.<br />
Bu, CI’ya takılı CAM hakkındaki bilgileri içerir ve görüntüler.<br />
Uygulama bilgileri CI CARD hakkındadır. TV ON ya da Kapalı da olsa her an CAM öğesini yükleyebilirsiniz.<br />
N CAM bazı ülkeler<strong>de</strong> ve bölgeler<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>stekl<strong>en</strong>mez, yetkili satıcınızla kontrol edin.<br />
Devam ediyor...<br />
Türkçe - 22
❑<br />
Güv<strong>en</strong>lik<br />
• Çocuk Kilidi → Kapalı / Açık<br />
Bu özellik çocuklar ve b<strong>en</strong>zeri yetkisiz kullanıcıların uygunsuz programları izlemesini ses ve görüntüyü kapatarak<br />
önleyebilm<strong>en</strong>izi sağlar.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Kurulum p<strong>en</strong>ceresi görünme<strong>de</strong>n önce PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.<br />
Y<strong>en</strong>i bir TV’nin varsayılan PIN numarası '0-0-0-0' dır. M<strong>en</strong>ü<strong>de</strong>n PIN Değiştir seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçerek PIN’i <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.<br />
Channel List’teki bazı kanalları kilitleyebilirsiniz. (bkz. sayfa 15)<br />
Çocuk Kilidi yalnızca TV modunda kullanılabilir.<br />
• Ebeveyn Kilidi<br />
Bu özellik, kullanıcının belirlediği 4 haneli PIN (Kişisel Kimlik Belirleme Numarası) kodu sayesin<strong>de</strong> çocuklar gibi izin verilmey<strong>en</strong><br />
kullanıcıların uygunsuz programları izlemesini <strong>en</strong>gellem<strong>en</strong>izi sağlar.<br />
Kurulum p<strong>en</strong>ceresi görünme<strong>de</strong>n önce PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.<br />
Y<strong>en</strong>i bir TV’nin varsayılan PIN numarası '0-0-0-0' dır. M<strong>en</strong>ü<strong>de</strong>n PIN Değiştir seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçerek PIN’i <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.<br />
Ebeveyn <strong>de</strong>recel<strong>en</strong>dirmeleri ayarlandığında, "\" sembolü gösterilir.<br />
Tmn İzn Vr: Tüm TV <strong>de</strong>recel<strong>en</strong>dirmelerinin kilidini kaldırmak için basın.<br />
Tmn Engll: Tüm TV <strong>de</strong>recel<strong>en</strong>dirmelerini kilitlemek için basın.<br />
• PIN Değiştir<br />
TV’nin kurulumu için gerek<strong>en</strong> kişisel kimlik numaranızı <strong>de</strong>ğiştirebilirsiniz.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
G<strong>en</strong>el<br />
Kurulum p<strong>en</strong>ceresi görünme<strong>de</strong>n önce PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.<br />
Y<strong>en</strong>i bir TV’nin varsayılan PIN numarası '0-0-0-0' dır.<br />
PIN kodunu unutursanız, PIN’in '0-0-0-0' olarak sıfırlanması için uzaktan kumanda düğmelerine aşağıdaki sırayla basın:<br />
POWER (Kapalı), M MUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Açık).<br />
• Oyun Modu → Kapalı / Açık<br />
PlayStation TM veya Xbox TM gibi bir oyun konsoluna bağladığınızda, oyun m<strong>en</strong>üsünü seçerek daha gerçekçi bir oyun<br />
<strong>de</strong>neyiminin keyfini çıkarabilirsiniz.<br />
• Oyun Modu Açık’k<strong>en</strong><br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Resim modu otomatik olarak Standart ayarına gelir ve <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilemez.<br />
Ses modu otomatik olarak Özel ayarına gelir ve <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilemez. Ekolayzeri kullanarak sesi ayarlayın.<br />
Ses M<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>ki Sıfırla etkinleşir. Sıfırla işlevi Ekolayzer ayarlarını fabrika varsayılan ayarına getirir.<br />
Oyun Modu normal TV modunda yoktur veya Oyun Modu Kapalı olarak ayarlandıysa kullanılmaz.<br />
Harici cihaz TV’ye bağlandığında resim kalitesi çok kötüyse, Oyun Modu’nun Açık olup olmadığını kontrol edin.<br />
Oyun modundayk<strong>en</strong> TV m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülers<strong>en</strong>iz ekran hafifçe sallanır.<br />
N<br />
N Ekranda ( ) işareti görüntül<strong>en</strong>erek Oyun Modu’nun seçil<strong>en</strong> kaynakla Açık duruma getirildiği ifa<strong>de</strong> edilir.<br />
N Bu işlev yalnızca oyun işlevini <strong>de</strong>stekler.<br />
• Enrj. Tasarrufu<br />
Bu özellik, güç tüketimini azaltmak için TV’nin parlaklığını ayarlar. Gece TV izlerk<strong>en</strong> Enrj. Tasarrufu modu seç<strong>en</strong>eğini Yüksek<br />
ayarına getirerek, gözlerinizin yorulmasını <strong>en</strong>gelleyebilir ve güç tüketimini azaltabilirsiniz.<br />
Resim Kapalı seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçers<strong>en</strong>iz, ekran kapanır ve yalnızca sesi duyabilirsiniz. Resim Kapalı’dan çıkmak için herhangi bir<br />
düğmeye basın.<br />
N Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>, Resim Kapalı işlevi <strong>de</strong>stekl<strong>en</strong>mez.<br />
T Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın.<br />
Enerji tasarrufu seç<strong>en</strong>eğini ayrıca Araçlar → Enrj. Tasarrufu öğesini seçerek<br />
ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
• Melodi → Kapalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek<br />
TV açma/kapama melodi sesi ayarlanabilir.<br />
N<br />
Melodi aşağıdaki durumlarda çalışmaz<br />
- MMUTE düğmesine basıldığı için TV’<strong>de</strong>n hiç ses çıkışı olmadığında<br />
- – (Ses) düğmesine basıldığı için TV'<strong>de</strong>n hiç ses çıkışı olmadığında<br />
- TV, Uyku Zamanlayıcısı işlevi yoluyla Kapanış Ayarı kapatıldığında.<br />
Türkçe - 23
Saati Ayarlama<br />
❑<br />
Saat<br />
TV’nin çeşitli saat özelliklerini kullanabilmek için saatin ayarlanması gereklidir.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
INFO düğmesine her basışınızda geçerli zaman görüntül<strong>en</strong>ecektir.<br />
Elektrik kablosunun bağlantısını kesers<strong>en</strong>iz, saati y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n ayarlamanız gerekir.<br />
• Saat Modu<br />
Geçerli saati elle ya da otomatik olarak ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
Otomatik: Geçerli saati, dijital yayından gel<strong>en</strong> saat ile otomatik olarak ayarlayın.<br />
<strong>Manuel</strong>: Geçerli saati belirli bir saate elle ayarlayın.<br />
• Saat Ayarı<br />
Geçerli saati elle ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Saat Modu öğesini <strong>Manuel</strong> olarak ayarladıysanız bu öğeyi ayarlayın.<br />
Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki numara düğmelerini basarak Ay, Gün, Yıl, Saat<br />
ve Dakika ayarlarını doğrudan yapabilirsiniz.<br />
Kapanış Ayarı → Kapalı / 30 dak / 60 dak / 90 dak / 120 dak /<br />
150 dak / 180 dak<br />
Önce<strong>de</strong>n ayarlanan zaman geçtiğin<strong>de</strong> uyku zamanlayıcısı TV’yi otomatik olarak<br />
kapatır.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Zamanlayıcı 0 a geldiği zaman TV otomatik olarak sandby moduna geçer.<br />
Kapanış Ayarı işlevini iptal etmek için Kapalı seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin.<br />
T Araçlar m<strong>en</strong>üsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın.<br />
Uyku zamanlayıcısını ayrıca Araçlar → Kapanış Ayarı öğesini seçerek <strong>de</strong><br />
ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
Kurulum<br />
Plug & Play<br />
M<strong>en</strong>ü Dili<br />
: Türkçe<br />
Zaman<br />
►<br />
Yayın<br />
Güv<strong>en</strong>lik<br />
G<strong>en</strong>el<br />
Zaman<br />
Saat : -- : -- ►<br />
Kapanış Ayarı : Kapalı<br />
Zamanlayıcı 1 : Aktif Değil<br />
Zamanlayıcı 2 : Aktif Değil<br />
Zamanlayıcı 3 : Aktif Değil<br />
U Taşı E Giriş R Geri<br />
❑<br />
Zamanlayıcı 1 / Zamanlayıcı 2 / Zamanlayıcı 3<br />
Üç farklı açık/kapalı zamanlayıcı ayarı yapılabilir.<br />
• Açılış Zamanı: Saati, dakikayı ve etkinleştir/<strong>de</strong>vre dışı bırak ayarını yapın.<br />
(Zamanlayıcıyı seçtiğiniz ayara göre etkinleştirmek için Etkinleştir ayarına getirin.)<br />
• Kapanış Zamanı: Saati, dakikayı ve etkinleştir/<strong>de</strong>vre dışı bırak ayarını yapın.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
(Zamanlayıcıyı seçtiğiniz ayara göre etkinleştirmek için Etkinleştir ayarına getirin.)<br />
Düzey: İst<strong>en</strong>il<strong>en</strong> ses düzeyini seçin.<br />
Ant<strong>en</strong>: TV otomatik olarak açıldığında DTV veya ATV’yi seçebilirsiniz.<br />
• Kanal: İstediğiniz kanalı seçin.<br />
• Tekrarla: Bir Kez, Her gün, Pts ~ Cum, Pts ~ Cts, Cts ~ Paz ya da <strong>Manuel</strong> seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin.<br />
N <strong>Manuel</strong> seçildiğin<strong>de</strong>, haftanın ist<strong>en</strong>il<strong>en</strong> gününü seçmek için ► düğmesine basın. İst<strong>en</strong>il<strong>en</strong> gün üstün<strong>de</strong> ENTERE<br />
düğmesine basın, c işareti görünecektir.<br />
N Önce saati ayarlamanız gerekir.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Uzaktan kumanda üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki numara düğmelerini kullanarak saat, dakika ve kanalı ayarlayabilirsiniz.<br />
Otomatik Kapanma<br />
Zamanlayıcıyı On olarak ayarlandığınızda, zamanlayıcı tarafından açılmasından sonra 3 saat boyunca herhangi bir kumanda<br />
kullanılmadığında televizyon kapatılır. Bu işlev yalnızca zamanlayıcı On modundayk<strong>en</strong> kullanılabilir ve TV’nin çok uzun süre<br />
açık kalmasından kaynaklanabilecek aşırı ısınmayı önler.<br />
Türkçe - 24
Kaynak Listesi/ İsim Değiştir<br />
❑<br />
Kaynak Listesi<br />
TV’yi ya da DVD oynatıcılar veya Kablolu TV / Uydu alıcılar (Set Üstü Kutu) gibi TV’ye<br />
bağlanacak diğer harici giriş kaynaklarını seçmek için kullanın. Tercih ettiğiniz giriş<br />
kaynağını seçmek için kullanın.<br />
• TV, Ext., AV, PC, Compon<strong>en</strong>t, HDMI1, HDMI2 / DVI.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Yalnızca TV’ye bağlı harici aygıtları seçebilirsiniz. Kaynak Listesi listesin<strong>de</strong><br />
bağlanan girişler vurgulanacak ve üstte sıralanacaktır. Bağlanmamış girişler altta<br />
sıralanacaktır.<br />
Kaynak listesin<strong>de</strong> uzaktan kumandadaki R<strong>en</strong>kli düğmelerin kullanılması<br />
- TTOOLS (Seç<strong>en</strong>ek): İsim Değiştir ve Bilgi m<strong>en</strong>ülerini gösterir.<br />
Bir harici sinyal kaynağını izlemek için uzaktan kumandadaki SOURCE<br />
düğmesine basın. TV modu, uzaktan kumandadaki TV düğmesine, numara<br />
düğmelerine (0~9) ve P < / > düğmesine basılarak seçilebilir.<br />
Giriş<br />
Kaynak Listesi<br />
İsim Değiştir<br />
❑<br />
İsim Değiştir<br />
Giriş kaynağı seçiminizi kolaylaştırmak için giriş jaklarına bağlı cihazlara isim verebilirsiniz.<br />
• VCR / DVD / Kablolu Alıcı / Uydu Alıcısı / PVR STB / AV Alıcı / Oyun / Vi<strong>de</strong>o Kamera / PC / DVI PC / DVI/ TV / IPTV /<br />
Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA<br />
N<br />
PS42B430: 640x480@60Hz, PS50B430: 1280x720@60Hz çözünürlüğü olan bir PC HDMI IN 2 (DVI) bağlantı noktasına<br />
takıldığında, Giriş modu, İsim Değiştir m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>ki HDMI2 / DVI modunu PC olarak ayarlamanız gerekir.<br />
Türkçe - 25
PC Ekranı<br />
❑ PC Yazılımınızın Ayarlanması (Windows XP’ye bağlı olarak)<br />
Tipik bir bilgisayarın Windows görüntüleme ayarları aşağıda gösterilmektedir.<br />
Kullandığınız Windows’un sürümüne ve vi<strong>de</strong>o kartınıza bağlı olarak kişisel<br />
bilgisayarınızın gerçek ekranı büyük olasılıkla bundan farklıdır. Ancak, sizin<br />
bilgisayarınızda açılan ekranlar farklı görünse <strong>de</strong>, çoğu durumda aynı temel<br />
ayar bilgileri geçerli olacaktır. (Değilse, bilgisayar üreticinize ya da <strong>Samsung</strong><br />
Bayiine başvurun.)<br />
1. İlk olarak Windows başlat m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>n ‘D<strong>en</strong>etim Masası’ seç<strong>en</strong>eğini seçin.<br />
2. D<strong>en</strong>etim Masası p<strong>en</strong>ceresi görüntül<strong>en</strong>ince, ‘Görünüm ve Temalar’ öğesini<br />
tıklatın ve bir iletişim kutusu açılır.<br />
3. D<strong>en</strong>etim masası p<strong>en</strong>ceresi göründüğün<strong>de</strong>, ‘Ekran’ üzerin<strong>de</strong> tıklayın, bir iletişim<br />
kutusu açılır.<br />
4. İletişim kutusunda ‘Ayarlar’ seç<strong>en</strong>eğine gidin.<br />
Doğru boyut ayarı (çözünürlük)<br />
En iyi PS42B430: 1024x768 pixels, PS50B430: 1360x768 pixels<br />
Erkan ayarları iletişin kutusunda düşey frekans seç<strong>en</strong>eği varsa, doğru <strong>de</strong>ğer ‘60’<br />
ya da ‘60 Hz’dir. Yoksa, “TAMAM” düğmesini tıklatın ve iletişim kutusundan çıkın.<br />
Ekran Modları<br />
Bilgisayarın türüne ve çözünürlüğüne bağlı olarak monitörünün hem ekran konumu hem <strong>de</strong> boyutu farklı olabilir.<br />
Tablodaki tüm çözünürlükler önerilmektedir.<br />
• HDMI/DVI Girişi<br />
Modu<br />
Çözünürlük<br />
Yatay Frekans<br />
(kHz)<br />
Dikey Frekans (Hz)<br />
Piksel Saati<br />
Frekansı (MHz)<br />
S<strong>en</strong>kronizasyon<br />
Polaritesi (Y/D)<br />
PS42B430<br />
PS50B430<br />
IBM<br />
MAC<br />
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / - ✓ ✓<br />
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
640 x 480<br />
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
VESA DMT<br />
800 x 600<br />
1024 x 768<br />
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - ✓ ✓<br />
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + ✓ ✓<br />
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / + ✓<br />
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / + ✓ ✓<br />
VESA CVT<br />
1280 x 720<br />
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / + ✓<br />
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / + ✓<br />
VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / + ✓<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
HDMI/DVI kablo bağlantısı kullanırk<strong>en</strong>, HDMI IN 2 (DVI) jakını kullanmalısınız.<br />
Geçmeli tarama (interlace) modu <strong>de</strong>stekl<strong>en</strong>memektedir.<br />
Standartlara uymayan bir vi<strong>de</strong>o biçimi seçilirse set normal olarak çalışmayabilir.<br />
Türkçe - 26
Destekl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> Program<br />
❑<br />
K<strong>en</strong>di K<strong>en</strong>dini Tanıma<br />
• Görüntü Testi, Ses Testi, Sinyal Bilgileri<br />
Görüntü, Ses, Sinyal sorunu olduğunu düşünüyorsanız testi uygulayın. Sorunun durumunu kontrol e<strong>de</strong>bilirsiniz.<br />
❑<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Ses testini gerçekleştirme<strong>de</strong>n önce TV hoparlörlerin<strong>de</strong>n ses işitmezs<strong>en</strong>iz, Ses m<strong>en</strong>üsün<strong>de</strong>ki Hoparlörü Seçin <strong>de</strong>ğerinin<br />
TV Hoparlörü olduğundan emin olun.<br />
Hoparlör Seçin Harici Hoparlör olarak ayarlansa veya M MUTE düğmesine basılarak ses kapatılsa bile melodi test<br />
sırasında duyulacaktır.<br />
Sinyal gücü ölçer sinyalin zayıf olduğunu gösteriyorsa, sinyal gücünü artırmak için ant<strong>en</strong>inizi fiziksel olarak ayarlayın.<br />
En güçlü sinyale sahip <strong>en</strong> iyi konumu buluncaya kadar ant<strong>en</strong>inizi ayarlamaya <strong>de</strong>vam edin.<br />
Yazılım Yükseltme<br />
Ürününüzü y<strong>en</strong>i Dijital Televizyon özelliklerine uygun şekil<strong>de</strong> güncel tutmak için, normal Televizyon sinyalinin bir parçası olarak<br />
yazılım yükseltmeleri periyodik şekil<strong>de</strong> yayınlanır.<br />
Bu sinyaller otomatik olarak algılanır ve yazılım yükseltme etiketi görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir. Yükseltmeyi yükleme seç<strong>en</strong>eği sunulur.<br />
• Çevrimiçi olarak<br />
Bell<strong>en</strong>im yükseltmesini içer<strong>en</strong> bir USB sürücüsünü TV’ye takın. Yükseltmeler uygulanırk<strong>en</strong><br />
lütf<strong>en</strong> güç bağlantısını kesmemeye ya da USB sürücüsünü çıkarmamaya dikkat edin.<br />
Yerleşik bellek yükseltmesinin tamamlanmasından sonra TV otomatik olarak kapanıp<br />
açılacaktır. Yükseltmeler tamamlandıktan sonra lütf<strong>en</strong> yerleşik bellek sürümünü kontrol<br />
edin. Yazılım yükseltildiğin<strong>de</strong> yaptığınız görüntü ve ses ayarları varsayılan (fabrika)<br />
ayarlarına geri dönecektir.<br />
• Kanal yoluyla<br />
Yazılımı, yayın sinyali kullanarak yükseltir.<br />
• Standby Mo<strong>de</strong> Upgra<strong>de</strong><br />
Ana güç açıkk<strong>en</strong> yazılım güncellemesine <strong>de</strong>vam etmek isters<strong>en</strong>iz, ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basarak Açık seç<strong>en</strong>eğini belirleyin.<br />
Bekleme moduna girildikt<strong>en</strong> 45 dakika sonra elle yükseltme otomatik olarak yürütülür. Cihazın gücü içer<strong>de</strong>n açıldığı için, ürünün<br />
ekranı hafifçe açık olabilir. Yazılım yükseltmesi tamamlanıncaya kadar 1 saatt<strong>en</strong> uzun süre bu durum <strong>de</strong>vam e<strong>de</strong>bilir.<br />
• Alternatif Yazılım<br />
Geçerli yazılımı alternatif yazılımla <strong>de</strong>ğiştirin.<br />
❑<br />
❑<br />
HD Bağlantısı Kılavuzu<br />
Y<strong>en</strong>i HDTV’niz<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> iyi şekil<strong>de</strong> yararlanma yolları hakkında kısa bir talimat görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir. HD cihazları için bağlantı yöntemi<br />
öneriyoruz.<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong>’a Başvurun<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> Çağrı merkezini arayabilir, web sitesin gi<strong>de</strong>bilir ve ürünle ilgili bilgileri alabilirsiniz<br />
N ▲ ya da ▼düğmelerine basarak önceki veya sonraki sayfaya gi<strong>de</strong>bilirsiniz.<br />
SERVICE 2<br />
USB Sürücüsü<br />
TV Arka Paneli<br />
Türkçe - 27
Kullanımla İlgili Öneriler<br />
Teleteks Özelliği<br />
Televizyon istasyonlarının çoğu, Teletekst aracılığı ile yazılı bilgi hizmeti sunar. Teletekst hizmetinin dizin sayfasında nasıl<br />
kullanılacağıyla ilgili bilgiler bulunur. Ayrıca uzaktan kumanda düğmelerini kullanarak gereksinimlerine uygun seç<strong>en</strong>ekleri<br />
belirleyebilirsiniz.<br />
N Teleteks bilgilerinin doğru görünmesi için kanal alışının düz<strong>en</strong>li olması zorunludur. Aksi takdir<strong>de</strong> bilgiler eksik olabilir ya da bazı<br />
sayfalar görüntül<strong>en</strong>meyebilir.<br />
1 : (çıkış)<br />
Teletekst gösterimin<strong>de</strong>n çıkış.<br />
<br />
2 6 (dizin)<br />
Teletekstte gezerk<strong>en</strong> istediğiniz zaman dizin (için<strong>de</strong>kiler) sayfasına geçmek için<br />
kullanılır.<br />
1<br />
3 5 (göster)<br />
Teletekst sayfalarını kay<strong>de</strong>tmek için kullanılır.<br />
4 4 (boyut)<br />
Ekranın üst yarısında çift boyutlu harfleri görüntülemek için basın. Ekranın alt yarısı<br />
için y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n basın. Normal ekranı görüntülemek için y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n basın.<br />
5 8 (kay<strong>de</strong>t)<br />
Gizli metinleri (örneğin yarışma oyunları yanıtlarını) göstermek için kullanılır.<br />
Normal ekranı görüntülemek için y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n basın.<br />
6 / (teletekst açık/karışık)<br />
Teletekst hizmeti sağlayan kanalı seçtikt<strong>en</strong> sonra teletekst modunu etkinleştirmek<br />
için bu düğmeye basın. Teleteksti, normal yayın ekranının üzerine bindirmek için iki<br />
kez basın.<br />
7 1 (alt sayfa)<br />
Varsa alt sayfayı görüntülemek için kullanılır.<br />
8 2 (sayfa yukarı)<br />
Bir sonraki teletekst sayfasını görüntülemek için kullanılır.<br />
9 3 (sayfa aşağı)<br />
Bir önceki teletekst sayfasını görüntülemek için kullanılır.<br />
0 0 (mod)<br />
Teletekst modunu seçmek için basın (LIST/FLOF). LIST modundayk<strong>en</strong> basarsanız,<br />
Liste kay<strong>de</strong>tme moduna geçer. Liste kay<strong>de</strong>tme modunda, 8 (kay<strong>de</strong>t) düğmesine<br />
basarak teletekst sayfasını listeye kay<strong>de</strong><strong>de</strong>bilirsiniz.<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
0<br />
!<br />
@<br />
#<br />
! 9 (tut)<br />
Seçil<strong>en</strong> sayfada, otomatik olarak takip e<strong>de</strong>n başka sayfalar bağlıysa,<br />
bulunduğunuz sayfayı tutmak için kullanılır. Devam ettirmek için y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n basın.<br />
<br />
@ 7 (iptal)<br />
Sayfa aranırk<strong>en</strong> yayını göstermek için kullanılır.<br />
# R<strong>en</strong>kli düğmeler (kırmızı/yeşil/sarı/mavi)<br />
N<br />
Yayın şirketi FASTEXT sistemini kullanıyorsa, teletekst sayfasında yer alan çeşitli<br />
konuların r<strong>en</strong>kleri farklıdır ve bu konular r<strong>en</strong>kli düğmelere basılarak seçilebilir.<br />
İstediğiniz sayfaya karşılık gel<strong>en</strong> r<strong>en</strong>kli düğmeye basın. Görün<strong>en</strong> sayfa, aynı<br />
biçim<strong>de</strong> seçilebilecek diğer r<strong>en</strong>klere ayrılmış bilgiler içerir. Önceki ya da sonraki<br />
sayfayı görüntülemek için, ilgili r<strong>en</strong>kli düğmeye basın.<br />
Uzaktan kumandanın sayısal tuşlarına basarak teletekst sayfalarını doğrudan<br />
seçebilirsiniz.<br />
Türkçe - 28
Teletekst sayfaları altı kategoriye göre düz<strong>en</strong>l<strong>en</strong>miştir:<br />
Bölüm İçin<strong>de</strong>kiler<br />
A Seçil<strong>en</strong> sayfa numarası.<br />
B Yayın yapan kanalın adı.<br />
C Geçerli sayfa numarası ya da arama göstergeleri.<br />
D Tarih ve saat.<br />
E Metin.<br />
F Durum bilgileri.<br />
HIZLI METİN (FASTEXT) bilgileri.<br />
N Teleteks bilgileri çoğunlukla artarda sıralanmış bir<strong>de</strong>n çok sayfaya bölünmüştür ve<br />
bunlara:<br />
- Sayfa numarasını girerek<br />
- Liste<strong>de</strong>n bir konu seçerek<br />
- R<strong>en</strong>klere göre ayrılmış başlık seçerek (FASTEXT sistemi) erişilebilir.<br />
<br />
O<br />
Teletekst ekranından çıkmak için TV düğmesine basın.<br />
WDuvara Montaj Kitinin Özellikleri (VESA)<br />
Duvar montajınızı düz bir duvara zemine dik olarak takın.<br />
Diğer bina malzemelerine takark<strong>en</strong> lütf<strong>en</strong> <strong>en</strong> yakınızdaki bayi ile görüşün. Tavana veya eğik duvara takılırsa düşebilir ve ciddi<br />
yaralanmalara ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
Ürün Ailesi inç VESA Özellk. (A * B) Standart Vida Miktar<br />
19" ~22" 100 * 100<br />
23"~29" 200 * 100<br />
M4<br />
LCD-TV<br />
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6<br />
46"~55" 400 * 400<br />
4<br />
57"~70" 800 * 400<br />
M8<br />
PDP-TV<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
42"~ 50" 400 * 400<br />
58"~ 63" 600 * 400<br />
70" ~ 800 * 400<br />
80" ~ 1400 * 800<br />
M8 4<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Duvara montaj kitleri için yukarıdaki tabloda gösterildiği gibi standart boyutlar sağlarız.<br />
Duvara montaj kitimizi satın alırk<strong>en</strong> ayrıntılı bir montaj kılavuzu ve montaj için gerekli tüm parçalar ürünle verilir.<br />
Standart boyuttan daha uzun vidalar kullanmayın, aksi takdir<strong>de</strong> TV setinin iç kısmına zarar verebilirsiniz.<br />
VESA standardı vida özelliklerine uymayan duvar montajı için, vidaların uzunluğu özelliklere bağlı olarak <strong>de</strong>ğişebilir.<br />
VESA standardı vida özelliklerine uymayan vidalar kullanmayın.<br />
Ürüne zarar verebileceğin<strong>de</strong>n veya ürünün düşmesine, böylece yaralanmalara ne<strong>de</strong>n olabileceğin<strong>de</strong>n vidaları çok fazla<br />
sıkıştırmayın. <strong>Samsung</strong> bu tür kazalardan sorumlu <strong>de</strong>ğildir.<br />
VESA olmayan veya belirtilmemiş duvar montajı kullanıldığında veya müşteri yükleme yönergelerine uymadığında, <strong>Samsung</strong>,<br />
ürünün zarar görmesin<strong>de</strong>n veya yaralanmalardan sorumlu <strong>de</strong>ğildir.<br />
57” ve 63” mo<strong>de</strong>llerimiz VESA Özellikleri ile uyumlu <strong>de</strong>ğildir. Dolayısıyla bu mo<strong>de</strong>l için verilmiş duvara montaj kitini<br />
kullanmalısınız.<br />
Bu TV’yi takark<strong>en</strong> 15 <strong>de</strong>recelik eğimi aşmayın.<br />
Duvara Montaj Kitinizi TV’niz açıkk<strong>en</strong> kurmayın.<br />
Elektrik çarpması sonucunda kişisel yaralanmaya ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
Türkçe - 29
Duvar Askısını duvara takmadan önce hazırlık yapma<br />
Durum A. SAMSUNG Duvar Askısının takılması<br />
Durum B. Diğer şirketlerin Duvar Askısının takılması<br />
경고<br />
경고<br />
1. Duvar Askısını 15kgf•cm veya daha az tork aralığında takın. Tork belirtil<strong>en</strong> aralığın dışında olursa parçalar hasar görebilir.<br />
2. Aksesuar Kitin<strong>de</strong> <strong>Samsung</strong> TV'ye diğer şirketlerin Duvar Askısını takmak için Tutucu – Halka [2] bulunur. (Durum B)<br />
N<br />
Duvar askısını duvara takark<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>liğe vidalayın [1] .<br />
주의<br />
TV’yi Duvara Sabitleme<br />
TV’yi çeker, iter veya TV’nin üzerine çıkarsanız, TV düşebilir. Özellikle çocuklarınızın TV’ye asılmasına veya TV’nin<br />
<strong>de</strong>ngesini bozmamasına öz<strong>en</strong> gösterin; böyle bir durumda, TV <strong>de</strong>vrilebilir ve ciddi yaralanmalara veya ölüme ne<strong>de</strong>n<br />
olabilir. Güv<strong>en</strong>lik Notu’ndaki tüm güv<strong>en</strong>lik önlemlerine uyun. Birimin daha <strong>de</strong>ngeli durması için, güv<strong>en</strong>lik amacıyla<br />
aşağıdaki talimatları uygulayarak düşmeyi önleyici aygıtı takın.<br />
주의<br />
Duvar<br />
Duvar<br />
❑<br />
TV’nin düşmesini önlemek için<br />
1. Vidaları sıkıştırıcı parçalara yerleştirin ve duvara sıkı bir şekil<strong>de</strong> sabitleyin. Vidaların, duvara sağlam bir şekil<strong>de</strong> takıldıklarını<br />
onaylayın.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Duvar tipine bağlı olarak dübel gibi ek malzemelere ihtiyacınız olabilir.<br />
Gerekli sıkıştırıcı parçalar, vidalar ve bağ ürünle birlikte sağlanmadığı için, lütf<strong>en</strong> bunları ayrı olarak satın alın.<br />
2. TV’nin arkasında ortadaki vidaları çıkarın, sıkıştırıcı parçaların için<strong>de</strong>n geçirin ve daha sonra, y<strong>en</strong>i<strong>de</strong>n TV’ye takıp sıkın.<br />
N<br />
Vidalar, ürünle birlikte verilmemiş olabilir.<br />
3. TV’ye ve duvara sabitl<strong>en</strong>miş sıkıştırıcı parçaları sağlam bir bağ ile birleştirin ve daha sonra, bağı sıkı bir şekil<strong>de</strong> bağlayın.<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
TV’yi arkaya doğru düşmemesi için duvara yakın bir yere yerleştirin.<br />
Bağı, duvardaki sıkıştırıcı parçalar, TV’ye sabitl<strong>en</strong><strong>en</strong> sıkıştırıcı parçalarla aynı hizada veya daha aşağıda olacak şekil<strong>de</strong><br />
bağlayabilirsiniz.<br />
TV’yi taşımadan önce bağı çözün.<br />
4. Tüm bağlantıların uygun şekil<strong>de</strong> sabitl<strong>en</strong>diğini doğrulayın. Belirli aralıklarla bağlantılarda yorgunluk belirtisi olup olmadığını<br />
kontrol edin. Bağlantılarınızın güv<strong>en</strong>liğiyle ilgili herhangi bir şüph<strong>en</strong>iz varsa, bir kurulum uzmanıyla görüşün.<br />
Türkçe - 30
Sorun Gi<strong>de</strong>rme<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> satış sonrası servisi ile görüşme<strong>de</strong>n önce aşağıdaki basit kontrolleri yapın.<br />
Sorunu aşağıdaki talimatlarla çözemezs<strong>en</strong>iz, televizyonunuzun mo<strong>de</strong>lini ve seri numarasını kay<strong>de</strong>din ve yerel bayiinizle irtibata geçin.<br />
Ses ya da görüntü yok<br />
Resim normal ama ses yok<br />
Görüntü yok veya görüntü<br />
siyah beyaz<br />
Ses ve resim<strong>de</strong> parazit<br />
Net olmayan ya da karlı resim,<br />
bozuk ses<br />
Uzaktan kumanda doğru<br />
çalışmıyor<br />
Ekran siyah ve güç göstergesi<br />
ışığı düz<strong>en</strong>li olarak yanıp<br />
sönüyor<br />
Zarar gör<strong>en</strong> resim ekranın<br />
köşesin<strong>de</strong> görünür.<br />
‘Resets all settings to the<br />
<strong>de</strong>fault values.’ (Tüm ayarları<br />
varsayılan ilk <strong>de</strong>ğerlerine<br />
döndürür) iletisi görünür.<br />
• Güç kablosunun prize takılı olup olmadığını kontrol edin.<br />
• Cihazınızdaki düğmeye basıp basmadığınızı kontrol edin.<br />
• Resmin kontrast ve parlaklık ayarlarını kontrol edin.<br />
• Ses seviyesini kontrol edin.<br />
• Hoparlörü Seçin ayarının Harici Hoparlör olup olmadığını kontrol edin.<br />
• Ses seviyesini kontrol edin.<br />
• Uzaktan kumandadaki M MUTE düğmesine basılıp basılmadığını kontrol edin.<br />
• R<strong>en</strong>k ayarlarını <strong>de</strong>ğiştirin.<br />
• Seçilmiş yayın sisteminin doğru olup olmadığını kontrol edin.<br />
• Cihazı etkiley<strong>en</strong> elektrikle cihazı belirleyin ve uzaklaştırın.<br />
• Cihazınızı bir başka prize takın.<br />
• Ant<strong>en</strong>inizin yönünü, konumunu ve bağlantılarını kontrol edin.<br />
• Bu parazit çoğunlukla dahili ant<strong>en</strong> kullanımıyla ilgilidir.<br />
• Uzaktan kumandanın pillerini <strong>de</strong>ğiştirin.<br />
• Uzaktan kumandanın üst k<strong>en</strong>arını (iletim p<strong>en</strong>ceresini) temizleyin.<br />
• Pillerin + ve – kutuplarının doğru yerleştirildiğini kontrol edin.<br />
• Pillerin bitmemiş olduğunu kontrol edin.<br />
• Bilgisayarınızda Güç, Sinyal Kablosunu kontrol edin.<br />
• Bilgisayarın faresini hareket ettirin ya da klavye üzerin<strong>de</strong> bir düğmeye basın.<br />
• Cihazınızda (STB, DVD, vs.) şuraları kontrol edin; Güç, Sinyal Kablosu.<br />
• TV, güç yönetim sistemini kullanıyor.<br />
• Uzaktan kumandada ya da panel<strong>de</strong> Source düğmesine basın.<br />
• TV'yi kapatın ve açın.<br />
• Bazı harici aygıtlarda Ekrana Sığdır seçildiyse, zarar gör<strong>en</strong> resim ekranın köşesin<strong>de</strong><br />
görünebilir. Belirtinin ne<strong>de</strong>ni TV <strong>de</strong>ğil, harici aygıtlardır.<br />
• Bu ileti, EXIT düğmesini bir süre basılı tuttuğunuzda görüntül<strong>en</strong>ir. Ürün ayarları, fabrika<br />
varsayılanlarına sıfırlanır.<br />
Kurulum Alanının Sabitl<strong>en</strong>mesi<br />
Uygun havalandırma için, ürün ve diğer nesneler (duvar gibi) arasında gerekli mesafeyi bırakın.<br />
Buna dikkat edilmemesi ürünün dahili sıcaklığında gerçekleşecek artış ne<strong>de</strong>niyle yangına veya ürün<strong>de</strong> bir soruna ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
Ürünü şekil<strong>de</strong> gösterildiği mesafeyi bırakarak monte edin.<br />
N Bir stand veya duvar montajı kullanırk<strong>en</strong>, yalnızca <strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics tarafından sağlanan parçaları kullanın.<br />
- Başka bir üretici tarafından sağlanan parçaların kullanılması, ürünün düşmesi ne<strong>de</strong>niyle ürün<strong>de</strong> bir soruna veya<br />
yaralanmaya ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
- Başka bir üretici tarafından sağlanan parçaların kullanılması, yetersiz havalandırma ne<strong>de</strong>niyle ürünün dahili sıcaklığı<br />
artacağından ürün<strong>de</strong> bir soruna veya yangına ne<strong>de</strong>n olabilir.<br />
N Görünüm ürüne bağlı olarak <strong>de</strong>ğişiklik gösterebilir.<br />
• Ürünü bir standla monte e<strong>de</strong>rk<strong>en</strong><br />
• Ürünü bir duvar montajıyla monte e<strong>de</strong>rk<strong>en</strong><br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm 10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
10 cm<br />
Türkçe - 31
Teknik Özellikler<br />
Bu kitapçıkta veril<strong>en</strong> tanımlar ve özellikler, yalnızca bilgil<strong>en</strong>dirme amaçlı sağlanmıştır ve önce<strong>de</strong>n haber verilme<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilebilir.<br />
Mo<strong>de</strong>l Adı PS42B430 PS50B430<br />
Ekran boyutu (Çapraz) 42 inch 50 inch<br />
PC Çözünürlüğü (En iyi) 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz<br />
Ses (Çıkış) 10 W x 2 10 W x 2<br />
Boyutlar (GxDxY)<br />
Göv<strong>de</strong><br />
Standla<br />
Ağırlık¡<br />
Göv<strong>de</strong><br />
Standla<br />
Çevre Koşulları<br />
Çalışma Sıcaklığı<br />
Çalışma Nem Oranı<br />
Saklama Sıcaklığı<br />
Saklama Nem Oranı<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
1056 x 660 x 74 mm<br />
1056 x 721 x 316 mm<br />
24 kg<br />
28 kg<br />
Bu cihaz, bir Sınıf B dijital cihaz aparatıdır.<br />
Tasarım ve özellikler önce<strong>de</strong>n haber verilme<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>ğiştirilebilir.<br />
Güç kaynağı ve Güç Tüketimi için ürün üzerin<strong>de</strong>ki etikete bakın.<br />
HDMI/DVI kablo bağlantısı kullanırk<strong>en</strong>, HDMI IN 2 (DVI) jakını kullanmalısınız.<br />
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)<br />
10% to 80%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)<br />
5% to 95%, non-con<strong>de</strong>nsing<br />
1221 x 749 x 74 mm<br />
1221 x 810 x 316 mm<br />
31 kg<br />
35 kg<br />
● KULLANIM OMRU 10 YILDIR<br />
Türkçe - 32
"EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur"<br />
"This EEE is compliant with RoHS."<br />
Manufacturer: SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD<br />
12th FL., <strong>Samsung</strong> Main Bldg., 250, 2-Ka Taepyung-Ro, Seoul, Korea<br />
Tel) 82-2-727-7114<br />
LVD:<br />
EMC:<br />
KTL (Korea Testing Laboratory)<br />
222-13, Kuro-Dong, Kuro,Seoul, 152-848, Korea<br />
Tel) 82-2-860-1493<br />
Fax) 82-2-860-1482<br />
<strong>Samsung</strong> Electronics Co., Ltd.<br />
Suwon EMC Test Laboratory416 Maetan-3 Dong, Yeongtong-Ku, Suwon City,<br />
Gyeonggi-Do, Korea, 443-742<br />
Tel) 81-31-200-2185,<br />
Fax) 81-31-200-2189
ENG<br />
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipm<strong>en</strong>t)<br />
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product,<br />
accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be<br />
disposed of with other household waste at the <strong>en</strong>d of their working life. To prev<strong>en</strong>t possible harm to the <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>t or human health<br />
from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the<br />
sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their<br />
local governm<strong>en</strong>t office, for <strong>de</strong>tails of where and how they can take these items for <strong>en</strong>vironm<strong>en</strong>tally safe recycling. Business users<br />
should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories<br />
should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.<br />
FRE<br />
Les bons gestes <strong>de</strong> mise au rebut <strong>de</strong> ce produit (Déchets d’équipem<strong>en</strong>ts électriques et électroniques)<br />
(Applicable dans les pays <strong>de</strong> l’Union Europé<strong>en</strong>ne et dans d’autres pays europé<strong>en</strong>s pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit,<br />
ses accessoires ou sa docum<strong>en</strong>tation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio,<br />
câble USB, etc.) ne peuv<strong>en</strong>t être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée <strong>de</strong>s déchets prés<strong>en</strong>tant<br />
<strong>de</strong>s risques <strong>en</strong>vironnem<strong>en</strong>taux et <strong>de</strong> santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés <strong>de</strong>s autres déchets. Vous<br />
favoriserez ainsi le recyclage <strong>de</strong> la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développem<strong>en</strong>t durable. Les particuliers sont invités<br />
à contacter le magasin leur ayant v<strong>en</strong>du le produit ou à se r<strong>en</strong>seigner auprès <strong>de</strong>s autorités locales pour connaître les procédures<br />
et les points <strong>de</strong> collecte <strong>de</strong> ces produits <strong>en</strong> vue <strong>de</strong> leur recyclage. Les <strong>en</strong>treprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs<br />
fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions <strong>de</strong> leur contrat <strong>de</strong> v<strong>en</strong>te. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuv<strong>en</strong>t être jetés avec les autres<br />
déchets professionnels et commerciaux.<br />
Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgerät<strong>en</strong> (Elektroschrott)<br />
GER<br />
(In <strong>de</strong>n Län<strong>de</strong>rn <strong>de</strong>r Europäisch<strong>en</strong> Union und an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> europäisch<strong>en</strong> Län<strong>de</strong>rn mit einem separat<strong>en</strong> Sammelsystem) Die<br />
K<strong>en</strong>nzeichnung auf <strong>de</strong>m Produkt, Zubehörteil<strong>en</strong> bzw. auf <strong>de</strong>r dazugehörig<strong>en</strong> Dokum<strong>en</strong>tation gibt an, dass das Produkt und<br />
Zubehörteile (z. B. La<strong>de</strong>gerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer Leb<strong>en</strong>sdauer nicht zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit <strong>de</strong>m normal<strong>en</strong> Haushaltsmüll<br />
<strong>en</strong>tsorgt wer<strong>de</strong>n dürf<strong>en</strong>. Entsorg<strong>en</strong> Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte getr<strong>en</strong>nt von an<strong>de</strong>r<strong>en</strong> Abfäll<strong>en</strong>, um <strong>de</strong>r Umwelt bzw. <strong>de</strong>r<br />
m<strong>en</strong>schlich<strong>en</strong> Gesundheit nicht durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu scha<strong>de</strong>n. Helf<strong>en</strong> Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile<br />
fachgerecht zu <strong>en</strong>tsorg<strong>en</strong>, um die nachhaltige Wie<strong>de</strong>rverwertung von stofflich<strong>en</strong> Ressourc<strong>en</strong> zu för<strong>de</strong>rn. Private Nutzer w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n sich<br />
an <strong>de</strong>n Händler, bei <strong>de</strong>m das Produkt gekauft wur<strong>de</strong>, o<strong>de</strong>r kontaktier<strong>en</strong> die zuständig<strong>en</strong> Behör<strong>de</strong>n, um in Erfahrung zu bring<strong>en</strong>, wo<br />
Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine umweltfreundliche Entsorgung abgeb<strong>en</strong> könn<strong>en</strong>. Gewerbliche Nutzer w<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>n sich an ihr<strong>en</strong><br />
Lieferant<strong>en</strong> und geh<strong>en</strong> nach <strong>de</strong>n Bedingung<strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong>s Verkaufsvertrags vor. Dieses Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürf<strong>en</strong> nicht<br />
zusamm<strong>en</strong> mit an<strong>de</strong>rem Gewerbemüll <strong>en</strong>tsorgt wer<strong>de</strong>n.<br />
DUT<br />
Correcte verwij<strong>de</strong>ring van dit product (elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur)<br />
Dit merktek<strong>en</strong> op het product, <strong>de</strong> accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product <strong>en</strong> zijn elektronische accessoires<br />
(bv. la<strong>de</strong>r, headset, USB-kabel) niet met an<strong>de</strong>r huishou<strong>de</strong>lijk afval verwij<strong>de</strong>rd mog<strong>en</strong> wor<strong>de</strong>n aan het ein<strong>de</strong> van hun gebruiksduur.<br />
Om mogelijke scha<strong>de</strong> aan het milieu of <strong>de</strong> m<strong>en</strong>selijke gezondheid door ongecontroleer<strong>de</strong> afvalverwij<strong>de</strong>ring te voorkom<strong>en</strong>, moet u<br />
<strong>de</strong>ze artikel<strong>en</strong> van an<strong>de</strong>re soort<strong>en</strong> afval schei<strong>de</strong>n <strong>en</strong> op e<strong>en</strong> verantwoor<strong>de</strong> manier recycl<strong>en</strong>, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van<br />
materiaalbronn<strong>en</strong> wordt bevor<strong>de</strong>rd. Huishou<strong>de</strong>lijke gebruikers moet<strong>en</strong> contact opnem<strong>en</strong> met <strong>de</strong> winkel waar ze dit product hebb<strong>en</strong><br />
gekocht of met <strong>de</strong> geme<strong>en</strong>te waar ze won<strong>en</strong> om te vernem<strong>en</strong> waar <strong>en</strong> hoe ze <strong>de</strong>ze artikel<strong>en</strong> milieuvri<strong>en</strong><strong>de</strong>lijk kunn<strong>en</strong> lat<strong>en</strong> recycl<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Zakelijke gebruikers moet<strong>en</strong> contact opnem<strong>en</strong> met hun leverancier <strong>en</strong> <strong>de</strong> algem<strong>en</strong>e voorwaar<strong>de</strong>n van <strong>de</strong> koopovere<strong>en</strong>komst nalez<strong>en</strong>.<br />
Dit product <strong>en</strong> zijn elektronische accessoires mog<strong>en</strong> niet met an<strong>de</strong>r bedrijfsafval voor verwij<strong>de</strong>ring wor<strong>de</strong>n gem<strong>en</strong>gd.<br />
Corretto smaltim<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>l prodotto (rifiuti elettrici ed elettronici)<br />
ITA<br />
(Applicabile nell’Unione Europea e in altri paesi europei con sistema di raccolta differ<strong>en</strong>ziata) Il marchio riportato sul prodotto, sugli<br />
accessori o sulla docum<strong>en</strong>tazione indica che il prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici (quali caricabatterie, cuffia e cavo USB)<br />
non <strong>de</strong>vono essere smaltiti con altri rifiuti domestici al termine <strong>de</strong>l ciclo di vita. Per evitare ev<strong>en</strong>tuali danni all’ambi<strong>en</strong>te o alla salute<br />
causati dall’inopportuno smaltim<strong>en</strong>to <strong>de</strong>i rifiuti, si invita l’ut<strong>en</strong>te a separare il prodotto e i sud<strong>de</strong>tti accessori da altri tipi di rifiuti e di<br />
riciclarli in maniera responsabile per favorire il riutilizzo sost<strong>en</strong>ibile <strong>de</strong>lle risorse materiali. Gli ut<strong>en</strong>ti domestici sono invitati a contattare<br />
il riv<strong>en</strong>ditore presso il quale è stato acquistato il prodotto o l’ufficio locale preposto per tutte le informazioni relative alla raccolta<br />
differ<strong>en</strong>ziata e al riciclaggio per questo tipo di materiali. Gli ut<strong>en</strong>ti azi<strong>en</strong>dali sono invitati a contattare il proprio fornitore e verificare i<br />
termini e le condizioni <strong>de</strong>l contratto di acquisto. Questo prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici non <strong>de</strong>vono essere smaltiti unitam<strong>en</strong>te<br />
ad altri rifiuti commerciali.<br />
SPA<br />
Eliminación correcta <strong>de</strong> este producto (Residuos <strong>de</strong> aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)<br />
(Aplicable <strong>en</strong> la Unión Europea y <strong>en</strong> países europeos con sistemas <strong>de</strong> recogida selectiva <strong>de</strong> residuos) La pres<strong>en</strong>cia <strong>de</strong> este símbolo<br />
<strong>en</strong> el producto, accesorios o material informativo que lo acompañan, indica que al finalizar su vida útil ni el producto ni sus accesorios<br />
electrónicos (como el cargador, cascos, cable USB) <strong>de</strong>berán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. Para evitar los posibles<br />
daños al medio ambi<strong>en</strong>te o a la salud humana que repres<strong>en</strong>ta la eliminación incontrolada <strong>de</strong> residuos, separe estos productos <strong>de</strong><br />
otros tipos <strong>de</strong> residuos y recíclelos correctam<strong>en</strong>te. De esta forma se promueve la reutilización sost<strong>en</strong>ible <strong>de</strong> recursos materiales. Los<br />
usuarios particulares pue<strong>de</strong>n contactar con el establecimi<strong>en</strong>to don<strong>de</strong> adquirieron el producto o con las autorida<strong>de</strong>s locales pertin<strong>en</strong>tes<br />
para informarse sobre cómo y dón<strong>de</strong> pue<strong>de</strong>n llevarlo para que sea sometido a un reciclaje ecológico y seguro. Los usuarios<br />
comerciales pue<strong>de</strong>n contactar con su proveedor y consultar las condiciones <strong>de</strong>l contrato <strong>de</strong> compra. Este producto y sus accesorios<br />
electrónicos no <strong>de</strong>b<strong>en</strong> eliminarse junto a otros residuos comerciales.<br />
POR<br />
Eliminação Correcta Deste Produto (Resíduos <strong>de</strong> Equipam<strong>en</strong>tos Eléctricos e Electrónicos)<br />
Esta marca - apres<strong>en</strong>tada no produto, nos acessórios ou na literatura – indica que o produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos (por<br />
exemplo, o carregador, o auricular, o cabo USB) não <strong>de</strong>verão ser eliminados juntam<strong>en</strong>te com os resíduos domésticos no final do<br />
seu período <strong>de</strong> vida útil. Para impedir danos ao ambi<strong>en</strong>te ou à saú<strong>de</strong> humana causados pela eliminação incontrolada <strong>de</strong> resíduos,<br />
<strong>de</strong>verá separar estes equipam<strong>en</strong>tos <strong>de</strong> outros tipos <strong>de</strong> resíduos e reciclá-los <strong>de</strong> forma responsável, para promover uma reutilização<br />
sust<strong>en</strong>tável dos recursos materi<strong>ais</strong>. Os utilizadores domésticos <strong>de</strong>verão contactar o estabelecim<strong>en</strong>to on<strong>de</strong> adquiriram este produto ou<br />
as <strong>en</strong>tida<strong>de</strong>s ofici<strong>ais</strong> loc<strong>ais</strong> para obterem informações sobre on<strong>de</strong> e <strong>de</strong> que forma po<strong>de</strong>m <strong>en</strong>tregar estes equipam<strong>en</strong>tos para permitir<br />
efectuar uma reciclagem segura em termos ambi<strong>en</strong>t<strong>ais</strong>. Os utilizadores profission<strong>ais</strong> <strong>de</strong>verão contactar o seu fornecedor e consultar<br />
os termos e condições do contrato <strong>de</strong> compra. Este produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos não <strong>de</strong>verão ser misturados com<br />
outros resíduos comerci<strong>ais</strong> para eliminação.<br />
Ustrezno odstranjevanje tega iz<strong>de</strong>lka (odpadna električna in elektronska oprema)<br />
Oznaka na iz<strong>de</strong>lku, dodatni opremi ali dokum<strong>en</strong>taciji pom<strong>en</strong>i, da iz<strong>de</strong>lka in njegove elektronske dodatne opreme (npr. električni<br />
polnilnik, slušalke, kabel USB) ob koncu dobe uporabe ni dovolj<strong>en</strong>o odvreči med gospodinjske odpadke. Te iz<strong>de</strong>lke ločite od drugih<br />
vrst odpadkov in jih odgovorno predajte v recikliranje ter tako spodbudite trajnostno vnovično uporabo materialnih virov. Tako boste<br />
preprečili morebitno tveganje za okolje ali zdravje ljudi zaradi n<strong>en</strong>adzorovanega odstranjevanja odpadkov. Uporabniki v gospodinjstvih<br />
naj se za podrobnosti o tem, kam in kako lahko te iz<strong>de</strong>lke predajo v okolju prijazno recikliranje, obrnejo na trgovino, kjer so iz<strong>de</strong>lek<br />
kupili, ali na krajevni upravni organ. Poslovni uporabniki naj se obrnejo na dobavitelja in preverijo pogoje kupne pogodbe. Tega iz<strong>de</strong>lka<br />
in njegove elektronske dodatne opreme pri odstranjevanju ni dovolj<strong>en</strong>o mešati z drugimi gospodarskimi odpadki.<br />
SLN